Commit a793c75

@@ -0,0 +1,1 @@
+COG{175ae80e-051e-467f-8b0d-ee224af54574}

@@ -0,0 +1,26856 @@
+      PREFACE OF SNORRE STURLASON.
+      In this book I have had old stories written down, as I have heard them
+      told by intelligent people, concerning chiefs who have have held dominion
+      in the northern countries, and who spoke the Danish tongue; and also
+      concerning some of their family branches, according to what has been told
+      me. Some of this is found in ancient family registers, in which the
+      pedigrees of kings and other personages of high birth are reckoned up, and
+      part is written down after old songs and ballads which our forefathers had
+      for their amusement. Now, although we cannot just say what truth there may
+      be in these, yet we have the certainty that old and wise men held them to
+      be true.
+      Thjodolf of Hvin was the skald of Harald Harfager, and he composed a poem
+      for King Rognvald the Mountain-high, which is called "Ynglingatal." This
+      Rognvald was a son of Olaf Geirstadalf, the brother of King Halfdan the
+      Black. In this poem thirty of his forefathers are reckoned up, and the
+      death and burial-place of each are given. He begins with Fjolner, a son of
+      Yngvefrey, whom the Swedes, long after his time, worshipped and sacrificed
+      to, and from whom the race or family of the Ynglings take their name.
+      Eyvind Skaldaspiller also reckoned up the ancestors of Earl Hakon the
+      Great in a poem called "Haleygjatal", composed about Hakon; and therein he
+      mentions Saeming, a son of Yngvefrey, and he likewise tells of the death
+      and funeral rites of each. The lives and times of the Yngling race were
+      written from Thjodolf's relation enlarged afterwards by the accounts of
+      intelligent people.
+      As to funeral rites, the earliest age is called the Age of Burning;
+      because all the dead were consumed by fire, and over their ashes were
+      raised standing stones. But after Frey was buried under a cairn at Upsala,
+      many chiefs raised cairns, as commonly as stones, to the memory of their
+      relatives.
+      The Age of Cairns began properly in Denmark after Dan Milkillate had
+      raised for himself a burial cairn, and ordered that he should be buried in
+      it on his death, with his royal ornaments and armour, his horse and
+      saddle-furniture, and other valuable goods; and many of his descendants
+      followed his example. But the burning of the dead continued, long after
+      that time, to be the custom of the Swedes and Northmen. Iceland was
+      occupied in the time that Harald Harfager was the King of Norway. There
+      were skalds in Harald's court whose poems the people know by heart even at
+      the present day, together with all the songs about the kings who have
+      ruled in Norway since his time; and we rest the foundations of our story
+      principally upon the songs which were sung in the presence of the chiefs
+      themselves or of their sons, and take all to be true that is found in such
+      poems about their feats and battles: for although it be the fashion with
+      skalds to praise most those in whose presence they are standing, yet no
+      one would dare to relete to a chief what he, and all those who heard it,
+      knew to be a false and imaginary, not a true account of his deeds; because
+      that would be mockery, not praise.
+      OF THE PRIEST ARE FRODE
+      The priest Are Frode (the learned), a son of Thorgils the son of Geller,
+      was the first man in this country who wrote down in the Norse language
+      narratives of events both old and new. In the beginning of his book he
+      wrote principally about the first settlements in Iceland, the laws and
+      government, and next of the lagmen, and how long each had administered the
+      law; and he reckoned the years at first, until the time when Christianity
+      was introduced into Iceland, and afterwards reckoned from that to his own
+      times. To this he added many other subjects, such as the lives and times
+      of kings of Norway and Denmark, and also of England; beside accounts of
+      great events which have taken place in this country itself. His narratives
+      are considered by many men of knowledge to be the most remarkable of all;
+      because he was a man of good understanding, and so old that his birth was
+      as far back as the year after Harald Sigurdson's fall. He wrote, as he
+      himself says, the lives and times of the kings of Norway from the report
+      of Od Kolson, a grandson of Hal of Sida. Od again took his information
+      from Thorgeir Afradskol, who was an intelligent man, and so old that when
+      Earl Hakon the Great was killed he was dwelling at Nidarnes -the same
+      place at which King Olaf Trygvason afterwards laid the foundation of the
+      merchant town of Nidaros (i.e., Throndhjem) which is now there. The priest
+      Are came, when seven years old, to Haukadal to Hal Thorarinson, and was
+      there fourteen years. Hal was a man of great knowledge and of excellent
+      memory; and he could even remember being baptized, when he was three years
+      old, by the priest Thanghrand, the year before Christianity was
+      established by law in Iceland. Are was twelve years of age when Bishop
+      Isleif died, and at his death eighty years had elapsed since the fall of
+      Olaf Trygvason. Hal died nine years later than Bishop Isleif, and had
+      attained nearly the age of ninety-four years. Hal had traded between the
+      two countries, and had enjoyed intercourse with King Olaf the Saint, by
+      which he had gained greatly in reputation, and he had become well
+      acquainted with the kingdom of Norway. He had fixed his residence in
+      Haukadal when he was thirty years of age, and he had dwelt there
+      sixty-four years, as Are tells us. Teit, a son of Bishop Isleif, was
+      fostered in the house of Hal at Haukadal, and afterwards dwelt there
+      himself. He taught Are the priest, and gave him information about many
+      circumstances which Are afterwards wrote down. Are also got many a piece
+      of information from Thurid, a daughter of the gode Snorre. She was wise
+      and intelligent, and remembered her father Snorre, who was nearly
+      thirty-five years of age when Christianity was introduced into Iceland,
+      and died a year after King Olaf the Saint's fall. So it is not wonderful
+      that Are the priest had good information about ancient events both here in
+      Iceland, and abroad, being a man anxious for information, intelligent and
+      of excellent memory, and having besides learned much from old intelligent
+      persons. But the songs seem to me most reliable if they are sung
+      correctly, and judiciously interpreted.
+      HALFDAN THE BLACK SAGA.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      Of this saga there are other versions found in "Fagrskinna" and in
+      "Flateyjarbok". The "Flateyjarbok" version is to a great extent a copy of
+      Snorre. The story about Halfdan's dream is found both in "Fagrskinna" and
+      in "Flateyjarbok". The probability is that both Snorre and the author of
+      "Fagrskinna" must have transcribed the same original text. -Ed.
+      1. HALFDAN FIGHTS WITH GANDALF AND SIGTRYG.
+      Halfdan was a year old when his father was killed, and his mother Asa set
+      off immediately with him westwards to Agder, and set herself there in the
+      kingdom which her father Harald had possessed. Halfdan grew up there, and
+      soon became stout and strong; and, by reason of his black hair, was called
+      Halfdan the Black. When he was eighteen years old he took his kingdom in
+      Agder, and went immediately to Vestfold, where he divided that kingdom, as
+      before related, with his brother Olaf. The same autumn he went with an
+      army to Vingulmark against King Gandalf. They had many battles, and
+      sometimes one, sometimes the other gained the victory; but at last they
+      agreed that Halfdan should have half of Vingulmark, as his father Gudrod
+      had had it before. Then King Halfdan proceeded to Raumarike, and subdued
+      it. King Sigtryg, son of King Eystein, who then had his residence in
+      Hedemark, and who had subdued Raumarike before, having heard of this, came
+      out with his army against King Halfdan, and there was great battle, in
+      which King Halfdan was victorious; and just as King Sigtryg and his troops
+      were turning about to fly, an arrow struck him under the left arm, and he
+      fell dead. Halfdan then laid the whole of Raumarike under his power. King
+      Eystein's second son, King Sigtryg's brother, was also called Eystein, and
+      was then king in Hedemark. As soon as Halfdan had returned to Vestfold,
+      King Eystein went out with his army to Raumarike, and laid the whole
+      country in subjection to him.
+      2. BATTLE BETWEEN HALFDAN AND EYSTEIN.
+      When King Halfdan heard of these disturbances in Raumarike, he again
+      gathered his army together; and went out against King Eystein. A battle
+      took place between them, and Halfdan gained the victory, and Eystein fled
+      up to Hedemark, pursued by Halfdan. Another battle took place, in which
+      Halfdan was again victorious; and Eystein fled northwards, up into the
+      Dales to the herse Gudbrand. There he was strengthened with new people,
+      and in winter he went towards Hedemark, and met Halfdan the Black upon a
+      large island which lies in the Mjosen lake. There a great battle was
+      fought, and many people on both sides were slain, but Halfdan won the
+      victory. There fell Guthorm, the son of the herse Gudbrand, who was one of
+      the finest men in the Uplands. Then Eystein fled north up the valley, and
+      sent his relation Halvard Skalk to King Halfdan to beg for peace. On
+      consideration of their relationship, King Halfdan gave King Eystein half
+      of Hedemark, which he and his relations had held before; but kept to
+      himself Thoten, and the district called Land. He likewise appropriated to
+      himself Hadeland, and thus became a mighty king.
+      3. HALFDAN'S MARRIAGE
+      Halfdan the Black got a wife called Ragnhild, a daughter of Harald Gulskeg
+      (Goldbeard), who was a king in Sogn. They had a son, to whom Harald gave
+      his own name; and the boy was brought up in Sogn, by his mother's father,
+      King Harald. Now when this Harald had lived out his days nearly, and was
+      become weak, having no son, he gave his dominions to his daughter's son
+      Harald, and gave him his title of king; and he died soon after. The same
+      winter his daughter Ragnhild died; and the following spring the young
+      Harald fell sick and died at ten years of age. As soon as Halfdan the
+      Black heard of his son's death, he took the road northwards to Sogn with a
+      great force, and was well received. He claimed the heritage and dominion
+      after his son; and no opposition being made, he took the whole kingdom.
+      Earl Atle Mjove (the Slender), who was a friend of King Halfdan, came to
+      him from Gaular; and the king set him over the Sogn district, to judge in
+      the country according to the country's laws, and collect scat upon the
+      king's account. Thereafter King Halfdan proceeded to his kingdom in the
+      Uplands.
+      4. HALFDAN'S STRIFE WITH GANDALF'S SONS.
+      In autumn, King Halfdan proceeded to Vingulmark. One night when he was
+      there in guest quarters, it happened that about midnight a man came to him
+      who had been on the watch on horseback, and told him a war force was come
+      near to the house. The king instantly got up, ordered his men to arm
+      themselves, and went out of the house and drew them up in battle order. At
+      the same moment, Gandalf's sons, Hysing and Helsing, made their appearance
+      with a large army. There was a great battle; but Halfdan being overpowered
+      by the numbers of people fled to the forest, leaving many of his men on
+      this spot. His foster-father, Olver Spake (the Wise), fell here. The
+      people now came in swarms to King Halfdan, and he advanced to seek
+      Gandalf's sons. They met at Eid, near Lake Oieren, and fought there.
+      Hysing and Helsing fell, and their brother Hake saved himself by flight.
+      King Halfdan then took possession of the whole of Vingulmark, and Hake
+      fled to Alfheimar.
+      5. HALFDAN'S MARRIAGE WITH HJORT'S DAUGHTER.
+      Sigurd Hjort was the name of a king in Ringerike, who was stouter and
+      stronger than any other man, and his equal could not be seen for a
+      handsome appearance. His father was Helge Hvasse (the Sharp); and his
+      mother was Aslaug, a daughter of Sigurd the worm-eyed, who again was a son
+      of Ragnar Lodbrok. It is told of Sigurd that when he was only twelve years
+      old he killed in single combat the berserk Hildebrand, and eleven others
+      of his comrades; and many are the deeds of manhood told of him in a long
+      saga about his feats. Sigurd had two children, one of whom was a daughter,
+      called Ragnhild, then twenty years of age, and an excellent brisk girl.
+      Her brother Guthorm was a youth. It is related in regard to Sigurd's death
+      that he had a custom of riding out quite alone in the uninhabited forest
+      to hunt the wild beasts that are hurtful to man, and he was always very
+      eager at this sport. One day he rode out into the forest as usual, and
+      when he had ridden a long way he came out at a piece of cleared land near
+      to Hadeland. There the berserk Hake came against him with thirty men, and
+      they fought. Sigurd Hjort fell there, after killing twelve of Hake's men;
+      and Hake himself lost one hand, and had three other wounds. Then Hake and
+      his men rode to Sigurd's house, where they took his daughter Ragnhild and
+      her brother Guthorm, and carried them, with much property and valuable
+      articles, home to Hadeland, where Hake had many great farms. He ordered a
+      feast to be prepared, intending to hold his wedding with Ragnhild; but the
+      time passed on account of his wounds, which healed slowly; and the berserk
+      Hake of Hadeland had to keep his bed, on account of his wounds, all the
+      autumn and beginning of winter. Now King Halfdan was in Hedemark at the
+      Yule entertainments when he heard this news; and one morning early, when
+      the king was dressed, he called to him Harek Gand, and told him to go over
+      to Hadeland, and bring him Ragnhild, Sigurd Hjort's daughter. Harek got
+      ready with a hundred men, and made his journey so that they came over the
+      lake to Hake's house in the grey of the morning, and beset all the doors
+      and stairs of the places where the house-servants slept. Then they broke
+      into the sleeping-room where Hake slept, took Ragnhild, with her brother
+      Guthorm, and all the goods that were there, and set fire to the
+      house-servants' place, and burnt all the people in it. Then they covered
+      over a magnificent waggon, placed Ragnhild and Guthorm in it, and drove
+      down upon the ice. Hake got up and went after them a while; but when he
+      came to the ice on the lake, he turned his sword-hilt to the ground and
+      let himself fall upon the point, so that the sword went through him. He
+      was buried under a mound on the banks of the lake. When King Halfdan, who
+      was very quick of sight, saw the party returning over the frozen lake, and
+      with a covered waggon, he knew that their errand was accomplished
+      according to his desire. Thereupon he ordered the tables to be set out,
+      and sent people all round in the neighbourhood to invite plenty of guests;
+      and the same day there was a good feast which was also Halfdan's
+      marriage-feast with Ragnhild, who became a great queen. Ragnhild's mother
+      was Thorny, a daughter of Klakharald king in Jutland, and a sister of
+      Thrye Dannebod who was married to the Danish king, Gorm the Old, who then
+      ruled over the Danish dominions.
+      6. OF RAGNHILD'S DREAM.
+      Ragnhild, who was wise and intelligent, dreamt great dreams. She dreamt,
+      for one, that she was standing out in her herb-garden, and she took a
+      thorn out of her shift; but while she was holding the thorn in her hand it
+      grew so that it became a great tree, one end of which struck itself down
+      into the earth, and it became firmly rooted; and the other end of the tree
+      raised itself so high in the air that she could scarcely see over it, and
+      it became also wonderfully thick. The under part of the tree was red with
+      blood, but the stem upwards was beautifully green and the branches white
+      as snow. There were many and great limbs to the tree, some high up, others
+      low down; and so vast were the tree's branches that they seemed to her to
+      cover all Norway, and even much more.
+      7. OF HALFDAN'S DREAM.
+      King Halfdan never had dreams, which appeared to him an extraordinary
+      circumstance; and he told it to a man called Thorleif Spake (the Wise),
+      and asked him what his advice was about it. Thorleif said that what he
+      himself did, when he wanted to have any revelation by dream, was to take
+      his sleep in a swine-sty, and then it never failed that he had dreams. The
+      king did so, and the following dream was revealed to him. He thought he
+      had the most beautiful hair, which was all in ringlets; some so long as to
+      fall upon the ground, some reaching to the middle of his legs, some to his
+      knees, some to his loins or the middle of his sides, some to his neck, and
+      some were only as knots springing from his head. These ringlets were of
+      various colours; but one ringlet surpassed all the others in beauty,
+      lustre, and size. This dream he told to Thorleif, who interpreted it thus: -There
+      should be a great posterity from him, and his descendants should rule over
+      countries with great, but not all with equally great, honour; but one of
+      his race should be more celebrated than all the others. It was the opinion
+      of people that this ringlet betokened King Olaf the Saint.
+      King Halfdan was a wise man, a man of truth and uprightness -who made
+      laws, observed them himself, and obliged others to observe them. And that
+      violence should not come in place of the laws, he himself fixed the number
+      of criminal acts in law, and the compensations, mulcts, or penalties, for
+      each case, according to every one's birth and dignity (1).
+      Queen Ragnhild gave birth to a son, and water was poured over him, and the
+      name of Harald given him, and he soon grew stout and remarkably handsome.
+      As he grew up he became very expert at all feats, and showed also a good
+      understanding. He was much beloved by his mother, but less so by his
+      father.
+   ENDNOTES:
+(1) The penalty, compensation, or manbod for every injury, due
+     the party injured, or to his family and next of kin if the
+     injury was the death or premeditated murder of the party,
+     appears to have been fixed for every rank and condition,
+     from the murder of the king down to the maiming or beating a
+     man's cattle or his slave.  A man for whom no compensation
+     was due was a dishonored person, or an outlaw.  It appears
+     to have been optional with the injured party, or his kin if
+     he had been killed, to take the mulct or compensation, or to
+     refuse it, and wait for an opportunity of taking vengeance
+     for the injury on the party who inflicted it, or on his kin.
+     A part of each mulct or compensation was due to the king;
+     and, these fines or penalties appear to have constituted a
+     great proportion of the king's revenues, and to have been
+     settled in the Things held in every district for
+     administering the law with the lagman. -L.
+      8. HALFDAN'S MEAT VANISHES AT A FEAST
+      King Halfdan was at a Yule-feast in Hadeland, where a wonderful thing
+      happened one Yule evening. When the great number of guests assembled were
+      going to sit down to table, all the meat and all the ale disappeared from
+      the table. The king sat alone very confused in mind; all the others set
+      off, each to his home, in consternation. That the king might come to some
+      certainty about what had occasioned this event, he ordered a Fin to be
+      seized who was particularly knowing, and tried to force him to disclose
+      the truth; but however much he tortured the man, he got nothing out of
+      him. The Fin sought help particularly from Harald, the king's son, and
+      Harald begged for mercy for him, but in vain. Then Harald let him escape
+      against the king's will, and accompanied the man himself. On their journey
+      they came to a place where the man's chief had a great feast, and it
+      appears they were well received there. When they had been there until
+      spring, the chief said, "Thy father took it much amiss that in winter I
+      took some provisions from him, -now I will repay it to thee by a
+      joyful piece of news: thy father is dead; and now thou shalt return home,
+      and take possession of the whole kingdom which he had, and with it thou
+      shalt lay the whole kingdom of Norway under thee."
+      9. HALFDAN S DEATH.
+      Halfdan the Black was driving from a feast in Hadeland, and it so happened
+      that his road lay over the lake called Rand. It was in spring, and there
+      was a great thaw. They drove across the bight called Rykinsvik, where in
+      winter there had been a pond broken in the ice for cattle to drink at, and
+      where the dung had fallen upon the ice the thaw had eaten it into holes.
+      Now as the king drove over it the ice broke, and King Halfdan and many
+      with him perished. He was then forty years old. He had been one of the
+      most fortunate kings in respect of good seasons. The people thought so
+      much of him, that when his death was known and his body was floated to
+      Ringerike to bury it there, the people of most consequence from Raumarike,
+      Vestfold, and Hedemark came to meet it. All desired to take the body with
+      them to bury it in their own district, and they thought that those who got
+      it would have good crops to expect. At last it was agreed to divide the
+      body into four parts. The head was laid in a mound at Stein in Ringerike,
+      and each of the others took his part home and laid it in a mound; and
+      these have since been called Halfdan's Mounds.
+      HARALD HARFAGER'S SAGA.
+      1. HARALD'S STRIFE WITH HAKE AND HIS FATHER GANDALF.
+      Harald (1) was but ten years old when he succeeded his father (Halfdan the
+      Black). He became a stout, strong, and comely man, and withal prudent and
+      manly. His mother's brother, Guthorm, was leader of the hird, at the head
+      of the government, and commander ('hertogi') of the army. After Halfdan
+      the Black's death, many chiefs coveted the dominions he had left. Among
+      these King Gandalf was the first; then Hogne and Frode, sons of Eystein,
+      king of Hedemark; and also Hogne Karuson came from Ringerike. Hake, the
+      son of Gandalf, began with an expedition of 300 men against Vestfold,
+      marched by the main road through some valleys, and expected to come
+      suddenly upon King Harald; while his father Gandalf sat at home with his
+      army, and prepared to cross over the fiord into Vestfold. When Duke
+      Guthorm heard of this he gathered an army, and marched up the country with
+      King Harald against Hake. They met in a valley, in which they fought a
+      great battle, and King Harald was victorious; and there fell King Hake and
+      most of his people. The place has since been called Hakadale. Then King
+      Harald and Duke Guthorm turned back, but they found King Gandalf had come
+      to Vestfold. The two armies marched against each other, and met, and had a
+      great battle; and it ended in King Gandalf flying, after leaving most of
+      his men dead on the spot, and in that state he came back to his kingdom.
+      Now when the sons of King Eystein in Hedemark heard the news, they
+      expected the war would come upon them, and they sent a message to Hogne
+      Karuson and to Herse Gudbrand, and appointed a meeting with them at
+      Ringsaker in Hedemark.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The first twenty chapters of this saga refer to Harald's
+     youth and his conquest of Norway.  This portion of the saga
+     is of great importance to the Icelanders, as the settlement
+     of their Isle was a result of Harald's wars.  The second
+     part of the saga (chaps. 21-46) treats of the disputes
+     between Harald's sons, of the jarls of Orkney, and of the
+     jarls of More.  With this saga we enter the domain of
+     history. -Ed.
+      2. KING HARALD OVERCOMES FIVE KINGS.
+      After the battle King Harald and Guthorm turned back, and went with all
+      the men they could gather through the forests towards the Uplands. They
+      found out where the Upland kings had appointed their meeting-place, and
+      came there about the time of midnight, without the watchmen observing them
+      until their army was before the door of the house in which Hogne Karuson
+      was, as well as that in which Gudbrand slept. They set fire to both
+      houses; but King Eystein's two sons slipped out with their men, and fought
+      for a while, until both Hogne and Frode fell. After the fall of these four
+      chiefs, King Harald, by his relation Guthorm's success and powers, subdued
+      Hedemark, Ringerike, Gudbrandsdal, Hadeland, Thoten, Raumarike, and the
+      whole northern part of Vingulmark. King Harald and Guthorm had thereafter
+      war with King Gandalf, and fought several battles with him; and in the
+      last of them King Gandalf was slain, and King Harald took the whole of his
+      kingdom as far south as the river Raum.
+      3. OF GYDA, DAUGHTER OF EIRIE.
+      King Harald sent his men to a girl called Gyda, daughter of King Eirik of
+      Hordaland, who was brought up as foster-child in the house of a great
+      bonde in Valdres. The king wanted her for his concubine; for she was a
+      remarkably handsome girl, but of high spirit withal. Now when the
+      messengers came there, and delivered their errand to the girl, she
+      answered, that she would not throw herself away even to take a king for
+      her husband, who had no greater kingdom to rule over than a few districts.
+      "And methinks," said she, "it is wonderful that no king here in Norway
+      will make the whole country subject to him, in the same way as Gorm the
+      Old did in Denmark, or Eirik at Upsala." The messengers thought her answer
+      was dreadfully haughty, and asked what she thought would come of such an
+      answer; for Harald was so mighty a man, that his invitation was good
+      enough for her. But although she had replied to their errand differently
+      from what they wished, they saw no chance, on this occasion, of taking her
+      with them against her will; so they prepared to return. When they were
+      ready, and the people followed them out, Gyda said to the messengers, "Now
+      tell to King Harald these my words. I will only agree to be his lawful
+      wife upon the condition that he shall first, for my sake, subject to
+      himself the whole of Norway, so that he may rule over that kingdom as
+      freely and fully as King Eirik over the Swedish dominions, or King Gorm
+      over Denmark; for only then, methinks, can he be called the king of a
+      people."
+      4. KING HARALD'S VOW.
+      Now came the messengers back to King Harald, bringing him the words of the
+      girl, and saying she was so bold and foolish that she well deserved that
+      the king should send a greater troop of people for her, and inflict on her
+      some disgrace. Then answered the king, "This girl has not spoken or done
+      so much amiss that she should be punished, but rather she should be
+      thanked for her words. She has reminded me," said he, "of something which
+      it appears to me wonderful I did not think of before. And now," added he,
+      "I make the solemn vow, and take God to witness, who made me and rules
+      over all things, that never shall I clip or comb my hair until I have
+      subdued the whole of Norway, with scat (1), and duties, and domains; or if
+      not, have died in the attempt." Guthorm thanked the king warmly for his
+      vow; adding, that it was royal work to fulfil royal words.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Scat was a land-tax, paid to the king in money, malt,
+     meal, or flesh-meat, from all lands, and was adjudged by the Thing
+     to each king upon his accession, and being proposed and
+     accepted as king.
+      5. THE BATTLE IN ORKADAL.
+      After this the two relations gather together a great force, and prepare
+      for an expedition to the Uplands, and northwards up the valley
+      (Gudbrandsdal), and north over Dovrefjeld; and when the king came down to
+      the inhabited land he ordered all the men to be killed, and everything
+      wide around to be delivered to the flames. And when the people came to
+      know this, they fled every one where he could; some down the country to
+      Orkadal, some to Gaulardal, some to the forests. But some begged for
+      peace, and obtained it, on condition of joining the king and becoming his
+      men. He met no opposition until he came to Orkadal. There a crowd of
+      people had assembled, and he had his first battle with a king called
+      Gryting. Harald won the victory, and King Gryting was made prisoner, and
+      most of his people killed. He took service himself under the king, and
+      swore fidelity to him. Thereafter all the people in Orkadal district went
+      under King Harald, and became his men.
+      6. KING HARALD S LAWS FOR LAND PROPERTY.
+      King Harald made this law over all the lands he conquered, that all the
+      udal property should belong to him; and that the bondes, both great and
+      small, should pay him land dues for their possessions. Over every district
+      he set an earl to judge according to the law of the land and to justice,
+      and also to collect the land dues and the fines; and for this each earl
+      received a third part of the dues, and services, and fines, for the
+      support of his table and other expenses. Each earl had under him four or
+      more herses, each of whom had an estate of twenty marks yearly income
+      bestowed on him and was bound to support twenty men-at-arms, and the earl
+      sixty men, at their own expenses. The king had increased the land dues and
+      burdens so much, that each of his earls had greater power and income than
+      the kings had before; and when that became known at Throndhjem, many great
+      men joined the king and took his service.
+      7. BATTLE IN GAULARDAL.
+      It is told that Earl Hakon Grjotgardson came to King Harald from Yrjar,
+      and brought a great crowd of men to his service. Then King Harald went
+      into Gaulardal, and had a great battle, in which he slew two kings, and
+      conquered their dominions; and these were Gaulardal district and Strind
+      district. He gave Earl Hakon Strind district to rule over as earl. King
+      Harald then proceeded to Stjoradal, and had a third battle, in which he
+      gained the victory, and took that district also. There upon the Throndhjem
+      people assembled, and four kings met together with their troops. The one
+      ruled over Veradal, the second over Skaun, third over the Sparbyggja
+      district, and the fourth over Eyin Idre (Inderoen); and this latter had
+      also Eyna district. These four kings marched with their men against King
+      Harald, but he won the battle; and some of these kings fell, and some
+      fled. In all, King Harald fought at the least eight battles, and slew
+      eight kings, in the Throndhjem district, and laid the whole of it under
+      him.
+      8. HARALD SEIZES NAUMUDAL DISTRICT.
+      North in Naumudal were two brothers, kings, -Herlaug and Hrollaug;
+      and they had been for three summers raising a mound or tomb of stone and
+      lime and of wood. Just as the work was finished, the brothers got the news
+      that King Harald was coming upon them with his army. Then King Herlaug had
+      a great quantity of meat and drink brought into the mound, and went into
+      it himself, with eleven companions, and ordered the mound to be covered
+      up. King Hrollaug, on the contrary, went upon the summit of the mound, on
+      which the kings were wont to sit, and made a throne to be erected, upon
+      which he seated himself. Then he ordered feather-beds to be laid upon the
+      bench below, on which the earls were wont to be seated, and threw himself
+      down from his high seat or throne into the earl's seat, giving himself the
+      title of earl. Now Hrollaug went to meet King Harald, gave up to him his
+      whole kingdom, offered to enter into his service, and told him his whole
+      proceeding. Then took King Harald a sword, fastened it to Hrollaug's belt,
+      bound a shield to his neck, and made him thereupon an earl, and led him to
+      his earl's seat; and therewith gave him the district Naumudal, and set him
+      as earl over it ((A.D. 866)). (1)
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Before writing was in general use, this symbolical way of
+     performing all important legal acts appears to have entered
+     into the jurisprudence of all savage nations; and according
+     to Gibbon, chap. 44, "the jurisprudence of the first Romans
+     exhibited the scenes of a pantomime; the words were adapted
+     to the gestures, and the slightest error or neglect in the
+     forms of proceeding was sufficient to annul the substance of
+     the fairest claims." -Ed.
+      9. KING HARALD'S HOME AFFAIRS.
+      King Harald then returned to Throndhjem, where he dwelt during the winter,
+      and always afterwards called it his home. He fixed here his head
+      residence, which is called Lade. This winter he took to wife Asa, a
+      daughter of Earl Hakon Grjotgardson, who then stood in great favour and
+      honour with the king. In spring the king fitted out his ships. In winter
+      he had caused a great frigate (a dragon) to be built, and had it
+      fitted-out in the most splendid way, and brought his house-troops and his
+      berserks on board. The forecastle men were picked men, for they had the
+      king's banner. From the stem to the mid-hold was called rausn, or the
+      fore-defence; and there were the berserks. Such men only were received
+      into King Harald's house-troop as were remarkable for strength, courage,
+      and all kinds of dexterity; and they alone got place in his ship, for he
+      had a good choice of house-troops from the best men of every district.
+      King Harald had a great army, many large ships, and many men of might
+      followed him. Hornklofe, in his poem called "Glymdrapa", tells of this;
+      and also that King Harald had a battle with the people of Orkadal, at
+      Opdal forest, before he went upon this expedition.
+     "O'er the broad heath the bowstrings twang,
+     While high in air the arrows sang.
+     The iron shower drives to flight
+     The foeman from the bloody fight.
+     The warder of great Odin's shrine,
+     The fair-haired son of Odin's line,
+     Raises the voice which gives the cheer,
+     First in the track of wolf or bear.
+     His master voice drives them along
+     To Hel -a destined, trembling throng;
+     And Nokve's ship, with glancing sides,
+     Must fly to the wild ocean's tides. -
+     Must fly before the king who leads
+     Norse axe-men on their ocean steeds."
+      10. BATTLE AT SOLSKEL
+      King Harald moved out with his army from Throndhjem, and went southwards
+      to More. Hunthiof was the name of the king who ruled over the district of
+      More. Solve Klofe was the name of his son, and both were great warriors.
+      King Nokve, who ruled over Raumsdal, was the brother of Solve's mother.
+      Those chiefs gathered a great force when they heard of King Harald, and
+      came against him. They met at Solskel, and there was a great battle, which
+      was gained by King Harald (A.D. 867). Hornklofe tells of this battle: -
+     "Thus did the hero known to fame,
+     The leader of the shields, whose name
+     Strikes every heart with dire dismay,
+     Launch forth his war-ships to the fray.
+     Two kings he fought; but little strife
+     Was needed to cut short their life.
+     A clang of arms by the sea-shore, -
+     And the shields' sound was heard no more."
+      The two kings were slain, but Solve escaped by flight; and King Harald
+      laid both districts under his power. He stayed here long in summer to
+      establish law and order for the country people, and set men to rule them,
+      and keep them faithful to him; and in autumn he prepared to return
+      northwards to Throndhjem. Ragnvald Earl of More, a son of Eystein Glumra,
+      had the summer before become one of Harald's men; and the king set him as
+      chief over these two districts, North More and Raumsdal; strengthened him
+      both with men of might and bondes, and gave him the help of ships to
+      defend the coast against enemies. He was called Ragnvald the Mighty, or
+      the Wise; and people say both names suited him well. King Harald came back
+      to Throndhjem about winter.
+      11. FALL OF KINGS ARNVID AND AUDBJORN.
+      The following spring (A.D. 868) King Harald raised a great force in
+      Throndhjem, and gave out that he would proceed to South More. Solve Klofe
+      had passed the winter in his ships of war, plundering in North More, and
+      had killed many of King Harald's men; pillaging some places, burning
+      others, and making great ravage; but sometimes he had been, during the
+      winter, with his friend King Arnvid in South More. Now when he heard that
+      King Harald was come with ships and a great army, he gathered people, and
+      was strong in men-at-arms; for many thought they had to take vengeance of
+      King Harald. Solve Klofe went southwards to Firdafylke (the Fjord
+      district), which King Audbjorn ruled over, to ask him to help, and join
+      his force to King Arnvid's and his own. "For," said he, "it is now clear
+      that we all have but one course to take; and that is to rise, all as one
+      man, against King Harald, for we have strength enough, and fate must
+      decide the victory; for as to the other condition of becoming his
+      servants, that is no condition for us, who are not less noble than Harald.
+      My father thought it better to fall in battle for his kingdom, than to go
+      willingly into King Harald's service, or not to abide the chance of
+      weapons like the Naumudal kings." King Solve's speech was such that King
+      Audbjorn promised his help, and gathered a great force together and went
+      with it to King Arnvid, and they had a great army. Now, they got news that
+      King Harald was come from the north, and they met within Solskel. And it
+      was the custom to lash the ships together, stem to stem; so it was done
+      now. King Harald laid his ship against King Arnvid's, and there was the
+      sharpest fight, and many men fell on both sides. At last King Harald was
+      raging with anger, and went forward to the fore-deck, and slew so
+      dreadfully that all the forecastle men of Arnvid's ship were driven aft of
+      the mast, and some fell. Thereupon Harald boarded the ship, and King
+      Arnvid's men tried to save themselves by flight, and he himself was slain
+      in his ship. King Audbjorn also fell; but Solve fled. So says Hornklofe: -
+     "Against the hero's shield in vain
+     The arrow-storm fierce pours its rain.
+     The king stands on the blood-stained deck,
+     Trampling on many a stout foe's neck;
+     And high above the dinning stound
+     Of helm and axe, and ringing sound
+     Of blade and shield, and raven's cry,
+     Is heard his shout of 'Victory!'"
+      Of King Harald's men, fell his earls Asgaut and Asbjorn, together with his
+      brothers-in-law, Grjotgard and Herlaug, the sons of Earl Hakon of Lade.
+      Solve became afterwards a great sea-king, and often did great damage in
+      King Harald's dominions.
+      12. KING VEMUND BURNT TO DEATH.
+      After this battle (A.D. 868) King Harald subdued South More; but Vemund,
+      King Audbjorn's brother, still had Firdafylke. It was now late in harvest,
+      and King Harald's men gave him the counsel not to proceed south-wards
+      round Stad. Then King Harald set Earl Ragnvald over South and North More
+      and also Raumsdal, and he had many people about him. King Harald returned
+      to Throndhjem. The same winter (A.D. 869) Ragnvald went over Eid, and
+      southwards to the Fjord district. There he heard news of King Vemund, and
+      came by night to a place called Naustdal, where King Vemund was living in
+      guest-quarters. Earl Ragnvald surrounded the house in which they were
+      quartered, and burnt the king in it, together with ninety men. The came
+      Berdlukare to Earl Ragnvald with a complete armed long-ship, and they both
+      returned to More. The earl took all the ships Vemund had, and all the
+      goods he could get hold of. Berdlukare proceeded north to Throndhjem to
+      King Harald, and became his man; and dreadful berserk he was.
+      13. DEATH OF EARLS HAKON, AND ATLE MJOVE.
+      The following spring (A.D. 869) King Harald went southwards with his fleet
+      along the coast, and subdued Firdafylke. Then he sailed eastward along the
+      land until he came to Vik; but he left Earl Hakon Grjotgardson behind, and
+      set him over the Fjord district. Earl Hakon sent word to Earl Atle Mjove
+      that he should leave Sogn district, and be earl over Gaular district, as
+      he had been before, alleging that King Harald had given Sogn district to
+      him. Earl Atle sent word that he would keep both Sogn district and Gaular
+      district, until he met King Harald. The two earls quarreled about this so
+      long, that both gathered troops. They met at Fialar, in Stavanger fiord,
+      and had a great battle, in which Earl Hakon fell, and Earl Atle got a
+      mortal wound, and his men carried him to the island of Atley, where he
+      died. So says Eyvind Skaldaspiller: -
+     "He who stood a rooted oak,
+     Unshaken by the swordsman's stroke,
+     Amidst the whiz of arrows slain,
+     Has fallen upon Fjalar's plain.
+     There, by the ocean's rocky shore,
+     The waves are stained with the red gore
+     Of stout Earl Hakon Grjotgard's son,
+     And of brave warriors many a one."
+      14. HARALD AND THE SWEDISH KING EIRIK.
+      King Harald came with his fleet eastward to Viken and landed at Tunsberg,
+      which was then a trading town. He had then been four years in Throndhjem,
+      and in all that time had not been in Viken. Here he heard the news that
+      Eirik Eymundson, king of Sweden, had laid under him Vermaland, and was
+      taking scat or land-tax from all the forest settlers; and also that he
+      called the whole country north to Svinasund, and west along the sea, West
+      Gautland; and which altogether he reckoned to his kingdom, and took
+      land-tax from it. Over this country he had set an earl, by name Hrane
+      Gauzke, who had the earldom between Svinasund and the Gaut river, and was
+      a mighty earl. And it was told to King Harald that the Swedish king said
+      he would not rest until he had as great a kingdom in Viken as Sigurd
+      Hring, or his son Ragnar Lodbrok, had possessed; and that was Raumarike
+      and Vestfold, all the way to the isle Grenmar, and also Vingulmark, and
+      all that lay south of it. In all these districts many chiefs, and many
+      other people, had given obedience to the Swedish king. King Harald was
+      very angry at this, and summoned the bondes to a Thing at Fold, where he
+      laid an accusation against them for treason towards him. Some bondes
+      defended themselves from the accusation, some paid fines, some were
+      punished. He went thus through the whole district during the summer, and
+      in harvest he did the same in Raumarike, and laid the two districts under
+      his power. Towards winter he heard that Eirik king of Sweden was, with his
+      court, going about in Vermaland in guest-quarters.
+      15. HARALD AT A FEAST OF THE PEASANT AKE.
+      King Harald takes his way across the Eid forest eastward, and comes out in
+      Vermaland, where he also orders feasts to be prepared for himself. There
+      was a man by name Ake, who was the greatest of the bondes of Vermaland,
+      very rich, and at that time very aged. He sent men to King Harald, and
+      invited him to a feast, and the king promised to come on the day
+      appointed. Ake invited also King Eirik to a feast, and appointed the same
+      day. Ake had a great feasting hall, but it was old; and he made a new
+      hall, not less than the old one, and had it ornamented in the most
+      splendid way. The new hall he had hung with new hangings, but the old had
+      only its old ornaments. Now when the kings came to the feast, King Eirik
+      with his court was taken into the old hall; but Harald with his followers
+      into the new. The same difference was in all the table furniture, and King
+      Eirik and his men had the old-fashioned vessels and horns, but all gilded
+      and splendid; while King Harald and his men had entirely new vessels and
+      horns adorned with gold, all with carved figures, and shining like glass;
+      and both companies had the best of liquor. Ake the bonde had formerly been
+      King Halfdan the Black s man. Now when daylight came, and the feast was
+      quite ended, and the kings made themselves ready for their journey, and
+      the horses were saddled, came Ake before King Harald, leading in his hand
+      his son Ubbe, a boy of twelve years of age, and said, "If the goodwill I
+      have shown to thee, sire, in my feast, be worth thy friendship, show it
+      hereafter to my son. I give him to thee now for thy service." The king
+      thanked him with many agreeable words for his friendly entertainment, and
+      promised him his full friendship in return. Then Ake brought out great
+      presents, which he gave to the king, and they gave each other thereafter
+      the parting kiss. Ake went next to the Swedish king, who was dressed and
+      ready for the road, but not in the best humour. Ake gave to him also good
+      and valuable gifts; but the king answered only with few words, and mounted
+      his horse. Ake followed the king on the road and talked with him. The road
+      led through a wood which was near to the house; and when Ake came to the
+      wood, the king said to him, "How was it that thou madest such a difference
+      between me and King Harald as to give him the best of everything, although
+      thou knowest thou art my man?" "I think" answered Ake, "that there failed
+      in it nothing, king, either to you or to your attendants, in friendly
+      entertainment at this feast. But that all the utensils for your drinking
+      were old, was because you are now old; but King Harald is in the bloom of
+      youth, and therefore I gave him the new things. And as to my being thy
+      man, thou art just as much my man." On this the king out with his sword,
+      and gave Ake his deathwound. King Harald was ready now also to mount his
+      horse, and desired that Ake should be called. The people went to seek him;
+      and some ran up the road that King Eirik had taken, and found Ake there
+      dead. They came back, and told the news to King Harald, and he bids his
+      men to be up, and avenge Ake the bonde. And away rode he and his men the
+      way King Eirik had taken, until they came in sight of each other. Each for
+      himself rode as hard as he could, until Eirik came into the wood which
+      divides Gautland and Vermaland. There King Harald wheels about, and
+      returns to Vermaland, and lays the country under him, and kills King
+      Eirik's men wheresoever he can find them. In winter King Harald returned
+      to Raumarike, and dwelt there a while.
+      16. HARALD'S JOURNEY TO TUNSBERG.
+      King Harald went out in winter to his ships at Tunsberg, rigged them, and
+      sailed away eastward over the fiord, and subjected all Vingulmark to his
+      dominion. All winter he was out with his ships, and marauded in Ranrike;
+      so says Thorbjorn Hornklofe: -
+     "The Norseman's king is on the sea,
+     Tho' bitter wintry cold it be. -
+     On the wild waves his Yule keeps he.
+     When our brisk king can get his way,
+     He'll no more by the fireside stay
+     Than the young sun; he makes us play
+     The game of the bright sun-god Frey.
+     But the soft Swede loves well the fire
+     The well-stuffed couch, the doway glove,
+     And from the hearth-seat will not move."
+      The Gautlanders gathered people together all over the country.
+      17. THE BATTLE IN GAUTLAND.
+      In spring, when the ice was breaking up, the Gautlanders drove stakes into
+      the Gaut river to hinder King Harald with his ships from coming to the
+      land. But King Harald laid his ships alongside the stakes, and plundered
+      the country, and burnt all around; so says Horn klofe: -
+     "The king who finds a dainty feast,
+     For battle-bird and prowling beast,
+     Has won in war the southern land
+     That lies along the ocean's strand.
+     The leader of the helmets, he
+     Who leads his ships o'er the dark sea,
+     Harald, whose high-rigged masts appear
+     Like antlered fronts of the wild deer,
+     Has laid his ships close alongside
+     Of the foe's piles with daring pride."
+      Afterwards the Gautlanders came down to the strand with a great army, and
+      gave battle to King Harald, and great was the fall of men. But it was King
+      Harald who gained the day. Thus says Hornklofe: -
+     "Whistles the battle-axe in its swing
+     O'er head the whizzing javelins sing,
+     Helmet and shield and hauberk ring;
+     The air-song of the lance is loud,
+     The arrows pipe in darkening cloud;
+     Through helm and mail the foemen feel
+     The blue edge of our king's good steel
+     Who can withstand our gallant king?
+     The Gautland men their flight must wing."
+      18. HRANE GAUZKE'S DEATH.
+      King Harald went far and wide through Gautland, and many were the battles
+      he fought there on both sides of the river, and in general he was
+      victorious. In one of these battles fell Hrane Gauzke; and then the king
+      took his whole land north of the river and west of the Veneren, and also
+      Vermaland. And after he turned back there-from, he set Duke Guthorm as
+      chief to defend the country, and left a great force with him. King Harald
+      himself went first to the Uplands, where he remained a while, and then
+      proceeded northwards over the Dovrefjeld to Throndhjem, where he dwelt for
+      a long time. Harald began to have children. By Asa he had four sons. The
+      eldest was Guthorm. Halfdan the Black and Halfdan the White were twins.
+      Sigfrod was the fourth. They were all brought up in Throndhjem with all
+      honour.
+      19. BATTLE IN HAFERSFJORD.
+      News came in from the south land that the people of Hordaland and
+      Rogaland, Agder and Thelemark, were gathering, and bringing together ships
+      and weapons, and a great body of men. The leaders of this were Eirik king
+      of Hordaland; Sulke king of Rogaland, and his brother Earl Sote: Kjotve
+      the Rich, king of Agder, and his son Thor Haklang; and from Thelemark two
+      brothers, Hroald Hryg and Had the Hard. Now when Harald got certain news
+      of this, he assembled his forces, set his ships on the water, made himself
+      ready with his men, and set out southwards along the coast, gathering many
+      people from every district. King Eirik heard of this when he same south of
+      Stad; and having assembled all the men he could expect, he proceeded
+      southwards to meet the force which he knew was coming to his help from the
+      east. The whole met together north of Jadar, and went into Hafersfjord,
+      where King Harald was waiting with his forces. A great battle began, which
+      was both hard and long; but at last King Harald gained the day. There King
+      Eirik fell, and King Sulke, with his brother Earl Sote. Thor Haklang, who
+      was a great berserk, had laid his ship against King Harald's, and there
+      was above all measure a desperate attack, until Thor Haklang fell, and his
+      whole ship was cleared of men. Then King Kjotve fled to a little isle
+      outside, on which there was a good place of strength. Thereafter all his
+      men fled, some to their ships, some up to the land; and the latter ran
+      southwards over the country of Jadar. So says Hornklofe, viz.: -
+     "Has the news reached you? -have you heard
+     Of the great fight at Hafersfjord,
+     Between our noble king brave Harald
+     And King Kjotve rich in gold?
+     The foeman came from out the East,
+     Keen for the fray as for a feast.
+     A gallant sight it was to see
+     Their fleet sweep o'er the dark-blue sea:
+     Each war-ship, with its threatening throat
+     Of dragon fierce or ravenous brute (1)
+     Grim gaping from the prow; its wales
+     Glittering with burnished shields, (2) like scales
+     Its crew of udal men of war,
+     Whose snow-white targets shone from far
+     And many a mailed spearman stout
+     From the West countries round about,
+     English and Scotch, a foreign host,
+     And swordamen from the far French coast.
+     And as the foemen's ships drew near,
+     The dreadful din you well might hear
+     Savage berserks roaring mad,
+     And champions fierce in wolf-skins clad, (3)
+     Howling like wolves; and clanking jar
+     Of many a mail-clad man of war.
+     Thus the foe came; but our brave king
+     Taught them to fly as fast again.
+     For when he saw their force come o'er,
+     He launched his war-ships from the shore.
+     On the deep sea he launched his fleet
+     And boldly rowed the foe to meet.
+     Fierce was the shock, and loud the clang
+     Of shields, until the fierce Haklang,
+     The foeman's famous berserk, fell.
+     Then from our men burst forth the yell
+     Of victory, and the King of Gold
+     Could not withstand our Harald bold,
+     But fled before his flaky locks
+     For shelter to the island rocks.
+     All in the bottom of the ships
+     The wounded lay, in ghastly heaps;
+     Backs up and faces down they lay
+     Under the row-seats stowed away;
+     And many a warrior's shield, I ween
+     Might on the warrior's back be seen,
+     To shield him as he fled amain
+     From the fierce stone-storm's pelting rain.
+     The mountain-folk, as I've heard say,
+     Ne'er stopped as they ran from the fray,
+     Till they had crossed the Jadar sea,
+     And reached their homes -so keen each soul
+     To drown his fright in the mead bowl."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The war-ships were called dragons, from being decorated
+     with the head of a dragon, serpent, or other wild animal; and the
+     word "draco" was adopted in the Latin of the Middle Ages to
+     denote a ship of war of the larger class.  The snekke was
+     the cutter or smaller war-ship. -L.
+(2) The shields were hung over the side-rails of the ships. -L.
+(3) The wolf-skin pelts were nearly as good as armour against
+     the sword.
+      20. HARALD SUPREME SOVEREIGN IN NORWAY.
+      After this battle King Harald met no opposition in Norway, for all his
+      opponents and greatest enemies were cut off. But some, and they were a
+      great multitude, fled out of the country, and thereby great districts were
+      peopled. Jemtaland and Helsingjaland were peopled then, although some
+      Norwegians had already set up their habitation there. In the discontent
+      that King Harald seized on the lands of Norway, the out-countries of
+      Iceland and the Farey Isles were discovered and peopled. The Northmen had
+      also a great resort to Hjaltland (Shetland Isles) and many men left
+      Norway, flying the country on account of King Harald, and went on viking
+      cruises into the West sea. In winter they were in the Orkney Islands and
+      Hebrides; but marauded in summer in Norway, and did great damage. Many,
+      however, were the mighty men who took service under King Harald, and
+      became his men, and dwelt in the land with him.
+      21. HARALD'S MARRIAGE AND HIS CHILDREN.
+      When King Harald had now become sole king over all Norway, he remembered
+      what that proud girl had said to him; so he sent men to her, and had her
+      brought to him, and took her to his bed. And these were their children:
+      Alof -she was the eldest; then was their son Hrorek; then Sigtryg,
+      Frode, and Thorgils. King Harald had many wives and many children. Among
+      them he had one wife, who was called Ragnhild the Mighty, a daughter of
+      King Eirik, from Jutland; and by her he had a son, Eirik Blood-axe. He was
+      also married to Svanhild, a daughter of Earl Eystein; and their sons were
+      Olaf Geirstadaalf, Bjorn and Ragnar Rykkil. Lastly, King Harald married
+      Ashild, a daughter of Hring Dagson, up in Ringerike; and their children
+      were, Dag, Hring, Gudrod Skiria, and Ingigerd. It is told that King Harald
+      put away nine wives when he married Ragnhild the Mighty. So says
+      Hornklofe: -
+     "Harald, of noblest race the head,
+     A Danish wife took to his bed;
+     And out of doors nine wives he thrust, -
+     The mothers of the princes first.
+     Who 'mong Holmrygians hold command,
+     And those who rule in Hordaland.
+     And then he packed from out the place
+     The children born of Holge's race."
+      King Harald's children were all fostered and brought up by their relations
+      on the mother's side. Guthorm the Duke had poured water over King Harald's
+      eldest son and had given him his own name. He set the child upon his knee,
+      and was his foster-father, and took him with himself eastward to Viken,
+      and there he was brought up in the house of Guthorm. Guthorm ruled the
+      whole land in Viken and the Uplands, when King Harald was absent.
+      22. KING HARALD'S VOYAGE TO THE WEST.
+      King Harald heard that the vikings, who were in the West sea in winter,
+      plundered far and wide in the middle part of Norway; and therefore every
+      summer he made an expedition to search the isles and out-skerries (1) on
+      the coast. Wheresoever the vikings heard of him they all took to flight,
+      and most of them out into the open ocean. At last the king grew weary of
+      this work, and therefore one summer he sailed with his fleet right out
+      into the West sea. First he came to Hjaltland (Shetland), and he slew all
+      the vikings who could not save themselves by flight. Then King Harald
+      sailed southwards, to the Orkney Islands, and cleared them all of vikings.
+      Thereafter he proceeded to the Sudreys (Hebrides), plundered there, and
+      slew many vikings who formerly had had men-at-arms under them. Many a
+      battle was fought, and King Harald was always victorious. He then
+      plundered far and wide in Scotland itself, and had a battle there. When he
+      was come westward as far as the Isle of Man, the report of his exploits on
+      the land had gone before him; for all the inhabitants had fled over to
+      Scotland, and the island was left entirely bare both of people and goods,
+      so that King Harald and his men made no booty when they landed. So says
+      Hornklofe: -
+     "The wise, the noble king, great
+     Whose hand so freely scatters gold,
+     Led many a northern shield to war
+     Against the town upon the shore.
+     The wolves soon gathered on the sand
+     Of that sea-shore; for Harald's hand
+     The Scottish army drove away,
+     And on the coast left wolves a prey."
+      In this war fell Ivar, a son of Ragnvald, Earl of More; and King Harald
+      gave Ragnvald, as a compensation for the loss, the Orkney and Shetland
+      isles, when he sailed from the West; but Ragnvald immediately gave both
+      these countries to his brother Sigurd, who remained behind them; and King
+      Harald, before sailing eastward, gave Sigurd the earldom of them.
+      Thorstein the Red, a son of Olaf the White and of Aud the Wealthy, entered
+      into partnership with him; and after plundering in Scotland, they subdued
+      Caithness and Sutherland, as far as Ekkjalsbakke. Earl Sigurd killed
+      Melbridge Tooth, a Scotch earl, and hung his head to his stirrup-leather;
+      but the calf of his leg were scratched by the teeth, which were sticking
+      out from the head, and the wound caused inflammation in his leg, of which
+      the earl died, and he was laid in a mound at Ekkjalsbakke. His son Guthorm
+      ruled over these countries for about a year thereafter, and died without
+      children. Many vikings, both Danes and Northmen, set themselves down then
+      in those countries.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Skerries are the uninhabited dry or halt-tide rocks of a
+     coast. -L.
+      23. HARALD HAS HIS HAIR CLIPPED.
+      After King Harald had subdued the whole land, he was one day at a feast in
+      More, given by Earl Ragnvald. Then King Harald went into a bath, and had
+      his hair dressed. Earl Ragnvald now cut his hair, which had been uncut and
+      uncombed for ten years; and therefore the king had been called Lufa (i.e.,
+      with rough matted hair). But then Earl Ragnvald gave him the
+      distinguishing name -Harald Harfager (i.e., fair hair); and all who
+      saw him agreed that there was the greatest truth in the surname, for he
+      had the most beautiful and abundant head of hair.
+      24. ROLF GANGER DRIVEN INTO BANISHMENT.
+      Earl Ragnvald was King Harald's dearest friend, and the king had the
+      greatest regard for him. He was married to Hild, a daughter of Rolf Nefia,
+      and their sons were Rolf and Thorer. Earl Ragnvald had also three sons by
+      concubines, -the one called Hallad, the second Einar, the third
+      Hrollaug; and all three were grown men when their brothers born in
+      marriage were still children Rolf became a great viking, and was of so
+      stout a growth that no horse could carry him, and wheresoever he went he
+      must go on foot; and therefore he was called Rolf Ganger. He plundered
+      much in the East sea. One summer, as he was coming from the eastward on a
+      viking's expedition to the coast of Viken, he landed there and made a
+      cattle foray. As King Harald happened, just at that time, to be in Viken,
+      he heard of it, and was in a great rage; for he had forbid, by the
+      greatest punishment, the plundering within the bounds of the country. The
+      king assembled a Thing, and had Rolf declared an outlaw over all Norway.
+      When Rolf's mother, Hild heard of it she hastened to the king, and
+      entreated peace for Rolf; but the king was so enraged that here entreaty
+      was of no avail. Then Hild spake these lines: -
+     "Think'st thou, King Harald, in thy anger,
+     To drive away my brave Rolf Ganger
+     Like a mad wolf, from out the land?
+     Why, Harald, raise thy mighty hand?
+     Why banish Nefia's gallant name-son,
+     The brother of brave udal-men?
+     Why is thy cruelty so fell?
+     Bethink thee, monarch, it is ill
+     With such a wolf at wolf to play,
+     Who, driven to the wild woods away
+     May make the king's best deer his prey."
+      Rolf Ganger went afterwards over sea to the West to the Hebrides, or
+      Sudreys; and at last farther west to Valland, where he plundered and
+      subdued for himself a great earldom, which he peopled with Northmen, from
+      which that land is called Normandy. Rolf Ganger's son was William, father
+      to Richard, and grandfather to another Richard, who was the father of
+      Robert Longspear, and grandfather of William the Bastard, from whom all
+      the following English kings are descended. From Rolf Ganger also are
+      descended the earls in Normandy. Queen Ragnhild the Mighty lived three
+      years after she came to Norway; and, after her death, her son and King
+      Harald's was taken to the herse Thorer Hroaldson, and Eirik was fostered
+      by him.
+      25. OF THE FIN SVASE AND KING HARALD.
+      King Harald, one winter, went about in guest-quarters in the Uplands, and
+      had ordered a Christmas feast to be prepared for him at the farm Thoptar.
+      On Christmas eve came Svase to the door, just as the king went to table,
+      and sent a message to the king to ask if he would go out with him. The
+      king was angry at such a message, and the man who had brought it in took
+      out with him a reply of the king's displeasure. But Svase,
+      notwithstanding, desired that his message should be delivered a second
+      time; adding to it, that he was the Fin whose hut the king had promised to
+      visit, and which stood on the other side of the ridge. Now the king went
+      out, and promised to go with him, and went over the ridge to his hut,
+      although some of his men dissuaded him. There stood Snaefrid, the daughter
+      of Svase, a most beautiful girl; and she filled a cup of mead for the
+      king. But he took hold both of the cup and of her hand. Immediately it was
+      as if a hot fire went through his body; and he wanted that very night to
+      take her to his bed. But Svase said that should not be unless by main
+      force, if he did not first make her his lawful wife. Now King Harald made
+      Snaefrid his lawful wife, and loved her so passionately that he forgot his
+      kingdom, and all that belonged to his high dignity. They had four sons:
+      the one was Sigurd Hrise; the others Halfdan Haleg, Gudrod Ljome and
+      Ragnvald Rettilbeine. Thereafter Snaefrid died; but her corpse never
+      changed, but was as fresh and red as when she lived. The king sat always
+      beside her, and thought she would come to life again. And so it went on
+      for three years that he was sorrowing over her death, and the people over
+      his delusion. At last Thorleif the Wise succeeded, by his prudence, in
+      curing him of his delusion by accosting him thus: -"It is nowise
+      wonderful, king, that thou grievest over so beautiful and noble a wife,
+      and bestowest costly coverlets and beds of down on her corpse, as she
+      desired; but these honours fall short of what is due, as she still lies in
+      the same clothes. It would be more suitable to raise her, and change her
+      dress." As soon as the body was raised in the bed all sorts of corruption
+      and foul smells came from it, and it was necessary in all haste to gather
+      a pile of wood and burn it; but before this could be done the body turned
+      blue, and worms, toads, newts, paddocks, and all sorts of ugly reptiles
+      came out of it, and it sank into ashes. Now the king came to his
+      understanding again, threw the madness out of his mind, and after that day
+      ruled his kingdom as before. He was strengthened and made joyful by his
+      subjects, and his subjects by him and the country by both.
+      26. OF THJODOLF OF HVIN, THE SKALD.
+      After King Harald had experienced the cunning of the Fin woman, he was so
+      angry that he drove from him the sons he had with her, and would not
+      suffer them before his eyes. But one of them, Gudrod Ljome, went to his
+      foster-father Thjodolf of Hvin, and asked him to go to the king, who was
+      then in the Uplands; for Thjodolf was a great friend of the king. And so
+      they went, and came to the king's house late in the evening, and sat down
+      together unnoticed near the door. The king walked up and down the floor
+      casting his eye along the benches; for he had a feast in the house, and
+      the mead was just mixed. The king then murmured out these lines: -
+     "Tell me, ye aged gray-haired heroes,
+     Who have come here to seek repose,
+     Wherefore must I so many keep
+     Of such a set, who, one and all,
+     Right dearly love their souls to steep,
+     From morn till night, in the mead-bowl?"
+      Then Thjodolf replies: -
+     "A certain wealthy chief, I think,
+     Would gladly have had more to drink
+     With him, upon one bloody day,
+     When crowns were cracked in our sword-play."
+      Thjodolf then took off his hat, and the king recognised him, and gave him
+      a friendly reception. Thjodolf then begged the king not to cast off his
+      sons; "for they would with great pleasure have taken a better family
+      descent upon the mother's side, if the king had given it to them." The
+      king assented, and told him to take Gudrod with him as formerly; and he
+      sent Halfdan and Sigurd to Ringerike, and Ragnvald to Hadaland, and all
+      was done as the king ordered. They grew up to be very clever men, very
+      expert in all exercises. In these times King Harald sat in peace in the
+      land, and the land enjoyed quietness and good crops.
+      27. OF EARL TORFEINAR'S OBTAINING ORKNEY.
+      When Earl Ragnvald in More heard of the death of his brother Earl Sigurd,
+      and that the vikings were in possession of the country, he sent his son
+      Hallad westward, who took the title of earl to begin with, and had many
+      men-at-arms with him. When he arrived at the Orkney Islands, he
+      established himself in the country; but both in harvest, winter, and
+      spring, the vikings cruised about the isles plundering the headlands, and
+      committing depredations on the coast. Then Earl Hallad grew tired of the
+      business, resigned his earldom, took up again his rights as an allodial
+      owner, and afterwards returned eastward into Norway. When Earl Ragnvald
+      heard of this he was ill pleased with Hallad, and said his son were very
+      unlike their ancestors. Then said Einar, "I have enjoyed but little honour
+      among you, and have little affection here to lose: now if you will give me
+      force enough, I will go west to the islands, and promise you what at any
+      rate will please you -that you shall never see me again." Earl
+      Ragnvald replied, that he would be glad if he never came back; "For there
+      is little hope," said he, "that thou will ever be an honour to thy
+      friends, as all thy kin on thy mother's side are born slaves." Earl
+      Ragnvald gave Einar a vessel completely equipped, and he sailed with it
+      into the West sea in harvest. When he came to the Orkney Isles, two
+      vikings, Thorer Treskeg and Kalf Skurfa, were in his way with two vessels.
+      He attacked them instantly, gained the battle, and slew the two vikings.
+      Then this was sung: -
+     "Then gave he Treskeg to the trolls,
+     Torfeinar slew Skurfa."
+      He was called Torfeinar, because he cut peat for fuel, there being no
+      firewood, as in Orkney there are no woods. He afterwards was earl over the
+      islands, and was a mighty man. He was ugly, and blind of an eye, yet very
+      sharp-sighted withal.
+      28. KING EIRIK EYMUNDSON'S DEATH.
+      Duke Guthorm dwelt principally at Tunsberg, and governed the whole of
+      Viken when the king was not there. He defended the land, which, at that
+      time, was much plundered by the vikings. There were disturbances also up
+      in Gautland as long as King Eirik Eymundson lived; but he died when King
+      Harald Harfager had been ten years king of all Norway.
+      29. GUTHORM'S DEATH IN TUNSBERG.
+      After Eirik, his son Bjorn was king of Svithjod for fifty years. He was
+      father of Eirik the Victorious, and of Olaf the father of Styrbjorn.
+      Guthorm died on a bed of sickness at Tunsberg, and King Harald gave his
+      son Guthorm the government of that part of his dominions and made him
+      chief of it.
+      30. EARL RAGNVALD BURNT IN HIS HOUSE.
+      When King Harald was forty years of age many of his sons were well
+      advanced, and indeed they all came early to strength and manhood. And now
+      they began to take it ill that the king would not give them any part of
+      the kingdom, but put earls into every district; for they thought earls
+      were of inferior birth to them. Then Halfdan Haleg and Gudrod Ljome set
+      off one spring with a great force, and came suddenly upon Earl Ragnvald,
+      earl of More, and surrounded the house in which he was, and burnt him and
+      sixty men in it. Thereafter Halfdan took three long-ships, and fitted them
+      out, and sailed into the West sea; but Gudrod set himself down in the land
+      which Ragnvald formerly had. Now when King Harald heard this he set out
+      with a great force against Gudrod, who had no other way left but to
+      surrender, and he was sent to Agder. King Harald then set Earl Ragnvald's
+      son Thorer over More, and gave him his daughter Alof, called Arbot, in
+      marriage. Earl Thorer, called the Silent, got the same territory his
+      father Earl Ragnvald had possessed.
+      31. HALFDAN HALEG'S DEATH.
+      Halfdan Haleg came very unexpectedly to Orkney, and Earl Einar immediately
+      fled; but came back soon after about harvest time, unnoticed by Halfdan.
+      They met and after a short battle Halfdan fled the same night. Einar and
+      his men lay all night without tents, and when it was light in the morning
+      they searched the whole island and killed every man they could lay hold
+      of. Then Einar said "What is that I see upon the isle of Rinansey? Is it a
+      man or a bird? Sometimes it raises itself up, and sometimes lies down
+      again." They went to it, and found it was Halfdan Haleg, and took him
+      prisoner.
+      Earl Einar sang the following song the evening before he went into this
+      battle: -
+     "Where is the spear of Hrollaug?  where
+     Is stout Rolf Ganger's bloody spear!
+     I see them not; yet never fear,
+     For Einar will not vengeance spare
+     Against his father's murderers, though
+     Hrollaug and Rolf are somewhat slow,
+     And silent Thorer sits add dreams
+     At home, beside the mead-bowl's streams."
+      Thereafter Earl Einar went up to Halfdan, and cut a spread eagle upon his
+      back, by striking his sword through his back into his belly, dividing his
+      ribs from the backbone down to his loins, and tearing out his lungs; and
+      so Halfdan was killed. Einar then sang: -
+     "For Ragnvald's death my sword is red:
+     Of vengeance it cannot be said
+     That Einar's share is left unsped.
+     So now, brave boys, let's raise a mound, -
+     Heap stones and gravel on the ground
+     O'er Halfdan's corpse: this is the way
+     We Norsemen our scat duties pay."
+      Then Earl Einar took possession of the Orkney Isles as before. Now when
+      these tidings came to Norway, Halfdan's brothers took it much to heart,
+      and thought that his death demanded vengeance; and many were of the same
+      opinion. When Einar heard this, he sang: -
+     "Many a stout udal-man, I know,
+     Has cause to wish my head laid low;
+     And many an angry udal knife
+     Would gladly drink of Eina's life.
+     But ere they lay Earl Einar low, -
+     Ere this stout heart betrays its cause,
+     Full many a heart will writhe, we know,
+     In the wolf's fangs, or eagle's claws."
+      32. HARALD AND EINAR RECONCILED.
+      King Harald now ordered a levy, and gathered a great force, with which he
+      proceeded westward to Orkney; and when Earl Einar heard that King Harald
+      was come, he fled over to Caithness. He made the following verses on this
+      occasion: -
+     "Many a bearded man must roam,
+     An exile from his house and home,
+     For cow or horse; but Halfdan's gore
+     Is red on Rinansey's wild shore.
+     A nobler deed -on Harald's shield
+     The arm of one who ne'er will yield
+     Has left a scar.  Let peasants dread
+     The vengeance of the Norsemen's head:
+     I reck not of his wrath, but sing,
+     'Do thy worst! -I defy thee, king! -'"
+      Men and messages, however, passed between the king and the earl, and at
+      last it came to a conference; and when they met the earl submitted the
+      case altogether to the king's decision, and the king condemned the earl
+      Einar and the Orkney people to pay a fine of sixty marks of gold. As the
+      bondes thought this was too heavy for them to pay, the earl offered to pay
+      the whole if they would surrender their udal lands to him. This they all
+      agreed to do: the poor because they had but little pieces of land; the
+      rich because they could redeem their udal rights again when they liked.
+      Thus the earl paid the whole fine to the king, who returned in harvest to
+      Norway. The earls for a long time afterwards possessed all the udal lands
+      in Orkney, until Sigurd son of Hlodver gave back the udal rights.
+      33. DEATH OF GUTHORM AND HALFDAN THE WHITE.
+      While King Harald's son Guthorm had the defence of Viken, he sailed
+      outside of the islands on the coast, and came in by one of the mouths of
+      the tributaries of the Gaut river. When he lay there Solve Klofe came upon
+      him, and immediately gave him battle, and Guthorm fell. Halfdan the White
+      and Halfdan the Black went out on an expedition, and plundered in the East
+      sea, and had a battle in Eistland, where Halfdan the White fell.
+      34. MARRIAGE OF EIRIK.
+      Eirik, Harald's son, was fostered in the house of the herse Thorer, son of
+      Hroald, in the Fjord district. He was the most beloved and honoured by
+      King Harald of all his sons. When Eirik was twelve years old, King Harald
+      gave him five long-ships, with which he went on an expedition, -first
+      in the Baltic; then southwards to Denmark, Friesland, and Saxland; on
+      which expedition he passed four years. He then sailed out into the West
+      sea and plundered in Scotland, Bretland, Ireland, and Valland, and passed
+      four years more in this way. Then he sailed north to Finmark, and all the
+      way to Bjarmaland, where he had many a battle, and won many a victory.
+      When he came back to Finmark, his men found a girl in a Lapland hut, whose
+      equal for beauty they never had seen. She said her name was Gunhild, and
+      that her father dwelt in Halogaland, and was called Ozur Tote. "I am
+      here," she said, "to learn sorcery from two of the most knowing Fins in
+      all Finmark, who are now out hunting. They both want me in marriage. They
+      are so skilful that they can hunt out traces either upon the frozen or the
+      thawed earth, like dogs; and they can run so swiftly on skees that neither
+      man nor beast can come near them in speed. They hit whatever they take aim
+      at, and thus kill every man who comes near them. When they are angry the
+      very earth turns away in terror, and whatever living thing they look upon
+      then falls dead. Now ye must not come in their way; but I will hide you
+      here in the hut, and ye must try to get them killed." They agreed to it,
+      and she hid them, and then took a leather bag, in which they thought there
+      were ashes which she took in her hand, and strewed both outside and inside
+      of the hut. Shortly after the Fins came home, and asked who had been
+      there; and she answered, "Nobody has been here." "That is wonderful," said
+      they, "we followed the traces close to the hut, and can find none after
+      that." Then they kindled a fire, and made ready their meat, and Gunhild
+      prepared her bed. It had so happened that Gunhild had slept the three
+      nights before, but the Fins had watched the one upon the other, being
+      jealous of each other. "Now," she said to the Fins, "come here, and lie
+      down one on each side of me." On which they were very glad to do so. She
+      laid an arm round the neck of each and they went to sleep directly. She
+      roused them up; but they fell to sleep again instantly, and so soundly the
+      she scarcely could waken them. She even raised them up in the bed, and
+      still they slept. Thereupon she too two great seal-skin bags, and put
+      their heads in them, and tied them fast under their arms; and then she
+      gave a wink to the king's men. They run forth with their weapons, kill the
+      two Fins, and drag them out of the hut. That same night came such a
+      dreadful thunder-storm that the could not stir. Next morning they came to
+      the ship, taking Gunhild with them, and presented her to Eirik. Eirik and
+      his followers then sailed southwards to Halogaland and he sent word to
+      Ozur Tote, the girl's father, to meet him. Eirik said he would take his
+      daughter in marriage, to which Ozur Tote consented, and Eirik took Gunhild
+      and went southwards with her (A.D. 922).
+      35. HARALD DIVIDES HIS KINGDOM.
+      When King Harald was fifty years of age many of his sons were grown up,
+      and some were dead. Many of them committed acts of great violence in the
+      country, and were in discord among themselves. They drove some of the
+      king's earls out of their properties, and even killed some of them. Then
+      the king called together a numerous Thing in the south part of the
+      country, and summoned to it all the people of the Uplands. At this Thing
+      he gave to all his sons the title of king, and made a law that his
+      descendants in the male line should each succeed to the kingly title and
+      dignity; but his descendants by the female side only to that of earl. And
+      he divided the country among them thus: -Vingulmark, Raumarike,
+      Vestfold and Thelamark, he bestowed on Olaf, Bjorn, Sigtryg, Frode, and
+      Thorgils. Hedemark and Gudbrandsdal he gave to Dag, Hring, and Ragnar. To
+      Snaefrid's sons he gave Ringerike, Hadeland, Thoten, and the lands thereto
+      belonging. His son Guthorm, as before mentioned, he had set over the
+      country from Glommen to Svinasund and Ranrike. He had set him to defend
+      the country to the East, as before has been written. King Harald himself
+      generally dwelt in the middle of the country, and Hrorek and Gudrod were
+      generally with his court, and had great estates in Hordaland and in Sogn.
+      King Eirik was also with his father King Harald; and the king loved and
+      regarded him the most of all his sons, and gave him Halogaland and North
+      More, and Raumsdal. North in Throndhjem he gave Halfdan the Black, Halfdan
+      the White, and Sigrod land to rule over. In each of these districts he
+      gave his sons the one half of his revenues, together with the right to sit
+      on a high-seat, -a step higher than earls, but a step lower than his
+      own high-seat. His king's seat each of his sons wanted for himself after
+      his death, but he himself destined it for Eirik. The Throndhjem people
+      wanted Halfdan the Black to succeed to it. The people of Viken, and the
+      Uplands, wanted those under whom they lived. And thereupon new quarrels
+      arose among the brothers; and because they thought their dominions too
+      little, they drove about in piratical expeditions. In this way, as before
+      related, Guthorm fell at the mouth of the Gaut river, slain by Solve
+      Klofe; upon which Olaf took the kingdom he had possessed. Halfdan the
+      White fell in Eistland, Halfdan Haleg in Orkney. King Harald gave ships of
+      war to Thorgils and Frode, with which they went westward on a viking
+      cruise, and plundered in Scotland, Ireland, and Bretland. They were the
+      first of the Northmen who took Dublin. It is said that Frode got poisoned
+      drink there; but Thorgils was a long time king over Dublin, until he fell
+      into a snare of the Irish, and was killed.
+      36. DEATH OF RAGNVALD RETTILBEINE.
+      Eirik Blood-axe expected to be head king over all his brothers and King
+      Harald intended he should be so; and the father and son lived long
+      together. Ragnvald Rettilbeine governed Hadaland, and allowed himself to
+      be instructed in the arts of witchcraft, and became an area warlock. Now
+      King Harald was a hater of all witchcraft. There was a warlock in
+      Hordaland called Vitgeir; and when the king sent a message to him that he
+      should give up his art of witchcraft, he replied in this verse: -
+     "The danger surely is not great
+     From wizards born of mean estate,
+     When Harald's son in Hadeland,
+     King Ragnvald, to the art lays hand."
+      But when King Harald heard this, King Eirik Blood-axe went by his orders
+      to the Uplands, and came to Hadeland and burned his brother Ragnvald in a
+      house, along with eighty other warlocks; which work was much praised.
+      37. DEATH OF GUDROD LJOME.
+      Gudrod Ljome was in winter on a friendly visit to his foster-father
+      Thjodolf in Hvin, and had a well-manned ship, with which he wanted to go
+      north to Rogaland. It was blowing a heavy storm at the time; but Gudrod
+      was bent on sailing, and would not consent to wait. Thjodolf sang thus: -
+     "Wait, Gudrod, till the storm is past, -
+     Loose not thy long-ship while the blast
+     Howls over-head so furiously, -
+     Trust not thy long-ship to the sea, -
+     Loose not thy long-ship from the shore;
+     Hark to the ocean's angry roar!
+     See how the very stones are tost
+     By raging waves high on the coast!
+     Stay, Gudrod, till the tempest's o'er -
+     Deep runs the sea off the Jadar's shore."
+      Gudrod set off in spite of what Thjodolf could say: and when they came off
+      the Jadar the vessel sunk with them, and all on board were lost.
+      38. KING BJORN KAUPMAN'S DEATH.
+      King Harald's son, Bjorn, ruled over Vestfold at that time, and generally
+      lived at Tunsberg, and went but little on war expeditions. Tunsberg at
+      that time was much frequented by merchant vessels, both from Viken and the
+      north country, and also from the south, from Denmark, and Saxland. King
+      Bjorn had also merchant ships on voyages to other lands, by which he
+      procured for himself costly articles, and such things as he thought
+      needful; and therefore his brothers called him Farman (the Seaman), and
+      Kaupman (the Chapman). Bjorn was a man of sense and understanding, and
+      promised to become a good ruler. He made a good and suitable marriage, and
+      had a son by his wife, who was named Gudrod. Eirik Blood-axe came from his
+      Baltic cruise with ships of war, and a great force, and required his
+      brother Bjorn to deliver to him King Harald's share of the scat and
+      incomes of Vestfold. But it had always been the custom before, that Bjorn
+      himself either delivered the money into the king's hands, or sent men of
+      his own with it; and therefore he would continue with the old custom, and
+      would not deliver the money. Eirik again wanted provisions, tents, and
+      liquor. The brothers quarrelled about this; but Eirik got nothing and left
+      the town. Bjorn went also out of the town towards evening up to Saeheim.
+      In the night Eirik came back after Bjorn, and came to Saeheim just as
+      Bjorn and his men were seated at table drinking. Eirik surrounded the
+      house in which they were; but Bjorn with his men went out and fought.
+      Bjorn, and many men with him, fell. Eirik, on the other hand, got a great
+      booty, and proceeded northwards. But this work was taken very ill by the
+      people of Viken, and Eirik was much disliked for it; and the report went
+      that King Olaf would avenge his brother Bjorn, whenever opportunity
+      offered. King Bjorn lies in the mound of Farmanshaug at Saeheim.
+      39. RECONCILIATION OF THE KINGS.
+      King Eirik went in winter northwards to More, and was at a feast in Solve,
+      within the point Agdanes; and when Halfdan the Black heard of it he set
+      out with his men, and surrounded the house in which they were. Eirik slept
+      in a room which stood detached by itself, and he escaped into the forest
+      with four others; but Halfdan and his men burnt the main house, with all
+      the people who were in it. With this news Eirik came to King Harald, who
+      was very wroth at it, and assembled a great force against the Throndhjem
+      people. When Halfdan the Black heard this he levied ships and men, so that
+      he had a great force, and proceeded with it to Stad, within Thorsbjerg.
+      King Harald lay with his men at Reinsletta. Now people went between them,
+      and among others a clever man called Guthorm Sindre, who was then in
+      Halfdan the Black's army, but had been formerly in the service of King
+      Harald, and was a great friend of both. Guthorm was a great skald, and had
+      once composed a song both about the father and the son, for which they had
+      offered him a reward. But he would take nothing; but only asked that, some
+      day or other, they should grant him any request he should make, which they
+      promised to do. Now he presented himself to King Harald, brought words of
+      peace between them, and made the request to them both that they should be
+      reconciled. So highly did the king esteem him, that in consequence of his
+      request they were reconciled. Many other able men promoted this business
+      as well as he; and it was so settled that Halfdan should retain the whole
+      of his kingdom as he had it before, and should let his brother Eirik sit
+      in peace. After this event Jorun, the skald-maid, composed some verses in
+      "Sendibit" ("The Biting Message"): -
+     "I know that Harald Fairhair
+     Knew the dark deed of Halfdan.
+     To Harald Halfdan seemed
+     Angry and cruel."
+      40. BIRTH OF HAKON THE GOOD.
+      Earl Hakon Grjotgardson of Hlader had the whole rule over Throndhjem when
+      King Harald was anywhere away in the country; and Hakon stood higher with
+      the king than any in the country of Throndhjem. After Hakon's death his
+      son Sigurd succeeded to his power in Throndhjem, and was the earl, and had
+      his mansion at Hlader. King Harald's sons, Halfdan the Black and Sigrod,
+      who had been before in the house of his father Earl Hakon, continued to be
+      brought up in his house. The sons of Harald and Sigurd were about the same
+      age. Earl Sigurd was one of the wisest men of his time, and married
+      Bergljot, a daughter of Earl Thorer the Silent; and her mother was Alof
+      Arbot, a daughter of Harald Harfager. When King Harald began to grow old
+      he generally dwelt on some of his great farms in Hordaland; namely,
+      Alreksstader or Saeheim, Fitjar, Utstein, or Ogvaldsnes in the island
+      Kormt. When Harald was seventy years of age he begat a son with a girl
+      called Thora Mosterstang, because her family came from Moster. She was
+      descended from good people, being connected with Kare (Aslakson) of
+      Hordaland; and was moreover a very stout and remarkably handsome girl. She
+      was called the king's servant-girl; for at that time many were subject to
+      service to the king who were of good birth, both men and women. Then it
+      was the custom, with people of consideration, to choose with great care
+      the man who should pour water over their children, and give them a name.
+      Now when the time came that Thora, who was then at Moster, expected her
+      confinement, she would to King Harald, who was then living at Saeheim; and
+      she went northwards in a ship belonging to Earl Sigurd. They lay at night
+      close to the land; and there Thora brought forth a child upon the land, up
+      among the rocks, close to the ship's gangway, and it was a man child. Earl
+      Sigurd poured water over him, and called him Hakon, after his own father,
+      Hakon earl of Hlader. The boy soon grew handsome, large in size, and very
+      like his father King Harald. King Harald let him follow his mother, and
+      they were both in the king's house as long as he was an infant.
+      41. KING ATHELSTAN'S MESSAGE
+      At this time a king called Aethelstan had taken the Kingdom of England. He
+      was called victorious and faithful. He sent men to Norway to King Harald,
+      with the errand that the messengers should present him with a sword, with
+      the hilt and handle gilt, and also the whole sheath adorned with gold and
+      silver, and set with precious jewels. The ambassador presented the
+      sword-hilt to the king, saying, "Here is a sword which King Athelstan
+      sends thee, with the request that thou wilt accept it." The king took the
+      sword by the handle; whereupon the ambassador said, "Now thou hast taken
+      the sword according to our king's desire, and therefore art thou his
+      subject as thou hast taken his sword." King Harald saw now that this was
+      an insult, for he would be subject to no man. But he remembered it was his
+      rule, whenever anything raised his anger, to collect himself, and let his
+      passion run off, and then take the matter into consideration coolly. Now
+      he did so, and consulted his friends, who all gave him the advice to let
+      the ambassadors, in the first place, go home in safety.
+      42. HAUK'S JOURNEY TO ENGLAND.
+      The following summer King Harald sent a ship westward to England, and gave
+      the command of it to Hauk Habrok. He was a great warrior, and very dear to
+      the king. Into his hands he gave his son Hakon. Hank proceeded westward in
+      England, and found King Athelstan in London, where there was just at the
+      time a great feast and entertainment. When they came to the hall, Hauk
+      told his men how they should conduct themselves; namely, that he who went
+      first in should go last out, and all should stand in a row at the table,
+      at equal distance from each other; and each should have his sword at his
+      left side, but should fasten his cloak so that his sword should not be
+      seen. Then they went into the hall, thirty in number. Hauk went up to the
+      king and saluted him, and the king bade him welcome. Then Hauk took the
+      child Hakon, and set it on the king's knee. The king looks at the boy, and
+      asks Hauk what the meaning of this is. Hauk replies, "Herald the king bids
+      thee foster his servant-girl's child." The king was in great anger, and
+      seized a sword which lay beside him, and drew it, as if he was going to
+      kill the child. Hauk says, "Thou hast borne him on thy knee, and thou
+      canst murder him if thou wilt; but thou wilt not make an end of all King
+      Harald's sons by so doing." On that Hauk went out with all his men, and
+      took the way direct to his ship, and put to sea, -for they were
+      ready, -and came back to King Harald. The king was highly pleased
+      with this; for it is the common observation of all people, that the man
+      who fosters another's children is of less consideration than the other.
+      From these transactions between the two kings, it appears that each wanted
+      to be held greater than the other; but in truth there was no injury, to
+      the dignity of either, for each was the upper king in his own kingdom till
+      his dying day.
+      43. HAKON, THE FOSTER-SON OF ATHELSTAN, IS BAPTIZED.
+      King Athelstan had Hakon baptized, and brought up in the right faith, and
+      in good habits, and all sorts of good manners, and he loved Hakon above
+      all his relations; and Hakon was beloved by all men. He was henceforth
+      called Athelstan's foster-son. He was an accomplished skald, and he was
+      larger, stronger and more beautiful than other men; he was a man of
+      understanding and eloquence, and also a good Christian. King Athelstan
+      gave Hakon a sword, of which the hilt and handle were gold, and the blade
+      still better; for with it Hakon cut down a mill-stone to the centre eye,
+      and the sword thereafter was called the Quernbite (1). Better sword never
+      came into Norway, and Hakon carried it to his dying day.
+   ENDNOTES:
+     (1) Quern is the name of the small hand mill-stones still
+     found.
+     in use among the cottars in Orkney, Shetland, and the
+     Hebrides.  This sword is mentioned in the Younger Edda.
+     There were many excellent swords in the olden time, and many
+     of them had proper names.
+      44. EIRIK BROUGHT TO THE SOVEREIGNTY.
+      When King Harald was eighty years of age (A.D. 930) he became very heavy,
+      and unable to travel through the country, or do the business of a king.
+      Then he brought his son Eirik to his high-seat, and gave him the power and
+      command over the whole land. Now when King Harald's other sons heard this,
+      King Halfdan the Black also took a king's high-seat, and took all
+      Throndhjem land, with the consent of all the people, under his rule as
+      upper king. After the death of Bjorn the Chapman, his brother Olaf took
+      the command over Vestfold, and took Bjorn's son, Gudrod, as his
+      foster-child. Olaf's son was called Trygve; and the two foster-brothers
+      were about the same age, and were hopeful and clever. Trygve, especially,
+      was remarkable as a stout and strong man. Now when the people of Viken
+      heard that those of Hordaland had taken Eirik as upper king, they did the
+      same, and made Olaf the upper king in Viken, which kingdom he retained.
+      Eirik did not like this at all. Two years after this, Halfdan the Black
+      died suddenly at a feast in Throndhjem and the general report was that
+      Gunhild had bribed a witch to give him a death-drink. Thereafter the
+      Throndhjem people took Sigrod to be their king.
+      45. KING HARALD'S DEATH.
+      King Harald lived three years after he gave Eirik the supreme authority
+      over his kingdom, and lived mostly on his great farms which he possessed,
+      some in Rogaland, and some in Hordaland. Eirik and Gunhild had a son on
+      whom King Harald poured water, and gave him his own name, and the promise
+      that he should be king after his father Eirik. King Harald married most of
+      his daughters within the country to his earls, and from them many great
+      families are descended. Harald died on a bed of sickness in Hogaland (A.D.
+      933), and was buried under a mound at Haugar in Karmtsund. In Haugesund is
+      a church, now standing; and not far from the churchyard, at the north-west
+      side, is King Harald Harfager's mound; but his grave-stone stands west of
+      the church, and is thirteen feet and a half high, and two ells broad. One
+      stone was set at head and one at the feet; on the top lay the slab, and
+      below on both sides were laid small stones. The grave, mound, and stone,
+      are there to the present day. Harald Harfager was, according to the report
+      of men of knowledge, or remarkably handsome appearance, great and strong,
+      and very generous and affable to his men. He was a great warrior in his
+      youth; and people think that this was foretold by his mother's dream
+      before his birth, as the lowest part of the tree she dreamt of was red as
+      blood. The stem again was green and beautiful, which betokened his
+      flourishing kingdom; and that the tree was white at the top showed that he
+      should reach a grey-haired old age. The branches and twigs showed forth
+      his posterity, spread over the whole land; for of his race, ever since.
+      Norway has always had kings.
+      46. THE DEATH OF OLAF AND OF SIGROD.
+      King Eirik took all the revenues (A.D. 934), which the king had in the
+      middle of the country, the next winter after King Harald's decease. But
+      Olaf took all the revenues eastward in Viken, and their brother Sigrod all
+      that of the Throndhjem country. Eirik was very ill pleased with this; and
+      the report went that he would attempt with force to get the sole
+      sovereignty over the country, in the same way as his father had given it
+      to him. Now when Olaf and Sigrod heard this, messengers passed between
+      them; and after appointing a meeting place, Sigrod went eastward in spring
+      to Viken, and he and his brother Olaf met at Tunsberg, and remained there
+      a while. The same spring (A.D. 934), King Eirik levied a great force, and
+      ships and steered towards Viken. He got such a strong steady gale that he
+      sailed night and day, and came faster than the news of him. When he came
+      to Tunsberg, Olaf and Sigrod, with their forces, went out of the town a
+      little eastward to a ridge, where they drew up their men in battle order;
+      but as Eirik had many more men he won the battle. Both brothers, Olaf and
+      Sigrod, fell there; and both their grave-mounds are upon the ridge where
+      they fell. Then King Eirik went through Viken, and subdued it, and
+      remained far into summer. Gudrod and Trygve fled to the Uplands. Eirik was
+      a stout handsome man, strong, and very manly, -a great and fortunate
+      man of war; but bad-minded, gruff, unfriendly, and silent. Gunhild, his
+      wife, was the most beautiful of women, -clever, with much knowledge,
+      and lively; but a very false person, and very cruel in disposition. The
+      children of King Eirik and Gunhild were, Gamle, the oldest; then Guthorm,
+      Harald, Ragnfrod, Ragnhild, Erling, Gudrod, and Sigurd Sleva. All were
+      handsome, and of manly appearance (1).
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Of Eirik, his wife, and children, see the following sagas.
+      HAKON THE GOOD'S SAGA.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      Of Eirik Blood-axe's five years' reign Snorre has no separate saga. He
+      appears not to have been beloved by the people and his queen Gunhild seems
+      to have had a bad influence on him.
+      Other accounts of Hakon may be found in "Fagrskinna" (chaps. 25-34),
+      "Agrip", "Historia", "Norvegiae", and in "Thjodrek" (chap. 4).
+      The reader is also referred to "Saxo", "Egla", "Laxdaela", "Kormaks Saga",
+      "Gisle Surssons Saga", "Halfred's Saga", "Floamanna Saga", "Viga Glum's
+      Saga", and to "Landnamabok".
+      Skald mentioned in this Saga are: -Glum Geirason, Thord Sjarekson,
+      Guthorm Sindre, Kormak Ogmundson, and Eyvind Skaldaspiller. In the "Egla"
+      are found many poems belonging to this epoch by Egil Skallagrimson.
+      In "Fagrskinna" is found a poem (not given by Snorre) which Gunhild (his
+      wife) had made on King Eirik after his death, telling how Odin welcomed
+      him to Valhal. The author or skald who composed it is not known, but it is
+      considered to be one of the gems of old Norse poetry, and we here quote it
+      in Vigfusson's translation in his "Corpus Poeticum", vol. i. pp. 260, 261.
+      Gudbrand Vigfusson has filled up a few gaps from "Hakonarmat", the poem at
+      the end of this Saga. We have changed Vigfusson's orthography of names,
+      and brought them into harmony with the spelling used in this work: -Ed.
+      "Odin wakes in the morning and cries, as he opens his eyes, with his dream
+      still fresh in his mind: -'What dreams are these? I thought I arose
+      before daybreak to make Valhal ready for a host of slain. I woke up the
+      host of the chosen. I bade them ride up to strew the benches, and to till
+      up the beer-vats, and I bade valkyries to bear the wine, as if a king were
+      coming. I look for the coming of some noble chiefs from the earth,
+      wherefore my heart is glad.'
+      "Brage, Odin's counsellor, now wakes, as a great din is heard without, and
+      calls out: -'What is that thundering? as if a thousand men or some
+      great host were tramping on -the walls and the benches are creaking
+      withal -as if Balder was coming back to the ball of Odin?'
+      "Odin answers: -'Surely thou speakest foolishly, good Brage, although
+      thou art very wise. It thunders for Eirik the king, that is coming to the
+      hall of Odin.'
+      "Then turning to his heroes, he cries: -'Sigmund and Sinfjotle, rise
+      in haste and go forth to meet the prince! Bid him in if it be Eirik, for
+      it is he whom I look for.'
+      "Sigmund answers: -'Why lookest thou more for Eirik, the king, to
+      Odin's hall, than for other kings?'
+      "Odin answers: -'Because he has reddened his brand, and borne his
+      bloody sword in many a land.'
+      "Quoth Sigmund: -'Why didst thou rob him, the chosen king of victory
+      then, seeing thou thoughtest him so brave?'
+      "Odin answered: -'Because it is not surely to be known, when the grey
+      wolf shall come upon the seat of the god.'
+      SECOND SCENE. -Without Valhal. Sigmund and Sinfjotle go outside the
+      hall and meet Eirik.
+      "Quoth Sigmund: -'Hail to thee, Eirik, be welcome here, and come into
+      the hall, thou gallant king! Now I will ask thee, what kings are these
+      that follow thee from the clash of the sword edges?'
+      "Eirik answers: -'They are five kings; I will tell thee all their
+      names; I myself am the sixth (the names followed in the song, whereof the
+      rest is lost.)
+      "Fagrskinna" says "Hakonarmal" was the model of this poem.
+      1. HAKON CHOSEN KING.
+      Hakon, Athelstan's foster-son, was in England at the time (A.D. 934) he
+      heard of his father King Harald's death, and he immediately made himself
+      ready to depart. King Athelstan gave him men, and a choice of good ships,
+      and fitted him out for his journey most excellently. In harvest time he
+      came to Norway, where he heard of the death of his brothers, and that King
+      Eirik was then in Viken. Then Hakon sailed northwards to Throndhjem, where
+      he went to Sigurd earl of Hlader who was the ablest man in Norway. He gave
+      Hakon a good reception; and they made a league with each other, by which
+      Hakon promised great power to Sigurd if he was made king. They assembled
+      then a numerous Thing, and Sigurd the earl recommended Hakon's cause to
+      the Thing, and proposed him to the bondes as king. Then Hakon himself
+      stood up and spoke; and the people said to each other, two and two, as
+      they heard him, "Herald Harfager is come again, grown and young." The
+      beginning of Hakon's speech was, that he offered himself to the bondes as
+      king, and desired from them the title of king, and aid and forces to
+      defend the kingdom. He promised, on the other hand, to make all the bondes
+      udal-holders, and give every man udal rights to the land he lived on. This
+      speech met such joyful applause, that the whole public cried and shouted
+      that they would take him to be king. And so it was that the Throndhjem
+      people took Hakon, who was then fifteen years old, for king; and he took a
+      court or bodyguard, and servants, and proceeded through the country. The
+      news reached the Uplands that the people in Throndhjem had taken to
+      themselves a king, who in every respect was like King Harald Harfager, -with
+      the difference, that Harald had made all the people of the land vassals,
+      and unfree; but this Hakon wished well to every man, and offered the
+      bondes to give them their udal rights again, which Harald had taken from
+      them. All were rejoiced at this news, and it passed from mouth to mouth, -it
+      flew, like fire in dry grass, through the whole land, and eastward to the
+      land's end. Many bondes came from the Uplands to meet King Hakon. Some
+      sent messengers, some tokens; and all to the same effect -that his
+      men they would be: and the king received all thankfully.
+      2. KING HAKON'S PROGRESS THROUGH THE COUNTRY.
+      Early in winter (935), the king went to the Uplands, and summoned the
+      people to a Thing; and there streamed all to him who could come. He was
+      proclaimed king at every Thing; and then he proceeded eastward to Viken,
+      where his brother's sons, Trygve and Gudrod, and many others, came unto
+      him, and complained of the sorrow and evil his brother Eirik had wrought.
+      The hatred to King Eirik grew more and more, the more liking all men took
+      to King Hakon; and they got more boldness to say what they thought. King
+      Hakon gave Trygve and Gudrod the title of kings, and the dominions which
+      King Harald had bestowed on their fathers. Trygve got Ranrike and
+      Vingulmark, and Gudrod, Vestfold; but as they were young, and in the years
+      of childhood, he appointed able men to rule the land for them. He gave
+      them the country on the same conditions as it had been given before, -that
+      they should have half of the scat and revenues with him. Towards spring
+      King Hakon returned north, over the Uplands, to Throndhjem.
+      3. EIRIK'S DEPARTURE FROM THE COUNTRY.
+      King Hakon, early in spring, collected a great army at Throndhjem, and
+      fitted out ships. The people of Viken also had a great force on foot, and
+      intended to join Hakon. King Eirik also levied people in the middle of the
+      country; but it went badly with him to gather people, for the leading men
+      left him, and went over to Hakon. As he saw himself not nearly strong
+      enough to oppose Hakon, he sailed (A.D. 935) out to the West sea with such
+      men as would follow him. He first sailed to Orkney, and took many people
+      with him from that country; and then went south towards England,
+      plundering in Scotland, and in the north parts of England, wherever he
+      could land. Athelstan, the king of England, sent a message to Eirik,
+      offering him dominions under him in England; saying that King Harald his
+      father was a good friend of King Athelstan, and therefore he would do
+      kindly towards his sons. Messengers passed between the two kings; and it
+      came to an agreement that King Eirik should take Northumberland as a fief
+      from King Athelstan, and which land he should defend against the Danes or
+      other vikings. Eirik should let himself be baptized, together with his
+      wife and children, and all the people who had followed him. Eirik accepted
+      this offer, and was baptized, and adopted the right faith. Northumberland
+      is called a fifth part of England. Eirik had his residence at York, where
+      Lodbrok's sons, it was said, had formerly been, and Northumberland was
+      principally inhabited by Northmen. Since Lodbrok's sons had taken the
+      country, Danes and Northmen often plundered there, when the power of the
+      land was out of their hands. Many names of places in the country are
+      Norwegian; as Grimsby, Haukfliot, and many others.
+      4. EIRIK'S DEATH.
+      King Eirik had many people about him, for he kept many Northmen who had
+      come with him from the East; and also many of his friends had joined him
+      from Norway. But as he had little land, he went on a cruise every summer,
+      and plundered in Scotland, the Hebrides, Ireland, and Bretland, by which
+      he gathered property. King Athelstan died on a sick bed, after a reign of
+      fourteen years, eight weeds, and three days. After him his brother Jatmund
+      was king of England, and he was no friend to the Northmen. King Eirik,
+      also, was in no great favour with him; and the word went about that King
+      Jatmund would set another chief over Northumberland. Now when King Eirik
+      heard this, he set off on a viking cruise to the westward; and from the
+      Orkneys took with him the Earls Arnkel and Erlend, the sons of Earl
+      Torfeinar. Then he sailed to the Hebrides, where there were many vikings
+      and troop-kings, who joined their men to his. With all this force he
+      steered to Ireland first, where he took with him all the men he could, and
+      then to Bretland, and plundered; and sailed thereafter south to England,
+      and marauded there as elsewhere. The people fled before him wherever he
+      appeared. As King Eirik was a bold warrior, and had a great force, he
+      trusted so much to his people that he penetrated far inland in the
+      country, following and plundering the fugitives. King Jatmund had set a
+      king, who was called Olaf, to defend the land; and he gathered an
+      innumerable mass of people, with whom he marched against King Eirik. A
+      dreadful battle ensued, in which many Englishmen fell; but for one who
+      fell came three in his place out of the country behind, and when evening
+      came on the loss of men turned on the side of the Northmen, and many
+      people fell. Towards the end of the day, King Eirik and five kings with
+      him fell. Three of them were Guthorm and his two sons, Ivar and Harek:
+      there fell, also, Sigurd and Ragnvald; and with them Torfeinar's two sons,
+      Arnkel and Erlend. Besides these, there was a great slaughter of Northmen;
+      and those who escaped went to Northumberland, and brought the news to
+      Gunhild and her sons (A.D. 941).
+      5. GUNHILD AND HER SONS.
+      When Gunhild and her sons knew for certain that King Eirik had fallen,
+      after having plundered the land of the King of England, they thought there
+      was no peace to be expected for them; and they made themselves ready to
+      depart from Northumberland, with all the ships King Eirik had left, and
+      all the men who would go with them. They took also all the loose property,
+      and goods which they had gathered partly as taxes in England, partly as
+      booty on their expeditions. With their army they first steered northward
+      to Orkney, where Thorfin Hausakljufer was earl, a son of Torfeinar, and
+      took up their station there for a time. Eirik's sons subdued these islands
+      and Hjaltland, took scat for themselves, and staid there all the winter;
+      but went on viking cruises in summer to the West, and plundered in
+      Scotland and Ireland. About this Glum Geirason sings: -
+     "The hero who knows well to ride
+     The sea-horse o'er the foamingtide, -
+     He who in boyhood wild rode o'er
+     The seaman's horse to Skanea's shore.
+     And showed the Danes his galley's bow,
+     Right nobly scours the ocean now.
+     On Scotland's coast he lights the brand
+     Of flaming war; with conquering hand
+     Drives many a Scottish warrior tall
+     To the bright seats in Odin's hall.
+     The fire-spark, by the fiend of war
+     Fanned to a flame, soon spreads afar.
+     Crowds trembling fly, -the southern foes
+     Fall thick beneath the hero's blows:
+     The hero's blade drips red with gore,
+     Staining the green sward on the shore."
+      6. BATTLE IN JUTLAND.
+      When King Eirik had left the country, King Hakon, Athelstan's foster-son,
+      subdued the whole of Norway. The first winter (A.D. 936) he visited the
+      western parts, and then went north, and settled in Throndhjem. But as no
+      peace could be reasonably looked for so long as King Eirik with his forces
+      could come to Norway from the West sea, he set himself with his
+      men-at-arms in the middle of the country, -in the Fjord district, or
+      in Sogn, or Hordaland, or Rogaland. Hakon placed Sigurd earl of Hlader
+      over the whole Throradhjem district, as he and his father had before had
+      it under Harald Harfager. When King Hakon heard of his brother Eirik's
+      death, and also that his sons had no footing in England, he thought there
+      was not much to fear from them, and he went with his troops one summer
+      eastward to Viken. At that time the Danes plundered often in Viken, and
+      wrought much evil there; but when they heard that King Hakon was come with
+      a great army, they got out of the way, to Halland; and those who were
+      nearest to King Hakon went out to sea, and over to Jotland (Jutland). When
+      the king heard of this, he sailed after them with all his army. On
+      arriving in Jutland he plundered all round; and when the country people
+      heard of it, they assembled in a great body, and determined to defend
+      their land, and fight. There was a great battle; and King Hakon fought so
+      boldly, that he went forward before his banner without helmet or coat of
+      mail. King Hakon won the victory, and drove the fugitives far up the
+      country. So says Guthorm Sindre, in his song of Hakon: -
+     "Furrowing the deep-blue sea with oars,
+     The king pursues to Jutland's shores.
+     They met; and in the battle storm
+     Of clashing shields, full many a form
+     Of goodly warrior on the plain,
+     Full many a corpse by Hakon slain,
+     Glutted the ravens, who from far,
+     Scenting the banquet-feast of war,
+     Came in black flocks to Jutland's plains
+     To drink the blood-wine from the veins."
+      7. BATTLE IN EYRARSUND (THE SOUND).
+      Then Hakon steered southwards with his fleet to seek the vikings, and so
+      on to Sealand. He rowed with two cutters into the Eyrarsund, where he
+      found eleven viking ships, and instantly attacked them. It ended in his
+      gaining the victory, and clearing the viking ships of all their men. So
+      says Guthorm Sindre: -
+     "Hakon the Brave, whose skill all know
+     To bend in battle storm the bow,
+     Rushed o'er the waves to Sealand's tongue,
+     His two war-ships with gilt shields hung,
+     And cleared the decks with his blue sword
+     That rules the fate of war, on board
+     Eleven ships of the Vindland men. -
+     Famous is Hakon's name since then."
+      8. KING HAKON'S EXPEDITION TO DENMARK.
+      Thereafter King Hakon carried war far and wide in Sealand; plundering
+      some, slaying others, taking some prisoners of war, taking ransom from
+      others, and all without opposition. Then Hakon proceeded along the coast
+      of Skane, pillaging everywhere, levying taxes and ransome from the
+      country, and killing all vikings, both Danish and Vindish. He then went
+      eastwards to the district of Gautland, marauded there, and took great
+      ransom from the country. So says Guthorm Sindre: -
+     "Hakon, who midst the battle shock
+     Stands like a firmly-rooted oak,
+     Subdued all Sealand with the sword:
+     From Vindland vikings the sea-bord
+     Of Scania swept; and, with the shield
+     Of Odin clad, made Gautland yield
+     A ransom of the ruddy gold,
+     Which Hakon to his war-men bold
+     Gave with free hand, who in his feud
+     Against the arrow-storm had stood."
+      King Hakon returned back in autumn with his army and an immense booty; and
+      remained all the winter (A.D. 946) in Viken to defend it against the Danes
+      and Gautlanders, if they should attack it.
+      9. OF KING TRYGVE.
+      In the same winter King Trygve Olafson returned from a viking cruise in
+      the West sea, having before ravaged in Ireland and Scotland. In spring
+      (A.D. 946) King Hakon went north, and set his brother's son, King Trygve,
+      over Viken to defend that country against enemies. He gave him also in
+      property all that he could reconquer of the country in Denmark, which the
+      summer before King Hakon had subjected to payment of scat to him. So says
+      Guthorm: -
+     "King Hakon, whose sharp sword dyes red
+     The bright steel cap on many a head,
+     Has set a warrior brave and stout
+     The foreign foeman to keep out, -
+     To keep that green land safe from war
+     Which black Night bore to dwarf Annar (1).
+     For many a carle whose trade's to wield
+     The battle-axe, and swing the shield,
+     On the swan's ocean-skates has come,
+     In white-winged ships, across the foam, -
+     Across the sea, from far Ireland,
+     To war against the Norseman's land."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The dwarf Annar was the husband of Night, and Earth was
+     their daughter. -L.
+      10. OF GUNHILD S SONS.
+      King Harald Gormson ruled over Denmark at that time. He took it much amiss
+      that King Hakon had made war in his dominions, and the report went that he
+      would take revenge; but this did not take place so soon. When Gunhild and
+      her sons heard there was enmity between Denmark and Norway, they began to
+      turn their course from the West. They married King Eirik's daughter,
+      Ragnhild, to Arnfin, a son of Thorfin Hausakljufer; and as soon as Eirik's
+      sons went away, Thorfin took the earldom again over the Orkney Islands.
+      Gamle Eirikson was somewhat older than the other brothers, but still he
+      was not a grown man. When Gunhild and her sons came from the westward to
+      Denmark, they were well received by King Harald. He gave them great fiefs
+      in his kingdom, so that they could maintain themselves and their men very
+      well. He also took Harald Eirikson to be his foster-son, set him on his
+      knee, and thereafter he was brought up at the Danish king's court. Some of
+      Eirik's sons went out on viking expeditions as soon as they were old
+      enough, and gathered property, ravaging all around in the East sea. They
+      grew up quickly to be handsome men, and far beyond their years in strength
+      and perfection. Glum Geirason tells of one of them in the Grafeld song: -
+     "I've heard that, on the Eastland coast,
+     Great victories were won and lost.
+     The king, whose hand is ever graced
+     With gift to skald, his banner placed
+     On, and still on; while, midst the play
+     Of swords, sung sharp his good sword's sway
+     As strong in arm as free of gold,
+     He thinn'd the ranks of warriors bold."
+      Then Eirik's sons turned northwards with their troops to Viken and
+      marauded there; but King Trygve kept troops on foot with which he met
+      them, and they had many a battle, in which the victory was sometimes on
+      one side, and sometimes on the other. Sometimes Eirik's sons plundered in
+      Viken, and sometimes Trygve in Sealand and Halland.
+      11. KING HAKON AS A LAW-GIVER.
+      As long as Hakon was king in Norway, there was good peace between the
+      bondes and merchants; so that none did harm either to the life or goods of
+      the other. Good seasons also there were, both by sea and land. King Hakon
+      was of a remarkably cheerful disposition, clever in words, and very
+      condescending. He was a man of great understanding also, and bestowed
+      attention on law-giving. He gave out the Gula-thing's laws on the advice
+      of Thorleif Spake (the Wise); also the Frosta-thing's laws on the advice
+      of Earl Sigurd, and of other Throndhjem men of wisdom. Eidsiva-thing laws
+      were first established in the country by Halfdan the Black, as has before
+      been written.
+      12. THE BIRTH OF EARL HAKON THE GREAT.
+      King Hakon kept Yule at Throndhjem, and Earl Sigurd had made a feast for
+      him at Hlader. The night of the first day of Yule the earl's wife,
+      Bergljot, was brought to bed of a boy-child, which afterwards King Hakon
+      poured water over, and gave him his own name. The boy grew up, and became
+      in his day a mighty and able man, and was earl after his father, who was
+      King Hakon's dearest friend.
+      13. OF EYSTEIN THE BAD.
+      Eystein, a king of the Uplands, whom some called the Great, and some the
+      Bad, once on a time made war in Throndhjem, and subdued Eyna district and
+      Sparbyggia district, and set his own son Onund over them; but the
+      Throndhjem people killed him. Then King Eystein made another inroad into
+      Throndhjem, and ravaged the land far and wide, and subdued it. He then
+      offered the people either his slave, who was called Thorer Faxe, or his
+      dog, whose name was Saur, to be their king. They preferred the dog, as
+      they thought they would sooner get rid of him. Now the dog was, by
+      witchcraft, gifted with three men's wisdom; and when he barked, he spoke
+      one word and barked two. A collar and chain of gold and silver were made
+      for him, and his courtiers carried him on their shoulders when the weather
+      or ways were foul. A throne was erected for him, and he sat upon a high
+      place, as kings are used to sit. He dwelt on Eyin Idre (Idre Isle), and
+      had his mansion in a place now called Saurshaug. It is told that the
+      occasion of his death was that the wolves one day broke into his fold, and
+      his courtiers stirred him up to defend his cattle; but when he ran down
+      from his mound, and attacked the wolves, they tore him into pieces. Many
+      other extraordinary things were done by this King Eystein against the
+      Throndhjem people, and in consequence of this persecution and trouble,
+      many chiefs and people fled and left their udal properties.
+      14. JAMTALAND AND HELSINGJALAND.
+      Ketil Jamte, a son of Earl Onund of Sparabu, went eastward across the
+      mountain ridge, and with him a great multitude, who took all their
+      farm-stock and goods with them. They cleared the woods, and established
+      large farms, and settled the country afterwards called Jamtaland. Thorer
+      Helsing, Ketil's grandson, on account of a murder, ran away from Jamtaland
+      and fled eastward through the forest, and settled there. Many people
+      followed, and that country, which extends eastward down to the seacoast,
+      was called Helsingjaland; and its eastern parts are inhabited by Swedes.
+      Now when Harald Harfager took possession of the whole country many people
+      fled before him, both people of Throndhjem and of Naumudal districts; and
+      thus new settlers came to Jamtaland, and some all the way to
+      Helsingjaland. The Helsingjaland people travelled into Svithiod for their
+      merchandise, and thus became altogether subjects of that country. The
+      Jamtaland people, again, were in a manner between the two countries; and
+      nobody cared about them, until Hakon entered into friendly intercourse
+      with Jamtaland, and made friends of the more powerful people. Then they
+      resorted to him, and promised him obedience and payment of taxes, and
+      became his subjects; for they saw nothing but what was good in him, and
+      being of Norwegian race they would rather stand under his royal authority
+      than under the king of Sweden: and he gave them laws, and rights to their
+      land. All the people of Helsingjaland did the same, -that is, all who
+      were of Norwegian race, from the other side of the great mountain ridge.
+      15. HAKON SPREADS CHRISTIANITY.
+      King Hakon was a good Christian when he came to Norway; but as the whole
+      country was heathen, with much heathenish sacrifice, and as many great
+      people, as well as the favour of the common people, were to be
+      conciliated, he resolved to practice his Christianity in private. But he
+      kept Sundays, and the Friday fasts, and some token of the greatest
+      holy-days. He made a law that the festival of Yule should begin at the
+      same time as Christian people held it, and that every man, under penalty,
+      should brew a meal of malt into ale, and therewith keep the Yule holy as
+      long as it lasted. Before him, the beginning of Yule, or the slaughter
+      night, was the night of mid-winter (Dec. 14), and Yule was kept for three
+      days thereafter. It was his intent, as soon as he had set himself fast in
+      the land, and had subjected the whole to his power, to introduce
+      Christianity. He went to work first by enticing to Christianity the men
+      who were dearest to him; and many, out of friendship to him, allowed
+      themselves to be baptized, and some laid aside sacrifices. He dwelt long
+      in the Throndhjem district, for the strength of the country lay there; and
+      when he thought that, by the support of some powerful people there, he
+      could set up Christianity he sent a message to England for a bishop and
+      other teachers; and when they arrived in Norway, Hakon made it known that
+      he would proclaim Christianity over all the land. The people of More and
+      Raumsdal referred the matter to the people of Throndhjem. King Hakon then
+      had several churches consecrated, and put priests into them; and when he
+      came to Throndhjem he summoned the bondes to a Thing, and invited them to
+      accept Christianity. They gave an answer to the effect that they would
+      defer the matter until the Frosta-thing, at which there would be men from
+      every district of the Throndhjem country, and then they would give their
+      determination upon this difficult matter.
+      16. ABOUT SACRIFICES.
+      Sigurd, earl of Hlader, was one of the greatest men for sacrifices, and so
+      had Hakon his father been; and Sigurd always presided on account of the
+      king at all the festivals of sacrifice in the Throndhjem country. It was
+      an old custom, that when there was to be sacrifice all the bondes should
+      come to the spot where the temple stood and bring with them all that they
+      required while the festival of the sacrifice lasted. To this festival all
+      the men brought ale with them; and all kinds of cattle, as well as horses,
+      were slaughtered, and all the blood that came from them was called
+      "hlaut", and the vessels in which it was collected were called
+      hlaut-vessels. Hlaut-staves were made, like sprinkling brushes, with which
+      the whole of the altars and the temple walls, both outside and inside,
+      were sprinkled over, and also the people were sprinkled with the blood;
+      but the flesh was boiled into savoury meat for those present. The fire was
+      in the middle of the floor of the temple, and over it hung the kettles,
+      and the full goblets were handed across the fire; and he who made the
+      feast, and was a chief, blessed the full goblets, and all the meat of the
+      sacrifice. And first Odin's goblet was emptied for victory and power to
+      his king; thereafter, Niord's and Freyja's goblets for peace and a good
+      season. Then it was the custom of many to empty the brage-goblet (1); and
+      then the guests emptied a goblet to the memory of departed friends, called
+      the remembrance goblet. Sigurd the earl was an open-handed man, who did
+      what was very much celebrated; namely, he made a great sacrifice festival
+      at Hlader of which he paid all the expenses. Kormak Ogmundson sings of it
+      in his ballad of Sigurd: -
+     "Of cup or platter need has none
+     The guest who seeks the generous one, -
+     Sigurd the Generous, who can trace
+     His lineage from the giant race;
+     For Sigurd's hand is bounteous, free, -
+     The guardian of the temples he.
+     He loves the gods, his liberal hand
+     Scatters his sword's gains o'er the land -"
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The brage-goblet, over which vows were made. -L.
+      17. THE FROSTA-THING.
+      King Hakon came to the Frosta-thing, at which a vast multitude of people
+      were assembled. And when the Thing was seated, the king spoke to the
+      people, and began his speech with saying, -it was his message and
+      entreaty to the bondes and householding men, both great and small, and to
+      the whole public in general, young and old, rich and poor, women as well
+      as men, that they should all allow themselves to be baptized, and should
+      believe in one God, and in Christ the son of Mary and refrain from all
+      sacrifices and heathen gods; and should keep holy the seventh day, and
+      abstain from all work on it, and keep a fast on the seventh day. As soon
+      as the king had proposed this to the bondes, great was the murmur and
+      noise among the crowd. They complained that the king wanted to take their
+      labour and their old faith from them, and the land could not be cultivated
+      in that way. The labouring men and slaves thought that they could not work
+      if they did not get meat; and they said it was the character of King
+      Hakon, and his father, and all the family, to be generous enough with
+      their money, but sparing with their diet. Asbjorn of Medalhus in the
+      Gaulardal stood up, and answered thus to the king's proposal: -
+      "We bondes, King Hakon, when we elected thee to be our king, and got back
+      our udal rights at the Thing held in Throndhjem, thought we had got into
+      heaven; but now we don't know whether we have really got back our freedom,
+      or whether thou wishest to make vassals of us again by this extraordinary
+      proposal that we should abandon the ancient faith which our fathers and
+      forefathers have held from the oldest times, in the times when the dead
+      were burnt, as well as since that they are laid under mounds, and which,
+      although they were braver than the people of our days, has served us as a
+      faith to the present time. We have also held thee so dear, that we have
+      allowed thee to rule and give law and right to all the country. And even
+      now we bondes will unanimously hold by the law which thou givest us here
+      in the Frosta-thing, and to which we have also given our assent; and we
+      will follow thee, and have thee for our king, as long as there is a living
+      man among us bondes here in this Thing assembled. But thou, king, must use
+      some moderation towards us, and only require from us such things as we can
+      obey thee in, and are not impossible for us. If, however, thou wilt take
+      up this matter with a high hand, and wilt try thy power and strength
+      against us, we bondes have resolved among ourselves to part with thee, and
+      to take to ourselves some other chief, who will so conduct himself towards
+      us that we can freely and safely enjoy that faith that suits our own
+      inclinations. Now, king, thou must choose one or other of these conditions
+      before the Thing is ended."
+      The bondes gave loud applause to this speech, and said it expressed their
+      will, and they would stand or fall by what had been spoken. When silence
+      was again restored, Earl Sigurd said, "It is King Hakon's will to give way
+      to you, the bondes, and never to separate himself from your friendship."
+      The bondes replied, that it was their desire that the king should offer a
+      sacrifice for peace and a good year, as his father was want to do; and
+      thereupon the noise and tumult ceased, and the Thing was concluded. Earl
+      Sigurd spoke to the king afterwards, and advised him not to refuse
+      altogether to do as the people desired, saying there was nothing else for
+      it but to give way to the will of the bondes; "for it is, as thou hast
+      heard thyself, the will and earnest desire of the head-people, as well as
+      of the multitude. Hereafter we may find a good way to manage it." And in
+      this resolution the king and earl agreed (A.D. 950).
+      18. KING HAKON OFFERS SACRIFICES.
+      The harvest thereafter, towards the winter season, there was a festival of
+      sacrifice at Hlader, and the king came to it. It had always been his
+      custom before, when he was present at a place where there was sacrifice,
+      to take his meals in a little house by himself, or with some few of his
+      men; but the bondes grumbled that he did not seat himself in his high-seat
+      at these the most joyous of the meetings of the people. The earl said that
+      the king should do so this time. The king accordingly sat upon his
+      high-seat. Now when the first full goblet was filled, Earl Sigurd spoke
+      some words over it, blessed it in Odin's name, and drank to the king out
+      of the horn; and the king then took it, and made the sign of the cross
+      over it. Then said Kar of Gryting, "What does the king mean by doing so?
+      Will he not sacrifice?" Earl Sigurd replies, "The king is doing what all
+      of you do, who trust to your power and strength. He is blessing the full
+      goblet in the name of Thor, by making the sign of his hammer over it
+      before he drinks it." On this there was quietness for the evening. The
+      next day, when the people sat down to table, the bondes pressed the king
+      strongly to eat of horse-flesh (1); and as he would on no account do so,
+      they wanted him to drink of the soup; and as he would not do this, they
+      insisted he should at least taste the gravy; and on his refusal they were
+      going to lay hands on him. Earl Sigurd came and made peace among them, by
+      asking the king to hold his mouth over the handle of the kettle, upon
+      which the fat smoke of the boiled horse-flesh had settled itself; and the
+      king first laid a linen cloth over the handle, and then gaped over it, and
+      returned to the high-seat; but neither party was satisfied with this.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) This eating of horse-flesh at these religious festivals
+     was considered the most direct proof of paganism in the
+     following times, and was punished by death or mutilation by
+     Saint Olaf.  It was a ceremony apparently commemorative of
+     their Asiatic origin and ancestors.
+      19. FEAST OF THE SACRIFICE AT MORE.
+      The winter thereafter the king prepared a Yule feast in More, and eight
+      chiefs resolved with each other to meet at it. Four of them were from
+      without the Throndhjem district -namely, Kar of Gryting, Asbjorn of
+      Medalhus, Thorberg of Varnes, and Orm from Ljoxa; and from the Throndhjem
+      district, Botolf of Olvishaug, Narfe of Staf in Veradal, Thrand Hak from
+      Egg, and Thorer Skeg from Husaby in Eyin Idre. These eight men bound
+      themselves, the four first to root out Christianity in Norway, and the
+      four others to oblige the king to offer sacrifice to the gods. The four
+      first went in four ships southwards to More, and killed three priests, and
+      burnt three churches, and then they returned. Now, when King Hakon and
+      Earl Sigurd came to More with their court, the bondes assembled in great
+      numbers; and immediately, on the first day of the feast, the bondes
+      insisted hard with the king that he should offer sacrifice, and threatened
+      him with violence if he refused. Earl Sigurd tried to make peace between
+      them, and brought it so far that the king took some bits of horse-liver,
+      and emptied all the goblets the bondes filled for him without the sign of
+      the cross; but as soon as the feast was over, the king and the earl
+      returned to Hlader. The king was very ill pleased, and made himself ready
+      to leave Throndhjem forthwith with all his people; saying that the next
+      time he came to Throndhjem, he would come with such strength of
+      men-at-arms that he would repay the bondes for their enmity towards him.
+      Earl Sigurd entreated the king not to take it amiss of the bondes; adding,
+      that it was not wise to threaten them, or to make war upon the people
+      within the country, and especially in the Throndhjem district, where the
+      strength of the land lay; but the king was so enraged that he would not
+      listen to a word from anybody. He went out from Throndhjem, and proceeded
+      south to More, where he remained the rest of the winter, and on to the
+      spring season (A.D. 950); and when summer came he assembled men, and the
+      report was that he intended with this army to attack the Throndhjem
+      people.
+      20. BATTLE AT OGVALDSNES.
+      But just as the king had embarked with a great force of troops, the news
+      was brought him from the south of the country, that King Eirik's sons had
+      come from Denmark to Viken and had driven King Trygve Olafson from his
+      ships at Sotanes, and then had plundered far and wide around in Viken, and
+      that many had submitted to them. Now when King Hakon heard this news, he
+      thought that help was needed; and he sent word to Earl Sigurd, and to the
+      other chiefs from whom he could expect help, to hasten to his assistance.
+      Sigurd the earl came accordingly with a great body of men, among whom were
+      all the Throndhjem people who had set upon him the hardest to offer
+      sacrifice; and all made their peace with the king, by the earl's
+      persuasion. Now King Hakon sailed south along the coast; and when he came
+      south as far as Stad, he heard that Eirik's sons were come to North Agder.
+      Then they advanced against each other, and met at Kormt. Both parties left
+      their ships there, and gave battle at Ogvaldsnes. Both parties had a great
+      force, and it was a great battle. King Hakon went forward bravely, and
+      King Guthorm Eirikson met him with his troop, and they exchanged blows
+      with each other. Guthorm fell, and his standard was cut down. Many people
+      fell around him. The army of Eirik's sons then took flight to their ships
+      and rowed away with the loss of many a man. So says Guthorm Sindre: -
+     "The king's voice waked the silent host
+     Who slept beside the wild sea-coast,
+     And bade the song of spear and sword
+     Over the battle plain be heard.
+     Where heroes' shields the loudest rang,
+     Where loudest was the sword-blade's clang,
+     By the sea-shore at Kormt Sound,
+     Hakon felled Guthorm to the ground."
+      Now King Hakon returned to his ships, and pursued Gunhild's sons. And both
+      parties sailed all they could sail, until they came to East Adger, from
+      whence Eirik's sons set out to sea, and southwards for Jutland (A.D. 950).
+      Guthorm Sindre speaks of it in his song: -
+     "And Guthorm's brothers too, who know
+     So skilfully to bend the bow,
+     The conquering hand must also feel
+     Of Hakon, god of the bright steel, -
+     The sun-god, whose bright rays, that dart
+     Flame-like, are swords that pierce the heart.
+     Well I remember how the King
+     Hakon, the battle's life and spring,
+     O'er the wide ocean cleared away
+     Eirik's brave sons.  They durst not stay,
+     But round their ships' sides hung their shields
+     And fled across the blue sea-fields."
+      King Hakon returned then northwards to Norway, but Eirik's sons remained a
+      long time in Denmark.
+      21. KING HAKON'S LAWS.
+      King Hakon after this battle made a law, that all inhabited land over the
+      whole country along the sea-coast, and as far back from it as the salmon
+      swims up in the rivers, should be divided into ship-raths according to the
+      districts; and it was fixed by law how many ships there should be from
+      each district, and how great each should be, when the whole people were
+      called out on service. For this outfit the whole inhabitants should be
+      bound whenever a foreign army came to the country. With this came also the
+      order that beacons should be erected upon the hills, so that every man
+      could see from the one to the other; and it is told that a war-signal
+      could thus be given in seven days, from the most southerly beacon to the
+      most northerly Thing-seat in Halogaland
+      22. CONCERNING EIRIK'S SONS.
+      Eirik's sons plundered much on the Baltic coasts and sometimes, as before
+      related, in Norway; but so long as Hakon ruled over Norway there was in
+      general good peace, and good seasons, and he was the most beloved of
+      kings. When Hakon had reigned about twenty years in Norway (A.D. 954),
+      Eirik's sons came from Denmark with a powerful army, of which a great part
+      consisted of the people who had followed them on their expeditions; but a
+      still greater army of Danes had been placed at their disposal by King
+      Harald Gormson. They sailed with a fair wind from Vendil, and came to
+      Agder; and then sailed northwards, night and day, along the coast. But the
+      beacons were not fired, because it had been usual to look for them lighted
+      from the east onwards, and nobody had observed them from the east coast;
+      and besides King Hakon had set heavy penalties for giving false alarm, by
+      lighting the beacons without occasion. The reason of this was, that ships
+      of war and vikings cruised about and plundered among the outlying islands,
+      and the country people took them for Eirik's sons, and lighted the
+      beacons, and set the whole country in trouble and dread of war. Sometimes,
+      no doubt, the sons of Eirik were there; but having only their own troops,
+      and no Danish army with them, they returned to Denmark; and sometimes
+      these were other vikings. King Hakon was very angry at this, because it
+      cost both trouble and money to no purpose. The bondes also suffered by
+      these false alarms when they were given uselessly; and thus it happened
+      that no news of this expedition of Eirik's sons circulated through the
+      land until they had come as far north as Ulfasund, where they lay for
+      seven days. Then spies set off across Eid and northwards to More. King
+      Hakon was at that time in the island Frede, in North More, at a place
+      called Birkistrand, where he had a dwelling-house, and had no troops with
+      him, only his bodyguard or court, and the neighbouring bondes he had
+      invited to his house.
+      23. OF EGIL ULSERK.
+      The spies came to King Hakon, and told him that Eirik's sons, with a great
+      army, lay just to the south of Stad. Then he called together the most
+      understanding of the men about him, and asked their opinion, whether he
+      should fight with Eirik's sons, although they had such a great multitude
+      with them, or should set off northwards to gather together more men. Now
+      there was a bonde there, by name Egil Ulserk, who was a very old man, but
+      in former days had been strong and stout beyond most men, and a hardy
+      man-at-arms withal, having long carried King Harald Harfager's banner.
+      Egil answered thus to the king's speech, -"I was in several battles
+      with thy father Harald the king, and he gave battle sometimes with many,
+      sometimes with few people; but he always came off with victory. Never did
+      I hear him ask counsel of his friends whether he should fly -and
+      neither shalt thou get any such counsel from us, king; but as we know we
+      have a brave leader, thou shalt get a trusty following from us." Many
+      others agreed with this speech, and the king himself declared he was most
+      inclined to fight with such strength as they could gather. It was so
+      determined. The king split up a war-arrow, which he sent off in all
+      directions, and by that token a number of men was collected in all haste.
+      Then said Egil Ulserk, -"At one time the peace had lasted so long I
+      was afraid I might come to die the death of old age (1), within doors upon
+      a bed of straw, although I would rather fall in battle following my chief.
+      And now it may so turn out in the end as I wished it to be."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) In all the sagas of this pagan time, the dying on a bed of
+     sickness is mentioned as a kind of derogatory end of a man
+     of any celebrity. -L.
+      24. BATTLE AT FREDARBERG.
+      Eirik's sons sailed northwards around Stad; as soon as the wind suited;
+      and when they had passed it, and heard where King Hakon was, they sailed
+      to meet him. King Hakon had nine ships, with which he lay under Fredarberg
+      in Feeysund; and Eirik's sons had twenty ships, with which they brought up
+      on the south side of the same cape, in Feeysund. King Hakon sent them a
+      message, asking them to go upon the land; and telling them that he had
+      hedged in with hazel boughs a place of combat at Rastarkalf, where there
+      is a flat large field, at the foot of a long and rather low ridge. Then
+      Eirik's sons left their ships, and went northwards over the neck of land
+      within Fredarberg, and onward to Rastarkalf. Then Egil asked King Hakon to
+      give him ten men with ten banners, and the king did so. Then Egil went
+      with his men under the ridge; but King Hakon went out upon the open field
+      with his army, and set up his banner, and drew up his army, saying, "Let
+      us draw up in a long line, that they may not surround us, as they have the
+      most men." And so it was done; and there was a severe battle, and a very
+      sharp attack. Then Egil Ulserk set up the ten banners he had with him, and
+      placed the men who carried them so that they should go as near the summit
+      of the ridge as possible, and leaving a space between each of them. They
+      went so near the summit that the banners could be seen over it, and moved
+      on as if they were coming behind the army of Eirik's sons. Now when the
+      men who stood uppermost in the line of the troops of Eirik's sons saw so
+      many flying banners advancing high over the edge of the ridge, they
+      supposed a great force must be following, who would come behind their
+      army, and between them and their ships. They made each other acquainted
+      with what was going on in a loud shout, and the whole took to flight; and
+      when the king saw it, they fled with the rest. King Hakon now pushes on
+      briskly with his people, pursuing the flying, and killing many.
+      25. OF KING GAMLE.
+      When Gamle Eirikson came up the ridge of the hill he turned round, and he
+      observed that not more people were following than his men had been engaged
+      with already, and he saw it was but a stratagem of war; so he ordered the
+      war-horns to be blown, his banner to be set up, and he put his men in
+      battle order. On this, all his Northmen stood, and turned with him, but
+      the Danes fled to the ships; and when King Hakon and his men came thither,
+      there was again sharp conflict; but now Hakon had most people. At last the
+      Eirik's sons' force fled, and took the road south about the hill; but a
+      part of their army retreated upon the hill southwards, followed by King
+      Hakon. There is a flat field east of the ridge which runs westward along
+      the range of hills, and is bounded on its west side by a steep ridge.
+      Gamle's men retreated towards this ground; but Hakon followed so closely
+      that he killed some, and others ran west over the ridge, and were killed
+      on that side of it. King Hakon did not part with them till the last man of
+      them was killed.
+      26. KING GAMLE AND ULSERK FALL.
+      Gamle Eirikson fled from the ridge down upon the plain to the south of the
+      hill. There he turned himself again, and waited until more people gathered
+      to him. All his brothers, and many troops of their men, assembled there.
+      Egil Ulserk was in front, and in advance of Hakon's men, and made a stout
+      attack. He and King Gamle exchanged blows with each other, and King Gamle
+      got a grievous wound; but Egil fell, and many people with him. Then came
+      Hakon the king with the troops which had followed him, and a new battle
+      began. King Hakon pushed on, cutting down men on both sides of him, and
+      killing the one upon the top of the other. So sings Guthorm Sindre: -
+     "Scared by the sharp sword's singing sound,
+     Brandished in air, the foe gave ground.
+     The boldest warrior cannot stand
+     Before King Hakon's conquering hand;
+     And the king's banner ever dies
+     Where the spear-forests thickest rise.
+     Altho' the king had gained of old
+     Enough of Freyja's tears of gold (1),
+     He spared himself no more than tho'
+     He'd had no well-filled purse to show."
+      When Eirik's sons saw their men falling all round, they turned and fled to
+      their ships; but those who had sought the ships before had pushed off some
+      of them from the land, while some of them were still hauled up and on the
+      strand. Now the sons of Eirik and their men plunged into the sea, and
+      betook themselves to swimming. Gamle Eirikson was drowned; but the other
+      sons of Eirik reached their ships, and set sail with what men remained.
+      They steered southwards to Denmark, where they stopped a while, very ill
+      satisfied with their expedition.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Freyja's husband was Od; and her tears, when she wept at
+     the long absence of her husband, were tears of gold.  Od's
+     wife's tears is the skald's expression here for gold -
+     understood, no doubt, as readily as any allusion to Plutus
+     would convey the equivalent meaning in modern poetry. -L.
+      27. EGIL ULSERK'S BURIAL-GROUND.
+      King Hakon took all the ships of the sons of Eirik that had been left upon
+      the strand, and had them drawn quite up, and brought on the land. Then he
+      ordered that Egil Ulserk, and all the men of his army who had fallen,
+      should be laid in the ships, and covered entirely over with earth and
+      stones. King Hakon made many of the ships to be drawn up to the field of
+      battle, and the hillocks over them are to be seen to the present day a
+      little to the south of Fredarberg. At the time when King Hakon was killed,
+      when Glum Geirason, in his song, boasted of King Hakon's fall, Eyvind
+      Skaldaspiller composed these verses on this battle: -
+     "Our dauntless king with Gamle's gore
+     Sprinkled his bright sword o'er and o'er:
+     Sprinkled the gag that holds the mouth
+     Of the fell demon Fenriswolf (1).
+     Proud swelled our warriors' hearts when he
+     Drove Eirik's sons out to the sea,
+     With all their Guatland host: but now
+     Our warriors weep -Hakon lies low!"
+      High standing stones mark Egil Uslerk s grave.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The Fenriswolf, one of the children of Loke, begotten with
+     a giantess, was chained to a rock, and gagged by a sword
+     placed in his mouth, to prevent him devouring mankind.
+     Fenriswolf's gag is a skaldic expression for a sword. -L.
+      28. NEWS OF WAR COMES TO KING HAKON.
+      When King Hakon, Athelstan's foster-son, had been king for twenty-six
+      years after his brother Eirik had left the country, it happened (A.D. 960)
+      that he was at a feast in Hordaland in the house at Fitjar on the island
+      Stord, and he had with him at the feast his court and many of the
+      peasants. And just as the king was seated at the supper-table, his
+      watchmen who were outside observed many ships coming sailing along from
+      the south, and not very far from the island. Now, said the one to the
+      other, they should inform the king that they thought an armed force was
+      coming against them; but none thought it advisable to be the bearer of an
+      alarm of war to the king, as he had set heavy penalties on those who
+      raised such alarms falsely, yet they thought it unsuitable that the king
+      should remain in ignorance of what they saw. Then one of them went into
+      the room and asked Eyvind Finson to come out as fast as possible, for it
+      was very needful. Eyvind immediately came out and went to where he could
+      see the ships, and saw directly that a great army was on the way; and he
+      returned in all haste into the room, and, placing himself before the kind,
+      said, "Short is the hour for acting, and long the hour for feasting." The
+      king cast his eyes upon him, and said, "What now is in the way?" Eyvind
+      said -
+     "Up king!  the avengers are at hand!
+     Eirik's bold sons approach the land!
+     The Judgment of the sword they crave
+     Against their foe.  Thy wrath I brave;
+     Tho' well I know 'tis no light thing
+     To bring war-tidings to the king
+     And tell him 'tis no time to rest.
+     Up!  gird your armour to your breast:
+     Thy honour's dearer than my life;
+     Therefore I say, up to the strife!"
+      Then said the king, "Thou art too brave a fellow, Eyvind, to bring us any
+      false alarm of war." The others all said it was a true report. The king
+      ordered the tables to be removed, and then he went out to look at the
+      ships; and when it could be clearly seen that these were ships of war, the
+      king asked his men what resolution they should take -whether to give
+      battle with the men they had, or go on board ship and sail away northwards
+      along the land. "For it is easy to see," said he, "that we must now fight
+      against a much greater force than we ever had against us before; although
+      we thought just the same the last time we fought against Gunhild's sons."
+      No one was in a hurry to give an answer to the king; but at last Eyvind
+      replied to the king's speech: -
+     "Thou who in the battle-plain
+     Hast often poured the sharp spear-rain!
+     Ill it beseems our warriors brave
+     To fly upon the ocean wave:
+     To fly upon the blue wave north,
+     When Harald from the south comes forth,
+     With many a ship riding in pride
+     Upon the foaming ocean-tide;
+     With many a ship and southern viking, -
+     Let us take shield in hand, brave king!"
+      The king replied, "Thy counsel, Eyvind, is manly, and after my own heart;
+      but I will hear the opinion of others upon this matter." Now as the king's
+      men thought they discerned what way the king was inclined to take, they
+      answered that they would rather fall bravely and like men, than fly before
+      the Danes; adding, that they had often gained the victory against greater
+      odds of numbers. The king thanked them for their resolution, and bade them
+      arm themselves; and all the men did so. The king put on his armour, and
+      girded on his sword Kvernbit, and put a gilt helmet upon his head, and
+      took a spear (Kesja) in his hand, and a shield by his side. He then drew
+      up his courtmen and the bondes in one body, and set up his banner.
+      29. THE ARMAMENT OF EIRIK'S SONS.
+      After Gamle's death King Harald, Eirik's son, was the chief of the
+      brothers, and he had a great army with him from Denmark. In their army
+      were also their mother's brothers, -Eyvind Skreyja, and Alf Askman,
+      both strong and able men, and great man slayers. The sons of Eirik brought
+      up with their ships off the island, and it is said that their force was
+      not less than six to one, -so much stronger in men were Eirik's sons.
+      30. KING HAKON'S BATTLE ARRAY.
+      When King Hakon had drawn up his men, it is told of him that he threw off
+      his armour before the battle began. So sings Eyvind Skaldaspiller, in
+      Hakmarmal: -
+     "They found Blorn's brother bold
+     Under his banner as of old,
+     Ready for battle.  Foes advance, -
+     The front rank raise the shining lance:
+     And now begins the bloody fray!
+     Now!  now begins Hild's wild play!
+     Our noble king, whose name strikes fear
+     Into each Danish heart, -whose spear
+     Has single-handed spilt the blood
+     Of many a Danish noble, -stood
+     Beneath his helmet's eagle wing
+     Amidst his guards; but the brave king
+     Scorned to wear armour, while his men
+     Bared naked breasts against the rain
+     Of spear and arrow, his breast-plate rung
+     Against the stones; and, blithe and gay,
+     He rushed into the thickest fray.
+     With golden helm, and naked breast,
+     Brave Hakon played at slaughter's feast."
+      King Hakon selected willingly such men for his guard or court-men as were
+      distinguished for their strength and bravery, as his father King Harald
+      also used to do; and among these was Thoralf Skolmson the Strong, who went
+      on one side of the king. He had helmet and shield, spear and sword; and
+      his sword was called by the name of Footbreadth. It was said that Thoralf
+      and King Hakon were equal in strength. Thord Sjarekson speaks of it in the
+      poem he composed concerning Thoralf: -
+     "The king's men went with merry words
+     To the sharp clash of shields and flame swords,
+     When these wild rovers of the sea
+     At Fitlar fought.  Stout Thoralf he
+     Next to the Northmen's hero came,
+     Scattering wide round the battle flame
+     For in the storm of shields not one
+     Ventured like him with brave Hakon."
+      When both lines met there was a hard combat, and much bloodshed. The
+      combatants threw their spears and then drew their swords. Then King Hakon,
+      and Thoralf with him, went in advance of the banner, cutting down on both
+      sides of them. So says Eyvind Skaldaspiller: -
+     "The body-coats of naked steel,
+     The woven iron coats of mail,
+     Like water fly before the swing
+     Of Hakon's sword -the champion-king.
+     About each Gotland war-man's head
+     Helm splits, like ice beneath the tread,
+     Cloven by the axe or sharp swordblade,
+     The brave king, foremost in the fight,
+     Dyes crimson-red the spotless white
+     Of his bright shield with foemen's gore. -
+     Amidst the battle's wild uproar,
+     Wild pealing round from shore to shore."
+      31. FALL OF SKREYJA AND ASKMAN.
+      King Hakon was very conspicuous among other men, and also when the sun
+      shone his helmet glanced, and thereby many weapons were directed at him.
+      Then Eyvind Finson took a hat and put it over the king's helmet. Now
+      Eyvind Skreyja called out, "Does the king of the Norsemen hide himself, or
+      has he fled? Where is now the golden helmet?" Then Eyvind, and his brother
+      Alf with him, pushed on like fools or madmen. King Hakon shouted to
+      Eyvind, "Come on as thou art coming, and thou shalt find the king of the
+      Norsemen." So says Eyvind Skaldaspiller: -
+     "The raiser of the storm of shields,
+     The conqueror in battle fields, -
+     Hakon the brave, the warrior's friend,
+     Who scatters gold with liberal hand,
+     Heard Skreyja's taunt, and saw him rush,
+     Amidst the sharp spears' thickest push,
+     And loudly shouted in reply -
+     'If thou wilt for the victory try,
+     The Norseman's king thou soon shall find!
+     Hold onwards, friend!  Hast thou a mind!"
+      It was also but a short space of time before Eyvind did come up swinging
+      his sword, and made a cut at the king; but Thoralf thrust his shield so
+      hard against Eyvind that he tottered with the shock. Now the king takes
+      his sword Kvernbit with both hands, and hewed Eyvind through helm and
+      head, and clove him down to the shoulders. Thoralf also slew Alf Askman.
+      So says Eyvind Skaldaspiller: -
+     "With both his hands the gallant king
+     Swung round his sword, and to the chin
+     Clove Eyvind down: his faithless mail
+     Against it could no more avail,
+     Than the thin plank against the shock
+     When the ship's side beats on the rock.
+     By his bright sword with golden haft
+     Thro' helm, and head, and hair, was cleft
+     The Danish champion; and amain,
+     With terror smitten, fled his men."
+      After this fall of the two brothers, King Hakon pressed on so hard that
+      all men gave way before his assault. Now fear came over the army of
+      Eirik's sons, and the men began to fly; and King Hakon, who was at the
+      head of his men, pressed on the flying, and hewed down oft and hard. Then
+      flew an arrow, one of the kind called "flein", into Hakon's arm, into the
+      muscles below the shoulder; and it is said by many people that Gunhild's
+      shoe-boy, whose name was Kisping, ran out and forwards amidst the
+      confusion of arms, called out "Make room for the king-killer," and shot
+      King Hakon with the flein. Others again say that nobody could tell who
+      shot the king, which is indeed the most likely; for spears, arrows, and
+      all kinds of missiles flew as thick as a snow-drift. Many of the people of
+      Eirik's sons were killed, both on the field of battle and on the way to
+      the ships, and also on the strand, and many threw themselves into the
+      water. Many also, among whom were Eirik's sons, got on board their ships,
+      and rowed away as fast as they could, and Hakon's men after them. So says
+      Thord Sjarekson: -
+     "The wolf, the murderer, and the thief,
+     Fled from before the people's chief:
+     Few breakers of the peace grew old
+     Under the Northmen's king so bold.
+     When gallant Hakon lost his life
+     Black was the day, and dire the strife.
+     It was bad work for Gunhild's sons,
+     Leading their pack of Hungry Danes
+     From out the south, to have to fly,
+     And many a bonde leave to die,
+     Leaning his heavy wounded head
+     On the oar-bench for feather-bed.
+     Thoralf was nearest to the side
+     Of gallant Hakon in the tide
+     Of battle; his the sword that best
+     Carved out the raven's bloody feast:
+     Amidst the heaps of foemen slain
+     He was named bravest on the plain."
+      32. HAKON'S DEATH.
+      When King Hakon came out to his ship he had his wound bound up; but the
+      blood ran from it so much and so constantly, that it could not be stopped;
+      and when the day was drawing to an end his strength began to leave him.
+      Then he told his men that he wanted to go northwards to his house at
+      Alreksstader; but when he came north, as far as Hakonarhella Hill, they
+      put in towards the land, for by this time the king was almost lifeless.
+      Then he called his friends around him, and told them what he wished to be
+      done with regard to his kingdom. He had only one child, a daughter, called
+      Thora, and had no son. Now he told them to send a message to Eirik's sons,
+      that they should be kings over the country; but asked them to hold his
+      friends in respect and honour. "And if fate," added he, "should prolong my
+      life, I will, at any rate, leave the country, and go to a Christian land,
+      and do penance for what I have done against God; but should I die in
+      heathen land, give me any burial you think fit." Shortly afterwards Hakon
+      expired, at the little hill on the shore-side at which he was born. So
+      great was the sorrow over Hakon's death, that he was lamented both by
+      friends and enemies; and they said that never again would Norway see such
+      a king. His friends removed his body to Saeheim, in North Hordaland, and
+      made a great mound, in which they laid the king in full armour and in his
+      best clothes, but with no other goods. They spoke over his grave, as
+      heathen people are used to do, and wished him in Valhal. Eyvind
+      Skaldaspiller composed a poem on the death of King Hakon, and on how well
+      he was received in Valhal. The poem is called "Hakonarmal": -
+     "In Odin's hall an empty place
+     Stands for a king of Yngve's race;
+     'Go, my valkyries,' Odin said,
+     'Go forth, my angels of the dead,
+     Gondul and Skogul, to the plain
+     Drenched with the battle's bloody rain,
+     And to the dying Hakon tell,
+     Here in Valhal shall he dwell.'
+
+     "At Stord, so late a lonely shore,
+     Was heard the battle's wild uproar;
+     The lightning of the flashing sword
+     Burned fiercely at the shore of Stord.
+     From levelled halberd and spearhead
+     Life-blood was dropping fast and red;
+     And the keen arrows' biting sleet
+     Upon the shore at Stord fast beat.
+
+     "Upon the thundering cloud of shield
+     Flashed bright the sword-storm o'er the field;
+     And on the plate-mail rattled loud
+     The arrow-shower's rushing cloud,
+     In Odin's tempest-weather, there
+     Swift whistling through the angry air;
+     And the spear-torrents swept away
+     Ranks of brave men from light of day.
+
+     "With batter'd shield, and blood-smear'd sword
+     Slits one beside the shore of Stord,
+     With armour crushed and gashed sits he,
+     A grim and ghastly sight to see;
+     And round about in sorrow stand
+     The warriors of his gallant band:
+     Because the king of Dags' old race
+     In Odin's hall must fill a place.
+
+     "Then up spake Gondul, standing near
+     Resting upon her long ash spear, -
+     'Hakon!  the gods' cause prospers well,
+     And thou in Odin's halls shalt dwell!'
+     The king beside the shore of Stord
+     The speech of the valkyrie heard,
+     Who sat there on his coal-black steed,
+     With shield on arm and helm on head.
+
+     "Thoughtful, said Hakon, 'Tell me why
+     Ruler of battles, victory
+     Is so dealt out on Stord's red plain?
+     Have we not well deserved to gain?'
+     'And is it not as well dealt out?'
+     Said Gondul. 'Hearest thou not the shout?
+     The field is cleared -the foemen run -
+     The day is ours -the battle won!'
+
+     "Then Skogul said, 'My coal-black steed,
+     Home to the gods I now must speed,
+     To their green home, to tell the tiding
+     That Hakon's self is thither riding.'
+     To Hermod and to Brage then
+     Said Odin, 'Here, the first of men,
+     Brave Hakon comes, the Norsemen's king, -
+     Go forth, my welcome to him bring.'
+
+     "Fresh from the battle-field came in,
+     Dripping with blood, the Norsemen'a king.
+     'Methinks,' said he, great Odin's will
+     Is harsh, and bodes me further ill;
+     Thy son from off the field to-day
+     From victory to snatch away!'
+     But Odin said, 'Be thine the joy
+     Valhal gives, my own brave boy!'
+
+     "And Brage said, 'Eight brothers here
+     Welcome thee to Valhal's cheer,
+     To drain the cup, or fights repeat
+     Where Hakon Eirik's earls beat.'
+     Quoth the stout king, 'And shall my gear,
+     Helm, sword, and mail-coat, axe and spear,
+     Be still at hand!  'Tis good to hold
+     Fast by our trusty friends of old.'
+
+     "Well was it seen that Hakon still
+     Had saved the temples from all ill (1);
+     For the whole council of the gods
+     Welcomed the king to their abodes.
+     Happy the day when men are born
+     Like Hakon, who all base things scorn. -
+     Win from the brave and honoured name,
+     And die amidst an endless fame.
+
+     "Sooner shall Fenriswolf devour
+     The race of man from shore to shore,
+     Than such a grace to kingly crown
+     As gallant Hakon want renown.
+     Life, land, friends, riches, all will fly,
+     And we in slavery shall sigh.
+     But Hakon in the blessed abodes
+     For ever lives with the bright gods."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Hakon, although a Christian, appears to have favoured the
+     old religion, and spared the temples of Odin, and therefore
+     a place in Valhal is assigned him. -L.
+      SAGA OF KING HARALD GRAFELD AND OF EARL HAKON SON OF SIGURD.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS
+      This saga might be called Gunhild's Saga, as she is the chief person in
+      it. The reign of King Harald and Earl Hakon is more fully described in the
+      next saga, that is, Olaf Trygvason's. Other literature on this epoch:
+      "Agrip" (chap. 8), "Historia Norvegia", (p. 12), "Thjodrek" (chap. 5),
+      "Saxo" (pp. 479-482), "Egla" (chaps. 81, 82), "Floamanna" (chap. 12),
+      "Fareyinga" (chaps. 2, 4, 10), "Halfred's Saga" (chap. 2), "Hord
+      Grimkelsons Saga" (chaps. 13, 18), "Kormak" (chaps. 19-27), "Laxdaela"
+      (chaps. 19-21), "Njala" (chaps, 3-6).
+      The skalds of this saga are: -Glum Geirason, Kormak Agmundson, Eyvind
+      Skaldaspiller, and Einar Helgason Skalaglam.
+      1. GOVERNMENT OF THE SONS OF EIRIK.
+      When King Hakon was killed, the sons of Eirik took the sovereignty of
+      Norway. Harald, who was the oldest of the living brothers, was over them
+      in dignity. Their mother Gunhild, who was called the King-mother, mixed
+      herself much in the affairs of the country. There were many chiefs in the
+      land at that time. There was Trygve Olafson in the Eastland, Gudrod
+      Bjornson in Vestfold, Sigurd earl of Hlader in the Throndhjem land; but
+      Gunhild's sons held the middle of the country the first winter. There went
+      messages and ambassadors between Gunhild's sons and Trygve and Gudrod, and
+      all was settled upon the footing that they should hold from Gunhild's sons
+      the same part of the country which they formerly had held under King
+      Hakon. A man called Glum Geirason, who was King Harald's skald, and was a
+      very brave man, made this song upon King Hakon's death: -
+     "Gamle is avenged by Harald!
+     Great is thy deed, thou champion bold!
+     The rumour of it came to me
+     In distant lands beyond the sea,
+     How Harald gave King Hakon's blood
+     To Odin's ravens for their food."
+      This song was much favoured. When Eyvind Finson heard of it he composed
+      the song which was given before, viz.: -
+     "Our dauntless king with Gamle's gore
+     Sprinkled his bright sword o'er and o'er," &c.
+      This song also was much favoured, and was spread widely abroad; and when
+      King Harald came to hear of it, he laid a charge against Evyind affecting
+      his life; but friends made up the quarrel, on the condition that Eyvind
+      should in future be Harald's skald, as he had formerly been King Hakon's.
+      There was also some relationship between them, as Gunhild, Eyvind's
+      mother, was a daughter of Earl Halfdan, and her mother was Ingibjorg, a
+      daughter of Harald Harfager. Thereafter Eyvind made a song about King
+      Harald: -
+     "Guardian of Norway, well we know
+     Thy heart failed not when from the bow
+     The piercing arrow-hail sharp rang
+     On shield and breast-plate, and the clang
+     Of sword resounded in the press
+     Of battle, like the splitting ice;
+     For Harald, wild wolf of the wood,
+     Must drink his fill of foeman's blood."
+      Gunhild's sons resided mostly in the middle of the country, for they did
+      not think it safe for them to dwell among the people of Throndhjem or of
+      Viken, where King Hakon's best friends lived; and also in both places
+      there were many powerful men. Proposals of agreement then passed between
+      Gunhild's sons and Earl Sigurd, .or they got no scat from the Throndhjem
+      country; and at last an agreement was concluded between the kings and the
+      earl, and confirmed by oath. Earl Sigurd was to get the same power in the
+      Throndhjem land which he had possessed under King Hakon, and on that they
+      considered themselves at peace. All Gunhild's sons had the character of
+      being penurious; and it was said they hid their money in the ground.
+      Eyvind Skaldaspiller made a song about this: -
+     "Main-mast of battle!  Harald bold!
+     In Hakon's days the skald wore gold
+     Upon his falcon's seat; he wore
+     Rolf Krake's seed, the yellow ore
+     Sown by him as he fled away,
+     The avenger Adils' speed to stay.
+     The gold crop grows upon the plain;
+     But Frode's girls so gay (1) in vain
+     Grind out the golden meal, while those
+     Who rule o'er Norway's realm like foes,
+     In mother earth's old bosom hide
+     The wealth which Hakon far and wide
+     Scattered with generous hand: the sun
+     Shone in the days of that great one,
+     On the gold band of Fulla's brow,(2)
+     On gold-ringed hands that bend the bow,
+     On the skald's hand; but of the ray
+     Of bright gold, glancing like the spray
+     Of sun-lit waves, no skald now sings -
+     Buried are golden chains and rings."
+      Now when King Harald heard this song, he sent a message to Eyvind to come
+      to him, and when Eyvind came made a charge against him of being
+      unfaithful. "And it ill becomes thee," said the king, "to be my enemy, as
+      thou hast entered into my service." Eyvind then made these verses: -
+     "One lord I had before thee, Harald!
+     One dear-loved lord!  Now am I old,
+     And do not wish to change again, -
+     To that loved lord, through strife and pain,
+     Faithful I stood; still true to Hakon, -
+     To my good king, and him alone.
+     But now I'm old and useless grown,
+     My hands are empty, wealth is flown;
+     I am but fir for a short space
+     In thy court-hall to fill a place."
+      But King Harald forced Eyvind to submit himself to his clemency. Eyvind
+      had a great gold ring, which was called Molde, that had been dug up out of
+      the earth long since. This ring the King said he must have as the mulet
+      for the offence; and there was no help for it. Then Eyvind sang: -
+     "I go across the ocean-foam,
+     Swift skating to my Iceland home
+     Upon the ocean-skates, fast driven
+     By gales by Thurse's witch fire given.
+     For from the falcon-bearing hand
+     Harald has plucked the gold snake band
+     My father wore -by lawless might
+     Has taken what is mine by right."
+      Eyvind went home; but it is not told that he ever came near the king
+      again.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Menja and Fenja were strong girls of the giant race, whom
+     Frode bought in Sweden to grind gold and good luck to him;
+     and their meal means gold. -L.
+(2) Fulla was one of Frig's attendants, who wore a gold band on
+     the forehead, and the figure means gold, -that the sun
+     shone on gold rings on the hands of the skalds in Hakon's
+     days. -L.
+      2. CHRISTIANITY OF GUNHILD'S SONS.
+      Gunhild's sons embraced Christianity in England, as told before; but when
+      they came to rule over Norway they made no progress in spreading
+      Christianity -only they pulled down the temples of the idols, and
+      cast away the sacrifices where they had it in their power, and raised
+      great animosity by doing so. The good crops of the country were soon
+      wasted in their days, because there were many kings, and each had his
+      court about him. They had therefore great expenses, and were very greedy.
+      Besides, they only observed those laws of King Hakon which suited
+      themselves. They were, however, all of them remarkably handsome men -stout,
+      strong, and expert in all exercises. So says Glum Geirason, in the verses
+      he composed about Harald, Gunhild's son: -
+     "The foeman's terror, Harald bold,
+     Had gained enough of yellow gold;
+     Had Heimdal's teeth (1) enough in store,
+     And understood twelve arts or more."
+      The brothers sometimes went out on expeditions together, and sometimes
+      each on his own account. They were fierce, but brave and active; and great
+      warriors, and very successful.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Heimdal was one of the gods, whose horse was called
+       Gold-top; and the horse's teeth were of gold.
+      3. COUNCILS BY GUNHILD AND HER SONS.
+      Gunhild the King-mother, and her sons, often met, and talked together upon
+      the government of the country. Once Gunhild asked her sons what they
+      intended to do with their kingdom of Throndhjem. "Ye have the title of
+      king, as your forefathers had before you; but ye have little land or
+      people, and there are many to divide with. In the East, at Viken, there
+      are Trygve and Gudrod; and they have some right, from relationship, to
+      their governments. There is besides Earl Sigurd ruling over the whole
+      Throndhjem country; and no reason can I see why ye let so large a kingdom
+      be ruled by an earl, and not by yourselves. It appears wonderful to me
+      that ye go every summer upon viking cruises against other lands, and allow
+      an earl within the country to take your father's heritage from you. Your
+      grandfather, whose name you bear, King Harald, thought it but a small
+      matter to take an earl's life and land when he subdued all Norway, and
+      held it under him to old age."
+      Harald replied, "It is not so easy, mother, to cut off Earl Sigurd as to
+      slay a kid or a calf. Earl Sigurd is of high birth, powerful in relations,
+      popular, and prudent; and I think if the Throndhjem people knew for
+      certain there was enmity between us, they would all take his side, and we
+      could expect only evil from them. I don't think it would be safe for any
+      of us brothers to fall into the hands of the Throndhjem people."
+      Then said Gunhild, "We shall go to work another way, and not put ourselves
+      forward. Harald and Erling shall come in harvest to North More, and there
+      I shall meet you, and we shall consult together what is to be done." This
+      was done.
+      4. GUNHILD'S SONS AND GRJOTGARD.
+      Earl Sigurd had a brother called Grjotgard, who was much younger, and much
+      less respected; in fact, was held in no title of honour. He had many
+      people, however, about him, and in summer went on viking cruises, and
+      gathered to himself property. Now King Harald sent messengers to
+      Throndhjem with offers of friendship, and with presents. The messengers
+      declared that King Harald was willing to be on the same friendly terms
+      with the earl that King Hakon had been; adding, that they wished the earl
+      to come to King Harald, that their friendship might be put on a firm
+      footing. The Earl Sigurd received well the king's messengers and friendly
+      message, but said that on account of his many affairs he could not come to
+      the king. He sent many friendly gifts, and many glad and grateful words to
+      the king, in return for his friendship. With this reply the messengers set
+      off, and went to Grjotgard, for whom they had the same message, and
+      brought him good presents, and offered him King Harald's friendship, and
+      invited him to visit the king. Grjotgard promised to come and at the
+      appointed time he paid a visit to King Harald and Gunhild, and was
+      received in the most friendly manner. They treated him on the most
+      intimate footing, so that Grjotgard had access to their private
+      consultations and secret councils. At last the conversation, by an
+      understanding between the king and queen, was turned upon Earl Sigurd; and
+      they spoke to Grjotgard about the earl having kept him so long in
+      obscurity, and asked him if he would not join the king's brothers in an
+      attack on the earl. If he would join with them, the king promised
+      Grjotgard that he should be his earl, and have the same government that
+      Sigurd had. It came so far that a secret agreement was made between them,
+      that Grjotgard should spy out the most favourable opportunity of attacking
+      by surprise Earl Sigurd, and should give King Harald notice of it. After
+      this agreement Grjotgard returned home with many good presents from the
+      king.
+      5. SIGURD BURNT IN A HOUSE IN STJORADAL
+      Earl Sigurd went in harvest into Stjoradal to guest-quarters, and from
+      thence went to Oglo to a feast. The earl usually had many people about
+      him, for he did not trust the king; but now, after friendly messages had
+      passed between the king and him, he had no great following of people with
+      him. Then Grjotgard sent word to the king that he could never expect a
+      better opportunity to fall upon Earl Sigurd; and immediately, that very
+      evening, Harald and Erling sailed into Throndhjem fjord with several ships
+      and many people. They sailed all night by starlight, and Grjotgard came
+      out to meet them. Late in the night they came to Oglo, where Earl Sigurd
+      was at the feast, and set fire to the house; and burnt the house, the
+      earl, and all his men. As soon as it was daylight, they set out through
+      the fjord, and south to More, where they remained a long time.
+      6. HISTORY OF HAKON, SIGURD'S SON.
+      Hakon, the son of Earl Sigurd, was up in the interior of the Throndhjem
+      country when he heard this news. Great was the tumult through all the
+      Throndhjem land, and every vessel that could swim was put into the water;
+      and as soon as the people were gathered together they took Earl Sigurd's
+      son Hakon to be their earl and the leader of the troops, and the whole
+      body steered out of Throndhjem fjord. When Gunhild's sons heard of this,
+      they set off southwards to Raumsdal and South More; and both parties kept
+      eye on each other by their spies. Earl Sigurd was killed two years after
+      the fall of King Hakon (A.D. 962). So says Eyvind Skaldaspiller in the
+      "Haleygjatal": -
+     "At Oglo, as I've heard, Earl Sigurd
+     Was burnt to death by Norway's lord, -
+     Sigurd, who once on Hadding's grave
+     A feast to Odin's ravens gave.
+     In Oglo's hall, amidst the feast,
+     When bowls went round and ale flowed fast,
+     He perished: Harald lit the fire
+     Which burnt to death the son of Tyr."
+      Earl Hakan, with the help of his friends, maintained himself in the
+      Throndhjem country for three years; and during that time (A.D. 963-965)
+      Gunhild's sons got no revenues from it. Hakon had many a battle with
+      Gunhild's sons, and many a man lost his life on both sides. Of this Einar
+      Skalaglam speaks in his lay, called "Vellekla," which he composed about
+      Earl Hakon: -
+     "The sharp bow-shooter on the sea
+     Spread wide his fleet, for well loved he
+     The battle storm: well loved the earl
+     His battle-banner to unfurl,
+     O'er the well-trampled battle-field
+     He raised the red-moon of his shield;
+     And often dared King Eirik's son
+     To try the fray with the Earl Hakon."
+      And he also says: -
+     "Who is the man who'll dare to say
+     That Sigurd's son avoids the fray?
+     He gluts the raven -he ne'er fears
+     The arrow's song or flight of spears,
+     With thundering sword he storms in war,
+     As Odin dreadful; or from far
+     He makes the arrow-shower fly
+     To swell the sail of victory.
+     The victory was dearly bought,
+     And many a viking-fight was fought
+     Before the swinger of the sword
+     Was of the eastern country lord."
+      And Einar tells also how Earl Hakon avenged his father's murderer: -
+     "I praise the man, my hero he,
+     Who in his good ship roves the sea,
+     Like bird of prey, intent to win
+     Red vengeance for his slaughtered kin.
+     From his blue sword the iron rain
+     That freezes life poured down amain
+     On him who took his father's life,
+     On him and his men in the strife.
+     To Odin many a soul was driven, -
+     To Odin many a rich gift given.
+     Loud raged the storm on battle-field -
+     Axe rang on helm, and sword on shield."
+      The friends on both sides at last laid themselves between, and brought
+      proposals of peace; for the bondes suffered by this strife and war in the
+      land. At last it was brought to this, by the advice of prudent men, that
+      Earl Hakon should have the same power in the Throndhjem land which his
+      father Earl Sigurd had enjoyed; and the kings, on the other hand, should
+      have the same dominion as King Hakon had: and this agreement was settled
+      with the fullest promises of fidelity to it. Afterwards a great friendship
+      arose between Earl Hakon and Gunhild, although they sometimes attempted to
+      deceive each other. And thus matters stood for three years longer (A.D.
+      966-968), in which time Earl Hakon sat quietly in his dominions.
+      7. OF HARALD GRAFELD.
+      King Hakon had generally his seat in Hordaland and Rogaland, and also his
+      brothers; but very often, also, they went to Hardanger. One summer it
+      happened that a vessel came from Iceland belonging to Icelanders, and
+      loaded with skins and peltry. They sailed to Hardanger, where they heard
+      the greatest number of people assembled; but when the folks came to deal
+      with them, nobody would buy their skins. Then the steersman went to King
+      Harald, whom he had been acquainted with before, and complained of his ill
+      luck. The king promised to visit him, and did so. King Harald was very
+      condescending, and full of fun. He came with a fully manned boat, looked
+      at the skins, and then said to the steersman, "Wilt thou give me a present
+      of one of these gray-skins?" "Willingly," said the steersman, "if it were
+      ever so many." On this the king wrapped himself up in a gray-skin, and
+      went back to his boat; but before they rowed away from the ship, every man
+      in his suite bought such another skin as the king wore for himself. In a
+      few days so many people came to buy skins, that not half of them could be
+      served with what they wanted; and thereafter the king was called Harald
+      Grafeld (Grayskin).
+      8. EARL EIRIK'S BIRTH.
+      Earl Hakon came one winter to the Uplands to a feast, and it so happened
+      that he had intercourse with a girl of mean birth. Some time after the
+      girl had to prepare for her confinement, and she bore a child, a boy, who
+      had water poured on him, and was named Eirik. The mother carried the boy
+      to Earl Hakon, and said that he was the father. The earl placed him to be
+      brought up with a man called Thorleif the Wise, who dwelt in Medaldal, and
+      was a rich and powerful man, and a great friend of the earl. Eirik gave
+      hopes very early that he would become an able man, was handsome in
+      countenance, and stout and strong for a child; but the earl did not pay
+      much attention to him. The earl himself was one of the handsomest men in
+      countenance, -not tall, but very strong, and well practised in all
+      kinds of exercises; and withal prudent, of good understanding, and a
+      deadly man at arms.
+      9. KING TRYGVE OLAFSON'S MURDER.
+      It happened one harvest (A.D. 962) that Earl Hakon, on a journey in the
+      Uplands, came to Hedemark; and King Trygve Olafson and King Gudrod
+      Bjornson met him there, and Dale-Gudbrand also came to the meeting. They
+      had agreed to meet, and they talked together long by themselves; but so
+      much only was known of their business, that they were to be friends of
+      each other. They parted, and each went home to his own kingdom. Gunhild
+      and her sons came to hear of this meeting, and they suspected it must have
+      been to lay a treasonable plot against the kings; and they often talked of
+      this among themselves. When spring (A.D. 963) began to set in, King Harald
+      and his brother King Gudrod proclaimed that they were to make a viking
+      cruise, as usual, either in the West sea, or the Baltic. The people
+      accordingly assembled, launched the ships into the sea, and made
+      themselves ready to sail. When they were drinking the farewell ale, -and
+      they drank bravely, -much and many things were talked over at the
+      drink-table, and, among other things, were comparisons between different
+      men, and at last between the kings themselves. One said that King Harald
+      excelled his brothers by far, and in every way. On this King Gudrod was
+      very angry, and said that he was in no respect behind Harald, and was
+      ready to prove it. Instantly both parties were so inflamed that they
+      challenged each other to battle, and ran to their arms. But some of the
+      guests who were less drunk, and had more understanding, came between them,
+      and quieted them; and each went to his ship, but nobody expected that they
+      would all sail together. Gudrod sailed east ward along the land, and
+      Harald went out to sea, saying he would go to the westward; but when he
+      came outside of the islands he steered east along the coast, outside of
+      the rocks and isles. Gudrod, again, sailed inside, through the usual
+      channel, to Viken, and eastwards to Folden. He then sent a message to King
+      Trygve to meet him, that they might make a cruise together in summer in
+      the Baltic to plunder. Trygve accepted willingly, and as a friend, the
+      invitation; and as heard King Gudrod had but few people with him, he came
+      to meet him with a single boat. They met at Veggen, to the east of
+      Sotanes; but just as they were come to the meeting place, Gudrod's men ran
+      up and killed King Trygve and twelve men. He lies buried at a place called
+      Trygve's Cairn (A.D. 963).
+      10. KING GUDROD'S FALL.
+      King Harald sailed far outside of the rocks and isles; but set his course
+      to Viken, and came in the night-time to Tunsberg, and heard that Gudrod
+      Bjornson was at a feast a little way up the country. Then King Harald set
+      out immediately with his followers, came in the night, and surrounded the
+      house. King Gudrod Bjornson went out with his people; but after a short
+      resistance he fell, and many men with him. Then King Harald joined his
+      brother King Gudrod, and they subdued all Viken.
+      11. OF HARALD GRENSKE.
+      King Gudrod Bjornson had made a good and suitable marriage, and had by his
+      wife a son called Harald, who had been sent to be fostered to Grenland to
+      a lenderman called Hroe the White. Hroe's son, called Hrane Vidforle (the
+      Far-travelled), was Harald's foster-brother, and about the same age. After
+      his father Gudrod's fall, Harald, who was called Grenske, fled to the
+      Uplands, and with him his foster-brother Hrane, and a few people. Harald
+      staid a while there among his relations; but as Eirik's sons sought after
+      every man who interfered with them, and especially those who might oppose
+      them, Harald Grenske's friends and relations advised him to leave the
+      country. Harald therefore went eastward into Svithjod, and sought
+      shipmates, that he might enter into company with those who went out a
+      cruising to gather property. Harald became in this way a remarkably able
+      man. There was a man in Svithjod at that time called Toste, one of the
+      most powerful and clever in the land among those who had no high name or
+      dignity; and he was a great warrior, who had been often in battle, and was
+      therefore called Skoglar-Toste. Harald Grenske came into his company, and
+      cruised with Toste in summer; and wherever Harald came he was well thought
+      of by every one. In the winter Harald, after passing two years in the
+      Uplands, took up his abode with Toste, and lived five years with him.
+      Toste had a daughter, who was both young and handsome, but she was proud
+      and high-minded. She was called Sigrid, and was afterwards married to the
+      Swedish king, Eirik the Victorious, and had a son by him, called Olaf the
+      Swede, who was afterwards king of Svithjod. King Eirik died in a sick-bed
+      at Upsala ten years after the death of Styrbjorn.
+      12. EARL HAKON'S FEUDS.
+      Gunhild's sons levied a great army in Viken (A.D. 963), and sailed along
+      the land northwards, collecting people and ships on the way out of every
+      district. They then made known their intent, to proceed northwards with
+      their army against Earl Hakon in Throndhjem. When Earl Hakon heard this
+      news, he also collected men, and fitted out ships; and when he heard what
+      an overwhelming force Gunhild's sons had with them, he steered south with
+      his fleet to More, pillaging wherever he came, and killing many people. He
+      then sent the whole of the bonde army back to Throndhjem; but he himself,
+      with his men-at-arms, proceeded by both the districts of More and
+      Raumsdal, and had his spies out to the south of Stad to spy the army of
+      Gunhild's sons; and when he heard they were come into the Fjords, and were
+      waiting for a fair wind to sail northwards round Stad, Earl Hakon set out
+      to sea from the north side of Stad, so far that his sails could not be
+      seen from the land, and then sailed eastward on a line with the coast, and
+      came to Denmark, from whence he sailed into the Baltic, and pillaged there
+      during the summer. Gunhild's sons conducted their army north to
+      Throndhjem, and remained there the whole summer collecting the scat and
+      duties. But when summer was advanced they left Sigurd Slefa and Gudron
+      behind; and the other brothers returned eastward with the levied army they
+      had taken up in summer.
+      13. OF EARL HAKON AND GUNHILD'S SONS.
+      Earl Hakon, towards harvest (A.D. 963), sailed into the Bothnian Gulf to
+      Helsingjaland, drew his ships up there on the beach, and took the
+      land-ways through Helsingjaland and Jamtaland, and so eastwards round the
+      dividing ridge (the Kjol, or keel of the country), and down into the
+      Throndhjem district. Many people streamed towards him, and he fitted out
+      ships. When the sons of Gunhild heard of this they got on board their
+      ships, and sailed out of the Fjord; and Earl Hakon came to his seat at
+      Hlader, and remained there all winter. The sons of Gunhild, on the other
+      hand, occupied More; and they and the earl attacked each other in turns,
+      killing each other's people. Earl Hakon kept his dominions of Throndhjem,
+      and was there generally in the winter; but in summer he sometimes went to
+      Helsingjaland, where he went on board of his ships and sailed with them
+      down into the Baltic, and plundered there; and sometimes he remained in
+      Throndhjem, and kept an army on foot, so that Gunhild's sons could get no
+      hold northwards of Stad.
+      14. SIGURD SLEFA'S MURDER.
+      One summer Harald Grayskin with his troops went north to Bjarmaland, where
+      be forayed, and fought a great battle with the inhabitants on the banks of
+      the Vina (Dwina). King Harald gained the victory, killed many people,
+      plundered and wasted and burned far and wide in the land, and made
+      enormous booty. Glum Geirason tells of it thus: -
+     "I saw the hero Harald chase
+     With bloody sword Bjarme's race:
+     They fly before him through the night,
+     All by their burning city's light.
+     On Dwina's bank, at Harald's word,
+     Arose the storm of spear and sword.
+     In such a wild war-cruise as this,
+     Great would he be who could bring peace."
+      King Sigurd Slefa came to the Herse Klyp's house. Klyp was a son of Thord,
+      and a grandson of Hordakare, and was a man of power and great family. He
+      was not at home; but his wife Alof give a good reception to the king, and
+      made a great feast at which there was much drinking. Alof was a daughter
+      of Asbjorn, and sister to Jarnskegge, north in Yrjar. Asbjorn's brother
+      was called Hreidar, who was father to Styrkar, whose son was Eindride,
+      father of Einar Tambaskielfer. In the night the king went to bed to Alof
+      against her will, and then set out on his journey. The harvest thereafter,
+      King Harald and his brother King Sigurd Slefa went to Vors, and summoned
+      the bondes to a Thing. There the bondes fell on them, and would have
+      killed them, but they escaped and took different roads. King Harald went
+      to Hardanger, but King Sigurd to Alrekstader. Now when the Herse Klyp
+      heard of this, he and his relations assembled to attack the king; and
+      Vemund Volubrjot (1) was chief of their troop. Now when they came to the
+      house they attacked the king, and Herse Klyp, it is said, ran him through
+      with his sword and killed him; but instantly Klyp was killed on the spot
+      by Erling Gamle (A.D. 965).
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Volubrjotr. -Literally "the one who breaks the vala", that
+     is, breaks the skulls of witches.
+      15. GRJOTGARD'S FALL.
+      King Harald Grafeld and his brother King Gudrod gathered together a great
+      army in the east country, with which they set out northwards to Throndhjem
+      (A.D. 968). When Earl Hakon heard of it he collected men, and set out to
+      More, where he plundered. There his father's brother, Grjotgard, had the
+      command and defence of the country on account of Gunhild's sons, and he
+      assembled an army by order of the kings. Earl Hakon advanced to meet him,
+      and gave him battle; and there fell Grjotgard and two other earls, and
+      many a man besides. So says Einar Skalaglam: -
+     "The helm-crown'd Hakon, brave as stout,
+     Again has put his foes to rout.
+     The bowl runs o'er with Odin's mead, (1)
+     That fires the skald when mighty deed
+     Has to be sung.  Earl Hakon's sword,
+     In single combat, as I've heard,
+     Three sons of earls from this one fray
+     To dwell with Odin drove away." (2)
+      Thereafter Earl Hakon went out to sea, and sailed outside the coast, and
+      came to Denmark. He went to the Danish King, Harald Gormson, and was well
+      received by him, and staid with him all winter (A.D. 969). At that time
+      there was also with the Danish king a man called Harald, a son of Knut
+      Gormson, and a brother's son of King Harald. He was lately come home from
+      a long viking cruise, on which he had gathered great riches, and therefore
+      he was called Gold Harald. He thought he had a good chance of coming to
+      the Danish kingdom.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Odin's mead, called Bodn, was the blood or mead the sons
+of     Brage, the god of poets, drank to inspire them. -L.
+(2) To dwell with Odin, -viz. slew them. -L.
+      16. KING ERLING'S FALL.
+      King Harald Grafeld and his brothers proceeded northwards to Throndhjem,
+      where they met no opposition. They levied the scat-duties, and all other
+      revenues, and laid heavy penalties upon the bondes; for the kings had for
+      a long time received but little income from Throndhjem, because Earl Hakon
+      was there with many troops, and was at variance with these kings. In
+      autumn (A.D. 968) King Harald went south with the greater part of the
+      men-at-arms, but King Erlin remained behind with his men. He raised great
+      contributions from the bondes, and pressed severely on them; at which the
+      bondes murmured greatly, and submitted to their losses with impatience. In
+      winter they gathered together in a great force to go against King Erling,
+      just as he was at a feast; and they gave battle to him, and he with the
+      most of his men fell (A.D. 969).
+      17. THE SEASONS IN NORWAY AT THIS TIME.
+      While Gunhild's sons reigned in Norway the seasons were always bad, and
+      the longer they reigned the worse were the crops; and the bondes laid the
+      blame on them. They were very greedy, and used the bondes harshly. It came
+      at length to be so bad that fish, as well as corn, were wanting. In
+      Halogaland there was the greatest famine and distress; for scarcely any
+      corn grew, and even snow was lying, and the cattle were bound in the byres
+      (1) all over the country until midsummer. Eyvind Skaldaspiller describes
+      it in his poem, as he came outside of his house and found a thick
+      snowdrift at that season: -
+     "Tis midsummer, yet deep snows rest
+     On Odin's mother's frozen breast:
+     Like Laplanders, our cattle-kind
+     In stall or stable we must bind."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Byres = gards or farms.
+      18. THE ICELANDERS AND EYVIND THE SKALD.
+      Eyvind composed a poem about the people of Iceland, for which they
+      rewarded him by each bonde giving him three silver pennies, of full weight
+      and white in the fracture. And when the silver was brought together at the
+      Althing, the people resolved to have it purified, and made into a row of
+      clasps; and after the workmanship of the silver was paid, the row of
+      clasps was valued at fifty marks. This they sent to Eyvind; but Eyvind was
+      obliged to separate the clasps from each other, and sell them to buy food
+      for his household. But the same spring a shoal of herrings set in upon the
+      fishing ground beyond the coast-side, and Eyvind manned a ship's boat with
+      his house servants and cottars, and rowed to where the herrings were come,
+      and sang: -
+     "Now let the steed of ocean bound
+     O'er the North Sea with dashing sound:
+     Let nimble tern and screaming gull
+     Fly round and round -our net is full.
+     Fain would I know if Fortune sends
+     A like provision to my friends.
+     Welcome provision 'tis, I wot,
+     That the whale drives to our cook's pot."
+      So entirely were his movable goods exhausted, that he was obliged to sell
+      his arrows to buy herrings, or other meat for his table: -
+     "Our arms and ornaments of gold
+     To buy us food we gladly sold:
+     The arrows of the bow gave we
+     For the bright arrows of the sea." (1)
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Herrings, from their swift darting along, are called the
+     arrows of the sea.
+      KING OLAF TRYGVASON'S SAGA.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      Hitherto the narrative has been more or less fragmentary. With Olaf
+      Trygvason's Saga reliable history begins, and the narration is full and
+      connected. The story of Hakon the earl is incorporated in this saga.
+      Accounts of Olaf Trygvason may be found in Od the Monk's legendary saga,
+      in parts of "Agrip", "Historia Norvegiae", and in Thjodrek. Icelandic
+      works on this epoch are:
+      "Egla", "Eyrbyggja", "Finboga", "Floamanna", "Faereyinga", "Hallfredar
+      Saga", "Havardar Saga", "Are's Islendinga-bok", "Kristni Saga",
+      "Laxdaela", "Ljosvetninga", "Njala", "Orkneyinga", "Viga Glums Saga", and
+      "Viga Styrs Saga".
+      The skalds quoted are: Glum Geirason, Eyvind Finson, Skaldaspiller, Einar
+      Skalaglam, Tind Halkelson, Eyjolf Dadaskald, Hallarstein, Halfred
+      Vandraedaskald, Haldor Ukristne, Skule Thorsteinson, and Thord Kolbeinson.
+      1. OLAF TRYGVASON'S BIRTH.
+      King Trygve Olafson had married a wife who was called Astrid. She was a
+      daughter of Eirik Bjodaskalle, a great man, who dwelt at Oprustader. But
+      after Trygve's death (A.D. 963) Astrid fled, and privately took with her
+      all the loose property she could. Her foster-father, Thorolf Lusarskeg,
+      followed her, and never left her; and others of her faithful followers
+      spied about to discover her enemies, and where they were. Astrid was
+      pregnant with a child of King Trygve, and she went to a lake, and
+      concealed herself in a holm or small island in it with a few men. Here her
+      child was born, and it was a boy; and water was poured over it, and it was
+      called Olaf after the grandfather. Astrid remained all summer here in
+      concealment; but when the nights became dark, and the day began to shorten
+      and the weather to be cold, she was obliged to take to the land, along
+      with Thorolf and a few other men. They did not seek for houses unless in
+      the night-time, when they came to them secretly; and they spoke to nobody.
+      One evening, towards dark, they came to Oprustader, where Astrid's father
+      Eirik dwelt, and privately sent a man to Eirik to tell him; and Eirik took
+      them to an out-house, and spread a table for them with the best of food.
+      When Astrid had been here a short time her travelling attendants left her,
+      and none remained, behind with her but two servant girls, her child Olaf,
+      Thorolf Lusarskeg, and his son Thorgils, who was six years old; and they
+      remained all winter (A.D. 964).
+      2. OF GUNHILD S SONS.
+      After Trygve Olafson's murder, Harald Grafeld and his brother Gudrod went
+      to the farm which he owned; but Astrid was gone, and they could learn no
+      tidings of her. A loose report came to their ears that she was pregnant to
+      King Trygve; but they soon went away northwards, as before related. As
+      soon as they met their mother Gunhild they told her all that had taken
+      place. She inquired particularly about Astrid, and they told her the
+      report they had heard; but as Gunhild's sons the same harvest and winter
+      after had bickerings with Earl Hakon, as before related, they did not seek
+      after Astrid and her son that winter.
+      3. ASTRID'S JOURNEY.
+      The spring after (A.D. 964) Gunhild sent spies to the Uplands, and all the
+      way down to Viken, to spy what they could about Astrid; and her men came
+      back, and could only tell her that Astrid must be with her father Eirik,
+      and it was probable was bringing up her infant, the son of Trygve. Then
+      Gunhild, without delay, sent off men well furnished with arms and horses,
+      and in all a troop of thirty; and as their leader she sent a particular
+      friend of her own, a powerful man called Hakon. Her orders were to go to
+      Oprustader, to Eirik, and take King Trygve's son from thence, and bring
+      the child to her; and with these orders the men went out. Now when they
+      were come to the neighbourhood of Oprustader, some of Eirik's friends
+      observed the troop of travellers, and about the close of the day brought
+      him word of their approach. Eirik immediately, in the night, made
+      preparation for Astrid's flight, gave her good guides, and send her away
+      eastward to Svithjod, to his good friend Hakon Gamle, who was a powerful
+      man there. Long before day they departed, and towards evening they reached
+      a domain called Skaun. Here they saw a large mansion, towards which they
+      went, and begged a night's lodging. For the sake of concealment they were
+      clad in mean clothing. There dwelt here a bonde called Bjorn Eiterkveisa,
+      who was very rich, but very inhospitable. He drove them away; and
+      therefore, towards dark, they went to another domain close by that was
+      called Vidar. Thorstein was the name of the bonde; and he gave them
+      lodging, and took good care of them, so that they slept well, and were
+      well entertained. Early that morning Gunhild's men had come to Oprustader,
+      and inquired for Astrid and her son. As Eirik told them she was not there,
+      they searched the whole house, and remained till late in the day before
+      they got any news of Astrid. Then they rode after her the way she had
+      taken, and late at night they came to Bjorn Eiterkveisa in Skaun, and took
+      up their quarters there. Hakon asked Bjorn if he knew anything about
+      Astrid, and he said some people had been there in the evening wanting
+      lodgings; "but I drove them away, and I suppose they have gone to some of
+      the neighbouring houses." Thorstein's labourer was coming from the forest,
+      having left his work at nightfall, and called in at Bjorn's house because
+      it was in his way; and finding there were guests come to the house, and
+      learning their business, he comes to Thorstein and tells him of it. As
+      about a third part of the night was still remaining, Thorstein wakens his
+      guests and orders them in an angry voice to go about their business; but
+      as soon as they were out of the house upon the road, Thorstein tells them
+      that Gunhild's messengers were at Bjorn's house, and are upon the trace of
+      them. They entreat of him to help them, and he gave them a guide and some
+      provisions. He conducted them through a forest to a lake, in which there
+      was an islet overgrown with reeds. They waded out to the islet, and hid
+      themselves among the reeds. Early in the morning Hakon rode away from
+      Bjorn's into the township, and wherever he came he asked after Astrid; and
+      when he came to Thorstein's he asked if she had been there. He said that
+      some people had been there; but as soon as it was daylight they had set
+      off again, eastwards, to the forest. Hakon made Thorstein go along with
+      them, as he knew all the roads and hiding-places. Thorstein went with
+      them; but when they were come into the woods, he led them right across the
+      way Astrid had taken. They went about and about the whole day to no
+      purpose, as they could find no trace of her, so they turned back to tell
+      Gunhild the end of their travel. Astrid and her friends proceeded on their
+      journey, and came to Svithjod, to Hakon Gamle (the Old), where she and her
+      son remained a long time, and had friendly welcome.
+      4. HAKON'S EMBASSY TO SWEDEN.
+      When Gunhild, the mother of the kings, heard that Astrid and her son Olaf
+      were in the kingdom of Svithjod, she again sent Hakon, with a good
+      attendance, eastward, to Eirik king of Sweden, with presents and messages
+      of friendship. The ambassadors were well received and well treated. Hakon,
+      after a time, disclosed his errand to the king, saying that Gunhild had
+      sent him with the request that the king would assist him in getting hold
+      of Olaf Trygvason, to conduct him to Norway, where Gunhild would bring him
+      up. The king gave Hakon people with him, and he rode with them to Hakon
+      the Old, where Hakon desired, with many friendly expressions, that Olaf
+      should go with him. Hakon the Old returned a friendly answer, saying that
+      it depended entirely upon Olaf's mother. But Astrid would on no account
+      listen to the proposal; and the messengers had to return as they came, and
+      to tell King Eirik how the matter stood. The ambassadors then prepared to
+      return home, and asked the king for some assistance to take the boy,
+      whether Hakon the Old would or not. The king gave them again some
+      attendants; and when they came to Hakon the Old, they again asked for the
+      boy, and on his refusal to deliver him they used high words and threatened
+      violence. But one of the slaves, Buste by name, attacked Hakon, and was
+      going to kill him; and they barely escaped from the thralls without a
+      cudgelling, and proceeded home to Norway to tell Gunhild their ill
+      success, and that they had only seen Olaf.
+      5. OF SIGURD EIRIKSON.
+      Astrid had a brother called Sigurd, a son of Eirik Bjodaskalle, who had
+      long been abroad in Gardarike (Russia) with King Valdemar, and was there
+      in great consideration. Astrid had now a great inclination to travel to
+      her brother there. Hakon the Old gave her good attendants, and what was
+      needful for the journey, and she set out with some merchants. She had then
+      been two years (A.D. 965-966) with Hakon the Old, and Olaf was three years
+      of age. As they sailed out into the Baltic, they were captured by vikings
+      of Eistland, who made booty both of the people and goods, killing some,
+      and dividing others as slaves. Olaf was separated from his mother, and an
+      Eistland man called Klerkon got him as his share along with Thorolf and
+      Thorgils. Klerkon thought that Thorolf was too old for a slave, and that
+      there was not much work to be got out of him, so he killed him; but took
+      the boys with him, and sold them to a man called Klerk for a stout and
+      good ram. A third man, called Reas, bought Olaf for a good cloak. Reas had
+      a wife called Rekon, and a son by her whose name was Rekone. Olaf was long
+      with them, was treated well, and was much beloved by the people. Olaf was
+      six years in Eistland in this banishment (A.D. 987-972).
+      6. OLAF IS SET FREE IN EISTLAND.
+      Sigurd, the son of Eirik (Astrid's brother), came into Eistland from
+      Novgorod, on King Valdemar's business to collect the king's taxes and
+      rents. Sigurd came as a man of consequence, with many followers and great
+      magnificence. In the market-place he happened to observe a remarkably
+      handsome boy; and as he could distinguish that he was a foreigner, he
+      asked him his name and family. He answered him, that his name was Olaf;
+      that he was a son of Trygve Olafson; and Astrid, a daughter of Eirik
+      Bjodaskalle, was his mother. Then Sigurd knew that the boy was his
+      sister's son, and asked him how he came there. Olaf told him minutely all
+      his adventures, and Sigurd told him to follow him to the peasant Reas.
+      When he came there he bought both the boys, Olaf and Thorgils, and took
+      them with him to Holmgard. But, for the first, he made nothing known of
+      Olaf's relationship to him, but treated him well.
+      7. KLERKON KILLED BY OLAF.
+      Olaf Trygvason was one day in the market-place, where there was a great
+      number of people. He recognized Klerkon again, who had killed his
+      foster-father Thorolf Lusarskeg. Olaf had a little axe in his hand, and
+      with it he clove Klerkon's skull down to the brain, and ran home to his
+      lodging, and told his friend Sigurd what he had done. Sigurd immediately
+      took Olaf to Queen Allogia's house, told her what had happened, and begged
+      her to protect the boy. She replied, that the boy appeared far too comely
+      to allow him to be slain; and she ordered her people to be drawn out fully
+      armed. In Holmgard the sacredness of peace is so respected, that it is law
+      there to slay whoever puts a man to death except by judgment of law; and,
+      according to this law and usage, the whole people stormed and sought after
+      the boy. It was reported that he was in the Queen's house, and that there
+      was a number of armed men there. When this was told to the king, he went
+      there with his people, but would allow no bloodshed. It was settled at
+      last in peace, that the king should name the fine for the murder; and the
+      queen paid it. Olaf remained afterwards with the queen, and was much
+      beloved. It is a law at Holmgard, that no man of royal descent shall stay
+      there without the king's permission. Sigurd therefore told the queen of
+      what family Olaf was, and for what reason he had come to Russia; namely,
+      that he could not remain with safety in his own country: and begged her to
+      speak to the king about it. She did so, and begged the king to help a
+      king's son whose fate had been so hard; and in consequence of her entreaty
+      the king promised to assist him, and accordingly he received Olaf into his
+      court, and treated him nobly, and as a king's son. Olaf was nine years old
+      when he came to Russia, and he remained nine years more (A.D. 978-981)
+      with King Valdemar. Olaf was the handsomest of men, very stout and strong,
+      and in all bodily exercises he excelled every Northman that ever was heard
+      of.
+      8. OF HAKON EARL OF HLADER.
+      Earl Hakon, Sigurd's son, was with the Danish king, Harald Gormson, the
+      winter after he had fled from Norway before Gunhild's sons. During the
+      winter (A.D. 969) the earl had so much care and sorrow that he took to
+      bed, and passed many sleepless nights, and ate and drank no more than was
+      needful to support his strength. Then he sent a private message to his
+      friends north in Throndhjem, and proposed to them that they should kill
+      King Erling, if they had an opportunity; adding, that he would come to
+      them in summer. The same winter the Throndhjem people accordingly, as
+      before related, killed King Erling. There was great friendship between
+      Earl Hakon and Gold Harald, and Harald told Hakon all his intentions. He
+      told him that he was tired of a ship-life, and wanted to settle on the
+      land; and asked Hakon if he thought his brother King Harald would agree to
+      divide the kingdom with him if he asked it. "I think," replied Hakon,
+      "that the Danish king would not deny thy right; but the best way to know
+      is to speak to the king himself. I know for certain so much, that you will
+      not get a kingdom if you don't ask for it." Soon after this conversation
+      Gold Harald spoke to the king about the matter, in the presence of many
+      great men who were friends to both; and Gold Harald asked King Harald to
+      divide the kingdom with him in two equal parts, to which his royal birth
+      and the custom of the Danish monarchy gave him right. The king was highly
+      incensed at this demand, and said that no man had asked his father Gorm to
+      be king over half of Denmark, nor yet his grandfather King Hordaknut, or
+      Sigurd Orm, or Ragnar Lodbrok; and he was so exasperated and angry, that
+      nobody ventured to speak of it to him.
+      9. OF GOLD HARALD.
+      Gold Harald was now worse off than before; for he had got no kingdom, and
+      had got the king's anger by proposing it. He went as usual to his friend
+      Hakon, and complained to him of his fate, and asked for good advice, and
+      if he could help him to get his share of the kingdom; saying that he would
+      rather try force, and the chance of war, than give it up.
+      Hakon advised him not to speak to any man so that this should be known;
+      "for," said he, "it concerns thy life: and rather consider with thyself
+      what thou art man enough to undertake; for to accomplish such a purpose
+      requires a bold and firm man, who will neither stick at good nor evil to
+      do that which is intended; for to take up great resolutions, and then to
+      lay them aside, would only end in dishonour."
+      Gold Harald replies -"I will so carry on what I begin, that I will
+      not hesitate to kill Harald with my own hands, if I can come thereby to
+      the kingdom he denies me, and which is mine by right." And so they
+      separated.
+      Now King Harald comes also to Earl Hakon, and tells him the demand on his
+      kingdom which Gold Harald had made, and also his answer, and that he would
+      upon no account consent to diminish his kingdom. "And if Gold Harald
+      persists in his demand, I will have no hesitation in having him killed;
+      for I will not trust him if he does not renounce it."
+      The earl answered, -"My thoughts are, that Harald has carried his
+      demand so far that he cannot now let it drop, and I expect nothing but war
+      in the land; and that he will be able to gather a great force, because his
+      father was so beloved. And then it would be a great enormity if you were
+      to kill your relation; for, as things now stand, all men would say that he
+      was innocent. But I am far from saying, or advising, that you should make
+      yourself a smaller king than your father Gorm was, who in many ways
+      enlarged, but never diminished his kingdom."
+      The king replies, -"What then is your advice, -if I am neither
+      to divide my kingdom, nor to get rid of my fright and danger?"
+      "Let us meet again in a few days," said Earl Hakon, "and I will then have
+      considered the matter well, and will give you my advice upon it."
+      The king then went away with his people.
+      10. COUNCILS HELD BY HAKON AND HARALD.
+      Earl Hakon had now great reflection, and many opinions to weigh, and he
+      let only very few be in the house with him. In a few days King Harald came
+      again to the earl to speak with him, and ask if he had yet considered
+      fully the matter they had been talking of.
+      "I have," said the earl, "considered it night and day ever since, and find
+      it most advisable that you retain and rule over the whole of your kingdom
+      just as your father left it; but that you obtain for your relation Harald
+      another kingdom, that he also may enjoy honour and dignity."
+      "What kind of kingdom is that," said the king, "which I can give to
+      Harald, that I may possess Denmark entire?"
+      "It is Norway," said the earl. "The kings who are there are oppressive to
+      the people of the country, so that every man is against them who has tax
+      or service to pay."
+      The king replies, -"Norway is a large country, and the people fierce,
+      and not good to attack with a foreign army. We found that sufficiently
+      when Hakon defended that country; for we lost many people, and gained no
+      victory. Besides, Harald the son of Eirik is my foster-son, and has sat on
+      my knee."
+      The earl answers, "I have long known that you have helped Gunhild's sons
+      with your force, and a bad return you have got for it; but we shall get at
+      Norway much more easily than by fighting for it with all the Danish force.
+      Send a message to your foster-son Harald, Eirik's son, and offer him the
+      lands and fiefs which Gunhild's sons held before in Denmark. Appoint him a
+      meeting, and Gold Harald will soon conquer for himself a kingdom in Norway
+      from Harald Grafeld."
+      The king replies, that it would be called a bad business to deceive his
+      own foster-son.
+      "The Danes," answered the earl, "will rather say that it was better to
+      kill a Norwegian viking than a Danish, and your own brother's son."
+      They spoke so long over the matter, that they agreed on it.
+      11. HARALD GORMSON'S MESSAGE TO NORWAY.
+      Thereafter Gold Harald had a conference with Earl Hakon; and the earl told
+      him he had now advanced his business so far, that there was hope a kingdom
+      might stand open for him in Norway. "We can then continue," said he, "our
+      ancient friendship, and I can be of the greatest use to you in Norway.
+      Take first that kingdom. King Harald is now very old, and has but one son,
+      and cares but little about him, as he is but the son of a concubine."
+      The Earl talked so long to Gold Harald that the project pleased him well;
+      and the king, the earl, and Gold Harald often talked over the business
+      together. The Danish king then sent messengers north to Norway to Harald
+      Grafeld, and fitted them out magnificently for their journey. They were
+      well received by Harald. The messengers told him that Earl Hakon was in
+      Denmark, but was lying dangerously sick, and almost out of his senses.
+      They then delivered from Harald, the Danish king, the invitation to Harald
+      Grafeld, his foster-son, to come to him and receive investiture of the
+      fiefs he and his brothers before him had formerly held in Denmark; and
+      appointing a meeting in Jutland. Harald Grafeld laid the matter before his
+      mother and other friends. Their opinions were divided. Some thought that
+      the expedition was not without its danger, on account of the men with whom
+      they had to deal; but the most were in haste to begin the journey, for at
+      that time there was such a famine in Norway that the kings could scarcely
+      feed their men-at-arms; and on this account the Fjord, on which the kings
+      resided, usually got the name of Hardanger (Hardacre). In Denmark, on the
+      other hand, there had been tolerably good crops; so that people thought
+      that if King Harald got fiefs, and something to rule over there they would
+      get some assistance. It was therefore concluded, before the messengers
+      returned, that Harald should travel to Denmark to the Danish king in
+      summer, and accept the conditions King Harald offered.
+      12. TREACHERY OF HARALD AND HAKON.
+      Harald Grafeld went to Denmark in the summer (A.D. 969) with three
+      long-ships; and Herse Arinbjorn, from the Fjord district, commanded one of
+      them. King Harald sailed from Viken over to Limfjord in Jutland, and
+      landed at the narrow neck of land where the Danish king was expected. Now
+      when Gold Harald heard of this, he sailed there with nine ships which he
+      had fitted out before for a viking cruise. Earl Hakon had also his war
+      force on foot; namely, twelve large ships, all ready, with which he
+      proposed to make an expedition. When Gold Harald had departed Earl Hakon
+      says to the king, "Now I don't know if we are not sailing on an
+      expedition, and yet are to pay the penalty of not having joined it. Gold
+      Harald may kill Harald Grafeld, and get the kingdom of Norway; but you
+      must not think he will be true to you, although you do help him to so much
+      power, for he told me in winter that he would take your life if he could
+      find opportunity to do so. Now I will win Norway for you, and kill Gold
+      Harald, if you will promise me a good condition under you. I will be your
+      earl; swear an oath of fidelity to you, and, with your help, conquer all
+      Norway for you; hold the country under your rule; pay you the scat and
+      taxes; and you will be a greater king than your father, as you will have
+      two kingdoms under you." The king and the earl agreed upon this, and Hakon
+      set off to seek Gold Harald.
+      13. DEATH OF HARALD GRAFELD.
+      Gold Harald came to the neck of land at Limfjord, and immediately
+      challenged Harald Grafeld to battle; and although Harald had fewer men, he
+      went immediately on the land, prepared for battle, and drew up his troops.
+      Before the lines came together Harald Grafeld urged on his men, and told
+      them to draw their swords. He himself advanced the foremost of the troop,
+      hewing down on each side. So says Glum Geirason, in Grafeld's lay: -
+     "Brave were thy words in battlefield,
+     Thou stainer of the snow-white shield! -
+     Thou gallant war-god!  With thy voice
+     Thou couldst the dying man rejoice:
+     The cheer of Harald could impart
+     Courage and life to every heart.
+     While swinging high the blood-smeared sword,
+     By arm and voice we knew our lord."
+      There fell Harald Grafeld. So says Glum Geirason: -
+     "On Limfjord's strand, by the tide's flow,
+     Stern Fate has laid King Harald low;
+     The gallant viking-cruiser -he
+     Who loved the isle-encircling sea.
+     The generous ruler of the land
+     Fell at the narrow Limfjord strand.
+     Enticed by Hakon's cunning speech
+     To his death-bed on Limfjord's beach."
+      The most of King Harald's men fell with him. There also fell Herse
+      Arinbjorn.
+      This happened fifteen years after the death of Hakon, Athelstan's
+      foster-son, and thirteen years after that of Sigurd earl of Hlader. The
+      priest Are Frode says that Earl Hakon was thirteen years earl over his
+      father's dominions in Throndhjem district before the fall of Harald
+      Grafeld; but, for the last six years of Harald Grafeld's life, Are Frode
+      says the Earl Hakon and Gunhild's sons fought against each other, and
+      drove each other out of the land by turns.
+      14. GOLD HARALD'S DEATH.
+      Soon after Harald Grafeld's fall, Earl Hakon came up to Gold Harald, and
+      the earl immediately gave battle to Harald. Hakon gained the victory, and
+      Harald was made prisoner; but Hakon had him immediately hanged on a
+      gallows. Hakon then went to the Danish king, and no doubt easily settled
+      with him for the killing his relative Gold Harald.
+      15. DIVISION OF THE COUNTRY.
+      Soon after King Harald Gormson ordered a levy of men over all his kingdom,
+      and sailed with 600 ships (1). There were with him Earl Hakon, Harald
+      Grenske, a son of King Gudrod, and many other great men who had fled from
+      their udal estates in Norway on account of Gunhild's sons. The Danish king
+      sailed with his fleet from the south to Viken, where all the people of the
+      country surrendered to him. When he came to Tunsberg swarms of people
+      joined him; and King Harald gave to Earl Hakon the command of all the men
+      who came to him in Norway, and gave him the government over Rogaland,
+      Hordaland, Sogn, Fjord-district, South More, Raumsdal, and North More.
+      These seven districts gave King Harald to Earl Hakon to rule over, with
+      the same rights as Harald Harfager gave with them to his sons; only with
+      the difference, that Hakon should there, as well as in Throndhjem, have
+      the king's land-estates and land-tax, and use the king's money and goods
+      according to his necessities whenever there was war in the country. King
+      Harald also gave Harald Grenske Vingulmark, Vestfold, and Agder all the
+      way to Lidandisnes (the Naze), together with the title of king; and let
+      him have these dominions with the same rights as his family in former
+      times had held them, and as Harald Harfager had given with them to his
+      sons. Harald Grenske was then eighteen years old, and he became afterwards
+      a celebrated man. Harald king of Denmark returned home thereafter with all
+      his army.
+   ENDNOTES:
+     (1) i.e., 720 ships, as they were counted by long hundreds,
+     100=120.
+      16. GUNHILD'S SONS LEAVE THE COUNTRY.
+      Earl Hakon proceeded northwards along the coast with his force; and when
+      Gunhild and her sons got the tidings they proceeded to gather troops, but
+      were ill off for men. Then they took the same resolution as before, to
+      sail out to sea with such men as would follow them away to the westward
+      (A.D. 969). They came first to the Orkney Islands, and remained there a
+      while. There were in Orkney then the Earls Hlodver. Arnfid, Ljot, and
+      Skule, the sons of Thorfin Hausakljufer.
+      Earl Hakon now brought all the country under him, and remained all winter
+      (A.D. 970) in Throndhjem. Einar Skalaglam speaks of his conquests in
+      "Vellekla": -
+     "Norway's great watchman, Harald, now
+     May bind the silk snood on his brow -
+     Seven provinces he seized.  The realm
+     Prospers with Hakon at the helm."
+      As Hakon the earl proceeded this summer along the coast subjecting all the
+      people to him, he ordered that over all his dominions the temples and
+      sacrifices should be restored, and continued as of old. So it is said in
+      the "Vellekla": -
+     "Hakon the earl, so good and wise,
+     Let all the ancient temples rise; -
+     Thor's temples raised with fostering hand
+     That had been ruined through the land.
+     His valiant champions, who were slain
+     On battle-fields across the main,
+     To Thor, the thunder-god, may tell
+     How for the gods all turns out well.
+     The hardy warrior now once more
+     Offers the sacrifice of gore;
+     The shield-bearer in Loke's game
+     Invokes once more great Odin's name.
+     The green earth gladly yields her store,
+     As she was wont in days of yore,
+     Since the brave breaker of the spears
+     The holy shrines again uprears.
+     The earl has conquered with strong hand
+     All that lies north of Viken land:
+     In battle storm, and iron rain
+     Hakon spreads wide his sword's domain."
+      The first winter that Hakon ruled over Norway the herrings set in
+      everywhere through the fjords to the land, and the seasons ripened to a
+      good crop all that had been sown. The people, therefore, laid in seed for
+      the next year, and got their lands sowed, and had hope of good times.
+      17. HAKON'S BATTLE WITH RAGNFRED.
+      King Ragnfred and King Gudrod, both sons of Gunhild and Eirik, were now
+      the only sons of Gunhild remaining in life. So says Glum Geirason in
+      Grafeld's lay: -
+     "When in the battle's bloody strife
+     The sword took noble Harald's life,
+     Half of my fortunes with him fell:
+     But his two brothers, I know well,
+     My loss would soon repair, should they
+     Again in Norway bear the sway,
+     And to their promises should stand,
+     If they return to rule the land."
+      Ragnfred began his course in the spring after he had been a year in the
+      Orkney Islands. He sailed from thence to Norway, and had with him fine
+      troops, and large ships. When he came to Norway he learnt that Earl Hakon
+      was in Throndhjem; therefore he steered northwards around Stad, and
+      plundered in South More. Some people submitted to him; for it often
+      happens, when parties of armed men scour over a country, that those who
+      are nearest the danger seek help where they think it may be expected. As
+      soon as Earl Hakon heard the news of disturbance in More, he fitted out
+      ships, sent the war-token through the land, made ready in all haste, and
+      proceeded out of the fjord. He had no difficulty in assembling men.
+      Ragnfred and Earl Hakon met at the north corner of More; and Hakon, who
+      had most men, but fewer ships, began the battle. The combat was severe,
+      but heaviest on Hakon's side; and as the custom then was, they fought bow
+      to bow, and there was a current in the sound which drove all the ships in
+      upon the land. The earl ordered to row with the oars to the land where
+      landing seemed easiest. When the ships were all grounded, the earl with
+      all his men left them, and drew them up so far that the enemy might not
+      launch them down again, and then drew up his men on a grass-field, and
+      challenged Ragnfred to land. Ragnfred and his men laid their vessels in
+      along the land, and they shot at each other a long time; but upon the land
+      Ragnfred would not venture: and so they separated. Ragnfred sailed with
+      his fleet southwards around Stad; for he was much afraid the whole forces
+      of the country would swarm around Hakon. Hakon, on his part, was not
+      inclined to try again a battle, for he thought the difference between
+      their ships in size was too great; so in harvest he went north to
+      Throndhjem, and staid there all winter (A.D. 971). King Ragnfred
+      consequently had all the country south of Stad at his mercy; namely, Fjord
+      district, Hordaland, Sogn, Rogaland; and he had many people about him all
+      winter. When spring approached he ordered out the people and collected a
+      large force. By going about the districts he got many men, ships, and
+      warlike stores sent as he required.
+      18. BATTLE BETWEEN HAKON AND RAGNFRED.
+      Towards spring Earl Hakon ordered out all the men north in the country;
+      and got many people from Halogaland and Naumudal; so that from Bryda to
+      Stad he had men from all the sea-coast. People flocked to him from all the
+      Throndhjem district and from Raumsdal. It was said for certain that he had
+      men from four great districts, and that seven earls followed him, and a
+      matchless number of men. So it is said in the "Vellekla": -
+     "Hakon, defender of the land,
+     Armed in the North his warrior-band
+     To Sogn's old shore his force he led,
+     And from all quarters thither sped
+     War-ships and men; and haste was made
+     By the young god of the sword-blade,
+     The hero-viking of the wave,
+     His wide domain from foes to save.
+     With shining keels seven kings sailed on
+     To meet this raven-feeding one.
+     When the clash came, the stunning sound
+     Was heard in Norway's farthest bound;
+     And sea-borne corpses, floating far,
+     Brought round the Naze news from the war."
+      Earl Hakon sailed then with his fleet southwards around Stad; and when he
+      heard that King Ragnfred with his army had gone towards Sogn, he turned
+      there also with his men to meet him: and there Ragnfred and Hakon met.
+      Hakon came to the land with his ships, marked out a battle-field with
+      hazel branches for King Ragnfred, and took ground for his own men in it.
+      So it is told in the "Vellekla": -
+     "In the fierce battle Ragnfred then
+     Met the grim foe of Vindland men;
+     And many a hero of great name
+     Fell in the sharp sword's bloody game.
+     The wielder of fell Narve's weapon,
+     The conquering hero, valiant Hakon
+     Had laid his war-ships on the strand,
+     And ranged his warriors on the land."
+      There was a great battle; but Earl Hakon, having by far the most people,
+      gained the victory. It took place on the Thinganes, where Sogn and
+      Hordaland meet.
+      King Rangfred fled to his ships, after 300 of his men had fallen. So it is
+      said in the "Vellekla": -
+     "Sharp was the battle-strife, I ween, -
+     Deadly and close it must have been,
+     Before, upon the bloody plain,
+     Three hundred corpses of the slain
+     Were stretched for the black raven's prey;
+     And when the conquerors took their way
+     To the sea-shore, they had to tread
+     O'er piled-up heaps of foemen dead."
+      After this battle King Ragnfred fled from Norway; but Earl Hakon restored
+      peace to the country, and allowed the great army which had followed him in
+      summer to return home to the north country, and he himself remained in the
+      south that harvest and winter (A.D. 972).
+      19. EARL HAKON'S MARRIAGE.
+      Earl Hakon married a girl called Thora, a daughter of the powerful Skage
+      Skoptason, and very beautiful she was. They had two sons, Svein and
+      Heming, and a daughter called Bergljot who was afterwards married to Einar
+      Tambaskielfer. Earl Hakon was much addicted to women, and had many
+      children; among others a daughter Ragnhild, whom he married to Skopte
+      Skagason, a brother of Thora. The Earl loved Thora so much that he held
+      Thora's family in higher respect than any other people, and Skopte his
+      brother-in-law in particular; and he gave him many great fiefs in More.
+      Whenever they were on a cruise together, Skopte must lay his ship nearest
+      to the earl's, and no other ship was allowed to come in between.
+      20. DEATH OF SKOPTE.
+      One summer that Earl Hakon was on a cruise, there was a ship with him of
+      which Thorleif Spake (the Wise) was steersman. In it was also Eirik, Earl
+      Hakon's son, then about ten or eleven years old. Now in the evenings, as
+      they came into harbour, Eirik would not allow any ship but his to lie
+      nearest to the earl's. But when they came to the south, to More, they met
+      Skopte the earl's brother-in-law, with a well-manned ship; and as they
+      rowed towards the fleet, Skopte called out that Thorleif should move out
+      of the harbour to make room for him, and should go to the roadstead. Eirik
+      in haste took up the matter, and ordered Skopte to go himself to the
+      roadstead. When Earl Hakon heard that his son thought himself too great to
+      give place to Skopte, he called to them immediately that they should haul
+      out from their berth, threatening them with chastisement if they did not.
+      When Thorleif heard this, he ordered his men to slip their land-cable, and
+      they did so; and Skopte laid his vessel next to the earl's as he used to
+      do. When they came together, Skopte brought the earl all the news he had
+      gathered, and the earl communicated to Skopte all the news he had heard;
+      and Skopte was therefore called Tidindaskopte (the Newsman Skopte). The
+      winter after (A.D. 973) Eirik was with his foster-father Thorleif, and
+      early in spring he gathered a crew of followers, and Thorleif gave him a
+      boat of fifteen benches of rowers, with ship furniture, tents, and ship
+      provisions; and Eirik set out from the fjord, and southwards to More.
+      Tidindaskopte happened also to be going with a fully manned boat of
+      fifteen rowers' benches from one of his farms to another, and Eirik went
+      against him to have a battle. Skopte was slain, but Eirik granted life to
+      those of his men who were still on their legs. So says Eyjolf Dadaskald in
+      the "Banda Lay": -
+     "At eve the youth went out
+     To meet the warrior stout -
+     To meet stout Skopte -he
+     Whose war-ship roves the sea
+     Like force was on each side,
+     But in the whirling tide
+     The young wolf Eirik slew
+     Skopte, and all his crew
+     And he was a gallant one,
+     Dear to the Earl Hakon.
+     Up, youth of steel-hard breast -
+     No time hast thou to rest!
+     Thy ocean wings spread wide -
+     Speed o'er the foaming tide!
+     Speed on -speed on thy way!
+     For here thou canst not stay."
+      Eirik sailed along the land and came to Denmark, and went to King Harald
+      Gormson, and staid with him all winter (A.D. 974). In spring the Danish
+      king sent him north to Norway, and gave him an earldom, and the government
+      of Vingulmark and Raumarike, on the same terms as the small scat-paying
+      kings had formerly held these domains. So says Eyjolf Dadaskald: -
+     "South through ocean's spray
+     His dragon flew away
+     To Gormson's hall renowned.
+     Where the bowl goes bravely round.
+     And the Danish king did place
+     This youth of noble race
+     Where, shield and sword in hand,
+     He would aye defend his land."
+      Eirik became afterwards a great chief.
+      21. OLAF TRYGVASON'S JOURNEY FROM RUSSIA.
+      All this time Olaf Trygvason was in Gardarike (Russia), and highly
+      esteemed by King Valdemar, and beloved by the queen. King Valdemar made
+      him chief over the men-at-arms whom he sent out to defend the land. So
+      says Hallarsteid: -
+     "The hater of the niggard band,
+     The chief who loves the Northman's land,
+     Was only twelve years old when he
+     His Russian war-ships put to sea.
+     The wain that ploughs the sea was then
+     Loaded with war-gear by his men -
+     With swords, and spears, and helms: and deep
+     Out to the sea his good ships sweep."
+      Olaf had several battles, and was lucky as a leader of troops. He himself
+      kept a great many men-at-arms at his own expense out of the pay the king
+      gave him. Olaf was very generous to his men, and therefore very popular.
+      But then it came to pass, what so often happens when a foreigner is raised
+      to higher power and dignity than men of the country, that many envied him
+      because he was so favoured by the king, and also not less so by the queen.
+      They hinted to the king that he should take care not to make Olaf too
+      powerful, -"for such a man may be dangerous to you, if he were to
+      allow himself to be used for the purpose of doing you or your kingdom
+      harm; for he is extremely expert in all exercises and feats, and very
+      popular. We do not, indeed, know what it is he can have to talk of so
+      often with the queen." It was then the custom among great monarchs that
+      the queen should have half of the court attendants, and she supported them
+      at her own expense out of the scat and revenue provided for her for that
+      purpose. It was so also at the court of King Valdemar that the queen had
+      an attendance as large as the king, and they vied with each other about
+      the finest men, each wanting to have such in their own service. It so fell
+      out that the king listened to such speeches, and became somewhat silent
+      and blunt towards Olaf. When Olaf observed this, he told it to the queen;
+      and also that he had a great desire to travel to the Northern land, where
+      his family formerly had power and kingdoms, and where it was most likely
+      he would advance himself. The queen wished him a prosperous journey, and
+      said he would be found a brave man wherever he might be. Olaf then made
+      ready, went on board, and set out to sea in the Baltic.
+      As he was coming from the east he made the island of Borgundarholm
+      (Bornholm), where he landed and plundered. The country people hastened
+      down to the strand, and gave him battle; but Olaf gained the victory, and
+      a large booty.
+      22. OLAF TRYGVASON'S MARRIAGE.
+      While Olaf lay at Borgundarholm there came on bad weather, storm, and a
+      heavy sea, so that his ships could not lie there; and he sailed southwards
+      under Vindland, where they found a good harbour. They conducted themselves
+      very peacefully, and remained some time. In Vindland there was then a king
+      called Burizleif, who had three daughters, -Geira, Gunhild, and
+      Astrid. The king's daughter Geira had the power and government in that
+      part where Olaf and his people landed, and Dixen was the name of the man
+      who most usually advised Queen Geira. Now when they heard that unknown
+      people were came to the country, who were of distinguished appearance, and
+      conducted themselves peaceably, Dixen repaired to them with a message from
+      Queen Geira, inviting the strangers to take up their winter abode with
+      her; for the summer was almost spent, and the weather was severe and
+      stormy. Now when Dixen came to the place he soon saw that the leader was a
+      distinguished man, both from family and personal appearance, and he told
+      Olaf the queen's invitation with the most kindly message. Olaf willingly
+      accepted the invitation, and went in harvest (A.D. 982) to Queen Geira.
+      They liked each other exceedingly, and Olaf courted Queen Geira; and it
+      was so settled that Olaf married her the same winter, and was ruler, along
+      with Queen Geira, over her dominions. Halfred Vandredaskald tells of these
+      matters in the lay he composed about King Olaf: -
+     "Why should the deeds the hero did
+     In Bornholm and the East he hid?
+     His deadly weapon Olaf bold
+     Dyed red: why should not this be told?"
+      23. EARL HAKON PAYS NO SCAT.
+      Earl Hakon ruled over Norway, and paid no scat; because the Danish king
+      gave him all the scat revenue that belonged to the king in Norway, for the
+      expense and trouble he had in defending the country against Gunhild's
+      sons.
+      24. HARALD OPPOSES CHRISTIANITY.
+      The Emperor Otta (Otto) was at that time in the Saxon country, and sent a
+      message to King Harald, the Danish king, that he must take on the true
+      faith and be baptized, he and all his people whom he ruled; "otherwise,"
+      says the emperor, "we will march against him with an army." The Danish
+      king ordered the land defence to be fitted out, Danavirke (1) (the Danish
+      wall) to be well fortified, and his ships of war rigged out. He sent a
+      message also to Earl Hakon in Norway to come to him early in spring, and
+      with as many men as he could possibly raise. In spring (A.D. 975) Earl
+      Hakon levied an army over the whole country which was very numerous, and
+      with it he sailed to meet the Danish king. The king received him in the
+      most honourable manner. Many other chiefs also joined the Danish king with
+      their men, so that he had gathered a very large army.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Danavirke. The Danish work was a wall of earth, stones,
+     and wood, with a deep ditch in front, and a castle at every
+     hundred fathoms, between the rivers Eider and Slien,
+     constructed by Harald Blatand (Bluetooth) to oppose the
+     progress of Charlemagne.  Some traces of it still exist.
+      -L.
+      25. OLAF TRYGVASON'S WAR EXPEDITION.
+      Olaf Trygvason had been all winter (A.D. 980) in Vindland, as before
+      related, and went the same winter to the baronies in Vindland which had
+      formerly been under Queen Geira, but had withdrawn themselves from
+      obedience and payment of taxes. There Olaf made war, killed many people,
+      burnt out others, took much property, and laid all of them under
+      subjection to him, and then went back to his castle. Early in spring Olaf
+      rigged out his ships and set off to sea. He sailed to Skane and made a
+      landing. The people of the country assembled, and gave him battle; but
+      King Olaf conquered, and made a great booty. He then sailed eastward to
+      the island of Gotland, where he captured a merchant vessel belonging to
+      the people of Jamtaland. They made a brave defence; but the end of it was
+      that Olaf cleared the deck, killed many of the men, and took all the
+      goods. He had a third battle in Gotland, in which he also gained the
+      victory, and made a great booty. So says Halfred Vandredaskald: -
+     "The king, so fierce in battle-fray,
+     First made the Vindland men give way:
+     The Gotlanders must tremble next;
+     And Scania's shores are sorely vexed
+     By the sharp pelting arrow shower
+     The hero and his warriors pour;
+     And then the Jamtaland men must fly,
+     Scared by his well-known battle-cry."
+      26. OTTA AND HAKON IN BATTLE.
+      The Emperor Otta assembled a great army from Saxland, Frakland, Frisland,
+      and Vindland. King Burizleif followed him with a large army, and in it was
+      his son-in-law, Olaf Trygvason. The emperor had a great body of horsemen,
+      and still greater of foot people, and a great army from Holstein. Harald,
+      the Danish king, sent Earl Hakon with the army of Northmen that followed
+      him southwards to Danavirke, to defend his kingdom on that side. So it is
+      told in the "Vellekla": -
+     "Over the foaming salt sea spray
+     The Norse sea-horses took their way,
+     Racing across the ocean-plain
+     Southwards to Denmark's green domain.
+     The gallant chief of Hordaland
+     Sat at the helm with steady hand,
+     In casque and shield, his men to bring
+     From Dovre to his friend the king.
+     He steered his war-ships o'er the wave
+     To help the Danish king to save
+     Mordalf, who, with a gallant band
+     Was hastening from the Jutes' wild land,
+     Across the forest frontier rude,
+     With toil and pain through the thick wood.
+     Glad was the Danish king, I trow,
+     When he saw Hakon's galley's prow.
+     The monarch straightway gave command
+     To Hakon, with a steel-clad band,
+     To man the Dane-work's rampart stout,
+     And keep the foreign foemen out."
+      The Emperor Otta came with his army from the south to Danavirke, but Earl
+      Hakon defended the rampart with his men. The Dane-work (Danavirke) was
+      constructed in this way: -Two fjords run into the land, one on each
+      side; and in the farthest bight of these fjords the Danes had made a great
+      wall of stone, turf, and timber, and dug a deep and broad ditch in front
+      of it, and had also built a castle over each gate of it. There was a hard
+      battle there, of which the "Vellekla" speaks: -
+     "Thick the storm of arrows flew,
+     Loud was the din, black was the view
+     Of close array of shield and spear
+     Of Vind, and Frank, and Saxon there.
+     But little recked our gallant men;
+     And loud the cry might be heard then
+     Of Norway's brave sea-roving son -
+     'On 'gainst the foe!  On!  Lead us on!"
+      Earl Hakon drew up his people in ranks upon all the gate-towers of the
+      wall, but the greater part of them he kept marching along the wall to make
+      a defence wheresoever an attack was threatened. Many of the emperor's
+      people fell without making any impression on the fortification, so the
+      emperor turned back without farther attempt at an assault on it. So it is
+      said in the "Vellekla": -
+     "They who the eagle's feast provide
+     In ranked line fought side by side,
+     'Gainst lines of war-men under shields\
+     Close packed together on the fields,
+     Earl Hakon drive by daring deeds
+     The Saxons to their ocean-steeds;
+     And the young hero saves from fall
+     The Danavirke -the people's wall."
+      After this battle Earl Hakon went back to his ships, and intended to sail
+      home to Norway; but he did not get a favourable wind, and lay for some
+      time outside at Limafjord.
+      27. HARALD AND HAKON ARE BAPTIZED.
+      The Emperor Otta turned back with his troops to Slesvik, collected his
+      ships of war, and crossed the fjord of Sle into Jutland. As soon as the
+      Danish king heard of this he marched his army against him, and there was a
+      battle, in which the emperor at last got the victory. The Danish king fled
+      to Limafjord and took refuge in the island Marsey. By the help of
+      mediators who went between the king and the emperor, a truce and a meeting
+      between them were agreed on. The Emperor Otta and the Danish king met upon
+      Marsey. There Bishop Poppo instructed King Harald in the holy faith; he
+      bore red hot irons in his hands, and exhibited his unscorched hands to the
+      king. Thereafter King Harald allowed himself to be baptized, and also the
+      whole Danish army. King Harald, while he was in Marsey, had sent a message
+      to Hakon that he should come to his succour; and the earl had just reached
+      the island when the king had received baptism. The king sends word to the
+      earl to come to him, and when they met the king forced the earl to allow
+      himself also to be baptized. So Earl Hakon and all the men who were with
+      him were baptized; and the king gave them priests and other learned men
+      with them, and ordered that the earl should make all the people in Norway
+      be baptized. On that they separated; and the earl went out to sea, there
+      to wait for a wind.
+      28. HAKON RENOUNCES CHRISTIANITY.
+      When a wind came with which he thought he could get clear out to sea, he
+      put all the learned men on shore again, and set off to the ocean; but as
+      the wind came round to the south-west, and at last to west, he sailed
+      eastward, out through Eyrarsund, ravaging the land on both sides. He then
+      sailed eastward along Skane, plundering the country wherever he came. When
+      he got east to the skerries of East Gautland, he ran in and landed, and
+      made a great blood-sacrifice. There came two ravens flying which croaked
+      loudly; and now, thought the earl, the blood-offering has been accepted by
+      Odin, and he thought good luck would be with him any day he liked to go to
+      battle. Then he set fire to his ships, landed his men, and went over all
+      the country with armed hand. Earl Ottar, who ruled over Gautland, came
+      against him, and they held a great battle with each other; but Earl Hakon
+      gained the day, and Earl Ottar and a great part of his men were killed.
+      Earl Hakon now drove with fire and sword over both the Gautlands, until he
+      came into Norway; and then he proceeded by land all the way north to
+      Throndhjem. The "Vellekla" tells about this: -
+     "On the silent battle-field,
+     In viking garb, with axe and shield,
+     The warrior, striding o'er the slain,
+     Asks of the gods 'What days will gain?'
+     Two ravens, flying from the east,
+     Come croaking to the bloody feast:
+     The warrior knows what they foreshow -
+     The days when Gautland blood will flow.
+     A viking-feast Earl Hakon kept,
+     The land with viking fury swept,
+     Harrying the land far from the shore
+     Where foray ne'er was known before.
+     Leaving the barren cold coast side,
+     He raged through Gautland far and wide, -
+     Led many a gold-decked viking shield
+     O'er many a peaceful inland field.
+     Bodies on bodies Odin found
+     Heaped high upon each battle ground:
+     The moor, as if by witchcraft's power,
+     Grows green, enriched by bloody shower.
+     No wonder that the gods delight
+     To give such luck in every fight
+     To Hakon's men -for he restores
+     Their temples on our Norway shores."
+      29. THE EMPEROR OTTA RETURNS HOME.
+      The Emperor Otta went back to his kingdom in the Saxon land, and parted in
+      friendship with the Danish king. It is said that the Emperor Otta stood
+      godfather to Svein, King Harald's son, and gave him his name; so that he
+      was baptized Otta Svein. King Harald held fast by his Christianity to his
+      dying day.
+      King Burizleif went to Vindland, and his son-in-law King Olaf went with
+      him. This battle is related also by Halfred Vandredaskald in his song on
+      Olaf: -
+     "He who through the foaming surges
+     His white-winged ocean-coursers urges,
+     Hewed from the Danes, in armour dressed,
+     The iron bark off mail-clad breast."
+      30. OLAF'S JOURNEY FROM VINDLAND.
+      Olaf Trygvason was three years in Vindland (A.D. 982-984) when Geira his
+      queen fell sick, and she died of her illness. Olaf felt his loss so great
+      that he had no pleasure in Vindland after it. He provided himself,
+      therefore, with warships, and went out again a plundering, and plundered
+      first in Frisland, next in Saxland, and then all the way to Flaemingjaland
+      (Flanders). So says Halfred Vandredaskald: -
+     "Olaf's broad axe of shining steel
+     For the shy wolf left many a meal.
+     The ill-shaped Saxon corpses lay
+     Heaped up, the witch-wife's horses' (1) prey.
+     She rides by night: at pools of blood.
+     Where Frisland men in daylight stood,
+     Her horses slake their thirst, and fly
+     On to the field where Flemings lie.
+     The raven-friend in Odin's dress -
+     Olaf, who foes can well repress,
+     Left Flemish flesh for many a meal
+     With his broad axe of shining steel."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Ravens were the witches' horses. -L.
+      31. KING OLAF'S FORAYS.
+      Thereafter Olaf Trygvason sailed to England, and ravaged wide around in
+      the land. He sailed all the way north to Northumberland, where he
+      plundered; and thence to Scotland, where he marauded far and wide. Then he
+      went to the Hebrides, where he fought some battles; and then southwards to
+      Man, where he also fought. He ravaged far around in Ireland, and thence
+      steered to Bretland, which he laid waste with fire and sword, and all the
+      district called Cumberland. He sailed westward from thence to Valland, and
+      marauded there. When he left the west, intending to sail to England, he
+      came to the islands called the Scilly Isles, lying westward from England
+      in the ocean. Thus tells Halfred Vandraskald of these events: -
+     The brave young king, who ne'er retreats,
+     The Englishman in England beats.
+     Death through Northumberland is spread
+     From battleaxe and broad spearhead.
+     Through Scotland with his spears he rides;
+     To Man his glancing ships he guides:
+     Feeding the wolves where'er he came,
+     The young king drove a bloody game.
+     The gallant bowmen in the isles
+     Slew foemen, who lay heaped in piles.
+     The Irish fled at Olaf's name -
+     Fled from a young king seeking fame.
+     In Bretland, and in Cumberland,
+     People against him could not stand:
+     Thick on the fields their corpses lay,
+     To ravens and howling wolves a prey."
+      Olaf Trygvason had been four years on this cruise (A.D. 985-988), from the
+      time he left Vindland till he came to the Scilly Islands.
+      32. KING OLAF IS BAPTIZED.
+      While Olaf Trygvason lay in the Scilly Isles he heard of a seer, or
+      fortune-teller, on the islands, who could tell beforehand things not yet
+      done, and what he foretold many believed was really fulfilled. Olaf became
+      curious to try this man's gift of prophecy. He therefore sent one of his
+      men, who was the handsomest and strongest, clothed him magnificently, and
+      bade him say he was the king; for Olaf was known in all countries as
+      handsomer, stronger, and braver than all others, although, after he had
+      left Russia, he retained no more of his name than that he was called Ole,
+      and was Russian. Now when the messenger came to the fortune-teller, and
+      gave himself out for the king, he got the answer, "Thou art not the king,
+      but I advise thee to be faithful to thy king." And more he would not say
+      to that man. The man returned, and told Olaf, and his desire to meet the
+      fortune-teller was increased; and now he had no doubt of his being really
+      a fortune-teller. Olaf repaired himself to him, and, entering into
+      conversation, asked him if he could foresee how it would go with him with
+      regard to his kingdom, or of any other fortune he was to have. The hermit
+      replies in a holy spirit of prophecy, "Thou wilt become a renowned king,
+      and do celebrated deeds. Many men wilt thou bring to faith and baptism,
+      and both to thy own and others' good; and that thou mayst have no doubt of
+      the truth of this answer, listen to these tokens: When thou comest to thy
+      ships many of thy people will conspire against thee, and then a battle
+      will follow in which many of thy men will fall, and thou wilt be wounded
+      almost to death, and carried upon a shield to thy ship; yet after seven
+      days thou shalt be well of thy wounds, and immediately thou shalt let
+      thyself be baptized." Soon after Olaf went down to his ships, where he met
+      some mutineers and people who would destroy him and his men. A fight took
+      place, and the result was what the hermit had predicted, that Olaf was
+      wounded, and carried upon a shield to his ship, and that his wound was
+      healed in seven days. Then Olaf perceived that the man had spoken truth,
+      that he was a true fortune-teller, and had the gift of prophecy. Olaf went
+      once more to the hermit, and asked particularly how he came to have such
+      wisdom in foreseeing things to be. The hermit replied, that the Christian
+      God himself let him know all that he desired; and he brought before Olaf
+      many great proofs of the power of the Almighty. In consequence of this
+      encouragement Olaf agreed to let himself be baptized, and he and all his
+      followers were baptized forthwith. He remained here a long time, took the
+      true faith, and got with him priests and other learned men.
+      33. OLAF MARRIES GYDA.
+      In autumn (A.D. 988) Olaf sailed from Scilly to England, where he put into
+      a harbour, but proceeded in a friendly way; for England was Christian, and
+      he himself had become Christian. At this time a summons to a Thing went
+      through the country, that all men should come to hold a Thing. Now when
+      the Thing was assembled a queen called Gyda came to it, a sister of Olaf
+      Kvaran, who was king of Dublin in Ireland. She had been married to a great
+      earl in England, and after his death she was at the head of his dominions.
+      In her territory there was a man called Alfvine, who was a great champion
+      and single-combat man. He had paid his addresses to her; but she gave for
+      answer, that she herself would choose whom of the men in her dominions she
+      would take in marriage; and on that account the Thing was assembled, that
+      she might choose a husband. Alfvine came there dressed out in his best
+      clothes, and there were many well-dressed men at the meeting. Olaf had
+      come there also; but had on his bad-weather clothes, and a coarse
+      over-garment, and stood with his people apart from the rest of the crowd.
+      Gyda went round and looked at each, to see if any appeared to her a
+      suitable man. Now when she came to where Olaf stood she looked at him
+      straight in the face, and asked "what sort of man he was?"
+      He said, "I am called Ole; and I am a stranger here."
+      Gyda replies, "Wilt thou have me if I choose thee?"
+      "I will not say no to that," answered he; and he asked what her name was,
+      and her family, and descent.
+      "I am called Gyda," said she; "and am daughter of the king of Ireland, and
+      was married in this country to an earl who ruled over this territory.
+      Since his death I have ruled over it, and many have courted me, but none
+      to whom I would choose to be married."
+      She was a young and handsome woman. They afterwards talked over the matter
+      together, and agreed, and Olaf and Gyda were betrothed.
+      34. KING OLAF AND ALFVINE'S DUEL.
+      Alfvine was very ill pleased with this. It was the custom then in England,
+      if two strove for anything, to settle the matter by single combat (1); and
+      now Alfvine challenges Olaf Trygvason to fight about this business. The
+      time and place for the combat were settled, and that each should have
+      twelve men with him. When they met, Olaf told his men to do exactly as
+      they saw him do. He had a large axe; and when Alfvine was going to cut at
+      him with his sword he hewed away the sword out of his hand, and with the
+      next blow struck down Alfvine himself. He then bound him fast. It went in
+      the same way with all Alfvine's men. They were beaten down, bound, and
+      carried to Olaf's lodging. Thereupon he ordered Alfvine to quit the
+      country, and never appear in it again; and Olaf took all his property.
+      Olaf in this way got Gyda in marriage, and lived sometimes in England, and
+      sometimes in Ireland.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Holm-gang: so called because the combatants went to a holm
+     or uninhabited isle to fight in Norway. -L.
+      35. KING OLAF GETS HIS DOG VIGE.
+      While Olaf was in Ireland he was once on an expedition which went by sea.
+      As they required to make a foray for provisions on the coast, some of his
+      men landed, and drove down a large herd of cattle to the strand. Now a
+      peasant came up, and entreated Olaf to give him back the cows that
+      belonged to him. Olaf told him to take his cows, if he could distinguish
+      them; "but don't delay our march." The peasant had with him a large
+      house-dog, which he put in among the herd of cattle, in which many hundred
+      head of beasts were driven together. The dog ran into the herd, and drove
+      out exactly the number which the peasant had said he wanted; and all were
+      marked with the same mark, which showed that the dog knew the right
+      beasts, and was very sagacious. Olaf then asked the peasant if he would
+      sell him the dog. "I would rather give him to you," said the peasant. Olaf
+      immediately presented him with a gold ring in return, and promised him his
+      friendship in future. This dog was called Vige, and was the very best of
+      dogs, and Olaf owned him long afterwards.
+      36. HARALD GORMSON SAILS AGAINST ICELAND.
+      The Danish king, Harald Gormson, heard that Earl Hakon had thrown off
+      Christianity, and had plundered far and wide in the Danish land. The
+      Danish king levied an army, with which he went to Norway; and when he came
+      to the country which Earl Hakon had to rule over he laid waste the whole
+      land, and came with his fleet to some islands called Solunder. Only five
+      houses were left standing in Laeradal; but all the people fled up to the
+      mountains, and into the forest, taking with them all the moveable goods
+      they could carry with them. Then the Danish king proposed to sail with his
+      fleet to Iceland, to avenge the mockery and scorn all the Icelanders had
+      shown towards him; for they had made a law in Iceland, that they should
+      make as many lampoons against the Danish king as there were headlands in
+      his country; and the reason was, because a vessel which belonged to
+      certain Icelanders was stranded in Denmark, and the Danes took all the
+      property, and called it wreck. One of the king's bailiffs called Birger
+      was to blame for this; but the lampoons were made against both. In the
+      lampoons were the following lines: -
+     "The gallant Harald in the field
+     Between his legs lets drop his shield;
+     Into a pony he was changed.
+     And kicked his shield, and safely ranged.
+     And Birger, he who dwells in halls
+     For safety built with four stone walls,
+     That these might be a worthy pair,
+     Was changed into a pony mare."
+      37. HARALD SENDS A WARLOCK TO ICELAND.
+      King Harald told a warlock to hie to Iceland in some altered shape, and to
+      try what he could learn there to tell him: and he set out in the shape of
+      a whale. And when he came near to the land he went to the west side of
+      Iceland, north around the land, where he saw all the mountains and hills
+      full of guardian-spirits, some great, some small. When he came to
+      Vapnafjord he went in towards the land, intending to go on shore; but a
+      huge dragon rushed down the dale against him with a train of serpents,
+      paddocks, and toads, that blew poison towards him. Then he turned to go
+      westward around the land as far as Eyjafjord, and he went into the fjord.
+      Then a bird flew against him, which was so great that its wings stretched
+      over the mountains on either side of the fjord, and many birds, great and
+      small, with it. Then he swam farther west, and then south into
+      Breidafjord. When he came into the fjord a large grey bull ran against
+      him, wading into the sea, and bellowing fearfully, and he was followed by
+      a crowd of land-spirits. From thence he went round by Reykjanes, and
+      wanted to land at Vikarsskeid, but there came down a hill-giant against
+      him with an iron staff in his hands. He was a head higher than the
+      mountains, and many other giants followed him. He then swam eastward along
+      the land, and there was nothing to see, he said, but sand and vast
+      deserts, and, without the skerries, high-breaking surf; and the ocean
+      between the countries was so wide that a long-ship could not cross it. At
+      that time Brodhelge dwelt in Vapnafjord, Eyjolf Valgerdson in Eyjafjord,
+      Thord Geller in Breidafjord, and Thorod Gode in Olfus. Then the Danish
+      king turned about with his fleet, and sailed back to Denmark.
+      Hakon the earl settled habitations again in the country that had been laid
+      waste, and paid no scat as long as he lived to Denmark.
+      38. HARALD GORMSON'S DEATH.
+      Svein, King Harald's son, who afterwards was called Tjuguskeg (forked
+      beard), asked his father King Harald for a part of his kingdom; but now,
+      as before, Harald would not listen to dividing the Danish dominions, and
+      giving him a kingdom. Svein collected ships of war, and gave out that he
+      was going on a viking cruise; but when all his men were assembled, and the
+      Jomsborg viking Palnatoke had come to his assistance he ran into Sealand
+      to Isafjord, where his father had been for some time with his ships ready
+      to proceed on an expedition. Svein instantly gave battle, and the combat
+      was severe. So many people flew to assist King Harald, that Svein was
+      overpowered by numbers, and fled. But King Harald received a wound which
+      ended in his death: and Svein was chosen King of Denmark. At this time
+      Sigvalde was earl over Jomsborg in Vindland. He was a son of King
+      Strutharald, who had ruled over Skane. Heming, and Thorkel the Tall, were
+      Sigvalde's brothers. Bue the Thick from Bornholm, and Sigurd his brother,
+      were also chiefs among the Jomsborg vikings: and also Vagn, a son of Ake
+      and Thorgunna, and a sister's son of Bue and Sigurd. Earl Sigvalde had
+      taken King Svein prisoner, and carried him to Vindland, to Jomsborg, where
+      he had forced him to make peace with Burizleif, the king of the Vinds, and
+      to take him as the peace-maker between them. Earl Sigvalde was married to
+      Astrid, a daughter of King Burizleif; and told King Svein that if he did
+      not accept of his terms, he would deliver him into the hands of the Vinds.
+      The king knew that they would torture him to death, and therefore agreed
+      to accept the earl's mediation. The earl delivered this judgment between
+      them -that King Svein should marry Gunhild, King Burizleif's
+      daughter; and King Burizleif again Thyre, a daughter of Harald, and King
+      Svein's sister; but that each party should retain their own dominions, and
+      there should be peace between the countries. Then King Svein returned home
+      to Denmark with his wife Gunhild. Their sons were Harald and Knut (Canute)
+      the Great. At that time the Danes threatened much to bring an army into
+      Norway against Earl Hakon.
+      39. VOW OF THE JOMSBORG VIKINGS.
+      King Svein made a magnificent feast, to which he invited all the chiefs in
+      his dominions; for he would give the succession-feast, or the
+      heirship-ale, after his father Harald. A short time before, Strutharald in
+      Skane, and Vesete in Bornholm, father to Bue the Thick and to Sigurd, had
+      died; and King Svein sent word to the Jomsborg vikings that Earl Sigvalde
+      and Bue, and their brothers, should come to him, and drink the funeral-ale
+      for their fathers in the same feast the king was giving. The Jomsborg
+      vikings came to the festival with their bravest men, forty ships of them
+      from Vindland, and twenty ships from Skane. Great was the multitude of
+      people assembled. The first day of the feast, before King Svein went up
+      into his father's high-seat, he drank the bowl to his father's memory, and
+      made the solemn vow, that before three winters were past he would go over
+      with his army to England, and either kill King Adalrad (Ethelred), or
+      chase him out of the country. This heirship bowl all who were at the feast
+      drank. Thereafter for the chiefs of the Jomsborg vikings was filled and
+      drunk the largest horn to be found, and of the strongest drink. When that
+      bowl was emptied, all men drank Christ's health; and again the fullest
+      measure and the strongest drink were handed to the Jomsborg vikings. The
+      third bowl was to the memory of Saint Michael, which was drunk by all.
+      Thereafter Earl Sigvalde emptied a remembrance bowl to his father's
+      honour, and made the solemn vow, that before three winters came to an end
+      he would go to Norway, and either kill Earl Hakon, or chase him out of the
+      country. Thereupon Thorkel the Tall, his brother, made a solemn vow to
+      follow his brother Sigvalde to Norway, and not flinch from the battle so
+      long as Sigvalde would fight there. Then Bue the Thick vowed to follow
+      them to Norway, and not flinch so long as the other Jomsborg vikings
+      fought. At last Vagn Akason vowed that he would go with them to Norway,
+      and not return until he had slain Thorkel Leira, and gone to bed to his
+      daughter Ingebjorg without her friends' consent. Many other chiefs made
+      solemn vows about different things. Thus was the heirship-ale drunk that
+      day, but the next morning, when the Jomsborg vikings had slept off their
+      drink, they thought they had spoken more than enough. They held a meeting
+      to consult how they should proceed with their undertaking, and they
+      determined to fit out as speedily as possible for the expedition; and
+      without delay ships and men-at-arms were prepared, and the news spread
+      quickly.
+      40. EIRIK AND HAKON MAKE A WAR LEVY.
+      When Earl Eirik, the son of Hakon, who at that time was in Raumarike,
+      heard the tidings, he immediately gathered troops, and went to the
+      Uplands, and thence over the mountains to Throndhjem, and joined his
+      father Earl Hakon. Thord Kolbeinson speaks of this in the lay of Eirik: -
+     "News from the south are flying round;
+     The bonde comes with look profound,
+     Bad news of bloody battles bringing,
+     Of steel-clad men, of weapons ringing.
+     I hear that in the Danish land
+     Long-sided ships slide down the strand,
+     And, floating with the rising tide,
+     The ocean-coursers soon will ride."
+      The earls Hakon and Eirik had war-arrows split up and sent round the
+      Throndhjem country; and despatched messages to both the Mores, North More
+      and South More, and to Raumsdal, and also north to Naumudal and
+      Halogaland. They summoned all the country to provide both men and ships.
+      So it is said in Eirik's lay:
+     "The skald must now a war-song raise,
+     The gallant active youth must praise,
+     Who o'er the ocean's field spreads forth
+     Ships, cutters, boats, from the far north.
+     His mighty fleet comes sailing by, -
+     The people run to see them glide,
+     Mast after mast, by the coast-side."
+      Earl Hakon set out immediately to the south, to More, to reconnoitre and
+      gather people; and Earl Eirik gathered an army from the north to follow.
+      41. EXPEDITION OF THE JOMSBORG VIKINGS.
+      The Jomsborg vikings assembled their fleet in Limafjord, from whence they
+      went to sea with sixty sail of vessels. When they came under the coast of
+      Agder, they steered northwards to Rogaland with their fleet, and began to
+      plunder when they came into the earl's territory; and so they sailed north
+      along the coast, plundering and burning. A man, by name Geirmund, sailed
+      in a light boat with a few men northwards to More, and there he fell in
+      with Earl Hakon, stood before his dinner table, and told the earl the
+      tidings of an army from Denmark having come to the south end of the land.
+      The earl asked if he had any certainty of it. Then Geirmund stretched
+      forth one arm, from which the hand was cut off, and said, "Here is the
+      token that the enemy is in the land." Then the earl questioned him
+      particularly about this army. Geirmund says it consists of Jomsborg
+      vikings, who have killed many people, and plundered all around. "And
+      hastily and hotly they pushed on," says he "and I expect it will not be
+      long before they are upon you." On this the earl rode into every fjord,
+      going in along the one side of the land and out at the other, collecting
+      men; and thus he drove along night and day. He sent spies out upon the
+      upper ridges, and also southwards into the Fjords; and he proceeded north
+      to meet Eirik with his men. This appears from Eirik's lay: -
+     "The earl, well skilled in war to speed
+     O'er the wild wave the viking-steed,
+     Now launched the high stems from the shore,
+     Which death to Sigvalde's vikings bore.
+     Rollers beneath the ships' keels crash,
+     Oar-blades loud in the grey sea splash,
+     And they who give the ravens food
+     Row fearless through the curling flood."
+      Eirik hastened southwards with his forces the shortest way he could.
+      42. OF THE JOMSBORG VIKINGS.
+      Earl Sigvalde steered with his fleet northwards around Stad, and came to
+      the land at the Herey Isles. Although the vikings fell in with the country
+      people, the people never told the truth about what the earl was doing; and
+      the vikings went on pillaging and laying waste. They laid to their vessels
+      at the outer end of Hod Island, landed, plundered, and drove both men and
+      cattle down to the ships, killing all the men able to bear arms.
+      As they were going back to their ships, came a bonde, walking near to
+      Bue's troop, who said to them, "Ye are not doing like true warriors, to be
+      driving cows and calves down to the strand, while ye should be giving
+      chase to the bear, since ye are coming near to the bear's den."
+      "What says the old man?" asked some. "Can he tell us anything about Earl
+      Hakon?"
+      The peasant replies, "The earl went yesterday into the Hjorundarfjord with
+      one or two ships, certainly not more than three, and then he had no news
+      about you."
+      Bue ran now with his people in all haste down to the ships, leaving all
+      the booty behind. Bue said, "Let us avail ourselves now of this news we
+      have got of the earl, and be the first to the victory." When they came to
+      their ships they rode off from the land. Earl Sigvalde called to them, and
+      asked what they were about. They replied, "The earl is in the fjord;" on
+      which Earl Sigvalde with the whole fleet set off, and rowed north about
+      the island Hod.
+      43. BATTLE WITH THE JOMSBORG VIKINGS.
+      The earls Hakon and Eirik lay in Halkelsvik, where all their forces were
+      assembled. They had 150 ships, and they had heard that the Jomsborg
+      vikings had come in from sea, and lay at the island Hod; and they, in
+      consequence, rowed out to seek them. When they reached a place called
+      Hjorungavag they met each other, and both sides drew up their ships in
+      line for an attack. Earl Sigvalde's banner was displayed in the midst of
+      his army, and right against it Earl Hakon arranged his force for attack.
+      Earl Sigvalde himself had 20 ships, but Earl Hakon had 60. In Earl's army
+      were these chiefs, -Thorer Hjort from Halogaland, and Styrkar from
+      Gimsar. In the wing of the opposite array of the Jomsborg vikings was Bue
+      the Thick, and his brother Sigurd, with 20 ships. Against him Earl Eirik
+      laid himself with 60 ships; and with him were these chiefs, -Gudbrand
+      Hvite from the Uplands, and Thorkel Leira from Viken. In the other wing of
+      the Jomsborg vikings' array was Vagn Akason with 20 ships; and against him
+      stood Svein the son of Hakon, in whose division was Skegge of Yrjar at
+      Uphaug, and Rognvald of Aervik at Stad, with 60 ships. It is told in the
+      Eirik's lay thus: -
+     "The bonde's ships along the coast
+     Sailed on to meet the foemen's host;
+     The stout earl's ships, with eagle flight,
+     Rushed on the Danes in bloody fight.
+     The Danish ships, of court-men full,
+     Were cleared of men, -and many a hull
+     Was driving empty on the main,
+     With the warm corpses of the slain."
+      Eyvind Skaldaspiller says also in the "Haleygja-tal": -
+     "Twas at the peep of day, -
+     Our brave earl led the way;
+     His ocean horses bounding -
+     His war-horns loudly sounding!
+     No joyful morn arose
+     For Yngve Frey's base foes
+     These Christian island-men
+     Wished themselves home again."
+      Then the fleets came together, and one of the sharpest of conflicts began.
+      Many fell on both sides, but the most by far on Hakon's side; for the
+      Jomsborg vikings fought desperately, sharply, and murderously, and shot
+      right through the shields. So many spears were thrown against Earl Hakon
+      that his armour was altogether split asunder, and he threw it off. So says
+      Tind Halkelson: -
+     "The ring-linked coat of strongest mail
+     Could not withstand the iron hail,
+     Though sewed with care and elbow bent,
+     By Norn (1), on its strength intent.
+     The fire of battle raged around, -
+     Odin's steel shirt flew all unbound!
+     The earl his ring-mail from him flung,
+     Its steel rings on the wet deck rung;
+     Part of it fell into the sea, -
+     A part was kept, a proof to be
+     How sharp and thick the arrow-flight
+     Among the sea-steeds in this fight."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Norn, one of the Fates, stands here for women, whose
+     business it was to sew the rings of iron upon the cloth
+     which made these ring-mail coats or shirts.  The needles,
+     although some of them were of gold, appear to have been
+     without eyes, and used like shoemaker's awls. -L.
+      44. EARL SIGVALDE'S FLIGHT.
+      The Jomsborg vikings had larger and higher-sided ships; and both parties
+      fought desperately. Vagn Akason laid his ship on board of Svein Earl
+      Hakon's son's ship, and Svein allowed his ship to give way, and was on the
+      point of flying. Then Earl Eirik came up, and laid his ship alongside of
+      Vagn, and then Vagn gave way, and the ships came to lie in the same
+      position as before. Thereupon Eirik goes to the other wing, which had gone
+      back a little, and Bue had cut the ropes, intending to pursue them. Then
+      Eirik laid himself, board to board, alongside of Bue's ship, and there was
+      a severe combat hand to hand. Two or three of Eirik's ships then laid
+      themselves upon Bue's single vessel. A thunder-storm came on at this
+      moment, and such a heavy hail-storm that every hailstone weighed a
+      pennyweight. The Earl Sigvalde cut his cable, turned his ship round, and
+      took flight. Vagn Akason called to him not to fly; but as Earl Sigvalde
+      paid no attention to what he said, Vagn threw his spear at him, and hit
+      the man at the helm. Earl Sigvalde rowed away with 35 ships, leaving 25 of
+      his fleet behind.
+      45. BUE THROWS HIMSELF OVERBOARD.
+      Then Earl Hakon laid his ship on the other side of Bue's ship, and now
+      came heavy blows on Bue's men. Vigfus, a son of Vigaglum, took up an anvil
+      with a sharp end, which lay upon the deck, and on which a man had welded
+      the hilt to his sword just before, and being a very strong man cast the
+      anvil with both hands at the head of Aslak Holmskalle, and the end of it
+      went into his brains. Before this no weapon could wound this Aslak, who
+      was Bue's foster-brother, and forecastle commander, although he could
+      wound right and left. Another man among the strongest and bravest was
+      Havard Hoggande. In this attack Eirik's men boarded Bue's ship, and went
+      aft to the quarter-deck where Bue stood. There Thorstein Midlang cut at
+      Bue across his nose, so that the nosepiece of his helmet was cut in two,
+      and he got a great wound; but Bue, in turn, cut at Thorstein's side, so
+      that the sword cut the man through. Then Bue lifted up two chests full of
+      gold, and called aloud, "Overboard all Bue s men," and threw himself
+      overboard with his two chests. Many of his people sprang overboard with
+      him. Some fell in the ship, for it was of no use to call for quarter.
+      Bue's ship was cleared of people from stem to stern, and afterwards all
+      the others, the one after the other.
+      46. VIKINGS BOUND TOGETHER IN ONE CHAIN.
+      Earl Eirik then laid himself alongside of Vagn's ship, and there was a
+      brave defence; but at last this ship too was cleared, and Vagn and thirty
+      men were taken prisoners, and bound, and brought to land. Then came up
+      Thorkel Leira, and said, "Thou madest a solemn vow, Vagn, to kill me, but
+      now it seems more likely that I will kill thee." Vagn and his men sat all
+      upon a log of wood together. Thorkel had an axe in his hands, with which
+      he cut at him who sat outmost on the log. Vagn and the other prisoners
+      were bound so that a rope was fastened on their feet, but they had their
+      hands free. One of them said, "I will stick this cloak-pin that I have in
+      my hand into the earth, if it be so that I know anything, after my head is
+      cut off." His head was cut off, but the cloak-pin fell from his hand.
+      There sat also a very handsome man with long hair, who twisted his hair
+      over his head, put out his neck, and said, "Don't make my hair bloody." A
+      man took the hair in his hands and held it fast. Thorkel hewed with his
+      axe; but the viking twitched his head so strongly that he who was holding
+      his hair fell forwards, and the axe cut off both his hands, and stuck fast
+      in the earth. Then Earl Eirik came up, and asked, "Who is that handsome
+      man?"
+      He replies, "I am called Sigurd, and am Bue's son. But are all the
+      Jomsborg vikings dead?"
+      Eirik says, "Thou art certainly Boe's son. Wilt thou now take life and
+      peace?"
+      "That depends," says he, "upon who it is that offers it."
+      "He offers who has the power to do it -Earl Eirik."
+      "That will I," says he, "from his hands." And now the rope was loosened
+      from him.
+      Then said Thorkel Leira, "Although thou should give all these men life and
+      peace, earl, Vagn Akason shall never come from this with life." And he ran
+      at him with uplifted axe; but the viking Skarde swung himself in the rope,
+      and let himself fall just before Thorkel's feet, so that Thorkel .ell over
+      him, and Vagn caught the axe and gave Thorkel a death-wound. Then said the
+      earl, "Vagn, wilt thou accept life?"
+      "That I will," says he, "if you give it to all of us."
+      "Loose them from the rope," said the earl, and it was done. Eighteen were
+      killed, and twelve got their lives.
+      47. DEATH OF GISSUR OF VALDERS.
+      Earl Hakon, and many with him, were sitting upon a piece of wood, and a
+      bow-string twanged from Bue's ship, and the arrow struck Gissur from
+      Valders, who was sitting next the earl, and was clothed splendidly.
+      Thereupon the people went on board, and found Havard Hoggande standing on
+      his knees at the ship's railing, for his feet had been cut off (1), and he
+      had a bow in his hand. When they came on board the ship Havard asked, "Who
+      fell by that shaft?"
+      They answered, "A man called Gissur."
+      "Then my luck was less than I thought," said he.
+      "Great enough was the misfortune," replied they; "but thou shalt not make
+      it greater." And they killed him on the spot.
+      The dead were then ransacked, and the booty brought all together to be
+      divided; and there were twenty-five ships of the Jomsborg vikings in the
+      booty. So says Tind:
+     "Many a viking's body lay
+     Dead on the deck this bloody day,
+     Before they cut their sun-dried ropes,
+     And in quick flight put all their hopes.
+     He whom the ravens know afar
+     Cleared five-and-twenty ships of war:
+     A proof that in the furious fight
+     None can withstand the Norsemen's might."
+      Then the army dispersed. Earl Hakon went to Throndhjem, and was much
+      displeased that Earl Eirik had given quarter to Vagn Akason. It was said
+      that at this battle Earl Hakon had sacrificed for victory his son, young
+      Erling, to the gods; and instantly came the hailstorm, and the defeat and
+      slaughter of the Jomsborg vikings.
+      Earl Eirik went to the Uplands, and eastward by that route to his own
+      kingdom, taking Vagn Akason with him. Earl Eirik married Vagn to
+      Ingebjorg, a daughter of Thorkel Leira, and gave him a good ship of war
+      and all belonging to it, and a crew; and they parted the best of friends.
+      Then Vagn went home south to Denmark, and became afterwards a man of great
+      consideration, and many great people are descended from him.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) This traditionary tale of a warrior fighting on his knees
+     after his legs were cut off, appears to have been a popular
+     idea among the Northmen, and is related by their descendants
+     in the ballad o. Chevy Chase. -L.
+      48. KING HARALD GRENSKE'S DEATH.
+      Harald Grenske, as before related, was king in Vestfold, and was married
+      to Asta, a daughter of Gudbrand Kula. One summer (A.D. 994) Harald Grenske
+      made an expedition to the Baltic to gather property, and he came to
+      Svithjod. Olaf the Swede was king there, a son of Eirik the Victorious,
+      and Sigrid, a daughter of Skoglartoste. Sigrid was then a widow, and had
+      many and great estates in Svithjod. When she heard that her foster-brother
+      was come to the country a short distance from her, she sent men to him to
+      invite him to a feast. He did not neglect the invitation, but came to her
+      with a great attendance of his followers, and was received in the most
+      friendly way. He and the queen sat in the high-seat, and drank together
+      towards the evening, and all his men were entertained in the most
+      hospitable manner. At night, when the king went to rest, a bed was put up
+      for him with a hanging of fine linen around it, and with costly
+      bedclothes; but in the lodging-house there were few men. When the king was
+      undressed, and had gone to bed, the queen came to him, filled a bowl
+      herself for him to drink, and was very gay, and pressed to drink. The king
+      was drunk above measure, and, indeed, so were they both. Then he slept,
+      and the queen went away, and laid herself down also. Sigrid was a woman of
+      the greatest understanding, and clever in many things. In the morning
+      there was also the most excellent entertainment; but then it went on as
+      usual when people have drunk too much, that next day they take care not to
+      exceed. The queen was very gay, and she and the king talked of many things
+      with each other; among other things she valued her property, and the
+      dominions she had in Svithjod, as nothing less than his property in
+      Norway. With that observation the king was nowise pleased, and he found no
+      pleasure in anything after that, but made himself ready for his journey in
+      an ill humor. On the other hand, the queen was remarkably gay, and made
+      him many presents, and followed him out to the road. Now Harald returned
+      about harvest to Norway, and was at home all winter; but was very silent
+      and cast down. In summer he went once more to the Baltic with his ships,
+      and steered to Svithjod. He sent a message to Queen Sigrid that he wished
+      to have a meeting with her and she rode down to meet him. They talked
+      together and he soon brought out the proposal that she should marry him.
+      She replied, that this was foolish talk for him, who was so well married
+      already that he might think himself well off. Harald says, "Asta is a good
+      and clever woman; but she is not so well born as I am." Sigrid replies,
+      "It may be that thou art of higher birth, but I think she is now pregnant
+      with both your fortunes." They exchanged but few words more before the
+      queen rode away. King Harald was now depressed in mind, and prepared
+      himself again to ride up the country to meet Queen Sigrid. Many of his
+      people dissuaded him; but nevertheless he set off with a great attendance,
+      and came to the house in which the queen dwelt. The same evening came
+      another king, called Vissavald, from Gardarike (Russia), likewise to pay
+      his addresses to Queen Sigrid. Lodging was given to both the kings, and to
+      all their people, in a great old room of an out-building, and all the
+      furniture was of the same character; but there was no want of drink in the
+      evening, and that so strong that all were drunk, and the watch, both
+      inside and outside, fell fast asleep. Then Queen Sigrid ordered an attack
+      on them in the night, both with fire and sword. The house was burnt, with
+      all who were in it and those who slipped out were put to the sword. Sigrid
+      said that she would make these small kings tired of coming to court her.
+      She was afterwards called Sigrid the Haughty (Storrada).
+      49. BIRTH OF OLAF, SON OF HARALD GRENSKE.
+      This happened the winter after the battle of the Jomsborg vikings at
+      Hjorungavag. When Harald went up the country after Sigrid, he left Hrane
+      behind with the ships to look after the men. Now when Hrane heard that
+      Harald was cut off, he returned to Norway the shortest way he could, and
+      told the news. He repaired first to Asta, and related to her all that had
+      happened on the journey, and also on what errand Harald had visited Queen
+      Sigrid. When Asta got these tidings she set off directly to her father in
+      the Uplands, who received her well; but both were enraged at the design
+      which had been laid in Svithjod, and that King Harald had intended to set
+      her in a single condition. In summer (A.D. 995) Asta, Gudbrand's daughter,
+      was confined, and had a boy child, who had water poured over him, and was
+      called Olaf. Hrane himself poured water over him, and the child was
+      brought up at first in the house of Gudbrand and his mother Asta.
+      50. ABOUT EARL HAKON.
+      Earl Hakon ruled over the whole outer part of Norway that lies on the sea,
+      and had thus sixteen districts under his sway. The arrangement introduced
+      by Harald Harfager, that there should be an earl in each district, was
+      afterward continued for a long time; and thus Earl Hakon had sixteen earls
+      under him. So says the "Vellekla": -
+     "Who before has ever known
+     Sixteen earls subdued by one?
+     Who has seen all Norway's land
+     Conquered by one brave hero's hand?
+     It will be long in memory held,
+     How Hakon ruled by sword and shield.
+     When tales at the viking's mast go round,
+     His praise will every mouth resound."
+      While Earl Hakon ruled over Norway there were good crops in the land, and
+      peace was well preserved in the country among the bondes. The Earl, for
+      the greater part of his lifetime, was therefore much beloved by the
+      bondes; but it happened, in the longer course of time, that the earl
+      became very intemperate in his intercourse with women, and even carried it
+      so far that he made the daughters of people of consideration be carried
+      away and brought home to him; and after keeping them a week or two as
+      concubines, he sent them home. He drew upon himself the indignation of me
+      relations of these girls; and the bondes began to murmur loudly, as the
+      Throndhjem people have the custom of doing when anything goes against
+      their judgment.
+      51. THORER KLAKKA'S JOURNEY.
+      Earl Hakon, in the mean time, hears some whisper that to the westward,
+      over the Nor.h sea, was a man called Ole, who was looked upon as a king.
+      From the conversation of some people, he fell upon the suspicion that he
+      must be of the royal race of Norway. It was, indeed, said that this Ole
+      was from Russia; but the earl had heard that Trygve Olafson had had a son
+      called Olaf, who in his infancy had gone east to Gardarike, and had been
+      brought up by King Valdemar. The earl had carefully inquired about this
+      man, and had his suspicion that he must be the same person who had now
+      come to these western countries. The earl had a very good friend called
+      Thorer Klakka, who had been long upon viking expeditions, sometimes also
+      upon merchant voyages; so that he was well acquainted all around. This
+      Thorer Earl Hakon sends over the North sea, and told him to make a
+      merchant voyage to Dublin, many were in the habit of doing, and carefully
+      to discover who this Ole was. Provided he got any certainty that he was
+      Olaf Trygvason, or any other of the Norwegian royal race, then Thorer
+      should endeavor to ensnare him by some deceit, and bring him into the
+      earl's power.
+      52. OLAF TRYGVASON COMES TO NORWAY.
+      On this Thorer sails westward to Ireland, and hears that Ole is in Dublin
+      with his wife's father King Olaf Kvaran. Thorer, who was a plausible man,
+      immediately got acquainted with Ole; and as they often met, and had long
+      conversations together, Ole began to inquire about news from Norway, and
+      above all of the Upland kings and great people, -which of them were
+      in life, and what dominations they now had. He asked also about Earl
+      Hakon, and if he was much liked in the country. Thorer replies, that the
+      earl is such a powerful man that no one dares to speak otherwise than he
+      would like; but that comes from there being nobody else in the country to
+      look to. "Yet, to say the truth, I know it to be the mind of many brave
+      men, and of whole communities, that they would much rather see a king of
+      Harald Harfager's race come to the kingdom. But we know of no one suited
+      for this, especially now that it is proved how vain every attack on Earl
+      Hakon must be." As they often talked together in the same strain, Olaf
+      disclosed to Thorer his name and family, and asked him his opinion, and
+      whether he thought the bondes would take him for their king if he were to
+      appear in Norway. Thorer encouraged him very eagerly to the enterprise,
+      and praised him and his talents highly. Then Olaf's inclination to go to
+      the heritage of his ancestors became strong. Olaf sailed accordingly,
+      accompanied by Thorer, with five ships; first to the Hebrides, and from
+      thence to the Orkneys. At that time Earl Sigurd, Hlodver's son, lay in
+      Osmundswall, in the island South Ronaldsa, with a ship of war, on his way
+      to Caithness. Just at the same time Olaf was sailing with his fleet from
+      the westward to the islands, and ran into the same harbour, because
+      Pentland Firth was not to be passed at that tide. When the king was
+      informed that the earl was there, he made him be called; and when the earl
+      came on board to speak with the king, after a few words only had passed
+      between them, the king says the earl must allow himself to be baptized,
+      and all the people of the country also, or he should be put to death
+      directly; and he assured the earl he would lay waste the islands with fire
+      and sword, if the people did not adopt Christianity. In the position the
+      earl found himself, he preferred becoming Christian, and he and all who
+      were with him were baptized. Afterwards the earl took an oath to the king,
+      went into his service, and gave him his son, whose name was Hvelp (Whelp),
+      or Hunde (Dog), as an hostage; and the king took Hvelp to Norway with him.
+      Thereafter Olaf went out to sea to the eastward, and made the land at
+      Morster Island, where he first touched the ground of Norway. He had high
+      mass sung in a tent, and afterwards on the spot a church was built. Thorer
+      Klakka said now to the king, that the best plan for him would be not to
+      make it known who he was, or to let any report about him get abroad; but
+      to seek out Earl Hakon as fast as possible and fall upon him by surprise.
+      King Olaf did so, sailing northward day and night, when wind permitted,
+      and did not let the people of the country know who it was that was sailing
+      in such haste. When he came north to Agdanes, he heard that the earl was
+      in the fjord, and was in discord with the bondes. On hearing this, Thorer
+      saw that things were going in a very different way from what he expected;
+      for after the battle with the Jomsborg vikings all men in Norway were the
+      most sincere friends of the earl on account of the victory he had gained,
+      and of the peace and security he had given to the country; and now it
+      unfortunately turns out that a great chief has come to the country at a
+      time when the bondes are in arms against the earl.
+      53. EARL HAKON'S FLIGHT.
+      Earl Hakon was at a feast in Medalhus in Gaulardal and his ships lay out
+      by Viggja. There was a powerful bonde, by name Orm Lyrgja, who dwelt in
+      Bunes, who had a wife called Gudrun, a daughter of Bergthor of Lundar. She
+      was called the Lundasol; for she was the most-beautiful of women. The earl
+      sent his slaves to Orm, with the errand that they should bring Orm's wife,
+      Gudrun, to the earl. The thralls tell their errand, and Orm bids them
+      first seat themselves to supper; but before they had done eating, many
+      people from the neighbourhood, to whom Orm had sent notice, had gathered
+      together: and now Orm declared he would not send Gudrun with the
+      messengers. Gudrun told the thralls to tell the earl that she would not
+      come to him, unless he sent Thora of Rimul after her. Thora was a woman of
+      great influence, and one of the earl's best beloved. The thralls say that
+      they will come another time, and both the bonde and his wife would be made
+      to repent of it; and they departed with many threats. Orm, on the other
+      hand, sent out a message-token to all the neighbouring country, and with
+      it the message to attack Earl Hakon with weapons and kill him. He sent
+      also a message to Haldor in Skerdingsstedja, who also sent out his
+      message-token. A short time before, the earl had taken away the wife of a
+      man called Brynjolf, and there had very nearly been an insurrection about
+      that business. Having now again got this message-token, the people made a
+      general revolt, and set out all to Medalhus. When the earl heard of this,
+      he left the house with his followers, and concealed himself in a deep
+      glen, now called Jarlsdal (Earl's Dale). Later in the day, the earl got
+      news of the bondes' army. They had beset all the roads; but believed the
+      earl had escaped to his ships, which his son Erlend, a remarkably handsome
+      and hopeful young man, had the command of. When night came the earl
+      dispersed his people, and ordered them to go through the forest roads into
+      Orkadal; "for nobody will molest you," said he, "when I am not with you.
+      Send a message to Erlend to sail out of the fjord, and meet me in More. In
+      the mean time I will conceal myself from the bondes." Then the earl went
+      his way with one thrall or slave, called Kark, attending him. There was
+      ice upon the Gaul (the river of Gaulardal), and the earl drove his horse
+      upon it, and left his coat lying upon the ice. They then went to a hole,
+      since called Jarlshella (the Earl's Hole), where they slept. When Kark
+      awoke he told his dream, -that a black threatening mad had come into
+      the hole, and was angry that people should have entered it; and that the
+      man had said, "Ulle is dead." The earl said that his son Erlend must be
+      killed. Kark slept again and was again disturbed in his sleep; and when he
+      awoke he told his dream, -that the same man had again appeared to
+      him, and bade him tell the earl that all the sounds were closed. From this
+      dream the earl began to suspect that it betokened a short life to him.
+      They stood up, and went to the house of Rimul. The earl now sends Kark to
+      Thora, and begs of her to come secretly to him. She did so and received
+      the earl kindly and he begged her to conceal him for a few nights until
+      the army of the bondes had dispersed. "Here about my house," said she,
+      "you will be hunted after, both inside and outside; for many know that I
+      would willingly help you if I can. There is but one place about the house
+      where they could never expect to find such a man as you, and that is the
+      swine-stye." When they came there the earl said, "Well, let it be made
+      ready for us; as to save our life is the first and foremost concern." The
+      slave dug a great hole in it, bore away the earth that he dug out, and
+      laid wood over it. Thora brought the tidings to the earl that Olaf
+      Trygvason had come from sea into the fjord, and had killed his son Erlend.
+      Then the earl and Kark both went into the hole. Thora covered it with
+      wood, and threw earth and dung over it, and drove the swine upon the top
+      of it. The swine-style was under a great stone.
+      54. ERLEND'S DEATH.
+      Olaf Trygvason came from sea into the fjord with five long-ships, and
+      Erlend, Hakon's son, rowed towards him with three ships. When the vessels
+      came near to each other, Erlend suspected they might be enemies, and
+      turned towards the land. When Olaf and his followers saw long-ships coming
+      in haste out of the fjord, and rowing towards them, they thought Earl
+      Hakon must be here; and they put out all oars to follow them. As soon as
+      Erlend and his ships got near the land they rowed aground instantly,
+      jumped overboard, and took to the land; but at the same instant Olaf's
+      ship came up with them. Olaf saw a remarkably handsome man swimming in the
+      water, and laid hold of a tiller and threw it at him. The tiller struck
+      Erlend, the son of Hakon the earl, on the head, and clove it to the brain;
+      and there left Erlend his life. Olaf and his people killed many; but some
+      escaped, and some were made prisoners, and got life and freedom that they
+      might go and tell what had happened. They learned then that the bondes had
+      driven away Earl Hakon, and that he had fled, and his troops were all
+      dispersed.
+      55. EARL HAKON'S DEATH.
+      The bondes then met Olaf, to the joy of both, and they made an agreement
+      together. The bondes took Olaf to be their king, and resolved, one and
+      all, to seek out Earl Hakon. They went up Gaulardal; for it seemed to them
+      likely that if the earl was concealed in any house it must be at Rimul,
+      for Thora was his dearest friend in that valley. They come up, therefore,
+      and search everywhere, outside and inside the house, but could not find
+      him. Then Olaf held a House Thing (trusting), or council out in the yard,
+      and stood upon a great stone which lay beside the swine-stye, and made a
+      speech to the people, in which he promised to enrich the man with rewards
+      and honours who should kill the earl. This speech was heard by the earl
+      and the thrall Kark. They had a light in their room.
+      "Why art thou so pale," says the earl, "and now again black as earth? Thou
+      hast not the intention to betray me?"
+      "By no means," replies Kark.
+      "We were born on the same night," says the earl, "and the time will be
+      short between our deaths."
+      King Olaf went away in the evening. When night came the earl kept himself
+      awake but Kark slept, and was disturbed in his sleep. The earl woke him,
+      and asked him "what he was dreaming of?"
+      He answered, "I was at Hlader and Olaf Trygvason was laying a gold ring
+      about my neck."
+      The earl says, "It will be a red ring Olaf will lay about thy neck if he
+      catches thee. Take care of that! From me thou shalt enjoy all that is
+      good, therefore betray me not."
+      They then kept themselves awake both; the one, as it were, watching upon
+      the other. But towards day the earl suddenly dropped asleep; but his sleep
+      was so unquiet that he drew his heels under him, and raised his neck, as
+      if going to rise, and screamed dreadfully high. On this Kark, dreadfully
+      alarmed, drew a large knife out of his belt, stuck it in the earl's
+      throat, and cut it across, and killed Earl Hakon. Then Kark cut off the
+      earl's head, and ran away. Late in the day he came to Hlader, where he
+      delivered the earl's head to King Olaf, and told all these circumstances
+      of his own and Earl Hakon's doings. Olaf had him taken out and beheaded.
+      56. EARL HAKON'S HEAD.
+      King Olaf, and a vast number of bondes with him, then went out to
+      Nidarholm, and had with him the heads of Earl Hakon and Kark. This holm
+      was used then for a place of execution of thieves and ill-doers, and there
+      stood a gallows on it. He had the heads of the earl and of Kark hung upon
+      it, and the whole army of the bondes cast stones at them, screaming and
+      shouting that the one worthless fellow had followed the other. They then
+      sent up to Gaulardal for the earl's dead body. So great was the enmity of
+      the Throndhjem people against Earl Hakon, that no man could venture to
+      call him by any other name than Hakon the Bad; and he was so called long
+      after those days. Yet, sooth to say of Earl Hakon, he was in many respects
+      fitted to be a chief: first, because he was descended from a high race;
+      then because he had understanding and knowledge to direct a government;
+      also manly courage in battle to gain victories, and good luck in killing
+      his enemies. So says Thorleif Raudfeldson: -
+     "In Norway's land was never known
+     A braver earl than the brave Hakon.
+     At sea, beneath the clear moon's light,
+     No braver man e'er sought to fight.
+     Nine kings to Odin's wide domain
+     Were sent, by Hakon's right hand slain!
+     So well the raven-flocks were fed -
+     So well the wolves were filled with dead!"
+      Earl Hakon was very generous; but the greatest misfortunes attended even
+      such a chief at the end of his days: and the great cause of this was that
+      the time was come when heathen sacrifices and idolatrous worship were
+      doomed to fall, and the holy faith and good customs to come in their
+      place.
+      57. OLAF TRYGVASON ELECTED KING.
+      Olaf Trvgvason was chosen at Throndhjem by the General Thing to be the
+      king over the whole country, as Harald Harfager had been. The whole public
+      and the people throughout all the land would listen to nothing else than
+      that Olaf Trygvason should be king. Then Olaf went round the whole
+      country, and brought it under his rule, and all the people of Norway gave
+      in their submission; and also the chiefs in the Uplands and in Viken, who
+      before had held their lands as fiefs from the Danish king, now became King
+      Olaf's men, and held their hands from him. He went thus through the whole
+      country during the first winter (A.D. 996) and the following summer. Earl
+      Eirik, the son of Earl Hakon, his brother Svein, and their friends and
+      relations, fled out of the country, and went east to Sweden to King Olaf
+      the Swede, who gave them a good reception. So says Thord Kolbeinson: -
+     "O thou whom bad men drove away,
+     After the bondes by foul play,
+     Took Hakon's life!  Fate will pursue
+     These bloody wolves, and make them rue.
+     When the host came from out the West,
+     Like some tall stately war-ship's mast,
+     I saw the son of Trygve stand,
+     Surveying proud his native land."
+      And again, -
+     "Eirik has more upon his mind,
+     Against the new Norse king designed,
+     Than by his words he seems to show -
+     And truly it may well be so.
+     Stubborn and stiff are Throndhjem men,
+     But Throndhjem's earl may come again;
+     In Swedish land he knows no rest -
+     Fierce wrath is gathering in his breast."
+      58. LODIN'S MARRIAGE
+      Lodin was the name of a man from Viken who was rich and of good family. He
+      went often on merchant voyages, and sometimes on viking cruises. It
+      happened one summer that he went on a merchant voyage with much
+      merchandise in a ship of his own. He directed his course first to
+      Eistland, and was there at a market in summer. To the place at which the
+      market was held many merchant goods were brought, and also many thralls or
+      slaves for sale. There Lodin saw a woman who was to be sold as a slave:
+      and on looking at her he knew her to be Astrid Eirik's daughter, who had
+      been married to King Trygve. But now she was altogether unlike what she
+      had been when he last saw her; for now she was pale, meagre in
+      countenance, and ill clad. He went up to her, and asked her how matters
+      stood with her. She replied, "It is heavy to be told; for I have been sold
+      as a slave, and now again I am brought here for sale." After speaking
+      together a little Astrid knew him, and begged him to buy her; and bring
+      her home to her friends. "On this condition," said he, "I will bring thee
+      home tn Norway, that thou wilt marry me." Now as Astrid stood in great
+      need, and moreover knew that Lodin was a man of high birth, rich, and
+      brave, she promised to do so for her ransom. Lodin accordingly bought
+      Astrid, took her home to Norway with him, and married her with her
+      friends' consent. Their children were Thorkel Nefia, Ingerid, and
+      Ingegerd. Ingebjorg and Astrid were daughters of Astrid by King Trygve.
+      Eirik Bjodaskalle's sons were Sigird, Karlshofud, Jostein, and Thorkel
+      Dydril, who were all rich and brave people who had estates east in the
+      country. In Viken in the east dwelt two brothers, rich and of good
+      descent; one called Thorgeir, and the other Hyrning; and they married
+      Lodin and Astrid's daughters, Ingerid and Ingegerd.
+      59. OLAF BAPTIZES THE COUNTRY OF VIKEN.
+      When Harald Gormson, king of Denmark, had adopted Christianity, he sent a
+      message over all his kingdom that all people should be baptized, and
+      converted to the true faith. He himself followed his message, and used
+      power and violence where nothing else would do. He sent two earls,
+      Urguthrjot and Brimilskjar, with many people to Norway, to proclaim
+      Christianity there. In Viken, which stood directly under the king's power,
+      this succeeded, and many were baptized of the country folk. But when Svein
+      Forked-beard, immediately after his father King Harald's death, went out
+      on war expeditions in Saxland, Frisland, and at last in England, the
+      Northmen who had taken up Christianity returned back to heathen
+      sacrifices, just as before; and the people in the north of the country did
+      the same. But now that Olaf Trygvason was king of Norway, he remained long
+      during the summer (A.D. 996) in Viken, where many of his relatives and
+      some of his brothers-in-law were settled, and also many who had been great
+      friends of his father; so that he was received with the greatest
+      affection. Olaf called together his mother's brothers, his stepfather
+      Lodin, and his brothers-in-law Thorgeir and Hyrning, to speak with them,
+      and to disclose with the greatest care the business which he desired they
+      themselves should approve of, and support with all their power; namely,
+      the proclaiming Christianity over all his kingdom. He would, he declared,
+      either bring it to this, that all Norway should be Christian, or die. "I
+      shall make you all," said he, "great and mighty men in promoting this
+      work; for I trust to you most, as blood relations or brothers-in-law." All
+      agreed to do what he asked, and to follow him in what he desired. King
+      Olaf immediately made it known to the public that he recommended
+      Christianity to all the people in his kingdom, which message was well
+      received and approved of by those who had before given him their promise;
+      and these being the most powerful among the people assembled, the others
+      followed their example, and all the inhabitants of the east part of Viken
+      allowed themselves to be baptized. The king then went to the north part of
+      Viken and invited every man to accept Christianity; and those who opposed
+      him he punished severely, killing some, mutilating others, and driving
+      some into banishment. At length he brought it so far, that all the kingdom
+      which his father King Trvgve had ruled over, and also that of his relation
+      Harald Grenske, accepted of Christianity; and during that summer (A.D.
+      996) and the following winter (A.D. 997) all Viken was made Christian.
+      60. OF THE HORDALAND PEOPLE.
+      Early in spring (A.D. 997) King Olaf set out from Viken with a great force
+      northwards to Agder, and proclaimed that every man should be baptized. And
+      thus the people received Christianity, for nobody dared oppose the king's
+      will, wheresoever he came. In Hordaland, however, were many bold and great
+      men of Hordakare's race. He, namely, had left four sons, -the first
+      Thorleif Spake; the second, Ogmund, father of Thorolf Skialg, who was
+      father of Erling of Sole; the third was Thord father of the Herse Klyp who
+      killed King Sigurd Slefa, Gunhild's son; and lastly, Olmod, father of
+      Askel, whose son was Aslak Fitjaskalle; and that family branch was the
+      greatest and most considered in Hordaland. Now when this family heard the
+      bad tidings, that the king was coming along the country from the eastward
+      with a great force, and was breaking the ancient law of the people, and
+      imposing punishment and hard conditions on all who opposed him, the
+      relatives appointed a meeting to take counsel with each other, for they
+      knew the king would come down upon them at once: and they all resolved to
+      appear in force at the Gula-Thing, there to hold a conference with King
+      Olaf Trygvason.
+      61. ROGALAND BAPTIZED.
+      When King Olaf came to Rogaland, he immediately summoned the people to a
+      Thing; and when the bondes received the message-token for a Thing, they
+      assembled in great numbers well armed. After they had come together, they
+      resolved to choose three men, the best speakers of the whole, who should
+      answer King Olaf, and argue with the king; and especially should decline
+      to accept of anything against the old law, even if the king should require
+      it of them. Now when the bondes came to the Thing, and the Thing was
+      formed, King Olaf arose, and at first spoke good-humoredly to the people;
+      but they observed he wanted them to accept Christianity, with all his fine
+      words: and in the conclusion he let them know that those who should speak
+      against him, and not submit to his proposal, must expect his displeasure
+      and punishment, and all the ill that it was in his power to inflict. When
+      he had ended his speech, one of the bondes stood up, who was considered
+      the most eloquent, and who had been chosen as the first who should reply
+      to King Olaf. But when he would begin to speak such a cough seized him,
+      and such a difficulty of breathing, that he could not bring out a word,
+      and had to sit down again. Then another bonde stood up, resolved not to
+      let an answer be wanting, although it had gone so ill with the former: but
+      he stammered so that he could not get a word uttered, and all present set
+      up a laughter, amid which the bonde sat down again. And now the third
+      stood up to make a speech against King Olaf's; but when he began he became
+      so hoarse and husky in his throat, that nobody could hear a word he said,
+      and he also had to sit down. There was none of the bondes now to speak
+      against the king, and as nobody answered him there was no opposition; and
+      it came to this, that all agreed to what the king had proposed. All the
+      people of the Thing accordingly were baptized before the Thing was
+      dissolved.
+      62. ERLING SKJALGSON'S WOOING.
+      King Olaf went with his men-at-arms to the Gula-Thing; for the bondes had
+      sent him word that they would reply there to his speech. When both parties
+      had come to the Thing, the king desired first to have a conference with
+      the chief people of the country; and when the meeting was numerous the
+      king set forth his errand, -that he desired them, according to his
+      proposal, to allow themselves to be baptized. Then said Olmod the Old, "We
+      relations have considered together this matter, and have come to one
+      resolution. If thou thinkest, king, to force us who are related together
+      to such things as to break our old law, or to bring us under thyself by
+      any sort of violence, then will we stand against thee with all our might:
+      and be the victory to him to whom fate ordains it. But if thou, king, wilt
+      advance our relations' fortunes, then thou shalt have leave to do as thou
+      desirest, and we will all serve thee with zeal in thy purpose."
+      The king replies, "What do you propose for obtaining this agreement?"
+      Then answers Olmod, "The first is, that thou wilt give thy sister Astrid
+      in marriage to Erling Skjalgson, our relation, whom we look upon as the
+      most hopeful young man in all Norway."
+      King Olaf replied, that this marriage appeared to him also very suitable;
+      "as Erling is a man of good birth, and a good-looking man in appearance:
+      but Astrid herself must answer to this proposal."
+      Thereupon the king spoke to his sister. She said, "It is but of little use
+      that I am a king's sister, and a king's daughter, if I must marry a man
+      who has no high dignity or office. I will rather wait a few years for a
+      better match." Thus ended this conference.
+      63. HORDALAND BAPTIZED.
+      King Olaf took a falcon that belonged to Astrid, plucked off all its
+      feathers, and then sent it to her. Then said Astrid, "Angry is my
+      brother." And she stood up, and went to the king, who received her kindly,
+      and she said that she left it to the king to determine her marriage. "I
+      think," said the king, "that I must have power enough in this land to
+      raise any man I please to high dignity." Then the king ordered Olmod and
+      Erling to be called to a conference, and all their relations; and the
+      marriage was determined upon, and Astrid betrothed to Erling. Thereafter
+      the king held the Thing, and recommended Christianity to the bondes; and
+      as Olmod, and Erling, and all their relations, took upon themselves the
+      most active part in forwarding the king's desire, nobody dared to speak
+      against it; and all the people were baptized, and adopted Christianity.
+      64. ERLING SKJALGSON'S WEDDING.
+      Erling Skjalgson had his wedding in summer, and a great many people were
+      assembled at it. King Olaf was also there, and offered Erling an earldom.
+      Erling replied thus: "All my relations have been herses only, and I will
+      take no higher title than they have; but this I will accept from thee,
+      king, that thou makest me the greatest of that title in the country." The
+      king consented; and at his departure the king invested his brother-in law
+      Erling with all the land north of the Sognefjord, and east to the
+      Lidandisnes, on the same terms as Harald Harfager had given land to his
+      sons, as before related.
+      65. RAUMSDAL AND FJORD-DISTRICTS BAPTIZED.
+      The same harvest King Olaf summoned the bondes to a Thing of the four
+      districts at Dragseid, in Stad: and there the people from Sogn, the
+      Fjord-districts, South More, and Raumsdal, were summoned to meet. King
+      Olaf came there with a great many people who had followed him from the
+      eastward, and also with those who had joined him from Rogaland and
+      Hordaland. When the king came to the Thing, he proposed to them there, as
+      elsewhere, Christianity; and as the king had such a powerful host with
+      him, they were frightened. The king offered them two conditions, -either
+      to accept Christianity, or to fight. But the bondes saw they were in no
+      condition to fight the king, and resolved, therefore, that all the people
+      should agree to be baptized. The king proceeded afterwards to North More,
+      and baptized all that district. He then sailed to Hlader, in Throndhjem;
+      had the temple there razed to the ground; took all the ornaments and all
+      property out of the temple, and from the gods in it; and among other
+      things the great gold ring which Earl Hakon had ordered to be made, and
+      which hung in the door of the temple; and then had the temple burnt. But
+      when the bondes heard of this, they sent out a war-arrow as a token
+      through the whole district, ordering out a warlike force, and intended to
+      meet the king with it. In the meantime King Olaf sailed with a war force
+      out of the fjord along the coast northward, intending to proceed to
+      Halogaland, and baptize there. When he came north to Bjarnaurar, he heard
+      from Halogaland that a force was assembled there to defend the country
+      against the king. The chiefs of this force were Harek of Thjotta, Thorer
+      Hjort from Vagar, and Eyvind Kinrifa. Now when King Olaf heard this, he
+      turned about and sailed southwards along the land; and when he got south
+      of Stad proceeded at his leisure, and came early in winter (A.D. 998) all
+      the way east to Viken.
+      66. OLAF PROPOSES MARRIAGE TO QUEEN SIGRID.
+      Queen Sigrid in Svithjod, who had for surname the Haughty, sat in her
+      mansion, and during the same winter messengers went between King Olaf and
+      Sigrid to propose his courtship to her, and she had no objection; and the
+      matter was fully and fast resolved upon. Thereupon King Olaf sent to Queen
+      Sigrid the great gold ring he had taken from the temple door of Hlader,
+      which was considered a distinguished ornament. The meeting for concluding
+      the business was appointed to be in spring on the frontier, at the Gaut
+      river. Now the ring which King Olaf had sent Queen Sigrid was highly
+      prized by all men; yet the queen's gold-smiths, two brothers, who took the
+      ring in their hands, and weighed it, spoke quietly to each other about it,
+      and in a manner that made the queen call them to her, and ask "what they
+      smiled at?" But they would not say a word, and she commanded them to say
+      what it was they had discovered. Then they said the ring is false. Upon
+      this she ordered the ring to be broken into pieces, and it was found to be
+      copper inside. Then the queen was enraged, and said that Olaf would
+      deceive her in more ways than this one. In the same year (A.D. 998) King
+      Olaf went into Ringenke, and there the people also were baptized.
+      67. OLAF HARALDSON BAPTIZED.
+      Asta, the daughter of Gudbrand, soon after the fall of Harald Grenske
+      married again a man who was called Sigurd Syr, who was a king in
+      Ringerike. Sigurd was a son of Halfdan, and grandson of Sigurd Hrise, who
+      was a son of Harald Harfager. Olaf, the son of Asta and Harald Grenske,
+      lived with Asta, and was brought up from childhood in the house of his
+      stepfather, Sigurd Syr. Now when King Olaf Trygvason came to Ringerike to
+      spread Christianity, Sigurd Syr and his wife allowed themselves to be
+      baptized, along with Olaf her son; and Olaf Trygvason was godfather to
+      Olaf, the stepson of Harald Grenske. Olaf was then three years old. Olaf
+      returned from thence to Viken, where he remained all winter. He had now
+      been three years king in Norway (A.D. 998).
+      68. MEETING OF OLAF AND SIGRID.
+      Early in spring (A.D. 998) King Olaf went eastwards to Konungahella to the
+      meeting with Queen Sigrid; and when they met the business was considered
+      about which the winter before they had held communication, namely, their
+      marriage; and the business seemed likely to be concluded. But when Olaf
+      insisted that Sigrid should let herself be baptized, she answered thus: -"I
+      must not part from the faith which I have held, and my forefathers before
+      me; and, on the other hand, I shall make no objection to your believing in
+      the god that pleases you best." Then King Olaf was enraged, and answered
+      in a passion, "Why should I care to have thee, an old faded woman, and a
+      heathen jade?" and therewith struck her in the face with his glove which
+      he held in his hands, rose up, and they parted. Sigrid said, "This may
+      some day be thy death." The king set off to Viken, the queen to Svithjod.
+      69. THE BURNING OF WARLOCKS.
+      Then the king proceeded to Tunsberg, and held a Thing, at which he
+      declared in a speech that all the men of whom it should be known to a
+      certainty that they dealt with evil spirits, or in witchcraft, or were
+      sorcerers, should be banished forth of the land. Thereafter the king had
+      all the neighborhood ransacked after such people, and called them all
+      before him; and when they were brought to the Thing there was a man among
+      them called Eyvind Kelda, a grandson of Ragnvald Rettilbeine, Harald
+      Harfager's son. Eyvind was a sorcerer, and particularly knowing in
+      witchcraft. The king let all these men be seated in one room, which was
+      well adorned, and made a great feast for them, and gave them strong drink
+      in plenty. Now when they were all very drunk, he ordered the house be set
+      on fire, and it and all the people within it were consumed, all but Eyvind
+      Kelda, who contrived to escape by the smoke-hole in the roof. And when he
+      had got a long way off, he met some people on the road going to the king,
+      and he told them to tell the king that Eyvind Kelda had slipped away from
+      the fire, and would never come again in King Olaf's power, but would carry
+      on his arts of witchcraft as much as ever. When the people came to the
+      king with such a message from Eyvind, the king was ill pleased that Eyvind
+      had escaped death.
+      70. EYVIND KELDA'S DEATH.
+      When spring (A.D. 998) came King Olaf went out to Viken, and was on visits
+      to his great farms. He sent notice over all Viken that he would call out
+      an army in summer, and proceed to the north parts of the country. Then he
+      went north to Agder; and when Easter was approaching he took the road to
+      Rogaland with 300 (=360) men, and came on Easter evening north to
+      Ogvaldsnes, in Kormt Island, where an Easter feast was prepared for him.
+      That same night came Eyvind Kelda to the island with a well-manned
+      long-ship, of which the whole crew consisted of sorcerers and other
+      dealers with evil spirits. Eyvind went from his ship to the land with his
+      followers, and there they played many of their pranks of witchcraft.
+      Eyvind clothed them with caps of darkness, and so thick a mist that the
+      king and his men could see nothing of them; but when they came near to the
+      house at Ogvaldsnes, it became clear day. Then it went differently from
+      what Eyvind had intended: for now there came just such a darkness over him
+      and his comrades in witchcraft as they had made before, so that they could
+      see no more from their eyes than from the back of their heads but went
+      round and round in a circle upon the island. When the king's watchman saw
+      them going about, without knowing what people these were, they told the
+      king. Thereupon he rose up with his people, put on his clothes, and when
+      he saw Eyvind with his men wandering about he ordered his men to arm, and
+      examine what folk these were. The king's men discovered it was Eyvind,
+      took him and all his company prisoners, and brought them to the king.
+      Eyvind now told all he had done on his journey. Then the king ordered
+      these all to be taken out to a skerry which was under water in flood tide,
+      and there to be left bound. Eyvind and all with him left their lives on
+      this rock, and the skerry is still called Skrattasker.
+      71. OLAF AND ODIN'S APPARITION.
+      It is related that once on a time King Olaf was at a feast at this
+      Ogvaldsnes, and one eventide there came to him an old man very gifted in
+      words, and with a broad-brimmed hat upon his head. He was one-eyed, and
+      had something to tell of every land. He entered into conversation with the
+      king; and as the king found much pleasure in the guest's speech, he asked
+      him concerning many things, to which the guest gave good answers: and the
+      king sat up late in the evening. Among other things, the king asked him if
+      he knew who the Ogvald had been who had given his name both to the ness
+      and to the house. The guest replied, that this Ogvald was a king, and a
+      very valiant man, and that he made great sacrifices to a cow which he had
+      with him wherever he went, and considered it good for his health to drink
+      her milk. This same King Ogvald had a battle with a king called Varin, in
+      which battle Ogvald fell. He was buried under a mound close to the house;
+      "and there stands his stone over him, and close to it his cow also is
+      laid." Such and many other things, and ancient events, the king inquired
+      after. Now, when the king had sat late into the night, the bishop reminded
+      him that it was time to go to bed, and the king did so. But after the king
+      was undressed, and had laid himself in bed, the guest sat upon the
+      foot-stool before the bed, and still spoke long with the king; for after
+      one tale was ended, he still wanted a new one. Then the bishop observed to
+      the king, it was time to go to sleep, and the king did so; and the guest
+      went out. Soon after the king awoke, asked for the guest, and ordered him
+      to be called, but the guest was not to be found. The morning after, the
+      king ordered his cook and cellar-master to be called, and asked if any
+      strange person had been with them. They said, that as they were making
+      ready the meat a man came to them, and observed that they were cooking
+      very poor meat for the king's table; whereupon he gave them two thick and
+      fat pieces of beef, which they boiled with the rest of the meat. Then the
+      king ordered that all the meat should be thrown away, and said this man
+      can be no other than the Odin whom the heathens have so long worshipped;
+      and added, "but Odin shall not deceive us."
+      72. THE THING IN THRONDHJEM.
+      King Olaf collected a great army in the east of the country towards
+      summer, and sailed with it north to Nidaros in the Throndhjem country.
+      From thence he sent a message-token over all the fjord, calling the people
+      of eight different districts to a Thing; but the bondes changed the
+      Thing-token into a war-token; and called together all men, free and
+      unfree, in all the Throndhjem land. Now when the king met the Thing, the
+      whole people came fully armed. After the Thing was seated, the king spoke,
+      and invited them to adopt Christianity; but he had only spoken a short
+      time when the bondes called out to him to be silent, or they would attack
+      him and drive him away. "We did so," said they, "with Hakon foster-son of
+      Athelstan, when he brought us the same message, and we held him in quite
+      as much respect as we hold thee." When King Olaf saw how incensed the
+      bondes were, and that they had such a war force that he could make no
+      resistance, he turned his speech as if he would give way to the bondes,
+      and said, "I wish only to be in a good understanding with you as of old;
+      and I will come to where ye hold your greatest sacrifice-festival, and see
+      your customs, and thereafter we shall consider which to hold by." And in
+      this all agreed; and as the king spoke mildly and friendly with the
+      bondes, their answer was appeased, and their conference with the king went
+      off peacefully. At the close of it a midsummer sacrifice was fixed to take
+      place in Maeren, and all chiefs and great bondes to attend it as usual.
+      The king was to be at it.
+      73. JARNSKEGGE OR IRON BEARD.
+      There was a great bonde called Skegge, and sometimes Jarnskegge, or Iron
+      Beard, who dwelt in Uphaug in Yrjar. He spoke first at the Thing to Olaf;
+      and was the foremost man of the bondes in speaking against Christianity.
+      The Thing was concluded in this way for that time, -the bondes
+      returned home, and the king went to Hlader.
+      74. THE FEAST AT HLADER.
+      King Olaf lay with his ships in the river Nid, and had thirty vessels,
+      which were manned with many brave people; but the king himself was often
+      at Hlader, with his court attendants. As the time now was approaching at
+      which the sacrifices should be made at Maeren, the king prepared a great
+      feast at Hlader, and sent a message to the districts of Strind, Gaulardal,
+      and out to Orkadal, to invite the chiefs and other great bondes. When the
+      feast was ready, and the chiefs assembled, there was a handsome
+      entertainment the first evening, at which plenty of liquor went round, and
+      the guests were made very drunk. The night after they all slept in peace.
+      The following morning, when the king was dressed, he had the early mass
+      sung before him; and when the mass was over, ordered to sound the trumpets
+      for a House Thing: upon which all his men left the ships to come up to the
+      Thing. When the Thing was seated, the king stood up, and spoke thus: "We
+      held a Thing at Frosta, and there I invited the bondes to allow themselves
+      to be baptized; but they, on the other hand, invited me to offer sacrifice
+      to their gods, as King Hakon, Athelstan's foster-son, had done; and
+      thereafter it was agreed upon between us that we should meet at Maerin,
+      and there make a great sacrifice. Now if I, along with you, shall turn
+      again to making sacrifice, then will I make the greatest of sacrifices
+      that are in use; and I will sacrifice men. But I will not select slaves or
+      malefactors for this, but will take the greatest men only to be offered to
+      the gods; and for this I select Orm Lygra of Medalhus, Styrkar of Gimsar,
+      Kar of Gryting, Asbjorn Thorbergson of Varnes, Orm of Lyxa, Haldor of
+      Skerdingsstedja;" and besides these he named five others of the principal
+      men. All these, he said, he would offer in sacrifice to the gods for peace
+      and a fruitful season; and ordered them to be laid hold of immediately.
+      Now when the bondes saw that they were not strong enough to make head
+      against the king, they asked for peace, and submitted wholly to the king's
+      pleasure. So it was settled that all the bondes who had come there should
+      be baptized, and should take an oath to the king to hold by the right
+      faith, and to renounce sacrifice to the gods. The king then kept all these
+      men as hostages who came to his feast, until they sent him their sons,
+      brothers, or other near relations.
+      75. OF THE THING IN THRONDHJEM.
+      King Olaf went in with all his forces into the Throndhjem country; and
+      when he came to Maeren all among the chiefs of the Throndhjem people who
+      were most opposed to Christianity were assembled, and had with them all
+      the great bondes who had before made sacrifice at that place. There was
+      thus a greater multitude of bondes than there had been at the
+      Frosta-Thing. Now the king let the people be summoned to the Thing, where
+      both parties met armed; and when the Thing was seated the king made a
+      speech, in which he told the people to go over to Christianity. Jarnskegge
+      replies on the part of the bondes, and says that the will of the bondes is
+      now, as formerly, that the king should not break their laws. "We want,
+      king," said he, "that thou shouldst offer sacrifice, as other kings before
+      thee have done." All the bondes applauded his speech with a loud shout,
+      and said they would have all things according to what Skegge said. Then
+      the king said he would go into the temple of their gods with them, and see
+      what the practices were when they sacrificed. The bondes thought well of
+      this proceeding, and both parties went to the temple.
+      76. THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE BAPTIZED.
+      Now King Olaf entered into the temple with some few of his men and a few
+      bondes; and when the king came to where their gods were, Thor, as the most
+      considered among their gods, sat there adorned with gold and silver. The
+      king lifted up his gold-inlaid axe which he carried in his hands, and
+      struck Thor so that the image rolled down from its seat. Then the king's
+      men turned to and threw down all the gods from their seats; and while the
+      king was in the temple, Jarnskegge was killed outside of the temple doors,
+      and the king's men did it. When the king came forth out of the temple he
+      offered the bondes two conditions, -that all should accept of
+      Christianity forthwith, or that they should fight with him. But as Skegge
+      was killed, there was no leader in the bondes' army to raise the banner
+      against King Olaf; so they took the other condition, to surrender to the
+      king's will and obey his order. Then King Olaf had all the people present
+      baptized, and took hostages from them for their remaining true to
+      Christianity; and he sent his men round to every district, and no man in
+      the Throndhjem country opposed Christianity, but all people took baptism.
+      77. A TOWN IN THE THRONDHJEM COUNTRY.
+      King Olaf with his people went out to Nidaros, and made houses on the flat
+      side of the river Nid, which he raised to be a merchant town, and gave
+      people ground to build houses upon. The king's house he had built just
+      opposite Skipakrok; and he transported thither, in harvest, all that was
+      necessary for his winter residence, and had many people about him there.
+      78. KING OLAF'S MARRIAGE.
+      King Olaf appointed a meeting with the relations of Jarnskegge, and
+      offered them the compensation or penalty for his bloodshed; for there were
+      many bold men who had an interest in that business. Jarnskegge had a
+      daughter called Gudrun; and at last it was agreed upon between the parties
+      that the king should take her in marriage. When the wedding day came King
+      Olaf and Gudrun went to bed together. As soon as Gudrun, the first night
+      they lay together, thought the king was asleep, she drew a knife, with
+      which she intended to run him through; but the king saw it, took the knife
+      from her, got out of bed, and went to his men, and told them what had
+      happened. Gudrun also took her clothes, and went away along with all her
+      men who had followed her thither. Gudrun never came into the king's bed
+      again.
+      79. BUILDING OF THE SHIP CRANE.
+      The same autumn (A.D. 998) King Olaf laid the keel of a great long-ship
+      out on the strand at the river Nid. It was a snekkja; and he employed many
+      carpenters upon her, so that early in winter the vessel was ready. It had
+      thirty benches for rowers, was high in stem and stern, but was not broad.
+      The king called this ship Tranen (the Crane). After Jarnskegge's death his
+      body was carried to Yrjar, and lies there in the Skegge mound on Austrat.
+      80. THANGBRAND THE PRIEST GOES TO ICELAND.
+      When King Olaf Trygvason had been two years king of Norway (A.D. 997),
+      there was a Saxon priest in his house who was called Thangbrand, a
+      passionate, ungovernable man, and a great man-slayer; but he was a good
+      scholar, and a clever man. The king would not have him in his house upon
+      account of his misdeeds; but gave him the errand to go to Iceland, and
+      bring that land to the Christian faith. The king gave him a merchant
+      vessel: and, as far as we know of this voyage of his, he landed first in
+      Iceland at Austfjord in the southern Alptfjord, and passed the winter in
+      the house of Hal of Sida. Thangbrand proclaimed Christianity in Iceland,
+      and on his persuasion Hal and all his house people, and many other chiefs,
+      allowed themselves to be baptized; but there were many more who spoke
+      against it. Thorvald Veile and Veterlide the skald composed a satire about
+      Thangbrand; but he killed them both outright. Thangbrand was two years in
+      Iceland, and was the death of three men before he left it.
+      81. OF SIGURD AND HAUK.
+      There was a man called Sigurd, and another called Hauk, both of
+      Halogaland, who often made merchant voyages. One summer (A.D. 998) they
+      had made a voyage westward to England; and when they came back to Norway
+      they sailed northwards along the coast, and at North More they met King
+      Olaf's people. When it was told the king that some Halogaland people were
+      come who were heathen, he ordered the steersmen to be brought to him, and
+      he asked them if they would consent to be baptized; to which they replied,
+      no. The king spoke with them in many ways, but to no purpose. He then
+      threatened them with death and torture: but they would not allow
+      themselves to be moved. He then had them laid in irons, and kept them in
+      chains in his house for some time, and often conversed with them, but in
+      vain. At last one night they disappeared, without any man being able to
+      conjecture how they got away. But about harvest they came north to Harek
+      of Thjotta, who received them kindly, and with whom they stopped all
+      winter (A.D. 999), and were hospitably entertained.
+      82. OF HAREK OF THJOTTA.
+      It happened one good-weather day in spring (A.D. 999) that Harek was at
+      home in his house with only few people, and time hung heavy on his hands.
+      Sigurd asked him if he would row a little for amusement. Harek was
+      willing; and they went to the shore, and drew down a six-oared skiff; and
+      Sigurd took the mast and rigging belonging to the boat out of the
+      boat-house, for they often used to sail when they went for amusement on
+      the water. Harek went out into the boat to hang the rudder. The brothers
+      Sigurd and Hauk, who were very strong men, were fully armed, as they were
+      used to go about at home among the peasants. Before they went out to the
+      boat they threw into her some butter-kits and a bread-chest, and carried
+      between them a great keg of ale. When they had rowed a short way from the
+      island the brothers hoisted the sail, while Harek was seated at the helm;
+      and they sailed away from the island. Then the two brothers went aft to
+      where Harek the bonde was sitting; and Sigurd says to him, "Now thou must
+      choose one of these conditions, -first, that we brothers direct this
+      voyage; or, if not, that we bind thee fast and take the command; or,
+      third, that we kill thee." Harek saw how matters stood with him. As a
+      single man, he was not better than one of those brothers, even if he had
+      been as well armed; so it appeared to him wisest to let them determine the
+      course to steer, and bound himself by oath to abide by this condition. On
+      this Sigurd took the helm, and steered south along the land, the brothers
+      taking particular care that they did not encounter people. The wind was
+      very favourable; and they held on sailing along until they came south to
+      Throndhjem and to Nidaros, where they found the king. Then the king called
+      Harek to him, and in a conference desired him to be baptized. Harek made
+      objections; and although the king and Harek talked over it many times,
+      sometimes in the presence of other people, and sometimes alone, they could
+      not agree upon it. At last the king says to Harek, "Now thou mayst return
+      home, and I will do thee no injury; partly because we are related
+      together, and partly that thou mayst not have it to say that I caught thee
+      by a trick: but know for certain that I intend to come north next summer
+      to visit you Halogalanders, and ye shall then see if I am not able to
+      punish those who reject Christianity." Harek was well pleased to get away
+      as fast as he could. King Olaf gave Harek a good boat of ten or twelve
+      pair of oars, and let it be fitted out with the best of everything
+      needful; and besides he gave Harek thirty men, all lads of mettle, and
+      well appointed.
+      83. EYVIND KINRIFA'S DEATH.
+      Harek of Thjotta went away from the town as fast as he could; but Hauk and
+      Sigurd remained in the king's house, and both took baptism. Harek pursued
+      his voyage until he came to Thjotta. He sent immediately a message to his
+      friend Eyvind Kinrifa, with the word that he had been with King Olaf; but
+      would not let himself be cowed down to accept Christianity. The message at
+      the same time informed him that King Olaf intended coming to the north in
+      summer against them, and they must be at their posts to defend themselves;
+      it also begged Eyvind to come and visit him, the sooner the better. When
+      this message was delivered to Eyvind, he saw how very necessary it was to
+      devise some counsel to avoid falling into the king's hands. He set out,
+      therefore, in a light vessel with a few hands as fast as he could. When he
+      came to Thjotta he was received by Harek in the most friendly way, and
+      they immediately entered into conversation with each other behind the
+      house. When they had spoken together but a short time, King Olaf's men,
+      who had secretly followed Harek to the north, came up, and took Eyvind
+      prisoner, and carried him away to their ship. They did not halt on their
+      voyage until they came to Throndhjem, and presented themselves to King
+      Olaf at Nidaros. Then Eyvind was brought up to a conference with the king,
+      who asked him to allow himself to be baptized, like other people; but
+      Eyvind decidedly answered he would not. The king still, with persuasive
+      words, urged him to accept Christianity, and both he and the bishop used
+      many suitable arguments; but Eyvind would not allow himself to be moved.
+      The king offered him gifts and great fiefs, but Eyvind refused all. Then
+      the king threatened him with tortures and death, but Eyvind was steadfast.
+      Then the king ordered a pan of glowing coals to be placed upon Eyvind's
+      belly, which burst asunder. Eyvind cried, "Take away the pan, and I will
+      say something before I die," which also was done. The king said, "Wilt
+      thou now, Eyvind, believe in Christ?" "No," said Eyvind, "I can take no
+      baptism; for I am an evil spirit put into a man's body by the sorcery of
+      Fins because in no other way could my father and mother have a child."
+      With that died Eyvind, who had been one of the greatest sorcerers.
+      84. HALOGALAND MADE CHRISTIAN.
+      The spring after (A.D. 999) King Olaf fitted out and manned his ships, and
+      commanded himself his ship the Crane. He had many and smart people with
+      him; and when he was ready, he sailed northwards with his fleet past
+      Bryda, and to Halogaland. Wheresoever he came to the land, or to the
+      islands, he held a Thing, and told the people to accept the right faith,
+      and to be baptized. No man dared to say anything against it, and the whole
+      country he passed through was made Christian. King Olaf was a guest in the
+      house of Harek of Thjotta, who was baptized with all his people. At
+      parting the king gave Harek good presents; and he entered into the king's
+      service, and got fiefs, and the privileges of lendsman from the king.
+      85. THORER HJORT'S DEATH.
+      There was a bonde, by name Raud the Strong, who dwelt in Godey in Salten
+      fjord. Raud was a very rich man, who had many house servants; and likewise
+      was a powerful man, who had many Fins in his service when he wanted them.
+      Raud was a great idolater, and very skillful in witchcraft, and was a
+      great friend of Thorer Hjort, before spoken of. Both were great chiefs.
+      Now when they heard that King Olaf was coming with a great force from the
+      south to Halogaland, they gathered together an army, ordered out ships,
+      and they too had a great force on foot. Raud had a large ship with a
+      gilded head formed like a dragon, which ship had thirty rowing benches,
+      and even for that kind of ship was very large. Thorer Hjort had also a
+      large ship. These men sailed southwards with their ships against King
+      Olaf, and as soon as they met gave battle. A great battle there was, and a
+      great fall of men; but principally on the side of the Halogalanders, whose
+      ships were cleared of men, so that a great terror came upon them. Raud
+      rode with his dragon out to sea, and set sail. Raud had always a fair wind
+      wheresoever he wished to sail, which came from his arts of witchcraft;
+      and, to make a short story, he came home to Godey. Thorer Hjort fled from
+      the ships up to the land: but King Olaf landed people, followed those who
+      fled, and killed them. Usually the king was the foremost in such
+      skirmishes, and was so now. When the king saw where Thorer Hjort, who was
+      quicker on foot than any man, was running to, he ran after him with his
+      dog Vige. The king said, "Vige! Vige! Catch the deer." Vige ran straight
+      in upon him; on which Thorer halted, and the king threw a spear at him.
+      Thorer struck with his sword at the dog, and gave him a great wound; but
+      at the same moment the king's spear flew under Thorer's arm, and went
+      through and through him, and came out at his other-side. There Thorer left
+      his life; but Vige was carried to the ships.
+      86. KING OLAF'S VOYAGE TO GODEY.
+      King Olaf gave life and freedom to all the men who asked it and agreed to
+      become Christian. King Olaf sailed with his fleet northwards along the
+      coast, and baptized all the people among whom he came; and when he came
+      north to Salten fjord, he intended to sail into it to look for Raud, but a
+      dreadful tempest and storm was raging in the fjord. They lay there a whole
+      week, in which the same weather was raging within the fjord, while without
+      there was a fine brisk wind only, fair for proceeding north along the
+      land. Then the king continued his voyage north to Omd, where all the
+      people submitted to Christianity. Then the king turned about and sailed to
+      the south again; but when he came to the north side of Salten fjord, the
+      same tempest was blowing, and the sea ran high out from the fjord, and the
+      same kind of storm prevailed for several days while the king was lying
+      there. Then the king applied to Bishop Sigurd, and asked him if he knew
+      any counsel about it; and the bishop said he would try if God would give
+      him power to conquer these arts of the Devil.
+      87. OF RAUD'S BEING TORTURED.
+      Bishop Sigurd took all his mass robes and went forward to the bow of the
+      king's ship; ordered tapers to be lighted, and incense to be brought out.
+      Then he set the crucifix upon the stem of the vessel, read the Evangelist
+      and many prayers, besprinkled the whole ship with holy water, and then
+      ordered the ship-tent to be stowed away, and to row into the fjord. The
+      king ordered all the other ships to follow him. Now when all was ready on
+      board the Crane to row, she went into the fjord without the rowers finding
+      any wind; and the sea was curled about their keel track like as in a calm,
+      so quiet and still was the water; yet on each side of them the waves were
+      lashing up so high that they hid the sight of the mountains. And so the
+      one ship followed the other in the smooth sea track; and they proceeded
+      this way the whole day and night, until they reached Godey. Now when they
+      came to Raud's house his great ship, the dragon, was afloat close to the
+      land. King Olaf went up to the house immediately with his people; made an
+      attack on the loft in which Raud was sleeping, and broke it open. The men
+      rushed in: Raud was taken and bound, and of the people with him some were
+      killed and some made prisoners. Then the king's men went to a lodging in
+      which Raud's house servants slept, and killed some, bound others, and beat
+      others. Then the king ordered Raud to be brought before him, and offered
+      him baptism. "And," says the king, "I will not take thy property from
+      thee, but rather be thy friend, if thou wilt make thyself worthy to be
+      so." Raud exclaimed with all his might against the proposal, saying he
+      would never believe in Christ, and making his scoff of God. Then the king
+      was wroth, and said Raud should die the worst of deaths. And the king
+      ordered him to be bound to a beam of wood, with his face uppermost, and a
+      round pin of wood set between his teeth to force his mouth open. Then the
+      king ordered an adder to be stuck into the mouth of him; but the serpent
+      would not go into his mouth, but shrunk back when Raud breathed against
+      it. Now the king ordered a hollow branch of an angelica root to be stuck
+      into Raud's mouth; others say the king put his horn into his mouth, and
+      forced the serpent to go in by holding a red-hot iron before the opening.
+      So the serpent crept into the mouth of Raud and down his throat, and
+      gnawed its way out of his side; and thus Raud perished. King Olaf took
+      here much gold and silver, and other property of weapons, and many sorts
+      of precious effects; and all the men who were with Raud he either had
+      baptized, or if they refused had them killed or tortured. Then the king
+      took the dragonship which Raud had owned, and steered it himself; for it
+      was a much larger and handsomer vessel than the Crane. In front it had a
+      dragon's head, and aft a crook, which turned up, and ended with the figure
+      of the dragon's tail. The carved work on each side of the stem and stern
+      was gilded. This ship the king called the Serpent. When the sails were
+      hoisted they represented, as it were, the dragon's wings; and the ship was
+      the handsomest in all Norway. The islands on which Raud dwelt were called
+      Gylling and Haering; but the whole islands together were called Godey
+      Isles, and the current between the isles and the mainland the Godey
+      Stream. King Olaf baptized the whole people of the fjord, and then sailed
+      southwards along the land; and on this voyage happened much and various
+      things, which are set down in tales and sagas, -namely, how witches
+      and evil spirits tormented his men, and sometimes himself; but we will
+      rather write about what occurred when King Olaf made Norway Christian, or
+      in the other countries in which he advanced Christianity. The same autumn
+      Olaf with his fleet returned to Throndhjem, and landed at Nidaros, where
+      he took up his winter abode. What I am now going to write about concerns
+      the Icelanders.
+      88. OF THE ICELANDERS.
+      Kjartan Olafson, a son's son of Hoskuld, and a daughter's son of Egil
+      Skallagrimson, came the same autumn (A.D. 999) from Iceland to Nidaros,
+      and he was considered to be the most agreeable and hopeful man of any born
+      in Iceland. There was also Haldor, a son of Gudmund of Modruveller; and
+      Kolbein, a son of Thord, Frey's gode, and a brother's son of Brennuflose;
+      together with Sverting, a son of the gode Runolf. All these were heathens;
+      and besides them there were many more, -some men of power, others
+      common men of no property. There came also from Iceland considerable
+      people, who, by Thangbrand's help, had been made Christians; namely,
+      Gissur the white, a son of Teit Ketilbjornson; and his mother was Alof,
+      daughter of herse Bodvar, who was the son of Vikingakare. Bodvar's brother
+      was Sigurd, father of Eirik Bjodaskalle, whose daughter Astrid was King
+      Olaf's mother. Hjalte Skeggjason was the name of another Iceland man, who
+      was married to Vilborg, Gissur the White's daughter. Hjalte was also a
+      Christian; and King Olaf was very friendly to his relations Gissur and
+      Hjalte, who live with him. But the Iceland men who directed the ships, and
+      were heathens, tried to sail away as soon as the king came to the town of
+      Nidaros, for they were told the king forced all men to become Christians;
+      but the wind came stiff against them, and drove them back to Nidarholm.
+      They who directed the ships were Thorarin Nefjulson, the skald Halfred
+      Ottarson, Brand the Generous, and Thorleik, Brand's son. It was told the
+      king that there were Icelanders with ships there, and all were heathen,
+      and wanted to fly from a meeting with the king. Then the king sent them a
+      message forbidding them to sail, and ordering them to bring their ships up
+      to the town, which they did, but without discharging the cargoes.
+      (They carried on their dealings and held a market at the king's pier. In
+      spring they tried three times to slip away, but never succeeded; so they
+      continued lying at the king's pier. It happened one fine day that many set
+      out to swim for amusement, and among them was a man who distinguished
+      himself above the others in all bodily exercises. Kjartan challenged
+      Halfred Vandredaskald to try himself in swimming against this man, but he
+      declined it. "Then will I make a trial," said Kjartan, casting off his
+      clothes, and springing into the water. Then he set after the man, seizes
+      hold of his foot, and dives with him under water. They come up again, and
+      without speaking a word dive again, and are much longer under water than
+      the first time. They come up again, and without saying a word dive a third
+      time, until Kjartan thought it was time to come up again, which, however,
+      he could in no way accomplish, which showed sufficiently the difference in
+      their strength. They were under water so long that Kjartan was almost
+      drowned. They then came up, and swam to land. This Northman asked what the
+      Icelander's name was. Kjartan tells his name.
+      He says, "Thou art a good swimmer; but art thou expert also in other
+      exercises?"
+      Kjartan replied, that such expertness was of no great value.
+      The Northman asks, "Why dost thou not inquire of me such things as I have
+      asked thee about?"
+      Kjartan replies, "It is all one to me who thou art, or what thy name is."
+      "Then will I," says he, "tell thee: I am Olaf Trygvason."
+      He asked Kjartan much about Iceland, which he answered generally, and
+      wanted to withdraw as hastily as he could; but the king said, "Here is a
+      cloak which I will give thee, Kjartan." And Kjartan took the cloak with
+      many thanks.) (1)
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The part included in parenthesis is not found in the
+     original text of "Heimskringla", but taken from "Codex
+     Frisianus".
+      89. BAPTISM OF THE ICELANDERS.
+      When Michaelmas came, the king had high mass sung with great splendour.
+      The Icelanders went there, listening to the fine singing and the sound of
+      the bells; and when they came back to their ships every man told his
+      opinion of the Christian man's worship. Kjartan expressed his pleasure at
+      it, but most of the others scoffed at it; and it went according to the
+      proverb, "the king had many ears," for this was told to the king. He sent
+      immediately that very day a message to Kjartan to come to him. Kjartan
+      went with some men, and the king received him kindly. Kjartan was a very
+      stout and handsome man, and of ready and agreeable speech. After the king
+      and Kjartan had conversed a little, the king asked him to adopt
+      Christianity. Kjartan replies, that he would not say no to that, if he
+      thereby obtained the king's friendship; and as the king promised him the
+      fullest friendship, they were soon agreed. The next day Kjartan was
+      baptized, together with his relation Bolle Thorlakson, and all their
+      fellow-travelers. Kjartan and Bolle were the king's guests as long as they
+      were in their white baptismal clothes, and the king had much kindness for
+      them. Wherever they came they were looked upon as people of distinction.
+      90. HALFRED VANDREDASKALD BAPTIZED.
+      As King Olaf one day was walking in the street some men met him, and he
+      who went the foremost saluted the king. The king asked the man his name,
+      and he called himself Halfred.
+      "Art thou the skald?" said the king.
+      "I can compose poetry," replied he.
+      "Wilt thou then adopt Christianity, and come into my service?" asked the
+      king.
+      "If I am baptized," replies he, "it must be on one condition, -that
+      thou thyself art my godfather; for no other will I have."
+      The king replies, "That I will do." And Halfred was baptized, the king
+      holding him during the baptism.
+      Afterwards the king said, "Wilt thou enter into my service?"
+      Halfred replied, "I was formerly in Earl Hakon's court; but now I will
+      neither enter into thine nor into any other service, unless thou promise
+      me it shall never be my lot to be driven away from thee."
+      "It has been reported to me," said the king, "that thou are neither so
+      prudent nor so obedient as to fulfil my commands."
+      "In that case," replied Halfred, "put me to death."
+      "Thou art a skald who composes difficulties," says the king; "but into my
+      service, Halfred, thou shalt be received."
+      Halfred says, "if I am to be named the composer of difficulties, what cost
+      thou give me, king, on my name-day?"
+      The king gave him a sword without a scabbard, and said, "Now compose me a
+      song upon this sword, and let the word sword be in every line of the
+      strophe." Halfred sang thus:
+     "This sword of swords is my reward.
+     For him who knows to wield a sword,
+     And with his sword to serve his lord,
+     Yet wants a sword, his lot is hard.
+     I would I had my good lord's leave
+     For this good sword a sheath to choose:
+     I'm worth three swords when men use,
+     But for the sword-sheath now I grieve."
+      Then the king gave him the scabbard, observing that the word sword was
+      wanting in one line of his strophe. "But there instead are three swords in
+      one of the lines," says Halfred. "That is true," replies the king. -Out
+      of Halfred's lays we have taken the most of the true and faithful accounts
+      that are here related about Olaf Trygvason.
+      91. THANGBRAND RETURNS FROM ICELAND.
+      The same harvest (A.D. 999) Thangbrand the priest came back from Iceland
+      to King Olaf, and told the ill success of his journey; namely, that the
+      Icelanders had made lampoons about him; and that some even sought to kill
+      him, and there was little hope of that country ever being made Christian.
+      King Olaf was so enraged at this, that he ordered all the Icelanders to be
+      assembled by sound of horn, and was going to kill all who were in the
+      town, but Kjartan, Gissur, and Hjalte, with the other Icelanders who had
+      become Christians, went to him, and said, "King, thou must not fail from
+      thy word -that however much any man may irritate thee, thou wilt
+      forgive him if he turn from heathenism and become Christian. All the
+      Icelanders here are willing to be baptized; and through them we may find
+      means to bring Christianity into Iceland: for there are many amongst them,
+      sons of considerable people in Iceland, whose friends can advance the
+      cause; but the priest Thangbrand proceeded there as he did here in the
+      court, with violence and manslaughter, and such conduct the people there
+      would not submit to." The king harkened to those remonstrances; and all
+      the Iceland men who were there were baptized.
+      92. OF KING OLAF'S FEATS.
+      King Olaf was more expert in all exercises than any man in Norway whose
+      memory is preserved to us in sagas; and he was stronger and more agile
+      than most men, and many stories are written down about it. One is that he
+      ascended the Smalsarhorn, and fixed his shield upon the very peak. Another
+      is, that one of his followers had climbed up the peak after him, until he
+      came to where he could neither get up nor down; but the king came to his
+      help, climbed up to him, took him under his arm, and bore him to the flat
+      ground. King Olaf could run across the oars outside of the vessel while
+      his men were rowing the Serpent. He could play with three daggers, so that
+      one was always in the air, and he took the one falling by the handle. He
+      could walk all round upon the ship's rails, could strike and cut equally
+      well with both hands, and could cast two spears at once. King Olaf was a
+      very merry frolicsome man; gay and social; was very violent in all
+      respects; was very generous; was very finical in his dress, but in battle
+      he exceeded all in bravery. He was distinguished for cruelty when he was
+      enraged, and tortured many of his enemies. Some he burnt in fire; some he
+      had torn in pieces by mad dogs; some he had mutilated, or cast down from
+      high precipices. On this account his friends were attached to him warmly,
+      and his enemies feared him greatly; and thus he made such a fortunate
+      advance in his undertakings, for some obeyed his will out of the
+      friendliest zeal, and others out of dread.
+      93. BAPTISM OF LEIF EIRIKSON.
+      Leif, a son of Eirik the Red, who first settled in Greenland, came this
+      summer (A.D. 999) from Greenland to Norway; and as he met King Olaf he
+      adopted Christianity, and passed the winter (A.D. 1000) with the king.
+      94. FALL OF KING GUDROD.
+      Gudrod, a son of Eirik Bloodaxe and Gunhild, had been ravaging in the west
+      countries ever since he fled from Norway before the Earl Hakon. But the
+      summer before mentioned (A.D. 999), where King Olaf Trygvason had ruled
+      four years over Norway, Gudrod came to the country, and had many ships of
+      war with him. He had sailed from England; and when he thought himself near
+      to the Norway coast, he steered south along the land, to the quarter where
+      it was least likely King Olaf would be. Gudrod sailed in this way south to
+      Viken; and as soon as he came to the land he began to plunder, to subject
+      the people to him, and to demand that they should accept of him as king.
+      Now as the country people saw that a great army was come upon them, they
+      desired peace and terms. They offered King Gudrod to send a Thing-message
+      over all the country, and to accept of him at the Thing as king, rather
+      than suffer from his army; but they desired delay until a fixed day, while
+      the token of the Thing's assembling was going round through the land. The
+      king demanded maintenance during the time this delay lasted. The bondes
+      preferred entertaining the king as a guest, by turns, as long as he
+      required it; and the king accepted of the proposal to go about with some
+      of his men as a guest from place to place in the land, while others of his
+      men remained to guard the ships. When King Olaf's relations, Hyrning and
+      Thorgeir, heard of this, they gathered men, fitted out ships, and went
+      northwards to Viken. They came in the night with their men to a place at
+      which King Gudrod was living as a guest, and attacked him with fire and
+      weapons; and there King Gudrod fell, and most of his followers. Of those
+      who were with his ships some were killed, some slipped away and fled to
+      great distances; and now were all the sons of Eirik and Gunhild dead.
+      95. BUILDING OF THE SHIP LONG SERPENT.
+      The winter after, King Olaf came from Halogaland (A.D. 1000), he had a
+      great vessel built at Hladhamrar, which was larger than any ship in the
+      country, and of which the beam-knees are still to be seen. The length of
+      keel that rested upon the grass was seventy-four ells. Thorberg Skafhog
+      was the man's name who was the master-builder of the ship; but there were
+      many others besides, -some to fell wood, some to shape it, some to
+      make nails, some to carry timber; and all that was used was of the best.
+      The ship was both long and broad and high-sided, and strongly timbered.
+      While they were planking the ship, it happened that Thorberg had to go
+      home to his farm upon some urgent business; and as he remained there a
+      long time, the ship was planked up on both sides when he came back. In the
+      evening the king went out, and Thorberg with him, to see how the vessel
+      looked, and everybody said that never was seen so large and so beautiful a
+      ship of war. Then the king returned to the town. Early next morning the
+      king returns again to the ship, and Thorberg with him. The carpenters were
+      there before them, but all were standing idle with their arms across. The
+      king asked, "what was the matter?" They said the ship was destroyed; for
+      somebody had gone from, stem to stern, and cut one deep notch after the
+      other down the one side of the planking. When the king came nearer he saw
+      it was so, and said, with an oath, "The man shall die who has thus
+      destroyed the vessel out of envy, if he can be discovered, and I shall
+      bestow a great reward on whoever finds him out."
+      "I can tell you, king," said Thorberg, "who has done this piece of work." -
+      "I don't think," replies the king, "that any one is so likely to find it
+      out as thou art."
+      Thorberg says, "I will tell you, king, who did it. I did it myself."
+      The king says, "Thou must restore it all to the same condition as before,
+      or thy life shall pay for it."
+      Then Thorberg went and chipped the planks until the deep notches were all
+      smoothed and made even with the rest; and the king and all present
+      declared that the ship was much handsomer on the side of the hull which
+      Thorberg, had chipped, and bade him shape the other side in the same way;
+      and gave him great thanks for the improvement. Afterwards Thorberg was the
+      master builder of the ship until she was entirely finished. The ship was a
+      dragon, built after the one the king had captured in Halogaland; but this
+      ship was far larger, and more carefully put together in all her parts. The
+      king called this ship Serpent the Long, and the other Serpent the Short.
+      The long Serpent had thirty-four benches for rowers. The head and the
+      arched tail were both gilt, and the bulwarks were as high as in sea-going
+      ships. This ship was the best and most costly ship ever made in Norway.
+      96. EARL EIRIK, THE SON OF HAKON.
+      Earl Eirik, the son of Earl Hakon, and his brothers, with many other
+      valiant men their relations, had left the country after Earl Hakon's fall.
+      Earl Eirik went eastwards to Svithjod, to Olaf, the Swedish king, and he
+      and his people were well received. King Olaf gave the earl peace and
+      freedom in the land, and great fiefs; so that he could support himself and
+      his men well. Thord Kolbeinson speaks of this in the verses before given.
+      Many people who fled from the country on account of King Olaf Trygvason
+      came out of Norway to Earl Eirik; and the earl resolved to fit out ships
+      and go a-cruising, in order to get property for himself and his people.
+      First he steered to Gotland, and lay there long in summer watching for
+      merchant vessels sailing towards the land, or for vikings. Sometimes he
+      landed and ravaged all round upon the sea-coasts. So it is told in the
+      "Banda-drapa": -
+     "Eirik, as we have lately heard,
+     Has waked the song of shield and sword -
+     Has waked the slumbering storm of shields
+     Upon the vikings' water-fields:
+     From Gotland's lonely shore has gone
+     Far up the land, and battles won:
+     And o'er the sea his name is spread,
+     To friends a shield, to foes a dread."
+      Afterwards Earl Eirik sailed south to Vindland, and at Stauren found some
+      viking ships, and gave them battle. Eirik gained the victory, and slew the
+      vikings. So it is told in the "Banda-drapa": -
+     "Earl Eirik, he who stoutly wields
+     The battle-axe in storm of shields,
+     With his long ships surprised the foe
+     At Stauren, and their strength laid low
+     Many a corpse floats round the shore;
+     The strand with dead is studded o'er:
+     The raven tears their sea-bleached skins -
+     The land thrives well when Eirik wins."
+      97. EIRIK'S FORAY ON THE BALTIC COASTS.
+      Earl Eirik sailed back to Sweden in autumn, and staid there all winter
+      (A.D. 997); but in the spring fitted out his war force again, and sailed
+      up the Baltic. When he came to Valdemar's dominions he began to plunder
+      and kill the inhabitants, and burn the dwellings everywhere as he came
+      along, and to lay waste the country. He came to Aldeigiuburg, and besieged
+      it until he took the castle; and he killed many people, broke down and
+      burned the castle, and then carried destruction all around far and wide in
+      Gardarike. So it is told in the "Banda-drapa": -
+     "The generous earl, brave and bold,
+     Who scatters his bright shining gold,
+     Eirik with fire-scattering hand,
+     Wasted the Russian monarch's land, -
+     With arrow-shower, and storm of war,
+     Wasted the land of Valdemar.
+     Aldeiga burns, and Eirik's might
+     Scours through all Russia by its light."
+      Earl Eirik was five years in all on this foray; and when he returned from
+      Gardarike he ravaged all Adalsysla and Eysysla, and took there four viking
+      ships from the Danes and killed every man on board. So it is told in the
+      "Banda-drapa": -
+     "Among the isles flies round the word,
+     That Eirik's blood-devouring sword
+     Has flashed like fire in the sound,
+     And wasted all the land around.
+     And Eirik too, the bold in fight,
+     Has broken down the robber-might
+     Of four great vikings, and has slain
+     All of the crew -nor spared one Dane.
+     In Gautland he has seized the town,
+     In Syssels harried up and down;
+     And all the people in dismay
+     Fled to the forests far away.
+     By land or sea, in field or wave,
+     What can withstand this earl brave?
+     All fly before his fiery hand -
+     God save the earl, and keep the land."
+      When Eirik had been a year in Sweden he went over to Denmark (A.D. 996) to
+      King Svein Tjuguskeg, the Danish king, and courted his daughter Gyda. The
+      proposal was accepted, and Earl Eirik married Gyda; and a year after (A.D.
+      997) they had a son, who was called Hakon. Earl Eirik was in the winter in
+      Denmark, or sometimes in Sweden; but in summer he went a-cruising.
+      98. KING SVEIN'S MARRIAGE.
+      The Danish king, Svein Tjuguskeg, was married to Gunhild, a daughter of
+      Burizleif, king of the Vinds. But in the times we have just been speaking
+      of it happened that Queen Gunhild fell sick and died. Soon after King
+      Svein married Sigrid the Haughty, a daughter of Skoglartoste, and mother
+      of the Swedish king Olaf; and by means of this relationship there was
+      great friendship between the kings and Earl Eirik, Hakon's son.
+      99. KING BURIZLEIF'S MARRIAGE.
+      Burizleif, the king of the Vinds, complained to his relation Earl
+      Sigvalde, that the agreement was broken which Sigvalde had made between
+      King Svein and King Burizleif, by which Burizleif was to get in marriage
+      Thyre, Harald's daughter, a sister of King Svein: but that marriage had
+      not proceeded, for Thyre had given positive no to the proposal to marry
+      her to an old and heathen king. "Now," said King Burizleif to Earl
+      Sigvalde, "I must have the promise fulfilled." And he told Earl Sigvalde
+      to go to Denmark, and bring him Thyre as his queen. Earl Sigvalde loses no
+      time, but goes to King Svein of Denmark, explains to him the case; and
+      brings it so far by his persuasion, that the king delivered his sister
+      Thyre into his hands. With her went some female attendants, and her
+      foster-father, by name Ozur Agason, a man of great power, and some other
+      people. In the agreement between the king and the earl, it was settled
+      that Thyre should have in property the possessions which Queen Gunhild had
+      enjoyed in Vindland, besides other great properties as bride-gifts. Thyre
+      wept sorely, and went very unwillingly. When the earl came to Vindland,
+      Burizleif held his wedding with Queen Thyre, and received her in marriage;
+      bus as long as she was among heathens she would neither eat nor drink with
+      them, and this lasted for seven days.
+      100. OLAF GETS THYRE IN MARRIAGE.
+      It happened one night that Queen Thyre and Ozur ran away in the dark, and
+      into the woods, and, to be short in our story, came at last to Denmark.
+      But here Thyre did not dare to remain, knowing that if her brother King
+      Svein heard of her, he would send her back directly to Vindland. She went
+      on, therefore, secretly to Norway, and never stayed her journey until she
+      fell in with King Olaf, by whom she was kindly received. Thyre related to
+      the king her sorrows, and entreated his advice in her need, and protection
+      in his kingdom. Thyre was a well-spoken woman, and the king had pleasure
+      in her conversation. He saw she was a handsome woman, and it came into his
+      mind that she would be a good match; so he turns the conversation that
+      way, and asks if she will marry him. Now, as she saw that her situation
+      was such that she could not help herself, and considered what a luck it
+      was for her to marry so celebrated a man, she bade him to dispose himself
+      of her hand and fate; and, after nearer conversation, King Olaf took Thyre
+      in marriage. This wedding was held in harvest after the king returned from
+      Halogaland (A.D. 999), and King Olaf and Queen Thyre remained all winter
+      (A.D. 1000) at Nidaros.
+      The following spring Queen Thyre complained often to King Olaf, and wept
+      bitterly over it, that she who had so great property in Vindland had no
+      goods or possessions here in the country that were suitable for a queen;
+      and sometimes she would entreat the king with fine words to get her
+      property restored to her, and saying that King Burizleif was so great a
+      friend of King Olaf that he would not deny King Olaf anything if they were
+      to meet. But when King Olaf's friends heard of such speeches, they
+      dissuaded him from any such expedition. It is related at the king one day
+      early in spring was walking in the street, and met a man in the market
+      with many, and, for that early season, remarkably large angelica roots.
+      The king took a great stalk of the angelica in his hand, and went home to
+      Queen Thyre's lodging. Thyre sat in her room weeping as the king came in.
+      The king said, "Set here, queen, is a great angelica stalk, which I give
+      thee." She threw it away, and said, "A greater present Harald Gormson gave
+      to my mother; and he was not afraid to go out of the land and take his
+      own. That was shown when he came here to Norway, and laid waste the
+      greater part of the land, and seized on all the scat and revenues; and
+      thou darest not go across the Danish dominions for this brother of mine,
+      King Svein." As she spoke thus, King Olaf sprang up, and answered with
+      loud oath, "Never did I fear thy brother King Svein; and if we meet he
+      shall give way before me!"
+      101. OLAF'S LEVY FOR WAR.
+      Soon after the king convoked a Thing in the town, and proclaimed to all
+      the public, that in summer would go abroad upon an expedition out of the
+      country, and would raise both ships and men from every district; and at
+      the same time fixed how many ships would have from the whole Throndhjem
+      fjord. Then he sent his message-token south and north, both along the
+      sea-coast and up in the interior of the country, to let an army be
+      gathered. The king ordered the Long Serpent to be put into the water,
+      along with all his other ships both small and great. He himself steered
+      the Long Serpent. When the crews were taken out for the ships, they were
+      so carefully selected that no man on board the Long Serpent was older than
+      sixty or younger than twenty years, and all were men distinguished for
+      strength and courage. Those who were Olaf's bodyguard were in particular
+      chosen men, both of the natives and of foreigners, and the boldest and
+      strongest.
+      102. CREW ON BOARD OF THE LONG SERPENT.
+      Ulf the Red was the name of the man who bore King Olaf's banner, and was
+      in the forecastle of the Long Serpent; and with him was Kolbjorn the
+      marshal, Thorstein Uxafot, and Vikar of Tiundaland, a brother of Arnliot
+      Gelline. By the bulkhead next the forecastle were Vak Raumason from Gaut
+      River, Berse the Strong, An Skyte from Jamtaland, Thrand the Strong from
+      Thelamork, and his brother Uthyrmer. Besides these were, of Halogaland
+      men, Thrand Skjalge and Ogmund Sande, Hlodver Lange from Saltvik, and
+      Harek Hvasse; together with these Throndhjem men -Ketil the High,
+      Thorfin Eisle, Havard and his brothers from Orkadal. The following were in
+      the fore-hold: Bjorn from Studla, Bork from the fjords. Thorgrim
+      Thjodolfson from Hvin, Asbjorn and Orm, Thord from Njardarlog, Thorstein
+      the White from Oprustadar, Arnor from More, Halstein and Hauk from the
+      Fjord district, Eyvind Snak, Bergthor Bestil, Halkel from Fialer, Olaf
+      Dreng, Arnfin from Sogn, Sigurd Bild, Einar from Hordaland, and Fin, and
+      Ketil from Rogaland and Grjotgard the Brisk. The following were in the
+      hold next the mast: Einar Tambaskelfer, who was not reckoned as fully
+      experienced, being only eighteen years old; Thorstein Hlifarson, Thorolf,
+      Ivar Smetta, and Orm Skogarnef. Many other valiant men were in the
+      Serpent, although we cannot tell all their names. In every half division
+      of the hold were eight men, and each and all chosen men; and in the
+      fore-hold were thirty men. It was a common saying among people, that the
+      Long Serpent's crew was as distinguished for bravery, strength, and
+      daring, among other men, as the Long Serpent was distinguished among other
+      ships. Thorkel Nefja, the king's brother, commanded the Short Serpent; and
+      Thorkel Dydril and Jostein, the king's mother's brothers, had the Crane;
+      and both these ships were well manned. King Olaf had eleven large ships
+      from Throndhjem, besides vessels with twenty rowers' benches, smaller
+      vessels, and provision-vessels.
+      103. ICELAND BAPTIZED.
+      When King Olaf had nearly rigged out his fleet in Nidaros, he appointed
+      men over the Throndhjem country in all districts and communities. He also
+      sent to Iceland Gissur the White and Hjalte Skeggjason, to proclaim
+      Christianity there; and sent with them a priest called Thormod, along with
+      several men in holy orders. But he retained with him, as hostages, four
+      Icelanders whom he thought the most important; namely, Kjartan Olafson,
+      Haldor Gudmundson, Kolbein Thordson, and Sverting Runolfson. Of Gissur and
+      Hjalte's progress, it is related that they came to Iceland before the
+      Althing, and went to the Thing; and in that Thing Christianity was
+      introduced by law into Iceland, and in the course of the summer all the
+      people were baptized (A.D. 1000).
+      104. GREENLAND BAPTIZED
+      The same spring King Olaf also sent Leif Eirikson (A.D. 1000) to Greenland
+      to proclaim Christianity there, and Leif went there that summer. In the
+      ocean he took up the crew of a ship which had been lost, and who were
+      clinging to the wreck. He also found Vinland the Good; arrived about
+      harvest in Greenland; and had with him for it a priest and other teachers,
+      with whom he went to Brattahild to lodge with his father Eirik. People
+      called him afterwards Leif the Lucky: but his father Eirik said that his
+      luck and ill luck balanced each other; for if Leif had saved a wreck in
+      the ocean, he had brought a hurtful person with him to Greenland, and that
+      was the priest.
+      105. RAGNVALD SENDS MESSENGERS TO OLAF.
+      The winter after King Olaf had baptized Halogaland, he and Queen Thyre
+      were in Nidaros; and the summer before Queen Thyre had brought King Olaf a
+      boy child, which was both stout and promising, and was called Harald,
+      after its mother's father. The king and queen loved the infant
+      exceedingly, and rejoiced in the hope that it would grow up and inherit
+      after its father; but it lived barely a year after its birth, which both
+      took much to heart. In that winter were many Icelanders and other clever
+      men in King Olaf's house, as before related. His sister Ingebjorg,
+      Trygve's daughter, King Olaf's sister, was also at the court at that time.
+      She was beautiful in appearance, modest and frank with the people, had a
+      steady manly judgment, and was beloved of all. She was very fond of the
+      Icelanders who were there, but most of Kjartan Olafson, for he had been
+      longer than the others in the king's house; and he found it always amusing
+      to converse with her, for she had both understanding and cleverness in
+      talk. The king was always gay and full of mirth in his intercourse with
+      people; and often asked about the manners of the great men and chiefs in
+      the neighbouring countries, when strangers from Denmark or Sweden came to
+      see him. The summer before Halfred Vandredaskald had come from Gautland,
+      where he had been with Earl Ragnvald, Ulf's son, who had lately come to
+      the government of West Gautland. Ulf, Ragnvald's father, was a brother of
+      Sigurd the Haughty; so that King Olaf the Swede and Earl Ragnvald were
+      brother's and sister's children. Halfred told Olaf many things about the
+      earl: he said he was an able chief, excellently fitted for governing,
+      generous with money, brave and steady in friendship. Halfred said also the
+      earl desired much the friendship of King Olaf, and had spoken of making
+      court Ingebjorg, Trygve's daughter. The same winter came ambassadors from
+      Gautland, and fell in with King Olaf in the north, in Nidaros, and brought
+      the message which Halfred had spoken of, -that the earl desired to be
+      King Olaf's entire friend, and wished to become his brother-in-law by
+      obtaining his sister Ingebjorg in marriage. Therewith the ambassadors laid
+      before the king sufficient tokens in proof that in reality they came from
+      the earl on this errand. The king listened with approbation to their
+      speech; but said that Ingebjorg must determine on his assent to the
+      marriage. The king then talked to his sister about the matter, and asked
+      her opinion about it. She answered to this effect, -"I have been with
+      you for some time, and you have shown brotherly care and tender respect
+      for me ever since you came to the country. I will agree therefore to your
+      proposal about my marriage, provided that you do not marry me to a heathen
+      man." The king said it should be as she wished. The king then spoke to the
+      ambassadors; and it was settled before they departed that in summer Earl
+      Ragnvald should meet the king in the east parts of the country, to enter
+      into the fullest friendship with each other, and when they met they would
+      settle about the marriage. With this reply the earl's messengers went
+      westward, and King Olaf remained all winter in Nidaros in great splendour,
+      and with many people about him.
+      106. OLAF SENDS EXPEDITION TO VINDLAND.
+      King Olaf proceeded in summer with his ships and men southwards along the
+      land (and past Stad. With him were Queen Thyre and Ingebjorg, Trygveis
+      daughter, the king's sister). Many of his friends also joined him, and
+      other persons of consequence who had prepared themselves to travel with
+      the king. The first man among these was his brother-in-law, Erling
+      Skjalgson, who had with him a large ship of thirty benches of rowers, and
+      which was in every respect well equipt. His brothers-in-law Hyrning and
+      Thorgeir also joined him, each of whom for himself steered a large vessel;
+      and many other powerful men besides followed him. (With all this war-force
+      he sailed southwards along the land; but when he came south as far as
+      Rogaland he stopped there, for Erling Skjalgson had prepared for him a
+      splendid feast at Sole. There Earl Ragnvald, Ulf's son, from Gautland,
+      came to meet the king, and to settle the business which had been proposed
+      in winter in the messages between them, namely, the marriage with
+      Ingebjorg the king's sister. Olaf received him kindly; and when the matter
+      came to be spoken of, the king said he would keep his word, and marry his
+      sister Ingebjorg to him, provided he would accept the true faith, and make
+      all his subjects he ruled over in his land be baptized; The earl agreed to
+      this, and he and all his followers were baptized. Now was the feast
+      enlarged that Erling had prepared, for the earl held his wedding there
+      with Ingebjorg the king's sister. King Olaf had now married off all his
+      sisters. The earl, with Ingebjorg, set out on his way home; and the king
+      sent learned men with him to baptize the people in Gautland, and to teach
+      them the right faith and morals. The king and the earl parted in the
+      greatest friendship.)
+      107. OLAF'S EXPEDITION VINDLAND.
+      (After his sister Ingebjorg's wedding, the king made ready in all haste to
+      leave the country with his army, which was both great and made up of fine
+      men.) When he left the land and sailed southwards he had sixty ships of
+      war, with which he sailed past Denmark, and in through the Sound, and on
+      to Vindland. He appointed a meeting with King Burizleif; and when the
+      kings met, they spoke about the property which King Olaf demanded, and the
+      conference went off peaceably, as a good account was given of the
+      properties which King Olaf thought himself entitled to there. He passed
+      here much of the summer, and found many of his old friends.
+      108. CONSPIRACY AGAINST KING OLAF.
+      The Danish king, Svein Tjuguskeg, was married, as before related, to
+      Sigrid the Haughty. Sigrid was King Olaf Trygvason's greatest enemy; the
+      cause of which, as before said, was that King Olaf had broken off with
+      her, and had struck her in the face. She urged King Svein much to give
+      battle to King Olaf Trygvason; saying that he had reason enough, as Olaf
+      had married his sister Thyre without his leave, "and that your
+      predecessors would not have submitted to." Such persuasions Sigrid had
+      often in her mouth; and at last she brought it so far that Svein resolved
+      firmly on doing so. Early in spring King Svein sent messengers eastward
+      into Svithjod, to his son-in-law Olaf, the Swedish king, and to Earl
+      Eirik; and informed them that King Olaf of Norway was levying men for an
+      expedition, and intended in summer to go to Vindland. To this news the
+      Danish king added an invitation to the Swedish king and Earl Eirik to meet
+      King Svein with an army, so that all together they might make an attack;
+      on King Olaf Trygvason. The Swedish king and Earl Eirik were ready enough
+      for this, and immediately assembled a great fleet and an army through all
+      Svithjod, with which they sailed southwards to Denmark, and arrived there
+      after King Olaf Trygvason had sailed to the eastward. Haldor the
+      Unchristian tells of this in his lay on Earl Eirik: -
+     "The king-subduer raised a host
+     Of warriors on the Swedish coast.
+     The brave went southwards to the fight,
+     Who love the sword-storm's gleaming light;
+     The brave, who fill the wild wolf's mouth,
+     Followed bold Eirik to the south;
+     The brave, who sport in blood -each one
+     With the bold earl to sea is gone."
+      The Swedish king and Earl Eirik sailed to meet the Danish king, and they
+      had all, when together, an immense force.
+      109. EARL SIGVALDE'S TREACHEROUS PLANS.
+      At the same time that king Svein sent a message to Svithjod for an army,
+      he sent Earl Sigvalde to Vindland to spy out King Olaf Trygvason's
+      proceedings, and to bring it about by cunning devices that King Svein and
+      King Olaf should fall in with each other. So Sigvalde sets out to go to
+      Vindland. First, he came to Jomsborg, and then he sought out King Olaf
+      Trygvason. There was much friendship in their conversation, and the earl
+      got himself into great favour with the king. Astrid, the Earl's wife, King
+      Burizleif's daughter, was a great friend of King Olaf Trygvason,
+      particularly on account of the connection which had been between them when
+      Olaf was married to her sister Geira. Earl Sigvalde was a prudent,
+      ready-minded man; and as he had got a voice in King Olaf's council, he put
+      him off much from sailing homewards, finding various reasons for delay.
+      Olaf's people were in the highest degree dissatisfied with this; for the
+      men were anxious to get home, and they lay ready to sail, waiting only for
+      a wind. At last Earl Sigvalde got a secret message from Denmark that the
+      Swedish king's army was arrived from the east, and that Earl Eirik's also
+      was ready; and that all these chiefs had resolved to sail eastwards to
+      Vindland, and wait for King Olaf at an island which is called Svold. They
+      also desired the earl to contrive matters so that they should meet King
+      Olaf there.
+      110. KING OLAF'S VOYAGE FROM VINDLAND.
+      There came first a flying report to Vindland that the Danish king, Svein,
+      had fitted out an army; and it was soon whispered that he intended to
+      attack King Olaf. But Earl Sigvalde says to King Olaf, "It never can be
+      King Svein's intention to venture with the Danish force alone, to give
+      battle to thee with such a powerful army; but if thou hast any suspicion
+      that evil is on foot, I will follow thee with my force (at that time it
+      was considered a great matter to have Jomsborg vikings with an army), and
+      I will give thee eleven well-manned ships." The king accepted this offer;
+      and as the light breeze of wind that came was favourable, he ordered the
+      ships to get under weigh, and the war-horns to sound the departure. The
+      sails were hoisted and all the small vessels, sailing fastest, got out to
+      sea before the others. The earl, who sailed nearest to the king's ship,
+      called to those on board to tell the king to sail in his keel-track: "For
+      I know where the water is deepest between the islands and in the sounds,
+      and these large ships require the deepest." Then the earl sailed first
+      with his eleven ships, and the king followed with his large ships, also
+      eleven in number; but the whole of the rest of the fleet sailed out to
+      sea. Now when Earl Sigvalde came sailing close under the island Svold, a
+      skiff rowed out to inform the earl that the Danish king's army was lying
+      in the harbour before them. Then the earl ordered the sails of his vessels
+      to be struck, and they rowed in under the island. Haldor the Unchristian
+      says: -
+     "From out the south bold Trygve's son
+     With one-and-seventy ships came on,
+     To dye his sword in bloody fight,
+     Against the Danish foeman's might.
+     But the false earl the king betrayed;
+     And treacherous Sigvalde, it is said,
+     Deserted from King Olaf's fleet,
+     And basely fled, the Danes to meet."
+      It is said here that King Olaf and Earl Sigvalde had seventy sail of
+      vessels: and one more, when they sailed from the south.
+      111. CONSULTATION OF THE KINGS.
+      The Danish King Svein, the Swedish King Olaf, and Earl Eirik, were there
+      with all their forces (1000). The weather being fine and clear sunshine,
+      all these chiefs, with a great suite, went out on the isle to see the
+      vessels sailing out at sea, and many of them crowded together; and they
+      saw among them one large and glancing ship. The two kings said, "That is a
+      large and very beautiful vessel: that will be the Long Serpent."
+      Earl Eirik replied, "That is not the Long Serpent." And he was right; for
+      it was the ship belonging to Eindride of Gimsar.
+      Soon after they saw another vessel coming sailing along much larger than
+      the first; then says King Svein, "Olaf Trygvason must be afraid, for he
+      does not venture to sail with the figure-head of the dragon upon his
+      ship."
+      Says Earl Eirik, "That is not the king's ship yet; for I know that ship by
+      the coloured stripes of cloth in her sail. That is Erling Skialgson's. Let
+      him sail; for it is the better for us that the ship is away from Olaf's
+      fleet, so well equipt as she is."
+      Soon after they saw and knew Earl Sigvalde's ships, which turned in and
+      laid themselves under the island. Then they saw three ships coming along
+      under sail, and one of them very large. King Svein ordered his men to go
+      to their ships, "for there comes the Long Serpent."
+      Earl Eirik says, "Many other great and stately vessels have they besides
+      the Long Serpent. Let us wait a little."
+      Then said many, "Earl Eirik will not fight and avenge his father; and it
+      is a great shame that it should be told that we lay here with so great a
+      force, and allowed King Olaf to sail out to sea before our eyes."
+      But when they had spoken thus for a short time, they saw four ships coming
+      sailing along, of which one had a large dragon-head richly gilt. Then King
+      Svein stood up and said, "That dragon shall carry me this evening high,
+      for I shall steer it."
+      Then said many, "The Long Serpent is indeed a wonderfully large and
+      beautiful vessel, and it shows a great mind to have built such a ship."
+      Earl Eirik said so loud that several persons heard him, "If King Olaf had
+      no ether vessels but only that one, King Svein would never take it from
+      him with the Danish force alone."
+      Thereafter all the people rushed on board their ships, took down the
+      tents, and in all haste made ready for battle.
+      While the chiefs were speaking among themselves as above related, they saw
+      three very large ships coming sailing along, and at last after them a
+      fourth, and that was the Long Serpent. Of the large ships which had gone
+      before, and which they had taken for the Long Serpent, the first was the
+      Crane; the one after that was the Short Serpent; and when they really, saw
+      the Long Serpent, all knew, and nobody had a word to say against it, that
+      it must be Olaf Trygvason who was sailing in such a vessel; and they went
+      to their ships to arm for the fight.
+      An agreement had been concluded among the chiefs, King Svein, King Olaf
+      the Swede, and Earl Eirik, that they should divide Norway among them in
+      three parts, in case they succeeded against Olaf Trygvason; but that he of
+      the chiefs who should first board the Serpent should have her, and all the
+      booty found in her, and each should have the ships he cleared for himself.
+      Earl Eirik had a large ship of war which he used upon his viking
+      expeditions; and there was an iron beard or comb above on both sides of
+      the stem, and below it a thick iron plate as broad as the combs, which
+      went down quite to the gunnel.
+      112. OF KING OLAF'S PEOPLE.
+      When Earl Sigvalde with his vessels rowed in under the island, Thorkel
+      Dydril of the Crane, and the other ship commanders who sailed with him,
+      saw that he turned his ships towards the isle, and thereupon let fall the
+      sails, and rowed after him, calling out, and asking why he sailed that
+      way. The Earl answered, that he was waiting for king Olaf, as he feared
+      there were enemies in the water. They lay upon their oars until Thorkel
+      Nefia came up with the Short Serpent and the three ships which followed
+      him. When they told them the same they too struck sail, and let the ships
+      drive, waiting for king Olaf. But when the king sailed in towards the
+      isle, the whole enemies' fleet came rowing within them out to the Sound.
+      When they saw this they begged the king to hold on his way, and not risk
+      battle with so great a force. The king replied, high on the quarter-deck
+      where he stood, "Strike the sails; never shall men of mine think of
+      flight. I never fled from battle. Let God dispose of my life, but flight I
+      shall never take." It was done as the king commanded. Halfred tells of it
+      thus: -
+     "And far and wide the saying bold
+     Of the brave warrior shall be told.
+     The king, in many a fray well tried,
+     To his brave champions round him cried,
+     'My men shall never learn from me
+     From the dark weapon-cloud to flee.'
+     Nor were the brave words spoken then
+     Forgotten by his faithful men."
+      113. OLAF'S SHIPS PREPARED FOR BATTLE.
+      King Olaf ordered the war-horns to sound for all his ships to close up to
+      each other. The king's ship lay in the middle of the line, and on one side
+      lay the Little Serpent, and on the other the Crane; and as they made fast
+      the stems together (1), the Long Serpent's stem and the short Serpent's
+      were made fast together; but when the king saw it he called out to his
+      men, and ordered them to lay the larger ship more in advance, so that its
+      stern should not lie so far behind in the fleet.
+      Then says Ulf the Red, "If the Long Serpent is to lie as much more ahead
+      of the other ships as she is longer than them, we shall have hard work of
+      it here on the forecastle."
+      The king replies, "I did not think I had a forecastle man afraid as well
+      as red."
+      Says Ulf, "Defend thou the quarterdeck as I shall the forecastle."
+      The king had a bow in his hands, and laid an arrow on the string, and
+      aimed at Ulf.
+      Ulf said, "Shoot another way, king, where it is more needful: my work is
+      thy gain."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The mode of fighting in sea battles appears, from this and
+     many other descriptions, to have been for each party to bind
+     together the stems and sterns of their own ships, forming
+     them thus into a compact body as soon as the fleets came
+     within fighting distance, or within spears' throw.  They
+     appear to have fought principally from the forecastles; and
+     to have used grappling irons for dragging a vessel out of
+     the line, or within boarding distance. -L.
+      114. OF KING OLAF.
+      King Olaf stood on the Serpent's quarterdeck, high over the others. He had
+      a gilt shield, and a helmet inlaid with gold; over his armour he had a
+      short red coat, and was easy to be distinguished from other men. When King
+      Olaf saw that the scattered forces of the enemy gathered themselves
+      together under the banners of their ships, he asked, "Who is the chief of
+      the force right opposite to us?"
+      He was answered, that it was King Svein with the Danish army.
+      The king replies, "We are not afraid of these soft Danes, for there is no
+      bravery in them; but who are the troops on the right of the Danes?"
+      He was answered, that it was King Olaf with the Swedish forces.
+      "Better it were," says King Olaf, "for these Swedes to be sitting at home
+      killing their sacrifices, than to be venturing under our weapons from the
+      Long Serpent. But who owns the large ships on the larboard side of the
+      Danes?"
+      "That is Earl Eirik Hakonson," say they.
+      The king replies, "He, methinks, has good reason for meeting us; and we
+      may expect the sharpest conflict with these men, for they are Norsemen
+      like ourselves."
+      115. THE BATTLE BEGINS.
+      The kings now laid out their oars, and prepared to attack (A.D. 1000).
+      King Svein laid his ship against the Long Serpent. Outside of him Olaf the
+      Swede laid himself, and set his ship's stern against the outermost ship of
+      King Olaf's line; and on the other side lay Earl Eirik. Then a hard combat
+      began. Earl Sigvalde held back with the oars on his ships, and did not
+      join the fray. So says Skule Thorsteinson, who at that time was with Earl
+      Eirik: -
+     "I followed Sigvalde in my youth,
+     And gallant Eirik, and in truth
+     The' now I am grown stiff and old,
+     In the spear-song I once was bold.
+     Where arrows whistled on the shore
+     Of Svold fjord my shield I bore,
+     And stood amidst the loudest clash
+     When swords on shields made fearful crash."
+      And Halfred also sings thus: -
+     "In truth I think the gallant king,
+     Midst such a foemen's gathering,
+     Would be the better of some score
+     Of his tight Throndhjem lads, or more;
+     For many a chief has run away,
+     And left our brave king in the fray,
+     Two great kings' power to withstand,
+     And one great earl's, with his small band,
+     The king who dares such mighty deed
+     A hero for his skald would need."
+      116. FLIGHT OF SVEIN AND OLAF THE SWEDE.
+      This battle was one of the severest told of, and many were the people
+      slain. The forecastle men of the Long Serpent, the Little Serpent, and the
+      Crane, threw grapplings and stem chains into King Svein's ship, and used
+      their weapons well against the people standing below them, for they
+      cleared the decks of all the ships they could lay fast hold of; and King
+      Svein, and all the men who escaped, fled to other vessels, and laid
+      themselves out of bow-shot. It went with this force just as King Olaf
+      Trygvason had foreseen. Then King Olaf the Swede laid himself in their
+      place; but when he came near the great ships it went with him as with
+      them, for he lost many men and some ships, and was obliged to get away.
+      But Earl Eirik laid his ship side by side with the outermost of King
+      Olaf's ships, thinned it of men, cut the cables, and let it drive. Then he
+      laid alongside of the next, and fought until he had cleared it of men
+      also. Now all the people who were in the smaller ships began to run into
+      the larger, and the earl cut them loose as fast as he cleared them of men.
+      The Danes and Swedes laid themselves now out of shooting distance all
+      around Olaf's ship; but Earl Eirik lay always close alongside of the
+      ships, and used hid swords and battle-axes, and as fast as people fell in
+      his vessel others, Danes and Swedes, came in their place. So says Haldor,
+      the Unchristian: -
+     "Sharp was the clang of shield and sword,
+     And shrill the song of spears on board,
+     And whistling arrows thickly flew
+     Against the Serpent's gallant crew.
+     And still fresh foemen, it is said,
+     Earl Eirik to her long side led;
+     Whole armies of his Danes and Swedes,
+     Wielding on high their blue sword-blades."
+      Then the fight became most severe, and many people fell. But at last it
+      came to this, that all King Olaf Trygvason's ships were cleared of men
+      except the Long Serpent, on board of which all who could still carry their
+      arms were gathered. Then Earl Eirik lay with his ship by the side of the
+      Serpent, and the fight went on with battle-axe and sword. So says Haldor: -
+     "Hard pressed on every side by foes,
+     The Serpent reels beneath the blows;
+     Crash go the shields around the bow!
+     Breast-plates and breasts pierced thro' and thro!
+     In the sword-storm the Holm beside,
+     The earl's ship lay alongside
+     The king's Long Serpent of the sea -
+     Fate gave the earl the victory."
+      117. OF EARL EIRIK.
+      Earl Eirik was in the forehold of his ship, where a cover of shields (1)
+      had been set up. In the fight, both hewing weapons, sword, and axe, and
+      the thrust of spears had been used; and all that could be used as weapon
+      for casting was cast. Some used bows, some threw spears with the hand. So
+      many weapons were cast into the Serpent, and so thick flew spears and
+      arrows, that the shields could scarcely receive them, for on all sides the
+      Serpent was surrounded by war-ships. Then King Olaf's men became so mad
+      with rage, that they ran on board of the enemies ships, to get at the
+      people with stroke of sword and kill them; but many did not lay themselves
+      so near the Serpent, in order to escape the close encounter with
+      battle-axe or sword; and thus the most of Olaf's men went overboard and
+      sank under their weapons, thinking they were fighting on plain ground. So
+      says Halfred: -
+     "The daring lads shrink not from death; -
+     O'erboard they leap, and sink beneath
+     The Serpent's keel: all armed they leap,
+     And down they sink five fathoms deep.
+     The foe was daunted at the cheers;
+     The king, who still the Serpent steers,
+     In such a strait -beset with foes -
+     Wanted but some more lads like those."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Both in land and sea fights the commanders appear to have
+     been protected from missile weapons, -stones, arrows,
+     spears, -by a shieldburg: that is, by a party of men
+     bearing shields surrounding them in such a way that the
+     shields were a parapet, covering those within the circle.
+     The Romans had a similar military arrangement of shields in
+     sieges -the testudo. -L.
+      118. OF EINAR TAMBARSKELVER.
+      Einar Tambarskelver, one of the sharpest of bowshooters, stood by the
+      mast, and shot with his bow. Einar shot an arrow at Earl Eirik, which hit
+      the tiller end just above the earl's head so hard that it entered the wood
+      up to the arrow-shaft. The earl looked that way, and asked if they knew
+      who had shot; and at the same moment another arrow flew between his hand
+      and his side, and into the stuffing of the chief's stool, so that the barb
+      stood far out on the other side. Then said the earl to a man called Fin, -but
+      some say he was of Fin (Laplander) race, and was a superior archer, -"Shoot
+      that tall man by the mast." Fin shot; and the arrow hit the middle of
+      Einar's bow just at the moment that Einar was drawing it, and the bow was
+      split in two parts.
+      "What is that," cried King Olaf, "that broke with such a noise?"
+      "Norway, king, from thy hands," cried Einar.
+      "No! not quite so much as that," says the king; "take my bow, and shoot,"
+      flinging the bow to him.
+      Einar took the bow, and drew it over the head of the arrow. "Too weak, too
+      weak," said he, "for the bow of a mighty king!" and, throwing the bow
+      aside, he took sword and shield, and fought Valiantly.
+      119. OLAF GIVES HIS MEN SHARP SWORDS.
+      The king stood on the gangways of the Long Serpent, and shot the greater
+      part of the day; sometimes with the bow, sometimes with the spear, and
+      always throwing two spears at once. He looked down over the ship's sides,
+      and saw that his men struck briskly with their swords, and yet wounded but
+      seldom. Then he called aloud, "Why do ye strike so gently that ye seldom
+      cut?" One among the people answered, "The swords are blunt and full of
+      notches." Then the king went down into the forehold, opened the chest
+      under the throne, and took out many sharp swords, which he handed to his
+      men; but as he stretched down his right hand with them, some observed that
+      blood was running down under his steel glove, but no one knew where he was
+      wounded.
+      120. THE SERPENT BOARDED.
+      Desperate was the defence in the Serpent, and there was the heaviest
+      destruction of men done by the forecastle crew, and those of the forehold,
+      for in both places the men were chosen men, and the ship was highest, but
+      in the middle of the ship the people were thinned. Now when Earl Eirik saw
+      there were but few people remaining beside the ship's mast, he determined
+      to board; and he entered the Serpent with four others. Then came Hyrning,
+      the king's brother-in-law, and some others against him, and there was the
+      most severe combat; and at last the earl was forced to leap back on board
+      his own ship again, and some who had accompanied him were killed, and
+      others wounded. Thord Kolbeinson alludes to this: -
+     "On Odin's deck, all wet with blood,
+     The helm-adorned hero stood;
+     And gallant Hyrning honour gained,
+     Clearing all round with sword deep stained.
+     The high mountain peaks shall fall,
+     Ere men forget this to recall."
+      Now the fight became hot indeed, and many men fell on board the Serpent;
+      and the men on board of her began to be thinned off, and the defence to be
+      weaker. The earl resolved to board the Serpent again, and again he met
+      with a warm reception. When the forecastle men of the Serpent saw what he
+      was doing, they went aft and made a desperate fight; but so many men of
+      the Serpent had fallen, that the ship's sides were in many places quite
+      bare of defenders; and the earl's men poured in all around into the
+      vessel, and all the men who were still able to defend the ship crowded aft
+      to the king, and arrayed themselves for his defence. So says Haldor the
+      Unchristian: -
+     "Eirik cheers on his men, -
+     'On to the charge again!'
+     The gallant few
+     Of Olaf's crew
+     Must refuge take
+     On the quarter-deck.
+     Around the king
+     They stand in ring;
+     Their shields enclose
+     The king from foes,
+     And the few who still remain
+     Fight madly, but in vain.
+     Eirik cheers on his men -
+     'On to the charge again!'"
+      121. THE SERPENT'S DECKS CLEARED.
+      Kolbjorn the marshal, who had on clothes and arms like the kings, and was
+      a remarkably stout and handsome man, went up to king on the quarter-deck.
+      The battle was still going on fiercely even in the forehold (1). But as
+      many of the earl's men had now got into the Serpent as could find room,
+      and his ships lay all round her, and few were the people left in the
+      Serpent for defence against so great a force; and in a short time most of
+      the Serpent's men fell, brave and stout though they were. King Olaf and
+      Kolbjorn the marshal both sprang overboard, each on his own side of the
+      ship; but the earl's men had laid out boats around the Serpent, and killed
+      those who leaped overboard. Now when the king had sprung overboard, they
+      tried to seize him with their hands, and bring him to Earl Eirik; but King
+      Olaf threw his shield over his head, and sank beneath the waters. Kolbjorn
+      held his shield behind him to protect himself from the spears cast at him
+      from the ships which lay round the Serpent, and he fell so upon his shield
+      that it came under him, so that he could not sink so quickly. He was thus
+      taken and brought into a boat, and they supposed he was the king. He was
+      brought before the earl; and when the earl saw it was Kolbjorn, and not
+      the king, he gave him his life. At the same moment all of King Olaf's men
+      who were in life sprang overboard from the Serpent; and Thorkel Nefia, the
+      king's brother, was the last of all the men who sprang overboard. It is
+      thus told concerning the king by Halfred: -
+     "The Serpent and the Crane
+     Lay wrecks upon the main.
+     On his sword he cast a glance, -
+     With it he saw no chance.
+     To his marshal, who of yore
+     Many a war-chance had come o'er,
+     He spoke a word -then drew in breath,
+     And sprang to his deep-sea death."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) From the occasional descriptions of vessels in this and
+     other battles, it may be inferred that even the Long
+     Serpent, described in the 95th chapter as of 150 feet of
+     keel was only docked fore and aft; the thirty-four benches
+     for rowers occupying the open area in the middle, and
+     probably gangways running along the side for communicating
+     from the quarter-deck to the forcastle. -L.
+      122. REPORT AMONG THE PEOPLE.
+      Earl Sigvalde, as before related, came from Vindland, in company with King
+      Olaf, with ten ships; but the eleventh ship was manned with the men of
+      Astrid, the king's daughter, the wife of Earl Sigvalde. Now when King Olaf
+      sprang overboard, the whole army raised a shout of victory; and then Earl
+      Sigvalde and his men put their oars in the water and rowed towards the
+      battle. Haldor the Unchristian tells of it thus: -
+     "Then first the Vindland vessels came
+     Into the fight with little fame;
+     The fight still lingered on the wave,
+     Tho' hope was gone with Olaf brave.
+     War, like a full-fed ravenous beast,
+     Still oped her grim jaws for the feast.
+     The few who stood now quickly fled,
+     When the shout told -'Olaf is dead!'"
+      But the Vindland cutter, in which Astrid's men were, rowed back to
+      Vindland; and the report went immediately abroad and was told by many,
+      that King Olaf had cast off his coat-of-mail under water, and had swum,
+      diving under the longships, until he came to the Vindland cutter, and that
+      Astrid's men had conveyed him to Vindland: and many tales have been made
+      since about the adventures of Olaf the king. Halfred speaks thus about it: -
+     "Does Olaf live? or is he dead?
+     Has he the hungry ravens fed?
+     I scarcely know what I should say,
+     For many tell the tale each way.
+     This I can say, nor fear to lie,
+     That he was wounded grievously -
+     So wounded in this bloody strife,
+     He scarce could come away with life."
+      But however this may have been, King Olaf Trygvason never came back again
+      to his kingdom of Norway. Halfred Vandredaskald speaks also thus about it:
+     "The witness who reports this thing
+     Of Trygvason, our gallant king,
+     Once served the king, and truth should tell,
+     For Olaf hated lies like hell.
+     If Olaf 'scaped from this sword-thing,
+     Worse fate, I fear, befel our king
+     Than people guess, or e'er can know,
+     For he was hemm'd in by the foe.
+     From the far east some news is rife
+     Of king sore wounded saving life;
+     His death, too sure, leaves me no care
+     For cobweb rumours in the air.
+     It never was the will of fate
+     That Olaf from such perilous strait
+     Should 'scape with life!  this truth may grieve -
+     'What people wish they soon believe.'"
+      123. OF EARL EIRIK, THE SON OF HAKON.
+      By this victory Earl Eirik Hakonson became owner of the Long Serpent, and
+      made a great booty besides; and he steered the Serpent from the battle. So
+      says Haldor: -
+     "Olaf, with glittering helmet crowned,
+     Had steered the Serpent through the Sound;
+     And people dressed their boats, and cheered
+     As Olaf's fleet in splendour steered.
+     But the descendent of great Heming,
+     Whose race tells many a gallant sea-king,
+     His blue sword in red life-blood stained,
+     And bravely Olaf's long ship gained."
+      Svein, a son of Earl Hakon, and Earl Eirik's brother, was engaged at this
+      time to marry Holmfrid, a daughter of King Olaf the Swedish king. Now when
+      Svein the Danish king, Olaf the Swedish king, and Earl Eirik divided the
+      kingdom of Norway between them, King Olaf got four districts in the
+      Throndhjem country, and also the districts of More and Raumsdal; and in
+      the east part of the land he got Ranrike, from the Gaut river to
+      Svinasund. Olaf gave these dominions into Earl Svein's hands, on the same
+      conditions as the sub kings or earls had held them formerly from the
+      upper-king of the country. Earl Eirik got four districts in the Throndhjem
+      country, and Halogaland, Naumudal, the Fjord districts, Sogn, Hordaland,
+      Rogaland, and North Agder, all the way to the Naze. So says Thord
+      Kolbeinson: -
+     "All chiefs within our land
+     On Eirik's side now stand:
+     Erling alone, I know
+     Remains Earl Eirik's foe.
+     All praise our generous earl, -
+     He gives, and is no churl:
+     All men are well content
+     Fate such a chief has sent.
+     From Veiga to Agder they,
+     Well pleased, the earl obey;
+     And all will by him stand,
+     To guard the Norsemen's land.
+     And now the news is spread
+     That mighty Svein is dead,
+     And luck is gone from those
+     Who were the Norsemen's foes."
+      The Danish king Svein retained Viken as he had held it before, but he gave
+      Raumarike and Hedemark to Earl Eirik. Svein Hakonson got the title of earl
+      from Olaf the Swedish king. Svein was one of the handsomest men ever seen.
+      The earls Eirik and Svein both allowed themselves to be baptized, and took
+      up the true faith; but as long as they ruled in Norway they allowed every
+      one to do as he pleased in holding by his Christianity. But, on the other
+      hand, they held fast by the old laws, and all the old rights and customs
+      of the land, and were excellent men and good rulers. Earl Eirik had most
+      to say of the two brothers in all matters of government.
+      SAGA OF OLAF HARALDSON. (1)
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      Olaf Haraldson the Saint's Saga is the longest, the most important, and
+      the most finished of all the sagas in "Heimskringla". The life of Olaf
+      will be found treated more or less freely in "Agrip", in "Historia
+      Norvegiae", in "Thjodrek the Monk", in the legendary saga, and in
+      "Fagrskinna". Other old Norse literature relating to this epoch:
+      Are's "Islendingabok", "Landnama", "Kristni Saga", "Biskupa-sogur",
+      "Njala", "Gunlaugs Saga", "Ormstungu", "Bjarnar Saga Hitdaelakappa",
+      "Hallfredar Thattr Vandraedaskalde", "Eyrbyggia", "Viga Styrs Saga",
+      "Laxdaela", "Fostbraedra", "Gretla", "Liosvetninga", "Faereyinga",
+      "Orkneyinga".
+      Olaf Haraldson was born 995, went as a viking at the age of twelve, 1007;
+      visited England, one summer and three winters, 1009-1012; in France two
+      summers and one winter, 1012-1013; spent the winter in Normandy, 1014;
+      returned to Norway and was recognized as King, April 3, 1015; fled from
+      Norway the winter of 1028-1029; fell at Stiklestad, July 29 (or August
+      31), 1030.
+      Skalds quoted in this saga are: -Ottar Svarte, Sigvat Skald, Thord
+      Kolbeinson, Berse Torfason, Brynjolf, Arnor Jarlaskald, Thord Siarekson,
+      Harek, Thorarin Loftunga, Halvard Hareksblese, Bjarne Gulbraskald, Jokul
+      Bardson, Thormod Kolbrunarskald, Gissur, Thorfin Mun, Hofgardaref.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) King Olaf the Saint reigned from about the year 1015 to
+     1030.  The death of King Olaf Trygvason was in the year
+     1000: and Earl Eirik held the government for the Danish and
+     Swedish kings about fifteen years. -L.
+      1. OF SAINT OLAF'S BRINGING UP.
+      Olaf, Harald Grenske's son, was brought up by his stepfather Sigurd Syr
+      and his mother Asta. Hrane the Far-travelled lived in the house of Asta,
+      and fostered this Olaf Haraldson. Olaf came early to manhood, was handsome
+      in countenance, middle-sized in growth, and was even when very young of
+      good understanding and ready speech. Sigurd his stepfather was a careful
+      householder, who kept his people closely to their work, and often went
+      about himself to inspect his corn-rigs and meadowland, the cattle, and
+      also the smith-work, or whatsoever his people had on hand to do.
+      2. OF OLAF AND KING SIGURD SYR.
+      It happened one day that King Sigurd wanted to ride from home, but there
+      was nobody about the house; so he told his stepson Olaf to saddle his
+      horse. Olaf went to the goats' pen, took out the he-goat that was the
+      largest, led him forth, and put the king's saddle on him, and then went in
+      and told King Sigurd he had saddled his riding horse. Now when King Sigurd
+      came out and saw what Olaf had done, he said "It is easy to see that thou
+      wilt little regard my orders; and thy mother will think it right that I
+      order thee to do nothing that is against thy own inclination. I see well
+      enough that we are of different dispositions, and that thou art far more
+      proud than I am." Olaf answered little, but went his way laughing.
+      3. OF RING OLAF'S ACCOMPLISHMENTS.
+      When Olaf Haraldson grew up he was not tall, but middle-sized in height,
+      although very thick, and of good strength. He had light brown hair, and a
+      broad face, which was white and red. He had particularly fine eyes, which
+      were beautiful and piercing, so that one was afraid to look him in the
+      face when he was angry. Olaf was very expert in all bodily exercises,
+      understood well to handle his bow, and was distinguished particularly in
+      throwing his spear by hand: he was a great swimmer, and very handy, and
+      very exact and knowing in all kinds of smithwork, whether he himself or
+      others made the thing. He was distinct and acute in conversation, and was
+      soon perfect in understanding and strength. He was beloved by his friends
+      and acquaintances, eager in his amusements, and one who always liked to be
+      the first, as it was suitable he should be from his birth and dignity. He
+      was called Olaf the Great.
+      4. KING OLAF'S WAR EXPEDITION.
+      Olaf Haraldson was twelve years old when he, for the first time, went on
+      board a ship of war (A.D. 1007). His mother Asta got Hrane, who was called
+      the foster-father of kings, to command a ship of war and take Olaf under
+      his charge; for Hrane had often been on war expeditions. When Olaf in this
+      way got a ship and men, the crew gave him the title of king; for it was
+      the custom that those commanders of troops who were of kingly descent, on
+      going out upon a viking cruise, received the title of king immediately
+      although they had no land or kingdom. Hrane sat at the helm; and some say
+      that Olaf himself was but a common rower, although he was king of the
+      men-at-arms. They steered east along the land, and came first to Denmark.
+      So says Ottar Svarte, in his lay which he made about King Olaf: -
+     "Young was the king when from his home
+     He first began in ships to roam,
+     His ocean-steed to ride
+     To Denmark o'er the tide.
+     Well exercised art thou in truth -
+     In manhood's earnest work, brave youth!
+     Out from the distant north
+     Mighty hast thou come forth."
+      Towards autumn he sailed eastward to the Swedish dominions, and there
+      harried and burnt all the country round; for he thought he had good cause
+      of hostility against the Swedes, as they killed his father Harald. Ottar
+      Svarte says distinctly that he came from the east, out by way of Denmark: -
+     "Thy ship from shore to shore,
+     With many a well-plied car,
+     Across the Baltic foam is dancing. -
+     Shields, and spears, and helms glancing!
+     Hoist high the swelling sail
+     To catch the freshening gale!
+     There's food for the raven-flight
+     Where thy sail-winged ship shall light;
+          Thy landing-tread
+          The people dread;
+     And the wolf howls for a feast
+     On the shore-side in the east."
+      5. OLAF'S FIRST BATTLE.
+      The same autumn Olaf had his first battle at Sotasker, which lies in the
+      Swedish skerry circle. He fought there with some vikings, whose leader was
+      Sote. Olaf had much fewer men, but his ships were larger, and he had his
+      ships between some blind rocks, which made it difficult for the vikings to
+      get alongside; and Olaf's men threw grappling irons into the ships which
+      came nearest, drew them up to their own vessels, and cleared them of men.
+      The vikings took to flight after losing many men. Sigvat the skald tells
+      of this fight in the lay in which he reckons up King Olaf's battles: -
+     "They launch his ship where waves are foaming -
+          To the sea shore
+          Both mast and oar,
+     And sent his o'er the seas a-roaming.
+     Where did the sea-king first draw blood?
+          In the battle shock
+          At Sote's rock;
+     The wolves howl over their fresh food."
+      6. FORAY IN SVITHJOD.
+      King Olaf steered thereafter eastwards to Svithjod, and into the Lag (the
+      Maelar lake), and ravaged the land on both sides. He sailed all the way up
+      to Sigtuna, and laid his ships close to the old Sigtuna. The Swedes say
+      the stone-heaps are still to be seen which Olaf had laid under the ends of
+      the gangways from the shore to the ships. When autumn was advanced, Olaf
+      Haraldson heard that Olaf the Swedish king was assembling an army, and
+      also that he had laid iron chains across Stoksund (the channel between the
+      Maelar lake and the sea), and had laid troops there; for the Swedish king
+      thought that Olaf Haraldson would be kept in there till frost came, and he
+      thought little of Olaf's force knowing he had but few people. Now when
+      King Olaf Haraldson came to Stoksund he could not get through, as there
+      was a castle west of the sound, and men-at-arms lay on the south; and he
+      heard that the Swedish king was come there with a great army and many
+      ships. He therefore dug a canal across the flat land Agnafit out to the
+      sea. Over all Svithjod all the running waters fall into the Maelar lake;
+      but the only outlet of it to the sea is so small that many rivers are
+      wider, and when much rain or snow falls the water rushes in a great
+      cataract out by Stoksund, and the lake rises high and floods the land. It
+      fell heavy rain just at this time; and as the canal was dug out to the
+      sea, the water and stream rushed into it. Then Olaf had all the rudders
+      unshipped and hoisted all sail aloft. It was blowing a strong breeze
+      astern, and they steered with their oars, and the ships came in a rush
+      over all the shallows, and got into the sea without any damage. Now went
+      the Swedes to their king, Olaf, and told him that Olaf the Great had
+      slipped out to sea; on which the king was enraged against those who should
+      have watched that Olaf did not get away. This passage has since been
+      called King's Sound; but large vessels cannot pass through it, unless the
+      waters are very high. Some relate that the Swedes were aware that Olaf had
+      cut across the tongue of land, and that the water was falling out that
+      way; and they flocked to it with the intention to hinder Olaf from getting
+      away, but the water undermined the banks on each side so that they fell in
+      with the people, and many were drowned: but the Swedes contradict this as
+      a false report, and deny the loss of people. The king sailed to Gotland in
+      harvest, and prepared to plunder; but the Gotlanders assembled, and sent
+      men to the king, offering him a scat. The king found this would suit him,
+      and he received the scat, and remained there all winter. So says Ottar
+      Svarte: -
+     "Thou seaman-prince! thy men are paid:
+     The scat on Gotlanders is laid;
+          Young man or old
+          To our seamen bold
+          Must pay, to save his head:
+          The Yngling princes fled,
+          Eysvssel people bled;
+     Who can't defend the wealth they have
+     Must die, or share with the rover brave."
+      7. THE SECOND BATTLE.
+      It is related here that King Olaf, when spring set in, sailed east to
+      Eysyssel, and landed and plundered; the Eysyssel men came down to the
+      strand and grave him battle. King Olaf gained the victory, pursued those
+      who fled, and laid waste the land with fire and sword. It is told that
+      when King Olaf first came to Eysvssel they offered him scat, and when the
+      scat was to be brought down to the strand the king came to meet it with an
+      armed force, and that was not what the bondes there expected; for they had
+      brought no scat, but only their weapons with which they fought against the
+      king, as before related. So says Sigvat the skald: -
+     "With much deceit and bustle
+     To the heath of Eysyssel
+     The bondes brought the king,
+     To get scat at their weapon-thing.
+     But Olaf was too wise
+     To be taken by surprise;
+     Their legs scarce bore them off
+     O'er the common test enough."
+      8. THE THIRD BATTLE.
+      After this they sailed to Finland and plundered there, and went up the
+      country. All the people fled to the forest, and they had emptied their
+      houses of all household goods. The king went far up the country, and
+      through some woods, and came to some dwellings in a valley called
+      Herdaler, -where, however, they made but small booty, and saw no
+      people; and as it was getting late in the day, the king turned back to his
+      ships. Now when they came into the woods again people rushed upon them
+      from all quarters, and made a severe attack. The king told his men to
+      cover themselves with their shields, but before they got out of the woods
+      he lost many people, and many were wounded; but at last, late in the
+      evening, he got to the ships. The Finlanders conjured up in the night, by
+      their witchcraft, a dreadful storm and bad weather on the sea; but the
+      king ordered the anchors to be weighed and sail hoisted, and beat off all
+      night to the outside of the land. The king's luck prevailed more than the
+      Finlanders' witchcraft; for he had the luck to beat round the Balagard's
+      side in the night, and so got out to sea. But the Finnish army proceeded
+      on land, making the same progress as the king made with his ships. So says
+      Sigvat: -
+     "The third fight was at Herdaler, where
+     The men of Finland met in war
+     The hero of the royal race,
+     With ringing sword-blades face to face.
+     Off Balagard's shore the waves
+     Ran hollow; but the sea-king saves
+     His hard-pressed ship, and gains the lee
+     Of the east coast through the wild sea."
+      9. THE FOURTH BATTLE IN SUDERVIK.
+      King Olaf sailed from thence to Denmark, where he met Thorkel the Tall,
+      brother of Earl Sigvalde, and went into partnership with him; for he was
+      just ready to set out on a cruise. They sailed southwards to the Jutland
+      coast, to a place called Sudervik, where they overcame many viking ships.
+      The vikings, who usually have many people to command, give themselves the
+      title of kings, although they have no lands to rule over. King Olaf went
+      into battle with them, and it was severe; but King Olaf gained the
+      victory, and a great booty. So says Sigvat: -
+     "Hark!  hark!  The war-shout
+          Through Sudervik rings,
+     And the vikings bring out
+          To fight the two kings.
+     Great honour, I'm told,
+     Won these vikings so bold:
+     But their bold fight was vain,
+     For the two brave kings gain."
+      10. THE FIFTH BATTLE IN FRIESLAND.
+      King Olaf sailed from thence south to Friesland, and lay under the strand
+      of Kinlima in dreadful weather. The king landed with his men; but the
+      people of the country rode down to the strand against them, and he fought
+      them. So says Sigvat: -
+     "Under Kinlima's cliff,
+     This battle is the fifth.
+     The brave sea-rovers stand
+     All on the glittering sand;
+     And down the horsemen ride
+     To the edge of the rippling tide:
+     But Olaf taught the peasant band
+     To know the weight of a viking's hand."
+      11. DEATH OF KING SVEIN FORKED BEARD.
+      The king sailed from thence westward to England. It was then the case that
+      the Danish king, Svein Forked Beard, was at that time in England with a
+      Danish army, and had been fixed there for some time, and had seized upon
+      King Ethelred's kingdom. The Danes had spread themselves so widely over
+      England, that it was come so far that King Ethelred had departed from the
+      country, and had gone south to Valland. The same autumn that King Olaf
+      came to England, it happened that King Svein died suddenly in the night in
+      his bed; and it is said by Englishmen that Edmund the Saint killed him, in
+      the same way that the holy Mercurius had killed the apostate Julian. When
+      Ethelred, the king of the English, heard this in Flanders, he returned
+      directly to England; and no sooner was he come back, than he sent an
+      invitation to all the men who would enter into his pay, to join him in
+      recovering the country. Then many people flocked to him; and among others,
+      came King Olaf with a great troop of Northmen to his aid. They steered
+      first to London, and sailed into the Thames with their fleet; but the
+      Danes had a castle within. On the other side of the river is a great
+      trading place, which is called Sudvirke. There the Danes had raised a
+      great work, dug large ditches, and within had built a bulwark of stone,
+      timber, and turf, where they had stationed a strong army. King Ethelred
+      ordered a great assault; but the Danes defended themselves bravely, and
+      King Ethelred could make nothing of it. Between the castle and Southwark
+      (Sudvirke) there was a bridge, so broad that two wagons could pass each
+      other upon it. On the bridge were raised barricades, both towers and
+      wooden parapets, in the direction of the river, which were nearly breast
+      high; and under the bridge were piles driven into the bottom of the river.
+      Now when the attack was made the troops stood on the bridge everywhere,
+      and defended themselves. King Ethelred was very anxious to get possession
+      of the bridge, and he called together all the chiefs to consult how they
+      should get the bridge broken down. Then said King Olaf he would attempt to
+      lay his fleet alongside of it, if the other ships would do the same. It
+      was then determined in this council that they should lay their war forces
+      under the bridge; and each made himself ready with ships and men.
+      12. THE SIXTH BATTLE.
+      King Olaf ordered great platforms of floating wood to be tied together
+      with hazel bands, and for this he took down old houses; and with these, as
+      a roof, he covered over his ships so widely, that it reached over the
+      ships' sides. Under this screen he set pillars so high and stout, that
+      there both was room for swinging their swords, and the roofs were strong
+      enough to withstand the stones cast down upon them. Now when the fleet and
+      men were ready, they rode up along the river; but when they came near the
+      bridge, there were cast down upon them so many stones and missile weapons,
+      such as arrows and spears, that neither helmet nor shield could hold out
+      against it; and the ships themselves were so greatly damaged, that many
+      retreated out of it. But King Olaf, and the Northmen's fleet with him,
+      rowed quite up under the bridge, laid their cables around the piles which
+      supported it, and then rowed off with all the ships as hard as they could
+      down the stream. The piles were thus shaken in the bottom, and were
+      loosened under the bridge. Now as the armed troops stood thick of men upon
+      the bridge, and there were likewise many heaps of stones and other weapons
+      upon it, and the piles under it being loosened and broken, the bridge gave
+      way; and a great part of the men upon it fell into the river, and all the
+      ethers fled, some into the castle, some into Southwark. Thereafter
+      Southwark was stormed and taken. Now when the people in the castle saw
+      that the river Thames was mastered, and that they could not hinder the
+      passage of ships up into the country, they became afraid, surrendered the
+      tower, and took Ethelred to be their king. So says Ottar Svarte: -
+     "London Bridge is broken down. -
+     Gold is won, and bright renown.
+          Shields resounding,
+          War-horns sounding,
+     Hild is shouting in the din!
+          Arrows singing,
+          Mail-coats ringing -
+     Odin makes our Olaf win!"
+      And he also composed these: -
+     "King Ethelred has found a friend:
+     Brave Olaf will his throne defend -
+          In bloody fight
+          Maintain his right,
+          Win back his land
+          With blood-red hand,
+     And Edmund's son upon his throne replace -
+     Edmund, the star of every royal race!"
+      Sigvat also relates as follows: -
+     "At London Bridge stout Olaf gave
+     Odin's law to his war-men brave -
+          'To win or die!'
+          And their foemen fly.
+     Some by the dyke-side refuge gain -
+     Some in their tents on Southwark plain!
+          The sixth attack
+          Brought victory back."
+      13. THE SEVENTH BATTLE.
+      King Olaf passed all the winter with King Ethelred, and had a great battle
+      at Hringmara Heath in Ulfkel's land, the domain which Ulfkel Snilling at
+      that time held; and here again the king was victorious. So says Sigvat the
+      skald: -
+     "To Ulfkel's land came Olaf bold,
+     A seventh sword-thing he would hold.
+     The race of Ella filled the plain -
+     Few of them slept at home again!
+     Hringmara heath
+     Was a bed of death:
+     Harfager's heir
+     Dealt slaughter there."
+      And Ottar sings of this battle thus: -
+     "From Hringmara field
+          The chime of war,
+     Sword striking shield,
+          Rings from afar.
+     The living fly;
+     The dead piled high
+     The moor enrich;
+     Red runs the ditch."
+      The country far around was then brought in subjection to King Ethelred:
+      but the Thingmen (1) and the Danes held many castles, besides a great part
+      of the country.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Thing-men were hired men-at-arms; called Thing-men
+     probably from being men above the class of thralls or unfree men,
+     and entitled to appear at Things, as being udal-born to land at
+     home.
+      14. EIGHTH AND NINTH BATTLES OF OLAF.
+      King Olaf was commander of all the forces when they went against
+      Canterbury; and they fought there until they took the town, killing many
+      people and burning the castle. So says Ottar Svarte: -
+     "All in the grey of morn
+          Broad Canterbury's forced.
+     Black smoke from house-roofs borne
+          Hides fire that does its worst;
+     And many a man laid low
+     By the battle-axe's blow,
+     Waked by the Norsemen's cries,
+     Scarce had time to rub his eyes."
+      Sigvat reckons this King Olaf's eighth battle: -
+     "Of this eighth battle I can tell
+     How it was fought, and what befell,
+          The castle tower
+          With all his power
+          He could not take,
+          Nor would forsake.
+          The Perthmen fought,
+          Nor quarter sought;
+          By death or flight
+          They left the fight.
+     Olaf could not this earl stout
+     From Canterbury quite drive out."
+      At this time King Olaf was entrusted with the whole land defence of
+      England, and he sailed round the land with his ships of War. He laid his
+      ships at land at Nyjamoda, where the troops of the Thingmen were, and gave
+      them battle and gained the victory. So says Sigvat the skald: -
+     "The youthful king stained red the hair
+     Of Angeln men, and dyed his spear
+     At Newport in their hearts' dark blood:
+     And where the Danes the thickest stood -
+     Where the shrill storm round Olaf's head
+     Of spear and arrow thickest fled.
+     There thickest lay the Thingmen dead!
+     Nine battles now of Olaf bold,
+     Battle by battle, I have told."
+      King Olaf then scoured all over the country, taking scat of the people and
+      plundering where it was refused. So says Ottar: -
+     "The English race could not resist thee,
+     With money thou madest them assist thee;
+     Unsparingly thou madest them pay
+     A scat to thee in every way;
+     Money, if money could be got -
+     Goods, cattle, household gear, if not.
+     Thy gathered spoil, borne to the strand,
+     Was the best wealth of English land."
+      Olaf remained here for three years (A.D. 1010-1012).
+      15. THE TENTH BATTLE.
+      The third year King Ethelred died, and his sons Edmund and Edward took the
+      government (A.D. 1012). Then Olaf sailed southwards out to sea, and had a
+      battle at Hringsfjord, and took a castle situated at Holar, where vikings
+      resorted, and burnt the castle. So says Sigvat the skald: -
+     "Of the tenth battle now I tell,
+     Where it was fought, and what befell.
+     Up on the hill in Hringsfjord fair
+     A robber nest hung in the air:
+     The people followed our brave chief,
+     And razed the tower of the viking thief.
+     Such rock and tower, such roosting-place,
+     Was ne'er since held by the roving race."
+      16. ELEVENTH, TWELFTH AND THIRTEENTH BATTLES.
+      Then King Olaf proceeded westwards to Grislupollar, and fought there with
+      vikings at Williamsby; and there also King Olaf gained the victory. So
+      says Sigvat: -
+     "The eleventh battle now I tell,
+     Where it was fought, and what befell.
+     At Grislupol our young fir's name
+     O'ertopped the forest trees in fame:
+     Brave Olaf's name -nought else was heard
+     But Olaf's name, and arm, and sword.
+     Of three great earls, I have heard say,
+     His sword crushed helm and head that day."
+      Next he fought westward on Fetlafjord, as Sigvat tells: -
+     "The twelfth fight was at Fetlafjord,
+     Where Olaf's honour-seeking sword
+     Gave the wild wolf's devouring teeth
+     A feast of warriors doomed to death."
+      From thence King Olaf sailed southwards to Seljupollar, where he had a
+      battle. He took there a castle called Gunvaldsborg, which was very large
+      and old. He also made prisoner the earl who ruled over the castle and who
+      was called Geirfin. After a conference with the men of the castle, he laid
+      a scat upon the town and earl, as ransom, of twelve thousand gold
+      shillings: which was also paid by those on whom it was imposed. So says
+      Sigvat: -
+     "The thirteenth battle now I tell,
+     Where it was fought, and what befell.
+     In Seljupol was fought the fray,
+     And many did not survive the day.
+     The king went early to the shore,
+     To Gunvaldsborg's old castle-tower;
+     And a rich earl was taken there,
+     Whose name was Geridin, I am sure."
+      17. FOURTEENTH BATTLE AND OLAF'S DREAM.
+      Thereafter King Olaf steered with his fleet westward to Karlsar, and
+      tarried there and had a fight. And while King Olaf was lying in Karlsa
+      river waiting a wind, and intending to sail up to Norvasund, and then on
+      to the land of Jerusalem, he dreamt a remarkable dream -that there
+      came to him a great and important man, but of a terrible appearance
+      withal, who spoke to him, and told him to give up his purpose of
+      proceeding to that land. "Return back to thy udal, for thou shalt be king
+      over Norway for ever." He interpreted this dream to mean that he should be
+      king over the country, and his posterity after him for a long time.
+      18. FIFTEENTH BATTLE.
+      After this appearance to him he turned about, and came to Poitou, where he
+      plundered and burnt a merchant town called Varrande. Of this Ottar speaks: -
+     "Our young king, blythe and gay,
+     Is foremost in the fray:
+     Poitou he plunders, Tuskland burns, -
+     He fights and wins where'er he turns."
+      And also Sigvat says: -
+     "The Norsemen's king is on his cruise,
+          His blue steel staining,
+          Rich booty gaining,
+     And all men trembling at the news.
+     The Norsemen's kings up on the Loire:
+          Rich Partheney
+          In ashes lay;
+     Far inland reached the Norsemen's spear."
+      19. OF THE EARLS OF ROUEN.
+      King Olaf had been two summers and one winter in the west in Valland on
+      this cruise; and thirteen years had now passed since the fall of King Olaf
+      Trygvason. During this time earls had ruled over Norway; first Hakon's
+      sons Eirik and Svein, and afterwards Eirik's sons Hakon and Svein. Hakon
+      was a sister's son of King Canute, the son of Svein. During this time
+      there were two earls in Valland, William and Robert; their father was
+      Richard earl of Rouen. They ruled over Normandy. Their sister was Queen
+      Emma, whom the English king Ethelred had married; and their sons were
+      Edmund, Edward the Good, Edwy, and Edgar. Richard the earl of Rouen was a
+      son of Richard the son of William Long Spear, who was the son of Rolf
+      Ganger, the earl who first conquered Normandy; and he again was a son of
+      Ragnvald the Mighty, earl of More, as before related. From Rolf Ganger are
+      descended the earls of Rouen, who have long reckoned themselves of kin to
+      the chiefs in Norway, and hold them in such respect that they always were
+      the greatest friends of the Northmen; and every Northman found a friendly
+      country in Normandy, if he required it. To Normandy King Olaf came in
+      autumn (A.D. 1013), and remained all winter (A.D. 1014) in the river Seine
+      in good peace and quiet.
+      20. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER.
+      After Olaf Trygvason's fall, Earl Eirik gave peace to Einar Tambaskelfer,
+      the son of Eindride Styrkarson; and Einar went north with the earl to
+      Norway. It is said that Einar was the strongest man and the best archer
+      that ever was in Norway. His shooting was sharp beyond all others; for
+      with a blunt arrow he shot through a raw, soft ox-hide, hanging over a
+      beam. He was better than any man at running on snow-shoes, was a great man
+      at all exercises, was of high family, and rich. The earls Eirik and Svein
+      married their sister Bergliot to Einar. Their son was named Eindride. The
+      earls gave Einar great fiefs in Orkadal, so that he was one of the most
+      powerful and able men in the Throndhjem country, and was also a great
+      friend of the earls, and a great support and aid to them.
+      21. OF ERLING SKIALGSON.
+      When Olaf Trygvason ruled over Norway, he gave his brother-in-law Erling
+      half of the land scat, and royal revenues between the Naze and Sogn. His
+      other sister he married to the Earl Ragnvald Ulfson, who long ruled over
+      West Gautland. Ragnvald's father, Ulf, was a brother of Sigrid the
+      Haughty, the mother of Olaf the Swedish king. Earl Eirik was ill pleased
+      that Erling Skialgson had so large a dominion, and he took to himself all
+      the king's estates, which King Olaf had given to Erling. But Erling
+      levied, as before, all the land scat in Rogaland; and thus the inhabitants
+      had often to pay him the land scat, otherwise he laid waste their land.
+      The earl made little of the business, for no bailiff of his could live
+      there, and the earl could only come there in guest-quarters, when he had a
+      great many people with him. So says Sigvat: -
+     "Olaf the king
+     Thought the bonde Erling
+     A man who would grace
+     His own royal race.
+     One sister the king
+     Gave the bonde Erling;
+     And one to an earl,
+     And she saved him in peril."
+      Earl Eirik did not venture to fight with Erling, because he had very
+      powerful and very many friends, and was himself rich and popular, and kept
+      always as many retainers about him as if he held a king's court. Erling
+      was often out in summer on plundering expeditions, and procured for
+      himself means of living; for he continued his usual way of high and
+      splendid living, although now he had fewer and less convenient fiefs than
+      in the time of his brother-in-law King Olaf Trygvason. Erling was one of
+      the handsomest, largest, and strongest men; a better warrior than any
+      other; and in all exercises he was like King Olaf himself. He was,
+      besides, a man of understanding, jealous in everything he undertook, and a
+      deadly man at arms. Sigvat talks thus of him: -
+     "No earl or baron, young or old,
+     Match with this bonde brave can hold.
+     Mild was brave Erling, all men say,
+     When not engaged in bloody fray:
+     His courage he kept hid until
+     The fight began, then foremost still
+     Erling was seen in war's wild game,
+     And famous still is Erling's name."
+      It was a common saying among the people, that Erling had been the most
+      valiant who ever held lands under a king in Norway. Erlings and Astrid s
+      children were these -Aslak, Skialg, Sigurd, Lodin, Thorer, and
+      Ragnhild, who was married to Thorberg Arnason. Erling had always with him
+      ninety free-born men or more, and both winter and summer it was the custom
+      in his house to drink at the mid-day meal according to a measure (1), but
+      at the night meal there was no measure in drinking. When the earl was in
+      the neighbourhood he had 200 (2) men or more. He never went to sea with
+      less than a fully-manned ship of twenty benches of rowers. Erling had also
+      a ship of thirty-two benches of rowers, which was besides, very large for
+      that size, and which he used in viking cruises, or on an expedition; and
+      in it there were 200 men at the very least.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) There were silver-studs in a row from the rim to the
+     bottom of the drinking born or cup; and as it went round each drank
+     till the stud appeared above the liquor.  This was drinking
+     by measure. -L.
+(2) I.e., 240.
+      22. OF THE HERSE ERLING SKIALGSON.
+      Erling had always at home on his farm thirty slaves, besides other
+      serving-people. He gave his slaves a certain day's work; but after it he
+      gave them leisure, and leave that each should work in the twilight and at
+      night for himself, and as he pleased. He gave them arable land to sow corn
+      in, and let them apply their crops to their own use. He laid upon each a
+      certain quantity of labour to work themselves free by doing it; and there
+      were many who bought their freedom in this way in one year, or in the
+      second year, and all who had any luck could make themselves free within
+      three years. With this money he bought other slaves: and to some of his
+      freed people he showed how to work in the herring-fishery, to others he
+      showed some useful handicraft; and some cleared his outfields and set up
+      houses. He helped all to prosperity.
+      23. OF EARL EIRIK.
+      When Earl Eirik had ruled over Norway for twelve years, there came a
+      message to him from his brother-in-law King Canute, the Danish king, that
+      he should go with him on an expedition westward to England; for Eirik was
+      very celebrated for his campaigns, as he had gained the victory in the two
+      hardest engagements which had ever been fought in the north countries. The
+      one was that in which the Earls Hakon and Eirik fought with the Jomsborg
+      vikings; the other that in which Earl Eirik fought with King Olaf
+      Trygvason. Thord Kolbeinson speaks of this: -
+     "A song of praise
+     Again I raise.
+     To the earl bold
+     The word is told,
+     That Knut the Brave
+     His aid would crave;
+     The earl, I knew,
+     To friend stands true."
+      The earl would not sleep upon the message of the king, but sailed
+      immediately out of the country, leaving behind his son Earl Hakon to take
+      care of Norway; and, as he was but seventeen years of age, Einar
+      Tambaskelfer was to be at his hand to rule the country for him.
+      Eirik met King Canute in England, and was with him when he took the castle
+      of London. Earl Eirik had a battle also to the westward of the castle of
+      London, and killed Ulfkel Snilling. So says Thord Kolbeinson: -
+     "West of London town we passed,
+     And our ocean-steeds made fast,
+     And a bloody fight begin,
+     England's lands to lose or win.
+     Blue sword and shining spear
+     Laid Ulfkel's dead corpse there,
+     Our Thingmen hear the war-shower sounding
+     Our grey arrows from their shields rebounding."
+      Earl Eirik was a winter in England, and had many battles there. The
+      following autumn he intended to make a pilgrimage to Rome, but he died in
+      England of a bloody flux.
+      24. THE MURDER OF EDMUND.
+      King Canute came to England the summer that King Ethelred died, and had
+      many battles with Ethelred's sons, in which the victory was sometimes on
+      one side, sometimes on the other. Then King Canute took Queen Emma in
+      marriage; and their children were Harald, Hardacanute, and Gunhild. King
+      Canute then made an agreement with King Edmund, that each of them should
+      have a half of England. In the same month Henry Strion murdered King
+      Edmund. King Canute then drove all Ethelred's sons out of England. So says
+      Sigvat: -
+     "Now all the sons of Ethelred
+     Were either fallen, or had fled:
+     Some slain by Canute, -some they say,
+     To save their lives had run away."
+      25. OLAF AND ETHELRED'S SONS.
+      King Ethelred's sons came to Rouen in Valland from England, to their
+      mother's brother, the same summer that King Olaf Haraldson came from the
+      west from his viking cruise, and they were all during the winter in
+      Normandy together. They made an agreement with each other that King Olaf
+      should have Northumberland, if they could succeed in taking England from
+      the Danes. Therefore about harvest, Olaf sent his foster-father Hrane to
+      England to collect men-at-arms; and Ethelred's sons sent tokens to their
+      friends and relations with him. King Olaf, besides, gave him much money
+      with him to attract people to them. Hrane was all winter in England, and
+      got promises from many powerful men of fidelity, as the people of the
+      country would rather have native kings over them; but the Danish power had
+      become so great in England, that all the people were brought under their
+      dominion.
+      26. BATTLE OF KING OLAF.
+      In spring (A.D. 1014) King Olaf and King Ethelred's sons set out together
+      to the west, and came to a place in England called Jungufurda, where they
+      landed with their army and moved forward against the castle. Many men were
+      there who had promised them their aid. They took the castle; and killed
+      many people. Now when King Canute's men heard of this they assembled an
+      army, and were soon in such force that Ethelred's sons could not stand
+      against it; and they saw no other way left but to return to Rouen. Then
+      King Olaf separated from them, and would not go back to Valland, but
+      sailed northwards along England, all the way to Northumberland, where he
+      put into a haven at a place called Valde; and in a battle there with the
+      townspeople and merchants he gained the victory, and a great booty.
+      27. OLAF'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY.
+      King Olaf left his long-ships there behind, but made ready two ships of
+      burden; and had with him 220 men in them, well-armed, and chosen people.
+      He sailed out to sea northwards in harvest, but encountered a tremendous
+      storm and they were in danger of being lost; but as they had a chosen
+      crew, and the king s luck with them, all went on well. So says Ottar: -
+     "Olaf, great stem of kings, is brave -
+     Bold in the fight, bold on the wave.
+          No thought of fear
+          Thy heart comes near.
+     Undaunted, 'midst the roaring flood,
+     Firm at his post each shipman stood;
+          And thy two ships stout
+          The gale stood out."
+      And further he says: -
+     "Thou able chief!  with thy fearless crew
+     Thou meetest, with skill and courage true,
+          The wild sea's wrath
+          On thy ocean path.
+     Though waves mast-high were breaking round.
+     Thou findest the middle of Norway's ground,
+          With helm in hand
+          On Saela's strand."
+      It is related here that King Olaf came from the sea to the very middle of
+      Norway; and the isle is called Saela where they landed, and is outside of
+      Stad. King Olaf said he thought it must be a lucky day for them, since
+      they had landed at Saela in Norway; and observed it was a good omen that
+      it so happened. As they were going up in the isle, the king slipped with
+      one foot in a place where there was clay, but supported himself with the
+      other foot. Then said he "The king falls." "Nay," replies Hrane, "thou
+      didst not fall, king, but set fast foot in the soil." The king laughed
+      thereat, and said, "It may be so if God will." They went down again
+      thereafter to their ships, and sailed to Ulfasund, where they heard that
+      Earl Hakon was south in Sogn, and was expected north as soon as wind
+      allowed with a single ship.
+      28. HAKON TAKEN PRISONER BY OLAF.
+      King Olaf steered his ships within the ordinary ships' course when he came
+      abreast of Fjaler district, and ran into Saudungssund. There he laid his
+      two vessels one on each side of the sound with a thick cable between them.
+      At the same moment Hakon, Earl Eirik's son, came rowing into the sound
+      with a manned ship; and as they thought these were but two
+      merchant-vessels that were lying in the sound, they rowed between them.
+      Then Olaf and his men draw the cable up right under Hakon's ship's keel
+      and wind it up with the capstan. As soon as the vessel's course was
+      stopped her stern was lifted up, and her bow plunged down; so that the
+      water came in at her fore-end and over both sides, and she upset. King
+      Olaf's people took Earl Hakon and all his men whom they could get hold of
+      out of the water, and made them prisoners; but some they killed with
+      stones and other weapons, and some were drowned. So says Ottar: -
+     "The black ravens wade
+     In the blood from thy blade.
+     Young Hakon so gay,
+     With his ship, is thy prey:
+     His ship, with its gear,
+     Thou hast ta'en; and art here,
+     Thy forefather's land
+     From the earl to demand."
+      Earl Hakon was led up to the king's ship. He was the handsomest man that
+      could be seen. He had long hair, as fine as silk, bound about his bead
+      with a gold ornament.
+      When he sat down in the fore-hold, the king said to him, "It is not false
+      what is said of your family, that ye are handsome people to look at; but
+      now your luck has deserted you."
+      Hakon the earl replied, "It has always been the case that success is
+      changeable; and there is no luck in the matter. It has gone with your
+      family as with mine, to have by turns the better lot. I am little beyond
+      childhood in years; and at any rate we could not have defended ourselves,
+      as we did not expect any attack on the way. It may turn out better with us
+      another time."
+      Then said King Olaf, "Dost thou not apprehend that thou art in that
+      condition that, hereafter, there can be neither victory nor defeat for
+      thee?"
+      The earl replies, "That is what thou only canst determine, king, according
+      to thy pleasure."
+      Olaf says, "What wilt thou give me, earl, if for this time I let thee go,
+      whole and unhurt?"
+      The earl asks what he would take.
+      "Nothing," says the king, "except that thou shalt leave the country, give
+      up thy kingdom, and take an oath that thou shalt never go into battle
+      against me."
+      The earl answered, that he would do so. And now Earl Hakon took the oath
+      that he would never fight against Olaf, or seek to defend Norway against
+      him, or attack him; and King Olaf thereupon gave him and all his men life
+      and peace. The earl got back the ship which had brought him there, and he
+      and his men rowed their way. Thus says Sigvat of him: -
+     "In old Saudungs sound
+     The king Earl Hakon found,
+     Who little thought that there
+     A foeman was so near.
+     The best and fairest youth
+     Earl Hakon was in truth,
+     That speaks the Danish tongue,
+     And of the race of great Hakon."
+      29. HAKON'S DEPARTURE FROM NORWAY.
+      After this (A.D. 1014) the earl made ready as fast as possible to leave
+      the country and sail over to England. He met King Canute, his mother's
+      brother, there, and told him all that had taken place between him and King
+      Olaf. King Canute received him remarkably well, placed him in his court in
+      his own house, and gave him great power in his kingdom. Earl Hakon dwelt a
+      long time with King Canute. During the time Svein and Hakon ruled over
+      Norway, a reconciliation with Erling Skialgson was effected, and secured
+      by Aslak, Erling's son, marrying Gunhild, Earl Svein's daughter; and the
+      father and son, Erling and Aslak, retained all the fiefs which King Olaf
+      Trygvason had given to Erling. Thus Erling became a firm friend of the
+      earl's, and their mutual friendship was confirmed by oath.
+      30. ASTA RECEIVES HER SON OLAF.
+      King Olaf went now eastward along the land, holding Things with the bondes
+      all over the country. Many went willingly with him; but some, who were
+      Earl Svein's friends or relations, spoke against him. Therefore King Olaf
+      sailed in all haste eastward to Viken; went in there with his ships; set
+      them on the land; and proceeded up the country, in order to meet his
+      stepfather, Sigurd Syr. When he came to Vestfold he was received in a
+      friendly way by many who had been his father's friends or acquaintances;
+      and also there and in Folden were many of his family. In autumn (A.D.
+      1014) he proceeded up the country to his stepfather King Sigurd's, and
+      came there one day very early. As Olaf was coming near to the house, some
+      of the servants ran beforehand to the house, and into the room. Olaf's
+      mother, Asta, was sitting in the room, and around her some of her girls.
+      When the servants told her of King Olaf's approach, and that he might soon
+      be expected, Asta stood up directly, and ordered the men and girls to put
+      everything in the best order. She ordered four girls to bring out all that
+      belonged to the decoration of the room and put it in order with hangings
+      and benches. Two fellows brought straw for the floor, two brought forward
+      four-cornered tables and the drinking-jugs, two bore out victuals and
+      placed the meat on the table, two she sent away from the house to procure
+      in the greatest haste all that was needed, and two carried in the ale; and
+      all the other serving men and girls went outside of the house. Messengers
+      went to seek King Sigurd wherever he might be, and brought to him his
+      dress-clothes, and his horse with gilt saddle, and his bridle, which was
+      gilt and set with precious stones. Four men she sent off to the four
+      quarters of the country to invite all the great people to a feast, which
+      she prepared as a rejoicing for her son's return. All who were before in
+      the house she made to dress themselves with the best they had, and lent
+      clothes to those who had none suitable.
+      31. KING SIGURD'S DRESS.
+      King Sigurd Syr was standing in his corn-field when the messengers came to
+      him and brought him the news, and also told him all that Asta was doing at
+      home in the house. He had many people on his farm. Some were then shearing
+      corn, some bound it together, some drove it to the building, some unloaded
+      it and put it in stack or barn; but the king, and two men with him, went
+      sometimes into the field, sometimes to the place where the corn was put
+      into the barn. His dress, it is told, was this: -he had a blue kirtle
+      and blue breeches; shoes which were laced about the legs; a grey cloak,
+      and a grey wide-brimmed hat; a veil before his face; a staff in his hand
+      with a gilt-silver head on it and a silver ring around it. Of Sigurd's
+      living and disposition it is related that he was a very gain-making man
+      who attended carefully to his cattle and husbandry, and managed his
+      housekeeping himself. He was nowise given to pomp, and was rather
+      taciturn. But he was a man of the best understanding in Norway, and also
+      excessively wealthy in movable property. Peaceful he was, and nowise
+      haughty. His wife Asta was generous and high-minded. Their children were,
+      Guthorm, the eldest; then Gunhild; the next Halfdan, Ingerid, and Harald.
+      The messengers said to Sigurd, "Asta told us to bring thee word how much
+      it lay at her heart that thou shouldst on this occasion comport thyself in
+      the fashion of great men, and show a disposition more akin to Harald
+      Harfager's race than to thy mother's father's, Hrane Thin-nose, or Earl
+      Nereid the Old, although they too were very wise men." The king replies,
+      "The news ye bring me is weighty, and ye bring it forward in great heat.
+      Already before now Asta has been taken up much with people who were not so
+      near to her; and I see she is still of the same disposition. She takes
+      this up with great warmth; but can she lead her son out of the business
+      with the same splendour she is leading him into it? If it is to proceed so
+      methinks they who mix themselves up in it regard little property or life.
+      For this man, King Olaf, goes against a great superiority of power; and
+      the wrath of the Danish and Swedish kings lies at the foot of his
+      determination, if he ventures to go against them."
+      32. OF THE FEAST.
+      When the king had said this he sat down, and made them take off his shoes,
+      and put corduvan boots on, to which he bound his gold spurs. Then he put
+      off his cloak and coat, and dressed himself in his finest clothes, with a
+      scarlet cloak over all; girded on his sword, set a gilded helmet upon his
+      head, and mounted his horse. He sent his labouring people out to the
+      neighbourhood, and gathered to him thirty well-clothed men, and rode home
+      with them. As they rode up to the house, and were near the room, they saw
+      on the other side of the house the banners of Olaf coming waving; and
+      there was he himself, with about 100 men all well equipped. People were
+      gathered over all upon the house-tops. King Sigurd immediately saluted his
+      stepson from horseback in a friendly way, and invited him and his men to
+      come in and drink a cup with him. Asta, on the contrary, went up and
+      kissed her son, and invited him to stay with her; and land, and people,
+      and all the good she could do for him stood at his service. King Olaf
+      thanked her kindly for her invitation. Then she took him by the hand, and
+      led him into the room to the high-seat. King Sigurd got men to take charge
+      of their clothes, and give their horses corn; and then he himself went to
+      his high-seat, and the feast was made with the greatest splendour.
+      33. CONVERSATION OF OLAF AND SIGURD.
+      King Olaf had not been long here before he one day called his stepfather
+      King Sigurd, his mother Asta, and his foster-father Hrane to a conference
+      and consultation. Olaf began thus: "It has so happened," said he, "as is
+      well known to you, that I have returned to this country after a very long
+      sojourn in foreign parts, during all which time I and my men have had
+      nothing for our support but what we captured in war, for which we have
+      often hazarded both life and soul: for many an innocent man have we
+      deprived of his property, and some of their lives; and foreigners are now
+      sitting in the possessions which my father, his father, and their
+      forefathers for a long series of generations owned, and to which I have
+      udal right. They have not been content with this, but have taken to
+      themselves also the properties of all our relations who are descended from
+      Harald Harfager. To some they have left little, to others nothing at all.
+      Now I will disclose to you what I have long concealed in my own mind, that
+      I intend to take the heritage of my forefathers; but I will not wait upon
+      the Danish or Swedish king to supplicate the least thing from them,
+      although they for the time call that their property which was Harald
+      Harfager's heritage. To say the truth, I intend rather to seek my
+      patrimony with battle-axe and sword, and that with the help of all my
+      friends and relations, and of those who in this business will take my
+      side. And in this matter I will so lay hand to the work that one of two
+      things shall happen, -either I shall lay all this kingdom under my
+      rule which they got into their hands by the slaughter of my kinsman Olaf
+      Trygvason, or I shall fall here upon my inheritance in the land of my
+      fathers. Now I expect of thee, Sigurd, my stepfather, as well as other men
+      here in the country who have udal right of succession to the kingdom,
+      according to the law made by King Harald Harfager, that nothing shall be
+      of such importance to you as to prevent you from throwing off the disgrace
+      from our family of being slow at supporting the man who comes forward to
+      raise up again our race. But whether ye show any manhood in this affair or
+      not, I know the inclination of the people well, -that all want to be
+      free from the slavery of foreign masters, and will give aid and strength
+      to the attempt. I have not proposed this matter to any before thee,
+      because I know thou art a man of understanding, and can best judge how
+      this my purpose shall be brought forward in the beginning, and whether we
+      shall, in all quietness, talk about it to a few persons, or instantly
+      declare it to the people at large. I have already shown my teeth by taking
+      prisoner the Earl Hakon, who has now left the country, and given me, under
+      oath, the part of the kingdom which he had before; and I think it will be
+      easier to have Earl Svein alone to deal with, than if both were defending
+      the country against us."
+      King Sigurd answers, "It is no small affair, King Olaf, thou hast in thy
+      mind; and thy purpose comes more, methinks, from hasty pride than from
+      prudence. But it may be there is a wide difference between my humble ways
+      and the high thoughts thou hast; for whilst yet in thy childhood thou wast
+      full always of ambition and desire of command, and now thou art
+      experienced in battles, and hast formed thyself upon the manner of foreign
+      chiefs. I know therefore well, that as thou hast taken this into thy head,
+      it is useless to dissuade thee from it; and also it is not to be denied
+      that it goes to the heart of all who have courage in them, that the whole
+      Harfager race and kingdom should go to the ground. But I will not bind
+      myself by any promise, before I know the views and intentions of other
+      Upland kings; but thou hast done well in letting me know thy purpose,
+      before declaring it publicly to the people. I will promise thee, however,
+      my interest with the kings, and other chiefs, and country people; and
+      also, King Olaf, all my property stands to thy aid, and to strengthen
+      thee. But we will only produce the matter to the community so soon as we
+      see some progress, and expect some strength to this undertaking; for thou
+      canst easily perceive that it is a daring measure to enter into strife
+      with Olaf the Swedish king, and Canute, who is king both of Denmark and
+      England; and thou requirest great support under thee, if it is to succeed.
+      It is not unlikely, in my opinion, that thou wilt get good support from
+      the people, as the commonalty always loves what is new; and it went so
+      before, when Olaf Trygvason came here to the country, that all rejoiced at
+      it, although he did not long enjoy the kingdom."
+      When the consultation had proceeded so far, Asta took up the word. "For my
+      part, my son, I am rejoiced at thy arrival, but much more at thy advancing
+      thy honour. I will spare nothing for that purpose that stands in my power,
+      although it be but little help that can be expected from me. But if a
+      choice could be made, I would rather that thou shouldst be the supreme
+      king of Norway, even if thou shouldst not sit longer in thy kingdom than
+      Olaf Trygvason did, than that thou shouldst not be a greater king than
+      Sigurd Syr is, and die the death of old age." With this the conference
+      closed. King Olaf remained here a while with all his men. King Sigurd
+      entertained them, day about, the one day with fish and milk, the other day
+      with flesh-meat and ale.
+      34. KINGS IN THE UPLAND DISTRICTS.
+      At that time there were many kings in the Uplands who had districts to
+      rule over, and the most of them were descended from Harald Harfager. In
+      Hedemark two brothers ruled -Hrorek and Ring; in Gudbrandsdal,
+      Gudrod; and there was also a king in Raumarike; and one had Hadaland and
+      Thoten; and in Valders also there was a king. With these district-kings
+      Sigurd had a meeting up in Hadaland, and Olaf Haraldson also met with
+      them. To these district-kings whom Sigurd had assembled he set forth his
+      stepson Olaf's purpose, and asked their aid, both of men and in counsel
+      and consent; and represented to them how necessary it was to cast off the
+      yoke which the Danes and Swedes had laid upon them. He said that there was
+      now a man before them who could head such an enterprise; and he recounted
+      the many brave actions which Olaf had achieved upon his war-expeditions.
+      Then King Hrorek says, "True it is that Harald Harfager's kingdom has gone
+      to decay, none of his race being supreme king over Norway. But the people
+      here in the country have experienced many things. When King Hakon,
+      Athelstan's foster-son, was king, all were content; but when Gunhild's
+      sons ruled over the country, all were so weary of their tyranny and
+      injustice that they would rather have foreign men as kings, and be
+      themselves more their own rulers; for the foreign kings were usually
+      abroad and cared little about the customs of the people if the scat they
+      laid on the country was paid. When enmity arose between the Danish king
+      Harald and Earl Hakon, the Jomsborg vikings made an expedition against
+      Norway; then the whole people arose, and threw the hostilities from
+      themselves; and thereafter the people encouraged Earl Hakon to keep the
+      country, and defend it with sword and spear against the Danish king. But
+      when he had set himself fast in the kingdom with the help of the people,
+      he became so hard and overbearing towards the country-folks, that they
+      would no longer suffer him. The Throndhjem people killed him, and raised
+      to the kingly power Olaf Trygvason, who was of the udal succession to the
+      kingdom, and in all respects well fitted to be a chief. The whole
+      country's desire was to make him supreme king, and raise again the kingdom
+      which Harald Harfager had made for himself. But when King Olaf thought
+      himself quite firmly seated in his kingdom, no man could rule his own
+      concerns for him. With us small kings he was so unreasonable, as to take
+      to himself not only all the scat and duties which Harald Harfager had
+      levied from us, but a great deal more. The people at last had so little
+      freedom under him, that it was not allowed to every man to believe in what
+      god he pleased. Now since he has been taken away we have kept friendly
+      with the Danish king; have received great help from him when we have had
+      any occasion for it; and have been allowed to rule ourselves, and live in
+      peace and quiet in the inland country, and without any overburden. I am
+      therefore content that things be as they are, for I do not see what better
+      rights I am to enjoy by one of my relations ruling over the country; and
+      if I am to be no better off, I will take no part in the affair."
+      Then said King Ring, his brother, "I will also declare my opinion that it
+      is better for me, if I hold the same power and property as now, that my
+      relative is king over Norway, rather than a foreign chief, so that our
+      family may again raise its head in the land. It is, besides, my opinion
+      about this man Olaf, that his fate and luck must determine whether he is
+      to obtain the kingdom or not; and if he succeed in making himself supreme
+      king, then he will be the best off who has best deserved his friendship.
+      At present he has in no respect greater power than any of us; nay, indeed,
+      he has less; as we have lands and kingdoms to rule over, and he has
+      nothing, and we are equally entitled by the udal right to the kingdom as
+      he is himself. Now, if we will be his men, give him our aid, allow him to
+      take the highest dignity in the country, and stand by him with our
+      strength, how should he not reward us well, and hold it in remembrance to
+      our great advantage, if he be the honourable man I believe him to be, and
+      all say he is? Therefore let us join the adventure, say I, and bind
+      ourselves in friendship with him."
+      Then the others, one after the other, stood up and spoke; and the
+      conclusion was, that the most of them determined to enter into a league
+      with King Olaf. He promised them his perfect friendship, and that he would
+      hold by and improve the country's laws and rights, if he became supreme
+      king of Norway. This league was confirmed by oath.
+      35. OLAF GETS THE TITLE OF KING FROM THE THING.
+      Thereafter the kings summoned a Thing, and there King Olaf set forth this
+      determination to all the people, and his demand on the kingly power. He
+      desires that the bondes should receive him as king; and promises, on the
+      other hand, to allow them to retain their ancient laws, and to defend the
+      land from foreign masters and chiefs. On this point he spoke well, and
+      long; and he got great praise for his speech. Then the kings rose and
+      spoke, the one after the other, and supported his cause, and this message
+      to the people. At last it came to this, that King Olaf was proclaimed king
+      over the whole country, and the kingdom adjudged to him according to law
+      in the Uplands (A.D. 1014).
+      36. KING OLAF TRAVELS IN THE UPLANDS.
+      King Olaf began immediately his progress through the country, appointing
+      feasts before him wherever there were royal farms. First he travelled
+      round in Hadaland, and then he proceeded north to Gudbrandsdal. And now it
+      went as King Sigurd Syr had foretold, that people streamed to him from all
+      quarters; and he did not appear to have need for half of them, for he had
+      nearly 300 men. But the entertainments bespoken did not half serve; for it
+      had been the custom that kings went about in guest-quarters in the Uplands
+      with 60 or 70 men only, and never with more than 100 men. The king
+      therefore hastened over the country, only stopping one night at the same
+      place. When he came north to Dovrefield, he arranged his journey so that
+      he came over the mountain and down upon the north side of it, and then
+      came to Opdal, where he remained all night. Afterwards he proceeded
+      through Opdal forest, and came out at Medaldal, where he proclaimed a
+      Thing, and summoned the bondes to meet him at it. The king made a speech
+      to the Thing, and asked the bondes to accept him as king; and promised, on
+      his part, the laws and rights which King Olaf Trygvason had offered them.
+      The bondes had no strength to make opposition to the king; so the result
+      was that they received him as king, and confirmed it by oath: but they
+      sent word to Orkadal and Skaun of all that they knew concerning Olaf's
+      proceedings.
+      37. LEVY AGAINST OLAF IN THRONDHJEM.
+      Einar Tambaskelfer had a farm and house at Husaby in Skaun; and now when
+      he got news of Olaf's proceedings, he immediately split up a war-arrow,
+      and sent it out as a token to the four quarters -north, south, east,
+      west, -to call together all free and unfree men in full equipment of
+      war: therewith the message, that they were to defend the land against King
+      Olaf. The message-stick went to Orkadal, and thence to Gaulardal, where
+      the whole war-force was to assemble.
+      38. OLAF'S PROGRESS IN THRONDHJEM.
+      King Olaf proceeded with his men down into Orkadal, and advanced in peace
+      and with all gentleness; but when he came to Griotar he met the assembled
+      bondes, amounting to more than 700 men. Then the king arrayed his army,
+      for he thought the bondes were to give battle. When the bondes saw this,
+      they also began to put their men in order; but it went on very slowly, for
+      they had not agreed beforehand who among them should be commander. Now
+      when King Olaf saw there was confusion among the bondes, he sent to them
+      Thorer Gudbrandson; and when he came he told them King Olaf did not want
+      to fight them, but named twelve of the ablest men in their flock of
+      people, who were desired to come to King Olaf. The bondes agreed to this;
+      and the twelve men went over a rising ground which is there, and came to
+      the place where the king's army stood in array. The king said to them, "Ye
+      bondes have done well to give me an opportunity to speak with you, for now
+      I will explain to you my errand here to the Throndhjem country. First I
+      must tell you, what ye already must have heard, that Earl Hakon and I met
+      in summer; and the issue of our meeting was, that he gave me the whole
+      kingdom he possessed in the Throndhjem country, which, as ye know,
+      consists of Orkadal, Gaulardal, Strind, and Eyna district. As a proof of
+      this, I have here with me the very men who were present, and saw the
+      earl's and my own hands given upon it, and heard the word and oath, and
+      witnessed the agreement the earl made with me. Now I offer you peace and
+      law, the same as King Olaf Trygvason offered before me."
+      The king spoke well, and long; and ended by proposing to the bondes two
+      conditions -either to go into his service and be subject to him, or
+      to fight him. Thereupon the twelve bondes went back to their people, and
+      told the issue of their errand, and considered with the people what they
+      should resolve upon. Although they discussed the matter backwards and
+      forwards for a while, they preferred at last to submit to the king; and it
+      was confirmed by the oath of the bondes. The king now proceeded on his
+      journey, and the bondes made feasts for him. The king then proceeded to
+      the sea-coast, and got ships; and among others he got a long-ship of
+      twenty benches of rowers from Gunnar of Gelmin; another ship of twenty
+      benches he got from Loden of Viggia; and three ships of twenty benches
+      from the farm of Angrar on the ness which farm Earl Hakon had possessed,
+      but a steward managed it for him, by name Bard White. The king had,
+      besides, four or five boats; and with these vessels he went in all haste
+      into the fjord of Throndhjem.
+      39. OF EARL SVEIN'S PROCEEDINGS.
+      Earl Svein was at that time far up in the Throndhjem fjord at Steinker,
+      which at that time was a merchant town, and was there preparing for the
+      yule festival (A.D. 1015). When Einar Tambaskelfer heard that the Orkadal
+      people had submitted to King Olaf, he sent men to Earl Svein to bring him
+      the tidings. They went first to Nidaros, and took a rowing-boat which
+      belonged to Einar, with which they went out into the fjord, and came one
+      day late in the evening to Steinker, where they brought to the earl the
+      news about all King Olaf's proceedings. The earl owned a long-ship, which
+      was lying afloat and rigged just outside the town: and immediately, in the
+      evening, he ordered all his movable goods, his people's clothes, and also
+      meat and drink, as much as the vessel could carry, to be put on board,
+      rowed immediately out in the night-time, and came with daybreak to
+      Skarnsund. There he saw King Olaf rowing in with his fleet into the fjord.
+      The earl turned towards the land within Masarvik, where there was a thick
+      wood, and lay so near the rocks that the leaves and branches hung over the
+      vessel. They cut down some large trees, which they laid over the quarter
+      on the sea-side, so that the ship could not be seen for leaves, especially
+      as it was scarcely clear daylight when the king came rowing past them. The
+      weather was calm, and the king rowed in among the islands; and when the
+      king's fleet was out of sight the earl rowed out of the fjord, and on to
+      Frosta, where his kingdom lay, and there he landed.
+      40. EARL SVEIN'S AND EINAR'S CONSULTATIONS.
+      Earl Svein sent men out to Gaulardal to his brother-in-law, Einar
+      Tambaskelfer; and when Einar came the earl told him how it had been with
+      him and King Olaf, and that now he would assemble men to go out against
+      King Olaf, and fight him.
+      Einar answers, "We should go to work cautiously, and find out what King
+      Olaf intends doing; and not let him hear anything concerning us but that
+      we are quiet. It may happen that if he hears nothing about our assembling
+      people, he may sit quietly where he is in Steinker all the Yule; for there
+      is plenty prepared for him for the Yule feast: but if he hears we are
+      assembling men, he will set right out of the fjord with his vessels, and
+      we shall not get hold of him." Einar's advice was taken; and the earl went
+      to Stjoradal, into guest-quarters among the bondes.
+      When King Olaf came to Steinker he collected all the meat prepared for the
+      Yule feast, and made it be put on board, procured some transport vessels,
+      took meat and drink with him, and got ready to sail as fast as possible,
+      and went out all the way to Nidaros. Here King Olaf Trygvason had laid the
+      foundation of a merchant town, and had built a king's house: but before
+      that Nidaros was only a single house, as before related. When Earl Eirik
+      came to the country, he applied all his attention to his house of Lade,
+      where his father had had his main residence, and he neglected the houses
+      which Olaf had erected at the Nid; so that some were fallen down, and
+      those which stood were scarcely habitable. King Olaf went now with his
+      ships up the Nid, made all the houses to be put in order directly that
+      were still standing, and built anew those that had fallen down, and
+      employed in this work a great many people. Then he had all the meat and
+      drink brought on shore to the houses, and prepared to hold Yule there; so
+      Earl Svein and Einar had to fall upon some other plan.
+      41. OF SIGVAT THE SKALD.
+      There was an Iceland man called Thord Sigvaldaskald, who had been long
+      with Earl Sigvalde, and afterwards with the earl's brother, Thorkel the
+      Tall; but after the earl's death Thord had become a merchant. He met King
+      Olaf on his viking cruise in the west, and entered into his service, and
+      followed him afterwards. He was with the king when the incidents above
+      related took place. Thord had a son called Sigvat fostered in the house of
+      Thorkel at Apavatn, in Iceland. When he was nearly a grown man he went out
+      of the country with some merchants; and the ship came in autumn to the
+      Throndhjem country, and the crew lodged in the hered (district). The same
+      winter King Olaf came to Throndhjem, as just now related by us. Now when
+      Sigvat heard that his father Thord was with the king, he went to him, and
+      stayed a while with him. Sigvat was a good skald at an early age. He made
+      a lay in honour of King Olaf, and asked the king to listen to it. The king
+      said he did not want poems composed about him, and said he did not
+      understand the skald's craft. Then Sigvat sang: -
+     "Rider of dark-blue ocean's steeds!
+     Allow one skald to sing thy deeds;
+     And listen to the song of one
+     Who can sing well, if any can.
+     For should the king despise all others,
+     And show no favour to my brothers,
+     Yet I may all men's favour claim,
+     Who sing, still of our great king's fame."
+      King Olaf gave Sigvat as a reward for his verse a gold ring that weighed
+      half a mark, and Sigvat was made one of King Olaf's court-men. Then Sigvat
+      sang: -
+     "I willingly receive this sword -
+     By land or sea, on shore, on board,
+     I trust that I shall ever be
+     Worthy the sword received from thee.
+     A faithful follower thou hast bound -
+     A generous master I have found;
+     Master and servant both have made
+     Just what best suits them by this trade."
+      Earl Svein had, according to custom, taken one half of the harbour-dues
+      from the Iceland ship-traders about autumn (A.D. 1014); for the Earls
+      Eirik and Hakon had always taken one half of these and all other revenues
+      in the Throndhjem country. Now when King Olaf came there, he sent his men
+      to demand that half of the tax from the Iceland traders; and they went up
+      to the king's house and asked Sigvat to help them. He went to the king,
+      and sang: -
+     "My prayer, I trust, will not be vain -
+     No gold by it have I to gain:
+     All that the king himself here wins
+     Is not red gold, but a few skins.
+     it is not right that these poor men
+     Their harbour-dues should pay again.
+     That they paid once I know is true;
+     Remit, great king, what scarce is due."
+      42. OF EARL SVEIN.
+      Earl Svein and Einar Tambaskelfer gathered a large armed force, with which
+      they came by the upper road into Gaulardal, and so down to Nidaros, with
+      nearly 2000 men. King Olaf's men were out upon the Gaular ridge, and had a
+      guard on horseback. They became aware that a force was coming down the
+      Gaulardal, and they brought word of it to the king about midnight. The
+      king got up immediately, ordered the people to be wakened, and they went
+      on board of the ships, bearing all their clothes and arms on board, and
+      all that they could take with them, and then rowed out of the river. Then
+      came the earl's men to the town at the same moment, took all the Christmas
+      provision, and set fire to the houses. King Olaf went out of the fjord
+      down to Orkadal, and there landed the men from their ships. From Orkadal
+      they went up to the mountains, and over the mountains eastwards into
+      Gudbrandsdal. In the lines composed about Kleng Brusason, it is said that
+      Earl Eirik burned the town of Nidaros: -
+     "The king's half-finished hall,
+     Rafters, root, and all,
+     Is burned down by the river's side;
+     The flame spreads o'er the city wide."
+      43. OF KING OLAF.
+      King Olaf went southwards through Gudbrandsdal, and thence out to
+      Hedemark. In the depth of winter (A.D. 1015) he went about in
+      guest-quarters; but when spring returned he collected men, and went to
+      Viken. He had with him many people from Hedemark, whom the kings had given
+      him; and also many powerful people from among the bondes joined him, among
+      whom Ketil Kalf from Ringanes. He had also people from Raumarike. His
+      stepfather, Sigurd Syr, gave him the help also of a great body of men.
+      They went down from thence to the coast, and made ready to put to sea from
+      Viken. The fleet, which was manned with many fine fellows, went out then
+      to Tunsberg.
+      44. OF EARL SVEIN'S FORCES.
+      After Yule (A.D. 1015) Earl Svein gathers all the men of the Throndhjem
+      country, proclaims a levy for an expedition, and fits out ships. At that
+      time there were in the Throndhjem country a great number of lendermen; and
+      many of them were so powerful and well-born, that they descended from
+      earls, or even from the royal race, which in a short course of generations
+      reckoned to Harald Harfager, and they were also very rich. These lendermen
+      were of great help to the kings or earls who ruled the land; for it was as
+      if the lenderman had the bonde-people of each district in his power. Earl
+      Svein being a good friend of the lendermen, it was easy for him to collect
+      people. His brother-in-law, Einar Tambaskelfer, was on his side, and with
+      him many other lendermen; and among them many, both lendermen and bondes,
+      who the winter before had taken the oath of fidelity to King Olaf. When
+      they were ready for sea they went directly out of the fjord, steering
+      south along the land, and drawing men from every district. When they came
+      farther south, abreast of Rogaland, Erling Skialgson came to meet them,
+      with many people and many lendermen with him. Now they steered eastward
+      with their whole fleet to Viken, and Earl Svein ran in there towards the
+      end of Easter. The earl steered his fleet to Grenmar, and ran into Nesjar
+      (A.D. 1015).
+      45. KING OLAF S FORCES.
+      King Olaf steered his fleet out from Viken, until the two fleets were not
+      far from each other, and they got news of each other the Saturday before
+      Palm Sunday. King Olaf himself had a ship called the Carl's Head, on the
+      bow of which a king's head was carved out, and he himself had carved it.
+      This head was used long after in Norway on ships which kings steered
+      themselves.
+      46. KING OLAF'S SPEECH.
+      As soon as day dawned on Sunday morning, King Olaf got up, put on his
+      clothes, went to the land, and ordered to sound the signal for the whole
+      army to come on shore. Then he made a speech to the troops, and told the
+      whole assembly that he had heard there was but a short distance between
+      them and Earl Svein. "Now," said he, "we shall make ready; for it can be
+      but a short time until we meet. Let the people arm, and every man be at
+      the post that has been appointed him, so that all may be ready when I
+      order the signal to sound for casting off from the land. Then let us row
+      off at once; and so that none go on before the rest of the ships, and none
+      lag behind when I row out of the harbour: for we cannot tell if we shall
+      find the earl where he was lying, or if he has come out to meet us. When
+      we do meet, and the battle begins, let people be alert to bring all our
+      ships in close order, and ready to bind them together. Let us spare
+      ourselves in the beginning, and take care of our weapons, that we do not
+      cast them into the sea, or shoot them away in the air to no purpose. But
+      when the fight becomes hot and the ships are bound together, then let each
+      man show what is in him of manly spirit."
+      47. OF THE BATTLE AT NESJAR.
+      King Olaf had in his ship 100 men armed in coats of ring-mail, and in
+      foreign helmets. The most of his men had white shields, on which the holy
+      cross was gilt; but some had painted it in blue or red. He had also had
+      the cross painted in front on all the helmets, in a pale colour. He had a
+      white banner on which was a serpent figured. He ordered a mass to be read
+      before him, went on board ship, and ordered his people to refresh
+      themselves with meat and drink. He then ordered the war-horns to sound to
+      battle, to leave the harbour, and row off to seek the earl. Now when they
+      came to the harbour where the earl had lain, the earl's men were armed,
+      and beginning to row out of the harbour; but when they saw the king's
+      fleet coming they began to bind the ships together, to set up their
+      banners, and to make ready for the fight. When King Olaf saw this he
+      hastened the rowing, laid his ship alongside the earl's, and the battle
+      began. So says Sigvat the skald: -
+     "Boldly the king did then pursue
+     Earl Svein, nor let him out of view.
+     The blood ran down the reindeer's flank
+     Of each sea-king -his vessel's plank.
+     Nor did the earl's stout warriors spare
+     In battle-brunt the sword and spear.
+     Earl Svein his ships of war pushed on,
+     And lashed their stout stems one to one."
+      It is said that King Olaf brought his ships into battle while Svein was
+      still lying in the harbour. Sigvat the skald was himself in the fight; and
+      in summer, just after the battle, he composed a lay, which is called the
+      "Nesjar Song", in which he tells particularly the circumstances: -
+     "In the fierce fight 'tis known how near
+     The scorner of the ice-cold spear
+     Laid the Charles' head the earl on board,
+     All eastward of the Agder fjord."
+      Then was the conflict exceedingly sharp, and it was long before it could
+      be seen how it was to go in the end. Many fell on both sides, and many
+      were the wounded. So says Sigvat: -
+     "No urging did the earl require,
+     Midst spear and sword -the battle's fire;
+     No urging did the brave king need
+     The ravens in this shield-storm to feed.
+     Of limb-lopping enough was there,
+     And ghastly wounds of sword and spear.
+     Never, I think, was rougher play
+     Than both the armies had that day."
+      The earl had most men, but the king had a chosen crew in his ship, who had
+      followed him in all his wars; and, besides, they were so excellently
+      equipped, as before related, that each man had a coat of ring-mail, so
+      that he could not be wounded. So says Sigvat: -
+     "Our lads, broad-shouldered, tall, and hale,
+     Drew on their cold shirts of ring-mail.
+     Soon sword on sword was shrilly ringing,
+     And in the air the spears were singing.
+     Under our helms we hid our hair,
+     For thick flew arrows through the air.
+     Right glad was I our gallant crew,
+     Steel-clad from head to foot, to view."
+      48. EARL SVEIN'S FLIGHT.
+      When the men began to fall on board the earl's ships, and many appeared
+      wounded, so that the sides of the vessels were but thinly beset with men,
+      the crew of King Olaf prepared to board. Their banner was brought up to
+      the ship that was nearest the earl's, and the king himself followed the
+      banner. So says Sigvat: -
+     "'On with the king!' his banners waving:
+     'On with the king!' the spears he's braving!
+     'On, steel-clad men! and storm the deck,
+     Slippery with blood and strewed with wreck.
+     A different work ye have to share,
+     His banner in war-storm to bear,
+     From your fair girl's, who round the hall
+     Brings the full mead-bowl to us all.'"
+      Now was the severest fighting. Many of Svein's men fell, and some sprang
+      overboard. So says Sigvat: -
+     "Into the ship our brave lads spring, -
+     On shield and helm their red blades ring;
+     The air resounds with stroke on stroke, -
+     The shields are cleft, the helms are broke.
+     The wounded bonde o'er the side
+     Falls shrieking in the blood-stained tide -
+     The deck is cleared with wild uproar -
+     The dead crew float about the shore."
+      And also these lines: -
+     "The shields we brought from home were white,
+     Now they are red-stained in the fight:
+     This work was fit for those who wore
+     Ringed coats-of-mail their breasts before.
+     Where for the foe blunted the best sword
+     I saw our young king climb on board.
+     He stormed the first; we followed him -
+     The war-birds now in blood may swim."
+      Now defeat began to come down upon the earl's men. The king's men pressed
+      upon the earl's ship and entered it; but when the earl saw how it was
+      going, he called out to his forecastle-men to cut the cables and cast the
+      ship loose, which they did. Then the king's men threw grapplings over the
+      timber heads of the ship, and so held her fast to their own; but the earl
+      ordered the timber heads to be cut away, which was done. So says Sigvat: -
+     "The earl, his noble ship to save,
+     To cut the posts loud order gave.
+     The ship escaped: our greedy eyes
+     Had looked on her as a clear prize.
+     The earl escaped; but ere he fled
+     We feasted Odin's fowls with dead: -
+     With many a goodly corpse that floated
+     Round our ship's stern his birds were bloated."
+      Einar Tambaskelfer had laid his ship right alongside the earl's. They
+      threw an anchor over the bows of the earl's ship, and thus towed her away,
+      and they slipped out of the fjord together. Thereafter the whole of the
+      earl's fleet took to flight, and rowed out of the fjord. The skald Berse
+      Torfason was on the forecastle of the earl's ship; and as it was gliding
+      past the king's fleet, King Olaf called out to him -for he knew
+      Berse, who was distinguished as a remarkably handsome man, always well
+      equipped in clothes and arms -"Farewell, Berse!" He replied,
+      "Farewell, king!" So says Berse himself, in a poem he composed when he
+      fell into King Olaf's power, and was laid in prison and in fetters on
+      board a ship: -
+     "Olaf the Brave
+     A 'farewell' gave,
+     (No time was there to parley long,)
+     To me who knows the art of song.
+          The skald was fain
+          'Farewell' again
+     In the same terms back to send -
+     The rule in arms to foe or friend.
+          Earl Svein's distress
+          I well can guess,
+     When flight he was compelled to take:
+     His fortunes I will ne'er forsake,
+          Though I lie here
+     In chains a year,
+     In thy great vessel all forlorn,
+     To crouch to thee I still will scorn:
+          I still will say,
+          No milder sway
+     Than from thy foe this land e'er knew:
+     To him, my early friend, I'm true."
+      49. EARL SVEIN LEAVES THE COUNTRY.
+      Now some of the earl's men fled up the country, some surrendered at
+      discretion; but Svein and his followers rowed out of the fjord, and the
+      chiefs laid their vessels together to talk with each other, for the earl
+      wanted counsel from his lendermen. Erling Skialgson advised that they
+      should sail north, collect people, and fight King Olaf again; but as they
+      had lost many people, the most were of opinion that the earl should leave
+      the country, and repair to his brother-in-law the Swedish King, and
+      strengthen himself there with men. Einar Tambaskelfer approved also of
+      that advice, as they had no power to hold battle against Olaf. So they
+      discharged their fleet. The earl sailed across Folden, and with him Einar
+      Tambaskelfer. Erling Skialgson again, and likewise many other lendermen
+      who would not abandon their udal possessions, went north to their homes;
+      and Erling had many people that summer about him.
+      50. OLAF'S AND SIGURD'S CONSULTATION.
+      When King Olaf and his men saw that the earl had gathered his ships
+      together, Sigurd Syr was in haste for pursuing the earl, and letting steel
+      decide their cause. But King Olaf replies, that he would first see what
+      the earl intended doing -whether he would keep his force together or
+      discharge his fleet. Sigurd Syr said, "It is for thee, king, to command;
+      but," he adds, "I fear, from thy disposition and wilfulness, that thou
+      wilt some day be betrayed by trusting to those great people, for they are
+      accustomed of old to bid defiance to their sovereigns." There was no
+      attack made, for it was soon seen that the earl's fleet was dispersing.
+      Then King Olaf ransacked the slain, and remained there some days to divide
+      the booty. At that time Sigvat made these verses: -
+     "The tale I tell is true
+     To their homes returned but few
+     Of Svein's men who came to meet
+     King Olaf's gallant fleet.
+     From the North these warmen came
+     To try the bloody game, -
+     On the waves their corpses borne
+     Show the game that Sunday morn.
+     The Throndhjem girls so fair
+     Their jeers, I think, will spare,
+     For the king's force was but small
+     That emptied Throndhjem's hall.
+     But if they will have their jeer,
+     They may ask their sweethearts dear,
+     Why they have returned shorn
+     Who went to shear that Sunday morn."
+      And also these: -
+     "Now will the king's power rise,
+     For the Upland men still prize
+     The king who o'er the sea
+     Steers to bloody victory.
+     Earl Svein!  thou now wilt know
+     That our lads can make blood flow -
+     That the Hedemarkers hale
+     Can do more than tap good ale."
+      King Olaf gave his stepfather King Sigurd Syr, and the other chiefs who
+      had assisted him, handsome presents at parting. He gave Ketil of Ringanes
+      a yacht of fifteen benches of rowers, which Ketil brought up the Raum
+      river and into the Mjosen lake.
+      51. OF KING OLAF.
+      King Olaf sent spies out to trace the earl's doings (A.D. 1015); and when
+      he found that the earl had left the country he sailed out west, and to
+      Viken, where many people came to him. At the Thing there he was taken as
+      king, and so he proceeded all the way to the Naze; and when he heard that
+      Erling Skialgson had gathered a large force, he did not tarry in North
+      Agder, but sailed with a steady fair wind to the Throndhjem country; for
+      there it appeared to him was the greatest strength of the land, if he
+      could subdue it for himself while the earl was abroad. When Olaf came to
+      Throndhjem there was no opposition, and he was elected there to be king.
+      In harvest (A.D. 1015) he took his seat in the town of Nidaros, and
+      collected the needful winter provision (A.D. 1016). He built a king's
+      house, and raised Clement's church on the spot on which it now stands. He
+      parcelled out building ground, which he gave to bondes, merchants, or
+      others who he thought would build. There he sat down with many men-at-arms
+      around him; for he put no great confidence in the Throndhjem people, if
+      the earl should return to the country. The people of the interior of the
+      Throndhjem country showed this clearly, for he got no land-scat from them.
+      52. PLAN OF SVEIN AND THE SWEDISH KING.
+      Earl Svein went first to Svithjod to his brother-in-law Olaf the Swedish
+      king, told him all that had happened between him and Olaf the Thick, and
+      asked his advice about what he should now undertake. The king said that
+      the earl should stay with him if he liked, and get such a portion of his
+      kingdom to rule over as should seem to him sufficient; "or otherwise,"
+      says he, "I will give thee help of forces to conquer the country again
+      from Olaf." The earl chose the latter; for all those among his men who had
+      great possessions in Norway, which was the case with many who were with
+      him, were anxious to get back; and in the council they held about this, it
+      was resolved that in winter they should take the land-way over
+      Helsingjaland and Jamtaland, and so down into the Throndhjem land; for the
+      earl reckoned most upon the faithful help and strength of the Throndhjem
+      people of the interior as soon as he should appear there. In the meantime,
+      however, it was determined to take a cruise in summer in the Baltic to
+      gather property.
+      53. EARL SVEIN'S DEATH.
+      Earl Svein went eastward with his forces to Russia, and passed the summer
+      (A.D. 1015) in marauding there; but on the approach of autumn returned
+      with his ships to Svithjod. There he fell into a sickness, which proved
+      fatal. After the earl's death some of the people who had followed him
+      remained in Svithjod; others went to Helsingjaland, thence to Jamtaland,
+      and so from the east over the dividing ridge of the country to the
+      Throndhjem district, where they told all that had happened upon their
+      journey: and thus the truth of Earl Svein's death was known (A.D. 1016).
+      54. OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE.
+      Einar Tambaskelfer, and the people who had followed him went in winter to
+      the Swedish king, and were received in a friendly manner. There were also
+      among them many who had followed the earl. The Swedish king took it much
+      amiss that Olaf the Thick had set himself down in his scat-lands, and
+      driven the earl out of them, and therefore he threatened the king with his
+      heaviest vengeance when opportunity offered. He said that Olaf ought not
+      to have had the presumption to take the dominions which the earl had held
+      of him; and all the Swedish king's men agreed with him. But the Throndhjem
+      people, when they heard for certain that the earl was dead. and could not
+      be expected back to Norway, turned all to obedience to King Olaf. Many
+      came from the interior of the Throndhjem country, and became King Olaf's
+      men; others sent word and tokens that they would service him. Then, in
+      autumn, he went into the interior of Throndhjem, and held Things with the
+      bondes, and was received as king in each district. He returned to Nidaros,
+      and brought there all the king's scat and revenue, and had his winter-seat
+      provided there (A.D. 1016).
+      55. OF KING OLAF'S HOUSEHOLD.
+      King Olaf built a king's house in Nidaros, and in it was a large room for
+      his court, with doors at both ends. The king's high-seat was in the middle
+      of the room; and within sat his court-bishop, Grimkel, and next him his
+      other priests; without them sat his counsellors; and in the other
+      high-seat opposite to the king sat his marshal, Bjorn, and next to him his
+      pursuivants. When people of importance came to him, they also had a seat
+      of honour. The ale was drunk by the fire-light. He divided the service
+      among his men after the fashion of other kings. He had in his house sixty
+      court-men and thirty pursuivants; and to them he gave pay and certain
+      regulations. He had also thirty house-servants to do the needful work
+      about the house, and procure what was required. He had, besides, many
+      slaves. At the house were many outbuildings, in which the court-men slept.
+      There was also a large room, in which the king held his court-meetings.
+      56. OF KING OLAF'S HABITS.
+      It was King Olaf's custom to rise betimes in the morning, put on his
+      clothes, wash his hands, and then go to the church and hear the matins and
+      morning mass. Thereafter he went to the Thing-meeting, to bring people to
+      agreement with each other, or to talk of one or the other matter that
+      appeared to him necessary. He invited to him great and small who were
+      known to be men of understanding. He often made them recite to him the
+      laws which Hakon Athelstan's foster-son had made for Throndhjem; and after
+      considering them with those men of understanding, he ordered laws adding
+      to or taking from those established before. But Christian privileges he
+      settled according to the advice of Bishop Grimbel and other learned
+      priests; and bent his whole mind to uprooting heathenism, and old customs
+      which he thought contrary to Christianity. And he succeeded so far that
+      the bondes accepted of the laws which the king proposed. So says Sigvat: -
+     "The king, who at the helm guides
+     His warlike ship through clashing tides,
+     Now gives one law for all the land -
+     A heavenly law, which long will stand."
+      King Olaf was a good and very gentle man, of little speech, and
+      open-handed although greedy of money. Sigvat the skald, as before related,
+      was in King Olaf's house, and several Iceland men. The king asked
+      particularly how Christianity was observed in Iceland, and it appeared to
+      him to be very far from where it ought to be; for, as to observing
+      Christian practices, it was told the king that it was permitted there to
+      eat horse-flesh, to expose infants as heathens do, besides many other
+      things contrary to Christianity. They also told the king about many
+      principal men who were then in Iceland. Skapte Thorodson was then the
+      lagman of the country. He inquired also of those who were best acquainted
+      with it about the state of people in other distant countries; and his
+      inquiries turned principally on how Christianity was observed in the
+      Orkney, Shetland, and Farey Islands: and, as far as he could learn, it was
+      far from being as he could have wished. Such conversation was usually
+      carried on by him; or else he spoke about the laws and rights of the
+      country.
+      57. KING OLAF'S MESSENGERS.
+      The same winter (A.D. 1016) came messengers from the Swedish king, Olaf
+      the Swede, out of Svithjod: and their leaders were two brothers, Thorgaut
+      Skarde and Asgaut the bailiff; and they, had twenty-four men with them,
+      when they came from the eastward, over the ridge of the country down into
+      Veradal, they summoned a Thing of the bondes, talked to them, and demanded
+      of them scat and duties upon account of the king of Sweden. But the
+      bondes, after consulting with each other, determined only to pay the scat
+      which the Swedish king required in so far as King Olaf required none upon
+      his account, but refused to pay scat to both. The messengers proceeded
+      farther down the valley; but received at every Thing they held the same
+      answer, and no money. They went forward to Skaun, held a Thing there, and
+      demanded scat; but it went there as before. Then they came to Stjoradal,
+      and summoned a Thing, but the bondes would not come to it. Now the
+      messengers saw that their business was a failure; and Thorgaut proposed
+      that they should turn about, and go eastward again. "I do not think," says
+      Asgaut, "that we have performed the king's errand unless we go to King
+      Olaf the Thick, since the bondes refer the matter to him." He was their
+      commander; so they proceeded to the town (Nidaros), and took lodging
+      there. The day after they presented themselves to the king, just as he was
+      seated at table, saluted him, and said they came with a message of the
+      Swedish king. The king told them to come to him next day. Next day the
+      king, having heard mass, went to his Thing-house, ordered the messengers
+      of the Swedish king to be called, and told them to produce their message.
+      Then Thorgaut spoke, and told first what his errand was, and next how the
+      Throndhjem people of the interior had replied to it; and asked the king's
+      decision on the business, that they might know what result their errand
+      there was to have. The king answers, "While the earls ruled over the
+      country, it was not to be wondered at if the country people thought
+      themselves bound to obey them, as they were at least of the royal race of
+      the kingdom. But it would have been more just if those earls had given
+      assistance and service to the kings who had a right to the country, rather
+      than to foreign kings, or to stir up opposition to their lawful kings,
+      depriving them of their land and kingdom. With regard to Olaf the Swede,
+      who calls himself entitled to the kingdom of Norway, I, who in fact am so
+      entitled, can see no ground for his claim; but well remember the skaith
+      and damage we have suffered from him and his relations."
+      Then says Asgaut. "It is not wonderful that thou art called Olaf the
+      Thick, seeing thou answerest so haughtily to such a prince's message, and
+      canst not see clearly how heavy the king's wrath will be for thee to
+      support, as many have experienced who had greater strength than thou
+      appearest to have. But if thou wishest to keep hold of thy kingdom, it
+      will be best for thee to come to the king, and be his man; and we shall
+      beg him to give thee this kingdom in fief under him."
+      The king replies with all gentleness, "I will give thee an advice, Asgaut,
+      in return. Go back to the east again to thy king, and tell him that early
+      in spring I will make myself ready, and will proceed eastward to the
+      ancient frontier that divided formerly the kingdom of the kings of Norway
+      from Sweden. There he may come if he likes, that we may conclude a peace
+      with each other; and each of us will retain the kingdom to which he is
+      born."
+      Now the messengers turned back to their lodging, and prepared for their
+      departure, and the king went to table. The messengers came back soon after
+      to the king's house; but the doorkeepers saw it, and reported it to the
+      king, who told them not to let the messengers in. "I will not speak with
+      them," said he. Then the messengers went off, and Thorgaut said he would
+      now return home with his men; but Asgaut insisted still that he would go
+      forward with the king's errand: so they separated. Thorgaut proceeded
+      accordingly through Strind; but Asgaut went into Gaulardal and Orkadal,
+      and intended proceeding southwards to More, to deliver his king's message.
+      When King Olaf came to the knowledge of this he sent out his pursuivants
+      after them, who found them at the ness in Stein, bound their hands behind
+      their backs, and led them down to the point called Gaularas, where they
+      raised a gallows, and hanged them so that they could be seen by those who
+      travelled the usual sea-way out of the fjord. Thorgaut heard this news
+      before he had travelled far on his way home through the Throndhjem
+      country; and he hastened on his journey until he came to the Swedish king,
+      and told him how it had gone with them. The king was highly enraged when
+      he heard the account of it; and he had no lack of high words.
+      58. OLAF AND ERLING RECONCILED.
+      The spring thereafter (A.D. 1016) King Olaf Haraldson calls out an army
+      from the Throndhjem land, and makes ready to proceed eastward. Some of the
+      Iceland traders were then ready to sail from Norway. With them King Olaf
+      sent word and token to Hjalte Skeggjason, and summoned him to come to him,
+      and at the same time sent a verbal message to Skapte the lagman, and other
+      men who principally took part in the lawgiving of Iceland, to take out of
+      the law whatever appeared contrary to Christianity. He sent, besides, a
+      message of friendship to the people in general. The king then proceeded
+      southwards himself along the coast, stopping at every district, and
+      holding Things with the bondes; and in each Thing he ordered the Christian
+      law to be read, together with the message of salvation thereunto
+      belonging, and with which many ill customs and much heathenism were swept
+      away at once among the common people: for the earls had kept well the old
+      laws and rights of the country; but with respect to keeping Christianity,
+      they had allowed every man to do as he liked. It was thus come so far that
+      the people were baptized in the most places on the sea-coast, but the most
+      of them were ignorant of Christian law. In the upper ends of the valleys,
+      and in the habitations among the mountains, the greater part of the people
+      were heathen; for when the common man is left to himself, the faith he has
+      been taught in his childhood is that which has the strongest hold over his
+      inclination. But the king threatened the most violent proceedings against
+      great or small, who, after the king's message, would not adopt
+      Christianity. In the meantime Olaf was proclaimed king in every Law Thing
+      in the country, and no man spoke against him. While he lay in Karmtsund
+      messengers went between him and Erling Skjalgson, who endeavoured to make
+      peace between them; and the meeting was appointed in Whitings Isle. When
+      they met they spoke with each other about agreement together; but Erling
+      found something else than he expected in the conversation: for when he
+      insisted on having all the fiefs which Olaf Trygvason, and afterwards the
+      Earls Svein and Hakon, had given him, and on that condition would be his
+      man and dutiful friend, the king answered, "It appears to me, Erling, that
+      it would be no bad bargain for thee to get as great fiefs from me for thy
+      aid and friendship as thou hadst from Earl Eirik, a man who had done thee
+      the greatest injury by the bloodshed of thy men; but even if I let thee
+      remain the greatest lenderman in Norway, I will bestow my fiefs according
+      to my own will, and not act as if ye lendermen had udal right to my
+      ancestor's heritage, and I was obliged to buy your services with manifold
+      rewards." Erling had no disposition to sue for even the smallest thing;
+      and he saw that the king was not easily dealt with. He saw also that he
+      had only two conditions before him: the one was to make no agreement with
+      the king, and stand by the consequences; the other to leave it entirely to
+      the king's pleasure. Although it was much against his inclination, he
+      chose the latter, and merely said to the king, "The service will be the
+      most useful to thee which I give with a free will." And thus their
+      conference ended. Erling's relations and friends came to him afterwards,
+      and advised him to give way, and proceed with more prudence and less
+      pride. "Thou wilt still," they said, "be the most important and most
+      respected lenderman in Norway, both on account of thy own and thy
+      relations' abilities and great wealth." Erling found that this was prudent
+      advice, and that they who gave it did so with a good intention, and he
+      followed it accordingly. Erling went into the king's service on such
+      conditions as the king himself should determine and please. Thereafter
+      they separated in some shape reconciled, and Olaf went his way eastward
+      along the coast (A.D. 1016).
+      59. EILIF OF GAUTLAND'S MURDER.
+      As soon as it was reported that Olaf had come to Viken, the Danes who had
+      offices under the Danish king set off for Denmark, without waiting for
+      King Olaf. But King Olaf sailed in along Viken, holding Things with the
+      bondes. All the people of the country submitted to him, and thereafter he
+      took all the king's taxes, and remained the summer (A.D. 1016) in Viken.
+      He then sailed east from Tunsberg across the fjord, and all the way east
+      to Svinasund. There the Swedish king's dominions begin, and he had set
+      officers over this country; namely, Eilif Gautske over the north part, and
+      Hroe Skialge over the east part, all the way to the Gaut river. Hroe had
+      family friends on both sides of the river, and also great farms on Hising
+      Island, and was besides a mighty and very rich man. Eilif was also of
+      great family, and very wealthy. Now when King Olaf came to Ranrike he
+      summoned the people to a Thing, and all who dwelt on the sea-coast or in
+      the out-islands came to him. Now when the Thing was seated the king's
+      marshal, Bjorn, held a speech to them, in which he told the bondes to
+      receive Olaf as their king, in the same way as had been done in all other
+      parts of Norway. Then stood up a bold bonde by name Brynjolf Ulfalde, and
+      said, "We bondes know where the division-boundaries between the Norway and
+      Danish and Swedish kings' lands have stood by rights in old times; namely,
+      that the Gaut river divided their lands between the Vener lake and the
+      sea; but towards the north the forests until Eid forest, and from thence
+      the ridge of the country all north to Finmark. We know, also, that by
+      turns they have made inroads upon each other's territories, and that the
+      Swedes have long had power all the way to Svinasund. But, sooth to say, I
+      know that it is the inclination of many rather to serve the king of
+      Norway, but they dare not; for the Swedish king's dominions surround us,
+      both eastward, southwards, and also up the country; and besides, it may be
+      expected that the king of Norway must soon go to the north, where the
+      strength of his kingdom lies, and then we have no power to withstand the
+      Gautlanders. Now it is for the king to give us good counsel, for we have
+      great desire to be his men." After the Thing, in the evening, Brynjolf was
+      in the king's tent, and the day after likewise, and they had much private
+      conversation together. Then the king proceeded eastwards along Viken. Now
+      when Eilif heard of his arrival, he sent out spies to discover what he was
+      about; but he himself, with thirty men, kept himself high up in the
+      habitations among the hills, where he had gathered together bondes. Many
+      of the bondes came to King Olaf, but some sent friendly messages to him.
+      People went between King Olaf and Eilif, and they entreated each
+      separately to hold a Thing-meeting between themselves, and make peace in
+      one way or another. They told Eilif that they might expect violent
+      treatment from King Olaf if they opposed his orders; but promised Eilif he
+      should not want men. It was determined that they should come down from the
+      high country, and hold a thing with the bondes and the king. King Olaf
+      thereupon sent the chief of his pursuivants, Thorer Lange, with six men,
+      to Brynjolf. They were equipped with their coats-of-mail under their
+      cloaks, and their hats over their helmets. The following day the bondes
+      came in crowds down with Eilif; and in his suite was Brynjolf, and with
+      him Thorer. The king laid his ships close to a rocky knoll that stuck out
+      into the sea, and upon it the king went with his people, and sat down.
+      Below was a flat field, on which the bondes' force was; but Eilif's men
+      were drawn up, forming a shield-fence before him. Bjorn the marshal spoke
+      long and cleverly upon the king's account, and when he sat down Eilif
+      arose to speak; but at the same moment Thorer Lange rose, drew his sword,
+      and struck Eilif on the neck, so that his head flew off. Then the whole
+      bonde-force started up; but the Gautland men set off in full flight and
+      Thorer with his people killed several of them. Now when the crowd was
+      settled again, and the noise over the king stood up, and told the bondes
+      to seat themselves. They did so, and then much was spoken. The end of it
+      was that they submitted to the king, and promised fidelity to him; and he,
+      on the other hand, promised not to desert them, but to remain at hand
+      until the discord between him and the Swedish Olaf was settled in one way
+      or other. King Olaf then brought the whole northern district under his
+      power, and went in summer eastward as far as the Gaut river, and got all
+      the king's scat among the islands. But when summer (A.D. 1016) was drawing
+      towards an end he returned north to Viken, and sailed up the Raum river to
+      a waterfall called Sarp. On the north side of the fall, a point of land
+      juts out into the river. There the king ordered a rampart to be built
+      right across the ness, of stone, turf, and wood, and a ditch to be dug in
+      front of it; so that it was a large earthen fort or burgh, which he made a
+      merchant town of. He had a king's house put up, and ordered the building
+      of Mary church. He also laid out plans for other houses, and got people to
+      build on them. In harvest (A.D. 1016) he let everything be gathered there
+      that was useful for his winter residence (A.D. 1017), and sat there with a
+      great many people, and the rest he quartered in the neighbouring
+      districts. The king prohibited all exports from Viken to Gautland of
+      herrings and salt, which the Gautland people could ill do without. This
+      year the king held a great Yule feast, to which he invited many great
+      bondes.
+      60. THE HISTORY OF EYVIND URARHORN.
+      There was a man called Eyvind Urarhorn, who was a great man, of high
+      birth, who had his descent from the East Agder country. Every summer he
+      went out on a viking cruise, sometimes to the West sea, sometimes to the
+      Baltic, sometimes south to Flanders, and had a well-armed cutter (snekkia)
+      of twenty benches of rowers. He had been also at Nesjar, and given his aid
+      to the king; and when they separated the king promised him his favour, and
+      Eyvind, again, promised to come to the king's aid whenever he was
+      required. This winter (A.D. 1017) Eyvind was at the Yule feast of the
+      king, and received goodly gifts from him. Brynjolf Ulfalde was also with
+      the king, and he received a Yule present from the king of a gold-mounted
+      sword, and also a farm called Vettaland, which is a very large head-farm
+      of the district. Brynjolf composed a song about these gifts, of which the
+      refrain was -
+     "The song-famed hero to my hand
+     Gave a good sword, and Vettaland."
+      The king afterwards gave him the title of Lenderman, and Brynjolf was ever
+      after the king's greatest friend.
+      61. THRAND WHITE'S MURDER.
+      This winter (A.D. 1017) Thrand White from Throndhjem went east to
+      Jamtaland, to take up scat upon account of King Olaf. But when he had
+      collected the scat he was surprised by men of the Swedish king, who killed
+      him and his men, twelve in all, and brought the scat to the Swedish king.
+      King Olaf was very ill-pleased when he heard this news.
+      62. CHRISTIANITY PROCLAIMED IN VIKEN.
+      King Olaf made Christian law to be proclaimed in Viken, in the same way as
+      in the North country. It succeeded well, because the people of Viken were
+      better acquainted with the Christian customs than the people in the north;
+      for, both winter and summer, there were many merchants in Viken, both
+      Danish and Saxon. The people of Viken, also, had much trading intercourse
+      with England, and Saxony, and Flanders, and Denmark; and some had been on
+      viking expeditions, and had had their winter abode in Christian lands.
+      63. HROE'S FALL.
+      About spring-time (A.D. 1017) King Olaf sent a message that Eyvind
+      Urarhorn should come to him; and they spake together in private for a long
+      time. Thereafter Eyvind made himself ready for a viking cruise. He sailed
+      south towards Viken, and brought up at the Eikreys Isles without Hising
+      Isle. There he heard that Hroe Skialge had gone northwards towards Ordost,
+      and had there made a levy of men and goods on account of the Swedish king,
+      and was expected from the north. Eyvind rowed in by Haugasund, and Hroe
+      came rowing from the north, and they met in the sound and fought. Hroe
+      fell there, with nearly thirty men; and Eyvind took all the goods Hroe had
+      with him. Eyvind then proceeded to the Baltic, and was all summer on a
+      viking cruise.
+      64. FALL OF GUDLEIK AND THORGAUT.
+      There was a man called Gudleik Gerske, who came originally from Agder. He
+      was a great merchant, who went far and wide by sea, was very rich, and
+      drove a trade with various countries. He often went east to Gardarike
+      (Russia), and therefore was called Gudleik Gerske (the Russian). This
+      spring (A.D. 1017) Gudleik fitted out his ship, and intended to go east in
+      summer to Russia. King Olaf sent a message to him that he wanted to speak
+      to him; and when Gudleik came to the king he told him he would go in
+      partnership with him, and told him to purchase some costly articles which
+      were difficult to be had in this country. Gudleik said that it should be
+      according to the king's desire. The king ordered as much money to be
+      delivered to Gudleik as he thought sufficient, and then Gudleik set out
+      for the Baltic. They lay in a sound in Gotland; and there it happened, as
+      it often does, that people cannot keep their own secrets, and the people
+      of the country came to know that in this ship was Olaf the Thick's
+      partner. Gudleik went in summer eastwards to Novgorod, where he bought
+      fine and costly clothes, which he intended for the king as a state dress;
+      and also precious furs, and remarkably splendid table utensils. In autumn
+      (A.D. 1017), as Gudleik was returning from the east, he met a contrary
+      wind, and lay for a long time at the island Eyland. There came Thorgaut
+      Skarde, who in autumn had heard of Gudleik's course, in a long-ship
+      against him, and gave him battle. They fought long, and Gudleik and his
+      people defended themselves for a long time; but the numbers against them
+      were great, and Gudleik and many of his ship's crew fell, and a great many
+      of them were wounded. Thorgaut took all their goods, and King Olaf's, and
+      he and his comrades divided the booty among them equally; but he said the
+      Swedish king ought to have the precious articles of King Olaf, as these,
+      he said, should be considered as part of the scat due to him from Norway.
+      Thereafter Thorgaut proceeded east to Svithjod. These tidings were soon
+      known; and as Eyvind Urarhorn came soon after to Eyland, he heard the
+      news, and sailed east after Thorgaut and his troop, and overtook them
+      among the Swedish isles on the coast, and gave battle. There Thorgaut and
+      the most of his men were killed, and the rest sprang overboard. Eyvind
+      took all the goods and all the costly articles of King Olaf which they had
+      captured from Gudleik, and went with these back to Norway in autumn, and
+      delivered to King Olaf his precious wares. The king thanked him in the
+      most friendly way for his proceeding, and promised him anew his favour and
+      friendship. At this time Olaf had been three years king over Norway (A.D.
+      1015-1017).
+      65. MEETING OF OLAF AND RAGNVALD.
+      The same summer (A.D. 1017) King Olaf ordered a levy, and went out
+      eastwards to the Gaut river, where he lay a great part of the summer.
+      Messages were passing between King Olaf, Earl Ragnvald, and the earl's
+      wife, Ingebjorg, the daughter of Trygve. She was very zealous about giving
+      King Olaf of Norway every kind of help, and made it a matter of her
+      deepest interest. For this there were two causes. She had a great
+      friendship for King Olaf; and also she could never forget that the Swedish
+      king had been one at the death of her brother, Olaf Trygvason; and also
+      that he, on that account only, had any presence to rule over Norway. The
+      earl, by her persuasion, turned much towards friendship with King Olaf;
+      and it proceeded so far that the earl and the king appointed a meeting,
+      and met at the Gaut river. They talked together of many things, but
+      especially of the Norwegian and Swedish kings' relations with each other;
+      both agreeing, as was the truth also, that it was the greatest loss, both
+      to the people of Viken and of Gautland, that there was no peace for trade
+      between the two countries; and at last both agreed upon a peace, and
+      still-stand of arms between them until next summer; and they parted with
+      mutual gifts and friendly speeches.
+      66. KING OLAF THE SWEDE.
+      The king thereupon returned north to Viken, and had all the royal revenues
+      up to the Gaut river; and all the people of the country there had
+      submitted to him. King Olaf the Swede had so great a hatred of Olaf
+      Haraldson, that no man dared to call him by his right name in the king's
+      hearing. They called him the thick man; and never named him without some
+      hard by-name.
+      67. ACCOUNT OF THEIR RECONCILIATION.
+      The bondes in Viken spoke with each other about there being nothing for it
+      but that the kings should make peace and a league with each other, and
+      insisted upon it that they were badly used by the kings going to war; but
+      nobody was so bold as to bring these murmurs before the king. At last they
+      begged Bjorn the marshal to bring this matter before the king, and entreat
+      him to send messengers to the Swedish king to offer peace on his side.
+      Bjorn was disinclined to do this, and put it off from himself with
+      excuses; but on the entreaties of many of his friends, he promised at last
+      to speak of it to the king; but declared, at the same time, that he knew
+      it would be taken very ill by the king to propose that he should give way
+      in anything to the Swedish king. The same summer (A.D. 1017) Hjalte
+      Skeggjason came over to Norway from Iceland, according to the message sent
+      him by King Olaf, and went directly to the king. He was well received by
+      the king, who told him to lodge in his house, and gave him a seat beside
+      Bjorn the marshal, and Hjalte became his comrade at table. There was
+      good-fellowship immediately between them.
+      Once, when King Olaf had assembled the people and bondes to consult upon
+      the good of the country, Bjorn the marshal said, "What think you, king, of
+      the strife that is between the Swedish king and you? Many people have
+      fallen on both sides, without its being at all more determined than before
+      what each of you shall have of the kingdom. You have now been sitting in
+      Viken one winter and two summers, and the whole country to the north is
+      lying behind your back unseen; and the men who have property or udal
+      rights in the north are weary of sitting here. Now it is the wish of the
+      lendermen, of your other people, and of the bondes that this should come
+      to an end. There is now a truce, agreement, and peace with the earl, and
+      the West Gautland people who are nearest to us; and it appears to the
+      people it would be best that you sent messengers to the Swedish king to
+      offer a reconciliation on your side; and, without doubt, many who are
+      about the Swedish king will support the proposal, for it is a common gain
+      for those who dwell in both countries, both here and there." This speech
+      of Bjorn's received great applause.
+      Then the king said, "It is fair, Bjorn, that the advice thou hast given
+      should be carried out by thyself. Thou shalt undertake this embassy
+      thyself, and enjoy the good of it, if thou hast advised well; and if it
+      involve any man in danger, thou hast involved thyself in it. Moreover, it
+      belongs to thy office to declare to the multitude what I wish to have
+      told." Then the king stood up, went to the church, and had high mass sung
+      before him; and thereafter went to table.
+      The following day Hjalte said to Bjorn, "Why art thou so melancholy, man?
+      Art thou sick, or art thou angry at any one?" Bjorn tells Hjalte his
+      conversation with the king, and says it is a very dangerous errand.
+      Hjalte says, "It is their lot who follow kings that they enjoy high
+      honours, and are more respected than other men, but stand often in danger
+      of their lives: and they must understand how to bear both parts of their
+      lot. The king's luck is great; and much honour will be gained by this
+      business, if it succeed."
+      Bjorn answered, "Since thou makest so light of this business in thy
+      speech, wilt thou go with me? The king has promised that I shall have
+      companions with me on the journey."
+      "Certainly," says Hjalte; "I will follow thee, if thou wilt: for never
+      again shall I fall in with such a comrade if we part."
+      68. JOURNEY OF BJORN THE MARSHAL.
+      A few days afterwards, when the king was at a Thing-meeting, Bjorn came
+      with eleven others. He says to the king that they were now ready to
+      proceed on their mission, and that their horses stood saddled at the door.
+      "And now," says he, "I would know with what errand I am to go, or what
+      orders thou givest us."
+      The king replies, "Ye shall carry these my words to the Swedish king -that
+      I will establish peace between our countries up to the frontier which Olaf
+      Trygvason had before me; and each shall bind himself faithfully not to
+      trespass over it. But with regard to the loss of people, no man must
+      mention it if peace there is to be; for the Swedish king cannot with money
+      pay for the men the Swedes have deprived us of." Thereupon the king rose,
+      and went out with Bjorn and his followers; and he took a gold-mounted
+      sword and a gold ring, and said, in handing over the sword to Bjorn, "This
+      I give thee: it was given to me in summer by Earl Ragnvald. To him ye
+      shall go; and bring him word from me to advance your errand with his
+      counsel and strength. This thy errand I will think well fulfilled if thou
+      hearest the Swedish king's own words, be they yea or nay: and this gold
+      ring thou shalt give Earl Ragnvald. These are tokens (1) he must know
+      well."
+      Hjalte went up to the king, saluted him, and said, "We need much, king,
+      that thy luck attend us;" and wished that they might meet again in good
+      health.
+      The king asked where Hjalte was going.
+      "With Bjorn," said he.
+      The king said, "It will assist much to the good success of the journey
+      that thou goest too, for thy good fortune has often been proved; and be
+      assured that I shall wish that all my luck, if that be of any weight, may
+      attend thee and thy company."
+      Bjorn and his followers rode their way, and came to Earl Ragnvald's court,
+      where they were well received. Bjorn was a celebrated and generally known
+      man, -known by sight and speech to all who had ever seen King Olaf;
+      for at every Thing, Bjorn stood up and told the king's message. Ingebjorg,
+      the earl's wife, went up to Hjalte and looked at him. She recognized him,
+      for she was living with her brother Olaf Trygvason when Hjalte was there:
+      and she knew how to reckon up the relationship between King Olaf and
+      Vilborg, the wife of Hjalte; for Eirik Bjodaskalle father of Astrid, King
+      Olaf Trygvason's mother, and Bodvar father of Olaf, mother of Gissur White
+      the father of Vilborg, were brother's sons of the lenderman Vikingakare of
+      Vors.
+      They enjoyed here good entertainment. One day Bjorn entered into
+      conversation with the earl and Ingebjorg, in which he set forth his
+      errand, and produced to the earl his tokens.
+      The earl replies, "What hast thou done, Bjorn, that the king wishes thy
+      death? For, so far from thy errand having any success, I do not think a
+      man can be found who could speak these words to the Swedish king without
+      incurring wrath and punishment. King Olaf, king of Sweden, is too proud
+      for any man to speak to him on anything he is angry at."
+      Then Bjorn says, "Nothing has happened to me that King Olaf is offended
+      at; but many of his disposition act both for themselves and others, in a
+      way that only men who are daring can succeed in. But as yet all his plans
+      have had good success, and I think this will turn out well too; so I
+      assure you, earl, that I will actually travel to the Swedish king, and not
+      turn back before I have brought to his ears every word that King Olaf told
+      me to say to him, unless death prevent me, or that I am in bonds, and
+      cannot perform my errand; and this I must do, whether you give any aid or
+      no aid to me in fulfilling the king's wishes."
+      Then said IngebJorg, "I will soon declare my opinion. I think, earl, thou
+      must turn all thy attention to supporting King Olaf the king of Norway's
+      desire that this message be laid before the Swedish king, in whatever way
+      he may answer it. Although the Swedish king's anger should be incurred,
+      and our power and property be at stake, yet will I rather run the risk,
+      than that it should be said the message of King Olaf was neglected from
+      fear of the Swedish king. Thou hast that birth, strength of relations, and
+      other means, that here in the Swedish land it is free to thee to tell thy
+      mind, if it be right and worthy of being heard, whether it be listened to
+      by few or many, great or little people, or by the king himself."
+      The earl replies, "It is known to every one how thou urgest me: it may be,
+      according to thy counsel, that I should promise the king's men to follow
+      them, so that they may get their errand laid before the Swedish king,
+      whether he take it ill or take it well. But I will have my own counsel
+      followed, and will not run hastily into Bjorn's or any other man's
+      measures, in such a highly important matter. It is my will that ye all
+      remain here with me, so long as I think it necessary for the purpose of
+      rightly forwarding this mission." Now as the earl had thus given them to
+      understand that he would support them in the business, Bjorn thanked him
+      most kindly, and with the assurance that his advice should rule them
+      altogether. Thereafter Bjorn and his fellow-travellers remained very long
+      in the earl's house.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Before writing was a common accomplishment in courts, the
+     only way of accrediting a special messenger between kings
+     and great men was by giving the messenger a token; that is.
+     some article well known by the person receiving the message
+     to be the property of and valued by the person sending it.
+      69. CONVERSATION OF BJORN AND INGEBJORG.
+      Ingebjorg was particularly kind to them; and Bjorn often spoke with her
+      about the matter, and was ill at ease that their journey was so long
+      delayed. Hjalte and the others often spoke together also about the matter;
+      and Hjalte said; "I will go to the king if ye like; for I am not a man of
+      Norway, and the Swedes can have nothing to say to me. I have heard that
+      there are Iceland men in the king's house who are my acquaintances, and
+      are well treated; namely, the skalds Gissur Black and Ottar Black. From
+      them I shall get out what I can about the Swedish king; and if the
+      business will really be so difficult as it now appears, or if there be any
+      other way of promoting it, I can easily devise some errand that may appear
+      suitable for me."
+      This counsel appeared to Bjorn and Ingebjorg to be the wisest, and they
+      resolved upon it among themselves. Ingebjorg put Hjalte in a position to
+      travel; gave him two Gautland men with him, and ordered them to follow
+      him, and assist him with their service, and also to go wherever he might
+      have occasion to send them. Besides, Ingebjorg gave him twenty marks of
+      weighed silver money for travelling expenses, and sent word and token by
+      him to the Swedish king Olaf's daughter, Ingegerd, that she should give
+      all her assistance to Hjalte's business, whenever he should find himself
+      under the necessity of craving her help. Hjalte set off as soon as he was
+      ready. When he came to King Olaf he soon found the skalds Gissur and
+      Ottar, and they were very glad at his coming. Without delay they went to
+      the king, and told him that a man was come who was their countryman, and
+      one of the most considerable in their native land, and requested the king
+      to receive him well. The king told them to take Hjalte and his
+      fellow-travellers into their company and quarters. Now when Hjalte had
+      resided there a short time, and got acquainted with people, he was much
+      respected by everybody. The skalds were often in the king's house, for
+      they were well-spoken men; and often in the daytime they sat in front of
+      the king's high-seat, and Hjalte, to whom they paid the highest respect in
+      all things, by their side. He became thus known to the king, who willingly
+      entered into conversation with him, and heard from him news about Iceland.
+      70. OF SIGVAT THE SKALD.
+      It happened that before Bjorn set out from home he asked Sigvat the skald,
+      who at that time was with King Olaf, to accompany him on his journey. It
+      was a journey for which people had no great inclination. There was,
+      however, great friendship between Bjorn and Sigvat. Then Sigvat sang: -
+     "With the king's marshals all have I,
+          In days gone by,
+          Lived joyously, -
+     With all who on the king attend,
+     And knee before him humbly bend,
+     Bjorn, thou oft hast ta'en my part -
+          Pleaded with art,
+          And touched the heart.
+     Bjorn!  brave stainer of the sword,
+     Thou art my friend -I trust thy word."
+      While they were riding up to Gautland, Sigvat made these verses: -
+     "Down the Fjord sweep wind and rain,
+     Our stout ship's sails and tackle strain;
+          Wet to the skin.
+          We're sound within,
+     And gaily o'er the waves are dancing,
+     Our sea-steed o'er the waves high prancing!
+          Through Lister sea
+          Flying all free;
+     Off from the wind with swelling sail,
+     We merrily scud before the gale,
+          And reach the sound
+          Where we were bound.
+     And now our ship, so gay and grand,
+     Glides past the green and lovely land,
+          And at the isle
+          Moors for a while.
+     Our horse-hoofs now leave hasty print;
+     We ride -of ease there's scanty stint -
+          In heat and haste
+          O'er Gautland's waste:
+     Though in a hurry to be married,
+     The king can't say that we have tarried."
+      One evening late they were riding through Gautland, and Sigvat made these
+      verses: -
+     "The weary horse will at nightfall
+     Gallop right well to reach his stall;
+     When night meets day, with hasty hoof
+     He plies the road to reach a roof.
+     Far from the Danes, we now may ride
+     Safely by stream or mountain-side;
+     But, in this twilight, in some ditch
+     The horse and rider both may pitch."
+      They rode through the merchant town of Skara, and down the street to the
+      earl's house. He sang: -
+     "The shy sweet girls, from window high
+     In wonder peep at the sparks that fly
+     From our horses heels, as down the street
+     Of the earl's town we ride so fleet.
+     Spur on! -that every pretty lass
+     May hear our horse-hoofs as we pass
+     Clatter upon the stones so hard,
+     And echo round the paved court-yard."
+      71. HJALTE SKEGGJASON WHILE HE WAS IN SVITHIOD.
+      One day Hjalte, and the skalds with him, went before the king, and he
+      began thus: -"It has so happened, king, as is known to you, that I
+      have come here after a long and difficult journey; but when I had once
+      crossed the ocean and heard of your greatness, it appeared to me unwise to
+      go back without having seen you in your splendour and glory. Now it is a
+      law between Iceland and Norway, that Iceland men pay landing due when they
+      come into Norway, but while I was coming across the sea I took myself all
+      the landing dues from my ship's people; but knowing that thou have the
+      greatest right to all the power in Norway, I hastened hither to deliver to
+      you the landing dues." With this he showed the silver to the king, and
+      laid ten marks of silver in Gissur Black's lap.
+      The king replies, "Few have brought us any such dues from Norway for some
+      time; and now, Hjalte, I will return you my warmest thanks for having
+      given yourself so much trouble to bring us the landing dues, rather than
+      pay them to our enemies. But I will that thou shouldst take this money
+      from me as a gift, and with it my friendship."
+      Hjalte thanked the king with many words, and from that day set himself in
+      great favour with the king, and often spoke with him; for the king
+      thought, what was true, that he was a man of much understanding and
+      eloquence. Now Hjalte told Gissur and Ottar that he was sent with tokens
+      to the king's daughter Ingegerd, to obtain her protection and friendship;
+      and he begged of them to procure him some opportunity to speak with her.
+      They answered, that this was an easy thing to do; and went one day to her
+      house, where she sat at the drinking table with many men. She received the
+      skalds in a friendly manner, for they were known to her. Hjalte brought
+      her a salutation from the earl's wife, Ingebjorg; and said she had sent
+      him here to obtain friendly help and succour from her, and in proof
+      whereof produced his tokens. The king's daughter received him also kindly,
+      and said he should be welcome to her friendship. They sat there till late
+      in the day drinking. The king's daughter made Hjalte tell her much news,
+      and invited him to come often and converse with her. He did so: came there
+      often, and spoke with the king's daughter; and at last entrusted her with
+      the purpose of Bjorn's and his comrade's journey, and asked her how she
+      thought the Swedish king would receive the proposal that there should be a
+      reconciliation between the kings. The king's daughter replied, that, in
+      her opinion, it would be a useless attempt to propose to the king any
+      reconciliation with Olaf the Thick; for the king was so enraged against
+      him, that he would not suffer his name to be mentioned before him. It
+      happened one day that Hjalte was sitting with the king and talking to him,
+      and the king was very merry and drunk. Then Hjalte said, "Manifold
+      splendour and grandeur have I seen here; and I have now witnessed with my
+      eyes what I have often heard of, that no monarch in the north is so
+      magnificent: but it is very vexatious that we who come so far to visit it
+      have a road so long and troublesome, both on account of the great ocean,
+      but more especially because it is not safe to travel through Norway for
+      those who are coming here in a friendly disposition. But why is there no
+      one to bring proposals for a peace between you and King Olaf the Thick? I
+      heard much in Norway, and in west Gautland, of the general desire that
+      this peace should have taken place; and it has been told me for truth, as
+      the Norway king's words, that he earnestly desires to be reconciled to
+      you; and the reason I know is, that he feels how much less his power is
+      than yours. It is even said that he intends to pay his court to your
+      daughter Ingegerd; and that would lead to a useful peace, for I have heard
+      from people of credit that he is a remarkably distinguished man."
+      The king answers. "Thou must not speak thus, Hjalte; but for this time I
+      will not take it amiss of thee, as thou dost not know what people have to
+      avoid here. That fat fellow shall not be called king in my court, and
+      there is by no means the stuff in him that people talk of: and thou must
+      see thyself that such a connection is not suitable; for I am the tenth
+      king in Upsala who, relation after relation, has been sole monarch over
+      the Swedish, and many other great lands, and all have been the superior
+      kings over other kings in the northern countries. But Norway is little
+      inhabited, and the inhabitants are scattered. There have only been small
+      kings there; and although Harald Harfager was the greatest king in that
+      country, and strove against the small kings, and subdued them, yet he knew
+      so well his position that he did not covet the Swedish dominions, and
+      therefore the Swedish kings let him sit in peace, especially as there was
+      relationship between them. Thereafter, while Hakon Athelstan's foster-son
+      was in Norway he sat in peace, until he began to maraud in Gautland and
+      Denmark; on which a war-force came upon him, and took from him both life
+      and land. Gunhild's sons also were cut off when they became disobedient to
+      the Danish kings; and Harald Gormson joined Norway to his own dominions,
+      and made it subject to scat to him. And we reckon Harald Gormson to be of
+      less power and consideration than the Upsala kings, for our relation
+      Styrbjorn subdued him, and Harald became his man; and yet Eirik the
+      Victorious, my father, rose over Styrbjorn's head when it came to a trial
+      between them. When Olaf Trygvason came to Norway and proclaimed himself
+      king, we would not permit it, but we went with King Svein, and cut him
+      off; and thus we have appropriated Norway, as thou hast not heard, and
+      with no less right than if I had gained it in battle, and by conquering
+      the kings who ruled it before. Now thou canst well suppose, as a man of
+      sense, that I will not let slip the kingdom of Norway for this thick
+      fellow. It is wonderful he does not remember how narrowly he made his
+      escape, when we had penned him in in the Malar lake. Although he slipped
+      away with life from thence, he ought, methinks, to have something else in
+      his mind than to hold out against us Swedes. Now, Hjalte, thou must never
+      again open thy mouth in my presence on such a subject."
+      Hjalte saw sufficiently that there was no hope of the king's listening to
+      any proposal of a peace, and desisted from speaking of it, and turned the
+      conversation to something else. When Hjalte, afterwards, came into
+      discourse with the king's daughter Ingegerd, he tells her his conversation
+      with the king. She told him she expected such an answer from the king.
+      Hjalte begged of her to say a good word to the king about the matter, but
+      she thought the king would listen as little to what she said: "But speak
+      about it I will, if thou requirest it." Hjalte assured her he would be
+      thankful for the attempt. One day the king's daughter Ingegerd had a
+      conversation with her father Olaf; and as she found her father was in a
+      particularly good humour, she said, "What is now thy intention with regard
+      to the strife with Olaf the Thick? There are many who complain about it,
+      having lost their property by it; others have lost their relations by the
+      Northmen, and all their peace and quiet; so that none of your men see any
+      harm that can be done to Norway. It would be a bad counsel if thou sought
+      the dominion over Norway; for it is a poor country, difficult to come at,
+      and the people dangerous: for the men there will rather have any other for
+      their king than thee. If I might advise, thou wouldst let go all thoughts
+      about Norway, and not desire Olaf's heritage; and rather turn thyself to
+      the kingdoms in the East country, which thy forefathers the former Swedish
+      kings had, and which our relation Styrbjorn lately subdued, and let the
+      thick Olaf possess the heritage of his forefathers and make peace with
+      him."
+      The king replies in a rage, "It is thy counsel, Ingegerd, that I should
+      let slip the kingdom of Norway, and give thee in marriage to this thick
+      Olaf." -"No," says he, "something else shall first take place. Rather
+      than that, I shall, at the Upsala Thing in winter, issue a proclamation to
+      all Swedes, that the whole people shall assemble for an expedition, and go
+      to their ships before the ice is off the waters; and I will proceed to
+      Norway, and lay waste the land with fire and sword, and burn everything,
+      to punish them for their want of fidelity."
+      The king was so mad with rage that nobody ventured to say a word, and she
+      went away. Hjalte, who was watching for her, immediately went to her and
+      asked how her errand to the king had turned out. She answered, it turned
+      out as she had expected; that none could venture to put in a word with the
+      king; but, on the contrary, he had used threats; and she begged Hjalte
+      never to speak of the matter again before the king. As Hjalte and Ingegerd
+      spoke together often, Olaf the Thick was often the subject, and he told
+      her about him and his manners; and Hjalte praised the king of Norway what
+      he could, but said no more than was the truth, and she could well perceive
+      it. Once, in a conversation, Hjalte said to her, "May I be permitted,
+      daughter of the king, to tell thee what lies in my mind?"
+      "Speak freely," says she; "but so that I alone can hear it."
+      "Then," said Hjalte, "what would be thy answer, if the Norway king Olaf
+      sent messengers to thee with the errand to propose marriage to thee?"
+      She blushed, and answered slowly but gently, "I have not made up my mind
+      to answer to that; but if Olaf be in all respects so perfect as thou
+      tellest me, I could wish for no other husband; unless, indeed, thou hast
+      gilded him over with thy praise more than sufficiently."
+      Hjalte replied, that he had in no respect spoken better of the king than
+      was true. They often spoke together on the same subject. Ingegerd begged
+      Hjalte to be cautious not to mention it to any other person, for the king
+      would be enraged against him if it came to his knowledge. Hjalte only
+      spoke of it to the skalds Gissur and Ottar, who thought it was the most
+      happy plan, if it could but be carried into effect. Ottar, who was a man
+      of great power of conversation, and much beloved in the court, soon
+      brought up the subject before the king's daughter, and recounted to her,
+      as Hjalte had done, all King Olaf's excellent qualities. Often spoke
+      Hjalte and the others about him; and now that Hjalte knew the result of
+      his mission, he sent those Gautland men away who had accompanied him, and
+      let them return to the earl with letters (1) which the king's daughter
+      Ingegerd sent to the earl and Ingebjorg. Hjalte also let them give a hint
+      to the earl about the conversation he had had with Ingegerd, and her
+      answer thereto: and the messengers came with it to the earl a little
+      before Yule.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) This seems the first notice we have in the sagas of
+     written letters being sent instead of tokens and verbal messages.
+      -L.
+      72. OLAF'S JOURNEY TO THE UPLANDS.
+      When King Olaf had despatched Bjorn and his followers to Gautland, he sent
+      other people also to the Uplands, with the errand that they should have
+      guest-quarters prepared for him, as he intended that winter (A.D. 1018) to
+      live as guest in the Uplands; for it had been the custom of former kings
+      to make a progress in guest-quarters every third year in the Uplands. In
+      autumn he began his progress from Sarpsborg, and went first to Vingulmark.
+      He ordered his progress so that he came first to lodge in the
+      neighbourhood of the forest habitations, and summoned to him all the men
+      of the habitations who dwelt at the greatest distance from the
+      head-habitations of the district; and he inquired particularly how it
+      stood with their Christianity, and, where improvement was needful, he
+      taught them the right customs. If any there were who would not renounce
+      heathen ways, he took the matter so zealously that he drove some out of
+      the country, mutilated others of hands or feet, or stung their eyes out;
+      hung up some, cut down some with the sword; but let none go unpunished who
+      would not serve God. He went thus through the whole district, sparing
+      neither great nor small. He gave them teachers, and placed these as
+      thickly in the country as he saw needful. In this manner he went about in
+      that district, and had 300 deadly men-at-arms with him; and then proceeded
+      to Raumarike. He soon perceived that Christianity was thriving less the
+      farther he proceeded into the interior of the country. He went forward
+      everywhere in the same way, converting all the people to the right faith,
+      and severely punishing all who would not listen to his word.
+      73. TREACHERY OF THE UPLAND KINGS.
+      Now when the king who at that time ruled in Raumarike heard of this, he
+      thought it was a very bad affair; for every day came men to him, both
+      great and small, who told him what was doing. Therefore this king resolved
+      to go up to Hedemark, and consult King Hrorek, who was the most eminent
+      for understanding of the kings who at that time were in the country. Now
+      when these kings spoke with each other, they agreed to send a message to
+      Gudrod, the valley-king north in the Gudbrandsdal, and likewise to the
+      king who was in Hadaland, and bid them to come to Hedemark, to meet Hrorek
+      and the other kings there. They did not spare their travelling; for five
+      kings met in Hedemark, at a place called Ringsaker. Ring, King Hrorek's
+      brother, was the fifth of these kings. The kings had first a private
+      conference together, in which he who came from Raumarike first took up the
+      word, and told of King Olaf's proceedings, and of the disturbance he was
+      causing both by killing and mutilating people. Some he drove out of the
+      country, some he deprived of their offices or property if they spoke
+      anything against him; and, besides, he was travelling over the country
+      with a great army, not with the number of people fixed by law for a royal
+      progress in guest-quarters. He added, that he had fled hither upon account
+      of this disturbance, and many powerful people with him had fled from their
+      udal properties in Raumarike. "But although as yet the evil is nearest to
+      us, it will be but a short time before ye will also be exposed to it;
+      therefore it is best that we all consider together what resolution we
+      shall take." When he had ended his speech, Hrorek was desired to speak;
+      and he said, "Now is the day come that I foretold when we had had our
+      meeting at Hadaland, and ye were all so eager to raise Olaf over our
+      heads; namely, that as soon as he was the supreme master of the country we
+      would find it hard to hold him by the horns. We have but two things now to
+      do: the one is, to go all of us to him, and let him do with us as he
+      likes, which I think is the best thing we can do; or the other is, to rise
+      against him before he has gone farther through the country. Although he
+      has 300 or 400 men, that is not too great a force for us to meet, if we
+      are only all in movement together: but, in general, there is less success
+      and advantage to be gained when several of equal strength are joined
+      together, than when one alone stands at the head of his own force;
+      therefore it is my advice, that we do not venture to try our luck against
+      Olaf Haraldson."
+      Thereafter each of the kings spoke according to his own mind some
+      dissuading from going out against King Olaf, others urging it; and no
+      determination was come to, as each had his own reasons to produce.
+      Then Gudrod, the valley-king, took up the word, and spoke: -"It
+      appears wonderful to me, that ye make such a long roundabout in coming to
+      a resolution; and probably ye are frightened for him. We are here five
+      kings, and none of less high birth than Olaf. We gave him the strength to
+      fight with Earl Svein, and with our forces he has brought the country
+      under his power. But if he grudges each of us the little kingdom he had
+      before, and threatens us with tortures, or gives us ill words, then, say I
+      for myself, that I will withdraw myself from the king's slavery; and I do
+      not call him a man among you who is afraid to cut him off, if he come into
+      your hands here up in Hedemark. And this I can tell you, that we shall
+      never bear our heads in safety while Olaf is in life." After this
+      encouragement they all agreed to his determination.
+      Then said Hrorek, "With regard to this determination, it appears to me
+      necessary to make our agreement so strong that no one shall fail in his
+      promise to the other. Therefore, if ye determine upon attacking Olaf at a
+      fixed time, when he comes here to Hedemark, I will not trust much to you
+      if some are north in the valleys, others up in Hedemark; but if our
+      resolution is to come to anything, we must remain here assembled together
+      day and night."
+      This the kings agreed to, and kept themselves there all assembled,
+      ordering a feast to be provided for them at Ringsaker, and drank there a
+      cup to success; sending out spies to Raumarike, and when one set came in
+      sending out others, so that day and night they had intelligence of Olaf's
+      proceedings, and of the numbers of his men. King Olaf went about in
+      Raumarike in guest-quarters, and altogether in the way before related; but
+      as the provision of the guest-quarter was not always sufficient, upon
+      account of his numerous followers, he laid it upon the bondes to give
+      additional contributions wherever he found it necessary to stay. In some
+      places he stayed longer, in others, shorter than was fixed; and his
+      journey down to the lake Miosen was shorter than had been fixed on. The
+      kings, after taking their resolution, sent out message-tokens, and
+      summoned all the lendermen and powerful bondes from all the districts
+      thereabout; and when they had assembled the kings had a private meeting
+      with them, and made their determination known, setting a day for gathering
+      together and carrying it into effect; and it was settled among them that
+      each of the kings should have 300 (1) men. Then they sent away the
+      lendermen to gather the people, and meet all at the appointed place. The
+      most approved of the measure; but it happened here, as it usually does,
+      that every one has some friend even among his enemies.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) I.e., 360.
+      74. MUTILATING OF THE UPLAND KINGS.
+      Ketil of Ringanes was at this meeting. Now when he came home in the
+      evening he took his supper, put on his clothes, and went down with his
+      house-servants to the lake; took a light vessel which he had, the same
+      that King Olaf had made him a present of, and launched it on the water.
+      They found in the boat-house everything ready to their hands; betook
+      themselves to their oars, and rowed out into the lake. Ketil had forty
+      well-armed men with him, and came early in the morning to the end of the
+      lake. He set off immediately with twenty men, leaving the other twenty to
+      look after the ship. King Olaf was at that time at Eid, in the upper end
+      of Raumarike. Thither Ketil arrived just as the king was coming from
+      matins. The king received Ketil kindly. He said he must speak with the
+      king in all haste; and they had a private conference together. There Ketil
+      tells the king the resolution which the kings had taken, and their
+      agreement, which he had come to the certain knowledge of. When the king
+      learnt this he called his people together, and sent some out to collect
+      riding-horses in the country; others he sent down to the lake to take all
+      the rowing-vessels they could lay hold of, and keep them for his use.
+      Thereafter he went to the church, had mass sung before him, and then sat
+      down to table. After his meal he got ready, and hastened down to the lake,
+      where the vessels were coming to meet him. He himself went on board the
+      light vessel, and as many men with him as it could stow, and all the rest
+      of his followers took such boats as they could get hold of; and when it
+      was getting late in the evening they set out from the land, in still and
+      calm weather. He rowed up the water with 400 men, and came with them to
+      Ringsaker before day dawned; and the watchmen were not aware of the army
+      before they were come into the very court. Ketil knew well in what houses
+      the kings slept, and the king had all these houses surrounded and guarded,
+      so that nobody could get out; and so they stood till daylight. The kings
+      had not people enough to make resistance, but were all taken prisoners,
+      and led before the king. Hrorek was an able but obstinate man, whose
+      fidelity the king could not trust to if he made peace with him; therefore
+      he ordered both his eyes to be punched out, and took him in that condition
+      about with him. He ordered Gudrod's tongue to be cut out; but Ring and two
+      others he banished from Norway, under oath never to return. Of the
+      lendermen and bondes who had actually taken part in the traitorous design,
+      some he drove out of the country, some he mutilated, and with others he
+      made peace. Ottar Black tells of this: -
+     "The giver of rings of gold,
+     The army leader bold,
+          In vengeance springs
+          On the Hedemark kings.
+     Olaf the bold and great,
+     Repays their foul deceit -
+          In full repays
+          Their treacherous ways.
+     He drives with steel-clad hand
+     The small kings from the land, -
+          Greater by far
+          In deed of war.
+     The king who dwelt most north
+     Tongueless must wander forth:
+          All fly away
+          In great dismay.
+     King Olaf now rules o'er
+     What five kings ruled before.
+          To Eid's old bound
+          Extends his ground.
+     No kings in days of yore
+     E'er won so much before:
+          That this is so
+          All Norsemen know."
+      King Olaf took possession of the land these five kings had possessed, and
+      took hostages from the lendermen and bondes in it. He took money instead
+      of guest-quarters from the country north of the valley district, and from
+      Hedemark; and then returned to Raumarike, and so west to Hadaland. This
+      winter (A.D. 1018) his stepfather Sigurd Syr died; and King Olaf went to
+      Ringerike, where his mother Asta made a great feast for him. Olaf alone
+      bore the title of king now in Norway.
+      75. KING OLAF'S HALF-BROTHERS.
+      It is told that when King Olaf was on his visit to his mother Asta, she
+      brought out her children, and showed them to him. The king took his
+      brother Guthorm on the one knee, and his brother Halfdan on the other. The
+      king looked at Guthorm, made a wry face, and pretended to be angry at
+      them: at which the boys were afraid. Then Asta brought her youngest son,
+      called Harald, who was three years old, to him. The king made a wry face
+      at him also; but he looked the king in the face without regarding it. The
+      king took the boy by the hair, and plucked it; but the boy seized the
+      king's whiskers, and gave them a tug. "Then," said the king, "thou wilt be
+      revengeful, my friend, some day." The following day the king was walking
+      with his mother about the farm, and they came to a playground, where
+      Asta's sons, Guthorm and Halfdan, were amusing themselves. They were
+      building great houses and barns in their play, and were supposing them
+      full of cattle and sheep; and close beside them, in a clay pool, Harald
+      was busy with chips of wood, sailing them, in his sport along the edge.
+      The king asked him what these were; and he answered, these were his ships
+      of war. The king laughed, and said, "The time may come, friend, when thou
+      wilt command ships."
+      Then the king called to him Halfdan and Guthorm; and first he asked
+      Guthorm, "What wouldst thou like best to have?"
+      "Corn land," replied he.
+      "And how great wouldst thou like thy corn land to be?"
+      "I would have the whole ness that goes out into the lake sown with corn
+      every summer." On that ness there are ten farms.
+      The king replies, "There would be a great deal of corn there." And,
+      turning to Halfdan, he asked, "And what wouldst thou like best to have?"
+      "Cows," he replied.
+      "How many wouldst thou like to have?"
+      "When they went to the lake to be watered I would have so many, that they
+      stood as tight round the lake as they could stand."
+      "That would be a great housekeeping," said the king; "and therein ye take
+      after your father."
+      Then the king says to Harald, "And what wouldst thou like best to have?"
+      "House-servants."
+      "And how many wouldst thou have?"
+      "Oh! so many I would like to have as would eat up my brother Halfdan's
+      cows at a single meal."
+      The king laughed, and said to Asta, "Here, mother, thou art bringing up a
+      king." And more is not related of them on this occasion.
+      76. THE DIVISION OF THE COUNTRY.
+      In Svithjod it was the old custom, as long as heathenism prevailed, that
+      the chief sacrifice took place in Goe month at Upsala. Then sacrifice was
+      offered for peace, and victory to the king; and thither came people from
+      all parts of Svithjod. All the Things of the Swedes, also, were held
+      there, and markets, and meetings for buying, which continued for a week:
+      and after Christianity was introduced into Svithjod, the Things and fairs
+      were held there as before. After Christianity had taken root in Svithjod,
+      and the kings would no longer dwell in Upsala, the market-time was moved
+      to Candlemas, and it has since continued so, and it lasts only three days.
+      There is then the Swedish Thing also, and people from all quarters come
+      there. Svithjod is divided into many parts. One part is West Gautland,
+      Vermaland, and the Marks, with what belongs to them; and this part of the
+      kingdom is so large, that the bishop who is set over it has 1100 churches
+      under him. The other part is East Gautland, where there is also a bishop's
+      seat, to which the islands of Gotland and Eyland belong; and forming all
+      together a still greater bishopric. In Svithjod itself there is a part of
+      the country called Sudermanland, where there is also a bishopric. Then
+      comes Westmanland, or Fiathrundaland, which is also a bishopric. The third
+      portion of Svithjod proper is called Tiundaland; the fourth Attandaland;
+      the fifth Sialand, and what belongs to it lies eastward along the coast.
+      Tiundaland is the best and most inhabited part of Svithjod, under which
+      the other kingdoms stand. There Upsala is situated, the seat of the king
+      and archbishop; and from it Upsala-audr, or the domain of the Swedish
+      kings, takes its name. Each of these divisions of the country has its
+      Lag-thing, and its own laws in many parts. Over each is a lagman, who
+      rules principally in affairs of the bondes: for that becomes law which he,
+      by his speech, determines them to make law: and if king, earl, or bishop
+      goes through the country, and holds a Thing with the bondes, the lagmen
+      reply on account of the bondes, and they all follow their lagmen; so that
+      even the most powerful men scarcely dare to come to their Al-thing without
+      regarding the bondes' and lagmen's law. And in all matters in which the
+      laws differ from each other, Upsala-law is the directing law; and the
+      other lagmen are under the lagman who dwells in Tiundaland.
+      77. OF THE LAGMAN THORGNY.
+      In Tiundaland there was a lagman who was called Thorgny, whose father was
+      called Thorgny Thorgnyson. His forefathers had for a long course of years,
+      and during many kings' times, been lagmen of Tiundaland. At this time
+      Thorgny was old, and had a great court about him. He was considered one of
+      the wisest men in Sweden, and was Earl Ragnvald's relation and
+      foster-father.
+      78. MEETING OF RAGNVALD AND INGEGERD.
+      Now we must go back in our story to the time when the men whom the king's
+      daughter Ingegerd and Hjalte had sent from the east came to Earl Ragnvald.
+      They relate their errand to the earl and his wife Ingebjorg, and tell how
+      the king's daughter had oft spoken to the Swedish king about a peace
+      between him and King Olaf the Thick, and that she was a great friend of
+      King Olaf; but that the Swedish king flew into a passion every time she
+      named Olaf, so that she had no hopes of any peace. The Earl told Bjorn the
+      news he had received from the east; but Bjorn gave the same reply, that he
+      would not turn back until he had met the Swedish king, and said the earl
+      had promised to go with him. Now the winter was passing fast, and
+      immediately after Yule the earl made himself ready to travel with sixty
+      men, among whom where the marshal Bjorn and his companions. The earl
+      proceeded eastward all the way to Svithjod; but when he came a little way
+      into the country he sent his men before him to Upsala with a message to
+      Ingegerd the king's daughter to come out to meet him at Ullaraker, where
+      she had a large farm. When the king's daughter got the earl's message she
+      made herself ready immediately to travel with a large attendance, and
+      Hjalte accompanied her. But before he took his departure he went to King
+      Olaf, and said, "Continue always to be the most fortunate of monarchs!
+      Such splendour as I have seen about thee I have in truth never witnessed
+      elsewhere, and wheresoever I come it shall not be concealed. Now, king,
+      may I entreat thy favour and friendship in time to come?"
+      The king replies, "Why art thou in so great a haste, and where art thou
+      going?"
+      Hjalte replies, "I am to ride out to Ullaraker with Ingegerd thy
+      daughter."
+      The king says, "Farewell, then: a man thou art of understanding and
+      politeness, and well suited to live with people of rank."
+      Thereupon Hjalte withdrew.
+      The king's daughter Ingegerd rode to her farm in Ullaraker, and ordered a
+      great feast to be prepared for the earl. When the earl arrived he was
+      welcomed with gladness, and he remained there several days. The earl and
+      the king's daughter talked much, and of many things, but most about the
+      Swedish and Norwegian kings; and she told the earl that in her opinion
+      there was no hope of peace between them.
+      Then said the earl, "How wouldst thou like it, my cousin, if Olaf king of
+      Norway were to pay his addresses to thee? It appears to us that it would
+      contribute most towards a settled peace if there was relationship
+      established between the kings; but I would not support such a matter if it
+      were against thy inclination."
+      She replies, "My father disposes of my hand; but among all my other
+      relations thou art he whose advice I would rather follow in weighty
+      affairs. Dost thou think it would be advisable?" The earl recommended it
+      to her strongly, and reckoned up many excellent achievements of King
+      Olaf's. He told her, in particular, about what had lately been done; that
+      King Olaf in an hours time one morning had taken five kings prisoners,
+      deprived them all of their governments, and laid their kingdoms and
+      properties under his own power. Much they talked about the business, and
+      in all their conversations they perfectly agreed with each other. When the
+      earl was ready he took leave, and proceeded on his way, taking Hjalte with
+      him.
+      79. RAGNVALD AND THORGNY.
+      Earl Ragnvald came towards evening one day to the house of Lagman Thorgny.
+      It was a great and stately mansion, and many people stood outside, who
+      received the earl kindly, and took care of the horses and baggage. The
+      earl went into the room, where there was a number of people. In the
+      high-seat sat an old man; and never had Bjorn or his companions seen a man
+      so stout. His beard was so long that it lay upon his knee, and was spread
+      over his whole breast; and the man, moreover, was handsome and stately in
+      appearance. The earl went forward and saluted him. Thorgny received him
+      joyfully and kindly, and bade him go to the seat he was accustomed to
+      take. The earl seated himself on the other side, opposite Thorgny. They
+      remained there some days before the earl disclosed his errand, and then he
+      asked Thorgny to go with him into the conversing room. Bjorn and his
+      followers went there with the earl. Then the earl began, and told how Olaf
+      king of Norway had sent these men hither to conclude a peaceful agreement.
+      He showed at great length what injury it was of to the West Gautland
+      people, that there was hostility between their country and Norway. He
+      further related that Olaf the king of Norway had sent ambassadors, who
+      were here present, and to whom he had promised he would attend them to the
+      Swedish king; but he added, "The Swedish king takes the matter so
+      grievously, that he has uttered menaces against those who entertain it.
+      Now so it is, my foster-father, that I do not trust to myself in this
+      matter; but am come on a visit to thee to get good counsel and help from
+      thee in the matter."
+      Now when the earl had done speaking Thorgny sat silent for a while, and
+      then took up the word. "Ye have curious dispositions who are so ambitious
+      of honour and renown, and yet have no prudence or counsel in you when you
+      get into any mischief. Why did you not consider, before you gave your
+      promise to this adventure, that you had no power to stand against King
+      Olaf? In my opinion it is not a less honourable condition to be in the
+      number of bondes and have one's words free, and be able to say what one
+      will, even if the king be present. But I must go to the Upsala Thing, and
+      give thee such help that without fear thou canst speak before the king
+      what thou findest good."
+      The earl thanked him for the promise, remained with Thorgny, and rode with
+      him to the Upsala Thing. There was a great assemblage of people at the
+      Thing, and King Olaf was there with his court.
+      80. OF THE UPSALA THING.
+      The first day the Thing sat, King Olaf was seated on a stool, and his
+      court stood in a circle around him. Right opposite to him sat Earl
+      Ragnvald and Thorgny in the Thing upon one stool, and before them the
+      earl's court and Thorgny's house-people. Behind their stool stood the
+      bonde community, all in a circle around them. Some stood upon hillocks and
+      heights, in order to hear the better. Now when the king's messages, which
+      are usually handled in the Things, were produced and settled, the marshal
+      Bjorn rose beside the earl's stool, and said aloud, "King Olaf sends me
+      here with the message that he will offer to the Swedish king peace, and
+      the frontiers that in old times were fixed between Norway and Svithjod."
+      He spoke so loud that the Swedish king could distinctly hear him; but at
+      first, when he heard King Olaf's name spoken, he thought the speaker had
+      some message or business of his own to execute; but when he heard of
+      peace, and the frontiers between Norway and Svithjod, he saw from what
+      root it came, and sprang up, and called out that the man should be silent,
+      for that such speeches were useless. Thereupon Bjorn sat down; and when
+      the noise had ceased Earl Ragnvald stood up and made a speech.
+      He spoke of Olaf the Thick's message, and proposal of peace to Olaf the
+      Swedish king; and that all the West Gautland people sent their entreaty to
+      Olaf that he would make peace with the king of Norway. He recounted all
+      the evils the West Gautlanders were suffering under; that they must go
+      without all the things from Norway which were necessary in their
+      households; and, on the other hand, were exposed to attack and hostility
+      whenever the king of Norway gathered an army and made an inroad on them.
+      The earl added, that Olaf the Norway king had sent men hither with the
+      intent to obtain Ingegerd the king's daughter in marriage.
+      When the earl had done speaking Olaf the Swedish king stood up and
+      replied, and was altogether against listening to any proposals of peace,
+      and made many and heavy reproaches against the earl for his impudence in
+      entering into a peaceful truce with the thick fellow, and making up a
+      peaceful friendship with him, and which in truth he considered treason
+      against himself. He added, that it would be well deserved if Earl Ragnvald
+      were driven out of the kingdom. The earl had, in his opinion, the
+      influence of his wife Ingebjorg to thank for what might happen; and it was
+      the most imprudent fancy he could have fallen upon to take up with such a
+      wife. The king spoke long and bitterly, turning his speech always against
+      Olaf the Thick. When he sat down not a sound was to be heard at first.
+      81. THORGNY'S SPEECH.
+      Then Thorgny stood up; and when he arose all the bondes stood up who had
+      before been sitting, and rushed together from all parts to listen to what
+      Lagman Thorgny would say. At first there was a great din of people and
+      weapons; but when the noise was settled into silent listening, Thorguy
+      made his speech. "The disposition of Swedish kings is different now from
+      what it has been formerly. My grandfather Thorgny could well remember the
+      Upsala king Eirik Eymundson, and used to say of him that when he was in
+      his best years he went out every summer on expeditions to different
+      countries, and conquered for himself Finland, Kirjalaland, Courland,
+      Esthonia, and the eastern countries all around; and at the present day the
+      earth-bulwarks, ramparts, and other great works which he made are to be
+      seen. And, more over, he was not so proud that he would not listen to
+      people who had anything to say to him. My father, again, was a long time
+      with King Bjorn, and was well acquainted with his ways and manners. In
+      Bjorn's lifetime his kingdom stood in great power, and no kind of want was
+      felt, and he was gay and sociable with his friends. I also remember King
+      Eirik the Victorious, and was with him on many a war-expedition. He
+      enlarged the Swedish dominion, and defended it manfully; and it was also
+      easy and agreeable to communicate our opinions to him. But the king we
+      have now got allows no man to presume to talk with him, unless it be what
+      he desires to hear. On this alone he applies all his power, while he
+      allows his scat-lands in other countries to go from him through laziness
+      and weakness. He wants to have the Norway kingdom laid under him, which no
+      Swedish king before him ever desired, and therewith brings war and
+      distress on many a man. Now it is our will, we bondes, that thou King Olaf
+      make peace with the Norway king, Olaf the Thick, and marry thy daughter
+      Ingegerd to him. Wilt thou, however, reconquer the kingdoms in the east
+      countries which thy relations and forefathers had there, we will all for
+      that purpose follow thee to the war. But if thou wilt not do as we desire,
+      we will now attack thee, and put thee to death; for we will no longer
+      suffer law and peace to be disturbed. So our forefathers went to work when
+      they drowned five kings in a morass at the Mula-thing, and they were
+      filled with the same insupportable pride thou hast shown towards us. Now
+      tell us, in all haste, what resolution thou wilt take." Then the whole
+      public approved, with clash of arms and shouts, the lagman's speech.
+      The king stands up and says he will let things go according to the desire
+      of the bondes. "All Swedish kings," he said, "have done so, and have
+      allowed the bondes to rule in all according to their will." The murmur
+      among the bondes then came to an end, and the chiefs, the king, the earl,
+      and Thorgny talked together, and concluded a truce and reconciliation, on
+      the part of the Swedish king, according to the terms which the king of
+      Norway had proposed by his ambassadors; and it was resolved at the Thing
+      that Ingegerd, the king's daughter, should be married to Olaf Haraldson.
+      The king left it to the earl to make the contract feast, and gave him full
+      powers to conclude this marriage affair; and after this was settled at the
+      Thing, they separated. When the earl returned homewards, he and the king's
+      daughter Ingegerd had a meeting, at which they talked between themselves
+      over this matter. She sent Olaf a long cloak of fine linen richly
+      embroidered with gold, and with silk points. The earl returned to
+      Gautland, and Bjorn with him; and after staying with him a short time,
+      Bjorn and his company returned to Norway. When he came to King Olaf he
+      told him the result of his errand, and the king returned him many thanks
+      for his conduct, and said Bjorn had had great success in bringing his
+      errand to so favourabie a conclusion against such animosity.
+      82. OF KING HROREK'S TREACHERY.
+      On the approach of spring (A.D. 1018) King Olaf went down to the coast,
+      had his ships rigged out, summoned troops to him, and proceeded in spring
+      out from Viken to the Naze, and so north to Hordaland. He then sent
+      messages to all the lendermen, selected the most considerable men in each
+      district, and made the most splendid preparations to meet his bride. The
+      wedding-feast was to be in autumn, at the Gaut river, on the frontiers of
+      the two countries. King Olaf had with him the blind king Hrorek. When his
+      wound was healed, the king gave him two men to serve him, let him sit in
+      the high-seat by his side, and kept him in meat and clothes in no respect
+      Norse than he had kept himself before. Hrorek was taciturn, and answered
+      short and cross when any one spoke to him. It was his custom to make his
+      footboy, when he went out in the daytime, lead him away from people, and
+      then to beat the lad until he ran away. He would then complain to King
+      Olaf that the lad would not serve him. The king changed his servants, but
+      it was as before; no servant would hold it out with King Hrorek. Then the
+      king appointed a man called Svein to wait upon and serve King Hrorek. He
+      was Hrorek's relation, and had formerly been in his service. Hrorek
+      continued with his habits of moroseness, and of solitary walks; but when
+      he and Svein were alone together, he was merry and talkative. He used to
+      bring up many things which had happened in former days when he was king.
+      He alluded, too, to the man who had, in his former days, torn him from his
+      kingdom and happiness, and made him live on alms. "It is hardest of all,"
+      says he, "that thou and my other relations, who ought to be men of
+      bravery, are so degenerated that thou wilt not avenge the shame and
+      disgrace brought upon our race." Such discourse he often brought out.
+      Svein said, they had too great a power to deal with, while they themselves
+      had but little means. Hrorek said, "Why should we live longer as mutilated
+      men with disgrace? I, a blind man, may conquer them as well as they
+      conquered me when I was asleep. Come then, let us kill this thick Olaf. He
+      is not afraid for himself at present. I will lay the plan, and would not
+      spare my hands if I could use them, but that I cannot by reason of my
+      blindness; therefore thou must use the weapons against him, and as soon as
+      Olaf is killed I can see well enough that his power must come into the
+      hands of his enemies, and it may well be that I shall be king, and thou
+      shalt be my earl." So much persuasion he used that Svein at last agreed to
+      join in the deed. The plan was so laid that when the king was ready to go
+      to vespers, Svein stood on the threshold with a drawn dagger under his
+      cloak. Now when the king came out of the room, it so happened that he
+      walked quicker than Svein expected; and when he looked the king in the
+      face he grew pale, and then white as a corpse, and his hand sank down. The
+      king observed his terror and said, "What is this, Svein? Wilt thou betray
+      me?" Svein threw down his cloak and dagger, and fell at the king's feet,
+      saying, "All is in Gods hands and thine, king!" The king ordered his men
+      to seize Svein, and he was put in irons. The king ordered Hrorek's seat to
+      be moved to another bench. He gave Svein his life, and he left the
+      country. The king appointed a different lodging for Hrorek to sleep in
+      from that in which he slept himself, and in which many of his court-people
+      slept. He set two of his court-men, who had been long with him, and whose
+      fidelity he had proof of, to attend Hrorek day and night; but it is not
+      said whether they were people of high birth or not. King Hrorek's mood was
+      very different at different times. Sometimes he would sit silent for days
+      together, so that no man could get a word out of him; and sometimes he was
+      so merry and gay, that people found a joke in every word he said.
+      Sometimes his words were very bitter. He was sometimes in a mood that he
+      would drink them all under the benches, and made all his neighbours drunk;
+      but in general he drank but little. King Olaf gave him plenty of
+      pocket-money. When he went to his lodgings he would often, before going to
+      bed, have some stoups of mead brought in, which he gave to all the men in
+      the house to drink, so that he was much liked.
+      83. OF LITTLE FIN.
+      There was a man from the Uplands called Fin the Little, and some said of
+      him that he was of Finnish (1) race. He was a remarkable little man, but
+      so swift of foot that no horse could overtake him. He was a particularly
+      well-excercised runner with snow-shoes, and shooter with the bow. He had
+      long been in the service of King Hrorek, and often employed in errands of
+      trust. He knew the roads in all the Upland hills, and was well known to
+      all the great people. Now when King Hrorek was set under guards on the
+      journey Fin would often slip in among the men of the guard, and followed,
+      in general, with the lads and serving-men; but as often as he could he
+      waited upon Hrorek, and entered into conversation with him. The king,
+      however, only spoke a word or two with him at a time, to prevent
+      suspicion. In spring, when they came a little way beyond Viken, Fin
+      disappeared from the army for some days, but came back, and stayed with
+      them a while. This happened often, without anyone observing it
+      particularly; for there were many such hangers-on with the army.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The Laplanders are called Fins In Norway and Sweden. -L.
+      84. MURDER OF OLAF'S COURT-MEN.
+      King Olaf came to Tunsberg before Easter (A.D. 1018), and remained there
+      late in spring. Many merchant vessels came to the town, both from
+      Saxon-land and Denmark, and from Viken, and from the north parts of the
+      country. There was a great assemblage of people; and as the times were
+      good, there was many a drinking meeting. It happened one evening that King
+      Hrorek came rather late to his lodging; and as he had drunk a great deal,
+      he was remarkably merry. Little Fin came to him with a stoup of mead with
+      herbs in it, and very strong. The king made every one in the house drunk,
+      until they fell asleep each in his berth. Fin had gone away, and a light
+      was burning in the lodging. Hrorek waked the men who usually followed him,
+      and told them he wanted to go out into the yard. They had a lantern with
+      them, for outside it was pitch dark. Out in the yard there was a large
+      privy standing upon pillars, and a stair to go up to it. While Hrorek and
+      his guards were in the yard they heard a man say, "Cut down that devil;"
+      and presently a crash, as if somebody fell. Hrorek said, "These fellows
+      must be dead drunk to be fighting with each other so: run and separate
+      them." They rushed out; but when they came out upon the steps both of them
+      were killed: the man who went out the last was the first killed. There
+      were twelve of Hrorek's men there, and among them Sigurd Hit, who had been
+      his banner-man, and also little Fin. They drew the dead bodies up between
+      the houses, took the king with them, ran out to a boat they had in
+      readiness, and rowed away. Sigvat the skald slept in King Olaf's lodgings.
+      He got up in the night, and his footboy with him, and went to the privy.
+      But as they were returning, on going down the stairs Sigvat's foot
+      slipped, and he fell on his knee; and when he put out his hands he felt
+      the stairs wet. "I think," said he, laughing, "the king must have given
+      many of us tottering legs tonight." When they came into the house in which
+      light was burning the footboy said, "Have you hurt yourself that you are
+      all over so bloody?" He replied, "I am not wounded, but something must
+      have happened here." Thereupon he wakened Thord Folason, who was
+      standard-bearer, and his bedfellow. They went out with a light, and soon
+      found the blood. They traced it, and found the corpses, and knew them.
+      They saw also a great stump of a tree in which clearly a gash had been
+      cut, which, as was afterwards known, had been done as a stratagem to
+      entice those out who had been killed. Sigvat and Thord spoke together and
+      agreed it was highly necessary to let the king know of this without delay.
+      They immediately sent a lad to the lodging where Hrorek had been. All the
+      men in it were asleep; but the king was gone. He wakened the men who were
+      in the house, and told them what had happened. The men arose, and ran out
+      to the yard where the bodies were; but, however needful it appeared to be
+      that the king should know it, nobody dared to waken him.
+      Then said Sigvat to Thord, "What wilt thou rather do, comrade, waken the
+      king, or tell him the tidings?"
+      Thord replies, "I do not dare to waken him, and I would rather tell him
+      the news."
+      Then said Sigvat, "There is minch of the night still to pass, and before
+      morning Hrorek may get himself concealed in such a way that it may be
+      difficult to find him; but as yet he cannot be very far off, for the
+      bodies are still warm. We must never let the disgrace rest upon us of
+      concealing this treason from the king. Go thou, up to the lodging, and
+      wait for me there."
+      Sigvat then went to the church, and told the bell-ringer to toll for the
+      souls of the king's court-men, naming the men who were killed.
+      The-bell-ringer did as he was told. The king awoke at the ringing, sat up
+      in his bed, and asked if it was already the hours of matins.
+      Thord replies, "It is worse than that, for there has occurred a very
+      important affair. Hrorek is fled, and two of the court-men are killed."
+      The king asked how this had taken place, and Thord told him all he knew.
+      The king got up immediately, ordered to sound the call for a meeting of
+      the court, and when the people were assembled he named men to go out to
+      every quarter from the town, by sea and land, to search for Hrorek. Thorer
+      Lange took a boat, and set off with thirty men; and when day dawned they
+      saw two small boats before them in the channel, and when they saw each
+      other both parties rowed as hard as they could. King Hrorek was there with
+      thirty men. When they came quite close to each other Hrorek and his men
+      turned towards the land, and all sprang on shore except the king, who sat
+      on the aft seat. He bade them farewell, and wished they might meet each
+      other again in better luck. At the same moment Thorer with his company
+      rowed to the land. Fin the Little shot off an arrow, which hit Thorer in
+      the middle of the body, and was his death; and Sigurd Hit, with his men,
+      ran up into the forest. Thorer's men took his body, and transported it,
+      together with Hrorek, to Tunsberg. King Olaf undertook himself thereafter
+      to look after King Hrorek, made him be carefully guarded, and took good
+      care of his treason, for which reason he had a watch over him night and
+      day. King Hrorek thereafter was very gay, and nobody could observe but
+      that he was in every way well satisfied.
+      85. OF HROREK'S ASSAULT.
+      It happened on Ascension-day that King Olaf went to high mass, and the
+      bishop went in procession around the church, and conducted the king; and
+      when they came back to the church the bishop led the king to his seat on
+      the north side of the choir. There Hrorek sat next to the king, and
+      concealed his countenance in his upper cloak. When Olaf had seated himself
+      Hrorek laid his hand on the king's shoulder, and felt it.
+      "Thou hast fine clothes on, cousin, today," said he.
+      King Olaf replies, "It is a festival today, in remembrance that Jesus
+      Christ ascended to heaven from earth."
+      King Hrorek says, "I understand nothing about it so as to hold in my mind
+      what ye tell me about Christ. Much of what ye tell me appears to me
+      incredible, although many wonderful things may have come to pass in old
+      times."
+      When the mass was finished Olaf stood up, held his hands up over his head,
+      and bowed down before the altar, so that his cloak hung down behind his
+      shoulders. Then King Hrorek started up hastily and sharply, and struck at
+      the king with a long knife of the kind called ryting; but the blow was
+      received in the upper cloak at the shoulder, because the king was bending
+      himself forwards. The clothes were much cut, but the king was not wounded.
+      When the king perceived the attack he sprang upon the floor; and Hrorek
+      struck at him again with the knife, but did not reach him, and said, "Art
+      thou flying, Olaf, from me, a blind men?" The king ordered his men to
+      seize him and lead him out of the church, which was done. After this
+      attempt many hastened to King Olaf, and advised that King Hrorek should be
+      killed. "It is," said they, "tempting your luck in the highest degree,
+      king, to keep him with you, and protect him, whatever mischief he may
+      undertake; for night and day he thinks upon taking your life. And if you
+      send him away, we know no one who can watch him so that he will not in all
+      probability escape; and if once he gets loose he will assemble a great
+      multitude, and do much evil."
+      The king replies, "You say truly that many a one has suffered death for
+      less offence than Hrorek's; but willingly I would not darken the victory I
+      gained over the Upland kings, when in one morning hour I took five kings
+      prisoners, and got all their kingdoms: but yet, as they were my relations,
+      I should not be their murderer but upon need. As yet I can scarcely see
+      whether Hrorek puts me in the necessity of killing him or not."
+      It was to feel if King Olaf had armour on or not that Hrorek had laid his
+      hand on the king's shoulder.
+      86. KING HROREK'S JOURNEY TO ICELAND.
+      There was an Iceland man, by name Thorarin Nefiulfson, who had his
+      relations in the north of the country. He was not of high birth, but
+      particularly prudent, eloquent, and agreeable in conversation with people
+      of distinction. He was also a far-travelled man, who had been long in
+      foreign parts. Thorarin was a remarkably ugly man, principally because he
+      had very ungainly limbs. He had great ugly hands, and his feet were still
+      uglier. Thorarin was in Tunsberg when this event happened which has just
+      been related, and he was known to King Olaf by their having had
+      conversations together. Thorarin was just then done with rigging out a
+      merchant vessel which he owned, and with which he intended to go to
+      Iceland in summer. King Olaf had Thorarin with him as a guest for some
+      days, and conversed much with him; and Thorarin even slept in the king's
+      lodgings. One morning early the king awoke while the others were still
+      sleeping. The sun had newly risen in the sky, and there was much light
+      within. The king saw that Thorarin had stretched out one of his feet from
+      under the bed-clothes, and he looked at the foot a while. In the meantime
+      the others in the lodging awoke; and the king said to Thorarin, "I have
+      been awake for a while, and have seen a sight which was worth seeing; and
+      that is a man's foot so ugly that I do not think an uglier can be found in
+      this merchant town." Thereupon he told the others to look at it, and see
+      if it was not so; and all agreed with the king. When Thorarin observed
+      what they were talking about, he said, "There are few things for which you
+      cannot find a match, and that may be the case here."
+      The king says, "I would rather say that such another ugly foot cannot be
+      found in the town, and I would lay any wager upon it."
+      Then said Thorarin, "I am willing to bet that I shall find an uglier foot
+      still in the town."
+      The king -"Then he who wins shall have the right to get any demand
+      from the other he chooses to make."
+      "Be it so," said Thorarin. Thereupon he stretches out his other foot from
+      under the bed-clothes, and it was in no way handsomer than the other, and
+      moreover, wanted the little toe. "There," said Thorarin, "see now, king,
+      my other foot, which is so much uglier; and, besides, has no little toe.
+      Now I have won."
+      The king replies, "That other foot was so much uglier than this one by
+      having five ugly toes upon it, and this has only four; and now I have won
+      the choice of asking something from thee."
+      "The sovereign's decision must be right," says Thorarin; "but what does
+      the king require of me?"
+      "To take Hrorek," said the king, "to Greenland, and deliver him to Leif
+      Eirikson."
+      Thorarin replies, "I have never been in Greenland."
+      The king -"Thou, who art a far-travelled man, wilt now have an
+      opportunity of seeing Greenland, if thou hast never been there before."
+      At first Thorarin did not say much about it; but as the king insisted on
+      his wish he did not entirely decline, but said, "I will let you hear,
+      king, what my desire would have been had I gained the wager. It would have
+      been to be received into your body of court-men; and if you will grant me
+      that, I will be the more zealous now in fulfilling your pleasure." The
+      king gave his consent, and Thorarin was made one of the court-men. Then
+      Thorarin rigged out his vessel, and when he was ready he took on board
+      King Hrorek. When Thorarin took leave of King Olaf, he said, "Should it
+      now turn out, king, as is not improbable, and often happens, that we
+      cannot effect the voyage to Greenland, but must run for Iceland or other
+      countries, how shall I get rid of this king in a way that will be
+      satisfactory to you?"
+      The king -"If thou comest to Iceland, deliver him into the hands of
+      Gudmund Eyolfson, or of Skapte, the lagman, or of some other chief who
+      will receive my tokens and message of friendship. But if thou comest to
+      other countries nearer to this, do so with him that thou canst know with
+      certainty that King Hrorek never again shall appear in Norway; but do so
+      only when thou seest no other way of doing whatsoever."
+      When Thorarin was ready for sea, and got a wind, he sailed outside of all
+      the rocks and islands, and when he was to the north of the Naze set right
+      out into the ocean. He did not immediately get a good wind, but he avoided
+      coming near the land. He sailed until he made land which he knew, in the
+      south part of Iceland, and sailed west around the land out into the
+      Greenland ocean.
+      There he encountered heavy storms, and drove long about upon the ocean;
+      but when summer was coming to an end he landed again in Iceland in
+      Breidafjord. Thorgils Arason (1) was the first man of any consequence who
+      came to him. Thorarin brings him the king's salutation, message, and
+      tokens, with which was the desire about King Hrorek's reception. Thorgils
+      received these in a friendly way, and invited King Hrorek to his house,
+      where he stayed all winter. But he did not like being there, and begged
+      that Thorgils would let him go to Gudmund; saying he had heard some time
+      or other that there in Gudmund's house, was the most sumptuous way of
+      living in Iceland, and that it was intended he should be in Gudmund's
+      hands. Thorgils let him have his desire, and conducted him with some men
+      to Gudmund at Modruveller. Gudmund received Hrorek kindly on account of
+      the king's message, and he stayed there the next winter. He did not like
+      being there either; and then Gudmund gave him a habitation upon a small
+      farm called Kalfskin, where there were but few neighbours. There Hrorek
+      passed the third winter, and said that since he had laid down his kingdom
+      he thought himself most comfortably situated here; for here he was most
+      respected by all. The summer after Hrorek fell sick, and died; and it is
+      said he is the only king whose bones rest in Iceland. Thorarin Nefiulfson
+      was afterwards for a long time upon voyages; but sometimes he was with
+      King Olaf.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Thorgils was the son of Are Marson, who visited America
+     (Vindland).  Thorgils, who was still alive in the year 1024,
+     was noted for his kindness toward all persecuted persons.
+      87. BATTLE IN ULFREKS-FJORD.
+      The summer that Thorarin went with Hrorek to Iceland, Hjalte Skeggjason
+      went also to Iceland, and King Olaf gave him many friendly gifts with him
+      when they parted. The same summer Eyvind Urarhorn went on an expedition to
+      the west sea, and came in autumn to Ireland, to the Irish king Konofogor
+      (1). In autumn Einar earl of Orkney and this Irish king met in
+      Ulfreks-fjord, and there was a great battle, in which Konofogor gained the
+      victory, having many more people. The earl fled with a single ship and
+      came back about autumn to Orkney, after losing most of his men and all the
+      booty they had made. The earl was much displeased with his expedition, and
+      threw the blame upon the Northmen, who had been in the battle on the side
+      of the Irish king, for making him lose the victory.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Konofogor's Irish name was Connor.
+      88. OLAF PREPARES FOR HIS BRIDAL JOURNEY.
+      Now we begin again our story where we let it slip -at King Olaf's
+      travelling to his bridal, to receive his betrothed Ingegerd the king's
+      daughter. The king had a great body of men with him, and so chosen a body
+      that all the great people he could lay hold of followed him; and every man
+      of consequence had a chosen band of men with him distinguished by birth or
+      other qualifications. The whole were well appointed, and equipped in
+      ships, weapons, and clothes. They steered the fleet eastwards to
+      Konungahella; but when they arrived there they heard nothing of the
+      Swedish king and none of his men had come there. King Olaf remained a long
+      time in summer (A.D. 1018) at Konungahella, and endeavored carefully to
+      make out what people said of the Swedish king's movements, or what were
+      his designs; but no person could tell him anything for certain about it.
+      Then he sent men up to Gautland to Earl Ragnvald, to ask him if he knew
+      how it came to pass that the Swedish king did not come to the meeting
+      agreed on. The earl replies, that he did not know. "But as soon," said he,
+      "as I hear, I shall send some of my men to King Olaf, to let him know if
+      there be any other cause for the delay than the multitude of affairs; as
+      it often happens that the Swedish king's movements are delayed by this
+      more than he could have expected."
+      89. OF THE SWEDISH KING'S CHILDREN.
+      This Swedish king, Olaf Eirikson, had first a concubine who was called
+      Edla, a daughter of an earl of Vindland, who had been captured in war, and
+      therefore was called the king's slave-girl. Their children were Emund,
+      Astrid, Holmfrid.... They had, besides, a son, who was born the day before
+      St. Jacob's-day. When the boy was to be christened the bishop called him
+      Jacob, which the Swedes did not like, as there never had been a Swedish
+      king called Jacob. All King Olaf's children were handsome in appearance,
+      and clever from childhood. The queen was proud, and did not behave well
+      towards her step-children; therefore the king sent his son Emund to
+      Vindland, to be fostered by his mother's relations, where he for a long
+      time neglected his Christianity. The king's daughter, Astrid, was brought
+      up in West Gautland, in the house of a worthy man called Egil. She was a
+      very lovely girl: her words came well into her conversation; she was
+      merry, but modest, and very generous. When she was grown up she was often
+      in her father's house, and every man thought well of her. King Olaf was
+      haughty and harsh in his speech. He took very ill the uproar and clamour
+      the country people had raised against him at the Upsala Thing, as they had
+      threatened him with violence, for which he laid the chief blame on Earl
+      Ragnvald. He made no preparation for the bridal, according to the
+      agreement to marry his daughter Ingegerd to Olaf the king of Norway, and
+      to meet him on the borders for that purpose. As the summer advanced many
+      of his men were anxious to know what the kings intentions were; whether to
+      keep to the agreement with King Olaf, or break his word, and with it the
+      peace of the country. But no one was so bold as to ask the king, although
+      they complained of it to Ingegerd, and besought her to find out what the
+      king intended. She replied "I have no inclination to speak to the king
+      again about the matters between him and King Olaf; for he answered me ill
+      enough once before when I brought forward Olaf's name." In the meantime
+      Ingegerd, the king's daughter, took it to heart, became melancholy and
+      sorrowful and yet very curious to know what the king intended. She had
+      much suspicion that he would not keep his word and promise to King Olaf;
+      for he appeared quite enraged whenever Olaf the Thick's name was in any
+      way mentioned.
+      90. OF THE SWEDISH KING OLAF'S HUNTING.
+      One morning early the king rode out with his dogs and falcons, and his men
+      around him. When they let slip the falcons the king's falcon killed two
+      black-cocks in one flight, and three in another. The dogs ran and brought
+      the birds when they had fallen to the ground. The king ran after them,
+      took the game from them himself, was delighted with his sport, and said,
+      "It will be long before the most of you have such success." They agreed in
+      this; adding, that in their opinion no king had such luck in hunting as he
+      had. Then the king rode home with his followers in high spirits. Ingegerd,
+      the king's daughter, was just going out of her lodging when the king came
+      riding into the yard, and she turned round and saluted him. He saluted her
+      in return, laughing; produced the birds, and told her the success of his
+      chase.
+      "Dost thou know of any king," said he, "who made so great a capture in so
+      short a time?"
+      "It is indeed," replied she, "a good morning's hunting, to have got five
+      black-cocks; but it was a still better when, in one morning, the king of
+      Norway, Olaf, took five kings, and subdued all their kingdoms."
+      When the king heard this he sprang from his horse, turned to Ingegerd, and
+      said, "Thou shalt know, Ingegerd, that however great thy love may be for
+      this man, thou shalt never get him, nor he get thee. I will marry thee to
+      some chief with whom I can be in friendship; but never can I be a friend
+      of the man who has robbed me of my kingdom, and done me great mischief by
+      marauding and killing through the land." With that their conversation
+      broke off, and each went away.
+      91. OLAF THE NORWAY KING'S COUNSELS.
+      Ingegerd, the king's daughter, had now full certainty of King Olaf's
+      intention, and immediately sent men to West Gautland to Earl Ragnvald, and
+      let him know how it stood with the Swedish king, and that the agreement
+      made with the king of Norway was broken; and advising the earl and people
+      of West Gautland to be upon their guard, as no peace from the people of
+      Norway was to be expected. When the earl got this news he sent a message
+      through all his kingdom, and told the people to be cautious, and prepared
+      in case of war or pillage from the side of Norway. He also sent men to
+      King Olaf the Thick, and let him know the message he had received, and
+      likewise that he wished for himself to hold peace and friendship with King
+      Olaf; and therefore he begged him not to pillage in his kingdom. When this
+      message came to King Olaf it made him both angry and sorry; and for some
+      days nobody got a word from him. He then held a House-Thing with his men,
+      and in it Bjorn arose, and first took the word. He began his speech by
+      telling that he had proceeded eastward last winter to establish a peace,
+      and he told how kindly Earl Ragnvald had received him; and, on the other
+      hand, how crossly and heavily the Swedish king had accepted the proposal.
+      "And the agreement," said he, "which was made, was made more by means of
+      the strength of the people, the power of Thorgny, and the aid of the earl,
+      than by the king's good-will. Now, on these grounds, we know for certain
+      that it is the king who has caused the breach of the agreement; therefore
+      we ought by no means to make the earl suffer, for it is proved that he is
+      King Olaf's firm friend." The king wished now to hear from the chiefs and
+      other leaders of troops what course he should adopt. "Whether shall we go
+      against Gautland, and maraud there with such men as we have got; or is
+      there any other course that appears to you more advisable?" He spoke both
+      long and well.
+      Thereafter many powerful men spoke, and all were at last agreed in
+      dissuading from hostilities. They argued thus: -"Although we are a
+      numerous body of men who are assembled here, yet they are all only people
+      of weight and power; but, for a war expedition, young men who are in quest
+      of property and consideration are more suitable. It is also the custom of
+      people of weight and power, when they go into battle or strife, to have
+      many people with them whom they can send out before them for their
+      defence; for the men do not fight worse who have little property, but even
+      better than those who are brought up in the midst of wealth." After these
+      considerations the king resolved to dismiss this army from any expedition,
+      and to give every man leave to return home; but proclaimed, at the same
+      time, that next summer the people over the whole country would be called
+      out in a general levy, to march immediately against the Swedish king, and
+      punish him for his want of faith. All thought well of this plan. Then the
+      king returned northwards to Viken, and took his abode at Sarpsborg in
+      autumn, and ordered all things necessary for winter provision to be
+      collected there; and he remained there all winter (A.D. 1019) with a great
+      retinue.
+      92. SIGVAT THE SKALD'S JOURNEY EASTWARDS.
+      People talked variously about Earl Ragnvald; some said he was King Olaf's
+      sincere friend; others did not think this likely, and thought it stood in
+      his power to warn the Swedish king to keep his word, and the agreement
+      concluded on between him and King Olaf. Sigvat the poet often expressed
+      himself in conversation as Earl Ragnvald's great friend, and often spoke
+      of him to King Olaf; and he offered to the king to travel to Earl
+      Ragnvald's and spy after the Swedish kings doings, and to attempt, if
+      possible, to get the settlement of the agreement. The king thought well of
+      this plan; for he oft, and with pleasure, spoke to his confidential
+      friends about Ingegerd, the king's daughter. Early in winter (A.D. 1019)
+      Sigvat the skald, with two companions, left Sarpsborg, and proceeded
+      eastwards over the moors to Gautland. Before Sigvat and King Olaf parted
+      he composed these verses: -
+     "Sit happy in thy hall, O king!
+     Till I come back, and good news bring:
+     The skald will bid thee now farewell,
+     Till he brings news well worth to tell.
+     He wishes to the helmed hero
+     Health, and long life, and a tull flow
+     Of honour, riches, and success -
+     And, parting, ends his song with this.
+     The farewell word is spoken now __
+     The word that to the heart lies nearest;
+     And yet, O king!  before I go,
+     One word on what I hold the dearest,
+     I fain would say, "O!  may God save
+     To thee the bravest of the brave,
+     The land, which is thy right by birth!"
+     This is my dearest with on earth."
+      Then they proceeded eastwards towards Eid, and had difficulty in crossing
+      the river in a little cobble; but they escaped, though with danger: and
+      Sigvat sang: -
+     "On shore the crazy boat I drew,
+     Wet to the skin, and frightened too;
+     For truly there was danger then;
+     The mocking hill elves laughed again.
+     To see us in this cobble sailing,
+     And all our sea-skill unavailing.
+     But better did it end, you see,
+     Than any of us could foresee."
+      Then they went through the Eid forest, and Sigvat sang: -
+     "A hundred miles through Eid's old wood,
+     And devil an alehouse, bad or good, -
+     A hundred miles, and tree and sky
+     Were all that met the weary eye.
+     With many a grumble, many a groan.
+     A hundred miles we trudged right on;
+     And every king's man of us bore
+     On each foot-sole a bleeding sore."
+      They came then through Gautland, and in the evening reached a farm-house
+      called Hof. The door was bolted so that they could not come in; and the
+      servants told them it was a fast-day, and they could not get admittance.
+      Sigvat sang: -
+     "Now up to Hof in haste I hie,
+     And round the house and yard I pry.
+     Doors are fast locked -but yet within,
+     Methinks, I hear some stir and din.
+     I peep, with nose close to the ground.
+     Below the door, but small cheer found.
+     My trouble with few words was paid -
+     "'Tis holy time,' the house-folkd said.
+     Heathens!  to shove me thus away!
+     I' the foul fiend's claws may you all lay."
+      Then they came to another farm, where the good-wife was standing at the
+      door, and told them not to come in, for they were busy with a sacrifice to
+      the elves. Sigvat sang of it thus: -
+     "'My poor lad, enter not, I pray!'
+     Thus to me did the old wife say;
+     'For all of us are heathens here,
+     And I for Odin's wrath do fear.'
+     The ugly witch drove me away,
+     Like scared wolf sneaking from his prey.
+     When she told me that there within
+     Was sacrifice to foul Odin."
+      Another evening, they came to three bondes, all of them of the name of
+      Olver, who drove them away. Sigvat sang: -
+     "Three of one name,
+     To their great shame,
+     The traveller late
+     Drove from their gate!
+     Travellers may come
+     From our viking-home,
+     Unbidden guests
+     At these Olvers' feasts."
+      They went on farther that evening, and came to a fourth bonde, who was
+      considered the most hospitable man in the country; but he drove them away
+      also. Then Sigvat sang: -
+     "Then on I went to seek night's rest
+     From one who was said to be the best,
+     The kindest host in the land around,
+     And there I hoped to have quarters found.
+     But, faith,'twas little use to try;
+     For not so much as raise an eye
+     Would this huge wielder of the spade:
+     If he's the hest, it must be said
+     Bad is the best, and the skald's praise
+     Cannot be given to churls like these.
+     I almost wished that Asta's son
+     In the Eid forest had been one
+     When we, his men, were even put
+     Lodging to crave in a heathen's hut.
+     I knew not where the earl to find;
+     Four times driven off by men unkind,
+     I wandered now the whole night o'er,
+     Driven like a dog from door to door."
+      Now when they came to Earl Ragnvald's the earl said they must have had a
+      severe journey. Then Sigvat sang: -
+     "The message-bearers of the king
+     From Norway came his words to bring;
+     And truly for their master they
+     Hard work have done before to-day.
+     We did not loiter on the road,
+     But on we pushed for thy abode:
+     Thy folk, in sooth, were not so kind
+     That we cared much to lag hehind.
+     But Eid to rest safe we found,
+     From robbers free to the eastern bound:
+     This praise to thee, great earl, is due -
+     The skald says only what is true."
+      Earl Ragnvald gave Sigvat a gold arm-ring, and a woman said "he had not
+      made the journey with his black eyes for nothing." Sigvat sang: -
+     "My coal-black eyes
+     Dost thou despise?
+     They have lighted me
+     Across the sea
+     To gain this golden prize:
+     They have lighted me,
+     Thy eyes to see,
+     O'er Iceland's main,
+     O'er hill and plain:
+     Where Nanna's lad would fear to be
+     They have lighted me."
+      Sigvat was long entertained kindly and well in the house of Earl Ragnvald.
+      The earl heard by letters, sent by Ingegerd the king's daughter, that
+      ambassadors from King Jarisleif were come from Russia to King Olaf of
+      Svithjod to ask his daughter Ingegerd in marriage, and that King Olaf had
+      given them hopes that he would agree to it. About the same time King
+      Olaf's daughter Astrid came to Earl Ragnvald's court, and a great feast
+      was made for her. Sigvat soon became acquainted by conversation with the
+      king's daughter, and she knew him by name and family, for Ottar the skald,
+      Sigvat's sister's son, had long intimate acquaintance with King Olaf, the
+      Swedish king. Among other things talked of, Earl Ragnvald asked Sigvat if
+      the king of Norway would not marry the king's daughter Astrid. "If he
+      would do that," said he, "I think we need not ask the Swedish king for his
+      consent." Astrid, the kings daughter, said exactly the same. Soon after
+      Sigvat returns home, and comes to King Olaf at Sarpsborg a little before
+      Yule.
+      When Sigvat came home to King Olaf he went into the hall, and, looking
+      around on the walls, he sang: -
+     "When our men their arms are taking
+     The raven's wings with greed are shaking;
+     When they come back to drink in hall
+     Brave spoil they bring to deck the wall -
+     Shield, helms, and panzers (1), all in row,
+     Stripped in the field from lifeless fow.
+     In truth no royal nail comes near
+     Thy splendid hall in precious gear."
+      Afterwards Sigvat told of his journey, and sang these verses: -
+     "The king's court-guards desire to hear
+     About our journey and our cheer,
+     Our ships in autumn reach the sound,
+     But long the way to Swedish ground.
+     With joyless weather, wind and raind,
+     And pinching cold, and feet in pain -
+     With sleep, fatigue, and want oppressed,
+     No songs had we -we scarce had rest."
+      And when he came into conversation with the king he sang: -
+     "When first I met the earl I told
+     How our king loved a friend so bold;
+     How in his heart he loved a man
+     With hand to do, and head to plan.
+     Thou generous king!  with zeal and care
+     I sought to advance thy great affair;
+     For messengers from Russian land
+     Had come to ask Ingegerd's hand.
+     The earl, thy friend, bids thee, who art
+     So mild and generous of heart,
+     His servants all who here may come
+     To cherish in thy royal home;
+     And thine who may come to the east
+     In Ragnvald's hall shall find a feast -
+     In Ragnvald's house shall find a home -
+     At Ragnvald's court be still welcome.
+     When first I came the people's mind
+     Incensed by Eirik's son I find;
+     And he refused the wish to meet,
+     Alleging treachery and deceit.
+     But I explained how it was here,
+     For earl and king, advantage clear
+     With thee to hold the strictest peace,
+     And make all force and foray cease.
+     The earl is wise, and understands
+     The need of peace for both the lands;
+     And he entreats thee not to break
+     The present peace for vengeance's sake!"
+      He immediately tells King Olaf the news he had heard; and at first the
+      king was much cast down when he heard of King Jarisleif's suit, and he
+      said he expected nothing but evil from King Olaf; but wished he might be
+      able to return it in such a way as Olaf should remember. A while
+      afterwards the king asks Sigvat about various news from Gautland. Sigvat
+      spoke a great deal about Astrid, the kings daughter; how beautiful she
+      was, how agreeable in her conversation; and that all declared she was in
+      no respect behind her sister Ingegerd. The king listened with pleasure to
+      this. Then Sigvat told him the conversation he and Astrid had had between
+      themselves, and the king was delighted at the idea. "The Swedish king,"
+      said he, "will scarcely think that I will dare to marry a daughter of his
+      without his consent." But this speech of his was not known generally. King
+      Olaf and Sigvat the skald often spoke about it. The king inquired
+      particularly of Sigvat what he knew about Earl Ragnvald, and "if he be
+      truly our friend," said the king. Sigvat said that the earl was King
+      Olaf's best friend, and sang these verses: -
+     "The mighty Olaf should not cease
+     With him to hold good terms and peace;
+     For this good earl unwearied shows
+     He is thy friend where all are foes.
+     Of all who dwell by the East Sea
+     So friendly no man is as he:
+     At all their Things he takes thy part,
+     And is thy firm friend, hand and heart."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The Pantzer -a complete suit of plate-armour.
+      93. RAGNVALD AND ASTRA'S JOURNEY.
+      After Yule (A.D. 1019), Thord Skotakol, a sister's son of Sigvat, attended
+      by one of Sigvat's footboys, who had been with Sigvat the autumn before in
+      Gautland, went quite secretly from the court, and proceeded to Gautland.
+      When they came to Earl Ragnvald's court, they produced the tokens which
+      Olaf himself had sent to the earl, that he might place confidence in
+      Thord. Without delay the earl made himself ready for a journey, as did
+      Astrid, the king's daughter; and the earl took with him 120 men, who were
+      chosen both from among his courtmen and the sons of great bondes, and who
+      were carefully equipped in all things, clothes, weapons, and horses. Then
+      they rode northwards to Sarpsborg, and came there at Candlemas.
+      94. OF KING OLAF'S MARRIAGE.
+      King Olaf had put all things in order in the best style. There were all
+      sorts of liquors of the best that could be got, and all other preparations
+      of the same quality. Many people of consequence were summoned in from
+      their residences. When the earl arrived with his retinue the king received
+      him particularly well; and the earl was shown to a large, good, and
+      remarkably well-furnished house for his lodging; and serving-men and
+      others were appointed to wait on him; and nothing was wanting, in any
+      respect, that could grace a feast. Now when the entertainment had lasted
+      some days, the king, the earl, and Astrid had a conference together; and
+      the result of it was, that Earl Ragnvald contracted Astrid, daughter of
+      the Swedish king Olaf, to Olaf king of Norway, with the same dowry which
+      had before been settled that her sister Ingegerd should have from home.
+      King Olaf, on his part, should give Astrid the same bride-gift that had
+      been intended for her sister Ingegerd. Thereupon an eke was made to the
+      feast, and King Olaf and Queen Astrid's wedding was drunk in great
+      festivity. Earl Ragnvald then returned to Gautland, and the king gave the
+      earl many great and good gifts at parting; and they parted the dearest of
+      friends, which they continued to be while they lived.
+      95. THE AGREEMENT BROKEN BY OLAF.
+      The spring (A.D. 1019) thereafter came ambassadors from King Jarisleif in
+      Novgorod to Svithjod, to treat more particularly about the promise given
+      by King Olaf the preceding summer to marry his daughter Ingegerd to King
+      Jarisleif. King Olaf tallied about the business with Ingegerd, and told
+      her it was his pleasure that she should marry King Jarisleif. She replied.
+      "If I marry King Jarisleif, I must have as my bride-gift the town and
+      earldom of Ladoga." The Russian ambassadors agreed to this, on the part of
+      their sovereign. Then said Ingegerd, "If I go east to Russia, I must
+      choose the man in Svithjod whom I think most suitable to accompany me; and
+      I must stipulate that he shall not have any less title, or in any respect
+      less dignity, privilege, and consideration there, than he has, here." This
+      the king and the ambassadors agreed to, and gave their hands upon it in
+      confirmation of the condition.
+      "And who," asked the king, "is the man thou wilt take with thee as thy
+      attendant?"
+      "That man," she replied, "is my relation Earl Ragnvald."
+      The king replies, "I have resolved to reward Earl Ragnvald in a different
+      manner for his treason against his master in going to Norway with my
+      daughter, and giving her as a concubine to that fellow, who he knew was my
+      greatest enemy. I shall hang him up this summer."
+      Then Ingegerd begged her father to be true to the promise he had made her,
+      and had confirmed by giving his hand upon it. By her entreaties it was at
+      last agreed that the king should promise to let Earl Ragnvald go in peace
+      from Svithjod, but that he should never again appear in the king's
+      presence, or come back to Svithjod while Olaf reigned. Ingegerd then sent
+      messengers to the earl to bring him these tidings, and to appoint a place
+      of meeting. The earl immediately prepared for his journey; rode up to East
+      Gautland; procured there a vessel, and, with his retinue, joined Ingegerd,
+      and they proceeded together eastward to Russia. There Ingegerd was married
+      to King Jarisleif; and their children were Valdemar, Vissivald, and Holte
+      the Bold. Queen Ingegerd gave Earl Ragnvald the town of Ladoga, and
+      earldom belonging to it. Earl Ragnvald was there a long time, and was a
+      celebrated man. His sons and Ingebjorg's were Earl Ulf and Earl Eilif.
+      96. HISTORY OF THE LAGMAN EMUND.
+      There was a man called Emund of Skara, who was lagman of west Gautland,
+      and was a man of great understanding and eloquence, and of high birth,
+      great connection, and very wealthy; but was considered deceitful, and not
+      to be trusted. He was the most powerful man in West Gautland after the
+      earl was gone. The same spring (A.D. 1019) that Earl Ragnvald left
+      Gautland the Gautland people held a Thing among themselves, and often
+      expressed their anxiety to each other about what the Swedish king might
+      do. They heard he was incensed because they had rather held in friendship
+      with the king of Norway than striven against him; and he was also enraged
+      against those who had attended his daughter Astrid to Norway. Some
+      proposed to seek help and support from the king of Norway, and to offer
+      him their services; others dissuaded from this measure, as West Gautland
+      had no strength to oppose to the Swedes. "And the king of Norway," said
+      they, "is far from us, the chief strength of his country very distant; and
+      therefore let us first send men to the Swedish king to attempt to come to
+      some reconciliation with him. If that fail, we can still turn to the king
+      of Norway." Then the bondes asked Emund to undertake this mission, to
+      which he agreed; and he proceeded with thirty men to East Gautland, where
+      there were many of his relations and friends, who received him hospitably.
+      He conversed there with the most prudent men about this difficult
+      business; and they were all unanimous on one point, -that the king's
+      treatment of them was against law and reason. From thence Emund went into
+      Svithjod, and conversed with many men of consequence, who all expressed
+      themselves in the same way. Emund continued his journey thus, until one
+      day, towards evening, he arrived at Upsala, where he and his retinue took
+      a good lodging, and stayed there all night. The next day Emund waited upon
+      the king, who was just then sitting in the Thing surrounded by many
+      people. Emund went before him, bent his knee, and saluted him. The king
+      looked at him, saluted him, and asked him what news he brought.
+      Emund replies, "There is little news among us Gautlanders; but it appears
+      to us a piece of remarkable news that the proud, stupid Atte, in
+      Vermaland, whom we look upon as a great sportsman, went up to the forest
+      in winter with his snow-shoes and his bow. After he had got as many furs
+      in the mountains as filled his hand-sledge so full that he could scarcely
+      drag it, he returned home from the woods. But on the way he saw a squirrel
+      in the trees, and shot at it, but did not hit; at which he was so angry,
+      that he left the sledge to run after the squirrel: but still the squirrel
+      sprang where the wood was thickest, sometimes among the roots of the
+      trees, sometimes in the branches, sometimes among the arms that stretch
+      from tree to tree. When Atte shot at it the arrows flew too high or too
+      low, and the squirrel never jumped so that Atte could get a fair aim at
+      him. He was so eager upon this chase that he ran the whole day after the
+      squirrel, and yet could not get hold of it. It was now getting dark; so he
+      threw himself down upon the snow, as he was wont, and lay there all night
+      in a heavy snow-storm. Next day Atte got up to look after his sledge, but
+      never did he find it again; and so he returned home. And this is the only
+      news, king, I have to tell."
+      The king says, "This is news of but little importance, if it be all thou
+      hast to tell."
+      Ernund replies, "Lately something happened which may well be called news.
+      Gaute Tofason went with five warships out of the Gaut river, and when he
+      was lying at the Eikrey Isles there came five large Danish merchant-ships
+      there. Gaute and his men immediately took four of the great vessels, and
+      made a great booty without the loss of a man: but the fifth vessel slipped
+      out to sea, and sailed away. Gaute gave chase with one ship, and at first
+      came nearer to them; but as the wind increased, the Danes got away. Then
+      Gaute wanted to turn back; but a storm came on so that he lost his ship at
+      Hlesey, with all the goods, and the greater part of his crew. In the
+      meantime his people were waiting for him at the Eikrey Isles: but the
+      Danes came over in fifteen merchant-ships, killed them all, and took all
+      the booty they had made. So but little luck had they with their greed of
+      plunder."
+      The king replied. "That is great news, and worth being told; but what now
+      is thy errand here?"
+      Emund replies, "I travel, sire, to obtain your judgment in a difficult
+      case, in which our law and the Upsala law do not agree."
+      The king asks, "What is thy appeal case?"
+      Emund replies, "There were two noble-born men of equal birth, but unequal
+      in property and disposition. They quarrelled about some land, and did each
+      other much damage; but most was done to him who was the more powerful of
+      the two. This quarrel, however, was settled, and judged of at a General
+      Thing; and the judgment was, that the most powerful should pay a
+      compensation. But at the first payment, instead of paying a goose, he paid
+      a gosling; for an old swine he paid a sucking pig; and for a mark of
+      stamped gold only a half-mark, and for the other half-mark nothing but
+      clay and dirt; and, moreover, threatened, in the most violent way, the
+      people whom he forced to receive such goods in payment. Now, sire, what is
+      your judgment?"
+      The king replies, "He shall pay the full equivalent whom the judgment
+      ordered to do so, and that faithfully; and further, threefold to his king:
+      and if payment be not made within a year and a day, he shall be cut off
+      from all his property, his goods confiscated, and half go the king's
+      house, and half to the other party."
+      Emund took witnesses to this judgment among the most considerable of the
+      men who were present, according to the laws which were held in the Upsala
+      Thing. He then saluted the king, and went his way; and other men brought
+      their cases before the king, and he sat late in the day upon the cases of
+      the people. Now when the king came to table, he asked where Lagman Emund
+      was. It was answered, he was home at his lodgings. "Then," said the king,
+      "go after him, and tell him to be my guest to-day." Thereafter the dishes
+      were borne in; then came the musicians with harps, fiddles, and musical
+      instruments; and lastly, the cup-bearers. The king was particularly merry,
+      and had many great people at table with him, so that he thought little of
+      Emund. The king drank the whole day, and slept all the night after; but in
+      the morning the king awoke, and recollected what Emund had said the day
+      before: and when he had put on his clothes, he let his wise men be
+      summoned to him; for he had always twelve of the wisest men who sat in
+      judgment with him, and treated the more difficult cases; and that was no
+      easy business, for the king was ill-pleased if the judgment was not
+      according to justice, and yet it was of no use to contradict him. In this
+      meeting the king ordered Lagman Emund to be called before them. The
+      messenger returned, and said, "Sire, Lagman Emund rode away yesterday as
+      soon as he had dined." "Then," said the king, "tell me, ye good chiefs,
+      what may have been the meaning of that law-case which Emund laid before us
+      yesterday?"
+      They replied, "You must have considered it yourself, if you think there
+      was any other meaning under it than what he said."
+      The king replied, "By the two noble-born men whom he spoke of, who were at
+      variance, and of whom one was more powerful than the other, and who did
+      each other damage, he must have meant us and Olaf the Thick."
+      They answered, "It is, sire, as you say."
+      The king -"Our case was judged at the Upsala Thing. But what was his
+      meaning when he said that bad payment was made; namely, a gosling for a
+      goose, a pig for a swine, and clay and dirt for half of the money instead
+      of gold?"
+      Arnvid the Blind replied, "Sire, red gold and clay are things very unlike;
+      but the difference is still greater between king and slave. You promised
+      Olaf the Thick your daughter Ingegerd, who, in all branches of her
+      descent, is born of kings, and of the Upland Swedish race of kings, which
+      is the most noble in the North; for it is traced up to the gods
+      themselves. But now Olaf has got Astrid; and although she is a king's
+      child, her mother was but a slave-woman, and, besides, of Vindish race.
+      Great difference, indeed, must there be between these kings, when the one
+      takes thankfully such a match; and now it is evident, as might be
+      expected, that no Northman is to be placed by the side of the Upsala
+      kings. Let us all give thanks that it has so turned out; for the gods have
+      long protected their descendants, although many now neglect this faith."
+      There were three brothers: -Arnvid the Blind, who had a great
+      understanding, but was so weak-sighted that he was scarcely fit for war;
+      the second was Thorvid the Stammerer, who could not utter two words
+      together at one time, but was remarkably bold and courageous; the third
+      was Freyvid the Deaf, who was hard of hearing. All these brothers were
+      rich and powerful men, of noble birth, great wisdom, and all very dear to
+      the king.
+      Then said King Olaf, "What means that which Emund said about Atte the
+      Dull?"
+      None made any reply, but the one looked at the other.
+      "Speak freely," said the king.
+      Then said Thorvid the Stammerer, "Atte -quarrel -some -greedy -jealous -deceitful -dull."
+      Then said the king, "To whom are these words of reproach and mockery
+      applied?"
+      Freyvid the Deaf replied, "We will speak more clearly if we have your
+      permission."
+      The king -"Speak freely, Freyvid, what you will."
+      Freyvid took up the word, and spoke. "My brother Thorvid, who is
+      considered to be the wisest of us brothers, holds the words 'quarrelsome,
+      greedy, jealous, dull,' to be one and the same thing; for it applies to
+      him who is weary of peace, longs for small things without attaining them,
+      while he lets great and useful things pass away as they came. I am deaf;
+      yet so loud have many spoken out, that I can perceive that all men, both
+      great and small, take it ill that you have not kept your promise to the
+      king of Norway; and, worse than that, that you broke the decision of the
+      community as it was delivered at Upsala Thing. You need not fear either
+      the king of Norway, or the king of Denmark, or any other, so long as the
+      Swedish army will follow you; but if the people of the country unanimously
+      turn against you, we, your friends, see no counsel that can be of
+      advantage to you."
+      The king asks, "Who is the chief who dares to betray the country and me?"
+      Freyvid replies, "All Swedes desire to have the ancient laws, and their
+      full rights. Look but here, sire, how many chiefs are sitting in council
+      with you. I think, in truth, we are but six whom you call your
+      councillors: all the others, so far as I know, have ridden forth through
+      the districts to hold Things with the people; and we will not conceal it
+      from you, that the message-token has gone forth to assemble a
+      Retribution-thing (1). All of us brothers have been invited to take part
+      in the decisions of this council, but none of us will bear the name of
+      traitor to the sovereign; for that our father never was."
+      Then the king said, "What council shall we take in this dangerous affair
+      that is in our hands? Good chiefs give me council, that I may keep my
+      kingdom, and the heritage of my forefathers; for I cannot enter into
+      strife against the whole Swedish force."
+      Arnvid the Blind replies, "Sire, it is my advice that you ride down to
+      Aros with such men as will follow you; take your ship there and go out
+      into the Maeler lake; summon all people to meet you; proceed no longer
+      with haughtiness, but promise every man the law and rights of old
+      established in the country; keep back in this way the message-token, for
+      it cannot as yet, in so short a time have travelled far through the land.
+      Send, then those of your men in whom you have the most confidence to those
+      who have this business on hand, and try if this uproar can be appeased."
+      The king says that he will adopt this advice. "I will," says he, "that ye
+      brothers undertake this business; for I trust to you the most among my
+      men."
+      Thorvid the Stammerer said, "I remain behind. Let Jacob, your son, go with
+      them, for that is necessary."
+      Then said Freyvid, "Let us do as Thorvid says: he will not leave you, and
+      I and Arnvid must travel."
+      This counsel was followed. Olaf went to his ships, and set out into the
+      Maelar lake, and many people came to him. The brothers Arnvid and Freyvid
+      rode out to Ullaraker, and had with them the king's son Jacob; but they
+      kept it a secret that he was there. The brothers observed that there was a
+      great concourse and war-gathering, for the bondes held the Thing night and
+      day. When Arnvid and Freyvid met their relations and friends, they said
+      they would join with the people; and many agreed to leave the management
+      of the business in the hands of the brothers. But all, as one man,
+      declared they would no longer have King Olaf over them, and no longer
+      suffer his unlawful proceedings, and over-weening pride which would not
+      listen to any man's remonstrances, even when the great chiefs spoke the
+      truth to him. When Freyvid observed the heat of the people, he saw in what
+      a bad situation the king's cause was. He summoned the chiefs of the land
+      to a meeting with him and addressed them thus: -"It appears to me,
+      that if we are to depose Olaf Eirikson from his kingdom, we Swedes of the
+      Uplands should be the leading men in it: for so it has always been, that
+      the counsel which the Upland chiefs have resolved among themselves has
+      always been followed by the men of the rest of the country. Our
+      forefathers did not need to take advice from the West Gautlanders about
+      the government of the Swedes. Now we will not be so degenerate as to need
+      Emund to give us counsel; but let us, friends and relations, unite
+      ourselves for the purpose of coming to a determination." All agreed to
+      this, and thought it was well said. Thereafter the people joined this
+      union which the Upland chiefs made among themselves, and Freyvid and
+      Arnvid were chiefs of the whole assemblage. When Emund heard this he
+      suspected how the matter would end, and went to both the brothers to have
+      a conversation with them. Then Freyvid asked Emund, "Who, in your opinion,
+      should we take for king, in case Olaf Eirikson's days are at an end?"
+      Emund -"He whom we think best suited to it, whether he be of the race
+      of chiefs or not."
+      Freyvid answers, "We Uplanders will not, in our time, have the kingdom go
+      out of the old race of our ancestors, which has given us kings for a long
+      course of generations, so long as we have so good a choice as now. King
+      Olaf has two sons, one of whom we will choose for king, although there is
+      a great difference between them. The one is noble-born, and of Swedish
+      race on both sides; the other is a slave-woman's son, and of Vindish race
+      on the mother's side."
+      This decision was received with loud applause, and all would have Jacob
+      for king.
+      Then said Emund. "Ye Upland Swedes have the power this time to determinate
+      the matter; but I will tell you what will happen: -some of those who
+      now will listen to nothing but that the kingdom remain in the old race
+      will live to see the day when they will wish the kingdom in another race,
+      as being of more advantage."
+      Thereupon the brothers Freyvid and Arnvid led the king's son Jacob into
+      the Thing, and saluted him with the title of king; and the Swedes gave him
+      the name of Onund, which he afterwards retained as long as he lived. He
+      was then ten or twelve years old. Thereafter King Onund took a court, and
+      chose chiefs to be around him; and they had as many attendants in their
+      suite as were thought necessary, so that he gave the whole assemblage of
+      bondes leave to return home. After that ambassadors went between the two
+      kings; and at last they had a meeting, and came to an agreement. Olaf was
+      to remain king over the country as long as he lived; but should hold peace
+      and be reconciled with King Olaf of Norway, and also with all who had
+      taken part in this business. Onund should also be king, and have a part of
+      the land, such as the father and son should agree upon; but should be
+      bound to support the bondes in case King Olaf did anything which the
+      bondes would not suffer.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Refsithing -a Thing for punishment by penalty or death for
+     crimes and misdemeanours. -L.
+      97. MEETING OF RECONCILIATION BETWEEN THE KINGS, AND THEIR GAME AT DICE.
+      Thereafter ambassadors were sent to Norway to King Olaf, with the errand
+      that he should come with his retinue to a meeting at Konungahella with the
+      Swedish kings, and that the Swedish kings would there confirm their
+      reconciliation. When King Olaf heard this message, he was willing, now as
+      formerly, to enter into the agreement, and proceeded to the appointed
+      place. There the Swedish kings also came; and the relations, when they
+      met, bound themselves mutually to peace and agreement. Olaf the Swedish
+      king was then remarkably mild in manner, and agreeable to talk with.
+      Thorstein Frode relates of this meeting, that there was an inhabited
+      district in Hising which had sometimes belonged to Norway, and sometimes
+      to Gautland. The kings came to the agreement between themselves that they
+      would cast lots by the dice to determine who should have this property,
+      and that he who threw the highest should have the district. The Swedish
+      king threw two sixes, and said King Olaf need scarcely throw. He replied,
+      while shaking the dice in his hand, "Although there be two sixes on the
+      dice, it would be easy, sire, for God Almighty to let them turn up in my
+      favour." Then he threw, and had sixes also. Now the Swedish king threw
+      again, and had again two sixes. Olaf king of Norway then threw, and had
+      six upon one dice, and the other split in two, so as to make seven eyes in
+      all upon it; and the district was adjudged to the king of Norway. We have
+      heard nothing else of any interest that took place at this meeting; and
+      the kings separated the dearest of friends with each other.
+      98. OF OLAF OF NORWAY, AFTER THE MEETING.
+      After the events now related Olaf returned with his people to Viken. He
+      went first to Tunsberg, and remained there a short time, and then
+      proceeded to the north of the country. In harvest-time he sailed north to
+      Throndhjem, and had winter provision laid in there, and remained there all
+      winter (A.D. 1090). Olaf Haraldson was now sole and supreme king of
+      Norway, and the whole of that sovereignty, as Harald Harfager had
+      possessed it, and had the advantage over that monarch of being the only
+      king in the land. By a peaceful agreement he had also recovered that part
+      of the country which Olaf the Swedish king had before occupied; and that
+      part of the country which the Danish king had got he retook by force, and
+      ruled over it as elsewhere in the country. The Danish king Canute ruled at
+      that time both over Denmark and England; but he himself was in England for
+      the most part, and set chiefs over the country in Denmark, without at that
+      time making any claim upon Norway.
+      99. HISTORY OF THE EARLS OF ORKNEY.
+      It is related that in the days of Harald Harfager, the king of Norway, the
+      islands of Orkney, which before had been only a resort for vikings, were
+      settled. The first earl in the Orkney Islands was called Sigurd, who was a
+      son of Eystein Giumra, and brother of Ragnvald earl of More. After Sigurd
+      his son Guthorm was earl for one year. After him Torf-Einar, a son of
+      Ragnvald, took the earldom, and was long earl, and was a man of great
+      power. Halfdan Haleg, a son of Harald Harfager, assaulted Torf-Einar, and
+      drove him from the Orkney Islands; but Einar came back and killed Halfdan
+      in the island Ronaldsha. Thereafter King Harald came with an army to the
+      Orkney Islands. Einar fled to Scotland, and King Harald made the people of
+      the Orkney Islands give up their udal properties, and hold them under oath
+      from him. Thereafter the king and earl were reconciled, so that the earl
+      became the king's man, and took the country as a fief from him; but that
+      it should pay no scat or feu-duty, as it was at that time much plundered
+      by vikings. The earl paid the king sixty marks of gold; and then King
+      Harald went to plunder in Scotland, as related in the "Glym Drapa". After
+      Torf-Einar, his sons Arnkel, Erlend, and Thorfin Hausakljufer (1) ruled
+      over these lands. In their days came Eirik Blood-axe from Norway, and
+      subdued these earls. Arnkel and Erlend fell in a war expedition; but
+      Thorfin ruled the country long, and became an old man. His sons were
+      Arnfin, Havard, Hlodver, Liot, and Skule. Their mother was Grelad, a
+      daughter of Earl Dungad of Caithness. Her mother was Groa, a daughter of
+      Thorstein Raud. In the latter days of Earl Thorfin came Eirik Blood-axe's
+      sons, who had fled from Earl Hakon out of Norway, and committed great
+      excesses in Orkney. Earl Thorfin died on a bed of sickness, and his sons
+      after him ruled over the country, and there are many stories concerning
+      them. Hlodver lived the longest of them, and ruled alone over this
+      country. His son was Sigurd the Thick, who took the earldom after him, and
+      became a powerful man and a great warrior. In his days came Olaf Trygvason
+      from his viking expedition in the western ocean, with his troops, landed
+      in Orkney and took Earl Sigurd prisoner in South Ronaldsha, where he lay
+      with one ship. King Olaf allowed the earl to ransom his life by letting
+      himself be baptized, adopting the true faith, becoming his man, and
+      introducing Christianity into all the Orkney Islands. As a hostage, King
+      Olaf took his son, who was called Hunde or Whelp. Then Olaf went to
+      Norway, and became king; and Hunde was several years with King Olaf in
+      Norway, and died there. After his death Earl Sigurd showed no obedience or
+      fealty to King Olaf. He married a daughter of the Scottish king Malcolm,
+      and their son was called Thorfin. Earl Sigurd had, besides, older sons;
+      namely, Sumarlide, Bruse, and Einar Rangmund. Four or five years after
+      Olaf Tryrgvason's fall Earl Sigurd went to Ireland, leaving his eldest
+      sons to rule the country, and sending Thorfin to his mother's father, the
+      Scottish king. On this expedition Earl Sigurd fell in Brian's battle (l).
+      When the news was received in Orkney, the brothers Sumarlide, Bruse, and
+      Einar were chosen earls, and the country was divided into three parts
+      among them. Thorfin Sigurdson was five years old when Earl Sigurd fell.
+      When the Scottish king heard of the earl's death he gave his relation
+      Thorfin Caithness and Sutherland, with the title of earl, and appointed
+      good men to rule the land for him. Earl Thorfin was ripe in all ways as
+      soon as he was grown up: he was stout and strong, but ugly; and as soon as
+      he was a grown man it was easy to see that he was a severe and cruel but a
+      very clever man. So says Arnor, the earls' skald: -
+     "Under the rim of heaven no other,
+     So young in years as Einar's brother,
+     In battle had a braver hand,
+     Or stouter, to defend the land."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Hausakljufer -the splitter of skulls. -L.
+    (2) Brian's battle is supposed to have taken place on the 23rd
+     April 1014, at Clontart, near Dublin; and is known in Irish
+     history as the battle of Clontarf, and was one of the
+     bloodiest of the age.  It was fought between a viking called
+     Sigtryg and Brian king of Munster, who gained the victory,
+     but lost his life. -L.
+      100. OF THE EARLS EINAR AND BRUSE.
+      The brothers Einar and Bruse were very unlike in disposition. Bruse was a
+      soft-minded, peaceable man, -sociable, eloquent, and of good
+      understanding. Einar was obstinate, taciturn, and dull; but ambitious,
+      greedy of money, and withal a great warrior. Sumarlide, the eldest of the
+      brothers, was in disposition like Bruse, and lived not long, but died in
+      his bed. After his death Thorfin claimed his share of the Orkney Islands.
+      Einar replied, that Thorfin had the dominions which their father Sigurd
+      had possessed, namely, Caithness and Sutherland, which he insisted were
+      much larger than a third part of Orkney; therefore he would not consent to
+      Thorfin's having any share. Bruse, on the other hand, was willing, he
+      said, to divide with him. "I do not-desire," he said, "more than the third
+      part of the land, and which of right belongs to me." Then Einar took
+      possession of two parts of the country, by which he became a powerful man,
+      surrounded by many followers. He was often in summer out on marauding
+      expeditions, and called out great numbers of the people to join him; but
+      it went always unpleasantly with the division of the booty made on his
+      viking cruises. Then the bondes grew weary of all these burdens; but Earl
+      Einar held fast by them with severity, calling in all services laid upon
+      the people, and allowing no opposition from any man; for he was
+      excessively proud and overbearing. And now there came dearth and scarcity
+      in his lands, in consequence of the services and money outlay exacted from
+      the bondes; while in the part of the country belonging to Bruse there were
+      peace and plenty, and therefore he was the best beloved by the bondes.
+      101. OF THORKEL AMUNDASON.
+      There was a rich and powerful man who was called Amunde, who dwelt in
+      Hrossey at Sandvik, in Hlaupandanes. His son, called Thorkel, was one of
+      the ablest men in the islands. Amunde was a man of the best understanding,
+      and most respected in Orkney. One spring Earl Einar proclaimed a levy for
+      an expedition, as usual. The bondes murmured greatly against it, and
+      applied to Amunde with the entreaty that he would intercede with the earl
+      for them. He replied, that the earl was not a man who would listen to
+      other people, and insisted that it was of no use to make any entreaty to
+      the earl about it. "As things now stand, there is a good understanding
+      between me and the earl; but, in my opinion, there would be much danger of
+      our quarrelling, on account of our different dispositions and views on
+      both sides; therefore I will have nothing to do with it." They then
+      applied to Thorkel, who was also very loath to interfere, but promised at
+      last to do so, in consequence of the great entreaty of the people. Amunde
+      thought he had given his promise too hastily. Now when the earl held a
+      Thing, Thorkel spoke on account of the people, and entreated the earl to
+      spare the people from such heavy burdens, recounting their necessitous
+      condition. The earl replies favourably, saying that he would take
+      Thorkel's advice. "I had intended to go out from the country with six
+      ships, but now I will only take three with me; but thou must not come
+      again, Thorkel, with any such request." The bondes thanked Thorkel for his
+      assistance, and the earl set out on a viking cruise, and came back in
+      autumn. The spring after, the earl made the same levy as usual, and held a
+      Thing with the bondes. Then Thorkel again made a speech, in which he
+      entreated the earl to spare the people. The earl now was angry, and said
+      the lot of the bondes should be made worse in consequence of his
+      intercession; and worked himself up into such a rage, that he vowed they
+      should not both come next spring to the Thing in a whole skin. Then the
+      Thing was closed. When Amunde heard what the earl and Thorkel had said at
+      the Thing, he told Thorkel to leave the country, and he went over to
+      Caithness to Earl Thorfin. Thorkel was afterwards a long time there, and
+      brought up the earl in his youth, and was on that account called Thorkel
+      the Fosterer; and he became a very celebrated man.
+      102. THE AGREEMENT OF THE EARLS.
+      There were many powerful men who fled from their udal properties in Orkney
+      on account of Earl Einar's violence, and the most fled over to Caithness
+      to Earl Thorfin: but some fled from the Orkney Islands to Norway, and some
+      to other countries. When Earl Thorfin was grown up he sent a message to
+      his brother Einar, and demanded the part of the dominion which he thought
+      belonged to him in Orkney; namely, a third of the islands. Einar was
+      nowise inclined to diminish his possessions. When Thorfin found this he
+      collected a warforce in Caithness, and proceeded to the islands. As soon
+      as Earl Einar heard of this he collected people, and resolved to defend
+      his country. Earl Bruse also collected men, and went out to meet them, and
+      bring about some agreement between them. An agreement was at last
+      concluded, that Thorfin should have a third part of the islands, as of
+      right belonging to him, but that Bruse and Einar should lay their two
+      parts together, and Einar alone should rule over them; but if the one died
+      before the other, the longest liver should inherit the whole. This
+      agreement seemed reasonable, as Bruse had a son called Ragnvald, but Einar
+      had no son. Earl Thorfin set men to rule over his land in Orkney, but he
+      himself was generally in Caithness. Earl Einar was generally on viking
+      expeditions to Ireland, Scotland, and Bretland.
+      103. EYVIND URARHORN'S MURDER.
+      One summer (A.D. 1018) that Earl Einar marauded in Ireland, he fought in
+      Ulfreks-fjord with the Irish king Konofogor, as has been related before,
+      and suffered there a great defeat. The summer after this (A.D. 1019)
+      Eyvind Urarhorn was coming from the west from Ireland, intending to go to
+      Norway; but the weather was boisterous, and the current against him, so he
+      ran into Osmundwall, and lay there wind-bound for some time. When Earl
+      Einar heard of this, he hastened thither with many people, took Eyvind
+      prisoner, and ordered him to be put to death, but spared the lives of most
+      of his people. In autumn they proceeded to Norway to King Olaf, and told
+      him Eyvind was killed. The king said little about it, but one could see
+      that he considered it a great and vexatious loss; for he did not usually
+      say much if anything turned out contrary to his wishes. Earl Thorfin sent
+      Thorkel Fosterer to the islands to gather in his scat. Now, as Einar gave
+      Thorkel the greatest blame for the dispute in which Thorfin had made claim
+      to the islands, Thorkel came suddenly back to Caithness from Orkney, and
+      told Earl Thorfin that he had learnt that Earl Einar would have murdered
+      him if his friends and relations had not given him notice to escape.
+      "Now," says he, "it is come so far between the earl and me, that either
+      some thing decisive between us must take place if we meet, or I must
+      remove to such a distance that his power will not reach me." The earl
+      encouraged Thorkel much to go east to Norway to King Olaf. "Thou wilt be
+      highly respected," says he, "wherever thou comest among honourable men;
+      and I know so well thy disposition and the earl's, that it will not be
+      long before ye come to extremities." Thereupon Thorkel made himself ready,
+      and proceeded in autumn to Norway, and then to King Olaf, with whom he
+      stayed the whole winter (A.D. 1020), and was in high favour. The king
+      often entered into conversation with him, and he thought, what was true,
+      that Thorkel was a high-minded man, of good understanding. In his
+      conversations with Thorkel, the king found a great difference in his
+      description of the two earls; for Thorkel was a great friend of Earl
+      Thorfin, but had much to say against Einar. Early in spring (A.D. 1020)
+      the king sent a ship west over the sea to Earl Thorfin, with the
+      invitation to come east and visit him in Norway. The earl did not decline
+      the invitation, for it was accompanied by assurances of friendship.
+      104. EARL EINAR'S MURDER.
+      Earl Thorfin went east to Norway, and came to King Olaf, from whom he
+      received a kind reception, and stayed till late in the summer. When he was
+      preparing to return westwards again, King Olaf made him a present of a
+      large and fully-rigged long-ship. Thorkel the Fosterer joined company with
+      the earl, who gave him the ship which he brought with him from the west.
+      The king and the earl took leave of each other tenderly. In autumn Earl
+      Thorfin came to Orkney, and when Earl Einar heard of it he went on board
+      his ships with a numerous band of men. Earl Bruse came up to his two
+      brothers, and endeavoured to mediate between them, and a peace was
+      concluded and confirmed by oath. Thorkel Fosterer was to be in peace and
+      friendship with Earl Einar; and it was agreed that each of them should
+      give a feast to the other, and that the earl should first be Thorkel's
+      guest at Sandwick. When the earl came to the feast he was entertained in
+      the best manner; but the earl was not cheerful. There was a great room, in
+      which there were doors at each end. The day the earl should depart Thorkel
+      was to accompany him to the other feast; and Thorkel sent men before, who
+      should examine the road they had to travel that day. The spies came back,
+      and said to Thorkel they had discovered three ambushes. "And we think,"
+      said they, "there is deceit on foot." When Thorkel heard this he
+      lengthened out his preparations for the journey, and gathered people about
+      him. The earl told him to get ready, as it was time to be on horseback.
+      Thorkel answered, that he had many things to put in order first, and went
+      out and in frequently. There was a fire upon the floor. At last he went in
+      at one door, followed by an Iceland man from Eastfjord, called Halvard,
+      who locked the door after him. Thorkel went in between the fire and the
+      place where the earl was sitting. The earl asked, "Art thou ready at last,
+      Thorkel?"
+      Thorkel answers, "Now I am ready;" and struck the earl upon the head so
+      that he fell upon the floor.
+      Then said the Icelander, "I never saw people so foolish as not to drag the
+      earl out of the fire;" and took a stick, which he set under the earl's
+      neck, and put him upright on the bench. Thorkel and his two comrades then
+      went in all haste out of the other door opposite to that by which they
+      went in, and Thorkel's men were standing without fully armed. The earl's
+      men now went in, and took hold of the earl. He was already dead, so nobody
+      thought of avenging him: and also the whole was done so quickly; for
+      nobody expected such a deed from Thorkel, and all supposed that there
+      really was, as before related, a friendship fixed between the earl and
+      Thorkel. The most who were within were unarmed, and they were partly
+      Thorkel's good friends; and to this may be added, that fate had decreed a
+      longer life to Thorkel. When Thorkel came out he had not fewer men with
+      him than the earl's troop. Thorkel went to his ship, and the earl's men
+      went their way. The same day Thorkel sailed out eastwards into the sea.
+      This happened after winter; but he came safely to Norway, went as fast as
+      he could to Olaf, and was well received by him. The king expressed his
+      satisfaction at this deed, and Thorkel was with him all winter (A.D.
+      1091).
+      105. AGREEMENT BETWEEN KING OLAF AND EARL BRUSE.
+      After Earl Einar's fall Bruse took the part of the country which he had
+      possessed; for it was known to many men on what conditions Einar and Bruse
+      had entered into a partnership. Although Thorfin thought it would be more
+      just that each of them had half of the islands, Bruse retained the
+      two-thirds of the country that winter (A.D. 1021). In spring, however,
+      Thorfin produced his claim, and demanded the half of the country; but
+      Bruse would not consent. They held Things and meetings about the business;
+      and although their friends endeavoured to settle it, Thorfin would not be
+      content with less than the half of the islands, and insisted that Bruse,
+      with his disposition, would have enough even with a third part. Bruse
+      replies, "When I took my heritage after my father I was well satisfied
+      with a third part of the country, and there was nobody to dispute it with
+      me; and now I have succeeded to another third in heritage after my
+      brother, according to a lawful agreement between us; and although I am not
+      powerful enough to maintain a feud against thee, my brother, I will seek
+      some other way, rather than willingly renounce my property." With this
+      their meeting ended. But Bruse saw that he had no strength to contend
+      against Thorfin, because Thorfin had both a greater dominion and also
+      could have aid from his mother's brother, the Scottish king. He resolved,
+      therefore, to go out of the country; and he went eastward to King Olaf,
+      and had with him his son Ragnvald, then ten years old. When the earl came
+      to the king he was well received. The earl now declared his errand, and
+      told the king the circumstances of the whole dispute between him and his
+      brother, and asked help to defend his kingdom of Orkney; promising, in
+      return, the fullest friendship towards King Olaf. In his answer, the king
+      began with showing how Harald Harfager had appropriated to himself all
+      udal rights in Orkney, and that the earls, since that time, have
+      constantly held the country as a fief, not as their udal property. "As a
+      sufficient proof of which," said he, "when Eirik Blood-axe and his sons
+      were in Orkney the earls were subject to them; and also when my relation
+      Olaf Trygvason came there thy father, Earl Sigurd, became his man. Now I
+      have taken heritage after King Olaf, and I will give thee the condition to
+      become my man and then I will give thee the islands as a fief; and we
+      shall try if I cannot give thee aid that will be more to the purpose than
+      Thorfin can get from the Scottish king. If thou wilt not accept of these
+      terms, then will I win back my udal property there in the West, as our
+      forefathers and relations of old possessed it."
+      The earl carefully considered this speech, laid it before his friends, and
+      demanded their advice if he should agree to it, and enter into such terms
+      with King Olaf and become his vassal. "But I do not see what my lot will
+      be at my departure if I say no; for the king has clearly enough declared
+      his claim upon Orkney; and from his great power, and our being in his
+      hands, it is easy for him to make our destiny what he pleases."
+      Although the earl saw that there was much to be considered for and against
+      it he chose the condition to deliver himself and his dominion into the
+      king's power. Thereupon the king took the earl's power, and the government
+      over all the earl's lands, and the earl became his vassal under oath of
+      fealty.
+      106. THE EARL'S AGREEMENT TO THE KING'S TERMS.
+      Thorfin the earl heard that his brother Bruse had gone east to King Olaf
+      to seek support from him; but as Thorfin had been on a visit to King Olaf
+      before, and had concluded a friendship with him, he thought his case would
+      stand well with the king, and that many would support it; but he believed
+      that many more would do so if he went there himself. Earl Thorfin
+      resolved, therefore, to go east himself without delay; and he thought
+      there would be so little difference between the time of his arrival and
+      Bruse's, that Bruse's errand could not be accomplished before he came to
+      King Olaf. But it went otherwise than Earl Thorfin had expected; for when
+      he came to the king the agreement between the king and Bruse was already
+      concluded and settled, and Earl Thorfin did not know a word about Bruse's
+      having surrendered his udal domains until he came to King Olaf. As soon as
+      Earl Thorfin and King Olaf met, the king made the same demand upon the
+      kingdom of Orkney that he had done to Earl Bruse, and required that
+      Thorfin should voluntarily deliver over to the king that part of the
+      country which he had possessed hitherto. The earl answered in a friendly
+      and respectful way, that the king's friendship lay near to his heart: "And
+      if you think, sire, that my help against other chiefs can be of use, you
+      have already every claim to it; but I cannot be your vessel for service,
+      as I am an earl of the Scottish king, and owe fealty to him."
+      As the king found that the earl, by his answer, declined fulfilling the
+      demand he had made, he said, "Earl, if thou wilt not become my vassal,
+      there is another condition; namely, that I will place over the Orkney
+      Islands the man I please, and require thy oath that thou wilt make no
+      claim upon these lands, but allow whoever I place over them to sit in
+      peace. If thou wilt not accept of either of these conditions, he who is to
+      rule over these lands may expect hostility from thee, and thou must not
+      think it strange if like meet like in this business."
+      The earl begged of the king some time to consider the matter. The king did
+      so, and gave the earl time to take the counsel of his friends on the
+      choosing one or other of these conditions. Then the earl requested a delay
+      until next summer, that he might go over the sea to the west, for his
+      proper counsellors were all at home, and he himself was but a child in
+      respect of age; but the king required that he should now make his election
+      of one or other of the conditions. Thorkel Fosterer was then with the
+      king, and he privately sent a person to Earl Thorfin, and told him,
+      whatever his intentions might be, not to think of leaving Olaf without
+      being reconciled with him, as he stood entirely in Olaf's power. From such
+      hints the earl saw there was no other way than to let the king have his
+      own will. It was no doubt a hard condition to have no hope of ever
+      regaining his paternal heritage, and moreover to bind himself by oath to
+      allow those to enjoy in peace his domain who had no hereditary right to
+      it; but seeing it was uncertain how he could get away, he resolved to
+      submit to the king and become his vassal, as Bruse had done. The king
+      observed that Thorfin was more high-minded, and less disposed to suffer
+      subjection than Bruse, and therefore he trusted less to Thorfin than to
+      Bruse; and he considered also that Thorfin would trust to the aid of the
+      Scottish king, if he broke the agreement. The king also had discernment
+      enough to perceive that Bruse, although slow to enter into an agreement,
+      would promise nothing but what he intended to keep; but as to Thorfin when
+      he had once made up his mind he went readily into every proposal and made
+      no attempt to obtain any alteration of the king's first conditions:
+      therefore the king had his suspicions that the earl would infringe the
+      agreement.
+      107. EARL THORFIN'S DEPARTURE, AND RECONCILIATION WITH THORKEL.
+      When the king had carefully considered the whole matter by himself, he
+      ordered the signal to sound for a General Thing, to which he called in the
+      earls. Then said the king, "I will now make known to the public our
+      agreement with the Orkney earls. They have now acknowledged my right of
+      property to Orkney and Shetland, and have both become my vassals, all
+      which they have confirmed by oath; and now I will invest them with these
+      lands as a fief: namely, Bruse with one third part and Thorfin with one
+      third, as they formerly enjoyed them; but the other third which Einar
+      Rangmund had, I adjudge as fallen to my domain, because he killed Eyvind
+      Urarhorn, my court-man, partner, and dear friend; and that part of the
+      land I will manage as I think proper. I have also my earls, to tell you it
+      is my pleasure that ye enter into an agreement with Thorkel Amundason for
+      the murder of your brother Einar, for I will take that business, if ye
+      agree thereto, within my own jurisdiction." The earls agreed to this, as
+      to everything else that the king proposed. Thorkel came forward, and
+      surrendered to the king's judgment of the case, and the Thing concluded.
+      King Olaf awarded as great a penalty for Earl Einar's murder as for three
+      lendermen; but as Einar himself was the cause of the act, one third of the
+      mulct fell to the ground. Thereafter Earl Thorfin asked the king's leave
+      to depart, and as soon as he obtained it made ready for sea with all
+      speed. It happened one day, when all was ready for the voyage, the earl
+      sat in his ship drinking; and Thorkel Amundason came unexpectedly to him,
+      laid his head upon the earl's knee, and bade him do with him what he
+      pleased. The earl asked why he did so. "We are, you know, reconciled men,
+      according to the king's decision; so stand up, Thorkel."
+      Thorkel replied, "The agreement which the king made as between me and
+      Bruse stands good; but what regards the agreement with thee thou alone
+      must determine. Although the king made conditions for my property and safe
+      residence in Orkney, yet I know so well thy disposition that there is no
+      going to the islands for me, unless I go there in peace with thee, Earl
+      Thorfin; and therefore I am willing to promise never to return to Orkney,
+      whatever the king may desire."
+      The earl remained silent; and first, after a long pause, he said, "If thou
+      wilt rather, Thorkel, that I shall judge between us than trust to the
+      king's judgment, then let the beginning of our reconciliation be, that you
+      go with me to the Orkney Islands, live with me, and never leave me but
+      with my will, and be bound to defend my land, and execute all that I want
+      done, as long as we both are in life."
+      Thorkel replies, "This shall be entirely at thy pleasure, earl, as well as
+      everything else in my power." Then Thorkel went on, and solemnly ratified
+      this agreement. The earl said he would talk afterwards about the mulct of
+      money, but took Thorkel's oath upon the conditions. Thorkel immediately
+      made ready to accompany the earl on his voyage. The earl set off as soon
+      as all was ready, and never again were King Olaf and Thorfin together.
+      108. EARL BRUSE'S DEPARTURE.
+      Earl Bruse remained behind, and took his time to get ready. Before his
+      departure the king sent for him, and said, "It appears to me, earl, that
+      in thee I have a man on the west side of the sea on whose fidelity I can
+      depend; therefore I intend to give thee the two parts of the country which
+      thou formerly hadst to rule over; for I will not that thou shouldst be a
+      less powerful man after entering into my service than before: but I will
+      secure thy fidelity by keeping thy son Ragnvald with me. I see well enough
+      that with two parts of the country and my help, thou wilt be able to
+      defend what is thy own against thy brother Thorfin." Bruse was thankful
+      for getting two thirds instead of one third of the country, and soon after
+      he set out, and came about autumn to Orkney; but Ragnvald, Bruse's son,
+      remained behind in the East with King Olaf. Ragnvald was one of the
+      handsomest men that could be seen, -his hair long, and yellow as
+      silk; and he soon grew up, stout and tall, and he was a very able and
+      superb man, both of great understanding and polite manners. He was long
+      with King Olaf. Otter Svarte speaks of these affairs in the poem he
+      composed about King Olaf: -
+     "From Shetland, far off in the cold North Sea,
+     Come chiefs who desire to be subject to thee:
+     No king so well known for his will, and his might,
+     To defend his own people from scaith or unright.
+     These isles of the West midst the ocean's wild roar,
+     Scarcely heard the voice of their sovereign before;
+     Our bravest of sovereigns before could scarce bring
+     These islesmen so proud to acknowledge their king."
+      109. OF THE EARLS THORFIN AND BRUSE.
+      The brothers Thorfin and Bruse came west to Orkney; and Bruse took the two
+      parts of the country under his rule, and Thorfin the third part. Thorfin
+      was usually in Caithness and elsewhere in Scotland; but placed men of his
+      own over the islands. It was left to Bruse alone to defend the islands,
+      which at that time were severely scourged by vikings; for the Northmen and
+      Danes went much on viking cruises in the west sea, and frequently touched
+      at Orkney on the way to or from the west, and plundered, and took
+      provisions and cattle from the coast. Bruse often complained of his
+      brother Thorfin, that he made no equipment of war for the defence of
+      Orkney and Shetland, yet levied his share of the scat and duties. Then
+      Thorfin offered to him to exchange, and that Bruse should have one third
+      and Thorfin two thirds of the land, but should undertake the defence of
+      the land, for the whole. Although this exchange did not take place
+      immediately, it is related in the saga of the earls that it was agreed
+      upon at last; and that Thorfin had two parts and Bruse only one, when
+      Canute the Great subdued Norway and King Olaf fled the country. Earl
+      Thorfin Sigurdson has been the ablest earl of these islands, and has had
+      the greatest dominion of all the Orkney earls; for he had under him
+      Orkney, Shetland, and the Hebudes, besides very great possessions in
+      Scotland and Ireland. Arnor, the earls' skald, tells of his possessions: -
+     "From Thurso-skerry to Dublin,
+     All people hold with good Thorfin -
+     All people love his sway,
+     And the generous chief obey."
+      Thorfin was a very great warrior. He came to the earldom at five years of
+      age, ruled more than sixty years, and died in his bed about the last days
+      of Harald Sigurdson. But Bruse died in the days of Canute the Great, a
+      short time after the fall of Saint Olaf.
+      110. OF HAREK OF THJOTTA.
+      Having now gone through this second story, we shall return to that which
+      we left, -at King Olaf Haraldson having concluded peace with King
+      Olaf the Swedish king, and having the same summer gone north to Throndhjem
+      (1019). He had then been king in Norway five years (A.D. 1015-1019). In
+      harvest time he prepared to take his winter residence at Nidaros, and he
+      remained all winter there (A.D. 1020). Thorkel the Fosterer, Amunde's son,
+      as before related, was all that winter with him. King Olaf inquired very
+      carefully how it stood with Christianity throughout the land, and learnt
+      that it was not observed at all to the north of Halogaland, and was far
+      from being observed as it should be in Naumudal, and the interior of
+      Throndhjem. There was a man by name Harek, a son of Eyvind Skaldaspiller,
+      who dwelt in an island called Thjotta in Halogaland. Eyvind had not been a
+      rich man, but was of high family and high mind. In Thjotta, at first,
+      there dwelt many small bondes; but Harek began with buying a farm not very
+      large and lived on it, and in a few years he had got all the bondes that
+      were there before out of the way; so that he had the whole island, and
+      built a large head-mansion. He soon became very rich; for he was a very
+      prudent man, and very successful. He had long been greatly respected by
+      the chiefs; and being related to the kings of Norway, had been raised by
+      them to high dignities. Harek's father's mother Gunhild was a daughter of
+      Earl Halfdan, and Ingebjorg, Harald Harfager's daughter. At the time the
+      circumstance happened which we are going to relate he was somewhat
+      advanced in years. Harek was the most respected man in Halogaland, and for
+      a long time had the Lapland trade, and did the king's business in Lapland;
+      sometimes alone, sometimes with others joined to him. He had not himself
+      been to wait on King Olaf, but messages had passed between them, and all
+      was on the most friendly footing. This winter (A.D. 1020) that Olaf was in
+      Nidaros, messengers passed between the king and Harek of Thjotta. Then the
+      king made it known that he intended going north to Halogaland, and as far
+      north as the land's end; but the people of Halogaland expected no good
+      from this expedition.
+      111. OF THE PEOPLE OF HALOGALAND.
+      Olaf rigged out five ships in spring (A.D. 1020), and had with him about
+      300 men. When he was ready for sea he set northwards along the land; and
+      when he came to Naumudal district he summoned the bondes to a Thing, and
+      at every Thing was accepted as king. He also made the laws to be read
+      there as elsewhere, by which the people are commanded to observe
+      Christianity; and he threatened every man with loss of life, and limbs,
+      and property who would not subject himself to Christian law. He inflicted
+      severe punishments on many men, great as well as small, and left no
+      district until the people had consented to adopt the holy faith. The most
+      of the men of power and of the great bondes made feasts for the king, and
+      so he proceeded all the way north to Halogaland. Harek of Thjotta also
+      made a feast for the king, at which there was a great multitude of guests,
+      and the feast was very splendid. Harek was made lenderman, and got the
+      same privileges he had enjoyed under the former chiefs of the country.
+      112. OF ASMUND GRANKELSON.
+      There was a man called Grankel, or Granketil, who was a rich bonde, and at
+      this time rather advanced in age. In his youth he had been on viking
+      cruises, and had been a powerful fighter; for he possessed great readiness
+      in all sorts of bodily exercises. His son Asmund was equal to his father
+      in all these, and in some, indeed, he excelled him. There were many who
+      said that with respect to comeliness, strength, and bodily expertness, he
+      might be considered the third remarkably distinguished for these that
+      Norway had ever produced. The first was Hakon Athelstan's foster-son; the
+      second, Olaf Trygvason. Grankel invited King Olaf to a feast, which was
+      very magnificent; and at parting Grankel presented the king with many
+      honourable gifts and tokens of friendship. The king invited Asmund, with
+      many persuasions, to follow him; and as Asmund could not decline the
+      honours offered him, he got ready to travel with the king, became his man,
+      and stood in high favour with him. The king remained in Halogaland the
+      greater part of the summer, went to all the Things, and baptized all the
+      people. Thorer Hund dwelt at that time in the island Bjarkey. He was the
+      most powerful man in the North, and also became one of Olaf's lendermen.
+      Many sons of great bondes resolved also to follow King Olaf from
+      Halogaland. Towards the end of summer King Olaf left the North, and sailed
+      back to Throndhjem, and landed at Nidaros, where he passed the winter
+      (A.D. 1021). It was then that Thorkel the Fosterer came from the West from
+      Orkney, after killing Einar Rangmumd, as before related. This autumn corn
+      was dear in Throndhjem, after a long course of good seasons, and the
+      farther north the dearer was the corn; but there was corn enough in the
+      East country, and in the Uplands, and it was of great help to the people
+      of Throndhjem that many had old corn remaining beside them.
+      113. OF THE SACRIFICES OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE.
+      In autumn the news was brought to King Olaf that the bondes had had a
+      great feast on the first winter-day's eve, at which there was a numerous
+      attendance and much drinking; and it was told the king that all the
+      remembrance-cups to the Asas, or old gods, were blessed according to the
+      old heathen forms; and it was added, that cattle and horses had been
+      slain, and the altars sprinkled with their blood, and the sacrifices
+      accompanied with the prayer that was made to obtain good seasons. It was
+      also reported that all men saw clearly that the gods were offended at the
+      Halogaland people turning Christian. Now when the king heard this news he
+      sent men into the Throndhjem country, and ordered several bondes, whose
+      names he gave, to appear before him. There was a man called Olver of
+      Eggja, so called after his farm on which he lived. He was powerful, of
+      great family, and the head-man of those who on account of the bondes
+      appeared before the king. Now, when they came to the king, he told them
+      these accusations; to which Olver, on behalf of the bondes, replied, that
+      they had had no other feasts that harvest than their usual entertainments,
+      and social meetings, and friendly drinking parties. "But as to what may
+      have been told you of the words which may have fallen from us Throndhjem
+      people in our drinking parties, men of understanding would take good care
+      not to use such language; but I cannot hinder drunken or foolish people's
+      talk." Olver was a man of clever speech, and bold in what he said, and
+      defended the bondes against such accusations. In the end, the king said
+      the people of the interior of Thorndhjem must themselves give the best
+      testimony to their being in the right faith. The bondes got leave to
+      return home, and set off as soon as they were ready.
+      114. OF THE SACRIFICES BY THE PEOPLE OF THE INTERIOR OF THE THRONDHJEM
+      DISTRICT.
+      Afterwards, when winter was advanced, it was told the king that the people
+      of the interior of Throndhjem had assembled in great number at Maerin, and
+      that there was a great sacrifice in the middle of winter, at which they
+      sacrificed offerings for peace and a good season. Now when the king knew
+      this on good authority to be true, he sent men and messages into the
+      interior, and summoned the bondes whom he thought of most understanding
+      into the town. The bondes held a council among themselves about this
+      message; and all those who had been upon the same occasion in the
+      beginning of winter were now very unwilling to make the journey. Olver,
+      however, at the desire of all the bondes, allowed himself to be persuaded.
+      When he came to the town he went immediately before the king, and they
+      talked together. The king made the same accusation against the bondes,
+      that they had held a mid-winter sacrifice. Olver replies, that this
+      accusation against the bondes was false. "We had," said he, "Yule feasts
+      and drinking feasts wide around in the districts; and the bondes do not
+      prepare their feasts so sparingly, sire, that there is not much left over,
+      which people consume long afterwards. At Maerin there is a great farm,
+      with a large house on it, and a great neighbourhood all around it, and it
+      is the great delight of the people to drink many together in company." The
+      king said little in reply, but looked angry, as he thought he knew the
+      truth of the matter better than it was now represented. He ordered the
+      bondes to return home. "I shall some time or other," said he, "come to the
+      truth of what you are now concealing, and in such a way that ye shall not
+      be able to contradict it. But, however, that may be, do not try such
+      things again." The bondes returned home, and told the result of their
+      journey, and that the king was altogether enraged.
+      115. MURDER OF OLVER OF EGGJA.
+      At Easter (A.D. 1021) the king held a feast, to which he had invited many
+      of the townspeople as well as bondes. After Easter he ordered his ships to
+      be launched into the water, oars and tackle to be put on board, decks to
+      be laid in the ships, and tilts (1) and rigging to be set up, and to be
+      laid ready for sea at the piers. Immediately after Easter he sent men into
+      Veradal. There was a man called Thoralde, who was the king's bailiff, and
+      who managed the king's farm there at Haug; and to him the king sent a
+      message to come to him as quickly as possible. Thoralde did not decline
+      the journey, but went immediately to the town with the messenger. The king
+      called him in and in a private conversation asked him what truth there was
+      in what had been told him of the principles and living of the people of
+      the interior of Throndhjem, and if it really was so that they practised
+      sacrifices to heathen gods. "I will," says the king, "that thou declare to
+      me the things as they are, and as thou knowest to be true; for it is thy
+      duty to tell me the truth, as thou art my man."
+      Thoralde replies, "Sire, I will first tell you that I have brought here to
+      the town my two children, my wife, and all my loose property that I could
+      take with me, and if thou desirest to know the truth it shall be told
+      according to thy command; but if I declare it, thou must take care of me
+      and mine."
+      The king replies, "Say only what is true on what I ask thee, and I will
+      take care that no evil befall thee."
+      Then said Thoralde, "If I must say the truth, king, as it is, I must
+      declare that in the interior of the Throndhjem land almost all the people
+      are heathen in faith, although some of them are baptized. It is their
+      custom to offer sacrifice in autumn for a good winter, a second at
+      mid-winter, and a third in summer. In this the people of Eyna, Sparby,
+      Veradal, and Skaun partake. There are twelve men who preside over these
+      sacrifice-feasts; and in spring it is Olver who has to get the feast in
+      order, and he is now busy transporting to Maerin everything needful for
+      it." Now when the king had got to the truth with a certainty, he ordered
+      the signal to be sounded for his men to assemble, and for the men-at-arms
+      to go on board ship. He appointed men to steer the ships, and leaders for
+      the people, and ordered how the people should be divided among the
+      vessels. All was got ready in haste, and with five ships and 300 men he
+      steered up the fjord. The wind was favourable, the ships sailed briskly
+      before it, and nobody could have thought that the king would be so soon
+      there. The king came in the night time to Maerin, and immediately
+      surrounded the house with a ring of armed men. Olver was taken, and the
+      king ordered him to be put to death, and many other men besides. Then the
+      king took all the provision for the feast, and had it brought to his
+      ships; and also all the goods, both furniture, clothes, and valuables,
+      which the people had brought there, and divided the booty among his men.
+      The king also let all the bondes he thought had the greatest part in the
+      business be plundered by his men-at-arms. Some were taken prisoners and
+      laid in irons, some ran away, and many were robbed of their goods.
+      Thereafter the bondes were summoned to a Thing; but because he had taken
+      many powerful men prisoners, and held them in his power, their friends and
+      relations resolved to promise obedience to the king, so that there was no
+      insurrection against the king on this occasion. He thus brought the whole
+      people back to the right faith, gave them teachers, and built and
+      consecrated churches. The king let Olver lie without fine paid for his
+      bloodshed, and all that he possessed was adjudged to the king; and of the
+      men he judged the most guilty, some he ordered to be executed, some he
+      maimed, some he drove out of the country, and took fines from others. The
+      king then returned to Nidaros.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The ships appear to have been decked fore and aft only;
+     and in the middle, where the rowers sat, to have had tilts or
+     tents set up at night to sleep under. -L.
+      116. OF THE SONS OF ARNE.
+      There was a man called Arne Arnmodson, who was married to Thora, Thorstein
+      Galge's daughter. Their children were Kalf, Fin, Thorberg, Amunde,
+      Kolbjorn, Arnbjorn, and Arne. Their daughter, who was called Ragnhild, was
+      married to Harek of Thjotta. Arne was a lenderman, powerful, and of
+      ability, and a great friend of King Olaf. At that time his sons Kalf and
+      Fin were with the king, and in great favour. The wife whom Olver of Eggja
+      had left was young and handsome, of great family, and rich, so that he who
+      got her might be considered to have made an excellent marriage; and her
+      land was in the gift of the king. She and Olver had two sons, who were
+      still in infancy. Kalf Arneson begged of the king that he would give him
+      to wife the widow of Olver; and out of friendship the king agreed to it,
+      and with her he got all the property Olver had possessed. The king at the
+      same time made him his lenderman, and gave him an office in the interior
+      of the Throndhjem country. Kalf became a great chief, and was a man of
+      very great understanding.
+      117. KING OLAF'S JOURNEY TO THE UPLANDS.
+      When King Olaf had been seven years (A.D. 1015-1021) in Norway the earls
+      Thorfin and Bruse came to him, as before related, in the summer, from
+      Orkney, and he became master of their land. The same summer Olaf went to
+      North and South More, and in autumn to Raumsdal. He left his ships there,
+      and came to the Uplands, and to Lesjar. Here he laid hold of all the best
+      men, and forced them, both at Lesjar and Dovre, either to receive
+      Christianity or suffer death, if they were not so lucky as to escape.
+      After they received Christianity, the king took their sons in his hands as
+      hostages for their fidelity. The king stayed several nights at a farm in
+      Lesjar called Boar, where he placed priests. Then he proceeded over
+      Orkadal and Lorodal, and came down from the Uplands at a place called
+      Stafabrekka. There a river runs along the valley, called the Otta, and a
+      beautiful hamlet, by name Loar, lies on both sides of the river, and the
+      king could see far down over the whole neighbourhood. "A pity it is," said
+      the king, "so beautiful a hamlet should be burnt." And he proceeded down
+      the valley with his people, and was all night on a farm called Nes. The
+      king took his lodging in a loft, where he slept himself; and it stands to
+      the present day, without anything in it having been altered since. The
+      king was five days there, and summoned by message-token the people to a
+      Thing, both for the districts of Vagar, Lear, and Hedal; and gave out the
+      message along with the token, that they must either receive Christianity
+      and give their sons as hostages, or see their habitations burnt. They came
+      before the king, and submitted to his pleasure; but some fled south down
+      the valley.
+      118. THE STORY OF DALE-GUDBRAND.
+      There was a man called Dale-Gudbrand, who was like a king in the valley
+      (Gudbrandsdal), but was only herse in title. Sigvat the skald compared him
+      for wealth and landed property to Erling Skjalgson. Sigvat sang thus
+      concerning Erling: -
+     "I know but one who can compare
+     With Erling for broad lands and gear -
+     Gudbrand is he, whose wide domains
+     Are most like where some small king reigns.
+     These two great bondes, I would say,
+     Equal each other every way.
+     He lies who says that he can find
+     One by the other left behind."
+      Gudbrand had a son, who is here spoken of. Now when Gudbrand received the
+      tidings that King Olaf was come to Lear, and obliged people to accept
+      Christianity, he sent out a message-token, and summoned all the men in the
+      valley to meet him at a farm called Hundthorp. All came, so that the
+      number could not be told; for there is a lake in the neighbourhood called
+      Laugen, so that people could come to the place both by land and by water.
+      There Gudbrand held a Thing with them, and said, "A man is come to Loar
+      who is called Olaf, and will force upon us another faith than what we had
+      before, and will break in pieces all our gods. He says that he has a much
+      greater and more powerful god; and it is wonderful that the earth does not
+      burst asunder under him, or that our god lets him go about unpunished when
+      he dares to talk such things. I know this for certain, that if we carry
+      Thor, who has always stood by us, out of our temple that is standing upon
+      this farm, Olaf's god will melt away, and he and his men be made nothing
+      so soon as Thor looks upon them." Then the bondes all shouted as one
+      person that Olaf should never get away with life if he came to them; and
+      they thought he would never dare to come farther south through the valley.
+      They chose out 700 men to go northwards to Breida, to watch his movements.
+      The leader of this band was Gudbrand's son, eighteen years of age, and
+      with him were many other men of importance. When they came to a farm
+      called Hof they heard of the king; and they remained three nights there.
+      People streamed to them from all parts, from Lesjar, Loar, and Vagar, who
+      did not wish to receive Christianity. The king and Bishop Sigurd fixed
+      teachers in Loaf and in Vagar. From thence they went round Vagarost, and
+      came down into the valley at Sil, where they stayed all night, and heard
+      the news that a great force of men were assembled against them. The bondes
+      who were in Breida heard also of the king's arrival, and prepared for
+      battle. As soon as the king arose in the morning he put on his armour, and
+      went southwards over the Sil plains, and did not halt until he came to
+      Breida, where he saw a great army ready for battle. Then the king drew up
+      his troops, rode himself at the head of them, and began a speech to the
+      bondes, in which he invited them to adopt Christianity. They replied, "We
+      shall give thee something else to do to-day than to be mocking us;" and
+      raised a general shout, striking also upon their shields with their
+      weapons. Then the king's men ran forward and threw their spears; but the
+      bondes turned round instantly and fled, so that only few men remained
+      behind. Gudbrand's son was taken prisoner; but the king gave him his life,
+      and took him with him. The king was four days here. Then the king said to
+      Gudbrand's son, "Go home now to thy father, and tell him I expect to be
+      with him soon."
+      He went accordingly, and told his father the news, that they had fallen in
+      with the king, and fought with him; but that their whole army, in the very
+      beginning, took flight. "I was taken prisoner," said he, "but the king
+      gave me my life and liberty, and told me to say to thee that he will soon
+      be here. And now we have not 200 men of the force we raised against him;
+      therefore I advise thee, father, not to give battle to that man."
+      Says Gudbrand, "It is easy to see that all courage has left thee, and it
+      was an unlucky hour ye went out to the field. Thy proceeding will live
+      long in the remembrance of people, and I see that thy fastening thy faith
+      on the folly that man is going about with has brought upon thee and thy
+      men so great a disgrace."
+      But the night after, Gudbrand dreamt that there came to him a man
+      surrounded by light, who brought great terror with him, and said to him,
+      "Thy son made no glorious expedition against King Olaf; but still less
+      honour wilt thou gather for thyself by holding a battle with him. Thou
+      with all thy people wilt fall; wolves will drag thee, and all thine, away;
+      ravens wilt tear thee in stripes." At this dreadful vision he was much
+      afraid, and tells it to Thord Istermage, who was chief over the valley. He
+      replies, "The very same vision came to me." In the morning they ordered
+      the signal to sound for a Thing, and said that it appeared to them
+      advisable to hold a Thing with the man who had come from the north with
+      this new teaching, to know if there was any truth in it. Gudbrand then
+      said to his son, "Go thou, and twelve men with thee, to the king who gave
+      thee thy life." He went straightway, and found the king, and laid before
+      him their errand; namely, that the bondes would hold a Thing with him, and
+      make a truce between them and him. The king was content; and they bound
+      themselves by faith and law mutually to hold the peace so long as the
+      Thing lasted. After this was settled the men returned to Gudbrand and
+      Thord, and told them there was made a firm agreement for a truce. The
+      king, after the battle with the son of Gudbrand, had proceeded to Lidstad,
+      and remained there for five days: afterwards he went out to meet the
+      bondes, and hold a Thing with them. On that day there fell a heavy rain.
+      When the Thing was seated, the king stood up and said that the people in
+      Lesjar, Loaf, and Vagar had received Christianity, broken down their
+      houses of sacrifice, and believed now in the true God who had made heaven
+      and earth and knows all things.
+      Thereupon the king sat down, and Gudbrand replies, "We know nothing of him
+      whom thou speakest about. Dost thou call him God, whom neither thou nor
+      any one else can see? But we have a god who call be seen every day,
+      although he is not out to-day, because the weather is wet, and he will
+      appear to thee terrible and very grand; and I expect that fear will mix
+      with your very blood when he comes into the Thing. But since thou sayest
+      thy God is so great, let him make it so that to-morrow we have a cloudy
+      day but without rain, and then let us meet again."
+      The king accordingly returned home to his lodging, taking Gudbrand's son
+      as a hostage; but he gave them a man as hostage in exchange. In the
+      evening the king asked Gudbrand's son what like their god was. He replied,
+      that he bore the likeness of Thor; had a hammer in his hand; was of great
+      size, but hollow within; and had a high stand, upon which he stood when he
+      was out. "Neither gold nor silver are wanting about him, and every day he
+      receives four cakes of bread, besides meat." They then went to bed, but
+      the king watched all night in prayer. When day dawned the king went to
+      mass, then to table, and from thence to the Thing. The weather was such as
+      Gudbrand desired. Now the bishop stood up in his choir-robes, with
+      bishop's coif upon his head, and bishop's staff in his hands. He spoke to
+      the bondes of the true faith, told the many wonderful acts of God, and
+      concluded his speech well.
+      Thord Istermage replies, "Many things we are told of by this horned man
+      with the staff in his hand crooked at the top like a ram's horn; but since
+      ye say, comrades, that your god is so powerful, and can do so many
+      wonders, tell him to make it clear sunshine to-morrow forenoon, and then
+      we shall meet here again, and do one of two things, -either agree
+      with you about this business, or fight you." And they separated for the
+      day.
+      119. DALE-GUDBRAND IS BAPTIZED.
+      There was a man with King Olaf called Kolbein Sterke (the strong), who
+      came from a family in the Fjord district. Usually he was so equipped that
+      he was girt with a sword, and besides carried a great stake, otherwise
+      called a club, in his hands. The king told Kolbein to stand nearest to him
+      in the morning; and gave orders to his people to go down in the night to
+      where the ships of the bondes lay and bore holes in them, and to set loose
+      their horses on the farms where they were; all which was done. Now the
+      king was in prayer all the night, beseeching God of His goodness and mercy
+      to release him from evil. When mass was ended, and morning was grey, the
+      king went to the Thing. When he came there some bondes had already
+      arrived, and they saw a great crowd coming along, and bearing among them a
+      huge man's image glancing with gold and silver. When the bondes who were
+      at the Thing saw it they started up, and bowed themselves down before the
+      ugly idol. Thereupon it was set down upon the Thing-field; and on the one
+      side of it sat the bondes, and on the other the king and his people.
+      Then Dale-Gudbrand stood up, and said, "Where now, king, is thy god? I
+      think he will now carry his head lower; and neither thou, nor the man with
+      the horn whom ye call bishop, and sits there beside thee, are so bold
+      to-day as on the former days; for now our god, who rules over all, is
+      come, and looks on you with an angry eye; and now I see well enough that
+      ye are terrified, and scarcely dare to raise your eyes. Throw away now all
+      your opposition, and believe in the god who has all your fate in his
+      hands."
+      The king now whispers to Kolbein Sterke, without the bondes perceiving it,
+      "If it come so in the course of my speech that the bondes look another way
+      than towards their idol, strike him as hard as thou canst with thy club."
+      The king then stood up and spoke. "Much hast thou talked to us this
+      morning, and greatly hast thou wondered that thou canst not see our God;
+      but we expect that he will soon come to us. Thou wouldst frighten us with
+      thy god, who is both blind and deaf, and can neither save himself nor
+      others, and cannot even move about without being carried; but now I expect
+      it will be but a short time before he meets his fate: for turn your eyes
+      towards the east, -behold our God advancing in great light."
+      The sun was rising, and all turned to look. At that moment Kolbein gave
+      their god a stroke, so that the idol burst asunder; and there ran out of
+      it mice as big almost as cats, and reptiles, and adders. The bondes were
+      so terrified that some fled to their ships; but when they sprang out upon
+      them they filled with water, and could not get away. Others ran to their
+      horses, but could not find them. The king then ordered the bondes to be
+      called together, saying he wanted to speak with them; on which the bondes
+      came back, and the Thing was again seated.
+      The king rose up and said, "I do not understand what your noise and
+      running mean. Ye see yourselves what your god can do, -the idol ye
+      adorned with gold and silver, and brought meat and provisions to. Ye see
+      now that the protecting powers who used it were the mice and adders,
+      reptiles and paddocks; and they do ill who trust to such, and will not
+      abandon this folly. Take now your gold and ornaments that are lying
+      strewed about on the grass, and give them to your wives and daughters; but
+      never hang them hereafter upon stock or stone. Here are now two conditions
+      between us to choose upon, -either accept Christianity, or fight this
+      very day; and the victory be to them to whom the God we worship gives it."
+      Then Dale-Gudbrand stood up and said, "We have sustained great damage upon
+      our god; but since he will not help us, we will believe in the God thou
+      believest in."
+      Then all received Christianity. The bishop baptized Gudbrand and his son.
+      King Olaf and Bishop Sigurd left behind them teachers, and they who met as
+      enemies parted as friends; and Gudbrand built a church in the valley.
+      120. HEDEMARK BAPTIZED.
+      King Olaf proceeded from thence to Hedemark, and baptized there; but as he
+      had formerly carried away their kings as prisoners, he did not venture
+      himself, after such a deed, to go far into the country with few people at
+      that time, but a small part of Hedemark was baptized; but the king did not
+      desist from his expedition before he had introduced Christianity over all
+      Hedemark, consecrated churches, and placed teachers. He then went to
+      Hadaland and Thoten, improving the customs of the people, and persisting
+      until all the country was baptized. He then went to Ringerike, where also
+      all people went over to Christianity. The people of Raumarike then heard
+      that Olaf intended coming to them, and they gathered a great force. They
+      said among themselves that the journey Olaf had made among them the last
+      time was not to be forgotten, and he should never proceed so again. The
+      king, notwithstanding, prepared for the journey. Now when the king went up
+      into Raumarike with his forces, the multitude of bondes came against him
+      at a river called Nitja; and the bondes had a strong army, and began the
+      battle as soon as they met; but they soon fell short, and took to flight.
+      They were forced by this battle into a better disposition, and immediately
+      received Christianity; and the king scoured the whole district, and did
+      not leave it until all the people were made Christians. He then went east
+      to Soleys, and baptized that neighbourhood. The skald Ottar Black came to
+      him there, and begged to be received among his men. Olaf the Swedish king
+      had died the winter before (A.D. 1021), and Onund, the son of Olaf, was
+      now the sole king over all Sweden. King Olaf returned, when the winter
+      (A.D. 1022) was far advanced, to Raumarike. There he assembled a numerous
+      Thing, at a place where the Eidsvold Things have since been held. He made
+      a law, that the Upland people should resort to this Thing, and that
+      Eidsvold laws should be good through all the districts of the Uplands, and
+      wide around in other quarters, which also has taken place. As spring was
+      advancing, he rigged his ships, and went by sea to Tunsberg. He remained
+      there during the spring, and the time the town was most frequented, and
+      goods from other countries were brought to the town for sale. There had
+      been a good year in Viken, and tolerable as far north as Stad; but it was
+      a very dear time in all the country north of there.
+      121. RECONCILIATION OF THE KING AND EINAR.
+      In spring (A.D. 1022) King Olaf sent a message west to Agder, and north
+      all the way to Hordaland and Rogaland, prohibiting the exporting or
+      selling of corn, malt, or meal; adding, that he, as usual, would come
+      there with his people in guest-quarters. The message went round all the
+      districts; but the king remained in Viken all summer, and went east to the
+      boundary of the country. Einar Tambaskelfer had been with the Swedish king
+      Olaf since the death of his relation Earl Svein, and had, as the khag's
+      man, received great fiefs from him. Now that the king was dead, Einar had
+      a great desire to come into friendship agreement with Olaf; and the same
+      spring messages passed between them about it. While the king was lying in
+      the Gaut river, Einar Tambaskelfer came there with some men; and after
+      treating about an agreement, it was settled that Einar should go north to
+      Throndhjem, and there take possession of all the lands and property which
+      Bergliot had received in dower. Thereupon Einar took his way north; but
+      the king remained behind in Viken, and remained long in Sarpsborg in
+      autumn (A.D. 1022), and during the first part of winter.
+      122. RECONCILIATION OF THE KING AND ERLING.
+      Erling Skjalgson held his dominion so, that all north from Sogn Lake, and
+      east to the Naze, the bondes stood under him; and although he had much
+      smaller royal fiefs than formerly, still so great a dread of him prevailed
+      that nobody dared to do anything against his will, so that the king
+      thought his power too great. There was a man called Aslak Fitiaskalle, who
+      was powerful and of high birth. Erling's father Skjalg, and Aslak's father
+      Askel, were brother's sons. Aslak was a great friend of King Olaf, and the
+      king settled him in South Hordaland, where he gave him a great fief, and
+      great income, and ordered him in no respect to give way to Erling. But
+      this came to nothing when the king was not in the neighbourhood; for then
+      Erling would reign as he used to do, and was not more humble because Aslak
+      would thrust himself forward as his equal. At last the strife went so far
+      that Aslak could not keep his place, but hastened to King Olaf, and told
+      him the circumstances between him and Erling. The king told Aslak to
+      remain with him until he should meet Erling; and sent a message to Erling
+      that he should come to him in spring at Tunsberg. When they all arrived
+      there they held a meeting at which the king said to him, "It is told me
+      concerning thy government, Erling, that no man from Sogn Lake to the Naze
+      can enjoy his freedom for thee; although there are many men there who
+      consider themselves born to udal rights, and have their privileges like
+      others born as they are. Now, here is your relation Aslak, who appears to
+      have suffered great inconvenience from your conduct; and I do not know
+      whether he himself is in fault, or whether he suffers because I have
+      placed him to defend what is mine; and although I name him, there are many
+      others who have brought the same complaint before us, both among those who
+      are placed in office in our districts, and among the bailiffs who have our
+      farms to manage, and are obliged to entertain me and my people."
+      Erling replies to this, "I will answer at once. I deny altogether that I
+      have ever injured Aslak, or any one else, for being in your service; but
+      this I will not deny, that it is now, as it has long been, that each of us
+      relations will willingly be greater than the other: and, moreover, I
+      freely acknowledge that I am ready to bow my neck to thee, King Olaf; but
+      it is more difficult for me to stoop before one who is of slave descent in
+      all his generation, although he is now your bailiff, or before others who
+      are but equal to him in descent, although you bestow honours on them."
+      Now the friends of both interfered, and entreated that they would be
+      reconciled; saying, that the king never could have such powerful aid as
+      from Erling, "if he was your friend entirely." On the other hand, they
+      represent to Erling that he should give up to the king; for if he was in
+      friendship with the king, it would be easy to do with all the others what
+      he pleased. The meeting accordingly ended so that Erling should retain the
+      fiefs he formerly had, and every complaint the king had against Erling
+      should be dropped; but Skjalg, Erling's son, should come to the king, and
+      remain in his power. Then Aslak returned to his dominions, and the two
+      were in some sort reconciled. Erling returned home also to his domains,
+      and followed his own way of ruling them.
+      123. HERE BEGINS THE STORY OF ASBJORN SELSBANE.
+      There was a man named Sigurd Thoreson, a brother of Thorer Hund of Bjarkey
+      Island. Sigurd was married to Sigrid Skjalg's daughter, a sister of
+      Erling. Their son, called Asbjorn, became as he grew up a very able man.
+      Sigurd dwelt at Omd in Thrandarnes, and was a very rich and respected man.
+      He had not gone into the king's service; and Thorer in so far had attained
+      higher dignity than his brother, that he was the king's lenderman. But at
+      home, on his farm, Sigurd stood in no respect behind his brother in
+      splendour and magnificence. As long as heathenism prevailed, Sigurd
+      usually had three sacrifices every year: one on winter-night's eve, one on
+      mid-winter's eve, and the third in summer. Although he had adopted
+      Christianity, he continued the same custom with his feasts: he had,
+      namely, a great friendly entertainment at harvest time; a Yule feast in
+      winter, to which he invited many; the third feast he had about Easter, to
+      which also he invited many guests. He continued this fashion as long as he
+      lived. Sigurd died on a bed of sickness when Asbjorn was eighteen years
+      old. He was the only heir of his father, and he followed his father's
+      custom of holding three festivals every year. Soon after Asbjorn came to
+      his heritage the course of seasons began to grow worse, and the corn
+      harvests of the people to fail; but Asbjorn held his usual feasts, and
+      helped himself by having old corn, and an old provision laid up of all
+      that was useful. But when one year had passed and another came, and the
+      crops were no better than the year before, Sigrid wished that some if not
+      all of the feasts should be given up. That Asbjorn would not consent to,
+      but went round in harvest among his friends, buying corn where he could
+      get it, and some he received in presents. He thus kept his feasts this
+      winter also; but the spring after people got but little seed into the
+      ground, for they had to buy the seed-corn. Then Sigurd spoke of
+      diminishing the number of their house-servants. That Asbjorn would not
+      consent to, but held by the old fashion of the house in all things. In
+      summer (A.D. 1022) it appeared again that there would be a bad year for
+      corn; and to this came the report from the south that King Olaf prohibited
+      all export of corn, malt, or meal from the southern to the northern parts
+      of the country. Then Asbjorn perceived that it would be difficult to
+      procure what was necessary for a house-keeping, and resolved to put into
+      the water a vessel for carrying goods which he had, and which was large
+      enough to go to sea with. The ship was good, all that belonged to her was
+      of the best, and in the sails were stripes of cloth of various colours.
+      Asbjorn made himself ready for a voyage, and put to sea with twenty men.
+      They sailed from the north in summer; and nothing is told of their voyage
+      until one day, about the time the days begin to shorten, they came to
+      Karmtsund, and landed at Augvaldsnes. Up in the island Karmt there is a
+      large farm, not far from the sea, and a large house upon it called
+      Augvaldsnes, which was a king's house, with an excellent farm, which
+      Thorer Sel, who was the king's bailiff, had under his management. Thorer
+      was a man of low birth, but had swung himself up in the world as an active
+      man; and he was polite in speech, showy in clothes, and fond of
+      distinction, and not apt to give way to others, in which he was supported
+      by the favour of the king. He was besides quick in speech,
+      straightforward, and free in conversation. Asbjorn, with his company,
+      brought up there for the night; and in the morning, when it was light,
+      Thorer went down to the vessel with some men, and inquired who commanded
+      the splendid ship. Asbjorn named his own and his father's name. Thorer
+      asks where the voyage was intended for, and what was the errand.
+      Asbjorn replies, that he wanted to buy corn and malt; saying, as was true,
+      that it was a very dear time north in the country. "But we are told that
+      here the seasons are good; and wilt thou, farmer, sell us corn? I see that
+      here are great corn stacks, and it would be very convenient if we had not
+      to travel farther."
+      Thorer replies, "I will give thee the information that thou needst not go
+      farther to buy corn, or travel about here in Rogaland; for I can tell thee
+      that thou must turn about, and not travel farther, for the king forbids
+      carrying corn out of this to the north of the country. Sail back again,
+      Halogalander, for that will be thy safest course."
+      Asbjorn replies, "If it be so, bonde, as thou sayest, that we can get no
+      corn here to buy, I will, notwithstanding, go forward upon my errand, and
+      visit my family in Sole, and see my relation Erling's habitation."
+      Thorer: "How near is thy relationship to Erling?"
+      Asbjorn: "My mother is his sister."
+      Thorer: "It may be that I have spoken heedlessly, if so be that thou art
+      sister's son of Erling."
+      Thereupon Asbjorn and his crew struck their tents, and turned the ship to
+      sea. Thorer called after them. "A good voyage, and come here again on your
+      way back." Asbjorn promised to do so, sailed away, and came in the evening
+      to Jadar. Asbjorn went on shore with ten men; the other ten men watched
+      the ship. When Asbjorn came to the house he was very well received, and
+      Erling was very glad to see him, placed him beside himself, and asked him
+      all the news in the north of the country. Asbjorn concealed nothing of his
+      business from him; and Erling said it happened unfortunately that the king
+      had just forbid the sale of corn. "And I know no man here." says he, "who
+      has courage to break the king's order, and I find it difficult to keep
+      well with the king, so many are trying to break our friendship."
+      Asbjorn replies, "It is late before we learn the truth. In my childhood I
+      was taught that my mother was freeborn throughout her whole descent, and
+      that Erling of Sole was her boldest relation; and now I hear thee say that
+      thou hast not the freedom, for the king's slaves here in Jadar, to do with
+      thy own corn what thou pleasest."
+      Erling looked at him, smiled through his teeth, and said, "Ye
+      Halogalanders know less of the king's power than we do here; but a bold
+      man thou mayst be at home in thy conversation. Let us now drink, my
+      friend, and we shall see tomorrow what can be done in thy business."
+      They did so, and were very merry all the evening. The following day Erling
+      and Asbjorn talked over the matter again, and Erling said. "I have found
+      out a way for you to purchase corn, Asbjorn. It is the same thing to you
+      whoever is the seller." He answered that he did not care of whom he bought
+      the corn, if he got a good right to his purchase. Erling said. "It appears
+      to me probable that my slaves have quite as much corn as you require to
+      buy; and they are not subject to law, or land regulation, like other men."
+      Asbjorn agreed to the proposal. The slaves were now spoken to about the
+      purchase, and they brought forward corn and malt, which they sold to
+      Asbjorn, so that he loaded his vessel with what he wanted. When he was
+      ready for sea Erling followed him on the road, made him presents of
+      friendship, and they took a kind farewell of each other. Asbjorn got a
+      good breeze, landed in the evening at Karmtsund, near to Augvaldsnes, and
+      remained there for the night. Thorer Sel had heard of Asbjorn's voyage,
+      and also that his vessel was deeply laden. Thorer summoned people to him
+      in the night, so that before daylight he had sixty men; and with these he
+      went against Asbjorn as soon as it was light, and went out to the ship
+      just as Asbjorn and his men were putting on their clothes. Asbjorn saluted
+      Thorer, and Thorer asked what kind of goods Asbjorn had in the vessel.
+      He replied, "Corn and malt."
+      Thorer said, "Then Erling is doing as he usually does, and despising the
+      king's orders, and is unwearied in opposing him in all things, insomuch
+      that it is wonderful the king suffers it."
+      Thorer went on scolding in this way, and when he was silent Asbjorn said
+      that Erling's slaves had owned the corn.
+      Thorer replied hastily, that he did not regard Erling's tricks. "And now,
+      Asbjorn, there is no help for it; ye must either go on shore, or we will
+      throw you overboard; for we will not be troubled with you while we are
+      discharging the cargo."
+      Asbjorn saw that he had not men enough to resist Thorer; therefore he and
+      his people landed, and Thorer took the whole cargo out of the vessel. When
+      the vessel was discharged Thorer went through the ship, and observed. "Ye
+      Halogalanders have good sails: take the old sail of our vessel and give it
+      them; it is good enough for those who are sailing in a light vessel." Thus
+      the sails were exchanged. When this was done Asbjorn and his comrades
+      sailed away north along the coast, and did not stop until they reached
+      home early in whiter. This expedition was talked of far and wide, and
+      Asbjorn had no trouble that winter in making feasts at home. Thorer Hund
+      invited Asbjorn and his mother, and also all whom they pleased to take
+      along with him, to a Yule feast; but Asbjorn sat at home, and would not
+      travel, and it was to be seen that Thorer thought Asbjorn despised his
+      invitation, since he would not come. Thorer scoffed much at Asbjorn's
+      voyage. "Now," said he, "it is evident that Asbjorn makes a great
+      difference in his respect towards his relations; for in summer he took the
+      greatest trouble to visit his relation Erling in Jadar, and now will not
+      take the trouble to come to me in the next house. I don't know if he
+      thinks there may be a Thorer Sel in his way upon every holm." Such words,
+      and the like sarcasms, Asbjorn heard of; and very ill satisfied he was
+      with his voyage, which had thus made him a laughing-stock to the country,
+      and he remained at home all winter, and went to no feasts.
+      124. MURDER OF THORER SEL.
+      Asbjorn had a long-ship standing in the noust (shipshed), and it was a
+      snekke (cutter) of twenty benches; and after Candlemas (February 2, 1023),
+      he had the vessel put in the water, brought out all his furniture, and
+      rigged her out. He then summoned to him his friends and people, so that he
+      had nearly ninety men all well armed. When he was ready for sea, and got a
+      wind, he sailed south along the coast, but as the wind did not suit, they
+      advanced but slowly. When they came farther south they steered outside the
+      rocks, without the usual ships' channel, keeping to sea as much as it was
+      possible to do so. Nothing is related of his voyage before the fifth day
+      of Easter (April 18, 1023), when, about evening, they came on the outside
+      of Karmt Island. This island is so shaped that it is very long, but not
+      broad at its widest part; and without it lies the usual ships' channel. It
+      is thickly inhabited; but where the island is exposed to the ocean great
+      tracts of it are uncultivated. Asbjorn and his men landed at a place in
+      the island that was uninhabited. After they had set up their ship-tents
+      Asbjorn said, "Now ye must remain here and wait for me. I will go on land
+      in the isle, and spy what news there may be which we know nothing of."
+      Asbjorn had on mean clothes, a broadbrimmed hat, a fork in his hand, but
+      had girt on his sword under his clothes. He went up to the land, and in
+      through the island; and when he came upon a hillock, from which he could
+      see the house on Augvaldsnes, and on as far as Karmtsund, he saw people in
+      all quarters flocking together by land and by sea, and all going up to the
+      house of Augvaldsnes. This seemed to him extraordinary; and therefore he
+      went up quietly to a house close by, in which servants were cooking meat.
+      From their conversation he discovered immediately that the king Olaf had
+      come there to a feast, and that he had just sat down to table. Asbjorn
+      turned then to the feasting-room, and when he came into the ante-room one
+      was going in and another coming out; but nobody took notice of him. The
+      hall-door was open, and he saw that Thorer Sel stood before the table of
+      the high-seat. It was getting late in the evening, and Asbjorn heard
+      people ask Thorer what had taken place between him and Asbjorn; and Thorer
+      had a long story about it, in which he evidently departed from the truth.
+      Among other things he heard a man say, "How did Asbjorn behave when you
+      discharged his vessel?" Thorer replied, "When we were taking out the cargo
+      he bore it tolerably, but not well; and when we took the sail from him he
+      wept." When Asbjorn heard this he suddenly drew his sword, rushed into the
+      hall, and cut at Thorer. The stroke took him in the neck, so that the head
+      fell upon the table before the king, and the body at his feet, and the
+      table-cloth was soiled with blood from top to bottom. The king ordered him
+      to be seized and taken out. This was done. They laid hands on Asbjorn, and
+      took him from the hall. The table-furniture and table-cloths were removed,
+      and also Thorer's corpse, and all the blood wiped up. The king was enraged
+      to the highest; but remained quiet in speech, as he always was when in
+      anger.
+      125. OF SKJALG, THE SON OF ERLING SKJALGSON.
+      Skjalg Erlingson stood up, went before the king, and said, "Now may it go,
+      as it often does, that every case will admit of alleviation. I will pay
+      thee the mulct for the bloodshed on account of this man, so that he may
+      retain life and limbs. All the rest determine and do, king, according to
+      thy pleasure."
+      The king replies, "Is it not a matter of death, Skjalg, that a man break
+      the Easter peace; and in the next place that he kills a man in the king's
+      lodging; and in the third that he makes my feet his execution-block,
+      although that may appear a small matter to thee and thy father?"
+      Skjalg replies, "It is ill done, king, in as far as it displeases thee;
+      but the deed is, otherwise, done excellently well. But if the deed appear
+      to thee so important, and be so contrary to thy will, yet may I expect
+      something for my services from thee; and certainly there are many who will
+      say that thou didst well."
+      The king replies, "Although thou hast made me greatly indebted to thee,
+      Skjalg, for thy services, yet I will not for thy sake break the law, or
+      cast away my own dignity."
+      Then Skjalg turned round, and went out of the hall. Twelve men who had
+      come with Skjalg all followed him, and many others went out with him.
+      Skjalg said to Thorarin Nefiulfson, "If thou wilt have me for a friend,
+      take care that this man be not killed before Sunday." Thereupon Skjalg and
+      his men set off, took a rowing boat which he had, and rowed south as fast
+      as they could, and came to Jadar with the first glimpse of morning. They
+      went up instantly to the house, and to the loft in which Erling slept.
+      Skjalg rushed so hard against the door that it burst asunder at the nails.
+      Erling and the others who were within started up. He was in one spring
+      upon his legs, grasped his shield and sword, and rushed to the door,
+      demanding who was there. Skjalg named himself, and begs him to open the
+      door. Erling replies, "It was most likely to be thee who hast behaved so
+      foolishly; or is there any one who is pursuing thee?" Thereupon the door
+      was unlocked. Then said Skjalg, "Although it appears to thee that I am so
+      hasty, I suppose our relation Asbjorn will not think my proceedings too
+      quick; for he sits in chains there in the north at Augvaldsnes, and it
+      would be but manly to hasten back and stand by him." The father and son
+      then had a conversation together, and Skjalg related the whole
+      circumstances of Thorer Sel's murder.
+      126. OF THORARIN NEFIULFSON.
+      King Olaf took his seat again when everything in the hall was put in
+      order, and was enraged beyond measure. He asked how it was with the
+      murderer. He was answered, that he was sitting out upon the doorstep under
+      guard.
+      The king says, "Why is he not put to death?"
+      Thorarin Nefiulfson replies, "Sire, would you not call it murder to kill a
+      man in the night-time?"
+      The king answers, "Put him in irons then, and kill him in the morning."
+      Then Asbjorn was laid in chains, and locked up in a house for the night.
+      The day after the king heard the morning mass, and then went to the Thing,
+      where he sat till high mass. As he was going to mass he said to Thorarin,
+      "Is not the sun high enough now in the heavens that your friend Asbjorn
+      may be hanged?"
+      Thorarin bowed before the king, and said, "Sire, it was said by Bishop
+      Sigurd on Friday last, that the King who has all things in his power had
+      to endure great temptation of spirit; and blessed is he who rather
+      imitates him, than those who condemned the man to death, or those who
+      caused his slaughter. It is not long till tomorrow, and that is a working
+      day."
+      The king looked at him, and said, "Thou must take care then that he is not
+      put to death to-day; but take him under thy charge, and know for certain
+      that thy own life shall answer for it if he escape in any way."
+      Then the king went away. Thorarin went also to where Asbjorn lay in irons,
+      took off his chains, and brought him to a small room, where he had meat
+      and drink set before him, and told him what the king had determined in
+      case Asbjorn ran away. Asbjorn replies, that Thorarin need not be afraid
+      of him. Thorarin sat a long while with him during the day, and slept there
+      all night. On Saturday the king arose and went to the early mass, and from
+      thence he went to the Thing, where a great many bondes were assembled, who
+      had many complaints to be determined. The king sat there long in the day,
+      and it was late before the people went to high mass. Thereafter the king
+      went to table. When he had got meat he sat drinking for a while, so that
+      the tables were not removed. Thorarin went out to the priest who had the
+      church under his care, and gave him two marks of silver to ring in the
+      Sabbath as soon as the king's table was taken away. When the king had
+      drunk as much as he wished the tables were removed. Then said the king,
+      that it was now time for the slaves to go to the murderer and put him to
+      death. In the same moment the bell rang in the Sabbath.
+      Then Thorarin went before the king, and said, "The Sabbath-peace this man
+      must have, although he has done evil."
+      The king said, "Do thou take care, Thorarin, that he do not escape."
+      The king then went to the church, and attended the vesper service, and
+      Thorarin sat the whole day with Asbjorn. On Sunday the bishop visited
+      Asbjorn, confessed him, and gave him orders to hear high mass. Thorarin
+      then went to the king, and asked him to appoint men to guard the murderer.
+      "I will now," he said, "be free of this charge." The king thanked him for
+      his care, and ordered men to watch over Asbjorn, who was again laid in
+      chains. When the people went to high mass Asbjorn was led to the church,
+      and he stood outside of the church with his guard; but the king and all
+      the people stood in the church at mass.
+      127. ERLING'S RECONCILIATION WITH KING OLAF.
+      Now we must again take up our story where we left it, -that Erling
+      and his son Skjalg held a council on this affair, and according to the
+      resolution of Erling, and of Skjalg and his other sons, it was determined
+      to assemble a force and send out message-tokens. A great multitude of
+      people accordingly came together. They got ready with all speed, rigged
+      their ships, and when they reckoned upon their force they found they had
+      nearly 1500 men. With this war-force they set off, and came on Sunday to
+      Augvaldsnes on Karmt Island. They went straight up to the house with all
+      the men, and arrived just as the Scripture lesson was read. They went
+      directly to the church, took Asbjorn, and broke off his chains. At the
+      tumult and clash of arms all who were outside of the church ran into it;
+      but they who were in the church looked all towards them, except the king,
+      who stood still, without looking around him. Erling and his sons drew up
+      their men on each side of the path which led from the church to the hall,
+      and Erling with his sons stood next to the hall. When high mass was
+      finished the king went immediately out of the church, and first went
+      through the open space between the ranks drawn up, and then his retinue,
+      man by man; and as he came to the door Erling placed himself before the
+      door, bowed to the king, and saluted him. The king saluted him in return,
+      and prayed God to help him. Erling took up the word first, and said, "My
+      relation, Asbjorn, it is reported to me, has been guilty of misdemeanor,
+      king; and it is a great one, if he has done anything that incurs your
+      displeasure. Now I am come to entreat for him peace, and such penalties as
+      you yourself may determine; but that thereby he redeem life and limb, and
+      his remaining here in his native land."
+      The king replies, "It appears to me, Erling, that thou thinkest the case
+      of Asbjorn is now in thy own power, and I do not therefore know why thou
+      speakest now as if thou wouldst offer terms for him. I think thou hast
+      drawn together these forces because thou are determined to settle what is
+      between us."
+      Erling replies, "Thou only, king, shalt determine, and determine so that
+      we shall be reconciled."
+      The king: "Thinkest thou, Erling, to make me afraid? And art thou come
+      here in such force with that expectation? No, that shall not be; and if
+      that be thy thought, I must in no way turn and fly."
+      Erling replies, "Thou hast no occasion to remind me how often I have come
+      to meet thee with fewer men than thou hadst. But now I shall not conceal
+      what lies in my mind, namely, that it is my will that we now enter into a
+      reconciliation; for otherwise I expect we shall never meet again." Erling
+      was then as red as blood in the face.
+      Now Bishop Sigurd came forward to the king and said, "Sire, I entreat you
+      on God Almighty's account to be reconciled with Erling according to his
+      offer, -that the man shall retain life and limb, but that thou shalt
+      determine according to thy pleasure all the other conditions."
+      The king replies, "You will determine."
+      Then said the bishop, "Erling, do thou give security for Asbjorn, such as
+      the king thinks sufficient, and then leave the conditions to the mercy of
+      the king, and leave all in his power."
+      Erling gave a surety to the king on his part, which he accepted.
+      Thereupon Asbjorn received his life and safety, and delivered himself into
+      the king's power, and kissed his hand.
+      Erling then withdrew with his forces, without exchanging salutation with
+      the king; and the king went into the hall, followed by Asbjorn. The king
+      thereafter made known the terms of reconciliation to be these: -"In
+      the first place, Asbjorn, thou must submit to the law of the land, which
+      commands that the man who kills a servant of the king must undertake his
+      service, if the king will. Now I will that thou shalt undertake the office
+      of bailiff which Thorer Sel had, and manage my estate here in
+      Augvaldsnes." Asbjorn replies, that it should be according to the king's
+      will; "but I must first go home to my farm, and put things in order
+      there." The king was satisfied with this, and proceeded to another
+      guest-quarter. Asbjorn made himself ready with his comrades, who all kept
+      themselves concealed in a quiet creek during the time Asbjorn was away
+      from them. They had had their spies out to learn how it went with him, and
+      would not depart without having some certain news of him.
+      128. OF THORER HUND AND ASBJORN SELSBANE.
+      Asbjorn then set out on his voyage, and about spring (A.D. 1023) got home
+      to his farm. After this exploit he was always called Asbjorn Selsbane.
+      Asbjorn had not been long at home before he and his relation Thorer met
+      and conversed together, and Thorer asked Asbjorn particularly all about
+      his journey, and about all the circumstances which had happened on the
+      course of it. Asbjorn told everything as it had taken place.
+      Then said Thorer, "Thou thinkest that thou hast well rubbed out the
+      disgrace of having been plundered in last harvest."
+      "I think so," replies Asbjorn; "and what is thy opinion, cousin?"
+      "That I will soon tell thee," said Thorer. "Thy first expedition to the
+      south of the country was indeed very disgraceful, and that disgrace has
+      been redeemed; but this expedition is both a disgrace to thee and to thy
+      family, if it end in thy becoming the king's slave, and being put on a
+      footing with that worst of men, Thorer Sel. Show that thou art manly
+      enough to sit here on thy own property, and we thy relations shall so
+      support thee that thou wilt never more come into such trouble."
+      Asbjorn found this advice much to his mind; and before they parted it was
+      firmly, determined that Asbjorn should remain on his farm, and not go back
+      to the king or enter into his service. And he did so, and sat quietly at
+      home on his farm.
+      129. KING OLAF BAPTIZES IN VORS AND VALDERS.
+      After King Olaf and Erling Skjalgson had this meeting at Augvaldsnes, new
+      differences arose between them, and increased so much that they ended in
+      perfect enmity. In spring (A.D. 1023) the king proceeded to guest-quarters
+      in Hordaland, and went up also to Vors, because he heard there was but
+      little of the true faith among the people there. He held a Thing with the
+      bondes at a place called Vang, and a number of bondes came to it fully
+      armed. The king ordered them to adopt Christianity; but they challenged
+      him to battle, and it proceeded so far that the men were drawn up on both
+      sides. But when it came to the point such a fear entered into the blood of
+      the bondes that none would advance or command, and they chose the part
+      which was most to their advantage; namely, to obey the king and receive
+      Christianity; and before the king left them they were all baptized. One
+      day it happened that the king was riding on his way a singing of psalms,
+      and when he came right opposite some hills he halted and said, "Man after
+      man shall relate these my words, that I think it not advisable for any
+      king of Norway to travel hereafter between these hills." And it is a
+      saying among the people that the most kings since that time have avoided
+      it. The king proceeded to Ostrarfjord, and came to his ships, with which
+      he went north to Sogn, and had his living in guest-quarters there in
+      summer (A.D. 1023); when autumn approached he turned in towards the Fjord
+      district, and went from thence to Valders, where the people were still
+      heathen. The king hastened up to the lake in Valders, came unexpectedly on
+      the bondes, seized their vessels, and went on board of them with all his
+      men. He then sent out message-tokens, and appointed a Thing so near the
+      lake that he could use the vessels if he found he required them. The
+      bondes resorted to the Thing in a great and well-armed host; and when he
+      commanded them to accept Christianity the bondes shouted against him, told
+      him to be silent, and made a great uproar and clashing of weapons. But
+      when the king saw that they would not listen to what he would teach them,
+      and also that they had too great a force to contend with, he turned his
+      discourse, and asked if there were people at the Thing who had disputes
+      with each other which they wished him to settle. It was soon found by the
+      conversation of the bondes that they had many quarrels among themselves,
+      although they had all joined in speaking against Christianity. When the
+      bondes began to set forth their own cases, each endeavored to get some
+      upon his side to support him; and this lasted the whole day long until
+      evening, when the Thing was concluded. When the bondes had heard that the
+      king had travelled to Valders, and was come into their neighborhood, they
+      had sent out message-tokens summoning the free and the unfree to meet in
+      arms, and with this force they had advanced against the king; so that the
+      neighbourhood all around was left without people. When the Thing was
+      concluded the bondes still remained assembled; and when the king observed
+      this he went on board his ships, rowed in the night right across the
+      water, landed in the country there, and began to plunder and burn. The day
+      after the king's men rowed from one point of land to another, and over all
+      the king ordered the habitations to be set on fire. Now when the bondes
+      who were assembled saw what the king was doing, namely, plundering and
+      burning, and saw the smoke and flame of their houses, they dispersed, and
+      each hastened to his own home to see if he could find those he had left.
+      As soon as there came a dispersion among the crowd, the one slipped away
+      after the other, until the whole multitude was dissolved. Then the king
+      rowed across the lake again, burning also on that side of the country. Now
+      came the bondes to him begging for mercy, and offering to submit to him.
+      He gave every man who came to him peace if he desired it, and restored to
+      him his goods; and nobody refused to adopt Christianity. The king then had
+      the people christened, and took hostages from the bondes. He ordered
+      churches to be built and consecrated, and placed teachers in them. He
+      remained a long time here in autumn, and had his ships drawn across the
+      neck of land between the two lakes. The king did not go far from the sides
+      of the lakes into the country, for he did not much trust the bondes. When
+      the king thought that frost might be expected, he went further up the
+      country, and came to Thoten. Arnor, the earl's skald, tells how King Olaf
+      burnt in the Uplands, in the poem he composed concerning the king's
+      brother King Harald: -
+     "Against the Upland people wroth,
+     Olaf, to most so mild, went forth:
+          The houses burning,
+          All people mourning;
+          Who could not fly
+          Hung on gallows high.
+     It was, I think, in Olaf's race
+     The Upland people to oppress."
+      Afterwards King Olaf went north through the valleys to Dovrefield, and did
+      not halt until he reached the Throndhjem district and arrived at Nidaros,
+      where he had ordered winter provision to be collected, and remained all
+      winter (A.D. 1024). This was the tenth year of his reign.
+      130. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER.
+      The summer before Einar Tambaskelfer left the country, and went westward
+      to England (A.D. 1023). There he met his relative Earl Hakon, and stayed
+      some time with him. He then visited King Canute, from whom he received
+      great presents. Einar then went south all the way to Rome, and came back
+      the following summer (A.D. 1024), and returned to his house and land. King
+      Olaf and Einar did not meet this time.
+      131. THE BIRTH OF KING MAGNUS.
+      There was a girl whose name was Alfhild, and who was usually called the
+      king's slave-woman, although she was of good descent. She was a remarkably
+      handsome girl, and lived in King Olaf's court. It was reported this spring
+      that Alfhild was with child, and the king's confidential friends knew that
+      he was father of the child. It happened one night that Alfhild was taken
+      ill, and only few people were at hand; namely, some women, priests, Sigvat
+      the skald, and a few others. Alfhild was so ill that she was nearly dead;
+      and when she was delivered of a man-child, it was some time before they
+      could discover whether the child was in life. But when the infant drew
+      breath, although very weak, the priest told Sigvat to hasten to the king,
+      and tell him of the event.
+      He replies, "I dare not on any account waken the king; for he has forbid
+      that any man should break his sleep until he awakens of himself."
+      The priest replies, "It is of necessity that this child be immediately
+      baptized, for it appears to me there is but little life in it."
+      Sigvat said, "I would rather venture to take upon me to let thee baptize
+      the child, than to awaken the king; and I will take it upon myself if
+      anything be amiss, and will give the child a name."
+      They did so; and the child was baptized, and got the name of Magnus. The
+      next morning, when the king awoke and had dressed himself, the
+      circumstance was told him. He ordered Sigvat to be called, and said. "How
+      camest thou to be so bold as to have my child baptized before I knew
+      anything about it?"
+      Sigvat replies, "Because I would rather give two men to God than one to
+      the devil."
+      The king -"What meanest thou?"
+      Sigvat -"The child was near death, and must have been the devil's if
+      it had died as a heathen, and now it is God's. And I knew besides that if
+      thou shouldst be so angry on this account that it affected my life, I
+      would be God's also."
+      The king asked, "But why didst thou call him Magnus, which is not a name
+      of our race?"
+      Sigvat -"I called him after King Carl Magnus, who, I knew, had been
+      the best man in the world."
+      Then said the king, "Thou art a very lucky man, Sigvat; but it is not
+      wonderful that luck should accompany understanding. It is only wonderful
+      how it sometimes happens that luck attends ignorant men, and that foolish
+      counsel turns out lucky." The king was overjoyed at the circumstance. The
+      boy grew up, and gave good promise as he advanced in age.
+      132. THE MURDER OF ASBJORN SELSBANE.
+      The same spring (A.D. 1024) the king gave into the hands of Asmund
+      Grankelson the half of the sheriffdom of the district of Halogaland, which
+      Harek of Thjotta had formerly held, partly in fief, partly for defraying
+      the king's entertainment in guest-quarters. Asmund had a ship manned with
+      nearly thirty well-armed men. When Asmund came north he met Harek, and
+      told him what the king had determined with regard to the district, and
+      produced to him the tokens of the king's full powers. Harek said, "The
+      king had the right to give the sheriffdom to whom he pleased; but the
+      former sovereigns had not been in use to diminish our rights who are
+      entitled by birth to hold powers from the king, and to give them into the
+      hands of the peasants who never before held such offices." But although it
+      was evident that it was against Harek's inclination, he allowed Asmund to
+      take the sheriffdom according to the king's order. Then Asmund proceeded
+      home to his father, stayed there a short time, and then went north to
+      Halogaland to his sheriffdom; and he came north to Langey Island, where
+      there dwelt two brothers called Gunstein and Karle, both very rich and
+      respectable men. Gunstein, the eldest of the brothers, was a good
+      husbandman. Karle was a handsome man in appearance, and splendid in his
+      dress; and both were, in many respects, expert in all feats. Asmund was
+      well received by them, remained with them a while, and collected such
+      revenues of his sheriffdom as he could get. Karle spoke with Asmund of his
+      wish to go south with him and take service in the court of King Olaf, to
+      which Asmund encouraged him much, promising his influence with the king
+      for obtaining for Karle such a situation as he desired; and Karle
+      accordingly accompanied Asmund. Asmund heard that Asbjorn, who had killed
+      Thorer Sel, had gone to the market-meeting of Vagar with a large ship of
+      burden manned with nearly twenty men, and that he was now expected from
+      the south. Asmund and his retinue proceeded on their way southwards along
+      the coast with a contrary wind, but there was little of it. They saw some
+      of the fleet for Vagar sailing towards them; and they privately inquired
+      of them about Asbjorn, and were told he was upon the way coming from the
+      south. Asmund and Karle were bedfellows, and excellent friends. One day,
+      as Asmund and his people were rowing through a sound, a ship of burden
+      came sailing towards them. The ship was easily known, having high
+      bulwarks, was painted with white and red colours, and coloured cloth was
+      woven in the sail. Karle said to Asmund, "Thou hast often said thou wast
+      curious to see Asbjorn who killed Thorer Sel; and if I know one ship from
+      another, that is his which is coming sailing along."
+      Asmund replies, "Be so good, comrade, and tell me which is he when thou
+      seest him."
+      When the ships came alongside of each other, "That is Asbjorn," said
+      Karle; "the man sitting at the helm in a blue cloak."
+      Asmund replies, "I shall make his blue cloak red;" threw a spear at
+      Asbjorn, and hit him in the middle of the body, so that it flew through
+      and through him, and stuck fast in the upper part of the stern-post; and
+      Asbjorn fell down dead from the helm. Then each vessel sailed on its
+      course, and Asbjorn's body was carried north to Thrandarnes. Then Sigrid
+      sent a message to Bjarkey Isle to Thorer Hund, who came to her while they
+      were, in the usual way, dressing the corpse of Asbjorn. When he returned
+      Sigrid gave presents to all her friends, and followed Thorer to his ship;
+      but before they parted she said, "It has so fallen out, Thorer, that my
+      son has suffered by thy friendly counsel, but he did not retain life to
+      reward thee for it; but although I have not his ability yet will I show my
+      good will. Here is a gift I give thee, which I expect thou wilt use. Here
+      is the spear which went through Asbjorn my son, and there is still blood
+      upon it, to remind thee that it fits the wound thou hast seen on the
+      corpse of thy brother's son Asbjorn. It would be a manly deed, if thou
+      shouldst throw this spear from thy hand so that it stood in Olaf's breast;
+      and this I can tell thee, that thou wilt be named coward in every man's
+      mouth, if thou dost not avenge Asbjorn." Thereupon she turned about, and
+      went her way.
+      Thorer was so enraged at her words that he could not speak. He neither
+      thought of casting the spear from him, nor took notice of the gangway; so
+      that he would have fallen into the sea, if his men had not laid hold of
+      him as he was going on board his ship. It was a feathered spear; not
+      large, but the handle was gold-mounted. Now Thorer rowed away with his
+      people, and went home to Bjarkey Isle. Asmund and his companions also
+      proceeded on their way until they came south to Throndhjem, where they
+      waited on King Olaf; and Asmund related to the king all that had happened
+      on the voyage. Karle became one of the king's court-men, and the
+      friendship continued between him and Asmund. They did not keep secret the
+      words that had passed between Asmund and Karle before Asbjorn was killed;
+      for they even told them to the king. But then it happened, according to
+      the proverb, that every one has a friend in the midst of his enemies.
+      There were some present who took notice of the words, and they reached
+      Thorer Hund's ears.
+      133. OF KING OLAF.
+      When spring (A.D. 1024) was advanced King Olaf rigged out his ships, and
+      sailed southwards in summer along the land. He held Things with the bondes
+      on the way, settled the law business of the people, put to rights the
+      faith of the country, and collected the king's taxes wherever he came. In
+      autumn he proceeded south to the frontier of the country; and King Olaf
+      had now made the people Christians in all the great districts, and
+      everywhere, by laws, had introduced order into the country. He had also,
+      as before related, brought the Orkney Islands under his power, and by
+      messages had made many friends in Iceland, Greenland, and the Farey
+      Islands. King Olaf had sent timber for building a church to Iceland, of
+      which a church was built upon the Thing-field where the General Thing is
+      held, and had sent a bell for it, which is still there. This was after the
+      Iceland people had altered their laws, and introduced Christianity,
+      according to the word King Olaf had sent them. After that time, many
+      considerable persons came from Iceland, and entered into King Olaf's
+      service; as Thorkel Eyjolfson, and Thorleif Bollason, Thord Kolbeinson,
+      Thord Barkarson, Thorgeir Havarson, Thormod Kalbrunar-skald. King Olaf had
+      sent many friendly presents to chief people in Iceland; and they in return
+      sent him such things as they had which they thought most acceptable. Under
+      this show of friendship which the king gave Iceland were concealed many
+      things which afterwards appeared.
+      134. KING OLAF'S MESSAGE TO ICELAND, AND THE COUNSELS OF THE ICELANDERS.
+      King Olaf this summer (A.D. 1024) sent Thorarin Nefiulfson to Iceland on
+      his errands; and Thorarin went out of Throndhjem fjord along with the
+      king, and followed him south to More. From thence Thorarin went out to
+      sea, and got such a favourable breeze that after four days sail he landed
+      at the Westman Isles, in Iceland. He proceeded immediately to the Althing,
+      and came just as the people were upon the Lawhillock, to which he
+      repaired. When the cases of the people before the Thing had been
+      determined according to law, Thorarin Nefiulfson took up the word as
+      follows: -"We parted four days ago from King Olaf Haraldson, who
+      sends God Almighty's and his own salutation to all the chiefs and
+      principal men of the land; as also to all the people in general, men and
+      women, young and old, rich and poor. He also lets you know that he will be
+      your sovereign if ye will become his subjects, so that he and you will be
+      friends, assisting each other in all that is good."
+      The people replied in a friendly way, that they would gladly be the king's
+      friends, if he would be a friend of the people of their country.
+      Then Thorarin again took up the word: -"This follows in addition to
+      the king's message, that he will in friendship desire of the people of the
+      north district that they give him the island, or out-rock, which lies at
+      the mouth of Eyfjord, and is called Grimsey, for which he will give you
+      from his country whatever good the people of the district may desire. He
+      sends this message particularly to Gudmund of Modruvellir to support this
+      matter, because he understands that Gudmund has most influence in that
+      quarter."
+      Gudmund replies, "My inclination is greatly for King Olaf's friendship,
+      and that I consider much more useful than the out-rock he desires. But the
+      king has not heard rightly if he think I have more power in this matter
+      than any other, for the island is a common. We, however, who have the most
+      use of the isle, will hold a meeting among ourselves about it."
+      Then the people went to their tent-houses; and the Northland people had a
+      meeting among themselves, and talked over the business, and every one
+      spoke according to his judgment. Gudmund supported the matter, and many
+      others formed their opinions by his. Then some asked why his brother Einar
+      did not speak on the subject. "We think he has the clearest insight into
+      most things."
+      Einar answers, "I have said so little about the matter because nobody has
+      asked me about it; but if I may give my opinion, our countrymen might just
+      as well make themselves at once liable to land-scat to King Olaf, and
+      submit to all his exactions as he has them among his people in Norway; and
+      this heavy burden we will lay not only upon ourselves, but on our sons,
+      and their sons, and all our race, and on all the community dwelling and
+      living in this land, which never after will be free from this slavery. Now
+      although this king is a good man, as I well believe him to be, yet it must
+      be hereafter, when kings succeed each other, that some will be good, and
+      some bad. Therefore if the people of this country will preserve the
+      freedom they have enjoyed since the land was first inhabited, it is not
+      advisable to give the king the smallest spot to fasten himself upon the
+      country by, and not to give him any kind of scat or service that can have
+      the appearance of a duty. On the other hand, I think it very proper that
+      the people send the king such friendly presents of hawks or horses, tents
+      or sails, or such things which are suitable gifts; and these are well
+      applied if they are repaid with friendship. But as to Grimsey Isle, I have
+      to say, that although nothing is drawn from it that can serve for food,
+      yet it could support a great war-force cruising from thence in long-ships;
+      and then, I doubt not, there would be distress enough at every poor
+      peasant's door."
+      When Einar had thus explained the proper connection of the matter, the
+      whole community were of one mind that such a thing should not be
+      permitted; and Thorarin saw sufficiently well what the result of his
+      errand was to be.
+      135. THE ANSWER OF THE ICELANDERS.
+      The day following, Thorarin went again to the Lawhill, and brought forward
+      his errand in the following words: -"King Olaf sends his message to
+      his friends here in the country, among whom he reckons Gudmund Eyjolfson,
+      Snorre Gode, Thorkel Eyjolfson, Skapte the lagman, and Thorstein Halson,
+      and desires them by me to come to him on a friendly visit; and adds, that
+      ye must not excuse yourselves, if you regard his friendship as worth
+      anything." In their answer they thanked the king for his message and
+      added, that they would afterwards give a reply to it by Thorarin when they
+      had more closely considered the matter with their friends. The chiefs now
+      weighed the matter among themselves, and each gave his own opinion about
+      the journey. Snorre and Skapte dissuaded from such a dangerous proceeding
+      with the people of Norway; namely, that all the men who had the most to
+      say in the country should at once leave Iceland. They added, that from
+      this message, and from what Einar had said, they had the suspicion that
+      the king intended to use force and strong measures against the Icelanders
+      if he ruled in the country. Gudmund and Thorkel Eyjolfson insisted much
+      that they should follow King Olaf's invitation, and called it a journey of
+      honour. But when they had considered the matter on all sides, it was at
+      last resolved that they should not travel themselves, but that each of
+      them should send in his place a man whom they thought best suited for it.
+      After this determination the Thing was closed, and there was no journey
+      that summer. Thorarin made two voyages that summer, and about harvest was
+      back again at King Olaf's, and reported the result of his mission, and
+      that some of the chiefs, or their sons, would come from Iceland according
+      to his message.
+      136. OF THE PEOPLE OF THE FAREY ISLANDS.
+      The same summer (A.D. 1024) there came from the Farey Islands to Norway,
+      on the king's invitation, Gille the lagman, Leif Ossurson, Thoralf of
+      Dimun, and many other bondes' sons. Thord of Gata made himself ready for
+      the voyage; but just as he was setting out he got a stroke of palsy, and
+      could not come, so he remained behind. Now when the people from the Farey
+      Isles arrived at King Olaf's, he called them to him to a conference, and
+      explained the purpose of the journey he had made them take, namely, that
+      he would have scat from the Farey Islands, and also that the people there
+      should be subject to the laws which the king should give them. In that
+      meeting it appeared from the king's words that he would make the Farey
+      people who had come answerable, and would bind them by oath to conclude
+      this union. He also offered to the men whom he thought the ablest to take
+      them into his service, and bestow honour and friendship on them. These
+      Farey men understood the king's words so, that they must dread the turn
+      the matter might take if they did not submit to all that the king desired.
+      Although they held several meetings about the business before it ended,
+      the king's desire at last prevailed. Leif, Gille, and Thoralf went into
+      the king's service, and became his courtmen; and they, with all their
+      travelling companions, swore the oath to King Olaf, that the law and land
+      privilege which he set them should be observed in the Farey Islands, and
+      also the scat be levied that he laid upon them. Thereafter the Farey
+      people prepared for their return home, and at their departure the king
+      gave those who had entered into his service presents in testimony of his
+      friendship, and they went their way. Now the king ordered a ship to be
+      rigged, manned it, and sent men to the Farey Islands to receive the scat
+      from the inhabitants which they should pay him. It was late before they
+      were ready; but they set off at last: and of their journey all that is to
+      be told is, that they did not come back, and no scat either, the following
+      summer; for nobody had come to the Farey Isles, and no man had demanded
+      scat there.
+      137. OF THE MARRIAGE OF KETIL AND OF THORD TO THE KING'S SISTERS.
+      King Olaf proceeded about harvest time to Viken, and sent a message before
+      him to the Uplands that they should prepare guest-quarters for him, as he
+      intended to be there in winter. Afterwards he made ready for his journey,
+      and went to the Uplands, and remained the winter there; going about in
+      guest-quarters, and putting things to rights where he saw it needful,
+      advancing also the cause of Christianity wheresoever it was requisite. It
+      happened while King Olaf was in Hedemark that Ketil Kalf of Ringanes
+      courted Gunhild, a daughter of Sigurd Syr and of King Olaf's mother Asta.
+      Gunhild was a sister of King Olaf, and therefore it belonged to the king
+      to give consent and determination to the business. He took it in a
+      friendly way; for he know Ketil, that he was of high birth, wealthy, and
+      of good understanding, and a great chief; and also he had long been a
+      great friend of King Olaf, as before related. All these circumstances
+      induced the king to approve of the match, and so it was that Ketil got
+      Gunhild. King Olaf was present at the wedding. From thence the king went
+      north to Gudbrandsdal, where he was entertained in guest-quarters. There
+      dwelt a man, by name Thord Guthormson, on a farm called Steig; and he was
+      the most powerful man in the north end of the valley. When Thord and the
+      king met, Thord made proposals for Isrid, the daughter of Gudbrand, and
+      the sister of King Olaf's mother, as it belonged to the king to give
+      consent. After the matter was considered, it was determined that the
+      marriage should proceed, and Thord got Isrid. Afterwards Thord was the
+      king's faithful friend, and also many of Thord's relations and friends,
+      who followed his footsteps. From thence King Olaf returned south through
+      Thoten and Hadaland, from thence to Ringerike, and so to Viken. In spring
+      (A.D. 1025) he went to Tunsberg, and stayed there while there was the
+      market-meeting, and a great resort of people. He then had his vessels
+      rigged out, and had many people about him.
+      138. OF THE ICELANDERS.
+      The same summer (A.D. 1025) came Stein, a son of the lagman Skapte, from
+      Iceland, in compliance with King Olaf's message; and with him Thorod, a
+      son of Snorre the gode, and Geller, a son of Thorkel Eyjolfson, and Egil,
+      a son of Hal of Sida, brother of Thorstein Hal. Gudmund Eyjolfson had died
+      the winter before. These Iceland men repaired to King Olaf as soon as they
+      had opportunity; and when they met the king they were well received, and
+      all were in his house. The same summer King Olaf heard that the ship was
+      missing which he had sent the summer before to the Farey Islands after the
+      scat, and nobody knew what had become of it. The king fitted out another
+      ship, manned it, and sent it to the Farey Islands for the scat. They got
+      under weigh, and proceeded to sea; but as little was ever heard of this
+      vessel as of the former one, and many conjectures were made about what had
+      become of them.
+      139. HERE BEGINS THE STORY OF CANUTE THE GREAT.
+      During this time Canute the Great, called by some Canute the Old, was king
+      of England and Denmark. Canute the Great was a son of Svein Haraldson
+      Forkedbeard, whose forefathers, for a long course of generations, had
+      ruled over Denmark. Harald Gormson, Canute's grandfather, had conquered
+      Norway after the fall of Harald Grafeld, Gunhild's son, had taken scat
+      from it, and had placed Earl Hakon the Great to defend the country. The
+      Danish King, Svein Haraldson, ruled also over Norway, and placed his
+      son-in-law Earl Eirik, the son of Earl Hakon, to defend the country. The
+      brothers Eirik and Svein, Earl Hakon's sons, ruled the land until Earl
+      Eirik went west to England, on the invitation of his brother-in-law Canute
+      the Great, when he left behind his son Earl Hakon, sister's son of Canute
+      the Great, to govern Norway. But when Olaf the Thick came first to Norway,
+      as before related, he took prisoner Earl Hakon the son of Eirik, and
+      deposed him from the kingdom. Then Hakon proceeded to his mother's
+      brother, Canute the Great, and had been with him constantly until the time
+      to which here in our saga we have now come. Canute the Great had conquered
+      England by blows and weapons, and had a long struggle before the people of
+      the land were subdued. But when he had set himself perfectly firm in the
+      government of the country, he remembered that he also had right to a
+      kingdom which he had not brought under his authority; and that was Norway.
+      He thought he had hereditary right to all Norway; and his sister's son
+      Hakon, who had held a part of it, appeared to him to have lost it with
+      disgrace. The reason why Canute and Hakon had remained quiet with respect
+      to their claims upon Norway was, that when King Olaf Haraldson landed in
+      Norway the people and commonalty ran together in crowds, and would hear of
+      nothing but that Olaf should be king over all the country, although some
+      afterwards, who thought that the people upon account of his power had no
+      self-government left to them, went out of the country. Many powerful men,
+      or rich bondes sons, had therefore gone to Canute the Great, and pretended
+      various errands; and every one who came to Canute and desired his
+      friendship was loaded with presents. With Canute, too, could be seen
+      greater splendour and pomp than elsewhere, both with regard to the
+      multitude of people who were daily in attendance, and also to the other
+      magnificent things about the houses he owned and dwelt in himself. Canute
+      the Great drew scat and revenue from the people who were the richest of
+      all in northern lands; and in the same proportion as he had greater
+      revenues than other kings, he also made greater presents than other kings.
+      In his whole kingdom peace was so well established, that no man dared
+      break it. The people of the country kept the peace towards each other, and
+      had their old country law: and for this he was greatly celebrated in all
+      countries. And many of those who came from Norway represented their
+      hardships to Earl Hakon, and some even to King Canute himself; and that
+      the Norway people were ready to turn back to the government of King
+      Canute, or Earl Hakon, and receive deliverance from them. This
+      conversation suited well the earl's inclination, and he carried it to the
+      king, and begged of him to try if King Olaf would not surrender the
+      kingdom, or at least come to an agreement to divide it; and many supported
+      the earl's views.
+      140. CANUTE'S MESSAGE TO KING OLAF.
+      Canute the Great sent men from the West, from England, to Norway, and
+      equipped them magnificently for the journey. They were bearers of the
+      English king Canute's letter and seal. They came about spring (A.D. 1025)
+      to the king of Norway, Olaf Haraldson, in Tunsberg. Now when it was told
+      the king that ambassadors had arrived from Canute the Great he was ill at
+      ease, and said that Canute had not sent messengers hither with any
+      messages that could be of advantage to him or his people; and it was some
+      days before the ambassadors could come before the king. But when they got
+      permission to speak to him they appeared before the king, and made known
+      King Canute's letter, and their errand which accompanied it; namely, "that
+      King Canute considers all Norway as his property, and insists that his
+      forefathers before him have possessed that kingdom; but as King Canute
+      offers peace to all countries, he will also offer peace to all here, if it
+      can be so settled, and will not invade Norway with his army if it can be
+      avoided. Now if King Olaf Haraldson wishes to remain king of Norway, he
+      will come to King Canute, and receive his kingdom as a fief from him,
+      become his vassal, and pay the scat which the earls before him formerly
+      paid." Thereupon they presented their letters, which contained precisely
+      the same conditions.
+      Then King Olaf replies, "I have heard say, by old stories, that the Danish
+      king Gorm was considered but a small king of a few people, for he ruled
+      over Denmark alone; but the kings who succeeded him thought that was too
+      little. It has since come so far that King Canute rules over Denmark and
+      England, and has conquered for himself a great part of Scotland. Now he
+      claims also my paternal heritage, and will then show some moderation in
+      his covetousness. Does he wish to rule over all the countries of the
+      North? Will he eat up all the kail in England? He shall do so, and reduce
+      that country to a desert, before I lay my head in his hands, or show him
+      any other kind of vassalage. Now ye shall tell him these my words, -I
+      will defend Norway with battle-axe and sword as long as life is given me,
+      and will pay scat to no man for my kingdom."
+      After this answer King Canute's ambassadors made themselves ready for
+      their journey home, and were by no means rejoiced at the success of their
+      errand.
+      Sigvat the skald had been with King Canute, who had given him a gold ring
+      that weighed half a mark. The skald Berse Skaldtorfason was also there,
+      and to him King Canute gave two gold rings, each weighing two marks, and
+      besides a sword inlaid with gold. Sigvat made this song about it: -
+     "When we came o'er the wave, you cub,
+          When we came o'er the wave,
+     To me one ring, to thee two rings,
+          The mighty Canute gave:
+     One mark to me,
+     Four marks to thee, -
+          A sword too, fine and brave.
+     Now God knows well,
+     And skalds can tell,
+          What justice here would crave."
+      Sigvat the skald was very intimate with King Canute's messengers, and
+      asked them many questions. They answered all his inquiries about their
+      conversation with King Olaf, and the result of their message. They said
+      the king listened unwillingly to their proposals. "And we do not know,"
+      say they, "to what he is trusting when he refuses becoming King Canute's
+      vassal, and going to him, which would be the best thing he could do; for
+      King Canute is so mild that however much a chief may have done against
+      him, he is pardoned if he only show himself obedient. It is but lately
+      that two kings came to him from the North, from Fife in Scotland, and he
+      gave up his wrath against them, and allowed them to retain all the lands
+      they had possessed before, and gave them besides very valuable gifts."
+      Then Sigvat sang: -
+     "From the North land, the midst of Fife,
+     Two kings came begging peace and life;
+     Craving from Canute life and peace, -
+     May Olaf's good luck never cease!
+     May he, our gallant Norse king, never
+     Be brought, like these, his head to offer
+     As ransom to a living man
+     For the broad lands his sword has won."
+      King Canute's ambassadors proceeded on their way back, and had a
+      favourable breeze across the sea. They came to King Canute, and told him
+      the result of their errand, and King Olaf's last words. King Canute
+      replies, "King Olaf guesses wrong, if he thinks I shall eat up all the
+      kail in England; for I will let him see that there is something else than
+      kail under my ribs, and cold kail it shall be for him." The same summer
+      (A.D. 1025) Aslak and Skjalg, the sons of Erling of Jadar, came from
+      Norway to King Canute, and were well received; for Aslak was married to
+      Sigrid, a daughter of Earl Svein Hakonson, and she and Earl Hakon Eirikson
+      were brothers' children. King Canute gave these brothers great fiefs over
+      there, and they stood in great favour.
+      141. KING OLAF'S ALLIANCE WITH ONUND THE KING OF SVITHJOD.
+      King Olaf summoned to him all the lendermen, and had a great many people
+      about him this summer (A.D. 1025), for a report was abroad that King
+      Canute would come from England. People had heard from merchant vessels
+      that Canute was assembling a great army in England. When summer was
+      advanced, some affirmed and others denied that the army would come. King
+      Olaf was all summer in Viken, and had spies out to learn if Canute was
+      come to Denmark. In autumn (A.D. 1025) he sent messengers eastward to
+      Svithjod to his brother-in-law King Onund, and let him know King Canute's
+      demand upon Norway; adding, that, in his opinion, if Canute subdued
+      Norway, King Onund would not long enjoy the Swedish dominions in peace. He
+      thought it advisable, therefore, that they should unite for their defence.
+      "And then," said he, "we will have strength enough to hold out against
+      Canute." King Onund received King Olaf's message favourably, and replied
+      to it, that he for his part would make common cause with King Olaf, so
+      that each of them should stand by the one who first required help with all
+      the strength of his kingdom. In these messages between them it was also
+      determined that they should have a meeting, and consult with each other.
+      The following winter (A.D. 1026) King Onund intended to travel across West
+      Gautland, and King Olaf made preparations for taking his winter abode at
+      Sarpsborg.
+      142. KING CANUTE'S AMBASSADORS TO ONUND OF SVITHJOD.
+      In autumn King Canute the Great came to Denmark, and remained there all
+      winter (A.D. 1026) with a numerous army. It was told him that ambassadors
+      with messages had been passing between the Swedish and Norwegian kings,
+      and that some great plans must be concerting between them. In winter King
+      Canute sent messengers to Svithjod, to King Onund, with great gifts and
+      messages of friendship. He also told Onund that he might sit altogether
+      quiet in this strife between him and Olaf the Thick; "for thou, Onund,"
+      says he, "and thy kingdom, shall be in peace as far as I am concerned."
+      When the ambassadors came to King Onund they presented the gifts which
+      King Canute sent him, together with the friendly message. King Onund did
+      not hear their speech very willingly, and the ambassadors could observe
+      that King Onund was most inclined to a friendship with King Olaf. They
+      returned accordingly, and told King Canute the result of their errand, and
+      told him not to depend much upon the friendship of King Onund.
+      143. THE EXPEDITION TO BJARMALAND.
+      This winter (A.D. 1026) King Olaf sat in Sarpsborg, and was surrounded by
+      a very great army of people. He sent the Halogalander Karle to the north
+      country upon his business. Karle went first to the Uplands, then across
+      the Dovrefield, and came down to Nidaros, where he received as much money
+      as he had the king's order for, together with a good ship, such as he
+      thought suitable for the voyage which the king had ordered him upon; and
+      that was to proceed north to Bjarmaland. It was settled that the king
+      should be in partnership with Karle, and each of them have the half of the
+      profit. Early in spring Karle directed his course to Halogaland, where his
+      brother Gunstein prepared to accompany him, having his own merchant goods
+      with him. There were about twenty-five men in the ship; and in spring they
+      sailed north to Finmark. When Thorer Hund heard this, he sent a man to the
+      brothers with the verbal message that he intended in summer to go to
+      Bjarmaland, and that he would sail with them, and that they should divide
+      what booty they made equally between them. Karle sent him back the message
+      that Thorer must have twenty-five men as they had, and they were willing
+      to divide the booty that might be taken equally, but not the merchant
+      goods which each had for himself. When Thorer's messenger came back he had
+      put a stout long-ship he owned into the water, and rigged it, and he had
+      put eighty men on board of his house-servants. Thorer alone had the
+      command over this crew, and he alone had all the goods they might acquire
+      on the cruise. When Thorer was ready for sea he set out northwards along
+      the coast, and found Karle a little north of Sandver. They then proceeded
+      with good wind. Gunstein said to his brother, as soon as they met Thorer,
+      that in his opinion Thorer was strongly manned. "I think," said he, "we
+      had better turn back than sail so entirely in Thorer's power, for I do not
+      trust him." Karle replies, "I will not turn back, although if I had known
+      when we were at home on Langey Isle that Thorer Hund would join us on this
+      voyage with so large a crew as he has, I would have taken more hands with
+      us." The brothers spoke about it to Thorer, and asked what was the meaning
+      of his taking more people with him than was agreed upon between them. He
+      replies, "We have a large ship which requires many hands, and methinks
+      there cannot be too many brave lads for so dangerous a cruise." They went
+      in summer as fast in general as the vessels could go. When the wind was
+      light the ship of the brothers sailed fastest, and they separated; but
+      when the wind freshened Thorer overtook them. They were seldom together,
+      but always in sight of each other. When they came to Bjarmaland they went
+      straight to the merchant town, and the market began. All who had money to
+      pay with got filled up with goods. Thorer also got a number of furs, and
+      of beaver and sable skins. Karle had a considerable sum of money with him,
+      with which he purchased skins and furs. When the fair was at an end they
+      went out of the Vina river, and then the truce of the country people was
+      also at an end. When they came out of the river they held a seaman's
+      council, and Thorer asked the crews if they would like to go on the land
+      and get booty.
+      They replied, that they would like it well enough, if they saw the booty
+      before their eyes.
+      Thorer replies, that there was booty to be got, if the voyage proved
+      fortunate; but that in all probability there would be danger in the
+      attempt.
+      All said they would try, if there was any chance of booty. Thorer
+      explained, that it was so established in this land, that when a rich man
+      died all his movable goods were divided between the dead man and his
+      heirs. He got the half part, or the third part, or sometimes less, and
+      that part was carried out into the forest and buried, -sometimes
+      under a mound, sometimes in the earth, and sometimes even a house was
+      built over it. He tells them at the same time to get ready for this
+      expedition at the fall of day. It was resolved that one should not desert
+      the other, and none should hold back when the commander ordered them to
+      come on board again. They now left people behind to take care of the
+      ships, and went on land, where they found flat fields at first, and then
+      great forests. Thorer went first, and the brothers Karle and Gunstein in
+      rear. Thorer commanded the people to observe the utmost silence. "And let
+      us peel the bark off the trees," says he, "so that one tree-mark can be
+      seen from the other." They came to a large cleared opening, where there
+      was a high fence upon which there was a gate that was locked. Six men of
+      the country people held watch every night at this fence, two at a time
+      keeping guard, each two for a third part of the night, when Thorer and his
+      men came to the fence the guard had gone home, and those who should
+      relieve them had not yet come upon guard. Thorer went to the fence, stuck
+      his axe up in it above his head, hauled himself up by it, and so came over
+      the fence, and inside the gate. Karle had also come over the fence, and to
+      the inside of the gate; so that both came at once to the port, took the
+      bar away, and opened the port; and then the people got in within the
+      fence. Then said Thorer, "Within this fence there is a mound in which
+      gold, and silver, and earth are all mixed together: seize that. But within
+      here stands the Bjarmaland people's god Jomala: let no one be so
+      presumptuous as to rob him." Thereupon they went to the mound and took as
+      much of the money as they could carry away in their clothes, with which,
+      as might be expected, much earth was mixed. Thereafter Thorer said that
+      the people now should retreat. "And ye brothers, Karle and Gunstein," says
+      he, "do ye lead the way, and I will go last." They all went accordingly
+      out of the gate: but Thorer went back to Jomala, and took a silver bowl
+      that stood upon his knee full of silver money. He put the silver in his
+      purse, and put his arm within the handle of the bowl, and so went out of
+      the gate. The whole troop had come without the fence; but when they
+      perceived that Thorer had stayed behind, Karle returned to trace him, and
+      when they met upon the path Thorer had the silver bowl with him. Thereupon
+      Karle immediately ran to Jomala; and observing he had a thick gold
+      ornament hanging around his neck, he lifted his axe, cut the string with
+      which the ornament was tied behind his neck, and the stroke was so strong
+      that the head of Jomala rang with such a great sound that they were all
+      astonished. Karle seized the ornament, and they all hastened away. But the
+      moment the sound was made the watchmen came forward upon the cleared
+      space, and blew their horns. Immediately the sound of the loor (1) was
+      heard all around from every quarter, calling the people together. They
+      hastened to the forest, and rushed into it; and heard the shouts and cries
+      on the other side of the Bjarmaland people in pursuit. Thorer Hund went
+      the last of the whole troop; and before him went two men carrying a great
+      sack between them, in which was something that was like ashes. Thorer took
+      this in his hand, and strewed it upon the footpath, and sometimes over the
+      people. They came thus out of the woods, and upon the fields, but heard
+      incessantly the Bjarmaland people pursuing with shouts and dreadful yells.
+      The army of the Bjarmaland people rushed out after them upon the field,
+      and on both sides of them; but neither the people nor their weapons came
+      so near as to do them any harm: from which they perceived that the
+      Bjarmaland people did not see them. Now when they reached their ships
+      Karle and his brother went on board; for they were the foremost, and
+      Thorer was far behind on the land. As soon as Karle and his men were on
+      board they struck their tents, cast loose their land ropes, hoisted their
+      sails, and their ship in all haste went to sea. Thorer and his people, on
+      the other hand, did not get on so quickly, as their vessel was heavier to
+      manage; so that when they got under sail, Karle and his people were far
+      off from land. Both vessels sailed across the White sea (Gandvik). The
+      nights were clear, so that both ships sailed night and day; until one day,
+      towards the time the day turns to shorten, Karle and his people took up
+      the land near an island, let down the sail, cast anchor, and waited until
+      the slack-tide set in, for there was a strong rost before them. Now Thorer
+      came up, and lay at anchor there also. Thorer and his people then put out
+      a boat, went into it, and rowed to Karle's ship. Thorer came on board, and
+      the brothers saluted him. Thorer told Karle to give him the ornament. "I
+      think," said he, "that I have best earned the ornaments that have been
+      taken, for methinks ye have to thank me for getting away without any loss
+      of men; and also I think thou, Karle, set us in the greatest fright."
+      Karle replies, "King Olaf has the half part of all the goods I gather on
+      this voyage, and I intend the ornament for him. Go to him, if you like,
+      and it is possible he will give thee the ornament, although I took it from
+      Jomala."
+      Then Thorer insisted that they should go upon the island, and divide the
+      booty.
+      Gunstein says, "It is now the turn of the tide, and it is time to sail."
+      Whereupon they began to raise their anchor.
+      When Thorer saw that, he returned to his boat and rowed to his own ship.
+      Karle and his men had hoisted sail, and were come a long way before Thorer
+      got under way. They now sailed so that the brothers were always in
+      advance, and both vessels made all the haste they could. They sailed thus
+      until they came to Geirsver, which is the first roadstead of the traders
+      to the North. They both came there towards evening, and lay in the harbour
+      near the landing-place. Thorer's ship lay inside, and the brothers' the
+      outside vessel in the port. When Thorer had set up his tents he went on
+      shore, and many of his men with him. They went to Karle's ship, which was
+      well provided. Thorer hailed the ship, and told the commanders to come on
+      shore; on which the brothers, and some men with them, went on the land.
+      Now Thorer began the same discourse, and told them to bring the goods they
+      got in booty to the land to have them divided. The brothers thought that
+      was not necessary, until they had arrived at their own neighbourhood.
+      Thorer said it was unusual not to divide booty but at their own home, and
+      thus to be left to the honour of other people. They spoke some words about
+      it, but could not agree. Then Thorer turned away; but had not gone far
+      before he came back, and tells his comrades to wait there. Thereupon he
+      calls to Karle, and says he wants to speak with him alone. Karle went to
+      meet him; and when he came near, Thorer struck at him with a spear, so
+      that it went through him. "There," said Thorer, "now thou hast learnt to
+      know a Bjarkey Island man. I thought thou shouldst feel Asbjorn's spear."
+      Karle died instantly, and Thorer with his people went immediately on board
+      their ship. When Gunstein and his men saw Karle fall they ran instantly to
+      him, took his body and carried it on board their ship, struck their tents,
+      and cast off from the pier, and left the land. When Thorer and his men saw
+      this, they took down their tents and made preparations to follow. But as
+      they were hoisting the sail the fastenings to the mast broke in two, and
+      the sail fell down across the ship, which caused a great delay before they
+      could hoist the sail again. Gunstein had already got a long way ahead
+      before Thorer's ship fetched way, and now they used both sails and oars.
+      Gunstein did the same. On both sides they made great way day and night;
+      but so that they did not gain much on each other, although when they came
+      to the small sounds among the islands Gunstein's vessel was lighter in
+      turning. But Thorer's ship made way upon them, so that when they came up
+      to Lengjuvik, Gunstein turned towards the land, and with all his men ran
+      up into the country, and left his ship. A little after Thorer came there
+      with his ship, sprang upon the land after them, and pursued them. There
+      was a woman who helped Gunstein to conceal himself, and it is told that
+      she was much acquainted with witchcraft. Thorer and his men returned to
+      the vessels, and took all the goods out of Gunstein's vessel, and put on
+      board stones in place of the cargo, and then hauled the ship out into the
+      fjord, cut a hole in its bottom, and sank it to the bottom. Thereafter
+      Thorer, with his people, returned home to Bjarkey Isle. Gunstein and his
+      people proceeded in small boats at first, and lay concealed by day, until
+      they had passed Bjarkey, and had got beyond Thorer's district. Gunstein
+      went home first to Langey Isle for a short time, and then proceeded south
+      without any halt, until he came south to Throndhjem, and there found King
+      Olaf, to whom he told all that had happened on this Bjarmaland expedition.
+      The king was ill-pleased with the voyage, but told Gunstein to remain with
+      him, promising to assist him when opportunity offered. Gunstein took the
+      invitation with thanks, and stayed with King Olaf.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Ludr -the loor -is a long tube or roll of birch-bark
+     used as a horn by the herdboys in the mountains in Norway.
+    -L.
+      144. MEETING OF KING OLAF AND KING ONUND.
+      King Olaf was, as before related, in Sarpsborg the winter (A.D. 1026) that
+      King Canute was in Denmark. The Swedish king Onund rode across West
+      Gautland the same winter, and had thirty hundred (3600) men with him. Men
+      and messages passed between them; and they agreed to meet in spring at
+      Konungahella. The meeting had been postponed, because they wished to know
+      before they met what King Canute intended doing. As it was now approaching
+      towards winter, King Canute made ready to go over to England with his
+      forces, and left his son Hardaknut to rule in Denmark, and with him Earl
+      Ulf, a son of Thorgils Sprakaleg. Ulf was married to Astrid, King Svein's
+      daughter, and sister of Canute the Great. Their son Svein was afterwards
+      king of Denmark. Earl Ulf was a very distinguished man. When the kings
+      Olaf and Onund heard that Canute the Great had gone west to England, they
+      hastened to hold their conference, and met at Konungahella, on the Gaut
+      river. They had a joyful meeting, and had many friendly conversations, of
+      which something might become known to the public; but they also spake
+      often a great deal between themselves, with none but themselves two
+      present, of which only some things afterwards were carried into effect,
+      and thus became known to every one. At parting the kings presented each
+      other with gifts, and parted the best of friends. King Onund went up into
+      Gautland, and Olaf northwards to Viken, and afterwards to Agder, and
+      thence northwards along the coast, but lay a long time at Egersund waiting
+      a wind. Here he heard that Erling Skjalgson, and the inhabitants of Jadar
+      with him, had assembled a large force. One day the king's people were
+      talking among themselves whether the wind was south or south-west, and
+      whether with that wind they could sail past Jadar or not. The most said it
+      was impossible to fetch round. Then answers Haldor Brynjolfson, "I am of
+      opinion that we would go round Jadar with this wind fast enough if Erling
+      Skjalgson had prepared a feast for us at Sole." Then King Olaf ordered the
+      tents to be struck, and the vessels to be hauled out, which was done. They
+      sailed the same day past Jadar with the best wind, and in the evening
+      reached Hirtingsey, from whence the king proceeded to Hordaland, and was
+      entertained there in guest-quarters.
+      145. THORALF'S MURDER.
+      The same summer (A.D. 1026) a ship sailed from Norway to the Farey
+      Islands, with messengers carrying a verbal message from King Olaf, that
+      one of his court-men, Leif Ossurson, or Lagman Gille, or Thoralf of Dimun,
+      should come over to him from the Farey Islands. Now when this message came
+      to the Farey Islands, and was delivered to those whom it concerned, they
+      held a meeting among themselves, to consider what might lie under this
+      message, and they were all of opinion that the king wanted to inquire into
+      the real state of the event which some said had taken place upon the
+      islands; namely, the failure and disappearance of the former messengers of
+      the king, and the loss of the two ships, of which not a man had been
+      saved. It was resolved that Thoralf should undertake the journey. He got
+      himself ready, and rigged out a merchant-vessel belonging to himself,
+      manned with ten or twelve men. When it was ready, waiting a wind, it
+      happened, at Austrey, in the house of Thrand of Gata, that he went one
+      fine day into the room where his brother's two sons, Sigurd and Thord,
+      sons of Thorlak, were lying upon the benches in the room. Gaut the Red was
+      also there, who was one of their relations and a man of distinction.
+      Sigurd was the oldest, and their leader in all things. Thord had a
+      distinguished name, and was called Thord the Low, although in reality he
+      was uncommonly tall, and yet in proportion more strong than large. Then
+      Thrand said, "How many things are changed in the course of a man's life!
+      When we were young, it was rare for young people who were able to do
+      anything to sit or lie still upon a fine day, and our forefathers would
+      scarcely have believed that Thoralf of Dimun would be bolder and more
+      active than ye are. I believe the vessel I have standing here in the
+      boat-house will be so old that it will rot under its coat of tar. Here are
+      all the houses full of wool, which is neither used nor sold. It should not
+      be so if I were a few winters younger." Sigurd sprang up, called upon Gaut
+      and Thord, and said he would not endure Thrand's scoffs. They went out to
+      the houseservants, and launched the vessel upon the water, brought down a
+      cargo, and loaded the ship. They had no want of a cargo at home, and the
+      vessel's rigging was in good order, so that in a few days they were ready
+      for sea. There were ten or twelve men in the vessel. Thoralf's ship and
+      theirs had the same wind, and they were generally in sight of each other.
+      They came to the land at Herna in the evening, and Sigurd with his vessel
+      lay outside on the strand, but so that there was not much distance between
+      the two ships. It happened towards evening, when it was dark, that just as
+      Thoralf and his people were preparing to go to bed, Thoralf and another
+      went on shore for a certain purpose. When they were ready, they prepared
+      to return on board. The man who had accompanied Thoralf related afterwards
+      this story, -that a cloth was thrown over his head, and that he was
+      lifted up from the ground, and he heard a great bustle. He was taken away,
+      and thrown head foremost down; but there was sea under him, and he sank
+      under the water. When he got to land, he went to the place where he and
+      Thoralf had been parted, and there he found Thoralf with his head cloven
+      down to his shoulders, and dead. When the ship's people heard of it they
+      carried the body out to the ship, and let it remain there all night. King
+      Olaf was at that time in guest-quarters at Lygra, and thither they sent a
+      message. Now a Thing was called by message-token, and the king came to the
+      Thing. He had also ordered the Farey people of both vessels to be
+      summoned, and they appeared at the Thing. Now when the Thing was seated,
+      the king stood up and said, "Here an event has happened which (and it is
+      well that it is so) is very seldom heard of. Here has a good man been put
+      to death, without any cause. Is there any man upon the Thing who can say
+      who has done it?"
+      Nobody could answer.
+      "Then," said the king, "I cannot conceal my suspicion that this deed has
+      been done by the Farey people themselves. It appears to me that it has
+      been done in this way, -that Sigurd Thorlakson has killed the man,
+      and Thord the Low has cast his comrade into the sea. I think, too, that
+      the motives to this must have been to hinder Thoralf from telling about
+      the misdeed of which he had information; namely, the murder which I
+      suspect was committed upon my messengers."
+      When he had ended his speech, Sigurd Thorlakson stood up, and desired to
+      be heard. "I have never before," said he, "spoken at a Thing, and I do not
+      expect to be looked upon as a man of ready words. But I think there is
+      sufficient necessity before me to reply something to this. I will venture
+      to make a guess that the speech the king has made comes from some man's
+      tongue who is of far less understanding and goodness than he is, and has
+      evidently proceeded from those who are our enemies. It is speaking
+      improbabilities to say that I could be Thoralf's murderer; for he was my
+      foster-brother and good friend. Had the case been otherwise, and had there
+      been anything outstanding between me and Thoralf, yet I am surely born
+      with sufficient understanding to have done this deed in the Farey Islands,
+      rather than here between your hands, sire. But I am ready to clear myself,
+      and my whole ship's crew, of this act, and to make oath according to what
+      stands in your laws. Or, if ye find it more satisfactory, I offer to clear
+      myself by the ordeal of hot iron; and I wish, sire, that you may be
+      present yourself at the proof."
+      When Sigurd had ceased to speak there were many who supported his case,
+      and begged the king that Sigurd might be allowed to clear himself of this
+      accusation. They thought that Sigurd had spoken well, and that the
+      accusation against him might be untrue.
+      The king replies, "It may be with regard to this man very differently, and
+      if he is belied in any respect he must be a good man; and if not, he is
+      the boldest I have ever met with: and I believe this is the case, and that
+      he will bear witness to it himself."
+      At the desire of the people, the king took Sigurd's obligation to take the
+      iron ordeal; he should come the following day to Lygra, where the bishop
+      should preside at the ordeal; and so the Thing closed. The king went back
+      to Lygra, and Sigurd and his comrades to their ship.
+      As soon as it began to be dark at night Sigurd said to his ship's people.
+      "To say the truth, we have come into a great misfortune; for a great lie
+      is got up against us, and this king is a deceitful, crafty man. Our fate
+      is easy to be foreseen where he rules; for first he made Thoralf be slain,
+      and then made us the misdoers, without benefit of redemption by fine. For
+      him it is an easy matter to manage the iron ordeal, so that I fear he will
+      come ill off who tries it against him. Now there is coming a brisk
+      mountain breeze, blowing right out of the sound and off the land; and it
+      is my advice that we hoist our sail, and set out to sea. Let Thrand
+      himself come with his wool to market another summer; but if I get away, it
+      is my opinion I shall never think of coming to Norway again."
+      His comrades thought the advice good, hoisted their sail, and in the
+      night-time took to the open sea with all speed. They did not stop until
+      they came to Farey, and home to Gata. Thrand was ill-pleased with their
+      voyage, and they did not answer him in a very friendly way; but they
+      remained at home, however, with Thrand. The morning after, King Olaf heard
+      of Sigurd's departure, and heavy reports went round about this case; and
+      there were many who believed that the accusation against Sigurd was true,
+      although they had denied and opposed it before the king. King Olaf spoke
+      but little about the matter, but seemed to know of a certainty that the
+      suspicion he had taken up was founded in truth. The king afterwards
+      proceeded in his progress, taking up his abode where it was provided for
+      him.
+      146. OF THE ICELANDERS.
+      King Olaf called before him the men who had come from Iceland, Thorod
+      Snorrason, Geller Thorkelson, Stein Skaptason, and Egil Halson, and spoke
+      to them thus: -"Ye have spoken to me much in summer about making
+      yourselves ready to return to Iceland, and I have never given you a
+      distinct answer. Now I will tell you what my intention is. Thee, Geller, I
+      propose to allow to return, if thou wilt carry my message there; but none
+      of the other Icelanders who are now here may go to Iceland before I have
+      heard how the message which thou, Geller, shalt bring thither has been
+      received."
+      When the king had made this resolution known, it appeared to those who had
+      a great desire to return, and were thus forbidden, that they were
+      unreasonably and hardly dealt with, and that they were placed in the
+      condition of unfree men. In the meantime Geller got ready for his journey,
+      and sailed in summer (A.D. 1026) to Iceland, taking with him the message
+      he was to bring before the Thing the following summer (A.D. 1027). The
+      king's message was, that he required the Icelanders to adopt the laws
+      which he had set in Norway, also to pay him thane-tax and nose-tax (1);
+      namely, a penny for every nose, and the penny at the rate of ten pennies
+      to the yard of wadmal (2). At the same time he promised them his
+      friendship if they accepted, and threatened them with all his vengeance if
+      they refused his proposals.
+      The people sat long in deliberation on this business; but at last they
+      were unanimous in refusing all the taxes and burdens which were demanded
+      of them. That summer Geller returned back from Iceland to Norway to King
+      Olaf, and found him in autumn in the east in Viken, just as he had come
+      from Gautland; of which I shall speak hereafter in this story of King
+      Olaf. Towards the end of autumn King Olaf repaired north to Throndhjem,
+      and went with his people to Nidaros, where he ordered a winter residence
+      to be prepared for him. The winter (A.D. 1027) that he passed here in the
+      merchant-town of Nidaros was the thirteenth year of his reign.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Nefgildi (nef=nose), a nose-tax or poll-tax payable to the
+     king.  This ancient "nose-tax" was also imposed by the
+     Norsemen on conquered countries, the penalty for defaulters
+     being the loss of their nose.
+(2) Wadmal was the coarse woollen cloth made in Iceland, and so
+     generally used for clothing that it was a measure of value
+     in the North, like money, for other commodities. -L.
+      147. OF THE JAMTALAND PEOPLE.
+      There was once a man called Ketil Jamte, a son of Earl Onund of Sparby, in
+      the Throndhjem district. He fled over the ridge of mountains from Eystein
+      Illrade, cleared the forest, and settled the country now called the
+      province of Jamtaland. A great many people joined him from the Throndhjem
+      land, on account of the disturbances there; for this King Eystein had laid
+      taxes on the Throndhjem people, and set his dog, called Saur, to be king
+      over them. Thorer Helsing was Ketil's grandson, and he colonised the
+      province called Helsingjaland, which is named after him. When Harald
+      Harfager subdued the kingdom by force, many people fled out of the country
+      from him, both Throndhjem people and Naumudal people, and thus new
+      settlements were added to Jamtaland; and some settlers went even eastwards
+      to Helsingjaland and down to the Baltic coast, and all became subjects of
+      the Swedish king. While Hakon Athelstan's foster-son was over Norway there
+      was peace, and merchant traffic from Throndhjem to Jamtaland; and, as he
+      was an excellent king, the Jamtalanders came from the east to him, paid
+      him scat, and he gave them laws and administered justice. They would
+      rather submit to his government than to the Swedish king's, because they
+      were of Norwegian race; and all the Helsingjaland people, who had their
+      descent from the north side of the mountain ridge, did the same. This
+      continued long after those times, until Olaf the Thick and the Swedish
+      king Olaf quarrelled about the boundaries. Then the Jamtaland and
+      Helsingjaland people went back to the Swedish king; and then the forest of
+      Eid was the eastern boundary of the land, and the mountain ridge, or keel
+      of the country, the northern: and the Swedish king took scat of
+      Helsingjaland, and also of Jamtaland. Now, thought the king of Norway,
+      Olaf, in consequence of the agreement between him and the Swedish king,
+      the scat of Jamtaland should be paid differently than before; although it
+      had long been established that the Jamtaland people paid their scat to the
+      Swedish king, and that he appointed officers over the country. The Swedes
+      would listen to nothing, but that all the land to the east of the keel of
+      the country belonged to the Swedish king. Now this went so, as it often
+      happens, that although the kings were brothers-in-law and relations, each
+      would hold fast the dominions which he thought he had a right to. King
+      Olaf had sent a message round in Jamtaland, declaring it to be his will
+      that the Jamtaland people should be subject to him, threatening them with
+      violence if they refused; but the Jamtaland people preferred being
+      subjects of the Swedish king.
+      148. STEIN'S STORY.
+      The Icelanders, Thorod Snorrason and Stein Skaptason, were ill-pleased at
+      not being allowed to do as they liked. Stein was a remarkably handsome
+      man, dexterous at all feats, a great poet, splendid in his apparel, and
+      very ambitious of distinction. His father, Skapte, had composed a poem on
+      King Olaf, which he had taught Stein, with the intention that he should
+      bring it to King Olaf. Stein could not now restrain himself from making
+      the king reproaches in word and speech, both in verse and prose. Both he
+      and Thorod were imprudent in their conversation, and said the king would
+      be looked upon as a worse man than those who, under faith and law, had
+      sent their sons to him, as he now treated them as men without liberty. The
+      king was angry at this. One day Stein stood before the king, and asked if
+      he would listen to the poem which his father Skapte had composed about
+      him. The king replies, "Thou must first repeat that, Stein, which thou
+      hast composed about me." Stein replies, that it was not the case that he
+      had composed any. "I am no skald, sire," said he; "and if I even could
+      compose anything, it, and all that concerns me, would appear to thee of
+      little value." Stein then went out, but thought he perceived what the king
+      alluded to. Thorgeir, one of the king's land-bailiffs, who managed one of
+      his farms in Orkadal, happened to be present, and heard the conversation
+      of the king and Stein, and soon afterwards Thorgeir returned home. One
+      night Stein left the city, and his footboy with him. They went up Gaularas
+      and into Orkadal. One evening they came to one of the king's farms which
+      Thorgeir had the management of, and Thorgeir invited Stein to pass the
+      night there, and asked where he was travelling to. Stein begged the loan
+      of a horse and sledge, for he saw they were just driving home corn.
+      Thorgeir replies, "I do not exactly see how it stands with thy journey,
+      and if thou art travelling with the king's leave. The other day, methinks,
+      the words were not very sweet that passed between the king and thee."
+      Stein said, "If it be so that I am not my own master for the king, yet I
+      will not submit to such treatment from his slaves;" and, drawing his
+      sword, he killed the landbailiff. Then he took the horse, put the boy upon
+      him, and sat himself in the sledge, and so drove the whole night. They
+      travelled until they came to Surnadal in More. There they had themselves
+      ferried across the fjord, and proceeded onwards as fast as they could.
+      They told nobody about the murder, but wherever they came called
+      themselves king's men, and met good entertainment everywhere. One day at
+      last they came towards evening to Giske Isle, to Thorberg Arnason's house.
+      He was not at home himself, but his wife Ragnhild, a daughter of Erling
+      Skjalgson, was. There Stein was well received, because formerly there had
+      been great friendship between them. It had once happened, namely, that
+      Stein, on his voyage from Iceland with his own vessel, had come to Giske
+      from sea, and had anchored at the island. At that time Ragnhild was in the
+      pains of childbirth, and very ill, and there was no priest on the island,
+      or in the neighbourhood of it. There came a message to the merchant-vessel
+      to inquire if, by chance, there was a priest on board. There happened to
+      be a priest in the vessel, who was called Bard; but he was a young man
+      from Westfjord, who had little learning. The messengers begged the priest
+      to go with them, but he thought it was a difficult matter: for he knew his
+      own ignorance, and would not go. Stein added his word to persuade the
+      priest. The priest replies, "I will go if thou wilt go with me; for then I
+      will have confidence, if I should require advice." Stein said he was
+      willing; and they went forthwith to the house, and to where Ragnhild was
+      in labour. Soon after she brought forth a female child, which appeared to
+      be rather weak. Then the priest baptized the infant, and Stein held it at
+      the baptism, at which it got the name of Thora; and Stein gave it a gold
+      ring. Ragnhild promised Stein her perfect friendship, and bade him come to
+      her whenever he thought he required her help. Stein replied that he would
+      hold no other female child at baptism, and then they parted. Now it was
+      come to the time when Stein required this kind promise of Ragnhild to be
+      fulfilled, and he told her what had happened, and that the king's wrath
+      had fallen upon him. She answered, that all the aid she could give should
+      stand at his service; but bade him wait for Thorberg's arrival. She then
+      showed him to a seat beside her son Eystein Orre, who was then twelve
+      years old. Stein presented gifts to Ragnhild and Eystein. Thorberg had
+      already heard how Stein had conducted himself before he got home, and was
+      rather vexed at it. Ragnhild went to him, and told him how matters stood
+      with Stein, and begged Thorberg to receive him, and take care of him.
+      Thorberg replies, "I have heard that the king, after sending out a
+      message-token, held a Thing concerning the murder of Thorgeir, and has
+      condemned Stein as having fled the country, and likewise that the king is
+      highly incensed: and I have too much sense to take the cause of a
+      foreigner in hand, and draw upon myself the king's wrath. Let Stein,
+      therefore, withdraw from hence as quickly as thou canst."
+      Ragnhild replied, that they should either both go or both stay.
+      Thorberg told her to go where she pleased. "For I expect," said he, "that
+      wherever thou goest thou wilt soon come back, for here is thy importance
+      greatest."
+      Her son Eystein Orre then stood forward, and said he would not stay behind
+      if Ragnhild goes.
+      Thorberg said that they showed themselves very stiff and obstinate in this
+      matter. "And it appears that ye must have your way in it, since ye take it
+      so near to heart; but thou art reckoning too much, Ragnhild, upon thy
+      descent, in paying so little regard to King Olaf's word."
+      Ragnhild replied, "If thou art so much afraid to keep Stein with thee
+      here, go with him to my father Erling, or give him attendants, so that he
+      may get there in safety." Thorberg said he would not send Stein there;
+      "for there are enough of things besides to enrage the king against
+      Erling." Stein thus remained there all winter (A.D. 1027).
+      After Yule a king's messenger came to Thorberg, with the order that
+      Thorberg should come to him before midsummer; and the order was serious
+      and severe. Thorberg laid it before his friends, and asked their advice if
+      he should venture to go to the king after what had taken place. The
+      greater number dissuaded him, and thought it more advisable to let Stein
+      slip out of his hands than to venture within the king's power: but
+      Thorberg himself had rather more inclination not to decline the journey.
+      Soon after Thorberg went to his brother Fin, told him the circumstances,
+      and asked him to accompany him. Fin replied, that he thought it foolish to
+      be so completely under woman's influence that he dared not, on account of
+      his wife, keep the fealty and law of his sovereign.
+      "Thou art free," replied Thorberg, "to go with me or not; but I believe it
+      is more fear of the king than love to him that keeps thee back." And so
+      they parted in anger.
+      Then Thorberg went to his brother Arne Arnason, and asked him to go with
+      him to the king. Arne says, "It appears to me wonderful that such a
+      sensible, prudent man, should fall into such a misfortune, without
+      necessity, as to incur the king's indignation. It might be excused if it
+      were thy relation or foster-brother whom thou hadst thus sheltered; but
+      not at all that thou shouldst take up an Iceland man, and harbour the
+      king's outlaw, to the injury of thyself and all thy relations."
+      Thorberg replies, "It stands good, according to the proverb, -a
+      rotten branch will be found in every tree. My father's greatest misfortune
+      evidently was that he had such ill luck in producing sons that at last he
+      produced one incapable of acting, and without any resemblance to our race,
+      and whom in truth I never would have called brother, if it were not that
+      it would have been to my mother's shame to have refused."
+      Thorberg turned away in a gloomy temper, and went home. Thereafter he sent
+      a message to his brother Kalf in the Throndhjem district, and begged him
+      to meet him at Agdanes; and when the messengers found Kalf he promised,
+      without more ado, to make the journey. Ragnhild sent men east to Jadar to
+      her father Erling, and begged him to send people. Erling's sons, Sigurd
+      and Thord, came out, each with a ship of twenty benches of rowers and
+      ninety men. When they came north Thorberg received them joyfully,
+      entertained them well, and prepared for the voyage with them. Thorberg had
+      also a vessel with twenty benches, and they steered their course
+      northwards. When they came to the mouth of the Throndhjem fjord Thorberg's
+      two brothers, Fin and Arne, were there already, with two ships each of
+      twenty benches. Thorberg met his brothers with joy, and observed that his
+      whetstone had taken effect; and Fin replied he seldom needed sharpening
+      for such work. Then they proceeded north with all their forces to
+      Throndhjem, and Stein was along with them. When they came to Agdanes, Kaff
+      Arnason was there before them; and he also had a wellmanned ship of twenty
+      benches. With this war-force they sailed up to Nidaros, where they lay all
+      night. The morning after they had a consultation with each other. Kalf and
+      Erling's sons were for attacking the town with all their forces, and
+      leaving the event to fate; but Thorberg wished that they should first
+      proceed with moderation, and make an offer; in which opinion Fin and Arne
+      also concurred. It was accordingly resolved that Fin and Arne, with a few
+      men, should first wait upon the king. The king had previously heard that
+      they had come so strong in men, and was therefore very sharp in his
+      speech. Fin offered to pay mulct for Thorberg, and also for Stein, and
+      bade the king to fix what the penalties should be, however large;
+      stipulating only for Thorberg safety and his fiefs, and for Stein life and
+      limb.
+      The king replies, "It appears to me that ye come from home so equipped
+      that ye can determine half as much as I can myself, or more; but this I
+      expected least of all from you brothers, that ye should come against me
+      with an army; and this counsel, I can observe, has its origin from the
+      people of Jadar; but ye have no occasion to offer me money in mulct."
+      Fin replies, "We brothers have collected men, not to offer hostility to
+      you, sire, but to offer rather our services; but if you will bear down
+      Thorberg altogether, we must all go to King Canute the Great with such
+      forces as we have."
+      Then the king looked at him, and said, "If ye brothers will give your
+      oaths that ye will follow me in the country and out of the country, and
+      not part from me without my leave and permission, and shall not conceal
+      from me any treasonable design that may come to your knowledge against me,
+      then will I agree to a peace with you brothers."
+      Then Fin returned to his forces, and told the conditions which the king
+      had proposed to them. Now they held a council upon it, and Thorberg, for
+      his part, said he would accept the terms offered. "I have no wish," says
+      he, "to fly from my property, and seek foreign masters; but, on the
+      contrary, will always consider it an honour to follow King Olaf, and be
+      where he is." Then says Kalf, "I will make no oath to King Olaf, but will
+      be with him always, so long as I retain my fiefs and dignities, and so
+      long as the king will be my friend; and my opinion is that we should all
+      do the same." Fin says, "we will venture to let King Olaf himself
+      determine in this matter." Arne Arnason says, "I was resolved to follow
+      thee, brother Thorberg, even if thou hadst given battle to King Olaf, and
+      I shall certainly not leave thee for listening to better counsel; so I
+      intend to follow thee and Fin, and accept the conditions ye have taken."
+      Thereupon the brothers Thorberg, Fin, and Arne, went on board a vessel,
+      rowed into the fjord, and waited upon the king. The agreement went
+      accordingly into fulfillment, so that the brothers gave their oaths to the
+      king. Then Thorberg endeavored to make peace for Stein with the king; but
+      the king replied that Stein might for him depart in safety, and go where
+      he pleased, but "in my house he can never be again." Then Thorberg and his
+      brothers went back to their men. Kalf went to Eggja, and Fin to the king;
+      and Thorberg, with the other men, went south to their homes. Stein went
+      with Erling's sons; but early in the spring (A.D. 1027) he went west to
+      England into the service of Canute the Great, and was long with him, and
+      was treated with great distinction.
+      149. FIN ARNASON'S EXPEDITION TO HALOGALAND.
+      Now when Fin Arnason had been a short time with King Olaf, the king called
+      him to a conference, along with some other persons he usually held
+      consultation with; and in this conference the king spoke to this effect: -"The
+      decision remains fixed in my mind that in spring I should raise the whole
+      country to a levy both of men and ships, and then proceed, with all the
+      force I can muster, against King Canute the Great: for I know for certain
+      that he does not intend to treat as a jest the claim he has awakened upon
+      my kingdom. Now I let thee know my will, Fin Arnason, that thou proceed on
+      my errand to Halogaland, and raise the people there to an expedition, men
+      and ships, and summon that force to meet me at Agdanes." Then the king
+      named other men whom he sent to Throndhjem, and some southwards in the
+      country, and he commanded that this order should be circulated through the
+      whole land. Of Fin's voyage we have to relate that he had with him a ship
+      with about thirty men, and when he was ready for sea he prosecuted his
+      journey until he came to Halogaland. There he summoned the bondes to a
+      Thing, laid before them his errand, and craved a levy. The bondes in that
+      district had large vessels, suited to a levy expedition, and they obeyed
+      the king's message, and rigged their ships. Now when Fin came farther
+      north in Halogaland he held a Thing again, and sent some of his men from
+      him to crave a levy where he thought it necessary. He sent also men to
+      Bjarkey Island to Thorer Hund, and there, as elsewhere, craved the quota
+      to the levy. When the message came to Thorer he made himself ready, and
+      manned with his house-servants the same vessel he had sailed with on his
+      cruise to Bjarmaland, and which he equipped at his own expense. Fin
+      summoned all the people of Halogaland who were to the north to meet at
+      Vagar. There came a great fleet together in spring, and they waited there
+      until Fin returned from the North. Thorer Hund had also come there. When
+      Fin arrived he ordered the signal to sound for all the people of the levy
+      to attend a House-Thing; and at it all the men produced their weapons, and
+      also the fighting men from each ship-district were mustered. When that was
+      all finished Fin said, "I have also to bring thee a salutation, Thorer
+      Hund, from King Olaf, and to ask thee what thou wilt offer him for the
+      murder of his court-man Karle, or for the robbery in taking the king's
+      goods north in Lengjuvik. I have the king's orders to settle that
+      business, and I wait thy answer to it."
+      Thorer looked about him, and saw standing on both sides many fully armed
+      men, among whom were Gunstein and others of Karle's kindred. Then said
+      Thorer, "My proposal is soon made. I will refer altogether to the king's
+      pleasure the matter he thinks he has against me."
+      Fin replies, "Thou must put up with a less honour; for thou must refer the
+      matter altogether to my decision, if any agreement is to take place."
+      Thorer replies, "And even then I think it will stand well with my case,
+      and therefore I will not decline referring it to thee."
+      Thereupon Thorer came forward, and confirmed what he said by giving his
+      hand upon it; and Fin repeated first all the words he should say.
+      Fin now pronounced his decision upon the agreement, -that Thorer
+      should pay to the king ten marks of gold, and to Gunstein and the other
+      kindred ten marks, and for the robbery and loss of goods ten marks more;
+      and all which should be paid immediately.
+      Thorer says, "This is a heavy money mulct."
+      "Without it," replies Fin, "there will be no agreement."
+      Thorer says, there must time be allowed to gather so much in loan from his
+      followers; but Fin told him to pay immediately on the spot; and besides,
+      Thorer should lay down the great ornament which he took from Karle when he
+      was dead. Thorer asserted that he had not got the ornament. Then Gunstein
+      pressed forward, and said that Karle had the ornament around his neck when
+      they parted, but it was gone when they took up his corpse. Thorer said he
+      had not observed any ornament; but if there was any such thing, it must be
+      lying at home in Bjarkey. Then Fin put the point of his spear to Thorer's
+      breast, and said that he must instantly produce the ornament; on which
+      Thorer took the ornament from his neck and gave it to Fin. Thereafter
+      Thorer turned away, and went on board his ship. Fin, with many other men,
+      followed him, went through the whole vessel, and took up the hatches. At
+      the mast they saw two very large casks; and Fin asked, "What are these
+      puncheons?"
+      Thorer replies, "It is my liquor."
+      Fin says, "Why don't you give us something to drink then, comrade, since
+      you have so much liquor?"
+      Thorer ordered his men to run off a bowlfull from the puncheons, from
+      which Fin and his people got liquor of the best quality. Now Fin ordered
+      Thorer to pay the mulcts. Thorer went backwards and forwards through the
+      ship, speaking now to the one, now to the other, and Fin calling out to
+      produce the pence. Thorer begged him to go to the shore, and said he would
+      bring the money there, and Fin with his men went on shore. Then Thorer
+      came and paid silver; of which, from one purse, there were weighed ten
+      marks. Thereafter Thorer brought many knotted nightcaps; and in some was
+      one mark, in others half a mark, and in others some small money. "This is
+      money my friends and other good people have lent me," said he; "for I
+      think all my travelling money is gone." Then Thorer went back again to his
+      ship, and returned, and paid the silver by little and little; and this
+      lasted so long that the day was drawing towards evening. When the Thing
+      had closed the people had gone to their vessels, and made ready to depart;
+      and as fast as they were ready they hoisted sail and set out, so that most
+      of them were under sail. When Fin saw that they were most of them under
+      sail, he ordered his men to get ready too; but as yet little more than a
+      third part of the mulct had been paid. Then Fin said, "This goes on very
+      slowly, Thorer, with the payment. I see it costs thee a great deal to pay
+      money. I shall now let it stand for the present, and what remains thou
+      shalt pay to the king himself." Fin then got up and went away.
+      Thorer replies, "I am well enough pleased, Fin, to part now; but the good
+      will is not wanting to pay this debt, so that both thou and the king shall
+      say it is not unpaid."
+      Then Fin went on board his ship, and followed the rest of his fleet.
+      Thorer was late before he was ready to come out of the harbour. When the
+      sails were hoisted he steered out over Westfjord, and went to sea, keeping
+      south along the land so far off that the hill-tops were half sunk, and
+      soon the land altogether was sunk from view by the sea. Thorer held this
+      course until he got into the English sea, and landed in England. He betook
+      himself to King Canute forthwith, and was well received by him. It then
+      came out that Thorer had with him a great deal of property; and, with
+      other things, all the money he and Karle had taken in Bjarmaland. In the
+      great liquor-casks there were sides within the outer sides, and the liquor
+      was between them. The rest of the casks were filled with furs, and beaver
+      and sable skins. Thorer was then with King Canute. Fin came with his
+      forces to King Olaf, and related to him how all had gone upon his voyage,
+      and told at the same time his suspicion that Thorer had left the country,
+      and gone west to England to King Canute. "And there I fear he will cause
+      as much trouble."
+      The king replies, "I believe that Thorer must be our enemy, and it appears
+      to me always better to have him at a distance than near."
+      150. DISPUTE BETWEEN HAREK AND ASMUND.
+      Asmund Grankelson had been this winter (A.D. 1027) in Halogaland in his
+      sheriffdom, and was at home with his father Grankel. There lies a rock out
+      in the sea, on which there is both seal and bird catching, and a fishing
+      ground, and egg-gathering; and from old times it had been an appendage to
+      the farm which Grankel owned, but now Harek of Thjotta laid claim to it.
+      It had gone so far, that some years he had taken by force all the gain of
+      this rock; but Asmund and his father thought that they might expect the
+      king's help in all cases in which the right was upon their side. Both
+      father and son went therefore in spring to Harek, and brought him a
+      message and tokens from King Olaf that he should drop his claim. Harek
+      answered Asmund crossly, because he had gone to the king with such
+      insinuations -"for the just right is upon my side. Thou shouldst
+      learn moderation, Asmund, although thou hast so much confidence in the
+      king's favour. It has succeeded with thee to kill some chiefs, and leave
+      their slaughter unpaid for by any mulct; and also to plunder us, although
+      we thought ourselves at least equal to all of equal birth, and thou art
+      far from being my equal in family."
+      Asmund replies, "Many have experienced from thee, Harek, that thou art of
+      great connections, and too great power; and many in consequence have
+      suffered loss in their property through thee. But it is likely that now
+      thou must turn thyself elsewhere, and not against us with thy violence,
+      and not go altogether against law, as thou art now doing." Then they
+      separated.
+      Harek sent ten or twelve of his house-servants with a large rowing boat,
+      with which they rowed to the rock, took all that was to be got upon it,
+      and loaded their boat. But when they were ready to return home, Asmund
+      Grankelson came with thirty men, and ordered them to give up all they had
+      taken. Harek's house-servants were not quick in complying, so that Asmund
+      attacked them. Some of Harek's men were cudgelled, some wounded, some
+      thrown into the sea, and all they had caught was taken from on board of
+      their boat, and Asmund and his people took it along with them. Then
+      Harek's servants came home, and told him the event. Harek replies, "That
+      is called news indeed that seldom happens; never before has it happened
+      that my people have been beaten."
+      The matter dropped. Harek never spoke about it, but was very cheerful. In
+      spring, however, Harek rigged out a cutter of twenty seats of rowers, and
+      manned it with his house-servants, and the ship was remarkably well fitted
+      out both with people and all necessary equipment; and Harek went to the
+      levy; but when he came to King Olaf, Asmund was there before him. The king
+      summoned Harek and Asmund to him, and reconciled them so that they left
+      the matter entirely to him. Asmund then produced witnesses to prove that
+      Grankel had owned the rock, and the king gave judgment accordingly. The
+      case had a one-sided result. No mulct was paid for Harek's house-servants,
+      and the rock was declared to be Grankel's. Harek observed it was no
+      disgrace to obey the king's decision, whatever way the case itself was
+      decided.
+      151. THOROD'S STORY.
+      Thorod Snorrason had remained in Norway, according to King Olaf's
+      commands, when Geller Thorkelson got leave to go to Iceland, as before
+      related. He remained there (A.D. 1027) with King Olaf, but was ill pleased
+      that he was not free to travel where he pleased. Early in winter, King
+      Olaf, when he was in Nidaros, made it known that he would send people to
+      Jamtaland to collect the scat; but nobody had any great desire to go on
+      this business, after the fate of those whom King Olaf had sent before,
+      namely, Thrand White and others, twelve in number, who lost their lives,
+      as before related; and the Jamtalanders had ever since been subject to the
+      Swedish king. Thorod Snorrason now offered to undertake this journey, for
+      he cared little what became of him if he could but become his own master
+      again. The king consented, and Thorod set out with eleven men in company.
+      They came east to Jamtaland, and went to a man called Thorar, who was
+      lagman, and a person in high estimation. They met with a hospitable
+      reception; and when they had been there a while, they explained their
+      business to Thorar. He replied, that other men and chiefs of the country
+      had in all respects as much power and right to give an answer as he had,
+      and for that purpose he would call together a Thing. It was so done; the
+      message-token was sent out, and a numerous Thing assembled. Thorar went to
+      the Thing, but the messengers in the meantime remained at home. At the
+      Thing, Thorar laid the business before the people, but all were unanimous
+      that no scat should be paid to the king of Norway; and some were for
+      hanging the messengers, others for sacrificing them to the gods. At last
+      it was resolved to hold them fast until the king of Sweden's sheriffs
+      arrived, and they could treat them as they pleased with consent of the
+      people; and that, in the meantime, this decision should be concealed, and
+      the messengers treated well, and detained under pretext that they must
+      wait until the scat is collected; and that they should be separated, and
+      placed two and two, as if for the convenience of boarding them. Thorod and
+      another remained in Thorar's house. There was a great Yule feast and
+      ale-drinking, to which each brought his own liquor; for there were many
+      peasants in the village, who all drank in company together at Yule. There
+      was another village not far distant, where Thorar's brother-in-law dwelt,
+      who was a rich and powerful man, and had a grown-up son. The
+      brothers-in-law intended to pass the Yule in drinking feasts, half of it
+      at the house of the one and half with the other; and the feast began at
+      Thorar's house. The brothers-in-law drank together, and Thorod and the
+      sons of the peasants by themselves; and it was a drinking match. In the
+      evening words arose, and comparisons between the men of Sweden and of
+      Norway, and then between their kings both of former times and at the
+      present, and of the manslaughters and robberies that had taken place
+      between the countries. Then said the peasants sons, "If our king has lost
+      most people, his sheriffs will make it even with the lives of twelve men
+      when they come from the south after Yule; and ye little know, ye silly
+      fools, why ye are kept here." Thorod took notice of these words, and many
+      made jest about it, and scoffed at them and their king. When the ale began
+      to talk out of the hearts of the Jamtalanders, what Thorod had before long
+      suspected became evident. The day after Thorod and his comrade took all
+      their clothes and weapons, and laid them ready; and at night, when the
+      people were all asleep, they fled to the forest. The next morning, when
+      the Jamtalanders were aware of their flight, men set out after them with
+      dogs to trace them, and found them in a wood in which they had concealed
+      themselves. They brought them home to a room in which there was a deep
+      cellar, into which they were thrown, and the door locked upon them. They
+      had little meat, and only the clothes they had on them. In the middle of
+      Yule, Thorar, with all his freeborn men, went to his brother's-in-law,
+      where he was to be a guest until the last of Yule. Thorar's slaves were to
+      keep guard upon the cellar, and they were provided with plenty of liquor;
+      but as they observed no moderation in drinking, they became towards
+      evening confused in the head with the ale. As they were quite drunk, those
+      who had to bring meat to the prisoners in the cellar said among themselves
+      that they should want for nothing. Thorod amused the slaves by singing to
+      them. They said he was a clever man, and gave him a large candle that was
+      lighted; and the slaves who were in went to call the others to come in;
+      but they were all so confused with the ale, that in going out they neither
+      locked the cellar nor the room after them. Now Thorod and his comrades
+      tore up their skin clothes in strips, knotted them together, made a noose
+      at one end, and threw up the rope on the floor of the room. It fastened
+      itself around a chest, by which they tried to haul themselves up. Thorod
+      lifted up his comrade until he stood on his shoulders, and from thence
+      scrambled up through the hatchhole. There was no want of ropes in the
+      chamber, and he threw a rope down to Thorod; but when he tried to draw him
+      up, he could not move him from the spot. Then Thorod told him to cast the
+      rope over a cross-beam that was in the house, make a loop in it, and place
+      as much wood and stones in the loop as would outweigh him; and the heavy
+      weight went down into the cellar, and Thorod was drawn up by it. Now they
+      took as much clothes as they required in the room; and among other things
+      they took some reindeer hides, out of which they cut sandals, and bound
+      them under their feet, with the hoofs of the reindeer feet trailing
+      behind. But before they set off they set fire to a large corn barn which
+      was close by, and then ran out into the pitch-dark night. The barn blazed,
+      and set fire to many other houses in the village. Thorod and his comrade
+      travelled the whole night until they came to a lonely wood, where they
+      concealed themselves when it was daylight. In the morning they were
+      missed. There was chase made with dogs to trace the footsteps all round
+      the house; but the hounds always came back to the house, for they had the
+      smell of the reindeer hoofs, and followed the scent back on the road that
+      the hoofs had left, and therefore could not find the right direction.
+      Thorod and his comrade wandered long about in the desert forest, and came
+      one evening to a small house, and went in. A man and a woman were sitting
+      by the fire. The man called himself Thorer, and said it was his wife who
+      was sitting there, and the hut belonged to them. The peasant asked them to
+      stop there, at which they were well pleased. He told them that he had come
+      to this place, because he had fled from the inhabited district on account
+      of a murder. Thorod and his comrade were well received, and they all got
+      their supper at the fireside; and then the benches were cleared for them,
+      and they lay down to sleep, but the fire was still burning with a clear
+      light. Thorod saw a man come in from another house, and never had he seen
+      so stout a man. He was dressed in a scarlet cloak beset with gold clasps,
+      and was of very handsome appearance. Thorod heard him scold them for
+      taking guests, when they had scarcely food for themselves. The housewife
+      said, "Be not angry, brother; seldom such a thing happens; and rather do
+      them some good too, for thou hast better opportunity to do so than we."
+      Thorod heard also the stout man named by the name of Arnliot Gelline, and
+      observed that the woman of the house was his sister. Thorod had heard
+      speak of Arnliot as the greatest-of robbers and malefactors. Thorod and
+      his companion slept the first part of the night, for they were wearied
+      with walking; but when a third of the night was still to come, Arnliot
+      awoke them, told them to get up, and make ready to depart. They arose
+      immediately, put on their clothes, and some breakfast was given them; and
+      Arnliot gave each of them also a pair of skees. Arnliot made himself ready
+      to accompany them, and got upon his skees, which were both broad and long;
+      but scarcely had he swung his skee-staff before he was a long way past
+      them. He waited for them, and said they would make no progress in this
+      way, and told them to stand upon the edge of his skees beside him. They
+      did so. Thorod stood nearest to him, and held by Arnliot's belt, and his
+      comrade held by him. Arnliot strode on as quickly with them both, as if he
+      was alone and without any weight. The following day they came, towards
+      night, to a lodge for travellers, struck fire, and prepared some food; but
+      Arnliot told them to throw away nothing of their food, neither bones nor
+      crumbs. Arnliot took a silver plate out of the pocket of his cloak, and
+      ate from it. When they were done eating, Arnliot gathered up the remains
+      of their meal, and they prepared to go to sleep. In the other end of the
+      house there was a loft upon cross-beams, and Arnliot and the others went
+      up, and laid themselves down to sleep. Arnliot had a large halberd, of
+      which the upper part was mounted with gold, and the shaft was so long that
+      with his arm stretched out he could scarcely touch the top of it; and he
+      was girt with a sword. They had both their weapons and their clothes up in
+      the loft beside them. Arnliot, who lay outermost in the loft, told them to
+      be perfectly quiet. Soon after twelve men came to the house, who were
+      merchants going with their wares to Jamtaland; and when they came into the
+      house they made a great disturbance, were merry, and made a great fire
+      before them; and when they took their supper they cast away all the bones
+      around them. They then prepared to go to sleep, and laid themselves down
+      upon the benches around the fire. When they, had been asleep a short time,
+      a huge witch came into the house; and when she came in, she carefully
+      swept together all the bones and whatever was of food kind into a heap,
+      and threw it into her mouth. Then she gripped the man who was nearest to
+      her, riving and tearing him asunder, and threw him upon the fire. The
+      others awoke in dreadful fright, and sprang up, but she took them, and put
+      them one by one to death, so that only one remained in life. He ran under
+      the loft calling for help, and if there was any one on the loft to help
+      him. Arnliot reached down his hand, seized him by the shoulder, and drew
+      him up into the loft. The witch-wife had turned towards the fire, and
+      began to eat the men who were roasting. Now Arnliot stood up, took his
+      halberd, and struck her between the shoulders, so that the point came out
+      at her breast. She writhed with it, gave a dreadful shriek, and sprang up.
+      The halberd slipped from Arnliot's hands, and she ran out with it. Arnliot
+      then went in; cleared away the dead corpses out of the house; set the door
+      and the door-posts up, for she had torn them down in going out; and they
+      slept the rest of the night. When the day broke they got up; and first
+      they took their breakfast. When they had got food, Arnliot said, "Now we
+      must part here. Ye can proceed upon the new-traced path the merchants have
+      made in coming here yesterday. In the meantime I will seek after my
+      halberd, and in reward for my labour I will take so much of the goods
+      these men had with them as I find useful to me. Thou, Thorod, must take my
+      salutation to King Olaf; and say to him that he is the man I am most
+      desirous to see, although my salutation may appear to him of little
+      worth." Then he took his silver plate, wiped it dry with a cloth, and
+      said, "Give King Olaf this plate; salute him, and say it is from me." Then
+      they made themselves ready for their journey, and parted. Thorod went on
+      with his comrade and the man of the merchants company who had escaped. He
+      proceeded until he came to King Olaf in the town (Nidaros); told the king
+      all that had happened, and presented to him the silver plate. The king
+      said it was wrong that Arnliot himself had not come to him; "for it is a
+      pity so brave a hero, and so distinguished a man, should have given
+      himself up to misdeeds."
+      Thorod remained the rest of the winter with the king, and in summer got
+      leave to return to Iceland; and he and King Olaf parted the best of
+      friends.
+      152. KING OLAF'S LEVY OF MEN.
+      King Olaf made ready in spring (A.D. 1027) to leave Nidaros, and many
+      people were assembled about him, both from Throndhjem and the Northern
+      country; and when he was ready he proceeded first with his men to More,
+      where he gathered the men of the levy, and did the same at Raumsdal. He
+      went from thence to South More. He lay a long time at the Herey Isles
+      waiting for his forces; and he often held House-things, as many reports
+      came to his ears about which he thought it necessary to hold councils. In
+      one of these Things he made a speech, in which he spoke of the loss he
+      suffered from the Farey islanders. "The scat which they promised me," he
+      said, "is not forthcoming; and I now intend to send men thither after it."
+      Then he proposed to different men to undertake this expedition; but the
+      answer was, that all declined the adventure.
+      Then there stood up a stout and very remarkable looking man in the Thing.
+      He was clad in a red kirtle, had a helmet on his head, a sword in his
+      belt, and a large halberd in his hands. He took up the word and said, "In
+      truth here is a great want of men. Ye have a good king; but ye are bad
+      servants who say no to this expedition he offers you, although ye have
+      received many gifts of friendship and tokens of honour from him. I have
+      hitherto been no friend of the king, and he has been my enemy, and says,
+      besides, that he has good grounds for being so. Now, I offer, sire, to go
+      upon this expedition, if no better will undertake it."
+      The king answers, "Who is this brave man who replies to my offer? Thou
+      showest thyself different from the other men here present, in offering
+      thyself for this expedition from which they excuse themselves, although I
+      expected they would willingly have undertaken it; but I do not know thee
+      in the least, and do not know thy name."
+      He replies, "My name, sire, is not difficult to know, and I think thou
+      hast heard my name before. I am Karl Morske."
+      The king -"So this is Karl! I have indeed heard thy name before; and,
+      to say the truth, there was a time when our meeting must have been such,
+      if I had had my will; that thou shouldst not have had to tell it now. But
+      I will not show myself worse than thou, but will join my thanks and my
+      favour to the side of the help thou hast offered me. Now thou shalt come
+      to me, Karl, and be my guest to-day; and then we shall consult together
+      about this business." Karl said it should be so.
+      153. KARL MORSKE'S STORY.
+      Karl Morske had been a viking, and a celebrated robber. Often had the king
+      sent out men against him, and wished to make an end of him; but Karl, who
+      was a man of high connection, was quick in all his doing's, and besides a
+      man of great dexterity, and expert in all feats. Now when Karl had
+      undertaken this business the king was reconciled to him, gave him his
+      friendship, and let him be fitted out in the best manner for this
+      expedition. There were about twenty men in the ship; and the king sent
+      messages to his friends in the Farey Islands, and recommended him also to
+      Leif Ossurson and Lagman Gille, for aid and defence; and for this purpose
+      furnished Karl with tokens of the full powers given him. Karl set out as
+      soon as he was ready; and as he got a favourable breeze soon came to the
+      Farey Islands, and landed at Thorshavn, in the island Straumey. A Thing
+      was called, to which there came a great number of people. Thrand of Gata
+      came with a great retinue, and Leif and Gille came there also, with many
+      in their following. After they had set up their tents, and put themselves
+      in order, they went to Karl Morske, and saluted each other on both sides
+      in a friendly way. Then Karl produced King Olaf's words, tokens, and
+      friendly message to Leif and Gille, who received them in a friendly
+      manner, invited Karl to come to them, and promised him to support his
+      errand, and give him all the aid in their power, for which he thanked
+      them. Soon after came Thrand of Gata, who also received Karl in the most
+      friendly manner, and said he was glad to see so able a man coming to their
+      country on the king's business, which they were all bound to promote. "I
+      will insist, Karl," says he, "on thy taking-up thy winter abode with me,
+      together with all those of thy people who may appear to thee necessary for
+      thy dignity."
+      Karl replies, that he had already settled to lodge with Leif; "otherwise I
+      would with great pleasure have accepted thy invitation."
+      "Then fate has given great honour to Leif," says Thrand; "but is there any
+      other way in which I can be of service?"
+      Karl replies, that he would do him a great service by collecting the scat
+      of the eastern island, and of all the northern islands.
+      Thrand said it was both his duty and interest to assist in the king's
+      business, and thereupon Thrand returned to his tent; and at that Thing
+      nothing else worth speaking of occurred. Karl took up his abode with Leif
+      Ossurson, and was there all winter (A.D. 1028). Leif collected the scat of
+      Straumey Island, and all the islands south of it. The spring after Thrand
+      of Gata fell ill, and had sore eyes and other complaints; but he prepared
+      to attend the Thing, as was his custom. When he came to the Thing he had
+      his tent put up, and within it another black tent, that the light might
+      not penetrate. After some days of the Thing had passed, Leif and Karl came
+      to Thrand's tent, with a great many people, and found some persons
+      standing outside. They asked if Thrand was in the tent, and were told he
+      was. Leif told them to bid Thrand come out, as he and Karl had some
+      business with him. They came back, and said that Thrand had sore eyes, and
+      could not come out; "but he begs thee, Leif, to come to him within." Leif
+      told his comrades to come carefully into the tent, and not to press
+      forward, and that he who came last in should go out first. Leif went in
+      first, followed by Karl, and then his comrades; and all fully armed as if
+      they were going into battle. Leif went into the black tent and asked if
+      Thrand was there. Thrand answered and saluted Leif. Leif returned his
+      salutation, and asked if he had brought the scat from the northern
+      islands, and if he would pay the scat that had been collected. Thrand
+      replies, that he had not forgotten what had been spoken of between him and
+      Karl, and that he would now pay over the scat. "Here is a purse, Leif,
+      full of silver, which thou canst receive." Leif looked around, and saw but
+      few people in the tent, of whom some were lying upon the benches, and a
+      few were sitting up. Then Leif went to Thrand, and took the purse, and
+      carried it into the outer tent, where it was light, turned out the money
+      on his shield, groped about in it with his hand, and told Karl to look at
+      the silver. When they had looked at it a while, Karl asked Leif what he
+      thought of the silver. He replied, "I am thinking where the bad money that
+      is in the north isles can have come from." Thrand heard this, and said,
+      "Do you not think, Leif, the silver is good?" "No," says he. Thrand
+      replies, "Our relations, then, are rascals not to be trusted. I sent them
+      in spring to collect the scat in the north isles, as I could not myself go
+      anywhere, and they have allowed themselves to be bribed by the bondes to
+      take false money, which nobody looks upon as current and good; it is
+      better, therefore, Leif, to look at this silver which has been paid me as
+      land-rent." Leif thereupon carried back this silver, and received another
+      bag, which he carried to Karl, and they looked over the money together.
+      Karl asked Leif what he thought of this money. He answered, that it
+      appeared to him so bad that it would not be taken in payment, however
+      little hope there might be of getting a debt paid in any other way:
+      "therefore I will not take this money upon the king's account." A man who
+      had been lying on the bench now cast the skin coverlet off which he had
+      drawn over his head, and said, "True is the old word, -he grows worse
+      who grows older: so it is with thee, Thrand, who allowest Karl Morske to
+      handle thy money all the day." This was Gaut the Red. Thrand sprang up at
+      Gaut's words, and reprimanded his relation with many angry words. At last
+      he said that Leif should leave this silver, and take a bag which his own
+      peasants had brought him in spring. "And although I am weak-sighted, yet
+      my own hand is the truest test." Another man who was lying on the bench
+      raised himself now upon his elbow; and this was Thord the Low. He said,
+      "These are no ordinary reproaches we suffer from Karl Morske, and
+      therefore he well deserves a reward for them." Leif in the meantime took
+      the bag, and carried it to Karl; and when they cast their eyes on the
+      money, Leif said, "We need not look long at this silver, for here the one
+      piece of money is better than the other; and this is the money we will
+      have. Let a man come to be present at the counting it out." Thrand says
+      that he thought Leif was the fittest man to do it upon his account. Leif
+      and Karl thereupon went a short way from the tent, sat down, and counted
+      and weighed the silver. Karl took the helmet off his head, and received in
+      it the weighed silver. They saw a man coming to them who had a stick with
+      an axe-head on it in his hand, a hat low upon his head, and a short green
+      cloak. He was bare-legged, and had linen breeches on tied at the knee. He
+      laid his stick down in the field, and went to Karl and said, "Take care,
+      Karl Morske, that thou does not hurt thyself against my axe-stick."
+      Immediately a man came running and calls with great haste to Leif
+      Ossurson, telling him to come as quickly as possible to Lagman Gille's
+      tent; "for," says he, "Sirurd Thorlakson ran in just now into the mouth of
+      the tent, and gave one of Gille's men a desperate wound." Leif rose up
+      instantly, and went off to Gille's tent along with his men. Karl remained
+      sitting, and the Norway people stood around in all corners. Gaut
+      immediately sprang up, and struck with a hand-axe over the heads of the
+      people, and the stroke came on Karl's head; but the wound was slight.
+      Thord the Low seized the stick-axe, which lay in the field at his side,
+      and struck the axe-blade right into Karl's skull. Many people now streamed
+      out of Thrand's tent. Karl was carried away dead. Thrand was much grieved
+      at this event, and offered money-mulcts for his relations; but Leif and
+      Gille, who had to prosecute the business, would accept no mulct. Sigurd
+      was banished the country for having wounded Gille's tent comrade, and Gaut
+      and Thord for the murder of Karl. The Norway people rigged out the vessel
+      which Karl had with him, and sailed eastward to Olaf, and gave him these
+      tidings. He was in no pleasant humour at it, and threatened a speedy
+      vengeance; but it was not allotted by fate to King Olaf to revenge himself
+      on Thrand and his relations, because of the hostilities which had begun in
+      Norway, and which are now to be related. And there is nothing more to be
+      told of what happened after King Olaf sent men to the Farey Islands to
+      take scat of them. But great strife arose after Karl's death in the Farey
+      Islands between the family of Thrand of Gata and Leif Ossurson, and of
+      which there are great sagas.
+      154. KING OLAF'S EXPEDITION WITH HIS LEVY.
+      Now we must proceed with the relation we began before, -that King
+      Olaf set out with his men, and raised a levy over the whole country (A.D.
+      1027). All lendermen in the North followed him excepting Einar
+      Tambaskelfer, who sat quietly at home upon his farm since his return to
+      the country, and did not serve the king. Einar had great estates and
+      wealth, although he held no fiefs from the king, and he lived splendidly.
+      King Olaf sailed with his fleet south around Stad, and many people from
+      the districts around joined him. King Olaf himself had a ship which he had
+      got built the winter before (A.D. 1027), and which was called the Visund
+      (1). It was a very large ship, with a bison's head gilded all over upon
+      the bow. Sigvat the skald speaks thus of it: -
+     "Trygvason's Long Serpent bore,
+     Grim gaping o'er the waves before,
+     A dragon's head with open throat,
+     When last the hero was afloat:
+          His cruise was closed,
+          As God disposed.
+     Olaf has raised a bison's head,
+     Which proudly seems the waves to tread.
+     While o'er its golden forehead dashing
+     The waves its glittering horns are washing:
+          May God dispose
+          A luckier close."
+      The king went on to Hordaland; there he heard the news that Erling
+      Skjalgson had left the country with a great force, and four or five ships.
+      He himself had a large war-ship, and his sons had three of twenty
+      rowing-banks each; and they had sailed westward to England to Canute the
+      Great. Then King Olaf sailed eastward along the land with a mighty
+      war-force, and he inquired everywhere if anything was known of Canute's
+      proceedings; and all agreed in saying he was in England but added that he
+      was fitting out a levy, and intended coming to Norway. As Olaf had a large
+      fleet, and could not discover with certainty where he should go to meet
+      King Canute, and as his people were dissatisfied with lying quiet in one
+      place with so large an armament, he resolved to sail with his fleet south
+      to Denmark, and took with him all the men who were best appointed and most
+      warlike; and he gave leave to the others to return home. Now the people
+      whom he thought of little use having gone home, King Olaf had many
+      excellent and stout men-at-arms besides those who, as before related, had
+      fled the country, or sat quietly at home; and most of the chief men and
+      lendermen of Norway were along with him.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Visundr is the buffalo; although the modern bison, or
+     American animal of that name, might have been known through
+     the Greenland colonists, who in this reign had visited some
+     parts of America. -L.
+      155. OF KING OLAF AND KING ONUND.
+      When King Olaf sailed to Denmark, he set his course for Seeland; and when
+      he came there he made incursions on the land, and began to plunder. The
+      country people were severely treated; some were killed, some bound and
+      dragged to the ships. All who could do so took to flight, and made no
+      opposition. King Olaf committed there the greatest ravages. While Olaf was
+      in Seeland, the news came that King Onund Olafson of Sweden had raised a
+      levy, and fallen upon Scania, and was ravaging there; and then it became
+      known what the resolution had been that the two kings had taken at the
+      Gaut river, where they had concluded a union and friendship, and had bound
+      themselves to oppose King Canute. King Onund continued his march until he
+      met his brother-in-law King Olaf. When they met they made proclamation
+      both to their own people and to the people of the country, that they
+      intended to conquer Denmark; and asked the support of the people of the
+      country for this purpose. And it happened, as we find examples of
+      everywhere, that if hostilities are brought upon the people of a country
+      not strong enough to withstand, the greatest number will submit to the
+      conditions by which peace can be purchased at any rate. So it happened
+      here that many men went into the service of the kings, and agreed to
+      submit to them. Wheresoever they went they laid the country all round
+      subjection to them, and otherwise laid waste all with fire and sword.
+      Of this foray Sigvat the skald speaks, in a ballad he composed concerning
+      King Canute the Great: -
+          "'Canute is on the sea!'
+          The news is told,
+          And the Norsemen bold
+     Repeat it with great glee.
+     And it runs from mouth to mouth -
+          'On a lucky day
+          We came away
+     From Throndhjem to the south.'
+     Across the cold East sea,
+          The Swedish king
+          His host did bring,
+     To gain great victory.
+     King Onund came to fight,
+          In Seeland's plains,
+          Against the Danes,
+     With his steel-clad men so bright.
+     Canute is on the land;
+          Side to side
+          His long-ships ride
+     Along the yellow strand.
+     Where waves wash the green banks,
+          Mast to mast,
+          All bound fast,
+     His great fleet lies in ranks."
+      156. OF KING CANUTE THE GREAT.
+      King Canute had heard in England that King Olaf of Norway had called out a
+      levy, and had gone with his forces to Denmark, and was making great
+      ravages in his dominions there. Canute began to gather people, and he had
+      speedily collected a great army and a numerous fleet. Earl Hakon was
+      second in command over the whole.
+      Sigvat the skald came this summer (A.D. 1027) from the West, from Ruda
+      (Rouen) in Valland, and with him was a man called Berg. They had made a
+      merchant voyage there the summer before. Sigvat had made a little poem
+      about this journey, called "The Western Traveller's Song," which begins
+      thus: -
+     "Berg! many a merry morn was pass'd,
+     When our vessel was made fast,
+     And we lay on the glittering tide
+     or Rouen river's western side."
+      When Sigvat came to England he went directly to King Canute, and asked his
+      leave to proceed to Norway; for King Canute had forbidden all merchant
+      vessels to sail until he himself was ready with his fleet. When Sigvat
+      arrived he went to the house in which the king was lodged; but the doors
+      were locked, and he had to stand a long time outside, but when he got
+      admittance he obtained the permission he desired. He then sang: -
+     "The way to Jutland's king I sought;
+     A little patience I was taught.
+     The doors were shut -all full within;
+     The udaller could not get in.
+     But Gorm's great son did condescend
+     To his own chamber me to send,
+     And grant my prayer -although I'm one
+     Whose arms the fetters' weight have known."
+      When Sigvat became aware that King Canute was equipping an armament
+      against King Olaf, and knew what a mighty force King Canute had, he made
+      these lines: -
+     "The mighty Canute, and Earl Hakon,
+     Have leagued themselves, and counsel taken
+     Against King Olaf's life,
+     And are ready for the strife.
+     In spite of king and earl, I say,
+     'I love him well -may he get away:'
+     On the Fields, wild and dreary,
+     With him I'd live, and ne'er be weary."
+      Sigvat made many other songs concerning this expedition of Canute and
+      Hakon. He made this among others: -
+     "'Twas not the earl's intention then
+     'Twixt Olaf and the udalmen
+     Peace to establish, and the land
+     Upright to hold with Northman's hand;
+     But ever with deceit and lies
+     Eirik's descendant, Hakon, tries
+     To make ill-will and discontent,
+     Till all the udalmen are bent
+     Against King Olaf's rule to rise."
+      157. OF KING CANUTE'S SHIP THE DRAGON.
+      Canute the Great was at last ready with his fleet, and left the land; and
+      a vast number of men he had, and ships frightfully large. He himself had a
+      dragon-ship, so large that it had sixty banks of rowers, and the head was
+      gilt all over. Earl Hakon had another dragon of forty banks, and it also
+      had a gilt figure-head. The sails of both were in stripes of blue, red,
+      and green, and the vessels were painted all above the water-stroke; and
+      all that belonged to their equipment was most splendid. They had also many
+      other huge ships remarkably well fitted out, and grand. Sigvat the skald
+      talks of this in his song on Canute: -
+     "Canute is out beneath the sky -
+     Canute of the clear blue eye!
+     The king is out on the ocean's breast,
+     Leading his grand fleet from the West.
+     On to the East the ship-masts glide,
+     Glancing and bright each long-ship's side.
+     The conqueror of great Ethelred,
+     Canute, is there, his foemen's dread:
+     His dragon with her sails of blue,
+     All bright and brilliant to the view,
+     High hoisted on the yard arms wide,
+     Carries great Canute o'er the tide.
+     Brave is the royal progress -fast
+     The proud ship's keel obeys the mast,
+     Dashes through foam, and gains the land,
+     Raising a surge on Limfjord's strand."
+      It is related that King Canute sailed with this vast force from England,
+      and came with all his force safely to Denmark, where he went into
+      Limfjord, and there he found gathered besides a large army of the men of
+      the country.
+      158. HARDAKNUT TAKEN TO BE KING IN DENMARK.
+      Earl Ulf Sprakalegson had been set as protector over Denmark when King
+      Canute went to England, and the king had intrusted his son Hardaknut in
+      the earl's hands. This took place the summer before (A.D. 1026), as we
+      related. But the earl immediately gave it out that King Canute had, at
+      parting, made known to him his will and desire that the Danes should take
+      his son Hardaknut as king over the Danish dominions. "On that account,"
+      says the earl, "he gave the matter into our hands; as I, and many other
+      chiefs and leading men here in the country, have often complained to King
+      Canute of the evil consequences to the country of being without a king,
+      and that former kings thought it honour and power enough to rule over the
+      Danish kingdom alone; and in the times that are past many kings have ruled
+      over this kingdom. But now there are greater difficulties than have ever
+      been before; for we have been so fortunate hitherto as to live without
+      disturbance from foreign kings, but now we hear the king of Norway is
+      going to attack us, to which is added the fear of the people that the
+      Swedish king will join him; and now King Canute is in England." The earl
+      then produced King Canute's letter and seal, confirming all that the earl
+      asserted. Many other chiefs supported this business; and in consequence of
+      all these persuasions the people resolved to take Hardaknut as king, which
+      was done at the same Thing. The Queen Emma had been principal promoter of
+      this determination; for she had got the letter to be written, and provided
+      with the seal, having cunningly got hold of the king's signet; but from
+      him it was all concealed. Now when Hardaknut and Earl Ulf heard for
+      certain that King Olaf was come from Norway with a large army, they went
+      to Jutland, where the greatest strength of the Danish kingdom lies, sent
+      out message-tokens, and summoned to them a great force; but when they
+      heard the Swedish king was also come with his army, they thought they
+      would not have strength enough to give battle to both, and therefore kept
+      their army together in Jutland, and resolved to defend that country
+      against the kings. The whole of their ships they assembled in Limfjord,
+      and waited thus for King Canute. Now when they heard that King Canute had
+      come from the West to Limfjord they sent men to him, and to Queen Emma,
+      and begged her to find out if the king was angry at them or not, and to
+      let them know. The queen talked over the matter with him, and said, "Your
+      son Hardaknut will pay the full mulct the king may demand, if he has done
+      anything which is thought to be against the king." He replies, that
+      Hardaknut has not done this of his own judgement. "And therefore," says
+      he, "it has turned out as might have been expected, that when he, a child,
+      and without understanding, wanted to be called king, the country, when any
+      evil came and an enemy appeared, must be conquered by foreign princes, if
+      our might had not come to his aid. If he will have any reconciliation with
+      me let him come to me, and lay down the mock title of king he has given
+      himself." The queen sent these very words to Hardaknut, and at the same
+      time she begged him not to decline coming; for, as she truly observed, he
+      had no force to stand against his father. When this message came to
+      Hardaknut he asked the advice of the earl and other chief people who were
+      with him; but it was soon found that when the people heard King Canute the
+      Old was arrived they all streamed to him, and seemed to have no confidence
+      but in him alone. Then Earl Ulf and his fellows saw they had but two roads
+      to take; either to go to the king and leave all to his mercy, or to fly
+      the country. All pressed Hardaknut to go to his father, which advice he
+      followed. When they met he fell at his father's feet, and laid his seal,
+      which accompanied the kingly title, on his knee. King Canute took
+      Hardaknut by the hand, and placed him in as high a seat as he used to sit
+      in before. Earl Ulf sent his son Svein, who was a sister's son of King
+      Canute, and the same age as Hardaknut, to the king. He prayed for grace
+      and reconciliation for his father, and offered himself as hostage for the
+      earl. King Canute ordered him to tell the earl to assemble his men and
+      ships, and come to him, and then they would talk of reconciliation. The
+      earl did so.
+      159. FORAY IN SCANIA.
+      When King Olaf and King Onund heard that King Canute was come from the
+      West, and also that he had a vast force, they sailed east to Scania, and
+      allowed themselves to ravage and burn in the districts there, and then
+      proceeded eastward along the land to the frontier of Sweden. As soon as
+      the country people heard that King Canute was come from the West, no one
+      thought of going into the service of the two kings.
+      Now the kings sailed eastward along the coast, and brought up in a river
+      called Helga, and remained there some time. When they heard that King
+      Canute was coming eastward with his forces against them, they held a
+      council; and the result was, that King Olaf with his people went up the
+      country to the forest, and to the lake out of which the river Helga flows.
+      There at the riverhead they made a dam of timber and turf, and dammed in
+      the lake. They also dug a deep ditch, through which they led several
+      waters, so that the lake waxed very high. In the river-bed they laid large
+      logs of timber. They were many days about this work, and King Olaf had the
+      management of this piece of artifice; but King Onund had only to command
+      the fleet and army. When King Canute heard of the proceedings of the two
+      kings, and of the damage they had done to his dominions, he sailed right
+      against them to where they lay in Helga river. He had a War-force which
+      was one half greater than that of both the kings together. Sigvat speaks
+      of these things: -
+     "The king, who shields
+     His Jutland fields
+     From scaith or harm
+     By foeman's arm,
+     Will not allow
+     Wild plundering now:
+     'The greatest he,
+     On land or sea.'"
+      160. BATTLE IN HELGA RIVER.
+      One day, towards evening, King Onund's spies saw King Canute coming
+      sailing along, and he was not far off. Then King Onund ordered the
+      war-horns to sound; on which his people struck their tents, put on their
+      weapons, rowed out of the harbour and east round the land, bound their
+      ships together, and prepared for battle. King Onund made his spies run up
+      the country to look for King Olaf, and tell him the news. Then King Olaf
+      broke up the dam, and let the river take its course. King Olaf travelled
+      down in the night to his ships. When King Canute came outside the harbour,
+      he saw the forces of the kings ready for battle. He thought that it would
+      be too late in the day to begin the fight by the time his forces could be
+      ready; for his fleet required a great deal of room at sea, and there was a
+      long distance between the foremost of his ships and the hindmost, and
+      between those outside and those nearest the land, and there was but little
+      wind. Now, as Canute saw that the Swedes and Norwegians had quitted the
+      harbour, he went into it with as many ships as it could hold; but the main
+      strength of the fleet lay without the harbour. In the morning, when it was
+      light, a great part of the men went on shore; some for amusement, some to
+      converse with the people of other ships. They observed nothing until the
+      water came rushing over them like a waterfall, carrying huge trees, which
+      drove in among their ships, damaging all they struck; and the water
+      covered all the fields. The men on shore perished, and many who were in
+      the ships. All who could do it cut their cables; so that the ships were
+      loose, and drove before the stream, and were scattered here and there. The
+      great dragon, which King Canute himself was in, drove before the stream;
+      and as it could not so easily be turned with oars, drove out among Olaf's
+      and Onund's ships. As they knew the ship, they laid her on board on all
+      quarters. But the ship was so high in the hull, as if it were a castle,
+      and had besides such a numerous and chosen crew on board, well armed and
+      exercised, that it was not easy to attack her. After a short time also
+      Earl Ulf came up with his fleet; and then the battle began, and King
+      Canute's fleet gathered together from all quarters. But the kings Olaf and
+      Onund, seeing they had for this time got all the victory that fate
+      permitted them to gain, let their ships retreat, cast themselves loose
+      from King Canute's ship, and the fleets separated. But as the attack had
+      not been made as King Canute had determined, he made no further attempt;
+      and the kings on each side arranged their fleets and put their ships in
+      order. When the fleets were parted, and each sailing its course, Olaf and
+      Onund looked over their forces, and found they had suffered no loss of
+      men. In the meantime they saw that if they waited until King Canute got
+      his large fleet in order to attack them, the difference of force was so
+      great that for them there was little chance of victory. It was also
+      evident that if the battle was renewed, they must suffer a great loss of
+      men. They took the resolution, therefore, to row with the whole fleet
+      eastward along the coast. Observing that King Canute did not pursue them,
+      they raised up their masts and set sail. Ottar Svarte tells thus of it in
+      the poem he composed upon King Canute the Great: -
+     "The king, in battle fray,
+     Drove the Swedish host away:
+     The wolf did not miss prey,
+     Nor the raven on that day.
+     Great Canute might deride
+     Two kings if he had pride,
+     For at Helga river's side
+     They would not his sword abide."
+      Thord Sjarekson also sang these lines in his death song of King Olaf: -
+     "King Olaf, Agder's lord,
+          Ne'er shunned the Jutland king,
+     But with his blue-edged sword
+          Broke many a panzer ring.
+     King Canute was not slow:
+          King Onund filled the plain
+     With dead, killed by his bow:
+          The wolf howled o'er the slain."
+      161. KING OLAF AND KING ONUND'S PLANS.
+      King Olaf and King Onund sailed eastward to the Swedish king's dominions;
+      and one day, towards evening, landed at a place called Barvik, where they
+      lay all night. But then it was observed of the Swedes that they were
+      home-sick; for the greater part of their forces sailed eastward along the
+      land in the night, and did not stop their course until they came home to
+      their houses. Now when King Onund observed this he ordered, as soon as the
+      day dawned, to sound the signal for a House-thing; and the whole people
+      went on shore, and the Thing sat down. Then King Onund took up the word,
+      and spake thus: "So it is, King Olaf, that, as you know, we have been
+      assembled in summer, and have forayed wide around in Denmark, and have
+      gained much booty, but no land. I had 350 vessels, and now have not above
+      100 remaining with me. Now it appears to me we can make no greater
+      progress than we have made, although you have still the 60 vessels which
+      have followed you the whole summer. It therefore appears to me best that
+      we come back to my kingdom; for it is always good to drive home with the
+      wagon safe. In this expedition we have won something, and lost nothing.
+      Now I will offer you, King Olaf, to come with me, and we shall remain
+      assembled during the winter. Take as much of my kingdom as you will, so
+      that you and the men who follow you may support yourselves well; and when
+      spring comes let us take such measures as we find serviceable. If you,
+      however, will prefer to travel across our country, and go overland to
+      Norway, it shall be free for you to do so."
+      King Olaf thanked King Onund for his friendly offer. "But if I may
+      advise," says he, "then we should take another resolution, and keep
+      together the forces we have still remaining. I had in the first of summer,
+      before I left Norway, 350 ships; but when I left the country I chose from
+      among the whole war-levy those I thought to be the best, and with them I
+      manned 60 ships; and these I still have. Now it appears to me that the
+      part of your war-force which has now run away is the most worthless, and
+      of least resistance; but now I see here all your chiefs and leaders, and I
+      know well that the people who belong to the court-troops (1) are by far
+      the best suited to carry arms. We have here chosen men and superb ships,
+      and we can very well lie all winter in our ships, as viking's custom is.
+      But Canute cannot lie long in Helga river; for the harbour will not hold
+      so many vessels as he has. If he steers eastward after us, we can escape
+      from him, and then people will soon gather to us; but if he return to the
+      harbours where his fleet can lie, I know for certain that the desire to
+      return home will not be less in his army than in ours. I think, also, we
+      have ravaged so widely in summer, that the villagers, both in Scania and
+      in Halland, know well whose favour they have to seek. Canute's army will
+      thus be dispersed so widely, that it is uncertain to whom fate may at the
+      last give the victory; but let us first find out what resolution he
+      takes."
+      Thus King Olaf ended his speech, and it found much applause, and his
+      advice was followed. Spies were sent into King Canute's army, and both the
+      kings Olaf and Onund remained lying where they were.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The thingmen, or hired body-guard attending the court. -L.
+      162. OF KING CANUTE AND EARL ULF.
+      When King Canute saw that the kings of Norway and Sweden steered eastward
+      with their forces along the coast, he sent men to ride night and day on
+      the land to follow their movements. Some spies went forward, others
+      returned; so that King Canute had news every day of their progress. He had
+      also spies always in their army. Now when he heard that a great part of
+      the fleet had sailed away from the kings, he turned back with his forces
+      to Seeland, and lay with his whole fleet in the Sound; so that a part lay
+      on the Scania side, and a part on the Seeland side. King Canute himself,
+      the day before Michaelmas, rode with a great retinue to Roeskilde. There
+      his brother-in-law, Earl Ulf, had prepared a great feast for him. The earl
+      was the most agreeable host, but the king was silent and sullen. The earl
+      talked to him in every way to make him cheerful, and brought forward
+      everything which he thought would amuse him; but the king remained stern,
+      and speaking little. At last the earl proposed to him a game at chess,
+      which he agreed to; and a chess-board was produced, and they played
+      together. Earl Ulf was hasty in temper, stiff, and in nothing yielding;
+      but everything he managed went on well in his hands; and he was a great
+      warrior, about whom there are many stories. He was the most powerful man
+      in Denmark next to the king. Earl Ulf's sister Gyda was married to Earl
+      Gudin (Godwin) Ulfnadson; and their sons were Harald king of England, and
+      Earl Toste, Earl Valthiof, Earl Morukare, and Earl Svein. Gyda was the
+      name of their daughter, who was married to the English king Edward the
+      Good.
+      163. OF THE EARL'S MURDER.
+      When they had played a while the king made a false move, at which the earl
+      took a knight from the king; but the king set the piece again upon the
+      board, and told the earl to make another move; but the earl grew angry,
+      threw over the chess-board, stood up, and went away. The king said,
+      "Runnest thou away, Ulf the coward?" The earl turned round at the door and
+      said, "Thou wouldst have run farther at Helga river, if thou hadst come to
+      battle there. Thou didst not call me Ulf the coward, when I hastened to
+      thy help while the Swedes were beating thee like a dog." The earl then
+      went out, and went to bed. A little later the king also went to bed. The
+      following morning while the king was putting on his clothes he said to his
+      footboy, "Go thou to Earl Ulf, and kill him."
+      The lad went, was away a while, and then came back.
+      The king said, "Hast thou killed the earl?"
+      "I did not kill him, for he was gone to Saint Lucius' church."
+      There was a man called Ivar White, a Norwegian by birth, who was the
+      king's courtman and chamberlain. The king said to him, "Go thou and kill
+      the earl."
+      Ivar went to the church, and in at the choir, and thrust his sword through
+      the earl, who died on the spot. Then Ivar went to the king, with the
+      bloody sword in his hand.
+      The king said, "Hast thou killed the earl?"
+      "I have killed him," says he.
+      "Thou didst well."
+      After the earl was killed the monks closed the church, and locked the
+      doors. When that was told the king he sent a message to the monks,
+      ordering them to open the church and sing high mass. They did as the king
+      ordered; and when the king came to the church he bestowed on it great
+      property, so that it had a large domain, by which that place was raised
+      very high; and these lands have since always belonged to it. King Canute
+      rode down to his ships, and lay there till late in harvest with a very
+      large army.
+      164. OF KING OLAF AND THE SWEDES.
+      When King Olaf and King Onund heard that King Canute had sailed to the
+      Sound, and lay there with a great force, the kings held a House-thing, and
+      spoke much about what resolution they should adopt. King Olaf wished they
+      should remain there with all the fleet, and see what King Canute would at
+      last resolve to do. But the Swedes held it to be unadvisable to remain
+      until the frost set in, and so it was determined; and King Onund went home
+      with all his army, and King Olaf remained lying after them.
+      165. OF EGIL AND TOFE.
+      While King Olaf lay there, he had frequently conferences and consultations
+      with his people. One night Egil Halson and Tofe Valgautson had the watch
+      upon the king's ship. Tofe came from West Gautland, and was a man of high
+      birth. While they sat on watch they heard much lamentation and crying
+      among the people who had been taken in the war, and who lay bound on the
+      shore at night. Tofe said it made him ill to hear such distress, and asked
+      Egil to go with him, and let loose these people. This work they set about,
+      cut the cords, and let the people escape, and they looked upon it as a
+      piece of great friendship; but the king was so enraged at it, that they
+      themselves were in the greatest danger. When Egil afterwards fell sick the
+      king for a long time would not visit him, until many people entreated it
+      of him. It vexed Egil much to have done anything the king was angry at,
+      and he begged his forgiveness. The king now dismissed his wrath against
+      Egil, laid his hands upon the side on which Egil's pain was, and sang a
+      prayer; upon which the pain ceased instantly, and Egil grew better. Tofe
+      came, after entreaty, into reconciliation with the king, on condition that
+      he should exhort his father Valgaut to come to the king. He was a heathen;
+      but after conversation with the king he went over to Christianity, and
+      died instantly when he was baptized.
+      166. TREACHERY TOWARDS KING OLAF.
+      King Olaf had now frequent conferences with his people, and asked advice
+      from them, and from his chiefs, as to what he should determine upon. But
+      there was no unanimity among them -some considering that unadvisable
+      which others considered highly serviceable; and there was much indecision
+      in their councils. King Canute had always spies in King Olaf's army, who
+      entered into conversation with many of his men, offering them presents and
+      favour on account of King Canute. Many allowed themselves to be seduced,
+      and gave promises of fidelity, and to be King Canute's men, and bring the
+      country into his hands if he came to Norway. This was apparent,
+      afterwards, of many who at first kept it concealed. Some took at once
+      money bribes, and others were promised money afterwards; and a great many
+      there were who had got great presents of money from him before: for it may
+      be said with truth of King Canute, that every man who came to him, and who
+      he thought had the spirit of a man and would like his favour, got his
+      hands full of gifts and money. On this account he was very popular,
+      although his generosity was principally shown to foreigners, and was
+      greatest the greater distance they came from.
+      167. KING OLAF'S CONSULTATIONS.
+      King Olaf had often conferences and meetings with his people, and asked
+      their counsel; but as he observed they gave different opinions, he had a
+      suspicion that there must be some who spoke differently from what they
+      really thought advisable for him, and he was thus uncertain if all gave
+      him due fidelity in council. Some pressed that with the first fair wind
+      they should sail to the Sound, and so to Norway. They said the Danes would
+      not dare to attack them, although they lay with so great a force right in
+      the way. But the king was a man of too much understanding not to see that
+      this was impracticable. He knew also that Olaf Trygvason had found it
+      quite otherwise, as to the Danes not daring to fight, when he with a few
+      people went into battle against a great body of them. The king also knew
+      that in King Canute's army there were a great many Norwegians; therefore
+      he entertained the suspicion that those who gave this advice were more
+      favourable to King Canute than to him. King Olaf came at last to the
+      determination, from all these considerations, that the people who would
+      follow him should make themselves ready to proceed by land across
+      Gautland, and so to Norway. "But our ships," said he, "and all things that
+      we cannot take with us, I will send eastward to the Swedish king's
+      dominions, and let them be taken care of for us there."
+      168. HAREK OF THJOTTA'S VOYAGE.
+      Harek of Thjotta replied thus to the king's speech: "It is evident that I
+      cannot travel on foot to Norway. I am old and heavy, and little accustomed
+      to walking. Besides, I am unwilling to part with my ship; for on that ship
+      and its apparel I have bestowed so much labour, that it would go much
+      against my inclination to put her into the hands of my enemies." The king
+      said, "Come along with us, Harek, and we shall carry thee when thou art
+      tired of walking." Then Harek sang these lines: -
+     "I'11 mount my ocean steed,
+     And o'er the sea I'll speed;
+     Forests and hills are not for me, -
+     I love the moving sea,
+     Though Canute block the Sound,
+     Rather than walk the ground,
+     And leave my ship, I'll see
+     What my ship will do for me."
+      Then King Olaf let everything be put in order for the journey. The people
+      had their walking clothing and weapons, but their other clothes and
+      effects they packed upon such horses as they could get. Then he sent off
+      people to take his ships east to Calmar. There he had the vessels laid up,
+      and the ships' apparel and other goods taken care of. Harek did as he had
+      said, and waited for a wind, and then sailed west to Scania, until, about
+      the decline of the day, he came with a fresh and fair wind to the eastward
+      of Holar. There he let the sail and the vane, and flag and mast be taken
+      down, and let the upper works of the ship be covered over with some grey
+      tilt-canvas, and let a few men sit at the oars in the fore part and aft,
+      but the most were sitting low down in the vessel.
+      When Canute's watchmen saw the ship, they talked with each other about
+      what ship it might be, and made the guess that it must be one loaded with
+      herrings or salt, as they only saw a few men at the oars; and the ship,
+      besides, appeared to them grey, and wanting tar, as if burnt up by the
+      sun, and they saw also that it was deeply loaded. Now when Harek came
+      farther through the Sound, and past the fleet, he raised the mast, hoisted
+      sail, and set up his gilded vane. The sail was white as snow, and in it
+      were red and blue stripes of cloth interwoven. When the king's men saw the
+      ship sailing in this state, they told the king that probably King Olaf had
+      sailed through them. But King Canute replies, that King Olaf was too
+      prudent a man to sail with a single ship through King Canute's fleet, and
+      thought it more likely to be Harek of Thjotta, or the like of him. Many
+      believed the truth to be that King Canute knew of this expedition of
+      Harek, and that it would not have succeeded so if they had not concluded a
+      friendship beforehand with each other; which seemed likely, after King
+      Canute's and Harek's friendly understanding became generally known.
+      Harek made this song as he sailed northward round the isle of Vedrey: -
+     "The widows of Lund may smile through their tears,
+     The Danish girls may have their jeers;
+          They may laugh or smile,
+          But outside their isle
+     Old Harek still on to his North land steers."
+      Harek went on his way, and never stopped till he came north to Halogaland,
+      to his own house in Thjotta.
+      169. KING OLAF'S COURSE FROM SVITHJOD.
+      When King Olaf began his journey, he came first into Smaland, and then
+      into West Gautland. He marched quietly and peaceably, and the country
+      people gave him all assistance on his journey. Thus he proceeded until he
+      came into Viken, and north through Viken to Sarpsborg, where he remained,
+      and ordered a winter abode to be prepared (A.D. 1028). Then he gave most
+      of the chiefs leave to return home, but kept the lendermen by him whom he
+      thought the most serviceable. There were with him also all the sons of
+      Arne Arnmodson, and they stood in great favour with the king. Geller
+      Thorkelson, who the summer before had come from Iceland, also came there
+      to the king, as before related.
+      170. OF SIGVAT THE SKALD.
+      Sigvat the skald had long been in King Olaf's household, as before
+      related, and the king made him his marshal. Sigvat had no talent for
+      speaking in prose; but in skaldcraft he was so practised, that the verses
+      came as readily from his tongue as if he were speaking in usual language.
+      He had made a mercantile journey to Normandy, and in the course of it had
+      come to England, where he met King Canute, and obtained permission from
+      him to sail to Norway, as before related. When he came to Norway he
+      proceeded straight to King Olaf, and found him at Sarpsborg. He presented
+      himself before the king just as he was sitting down to table. Sigvat
+      saluted him. The king looked at Sigvat and was silent. Then Sigvat sang: -
+     "Great king!  thy marshal is come home,
+     No more by land or sea to roam,
+          But by thy side
+          Still to abide.
+     Great king!  what seat here shall he take
+     For the king's honour -not his sake?
+          For all seats here
+          To me are dear."
+      Then was verified the old saying, that "many are the ears of a king;" for
+      King Olaf had heard all about Sigvat's journey, and that he had spoken
+      with Canute. He says to Sigvat, "I do not know if thou art my marshal, or
+      hast become one of Canute's men." Sigvat said: -
+     "Canute, whose golden gifts display
+     A generous heart, would have me stay,
+     Service in his great court to take,
+     And my own Norway king forsake.
+     Two masters at a time, I said,
+     Were one too many for men bred
+     Where truth and virtue, shown to all,
+     Make all men true in Olaf's hall."
+      Then King Olaf told Sigvat to take his seat where he before used to sit;
+      and in a short time Sigvat was in as high favour with the king as ever.
+      171. OF ERLING SKJALGSON AND HIS SONS.
+      Erling Skjalgson and all his sons had been all summer in King Canute's
+      army, in the retinue of Earl Hakon. Thorer Hund was also there, and was in
+      high esteem. Now when King Canute heard that King Olaf had gone overland
+      to Norway, he discharged his army, and gave all men leave to go to their
+      winter abodes. There was then in Denmark a great army of foreigners, both
+      English, Norwegians, and men of other countries, who had joined the
+      expedition in summer. In autumn (A.D. 1027) Erling Skjalgson went to
+      Norway with his men, and received great presents from King Canute at
+      parting; but Thorer Hund remained behind in King Canute's court. With
+      Erling went messengers from King Canute well provided with money; and in
+      winter they travelled through all the country, paying the money which King
+      Canute had promised to many in autumn for their assistance. They gave
+      presents in money, besides, to many whose friendship could be purchased
+      for King Canute. They received much assistance in their travels from
+      Erling. In this way it came to pass that many turned their support to King
+      Canute, promised him their services, and agreed to oppose King Olaf. Some
+      did this openly, but many more concealed it from the public. King Olaf
+      heard this news, for many had something to tell him about it; and the
+      conversation in the court often turned upon it. Sigvat the skald made a
+      song upon it: -
+     "The base traitors ply
+          With purses of gold,
+     Wanting to buy
+          What is not to be sold, -
+     The king's life and throne
+          Wanting to buy:
+     But our souls are our own,
+          And to hell we'll not hie.
+     No pleasure in heaven,
+          As we know full well,
+     To the traitor is given, -
+          His soul is his hell."
+      Often also the conversation turned upon how ill it beseemed Earl Hakon to
+      raise his hand in arms against King Olaf, who had given him his life when
+      he fell into the king's power; but Sigvat was a particular friend of Earl
+      Hakon, and when he heard the earl spoken against he sang: -
+     "Our own court people we may blame,
+     If they take gold to their own shame,
+     Their king and country to betray.
+     With those who give it's not the same,
+     From them we have no faith to claim:
+     'Tis we are wrong, if we give way."
+      172. OF KING OLAF'S PRESENTS AT YULE.
+      King Olaf gave a great feast at Yule, and many great people had come to
+      him. It was the seventh day of Yule, that the king, with a few persons,
+      among whom was Sigvat, who attended him day and night, went to a house in
+      which the king's most precious valuables were kept. He had, according to
+      his custom, collected there with great care the valuable presents he was
+      to make on New Year's eve. There was in the house no small number of
+      gold-mounted swords; and Sigvat sang: -
+     "The swords stand there,
+     All bright and fair, -
+     Those oars that dip in blood:
+     If I in favour stood,
+     I too might have a share.
+     A sword the skald would gladly take,
+     And use it for his master's sake:
+     In favour once he stood,
+     And a sword has stained in blood."
+      The king took a sword of which the handle was twisted round with gold, and
+      the guard was gold-mounted, and gave it to him. It was a valuable article;
+      but the gift was not seen without envy, as will appear hereafter.
+      Immediately after Yule (1028) the king began his journey to the Uplands;
+      for he had a great many people about him, but had received no income that
+      autumn from the North country, for there had been an armament in summer,
+      and the king had laid out all the revenues he could command; and also he
+      had no vessels with which he and his people could go to the North. At the
+      same time he had news from the North, from which he could see that there
+      would be no safety for him in that quarter, unless he went with a great
+      force. For these reasons he determined to proceed through the Uplands,
+      although it was not so long a time since he had been there in
+      guest-quarters as the law prescribes, and as the kings usually had the
+      custom of observing in their visits. When he came to the Uplands the
+      lendermen and the richest bondes invited him to be their guest, and thus
+      lightened his expenses.
+      173. OF BJORN THE BAILIFF.
+      There was a man called Bjorn who was of Gautland family, and a friend and
+      acquaintance of Queen Astrid, and in some way related to her. She had
+      given him farm-management and other offices in the upper part of Hedemark.
+      He had also the management of Osterdal district. Bjorn was not in esteem
+      with the king, nor liked by the bondes. It happened in a hamlet which
+      Bjorn ruled over, that many swine and cattle were missing: therefore Bjorn
+      ordered a Thing to be called to examine the matter. Such pillage he
+      attributed chiefly to the people settled in forest-farms far from other
+      men; by which he referred particularly to those who dwelt in Osterdal, for
+      that district was very thinly inhabited, and full of lakes and
+      forest-cleanings, and but in few places was any great neighbourhood
+      together.
+      174. OF RAUD'S SONS.
+      There was a man called Raud who dwelt in Osterdal. His wife was called
+      Ragnhild; and his sons, Dag and Sigurd, were men of great talent. They
+      were present at the Thing, made a reply in defence of the Osterdal people,
+      and removed the accusation from them. Bjorn thought they were too pert in
+      their answer, and too fine in their clothes and weapons; and therefore
+      turned his speech against these brothers, and said it was not unlikely
+      they may have committed these thefts. They denied it, and the Thing
+      closed. Soon after King Olaf, with his retinue, came to guest-quarters in
+      the house of bailiff Bjorn. The matter which had been before the Thing was
+      then complained of to the king; and Bjorn said that Raud's sons appeared
+      to him to have committed these thefts. A messenger was sent for Raud's
+      sons; and when they appeared before the king he said they had not at all
+      the appearance of thieves, and acquitted them. Thereupon they invited the
+      king, with all his retinue, to a three days' entertainment at their
+      father's; and although Bjorn dissuaded him from it, the king went. At
+      Raud's there was a very excellent feast. The king asked Raud what people
+      he and his wife were. Raud answered that he was originally a Swedish man,
+      rich and of high birth; "but I ran away with the wife I have ever since
+      had, and she is a sister of King Hring Dagson." The king then remembered
+      both their families. He found that father and sons were men of
+      understanding, and asked them what they could do. Sigurd said he could
+      interpret dreams, and determine the time of the day although no heavenly
+      bodies could be seen. The king made trial of his art, and found it was as
+      Sigurd had said. Dag stated, as his accomplishment, that he could see the
+      misdeeds and vices of every man who came under his eye, when he chose to
+      observe him closely. The king told him to declare what faults of
+      disposition he saw in the king himself. Dag mentioned a fault which the
+      king was sensible he really had. Then the king asked what fault the
+      bailiff Bjorn had. Dag said Bjorn was a thief; and told also where Bjorn
+      had concealed on his farm the bones, horns, and hides of the cattle he had
+      stolen in autumn; "for he committed," said Dag, "all the thefts in autumn
+      which he accuses other people of." Dag also told the king the places where
+      the king should go after leaving them. When the king departed from Raud's
+      house he was accompanied on the way, and presented with friendly gifts;
+      and Raud's sons remained with the king. The king went first to Bjorn's,
+      and found there that all Dag had told him was true. Upon which he drove
+      Bjorn out of the country; and he had to thank the queen that he preserved
+      life and limbs.
+      175. THORER'S DEATH.
+      Thorer, a son of Olver of Eggja, a stepson of Kalf Arnason, and a sister's
+      son of Thorer Hund, was a remarkably handsome man, stout and strong. He
+      was at this time eighteen years old; had made a good marriage in Hedemark,
+      by which he got great wealth; and was besides one of the most popular of
+      men, and formed to be a chief. He invited the king and his retinue home to
+      him to a feast. The king accepted the invitation, went to Thorer's, and
+      was well received. The entertainment was very splendid; they were
+      excellently treated, and all that was set before the guests was of the
+      best that could be got. The king and his people talked among themselves of
+      the excellence of everything, and knew not what they should admire the
+      most, -whether Thorer's house outside, or the inside furniture, the
+      table service, or the liquors, or the host who gave them such a feast. But
+      Dag said little about it. The king used often to speak to Dag, and ask him
+      about various things; and he had proved the truth of all that Dag had
+      said, both of things that had happened or were to happen, and therefore
+      the king had much confidence in what he said. The king called Dag to him
+      to have a private conversation together, and spoke to him about many
+      things. Afterwards the king turned the conversation on Thorer, -what
+      an excellent man Thorer was, and what a superb feast he had made for them.
+      Dag answered but little to this, but agreed it was true what the king
+      said. The king then asked Dag what disposition or faith he found in
+      Thorer. Dag replied that he must certainly consider Thorer of a good
+      disposition, if he be really what most people believe him to be. The king
+      told him to answer direct what he was asked, and said that it was his duty
+      to do so. Dag replies, "Then thou must allow me to determine the
+      punishment if I disclose his faith." The king replied that he would not
+      submit his decision to another man, but again ordered Dag to reply to what
+      he asked.
+      Dag replies, "The sovereign's order goes before all. I find this
+      disposition in Thorer, as in so many others, that he is too greedy of
+      money."
+      The king: "Is he then a thief, or a robber?"
+      "He is neither."
+      "What is he then?"
+      "To win money he is a traitor to his sovereign. He has taken money from
+      King Canute the Great for thy head."
+      The king asks, "What proof hast thou of the truth of this?"
+      Dag: "He has upon his right arm, above the elbow, a thick gold ring, which
+      King Canute gave him, and which he lets no man see."
+      This ended their conference, and the king was very wroth. Now as the king
+      sat at table, and the guests had drunk a while with great mirth, and
+      Thorer went round to see the guests well served, the king ordered Thorer
+      to be called to him. He went up before the table, and laid his hands upon
+      it.
+      The king asked, "How old a man art thou, Thorer?"
+      He answered, "I am eighteen years old."
+      "A stout man thou art for those years, and thou hast been fortunate also."
+      Then the king took his right hand, and felt it towards the elbow.
+      Thorer said, "Take care, for I have a boil upon my arm."
+      The king held his hand there, and felt there was something hard under it.
+      "Hast thou not heard," said he, "that I am a physician? Let me see the
+      boil."
+      As Thorer saw it was of no use to conceal it longer, he took off the ring
+      and laid it on the table.
+      The king asked if that was the gift of King Canute.
+      Thorer replied that he could not deny it was.
+      The king ordered him to be seized and laid in irons. Kalf came up and
+      entreated for mercy, and offered money for him, which also was seconded by
+      many; but the king was so wroth that nobody could get in a word. He said
+      Thorer should suffer the doom he had prepared for himself. Thereupon he
+      ordered Thorer to be killed. This deed was much detested in the Uplands,
+      and not less in the Throndhjem country, where many of Thorer's connections
+      were. Kalf took the death of this man much to heart, for he had been his
+      foster-son in childhood.
+      176. THE FALL OF GRJOTGARD.
+      Grjotgard Olverson, Thorer's brother, and the eldest of the brothers, was
+      a very wealthy man, and had a great troop of people about him. He lived
+      also at this time in Hedemark. When he heard that Thorer had been killed,
+      he made an attack upon the places where the king's goods and men were;
+      but, between whiles, he kept himself in the forest and other secret
+      places. When the king heard of this disturbance, he had inquiry made about
+      Grjotgard's haunts, and found out that he had taken up night-quarters not
+      far from where the king was. King Olaf set out in the night-time, came
+      there about day-dawn, and placed a circle of men round the house in which
+      Grjotgard was sleeping. Grjotgard and his men, roused by the stir of
+      people and clash of arms, ran to their weapons, and Grjotgard himself
+      sprang to the front room. He asked who commanded the troop; and it was
+      answered him, "King Olaf was come there." Grjotgard asked if the king
+      would hear his words. The king, who stood at the door, said that Grjotgard
+      might speak what he pleased, and he would hear his words. Grjotgard said,
+      "I do not beg for mercy;" and at the same moment he rushed out, having his
+      shield over his head, and his drawn sword in his hand. It was not so much
+      light that he could see clearly. He struck his sword at the king; but
+      Arnbjorn ran in, and the thrust pierced him under his armour into his
+      stomach, and Arnbjorn got his deathwound. Grjotgard was killed
+      immediately, and most of his people with him. After this event the king
+      turned back to the south to Viken.
+      177. KING OLAF SENDS FOR HIS SHIPS AND GOODS.
+      Now when the king came to Tunsberg he sent men out to all the districts,
+      and ordered the people out upon a levy. He had but a small provision of
+      shipping, and there were only bondes' vessels to be got. From the
+      districts in the near neighbourhood many people came to him, but few from
+      any distance; and it was soon found that the people had turned away from
+      the king. King Olaf sent people to Gautland for his ships, and other goods
+      and wares which had been left there in autumn; but the progress of these
+      men was very slow, for it was no better now than in autumn to sail through
+      the Sound, as King Canute had in spring fitted out an army throughout the
+      whole of the Danish dominions, and had no fewer than 1200 vessels.
+      178. KING OLAF'S COUNSELS.
+      The news came to Norway that King Canute had assembled an immense armament
+      through all Denmark, with which he intended to conquer Norway. When this
+      became known the people were less willing to join King Olaf, and he got
+      but little aid from the bondes. The king's men often spoke about this
+      among themselves. Sigvat tells of it thus: -
+     "Our men are few, our ships are small,
+     While England's king is strong in all;
+     But yet our king is not afraid -
+     O!  never be such king betrayed!
+     'Tis evil counsel to deprive
+     Our king of countrymen to strive
+     To save their country, sword in hand:
+     Tis money that betrays our land."
+      The king held meetings with the men of the court, and sometimes
+      House-things with all his people, and consulted with them what they
+      should, in their opinion, undertake. "We must not conceal from ourselves,"
+      said he, "that Canute will come here this summer; and that he has, as ye
+      all know, a large force, and we have at present but few men to oppose to
+      him; and, as matters now stand, we cannot depend much on the fidelity of
+      the country people." The king's men replied to his speech in various ways;
+      but it is said that Sigvat the skald replied thus, advising flight, as
+      treachery, not cowardice, was the cause of it: -
+     "We may well fly, when even our foe
+     Offers us money if we go.
+     I may be blamed, accused of fear;
+     But treachery, not faith, rules here.
+     Men may retire who long have shown
+     Their faith and love, and now alone
+     Retire because they cannot save -
+     This is no treachery in the brave."
+      179. HAREK OF THJOTTA BURNS GRANKEL AND HIS MEN.
+      The same spring (A.D. 1028) it happened in Halogaland that Harek of
+      Thjotta remembered how Asmund Grankelson had plundered and beaten his
+      house-servants. A cutter with twenty rowing-benches, which belonged to
+      Harek, was afloat in front of the house, with tent and deck, and he spread
+      the report that he intended to go south to Throndhjem. One evening Harek
+      went on board with his house-servants, about eighty men, who rowed the
+      whole night; and he came towards morning to Grankel's house, and
+      surrounded it with his men. They then made an attack on the house, and set
+      fire to it; and Grankel with his people were burnt, and some were killed
+      outside; and in all about thirty men lost their lives. After this deed
+      Harek returned home, and sat quietly in his farm. Asmund was with King
+      Olaf when he heard of it; therefore there was nobody in Halogaland to sue
+      Harek for mulct for this deed, nor did he offer any satisfaction.
+      180. KING CANUTE'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY.
+      Canute the Great collected his forces, and went to Limfjord. When he was
+      ready with his equipment he sailed from thence with his whole fleet to
+      Norway; made all possible speed, and did not land to the eastward of the
+      Fjords, but crossed Folden, and landed in Agder, where he summoned a
+      Thing. The bondes came down from the upper country to hold a Thing with
+      Canute, who was everywhere in that country accepted as king. Then he
+      placed men over the districts, and took hostages from the bondes, and no
+      man opposed him. King Olaf was in Tunsberg when Canute's fleet sailed
+      across the mouth of the fjord. Canute sailed northwards along the coast,
+      and people came to him from all the districts, and promised him fealty. He
+      lay a while in Egersund, where Erling Skjalgson came to him with many
+      people, and King Canute and Erling renewed their league of friendship.
+      Among other things, Canute promised Erling the whole country between Stad
+      and Rygiarbit to rule over. Then King Canute proceeded; and, to be short
+      in our tale, did not stop until he came to Throndhjem, and landed at
+      Nidaros. In Throndhjem he called together a Thing for the eight districts,
+      at which King Canute was chosen king of all Norway. Thorer Hund, who had
+      come with King Canute from Denmark, was there, and also Harek of Thjotta;
+      and both were made sheriffs of the king, and took the oath of fealty to
+      him. King Canute gave them great fiefs, and also right to the Lapland
+      trade, and presented them besides with great gifts. He enriched all men
+      who were inclined to enter into friendly accord with him both with fiefs
+      and money, and gave them greater power than they had before.
+      181. OF KING CANUTE.
+      When King Canute had laid the whole of Norway trader his authority, he
+      called together a numerous Thing, both of his own people and of the people
+      of the country; and at it he made proclamation, that he made his relation
+      Earl Hakon the governor-in-chief of all the land in Norway that he had
+      conquered in this expedition. In like manner he led his son Hardaknut to
+      the high-seat at his side, gave him the title of king, and therewith the
+      whole Danish dominion. King Canute took as hostages from all lendermen and
+      great bondes in Norway either their sons, brothers, or other near
+      connections, or the men who were dearest to them and appeared to him most
+      suitable; by which he, as before observed, secured their fidelity to him.
+      As soon as Earl Hakon had attained this power in Norway his
+      brother-in-law, Einar Tambaskelfer, made an agreement with him, and
+      received back all the fiefs he formerly had possessed while the earls
+      ruled the country. King Canute gave Einar great gifts, and bound him by
+      great kindness to his interests; and promised that Einar should be the
+      greatest and most important man in Norway, among those who did not hold
+      the highest dignity, as long as he had power over the country. He added to
+      this, that Einar appeared to him the most suitable man to hold the highest
+      title of honour in Norway if no earls remained, and his son Eindride also,
+      on account of his high birth. Einar placed a great value on these
+      promises, and, in return, promised the greatest fidelity. Einar's
+      chiefship began anew with this.
+      182. OF THORARIN LOFTUNGA.
+      There was a man by name Thorarin Loftunga, an Icelander by birth, and a
+      great skald, who had been much with the kings and other great chiefs. He
+      was now with King Canute the Great, and had composed a flock, or short
+      poem, in his praise. When the king heard of this he was very angry, and
+      ordered him to bring the next day a drapa, or long poem, by the time he
+      went to table; and if he failed to do so, said the king, "he shall be
+      hanged for his impudence in composing such a small poem about King
+      Canute." Thorarin then composed a stave as a refrain, which he inserted in
+      the poem, and also augmented it with several other strophes or verses.
+      This was the refrain: -
+     "Canute protects his realm, as Jove,
+     Guardian of Greece, his realm above."
+      King Canute rewarded him for the poem with fifty marks of silver. The poem
+      was called the "Headransom" ("Hofudlausn"). Thorarin composed another poem
+      about King Canute, which was called the "Campaign Poem" ("Togdrapa"); and
+      therein he tells King Canute's expedition when he sailed from Denmark to
+      Norway; and the following are strophes from one of the parts of this poem: -
+     "Canute with all his men is out,
+     Under the heavens in war-ships stout, -
+     'Out on the sea, from Limfjord's green,
+     My good, my brave friend's fleet is seen.
+     The men of Adger on the coast
+     Tremble to see this mighty host:
+     The guilty tremble as they spy
+     The victor's fleet beneath the sky.
+
+     "The sight surpasses far the tale,
+     As glacing in the sun they sail;
+     The king's ship glittering all with gold,
+     And splendour there not to be told.
+     Round Lister many a coal-black mast
+     Of Canute's fleet is gliding past.
+     And now through Eger sound they ride,
+     Upon the gently heaving tide.
+
+     "And all the sound is covered o'er
+     With ships and sails, from shore to shore,
+     A mighty king, a mighty host,
+     Hiding the sea on Eger coast.
+     And peaceful men in haste now hie
+     Up Hiornagla-hill the fleet to spy,
+     As round the ness where Stad now lies
+     Each high-stemmed ship in splendour flies.
+
+     "Nor seemed the voyage long, I trow,
+     To warrior on the high-built bow,
+     As o'er the ocean-mountains riding
+     The land and hill seem past him gliding.
+     With whistling breeze and flashing spray
+     Past Stein the gay ships dashed away;
+     In open sea, the southern gale
+     Filled every wide out-bellying sail.
+
+     "Still on they fly, still northward go,
+     Till he who conquers every foe,
+     The mighty Canute, came to land,
+     Far in the north on Throndhjem's strand.
+     There this great king of Jutland race,
+     Whose deeds and gifts surpass in grace
+     All other kings, bestowed the throne
+     Of Norway on his sister's son.
+
+     "To his own son he gave the crown
+     (This I must add to his renown)
+     Of Denmark -land of shadowy vales,
+     In which the white swan trims her sails."
+      Here it is told that King Canute's expedition was grander than saga can
+      tell; but Thorarin sang thus because he would pride himself upon being one
+      of King Canute's retinue when he came to Norway.
+      183. OF THE MESSENGERS SENT BY KING OLAF FOR HIS SHIPS.
+      The men whom King Olaf had sent eastwards to Gautland after his ships took
+      with them the vessels they thought the best, and burnt the rest. The
+      ship-apparel and other goods belonging to the king and his men they also
+      took with them; and when they heard that King Canute had gone to Norway
+      they sailed west through the Sound, and then north to Viken to King Olaf,
+      to whom they delivered his ships. He was then at Tunsberg. When King Olaf
+      learnt that King Canute was sailing north along the coast, King Olaf
+      steered with his fleet into Oslo fjord, and into a branch of it called
+      Drafn, where he lay quiet until King Canute's fleet had sailed southwards
+      again. On this expedition which King Canute made from the North along the
+      coast, he held a Thing in each district, and in every Thing the country
+      was bound by oath in fealty to him, and hostages were given him. He went
+      eastward across the mouths of the fjords to Sarpsborg, and held a Thing
+      there, and, as elsewhere, the country was surrendered to him under oath of
+      fidelity. King Canute then returned south to Denmark, after having
+      conquered Norway without stroke of sword, and he ruled now over three
+      kingdoms. So says Halvard Hareksblese when he sang of King Canute: -
+     "The warrior-king, whose blood-stain'd shield
+     Has shone on many a hard-fought field,
+     England and Denmark now has won,
+     And o'er three kingdoms rules alone.
+     Peace now he gives us fast and sure,
+     Since Norway too is made secure
+     By him who oft, in days of yore,
+     Glutted the hawk and wolf with gore."
+      184. OF KING OLAF IN HIS PROCEEDINGS.
+      King Olaf sailed with his ships out to Tunsberg, as soon as he heard that
+      King Canute had turned back, and was gone south to Denmark. He then made
+      himself ready with the men who liked to follow him, and had then thirteen
+      ships. Afterwards he sailed out along Viken; but got little money, and few
+      men, as those only followed him who dwelt in islands, or on outlying
+      points of land. The king landed in such places, but got only the money and
+      men that fell in his way; and he soon perceived that the country had
+      abandoned him. He proceeded on according to the winds. This was in the
+      beginning of winter (A.D. 1029). The wind turned very late in the season
+      in their favour, so that they lay long in the Seley islands, where they
+      heard the news from the North, through merchants, who told the king that
+      Erling Skjalgson had collected a great force in Jadar, and that his ship
+      lay fully rigged outside of the land, together with many other vessels
+      belonging to the bondes; namely, skiffs, fisher-yachts, and great
+      row-boats. Then the king sailed with his fleet from the East, and lay a
+      while in Egersund. Both parties heard of each other now, and Erling
+      assembled all the men he could.
+      185. OF KING OLAF'S VOYAGE.
+      On Thomasmas, before Yule (Dec. 21), the king left the harbour as soon as
+      day appeared. With a good but rather strong gale he sailed northwards past
+      Jadar. The weather was rainy, with dark flying clouds in the sky. The
+      spies went immediately in through the Jadar country when the king sailed
+      past it; and as soon as Erling heard that the king was sailing past from
+      the East, he let the war-horn call all the people on board, and the whole
+      force hastened to the ships, and prepared for battle. The king's ship
+      passed by Jadar at a great rate; but thereafter turned in towards the
+      land, intending to run up the fjords to gather men and money. Erling
+      Skjalgson perceived this, and sailed after him with a great force and many
+      ships. Swiftly their vessels flew, for they had nothing on board but men
+      and arms: but Erling's ship went much faster than the others; therefore he
+      took in a reef in the sails, and waited for the other vessels. Then the
+      king saw that Erling with his fleet gained upon him fast; for the king's
+      ships were heavily laden, and were besides water-soaked, having been in
+      the sea the whole summer, autumn, and winter, up to this time. He saw also
+      that there would be a great want of men, if he should go against the whole
+      of Erling's fleet when it was assembled. He hailed from ship to ship the
+      orders to let the sails gently sink, and to unship the booms and
+      outriggers, which was done. When Erling saw this he calls out to his
+      people, and orders them to get on more sail. "Ye see," says he, "that
+      their sails are diminishing, and they are getting fast away from our
+      sight." He took the reef out of the sails of his ship, and outsailed all
+      the others immediately; for Erling was very eager in his pursuit of King
+      Olaf.
+      186. OF ERLING SKJALGSON'S FALL.
+      King Olaf then steered in towards the Bokn fjord, by which the ships came
+      out of sight of each other. Thereafter the king ordered his men to strike
+      the sails, and row forwards through a narrow sound that was there, and all
+      the ships lay collected within a rocky point. Then all the king's men put
+      on their weapons. Erling sailed in through the sound, and observed nothing
+      until the whole fleet was before him, and he saw the king's men rowing
+      towards him with all their ships at once. Erling and his crew let fall the
+      sails, and seized their weapons; but the king's fleet surrounded his ship
+      on all sides. Then the fight began, and it was of the sharpest; but soon
+      the greatest loss was among Erling's men. Erling stood on the quarter-deck
+      of his ship. He had a helmet on his head, a shield before him, and a sword
+      in his hand. Sigvat the skald had remained behind in Viken, and heard the
+      tidings. He was a great friend of Erling, had received presents from him,
+      and had been at his house. Sigvat composed a poem upon Erling's fall, in
+      which there is the following verse: -
+     "Erling has set his ship on sea -
+     Against the king away is he:
+     He who oft lets the eagle stain
+     Her yellow feet in blood of slain.
+     His little war-ship side by side
+     With the king's fleet, the fray will bide.
+     Now sword to sword the fight is raging,
+
+     Which Erling with the king is waging."
+      Then Erling's men began to fall, and at the same moment his ship was
+      carried by boarding, and every man of his died in his place. The king
+      himself was amongst the foremost in the fray. So says Sigvat: -
+     "The king's men hewed with hasty sword, -
+     The king urged on the ship to board, -
+     All o'er the decks the wounded lay:
+     Right fierce and bloody was that fray.
+     In Tungur sound, on Jadar shore,
+     The decks were slippery with red gore;
+     Warm blood was dropping in the sound,
+     Where the king's sword was gleaming round."
+      So entirely had Erling's men fallen, that not a man remained standing in
+      his ship but himself alone; for there was none who asked for quarter, or
+      none who got it if he did ask. There was no opening for flight, for there
+      lay ships all around Erling's ship on every side, and it is told for
+      certain that no man attempted to fly; and Sigvat says: -
+     "All Erling's men fell in the fray,
+     Off Bokn fjord, this hard-fought day.
+     The brave king boarded, onward cheered,
+     And north of Tungur the deck was cleared.
+     Erling alone, the brave, the stout,
+     Cut off from all, yet still held out;
+     High on the stern -a sight to see -
+     In his lone ship alone stood he."
+      Then Erling was attacked both from the forecastle and from the other
+      ships. There was a large space upon the poop which stood high above the
+      other ships, and which nobody could reach but by arrow-shot, or partly
+      with the thrust of spear, but which he always struck from him by parrying.
+      Erling defended himself so manfully, that no example is known of one man
+      having sustained the attack of so many men so long. Yet he never tried to
+      get away, nor asked for quarter. So says Sigvat: -
+     "Skjalg's brave son no mercy craves, -
+     The battle's fury still he braves;
+     The spear-storm, through the air sharp singing,
+     Against his shield was ever ringing.
+     So Erling stood; but fate had willed
+     His life off Bokn should be spilled.
+     No braver man has, since his day,
+     Past Bokn fjord ta'en his way."
+      When Olaf went back a little upon the fore-deck he saw Erling's behaviour;
+      and the king accosted him thus: -"Thou hast turned against me to-day,
+      Erling."
+      He replies, "The eagle turns his claws in defence when torn asunder."
+      Sigvat the skald tells thus of these words of Erling: -
+     "Erling, our best defence of old, -
+     Erling the brave, the brisk, the bold, -
+     Stood to his arms, gaily crying,
+     'Eagles should show their claws, though dying:'
+     The very words which once before
+     To Olaf he had said on shore,
+     At Utstein when they both prepared
+     To meet the foe, and danger shared."
+      Then said the king, "Wilt thou enter into my service, Erling?"
+      "That I will," said he; took the helmet off his head, laid down his sword
+      and shield, and went forward to the forecastle deck.
+      The king struck him in the chin with the sharp point of his battle-axe,
+      and said, "I shall mark thee as a traitor to thy sovereign."
+      Then Aslak Fitiaskalle rose up, and struck Erling in the head with an axe,
+      so that it stood fast in his brain, and was instantly his death-wound.
+      Thus Erling lost his life.
+      The king said to Aslak, "May all ill luck attend thee for that stroke; for
+      thou hast struck Norway out of my hands."
+      Aslak replied, "It is bad enough if that stroke displease thee, for I
+      thought it was striking Norway into thy hands; and if I have given thee
+      offence, sire, by this stroke, and have thy ill-will for it, it will go
+      badly with me, for I will get so many men's ill-will and enmity for this
+      deed that I would need all your protection and favour."
+      The king replied that he should have it.
+      Thereafter the king ordered every man to return to his ship, and to get
+      ready to depart as fast as he could. "We will not plunder the slain," says
+      he, "and each man may keep what he has taken." The men returned to the
+      ships and prepared themselves for the departure as quickly as possible;
+      and scarcely was this done before the vessels of the bondes ran in from
+      the south into the sound. It went with the bonde-army as is often seen,
+      that the men, although many in numbers, know not what to do when they have
+      experienced a check, have lost their chief, and are without leaders. None
+      of Erling's sons were there, and the bondes therefore made no attack, and
+      the king sailed on his way northwards. But the bondes took Erling's
+      corpse, adorned it, and carried it with them home to Sole, and also the
+      bodies of all who had fallen. There was great lamentation over Erling; and
+      it has been a common observation among people, that Erling Skjalgson was
+      the greatest and worthiest man in Norway of those who had no high title.
+      Sigvat made these verses upon the occasion: -
+     "Thus Erling fell -and such a gain
+     To buy with such a loss was vain;
+     For better man than he ne'er died,
+     And the king's gain was small beside.
+     In truth no man I ever knew
+     Was, in all ways, so firm and true;
+     Free from servility and pride,
+     Honoured by all, yet thus he died."
+      Sigvat also says that Aslak had very unthinkingly committed this murder of
+      his own kinsman: -
+     "Norway's brave defender's dead!
+     Aslak has heaped on his own head
+     The guilt of murdering his own kin:
+     May few be guilty of such sin!
+     His kinsman's murder on him lies -
+     Our forefathers, in sayings wise,
+     Have said, what is unknown to few,
+     'Kinsmen to kinsmen should be true.'"
+      187. OF THE INSURRECTION OF AGDER DISTRICT.
+      Of Erling's sons some at that time were north in Throndhjem, some in
+      Hordaland, and some in the Fjord district, for the purpose of collecting
+      men. When Erling's death was reported, the news came also that there was a
+      levy raising in Agder, Hordaland, and Rogaland. Forces were raised and a
+      great army assembled, under Erling's sons, to pursue King Olaf.
+      When King Olaf retired from the battle with Erling he went northward
+      through the sounds, and it was late in the day. It is related that the
+      king then made the following verses: -
+     "This night, with battle sounds wild ringing,
+     Small joy to the fair youth is bringing
+     Who sits in Jadar, little dreaming
+     O'er what this night the raven's screaming.
+     The far-descended Erling's life
+     Too soon has fallen; but, in the strife
+     He met the luck they well deserve
+     Who from their faith and fealty swerve."
+      Afterwards the king sailed with his fleet along the land northwards, and
+      got certain tidings of the bondes assembling an army. There were many
+      chiefs and lendermen at this time with King Olaf, and all the sons of
+      Arne. Of this Bjarne Gullbrarskald speaks in the poem he composed about
+      Kalf Arnason: -
+     "Kalf!  thou hast fought at Bokn well;
+     Of thy brave doings all men tell:
+     When Harald's son his men urged on
+     To the hard strife, thy courage shone.
+     Thou soon hadst made a good Yule feast
+     For greedy wolf there in the East:
+     Where stone and spear were flying round,
+     There thou wast still the foremost found.
+     The people suffered in the strife
+     When noble Erling lost his life,
+     And north of Utstein many a speck
+     Of blood lay black upon the deck.
+     The king, 'tis clear, has been deceived,
+     By treason of his land bereaved;
+     And Agder now, whose force is great.
+     Will rule o'er all parts of the state."
+      King Olaf continued his voyage until he came north of Stad, and brought up
+      at the Herey Isles. Here he heard the news that Earl Hakon had a great
+      war-force in Throndhjem, and thereupon the king held a council with his
+      people. Kalf Arnason urged much to advance to Throndhjem, and fight Earl
+      Hakon, notwithstanding the difference of numbers. Many others supported
+      this advice, but others dissuaded from it, and the matter was left to the
+      king's judgment.
+      188. DEATH OF ASLAK FITIASKALLE.
+      Afterwards the king went into Steinavag, and remained there all night; but
+      Aslak Fitiaskalle ran into Borgund, where he remained the night, and where
+      Vigleik Arnason was before him. In the morning, when Aslak was about
+      returning on board, Vigleik assaulted him, and sought to avenge Erling's
+      murder. Aslak fell there. Some of the king's court-men, who had been home
+      all summer, joined the king here. They came from Frekeysund, and brought
+      the king tidings that Earl Hakon, and many lendermen with him, had come in
+      the morning to Frekeysund with a large force; "and they will end thy days,
+      sire, if they have strength enough." Now the king sent his men up to a
+      hill that was near; and when they came to the top, and looked northwards
+      to Bjarney Island, they perceived that a great armament of many ships was
+      coming from the north, and they hastened back to the king with this
+      intelligence. The king, who was lying there with only twelve ships,
+      ordered the war-horn to sound, the tents to be taken down on his ships,
+      and they took to their oars. When they were quite ready, and were leaving
+      the harbour, the bonde army sailed north around Thiotande with twenty-five
+      ships. The king then steered inside of Nyrfe Island, and inside of
+      Hundsver. Now when King Olaf came right abreast of Borgund, the ship which
+      Aslak had steered came out to meet him, and when they found the king they
+      told him the tidings, -that Vigleik Arnason had killed Aslak
+      Fitiaskalle, because he had killed Erling Skjalgson. The king took this
+      news very angrily, but could not delay his voyage on account of the enemy
+      and he sailed in by Vegsund and Skor. There some of his people left him;
+      among others, Kalf Arnason, with many other lendermen and ship commanders,
+      who all went to meet Earl Hakon. King Olaf, however, proceeded on his way
+      without stopping until he came to Todar fjord, where he brought up at
+      Valdal, and landed from his ship. He had then five ships with him, which
+      he drew up upon the shore, and took care of their sails and materials.
+      Then he set up his land-tent upon a point of land called Sult, where there
+      are pretty flat fields, and set up a cross near to the point of land. A
+      bonde, by name Bruse, who dwelt there in More, and was chief over the
+      valley, came down to King Olaf, together with many other bondes, and
+      received him well, and according to his dignity; and he was friendly, and
+      pleased with their reception of him. Then the king asked if there was a
+      passable road up in the country from the valley to Lesjar; and Bruse
+      replied, that there was an urd in the valley called Skerfsurd not passable
+      for man or beast. King Olaf answers, "That we must try, bonde, and it will
+      go as God pleases. Come here in the morning with your yoke, and come
+      yourself with it, and let us then see. When we come to the sloping
+      precipice, what chance there may be, and if we cannot devise some means of
+      coming over it with horses and people."
+      189. CLEARING OF THE URD.
+      Now when day broke the bondes drove down with their yokes, as the king had
+      told them. The clothes and weapons were packed upon horses, but the king
+      and all the people went on foot. He went thus until he came to a place
+      called Krosbrekka, and when he came up upon the hill he rested himself,
+      sat down there a while, looked down over the fjord, and said, "A difficult
+      expedition ye have thrown upon my hands, ye lendermen, who have now
+      changed your fealty, although but a little while ago ye were my friends
+      and faithful to me." There are now two crosses erected upon the bank on
+      which the king sat. Then the king mounted a horse, and rode without
+      stopping up the valley, until he came to the precipice. Then the king
+      asked Bruse if there was no summer hut of cattle-herds in the
+      neighbourhood, where they could remain. He said there was. The king
+      ordered his land-tent to be set up, and remained there all night. In the
+      morning the king ordered them to drive to the urd, and try if they could
+      get across it with the waggons. They drove there, and the king remained in
+      the meantime in his tent. Towards evening the king's court-men and the
+      bondes came back, and told how they had had a very fatiguing labour,
+      without making any progress, and that there never could be a road made
+      that they could get across: so they continued there the second night,
+      during which, for the whole night, the king was occupied in prayer. As
+      soon as he observed day dawning he ordered his men to drive again to the
+      urd, and try once more if they could get across it with the waggons; but
+      they went very unwillingly, saying nothing could be gained by it. When
+      they were gone the man who had charge of the king's kitchen came, and said
+      there were only two carcasses of young cattle remaining of provision:
+      "Although you, sire, have 400 men, and there are 100 bondes besides." Then
+      the king ordered that he should set all the kettles on the fire, and put a
+      little bit of meat in each kettle, which was done. Then the king went
+      there, and made the sign of the cross over each kettle, and told them to
+      make ready the meat. The king then went to the urd called Skerfsurd, where
+      a road should be cleared. When the king came all his people were sitting
+      down, quite worn out with the hard labour. Bruse said, "I told you, sire,
+      but you would not believe me, that we could make nothing of this urd." The
+      king laid aside his cloak, and told them to go to work once more at the
+      urd. They did so, and now twenty men could handle stones which before 100
+      men could not move from the place; and thus before midday the road was
+      cleared so well that it was as passable for men, and for horses with
+      packs, as a road in the plain fields. The king, after this, went down
+      again to where the meat was, which place is called Olaf's Rock. Near the
+      rock is a spring, at which Olaf washed himself; and therefore at the
+      present day, when the cattle in the valley are sick, their illness is made
+      better by their drinking at this well. Thereafter the king sat down to
+      table with all the others; and when he was satisfied he asked if there was
+      any other sheeling on the other side of the urd, and near the mountains,
+      where they could pass the night. Bruse said there was such a sheeling,
+      called Groningar; but that nobody could pass the night there on account of
+      witchcraft, and evil beings who were in the sheeling. Then the king said
+      they must get ready for their journey, as he wanted to be at the sheeling
+      for the night. Then came the kitchen-master to the king, and tells that
+      there was come an extraordinary supply of provisions, and he did not know
+      where it had come from, or how. The king thanked God for this blessing,
+      and gave the bondes who drove down again to their valley some rations of
+      food, but remained himself all night in the sheeling. In the middle of the
+      night, while the people were asleep, there was heard in the cattle-fold a
+      dreadful cry, and these words: "Now Olaf's prayers are burning me," says
+      the spirit, "so that I can no longer be in my habitation; now must I fly,
+      and never more come to this fold." When the king's people awoke in the
+      morning the king proceeded to the mountains, and said to Bruse, "Here
+      shall now a farm be settled, and the bonde who dwells here shall never
+      want what is needful for the support of life; and never shall his crop be
+      destroyed by frost, although the crops be frozen on the farms both above
+      it and below it." Then the king proceeded over the mountains, and came to
+      a farm called Einby, where he remained for the night. King Olaf had then
+      been fifteen years king of Norway (A.D. 1015-1029), including the year
+      both he and Svein were in the country, and this year we have now been
+      telling about. It was, namely, a little past Yule when the king left his
+      ships and took to the land, as before related. Of this portion of his
+      reign the priest Are Thorgilson the Wise was the first who wrote; and he
+      was both faithful in his story, of a good memory, and so old a man that he
+      could remember the men, and had heard their accounts, who were so old that
+      through their age they could remember these circumstances as he himself
+      wrote them in his books, and he named the men from whom he received his
+      information. Otherwise it is generally said that King Olaf had been
+      fifteen years king of Norway when he fell; but they who say so reckon to
+      Earl Svein's government, the last year he was in the country, for King
+      Olaf lived fifteen years afterwards as king.
+      190. OLAF'S PROPHECIES.
+      When the king had been one night at Lesjar he proceeded on his journey
+      with his men, day by day; first into Gudbrandsdal, and from thence out to
+      Redemark. Now it was seen who had been his friends, for they followed him;
+      but those who had served him with less fidelity separated from him, and
+      some showed him even indifference, or even full hostility, which
+      afterwards was apparent; and also it could be seen clearly in many Upland
+      people that they took very ill his putting Thorer to death, as before
+      related. King Olaf gave leave to return home to many of his men who had
+      farms and children to take care of; for it seemed to them uncertain what
+      safety there might be for the families and property of those who left the
+      country with him. Then the king explained to his friends his intention of
+      leaving the country, and going first east into Svithjod, and there taking
+      his determination as to where he should go; but he let his friends know
+      his intention to return to the country, and regain his kingdoms, if God
+      should grant him longer life; and he did not conceal his expectation that
+      the people of Norway would again return to their fealty to him. "I think,"
+      says he, "that Earl Hakon will have Norway but a short time under his
+      power, which many will not think an extraordinary expectation, as Earl
+      Hakon has had but little luck against me; but probably few people will
+      trust to my prophecy, that Canute the Great will in the course of a few
+      years die, and his kingdoms vanish; and there will he no risings in favour
+      of his race." When the king had ended his speech, his men prepared
+      themselves for their departure. The king, with the troop that followed
+      him, turned east to Eid forest. And there were along with him the Queen
+      Astrid; their daughter Ulfhild; Magnus, King Olaf's son; Ragnvald
+      Brusason; the three sons of Arne, Thorberg, Fin, and Arne, with many
+      lendermen; and the king's attendants consisted of many chosen men. Bjorn
+      the marshal got leave to go home, and he went to his farm, and many others
+      of the king's friends returned home with his permission to their farms.
+      The king begged them to let him know the events which might happen in the
+      country, and which it might be important for him to know; and now the king
+      proceeded on his way.
+      191. KING OLAF PROCEEDS TO RUSSIA.
+      It is to be related of King Olaf's journey, that he went first from Norway
+      eastward through Eid forest to Vermaland, then to Vatnsby, and through the
+      forests in which there are roads, until he came out in Nerike district.
+      There dwelt a rich and powerful man in that part called Sigtryg, who had a
+      son, Ivar, who afterwards became a distinguished person. Olaf stayed with
+      Sigtryg all spring (A.D. 1029); and when summer came he made ready for a
+      journey, procured a ship for himself, and without stopping went on to
+      Russia to King Jarisleif and his queen Ingegerd; but his own queen Astrid,
+      and their daughter Ulfhild, remained behind in Svithjod, and the king took
+      his son Magnus eastward with him. King Jarisleif received King Olaf in the
+      kindest manner, and made him the offer to remain with him, and to have so
+      much land as was necessary for defraying the expense of the entertainment
+      of his followers. King Olaf accepted this offer thankfully, and remained
+      there. It is related that King Olaf was distinguished all his life for
+      pious habits, and zeal in his prayers to God. But afterwards, when he saw
+      his own power diminished, and that of his adversaries augmented, he turned
+      all his mind to God's service; for he was not distracted by other
+      thoughts, or by the labour he formerly had upon his hands, for during all
+      the time he sat upon the throne he was endeavouring to promote what was
+      most useful: and first to free and protect the country from foreign
+      chiefs' oppressions, then to convert the people to the right faith; and
+      also to establish law and the rights of the country, which he did by
+      letting justice have its way, and punishing evil-doers.
+      192. CAUSES OF THE REVOLT AGAINST KING OLAF.
+      It had been an old custom in Norway that the sons of lendermen, or other
+      great men, went out in war-ships to gather property, and they marauded
+      both in the country and out of the country. But after King Olaf came to
+      the sovereignty he protected the country, so that he abolished all
+      plundering there; and even if they were the sons of powerful men who
+      committed any depredation, or did what the king considered against law, he
+      did not spare them at all, but they must suffer in life or limbs; and no
+      man's entreaties, and no offer of money-penalties, could help them. So
+      says Sigvat: -
+     "They who on viking cruises drove
+     With gifts of red gold often strove
+     To buy their safety -but our chief
+     Had no compassion for the thief.
+     He made the bravest lose his head
+     Who robbed at sea, and pirates led;
+     And his just sword gave peace to all,
+     Sparing no robber, great or small."
+      And he also says: -
+     "Great king!  whose sword on many a field
+     Food to the wandering wolf did yield,
+     And then the thief and pirate band
+     Swept wholly off by sea and land -
+     Good king!  who for the people's sake
+     Set hands and feet upon a stake,
+     When plunderers of great name and bold
+     Harried the country as of old.
+     The country's guardian showed his might
+     When oft he made his just sword bite
+     Through many a viking's neck and hair,
+     And never would the guilty spare.
+     King Magnus' father, I must say,
+     Did many a good deed in his day.
+     Olaf the Thick was stern and stout,
+     Much good his victories brought out."
+      He punished great and small with equal severity, which appeared to the
+      chief people of the country too severe; and animosity rose to the highest
+      when they lost relatives by the king's just sentence, although they were
+      in reality guilty. This was the origin of the hostility of the great men
+      of the country to King Olaf, that they could not bear his just judgments.
+      He again would rather renounce his dignity than omit righteous judgment.
+      The accusation against him, of being stingy with his money, was not just,
+      for he was a most generous man towards his friends; but that alone was the
+      cause of the discontent raised against him, that he appeared hard and
+      severe in his retributions. Besides, King Canute offered great sums of
+      money, and the great chiefs were corrupted by this, and by his offering
+      them greater dignities than they had possessed before. The inclinations of
+      the people, also, were all in favour of Earl Hakon, who was much beloved
+      by the country folks when he ruled the country before.
+      193. OF JOKUL BARDSON.
+      Earl Hakon had sailed with his fleet from Throndhjem, and gone south to
+      More against King Olaf, as before related. Now when the king bore away,
+      and ran into the fjord, the earl followed him thither; and then Kalf
+      Arnason came to meet him, with many of the men who had deserted King Olaf.
+      Kalf was well received. The earl steered in through Todar fjord to Valdal,
+      where the king had laid up his ships on the strand. He took the ships
+      which belonged to the king, had them put upon the water and rigged, and
+      cast lots, and put commanders in charge of them according to the lots.
+      There was a man called Jokul, who was an Icelander, a son of Bard Jokulson
+      of Vatnsdal; the lot fell upon Jokul to command the Bison, which King Olaf
+      himself had commanded. Jokul made these verses upon it: -
+     "Mine is the lot to take the helm
+     Which Olaf owned, who owned the realm;
+     From Sult King Olaf's ship to steer
+     (Ill luck I dread on his reindeer).
+     My girl will never hear the tidings,
+     Till o'er the wild wave I come riding
+     In Olaf's ship, who loved his gold,
+     And lost his ships with wealth untold."
+      We may here shortly tell what happened a long time after. -that this
+      Jokul fell in with King Olaf's men in the island of Gotland, and the king
+      ordered him to be taken out to be beheaded. A willow twig accordingly was
+      plaited in with his hair, and a man held him fast by it. Jokul sat down
+      upon a bank, and a man swung the axe to execute him; but Jokul hearing the
+      sound, raised his head, and the blow struck him in the head, and made a
+      dreadful wound. As the king saw it would be his death-wound, he ordered
+      them to let him lie with it. Jokul raised himself up, and he sang: -
+     "My hard fate I mourn, -
+     Alas! my wounds burn,
+     My red wounds are gaping,
+     My life-blood escaping.
+     My wounds burn sore;
+     But I suffer still more
+     From the king's angry word,
+     Than his sharp-biting sword."
+      194. OF KALF ARNASON.
+      Kalf Arnason went with Earl Hakon north to Throndhjem, and the earl
+      invited him to enter into his service. Kalf said he would first go home to
+      his farm at Eggja, and afterwards make his determination; and Kalf did so.
+      When he came home he found his wife Sigrid much irritated; and she
+      reckoned up all the sorrow inflicted on her, as she insisted, by King
+      Olaf. First, he had ordered her first husband Olver to be killed. "And now
+      since," says she, "my two sons; and thou thyself, Kalf, wert present when
+      they were cut off, and which I little expected from thee." Kalf says, it
+      was much against his will that Thorer was killed. "I offered money-penalty
+      for him," says he; "and when Grjotgard was killed I lost my brother
+      Arnbjorn at the same time." She replies, "It is well thou hast suffered
+      this from the king; for thou mayest perhaps avenge him, although thou wilt
+      not avenge my injuries. Thou sawest how thy foster-son Thorer was killed,
+      with all the regard of the king for thee." She frequently brought out such
+      vexatious speeches to Kalf, to which he often answered angrily; but yet he
+      allowed himself to be persuaded by her to enter into the earl's service,
+      on condition of renewing his fiefs to him. Sigrid sent word to the earl
+      how far she had brought the matter with Kalf. As soon as the earl heard of
+      it, he sent a message to Kalf that he should come to the town to him. Kalf
+      did not decline the invitation, but came directly to Nidaros, and waited
+      on the earl, who received him kindly. In their conversation it was fully
+      agreed upon that Kalf should go into the earl's service, and should
+      receive great fiefs. After this Kalf returned home, and had the greater
+      part of the interior of the Throndhjem country under him. As soon as it
+      was spring Kalf rigged out a ship that belonged to him, and when she was
+      ready he put to sea, and sailed west to England; for he had heard that in
+      spring King Canute was to sail from Denmark to England, and that King
+      Canute had given Harald, a son of Thorkel the High, an earldom in Denmark.
+      Kalf Arnason went to King Canute as soon as he arrived in England. Bjarne
+      Gullbrarskald tells of this: -
+     "King Olaf eastward o'er the sea
+     To Russia's monarch had to flee;
+     Our Harald's brother ploughed the main,
+     And furrowed white its dark-blue plain.
+     Whilst thou -the truth I still will say,
+     Nor fear nor favour can me sway -
+     Thou to King Canute hastened fast,
+     As soon as Olaf's luck was past."
+      Now when Kalf came to King Canute the king received him particularly well,
+      and had many conversations with him. Among other things, King Canute, in a
+      conference, asked Kalf to bind himself to raise a warfare against King
+      Olaf, if ever he should return to the country. "And for which," says the
+      king, "I will give thee the earldom, and place thee to rule over Norway;
+      and my relation Hakon shall come to me, which will suit him better, for he
+      is so honourable and trustworthy that I believe he would not even throw a
+      spear against the person of King Olaf if he came back to the country."
+      Kalf lent his ear to what the king proposed, for he had a great desire to
+      attain this high dignity; and this conclusion was settled upon between
+      King Canute and Kalf. Kalf then prepared to return home, and on his
+      departure he received splendid presents from King Canute. Bjarne the skald
+      tells of these circumstances: -
+     "Sprung from old earls! -to England's lord
+     Thou owest many a thankful word
+     For many a gift: if all be true,
+     Thy interest has been kept in view;
+     For when thy course was bent for home,
+     (Although that luck is not yet come,)
+     'That Norway should be thine,' 'tis said,
+     The London king a promise made."
+      Kalf thereafter returned to Norway, and came to his farm.
+      195. OF THE DEATH OF EARL HAKON.
+      Earl Hakon left the country this summer (A.D. 1029), and went to England,
+      and when he came there was well received by the king. The earl had a bride
+      in England, and he travelled to conclude this marriage, and as he intended
+      holding his wedding in Norway, he came to procure those things for it in
+      England which it was difficult to get in Norway. In autumn he made ready
+      for his return, but it was somewhat late before he was clear for sea; but
+      at last he set out. Of his voyage all that can be told is, that the vessel
+      was lost, and not a man escaped. Some relate that the vessel was seen
+      north of Caithness in the evening in a heavy storm, and the wind blowing
+      out of Pentland Firth. They who believe this report say the vessel drove
+      out among the breakers of the ocean; but with certainty people knew only
+      that Earl Hakon was missing in the ocean, and nothing belonging to the
+      ship ever came to land. The same autumn some merchants came to Norway, who
+      told the tidings that were going through the country of Earl Hakon being
+      missing; and all men knew that he neither came to Norway nor to England
+      that autumn, so that Norway that winter was without a head.
+      196. OF BJORN THE MARSHAL.
+      Bjorn the marshal sat at home on his farm after his parting from King
+      Olaf. Bjorn was a celebrated man; therefore it was soon reported far and
+      wide that he had set himself down in quietness. Earl Hakon and the other
+      chiefs of the country heard this also, and sent persons with a verbal
+      message to Bjorn. When the messengers arrived Bjorn received them well;
+      and afterwards Bjorn called them to him to a conference, and asked their
+      business. He who was their foreman presented to Bjorn the salutations of
+      King Canute, Earl Hakon, and of several chiefs. "King Canute," says he,
+      "has heard much of thee, and that thou hast been long a follower of King
+      Olaf the Thick, and hast been a great enemy of King Canute; and this he
+      thinks not right, for he will be thy friend, and the friend of all worthy
+      men, if thou wilt turn from thy friendship to King Olaf and become his
+      enemy. And the only thing now thou canst do is to seek friendship and
+      protection there where it is most readily to be found, and which all men
+      in this northern world think it most honourable to be favoured with. Ye
+      who have followed Olaf the Thick should consider how he is now separated
+      from you; and that now ye have no aid against King Canute and his men,
+      whose lands ye plundered last summer, and whose friends ye murdered.
+      Therefore ye ought to accept, with thanks, the friendship which the king
+      offers you; and it would become you better if you offered money even in
+      mulct to obtain it."
+      When he had ended his speech Bjorn replies, "I wish now to sit quietly at
+      home, and not to enter into the service of any chief."
+      The messenger answers, "Such men as thou art are just the right men to
+      serve the king; and now I can tell thee there are just two things for thee
+      to choose, -either to depart in peace from thy property, and wander
+      about as thy comrade Olaf is doing; or, which is evidently better, to
+      accept King Canute's and Earl Hakon's friendship, become their man, and
+      take the oaths of fealty to them. Receive now thy reward." And he
+      displayed to him a large bag full of English money.
+      Bjorn was a man fond of money, and self-interested; and when he saw the
+      silver he was silent, and reflected with himself what resolution he should
+      take. It seemed to him much to abandon his property, as he did not think
+      it probable that King Olaf would ever have a rising in his favour in
+      Norway. Now when the messenger saw that Bjorn's inclinations were turned
+      towards the money, he threw down two thick gold rings, and said, "Take the
+      money at once, Bjorn, and swear the oaths to King Canute; for I can
+      promise thee that this money is but a trifle, compared to what thou wilt
+      receive if thou followest King Canute."
+      By the heap of money, the fine promises, and the great presents, he was
+      led by covetousness, took the money, went into King Canute's service, and
+      gave the oaths of fealty to King Canute and Earl Hakon, and then the
+      messengers departed.
+      197. BJORN THE MARSHAL'S JOURNEY.
+      When Bjorn heard the tidings that Earl Hakon was missing he soon altered
+      his mind, and was much vexed with himself for having been a traitor in his
+      fidelity to King Olaf. He thought, now, that he was freed from the oath by
+      which he had bound himself to Earl Hakon. It seemed to Bjorn that now
+      there was some hope that King Olaf might again come to the throne of
+      Norway if he came back, as the country was without a head. Bjorn therefore
+      immediately made himself ready to travel, and took some men with him. He
+      then set out on his journey, travelling night and day, on horseback when
+      he could, and by ship when he found occasion; and never halted until he
+      came, after Yule, east to Russia to King Olaf, who was very glad to see
+      Bjorn. Then the king inquired much about the news from Norway. Bjorn tells
+      him that Earl Hakon was missing, and the kingdom left without a head. At
+      this news the men who had followed King Olaf were very glad, -all who
+      had left property, connections, and friends in Norway; and the longing for
+      home was awakened in them. Bjorn told King Olaf much news from Norway, and
+      very anxious the king was to know, and asked much how his friends had kept
+      their fidelity towards him. Bjorn answered, it had gone differently with
+      different people.
+      Then Bjorn stood up, fell at the king's feet, held his foot, and said,
+      "All is in your power, sire, and in God's! I have taken money from King
+      Canute's men, and sworn them the oaths of fealty; but now will I follow
+      thee, and not part from thee so long as we both live."
+      The king replies, "Stand up, Bjorn' thou shalt be reconciled with me; but
+      reconcile thy perjury with God. I can see that but few men in Norway have
+      held fast by their fealty, when such men as thou art could be false to me.
+      But true it is also that people sit in great danger when I am distant, and
+      they are exposed to the wrath of my enemies."
+      Bjorn then reckoned up those who had principally bound themselves to rise
+      in hostility against the king and his men; and named, among others,
+      Erling's son in Jadar and their connections, Einar Tambaskelfer, Kalf
+      Arnason, Thorer Hund, and Harek of Thjotta.
+      198. OF KING OLAF.
+      After King Olaf came to Russia he was very thoughtful, and weighed what
+      counsel he now should follow. King Jarisleif and Queen Ingegerd offered
+      him to remain with them, and receive a kingdom called Vulgaria, which is a
+      part of Russia, and in which land the people were still heathen. King Olaf
+      thought over this offer; but when he proposed it to his men they dissuaded
+      him from settling himself there, and urged the king to betake himself to
+      Norway to his own kingdom: but the king himself had resolved almost in his
+      own mind to lay down his royal dignity, to go out into the world to
+      Jerusalem, or other holy places, and to enter into some order of monks.
+      But yet the thought lay deep in his soul to recover again, if there should
+      be any opportunity for him, his kingdom in Norway. When he thought over
+      this, it recurred to his mind how all things had gone prosperously with
+      him during the first ten years of his reign, and how afterwards every
+      thing he undertook became heavy, difficult, and hard; and that he had been
+      unlucky, on all occasions in which he had tried his luck. On this account
+      he doubted if it would be prudent to depend so much upon his luck, as to
+      go with so little strength into the hands of his enemies, seeing that all
+      the people of the country had taken part with them to oppose King Olaf.
+      Such cares he had often on his mind, and he left his cause to God, praying
+      that He would do what to Him seemed best. These thoughts he turned over in
+      his mind, and knew not what to resolve upon; for he saw how evidently
+      dangerous that was which his inclination was most bent upon.
+      199. OF KING OLAF'S DREAM.
+      One night the king lay awake in his bed, thinking with great anxiety about
+      his determination, and at last, being tired of thinking, sleep came over
+      him towards morning; but his sleep was so light that he thought he was
+      awake, and could see all that was doing in the house. Then he saw a great
+      and superb man, in splendid clothes, standing by his bed; and it came into
+      the king's mind that this was King Olaf Trygvason who had come to him.
+      This man said to him, "Thou are very sick of thinking about thy future
+      resolutions; and it appears to me wonderful that these thoughts should be
+      so tumultuous in thy soul that thou shouldst even think of laying down the
+      kingly dignity which God hath given thee, and of remaining here and
+      accepting of a kingdom from foreign and unknown kings. Go back rather to
+      that kingdom which thou hast received in heritage, and rule over it with
+      the strength which God hath given thee, and let not thy inferiors take it
+      from thee. It is the glory of a king to be victorious over his enemies,
+      and it is a glorious death to die in battle. Or art thou doubtful if thou
+      hast right on thy side in the strife with thine enemies? Thou must have no
+      doubts, and must not conceal the truth from thyself. Thou must go back to
+      thy country, and God will give open testimony that the kingdom is thine by
+      property." When the king awoke he thought he saw the man's shoulders going
+      out. From this time the king's courage rose, and he fixed firmly his
+      resolution to return to Norway; to which his inclination also tended most,
+      and which he also found was the desire of all his men. He bethought
+      himself also that the country being without a chief could be easily
+      attacked, from what he had heard, and that after he came himself many
+      would turn back towards him. When the king told his determination to his
+      people they all gave it their approbation joyfully.
+      200. OF KING OLAF'S HEALING POWERS.
+      It is related that once upon a time, while King Olaf was in Russia, it
+      happened that the son of an honest widow had a sore boil upon his neck, of
+      which the lad lay very ill; and as he could not swallow any food, there
+      was little hope of his life. The boy's mother went to Queen Ingegerd, with
+      whom she was acquainted, and showed her the lad. The queen said she knew
+      no remedy for it. "Go," said she, "to King Olaf, he is the best physician
+      here; and beg him to lay his hands on thy lad, and bring him my words if
+      he will not otherwise do it." She did as the queen told her; and when she
+      found the king she says to him that her son is dangerously ill of a boil
+      in his neck, and begs him to lay his hand on the boil. The king tells her
+      he is not a physician, and bids her go to where there were physicians. She
+      replies, that the queen had told her to come to him; "and told me to add
+      the request from her, that you would would use the remedy you understood,
+      and she said that thou art the best physician here in the town." Then the
+      king took the lad, laid his hands upon his neck, and felt the boil for a
+      long time, until the boy made a very wry face. Then the king took a piece
+      of bread, laid it in the figure of the cross upon the palm of his hand,
+      and put it into the boy's mouth. He swallowed it down, and from that time
+      all the soreness left his neck, and in a few days he was quite well, to
+      the great joy of his mother and all his relations. Then first came Olaf
+      into the repute of having as much healing power in his hands as is
+      ascribed to men who have been gifted by nature with healing by the touch;
+      and afterwards when his miracles were universally acknowledged, this also
+      was considered one of his miracles.
+      201. KING OLAF BURNS THE WOOD SHAVINGS ON HIS HAND FOR HIS SABBATH BREACH.
+      It happened one Sunday that the king sat in his highseat at the dinner
+      table, and had fallen into such deep thought that he did not observe how
+      time went. In one hand he had a knife, and in the other a piece of
+      fir-wood from which he cut splinters from time to time. The table-servant
+      stood before him with a bowl in his hands; and seeing what the king was
+      about, and that he was involved in thought, he said, "It is Monday, sire,
+      to-morrow." The king looked at him when he heard this, and then it came
+      into his mind what he was doing on the Sunday. Then the king ordered a
+      lighted candle to be brought him, swept together all the shavings he had
+      made, set them on fire, and let them burn upon his naked hand; showing
+      thereby that he would hold fast by God's law and commandment, and not
+      trespass without punishment on what he knew to be right.
+      202. OF KING OLAF.
+      When King Olaf had resolved on his return home, he made known his
+      intention to King Jarisleif and Queen Ingegerd. They dissuaded him from
+      this expedition, and said he should receive as much power in their
+      dominions as he thought desirable; but begged him not to put himself
+      within the reach of his enemies with so few men as he had. Then King Olaf
+      told them of his dream; adding, that he believed it to be God's will and
+      providence that it should be so. Now when they found he was determined on
+      travelling to Norway, they offered him all the assistance to his journey
+      that he would accept from them. The king thanked them in many fine words
+      for their good will; and said that he accepted from them, with no ordinary
+      pleasure, what might be necessary for his undertaking.
+      203. OF KING OLAF'S JOURNEY FROM RUSSIA.
+      Immediately after Yule (A.D. 1080), King Olaf made himself ready; and had
+      about 200 of his men with him. King Jarisleif gave him all the horses, and
+      whatever else he required; and when he was ready he set off. King
+      Jarisleif and Queen Ingegerd parted from him with all honour; and he left
+      his son Magnus behind with the king. The first part of his journey, down
+      to the sea-coast, King Olaf and his men made on the ice; but as spring
+      approached, and the ice broke up, they rigged their vessels, and when they
+      were ready and got a wind they set out to sea, and had a good voyage. When
+      Olaf came to the island of Gotland with his ships he heard the news -which
+      was told as truth, both in Svithjod, Denmark, and over all Norway -that
+      Earl Hakon was missing, and Norway without a head. This gave the king and
+      his men good hope of the issue of their journey. From thence they sailed,
+      when the wind suited, to Svithjod, and went into the Maelar lake, to Aros,
+      and sent men to the Swedish King Onund appointing a meeting. King Onund
+      received his brother-in-law's message in the kindest manner, and went to
+      him according to his invitation. Astrid also came to King Olaf, with the
+      men who had attended her; and great was the joy on all sides at this
+      meeting. The Swedish king also received his brother-in-law King Olaf with
+      great joy when they met.
+      204. OF THE LENDERMEN IN NORWAY.
+      Now we must relate what, in the meantime, was going on in Norway. Thorer
+      Hund, in these two winters (A.D. 1029-1030), had made a Lapland journey,
+      and each winter had been a long time on the mountains, and had gathered to
+      himself great wealth by trading in various wares with the Laplanders. He
+      had twelve large coats of reindeer-skin made for him, with so much Lapland
+      witchcraft that no weapon could cut or pierce them any more than if they
+      were armour of ring-mail, nor so much. The spring thereafter Thorer rigged
+      a long-ship which belonged to him, and manned it with his house-servants.
+      He summoned the bondes, demanded a levy from the most northern Thing
+      district, collected in this way a great many people, and proceeded with
+      this force southwards. Harek of Thjotta had also collected a great number
+      of people; and in this expedition many people of consequence took a part,
+      although these two were the most distinguished. They made it known
+      publicly that with this war-force they were going against King Olaf, to
+      defend the country against him, in case he should come from the eastward.
+      205. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER.
+      Einar Tambaskelfer had most influence in the outer part of the Throndhjem
+      country after Earl Hakon's death was no longer doubtful; for he and his
+      son Eindride appeared to be the nearest heirs to the movable property the
+      earl had possessed. Then Einar remembered the promises and offers of
+      friendship which King Canute had made him at parting; and he ordered a
+      good vessel which belonged to him to be got ready, and embarked with a
+      great retinue, and when he was ready sailed southwards along the coast,
+      then set out to sea westwards, and sailed without stopping until he came
+      to England. He immediately waited on King Canute, who received him well
+      and joyfully. Then Einar opened his business to the king, and said he was
+      come there to see the fulfillment of the promises the king had made him;
+      namely, that he, Einar, should have the highest title of honour in Norway
+      if Earl Hakon were no more. King Canute replies, that now the
+      circumstances were altered. "I have now," said he, "sent men and tokens to
+      my son Svein in Denmark, and promised him the kingdom of Norway; but thou
+      shalt retain my friendship, and get the dignity and title which thou art
+      entitled by birth to hold. Thou shalt be lenderman with great fiefs, and
+      be so much more raised above other lendermen as thou art more able than
+      they." Einar saw sufficiently how matters stood with regard to his
+      business, and got ready to return home; but as he now knew the king's
+      intentions, and thought it probable if King Olaf came from the East the
+      country would not be very peaceable, it came into his mind that it would
+      be better to proceed slowly, and not to be hastening his voyage, in order
+      to fight against King Olaf, without his being advanced by it to any higher
+      dignity than he had before. Einar accordingly went to sea when he was
+      ready; but only came to Norway after the events were ended which took
+      place there during that summer.
+      206. OF THE CHIEF PEOPLE IN NORWAY.
+      The chiefs in Norway had their spies east in Svithjod, and south in
+      Denmark, to find out if King Olaf had come from Russia. As soon as these
+      men could get across the country, they heard the news that King Olaf was
+      arrived in Svithjod; and as soon as full certainty of this was obtained,
+      the war message-token went round the land. The whole people were called
+      out to a levy, and a great army was collected. The lendermen who were from
+      Agder, Rogaland, and Hordaland, divided themselves, so that some went
+      towards the north, and some towards the east; for they thought they
+      required people on both sides. Erling's sons from Jadar went eastward,
+      with all the men who lived east of them, and over whom they were chiefs;
+      Aslak of Finey, and Erlend of Gerde, with the lendermen north of them,
+      went towards the north. All those now named had sworn an oath to King
+      Canute to deprive Olaf of life, if opportunity should offer.
+      207. OF HARALD SIGURDSON'S PROCEEDINGS.
+      Now when it was reported in Norway that King Olaf was come from the East
+      to Svithjod, his friends gathered together to give him aid. The most
+      distinguished man in this flock was Harald Sigurdson, a brother of King
+      Olaf, who then was fifteen years of age, very stout, and manly of growth
+      as if he were full-grown. Many other brave men were there also; and there
+      were in all 600 men when they proceeded from the uplands, and went
+      eastward with their force through Eid forest to Vermaland. From thence
+      they went eastward through the forests to Svithjod and made inquiry about
+      King Olaf's proceedings.
+      208. OF KING OLAF'S PROCEEDINGS IN SVITHJOD.
+      King Olaf was in Svithjod in spring (A.D. 1030), and had sent spies from
+      thence to Norway. All accounts from that quarter agreed that there was no
+      safety for him if he went there, and the people who came from the north
+      dissuaded him much from penetrating into the country. But he had firmly
+      resolved within himself, as before stated, to go into Norway; and he asked
+      King Onund what strength King Onund would give him to conquer his kingdom.
+      King Onund replied, that the Swedes were little inclined to make an
+      expedition against Norway. "We know," says he, "that the Northmen are
+      rough and warlike, and it is dangerous to carry hostility to their doors,
+      but I will not be slow in telling thee what aid I can give. I will give
+      thee 400 chosen men from my court-men, active and warlike, and well equipt
+      for battle; and moreover will give thee leave to go through my country,
+      and gather to thyself as many men as thou canst get to follow thee." King
+      Olaf accepted this offer, and got ready for his march. Queen Astrid, and
+      Ulfhild the king's daughter, remained behind in Svithjod.
+      209. KING OLAF ADVANCES TO JARNBERALAND.
+      Just as King Olaf began his journey the men came to him whom the Swedish
+      king had given, in all 400 men, and the king took the road the Swedes
+      showed him. He advanced upwards in the country to the forests, and came to
+      a district called Jarnberaland. Here the people joined him who had come
+      out of Norway to meet him, as before related; and he met here his brother
+      Harald, and many other of his relations, and it was a joyful meeting. They
+      made out together 1200 men.
+      210. OF DAG HRINGSON.
+      There was a man called Dag, who is said to have been a son of King Hring,
+      who fled the country from King Olaf. This Hring, it is said further, had
+      been a son of Dag, and grandson of Hring, Harald Harfager's son. Thus was
+      Dag King Olaf's relative. Both Hring the father, and Dag the son, had
+      settled themselves in Svithjod, and got land to rule over. In spring, when
+      Olaf came from the East to Svithjod, he sent a message to his relation
+      Dag, that he should join him in this expedition with all the force he
+      could collect; and if they gained the country of Norway again, Dag should
+      have no smaller part of the kingdom under him than his forefathers had
+      enjoyed. When this message came to Dag it suited his inclination well, for
+      he had a great desire to go to Norway and get the dominion his family had
+      ruled over. He was not slow, therefore, to reply, and promised to come.
+      Dag was a quick-speaking, quick-resolving man, mixing himself up in
+      everything; eager, but of little understanding. He collected a force of
+      almost 1200 men, with which he joined King Olaf.
+      211. OF KING OLAF'S JOURNEY.
+      King Olaf sent a message before him to all the inhabited places he passed
+      through, that the men who wished to get goods and money, and share of
+      booty, and the lands besides which now were in the hands of his enemies,
+      should come to him, and follow him. Thereafter King Olaf led his army
+      through forests, often over desert moors, and often over large lakes; and
+      they dragged, or carried the boats, from lake to lake. On the way a great
+      many followers joined the king, partly forest settlers, partly vagabonds.
+      The places at which he halted for the night are since called Olaf's
+      Booths. He proceeded without any break upon his journey until he came to
+      Jamtaland, from which he marched north over the keel or ridge of the land.
+      The men spread themselves over the hamlets, and proceeded, much scattered,
+      so long as no enemy was expected; but always, when so dispersed, the
+      Northmen accompanied the king. Dag proceeded with his men on another line
+      of march, and the Swedes on a third with their troop.
+      212. OF VAGABOND-MEN.
+      There were two men, the one called Gauka-Thorer, the other Afrafaste, who
+      were vagabonds and great robbers, and had a company of thirty men such as
+      themselves. These two men were larger and stronger than other men, and
+      they wanted neither courage nor impudence. These men heard speak of the
+      army that was crossing the country, and said among themselves it would be
+      a clever counsel to go to the king, follow him to his country, and go with
+      him into a regular battle, and try themselves in this work; for they had
+      never been in any battle in which people were regularly drawn up in line,
+      and they were curious to see the king's order of battle. This counsel was
+      approved of by their comrades, and accordingly they went to the road on
+      which King Olaf was to pass. When they came there they presented
+      themselves to the king, with their followers, fully armed. They saluted
+      him, and he asked what people they were. They told their names, and said
+      they were natives of the place; and told their errand, and that they
+      wished to go with the king. The king said, it appeared to him there was
+      good help in such folks. "And I have a great inclination," said he, "to
+      take such; but are ye Christian men?"
+      Gauka-Thorer replies, that he is neither Christian nor heathen. "I and my
+      comrades have no faith but on ourselves, our strength, and the luck of
+      victory; and with this faith we slip through sufficiently well."
+      The king replies, "A great pity it is that such brave slaughtering fellows
+      did not believe in Christ their Creator."
+      Thorer replies, "Is there any Christian man, king, in thy following, who
+      stands so high in the air as we two brothers?"
+      The king told them to let themselves be baptized, and to accept the true
+      faith. "Follow me then, and I will advance you to great dignities; but if
+      ye will not do so, return to your former vocation."
+      Afrafaste said he would not take on Christianity, and he turned away.
+      Then said Gauka-Thorer, "It is a great shame that the king drives us thus
+      away from his army, and I never before came where I was not received into
+      the company of other people, and I shall never return back on this
+      account." They joined accordingly the rear with other forest-men, and
+      followed the troops. Thereafter the king proceeded west up to the
+      keel-ridge of the country.
+      213. OF KING OLAF'S VISION.
+      Now when King Olaf, coming from the east, went over the keel-ridge and
+      descended on the west side of the mountain, where it declines towards the
+      sea, he could see from thence far over the country. Many people rode
+      before the king and many after, and he himself rode so that there was a
+      free space around him. He was silent, and nobody spoke to him, and thus he
+      rode a great part of the day without looking much about him. Then the
+      bishop rode up to him, asked him why he was so silent, and what he was
+      thinking of; for, in general, he was very cheerful, and very talkative on
+      a journey to his men, so that all who were near him were merry. The king
+      replied, full of thought, "Wonderful things have come into my mind a while
+      ago. As I just now looked over Norway, out to the west from the mountains,
+      it came into my mind how many happy days I have had in that land. It
+      appeared to me at first as if I saw over all the Throndhjem country, and
+      then over all Norway; and the longer this vision was before my eyes the
+      farther, methought, I saw, until I looked over the whole wide world, both
+      land and sea. Well I know the places at which I have been in former days;
+      some even which I have only heard speak of, and some I saw of which I had
+      never heard, both inhabited and uninhabited, in this wide world." The
+      bishop replied that this was a holy vision, and very remarkable.
+      214. OF THE MIRACLE ON THE CORN LAND.
+      When the king had come lower down on the mountain, there lay a farm before
+      him called Sula, on the highest part of Veradal district; and as they came
+      nearer to the house the corn-land appeared on both sides of the path. The
+      king told his people to proceed carefully, and not destroy the corn to the
+      bondes. The people observed this when the king was near; but the crowd
+      behind paid no attention to it, and the people ran over the corn, so that
+      it was trodden flat to the earth. There dwelt a bonde there called
+      Thorgeir Flek, who had two sons nearly grown up. Thorgeir received the
+      king and his people well, and offered all the assistance in his power. The
+      king was pleased with his offer, and asked Thorgeir what was the news of
+      the country, and if any forces were assembled against him. Thorgeir says
+      that a great army was drawn together in the Throndhjem country, and that
+      there were some lendermen both from the south of the country, and from
+      Halogaland in the north; "but I do not know," says he. "if they are
+      intended against you, or going elsewhere." Then he complained to the king
+      of the damage and waste done him by the people breaking and treading down
+      all his corn fields. The king said it was ill done to bring upon him any
+      loss. Then the king rode to where the corn had stood, and saw it was laid
+      flat on the earth; and he rode round the field, and said, "I expect,
+      bonde, that God will repair thy loss, so that the field, within a week,
+      will be better;" and it proved the best of the corn, as the king had said.
+      The king remained all night there, and in the morning he made himself
+      ready, and told Thorgeir the bonde to accompany him and Thorgear offered
+      his two sons also for the journey; and although the king said that he did
+      not want them with him, the lads would go. As they would not stay behind,
+      the king's court-men were about binding them; but the king seeing it said,
+      "Let them come with us; the lads will come safe back again." And it was
+      with the lads as the king foretold.
+      215. OF THE BAPTISM OF THE VAGABOND FOREST-MEN.
+      Thereafter the army advanced to Staf, and when the king reached Staf's
+      moor he halted. There he got the certain information that the bondes were
+      advancing with an army against him, and that he might soon expect to have
+      a battle with them. He mustered his force here, and, after reckoning them
+      up, found there were in the army 900 heathen men, and when he came to know
+      it he ordered them to allow themselves to be baptized, saying that he
+      would have no heathens with him in battle. "We must not," says he, "put
+      our confidence in numbers, but in God alone must we trust; for through his
+      power and favour we must be victorious, and I will not mix heathen people
+      with my own." When the heathens heard this, they held a council among
+      themselves, and at last 400 men agreed to be baptized; but 500 men refused
+      to adopt Christianity, and that body returned home to their land. Then the
+      brothers Gauka-Thorer and Afrafaste presented themselves to the king, and
+      offered again to follow him. The king asked if they had now taken baptism.
+      Gauka-Thorer replied that they had not. Then the king ordered them to
+      accept baptism and the true faith, or otherwise to go away. They stepped
+      aside to talk with each other on what resolution they should take.
+      Afrafaste said, "To give my opinion, I will not turn back, but go into the
+      battle, and take a part on the one side or the other; and I don't care
+      much in which army I am." Gauka-Thorer replies, "If I go into battle I
+      will give my help to the king, for he has most need of help. And if I must
+      believe in a God, why not in the white Christ as well as in any other? Now
+      it is my advice, therefore, that we let ourselves be baptized, since the
+      king insists so much upon it, and then go into the battle with him." They
+      all agreed to this, and went to the king, and said they would receive
+      baptism. Then they were baptized by a priest, and the baptism was
+      confirmed by the bishop. The king then took them into the troop of his
+      court-men, and said they should fight under his banner in the battle.
+      216. KING OLAF'S SPEECH.
+      King Olaf got certain intelligence now that it would be but a short time
+      until he had a battle with the bondes; and after he had mustered his men,
+      and reckoned up the force, he had more than 3000 men, which appears to be
+      a great army in one field. Then the king made the following speech to the
+      people: "We have a great army, and excellent troops; and now I will tell
+      you, my men, how I will have our force drawn up. I will let my banner go
+      forward in the middle of the army, and my-court-men, and pursuivants shall
+      follow it, together with the war forces that joined us from the Uplands,
+      and also those who may come to us here in the Throndhjem land. On the
+      right hand of my banner shall be Dag Hringson, with all the men he brought
+      to our aid; and he shall have the second banner. And on the left hand of
+      our line shall the men be whom the Swedish king gave us, together with all
+      the people who came to us in Sweden; and they shall have the third banner.
+      I will also have the people divide themselves into distinct flocks or
+      parcels, so that relations and acquaintances should be together; for thus
+      they defend each other best, and know each other. We will have all our men
+      distinguished by a mark, so as to be a field-token upon their helmets and
+      shields, by painting the holy cross thereupon with white colour. When we
+      come into battle we shall all have one countersign and field-cry, -'Forward,
+      forward, Christian men! cross men! king's men!' We must draw up our meal
+      in thinner ranks, because we have fewer people, and I do not wish to let
+      them surround us with their men. Now let the men divide themselves into
+      separate flocks, and then each flock into ranks; then let each man observe
+      well his proper place, and take notice what banner he is drawn up under.
+      And now we shall remain drawn up in array; and our men shall be fully
+      armed, night and day, until we know where the meeting shall be between us
+      and the bondes." When the king had finished speaking, the army arrayed,
+      and arranged itself according to the king's orders.
+      217. KING OLAF'S COUNSEL.
+      Thereafter the king had a meeting with the chiefs of the different
+      divisions, and then the men had returned whom the king had sent out into
+      the neighbouring districts to demand men from the bondes. They brought the
+      tidings from the inhabited places they had gone through, that all around
+      the country was stripped of all men able to carry arms, as all the people
+      had joined the bondes' army; and where they did find any they got but few
+      to follow them, for the most of them answered that they stayed at home
+      because they would not follow either party: they would not go out against
+      the king, nor yet against their own relations. Thus they had got but few
+      people. Now the king asked his men their counsel, and what they now should
+      do. Fin Arnason answered thus to the king's question: "I will say what
+      should be done, if I may advise. We should go with armed hand over all the
+      inhabited places, plunder all the goods, and burn all the habitations, and
+      leave not a hut standing, and thus punish the bondes for their treason
+      against their sovereign. I think many a man will then cast himself loose
+      from the bondes' army, when he sees smoke and flame at home on his farm,
+      and does not know how it is going with children, wives, or old men,
+      fathers, mothers, and other connections. I expect also," he added, "that
+      if we succeed in breaking the assembled host, their ranks will soon be
+      thinned; for so it is with the bondes, that the counsel which is the
+      newest is always the dearest to them all, and most followed." When Fin had
+      ended his speech it met with general applause; for many thought well of
+      such a good occasion to make booty, and all thought the bondes well
+      deserved to suffer damage; and they also thought it probable, what Fin
+      said, that many would in this way be brought to forsake the assembled army
+      of the bondes.
+      Now when the king heard the warm expressions of his people he told them to
+      listen to him, and said, "The bondes have well deserved that it should be
+      done to them as ye desire. They also know that I have formerly done so,
+      burning their habitations, and punishing them severely in many ways; but
+      then I proceeded against them with fire and sword because they rejected
+      the true faith, betook themselves to sacrifices, and would not obey my
+      commands. We had then God's honour to defend. But this treason against
+      their sovereign is a much less grievous crime, although it does not become
+      men who have any manhood in them to break the faith and vows they have
+      sworn to me. Now, however, it is more in my power to spare those who have
+      dealt ill with me, than those whom God hated. I will, therefore, that my
+      people proceed gently, and commit no ravage. First, I will proceed to meet
+      the bondes; if we can then come to a reconciliation, it is well; but if
+      they will fight with us, then there are two things before us; either we
+      fail in the battle, and then it will be well advised not to have to retire
+      encumbered with spoil and cattle; or we gain the victory, and then ye will
+      be the heirs of all who fight now against us; for some will fall, and
+      others will fly, but both will have forfeited their goods and properties,
+      and then it will be good to enter into full houses and well-stocked farms;
+      but what is burnt is of use to no man, and with pillage and force more is
+      wasted than what turns to use. Now we will spread out far through the
+      inhabited places, and take with us all the men we can find able to carry
+      arms. Then men will also capture cattle for slaughter, or whatever else of
+      provision that can serve for food; but not do any other ravage. But I will
+      see willingly that ye kill any spies of the bonde army ye may fall in
+      with. Dag and his people shall go by the north side down along the valley,
+      and I will go on along the country road, and so we shall meet in the
+      evening, and all have one night quarter."
+      218. OF KING OLAF'S SKALDS.
+      It is related that when King Olaf drew up his men in battle order, he made
+      a shield rampart with his troop that should defend him in battle, for
+      which he selected the strongest and boldest. Thereafter he called his
+      skalds, and ordered them to go in within the shield defence. "Ye shall."
+      says the king, "remain here, and see the circumstances which may take
+      place, and then ye will not have to follow the reports of others in what
+      ye afterwards tell or sing concerning it." There were Thormod
+      Kolbrunarskald, Gissur Gulbraskald, a foster-son of Hofgardaref, and
+      Thorfin Mun. Then said Thormod to Gissur, "Let us not stand so close
+      together, brother, that Sigvat the skald should not find room when he
+      comes. He must stand before the king, and the king will not have it
+      otherwise." The king heard this, and said, "Ye need not sneer at Sigvat,
+      because he is not here. Often has he followed me well, and now he is
+      praying for us, and that we greatly need." Thormod replies, "It may be,
+      sire, that ye now require prayers most; but it would be thin around the
+      banner-staff if all thy court-men were now on the way to Rome. True it was
+      what we spoke about, that no man who would speak with you could find room
+      for Sigvat."
+      Thereafter the skalds talked among themselves that it would be well to
+      compose a few songs of remembrance about the events which would soon be
+      taking place.
+      Then Gissur sang: -
+     "From me shall bende girl never hear
+     A thought of sorrow, care, or fear:
+     I wish my girl knew how gay
+     We arm us for our viking fray.
+     Many and brave they are, we know,
+     Who come against us there below;
+     But, life or death, we, one and all,
+     By Norway's king will stand or fall."
+      And Thorfin Mun made another song, viz.: -
+     "Dark is the cloud of men and shields,
+     Slow moving up through Verdal's fields:
+     These Verdal folks presume to bring
+     Their armed force against their king.
+     On!  let us feed the carrion crow, -
+     Give her a feast in every blow;
+     And, above all, let Throndhjem's hordes
+     Feel the sharp edge of true men's swords."
+      And Thorrood sang: -
+     "The whistling arrows pipe to battle,
+     Sword and shield their war-call rattle.
+     Up!  brave men, up!  the faint heart here
+     Finds courage when the danger's near.
+     Up!  brave men, up!  with Olaf on!
+     With heart and hand a field is won.
+     One viking cheer! -then, stead of words,
+     We'll speak with our death-dealing swords."
+      These songs were immediately got by heart by the army.
+      219. OF KING OLAF'S GIFTS FOR THE SOULS OF THOSE WHO SHOULD BE SLAIN.
+      Thereafter the king made himself ready, and marched down through the
+      valley. His whole forces took up their night-quarter in one place, and lay
+      down all night under their shields; but as soon as day broke the king
+      again put his army in order, and that being done they proceeded down
+      through the valley. Many bondes then came to the king, of whom the most
+      joined his army; and all, as one man, told the same tale, -that the
+      lendermen had collected an enormous army, with which they intended to give
+      battle to the king.
+      The king took many marks of silver, and delivered them into the hands of a
+      bonde, and said, "This money thou shalt conceal, and afterwards lay out,
+      some to churches, some to priests, some to alms-men, -as gifts for
+      the life and souls of those who fight against us, and may fall in battle."
+      The bonde replies, "Should you not rather give this money for the
+      soul-mulct of your own men?"
+      The king says, "This money shall be given for the souls of those who stand
+      against us in the ranks of the bondes' army, and fall by the weapons of
+      our own men. The men who follow us to battle, and fall therein, will all
+      be saved together with ourself."
+      220. OF THORMOD KOLBRUNARSKALD.
+      This night the king lay with his army around him on the field, as before
+      related, and lay long awake in prayer to God, and slept but little.
+      Towards morning a slumber fell on him, and when he awoke daylight was
+      shooting up. The king thought it too early to awaken the army, and asked
+      where Thormod the skald was. Thormod was at hand, and asked what was the
+      king's pleasure. "Sing us a song," said the king. Thormod raised himself
+      up, and sang so loud that the whole army could hear him. He began to sing
+      the old "Bjarkamal", of which these are the first verses: -
+     "The day is breaking, -
+     The house cock, shaking
+     His rustling wings,
+     While priest-bell rings,
+     Crows up the morn,
+     And touting horn
+     Wakes thralls to work and weep;
+     Ye sons of Adil, cast off sleep,
+     Wake up!  wake up!
+     Nor wassail cup,
+     Nor maiden's jeer,
+     Awaits you here.
+     Hrolf of the bow!
+     Har of the blow!
+     Up in your might!  the day is breaking;
+     'Tis Hild's game (1) that bides your waking."
+      Then the troops awoke, and when the song was ended the people thanked him
+      for it; and it pleased many, as it was suitable to the time and occasion,
+      and they called it the house-carle's whet. The king thanked him for the
+      pleasure, and took a gold ring that weighed half a mark and gave it him.
+      Thormod thanked the king for the gift, and said, "We have a good king; but
+      it is not easy to say how long the king's life may be. It is my prayer,
+      sire, that thou shouldst never part from me either in life or death." The
+      king replies, "We shall all go together so long as I rule, and as ye will
+      follow me."
+      Thormod says, "I hope, sire, that whether in safety or danger I may stand
+      near you as long as I can stand, whatever we may hear of Sigvat travelling
+      with his gold-hilted sword." Then Thormod made these lines: -
+     "To thee, my king, I'll still be true,
+     Until another skald I view,
+     Here in the field with golden sword,
+     As in thy hall, with flattering word.
+     Thy skald shall never be a craven,
+     Though he may feast the croaking raven,
+     The warrior's fate unmoved I view, -
+     To thee, my king, I'll still be true."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Hild's game is the battle, from the name of the
+war-goddess     Hild. -L.
+      221. KING OLAF COMES TO STIKLESTAD.
+      King Olaf led his army farther down through the valley, and Dag and his
+      men went another way, and the king did not halt until he came to
+      Stiklestad. There he saw the bonde army spread out all around; and there
+      were so great numbers that people were going on every footpath, and great
+      crowds were collected far and near. They also saw there a troop which came
+      down from Veradal, and had been out to spy. They came so close to the
+      king's people that they knew each other. It was Hrut of Viggia, with
+      thirty men. The king ordered his pursuivants to go out against Hrut, and
+      make an end of him, to which his men were instantly ready. The king said
+      to the Icelanders, "It is told me that in Iceland it is the custom that
+      the bondes give their house-servants a sheep to slaughter; now I give you
+      a ram to slaughter." (1) The Icelanders were easily invited to this, and
+      went out immediately with a few men against Hrut, and killed him and the
+      troop that followed him. When the king came to Stiklestad he made a halt,
+      and made the army stop, and told his people to alight from their horses
+      and get ready for battle; and the people did as the king ordered. Then he
+      placed his army in battle array, and raised his banner. Dag was not yet
+      arrived with his men, so that his wing of the battle array was wanting.
+      Then the king said the Upland men should go forward in their place, and
+      raise their banner there. "It appears to me advisable," says the king,
+      "that Harald my brother should not be in the battle, for he is still in
+      the years of childhood only." Harald replies, "Certainly I shall be in the
+      battle, for I am not so weak that I cannot handle the sword; and as to
+      that, I have a notion of tying the sword-handle to my hand. None is more
+      willing than I am to give the bondes a blow; so I shall go with my
+      comrades." It is said that Harald made these lines: -
+     "Our army's wing, where I shall stand,
+     I will hold good with heart and hand;
+     My mother's eye shall joy to see
+     A battered, blood-stained shield from me.
+     The brisk young skald should gaily go
+     Into the fray, give blow for blow,
+     Cheer on his men, gain inch by inch,
+     And from the spear-point never flinch."
+      Harald got his will, and was allowed to be in the battle.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Hrut means a young ram. -L.
+      222. OF THORGILS HALMASON.
+      A bonde, by name Thorgils Halmason, father to Grim the Good, dwelt in
+      Stiklestad farm. Thorgils offered the king his assistance, and was ready
+      to go into battle with him. The king thanked him for the offer. "I would
+      rather," says the king, "thou shouldst not be in the fight. Do us rather
+      the service to take care of the people who are wounded, and to bury those
+      who may fall, when the battle is over. Should it happen, bonde, that I
+      fall in this battle, bestow the care on my body that may be necessary, if
+      that be not forbidden thee." Thorgils promised the king what he desired.
+      223. OLAF'S SPEECH.
+      Now when King Olaf had drawn up his army in battle array he made a speech,
+      in which he told the people to raise their spirit, and go boldly forward,
+      if it came to a battle. "We have," says he, "many men, and good; and
+      although the bondes may have a somewhat larger force than we, it is fate
+      that rules over victory. This I will make known to you solemnly, that I
+      shall not fly from this battle, but shall either be victorious over the
+      bondes, or fall in the fight. I will pray to God that the lot of the two
+      may befall me which will be most to my advantage. With this we may
+      encourage ourselves, that we have a more just cause than the bondes; and
+      likewise that God must either protect us and our cause in this battle, or
+      give us a far higher recompense for what we may lose here in the world
+      than what we ourselves could ask. Should it be my lot to have anything to
+      say after the battle, then shall I reward each of you according to his
+      service, and to the bravery he displays in the battle; and if we gain the
+      victory, there must be land and movables enough to divide among you, and
+      which are now in the hands of your enemies. Let us at the first make the
+      hardest onset, for then the consequences are soon seen. There being a
+      great difference in the numbers, we have to expect victory from a sharp
+      assault only; and, on the other hand, it will be heavy work for us to
+      fight until we are tired, and unable to fight longer; for we have fewer
+      people to relieve with than they, who can come forward at one time and
+      retreat and rest at another. But if we advance so hard at the first attack
+      that those who are foremost in their ranks must turn round, then the one
+      will fall over the other, and their destruction will be the greater the
+      greater numbers there are together." When the king had ended his speech it
+      was received with loud applause, and the one encouraged the other.
+      224. OF THORD FOLASON.
+      Thord Folason carried King Olaf's banner. So says Sigvat the skald, in the
+      death-song which he composed about King Olaf, and put together according
+      to resurrection saga: -
+     "Thord. I have heard, by Olaf's side,
+     Where raged the battle's wildest tide,
+     Moved on, and, as by one accord
+     Moved with them every heart and sword.
+     The banner of the king on high,
+     Floating all splendid in the sky
+     From golden shaft, aloft he bore, -
+     The Norsemen's rallying-point of yore."
+      225. OF KING OLAF'S ARMOUR.
+      King Olaf was armed thus: -He had a gold-mounted helmet on his head;
+      and had in one hand a white shield, on which the holy cross was inlaid in
+      gold. In his other hand he had a lance, which to the present day stands
+      beside the altar in Christ Church. In his belt he had a sword, which was
+      called Hneiter, which was remarkably sharp, and of which the handle was
+      worked with gold. He had also a strong coat of ring-mail. Sigvat the
+      skald, speaks of this: -
+     "A greater victory to gain,
+     Olaf the Stout strode o'er the plain
+     In strong chain armour, aid to bring
+     To his brave men on either wing.
+     High rose the fight and battle-heat, -
+     the clear blood ran beneath the feet
+     Of Swedes, who from the East came there,
+     In Olaf's gain or loss to share."
+      226. KING OLAF'S DREAM.
+      Now when King Olaf had drawn up his men the army of the bondes had not yet
+      come near upon any quarter, so the king said the people should sit down
+      and rest themselves. He sat down himself, and the people sat around him in
+      a widespread crowd. He leaned down, and laid his head upon Fin Arnason's
+      knee. There a slumber came upon him, and he slept a little while; but at
+      the same time the bondes' army was seen advancing with raised banners, and
+      the multitude of these was very great.
+      Then Fin awakened the king, and said that the bonde-army advanced against
+      them.
+      The king awoke, and said, "Why did you waken me, Fin, and did not allow me
+      to enjoy my dream?"
+      Fin: "Thou must not be dreaming; but rather thou shouldst be awake, and
+      preparing thyself against the host which is coming down upon us; or, dost
+      thou not see that the whole bonde-crowd is coming?"
+      The king replies, "They are not yet so near to us, and it would have been
+      better to have let me sleep."
+      Then said Fin, "What was the dream, sire, of which the loss appears to
+      thee so great that thou wouldst rather have been left to waken of
+      thyself?"
+      Now the king told his dream, -that he seemed to see a high ladder,
+      upon which he went so high in the air that heaven was open: for so high
+      reached the ladder. "And when you awoke me, I was come to the highest step
+      towards heaven."
+      Fin replies, "This dream does not appear to me so good as it does to thee.
+      I think it means that thou art fey (1); unless it be the mere want of
+      sleep that has worked upon thee."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Fey means doomed to die.
+      227. OF ARNLJOT GELLINE'S BAPTISM.
+      When King Olaf was arrived at Stiklestad, it happened, among other
+      circumstances, that a man came to him; and although it was nowise
+      wonderful that there came many men from the districts, yet this must be
+      regarded as unusual, that this man did not appear like the other men who
+      came to him. He was so tall that none stood higher than up to his
+      shoulders: very handsome he was in countenance, and had beautiful fair
+      hair. He was well armed; had a fine helmet, and ring armour; a red shield;
+      a superb sword in his belt; and in his hand a gold-mounted spear, the
+      shaft of it so thick that it was a handful to grasp. The man went before
+      the king, saluted him, and asked if the king would accept his services.
+      The king asked his name and family, also what countryman he was.
+      He replies, "My family is in Jamtaland and Helsingjaland, and my name is
+      Arnljot Gelline; but this I must not forget to tell you, that I came to
+      the assistance of those men you sent to Jamtaland to collect scat, and I
+      gave into their hands a silver dish, which I sent you as a token that I
+      would be your friend."
+      Then the king asked Arnljot if he was a Christian or not. He replied, "My
+      faith has been this, to rely upon my power and strength, and which faith
+      hath hitherto given me satisfaction; but now I intend rather to put my
+      faith, sire, in thee."
+      The king replies, "If thou wilt put faith in me thou must also put faith
+      in what I will teach thee. Thou must believe that Jesus Christ has made
+      heaven and earth, and all mankind, and to him shall all those who are good
+      and rightly believing go after death."
+      Arnljot answers, "I have indeed heard of the white Christ, but neither
+      know what he proposes, nor what he rules over; but now I will believe all
+      that thou sayest to me, and lay down my lot in your hands."
+      Thereupon Arnljot was baptized. The king taught him so much of the holy
+      faith as appeared to him needful, and placed him in the front rank of the
+      order of battle, in advance of his banner, where also Gauka-Thorer and
+      Afrafaste, with their men, were.
+      228. CONCERNING THE ARMY COLLECTED IN NORWAY.
+      Now shall we relate what we have left behind in our tale, -that the
+      lendermen and bondes had collected a vast host as soon as it was reported
+      that King Olaf was come from Russia, and had arrived in Svithjod; but when
+      they heard that he had come to Jamtaland, and intended to proceed
+      westwards over the keel-ridge to Veradal, they brought their forces into
+      the Throndhjem country, where they gathered together the whole people,
+      free and unfree, and proceeded towards Veradal with so great a body of men
+      that there was nobody in Norway at that time who had seen so large a force
+      assembled. But the force, as it usually happens in so great a multitude,
+      consisted of many different sorts of people. There were many lendermen,
+      and a great many powerful bondes; but the great mass consisted of
+      labourers and cottars. The chief strength of this army lay in the
+      Throndhjem land, and it was the most warm in enmity and opposition to the
+      king.
+      229. OF BISHOP SIGURD.
+      When King Canute had, as before related, laid all Norway under his power,
+      he set Earl Hakon to manage it, and gave the earl a court-bishop, by name
+      Sigurd, who was of Danish descent, and had been long with King Canute.
+      This bishop was of a very hot temper, and particularly obstinate, and
+      haughty in his speech; but supported King Canute all he could in
+      conversation, and was a great enemy of King Olaf. He was now also in the
+      bondes' army, spoke often before the people, and urged them much to
+      insurrection against King Olaf.
+      230. BISHOP SIGURD'S SPEECH.
+      At a House-thing, at which a great many people were assembled, the bishop
+      desired to be heard, and made the following speech: "Here are now
+      assembled a great many men, so that probably there will never be
+      opportunity in this poor country of seeing so great a native army; but it
+      would be desirable if this strength and multitude could be a protection;
+      for it will all be needed, if this Olaf does not give over bringing war
+      and strife upon you. From his very earliest youth he has been accustomed
+      to plunder and kill: for which purposes he drove widely around through all
+      countries, until he turned at last against this, where he began to show
+      hostilities against the men who were the best and most powerful; and even
+      against King Canute, whom all are bound to serve according to their
+      ability, and in whose scat-lands he set himself down. He did the same to
+      Olaf the Swedish king. He drove the earls Svein and Hakon away from their
+      heritages; and was even most tyrannical towards his own connections, as he
+      drove all the kings out of the Uplands: although, indeed, it was but just
+      reward for having been false to their oaths of fealty to King Canute, and
+      having followed this King Olaf in all the folly he could invent; so their
+      friendship ended according to their deserts, by this king mutilating some
+      of them, taking their kingdoms himself, and ruining every man in the
+      country who had an honourable name. Ye know yourselves how he has treated
+      the lendermen, of whom many of the worthlest have been murdered, and many
+      obliged to fly from their country; and how he has roamed far and wide
+      through the land with robber-bands, burning and plundering houses, and
+      killing people. Who is the man among us here of any consideration who has
+      not some great injury from him to avenge? Now he has come hither with a
+      foreign troop, consisting mostly of forest-men, vagabonds, and such
+      marauders. Do ye think he will now be more merciful to you, when he is
+      roaming about with such a bad crew, after committing devastations which
+      all who followed him dissuaded him from? Therefore it is now my advice,
+      that ye remember King Canute's words when he told you, if King Olaf
+      attempted to return to the country ye should defend the liberty King
+      Canute had promised you, and should oppose and drive away such a vile
+      pack. Now the only thing to be done is to advance against them, and cast
+      forth these malefactors to the wolves and eagles, leaving their corpses on
+      the spot they cover, unless ye drag them aside to out-of-the-way corners
+      in the woods or rocks. No man would be so imprudent as to remove them to
+      churches, for they are all robbers and evil-doers." When he had ended his
+      speech it was hailed with the loudest applause, and all unanimously agreed
+      to act according to his recommendation.
+      231. OF THE LENDERMEN.
+      The lendermen who had come together appointed meetings with each other,
+      and consulted together how they should draw up their troops, and who
+      should be their leader. Kalf Arnason said that Harek of Thjotta was best
+      fitted to be the chief of this army, for he was descended from Harald
+      Harfager's race. "The king also is particularly enraged against him on
+      account of the murder of Grankel, and therefore he would be exposed to the
+      severest fate if Olaf recovered the kingdom; and Harek withal is a man
+      experienced in battles, and a man who does much for honour alone."
+      Harek replies, that the men are best suited for this who are in the flower
+      of their age. "I am now," says he, "an old and decaying man, not able to
+      do much in battle: besides, there is near relationship between me and King
+      Olaf; and although he seems not to put great value upon that tie, it would
+      not beseem me to go as leader of the hostilities against him, before any
+      other in this meeting. On the other hand, thou, Thorer, art well suited to
+      be our chief in this battle against King Olaf; and thou hast distinct
+      grounds for being so, both because thou hast to avenge the death of thy
+      relation, and also hast been driven by him as an outlaw from thy property.
+      Thou hast also promised King Canute, as well as thy connections, to avenge
+      the murder of thy relative Asbjorn; and dost thou suppose there ever will
+      be a better opportunity than this of taking vengeance on Olaf for all
+      these insults and injuries?"
+      Thorer replies thus to his speech: "I do not confide in myself so much as
+      to raise the banner against King Olaf, or, as chief, to lead on this army;
+      for the people of Throndhjem have the greatest part in this armament, and
+      I know well their haughty spirit, and that they would not obey me, or any
+      other Halogaland man, although I need not be reminded of my injuries to be
+      roused to vengeance on King Olaf. I remember well my heavy loss when King
+      Olaf slew four men, all distinguished both by birth and personal
+      qualities; namely, my brother's son Asbjorn, my sister's sons Thorer and
+      Grjotgard, and their father Olver; and it is my duty to take vengeance for
+      each man of them. I will not conceal that I have selected eleven of my
+      house-servants for that purpose, and of those who are the most daring; and
+      I do not think we shall be behind others in exchanging blows with King
+      Olaf, should opportunity be given."
+      232. KALF ARNASON'S SPEECH.
+      Then Kalf Arnason desired to speak. "It is highly necessary," says he,
+      "that this business we have on hand do not turn out a mockery and
+      child-work, now that an army is collected. Something else is needful, if
+      we are to stand battle with King Olaf, than that each should shove the
+      danger from himself; for we must recollect that although King Olaf has not
+      many people compared to this army of ours, the leader of them is intrepid,
+      and the whole body of them will be true to him, and obedient in the
+      battle. But if we who should be the leaders of this army show any fear,
+      and will not encourage the army and go at the head of it, it must happen
+      that with the great body of our people the spirit will leave their hearts,
+      and the next thing will be that each will seek his own safety. Although we
+      have now a great force assembled, we shall find our destruction certain,
+      when we meet King Olaf and his troops, if we, the chiefs of the people,
+      are not confident in our cause, and have not the whole army confidently
+      and bravely going along with us. If it cannot be so, we had better not
+      risk a battle; and then it is easy to see that nothing would be left us
+      but to shelter ourselves under King Olaf's mercy, however hard it might
+      be, as then we would be less guilty than we now may appear to him to be.
+      Yet I know there are men in his ranks who would secure my life and peace
+      if I would seek it. Will ye now adopt my proposal -then shalt thou,
+      friend Thorer, and thou, Harek, go under the banner which we will all of
+      us raise up, and then follow. Let us all be speedy and determined in the
+      resolution we have taken, and put ourselves so at the head of the bondes'
+      army that they see no distrust in us; for then will the common man advance
+      with spirit when we go merrily to work in placing the army in
+      battle-order, and in encouraging the people to the strife."
+      When Kalf had ended they all concurred in what he proposed, and all would
+      do what Kalf thought of advantage. All desired Kalf to be the leader of
+      the army, and to give each what place in it he chose.
+      233. HOW THE LENDERMEN SET UP THEIR BANNERS.
+      Kalf Arnason then raised his banner, and drew up his house-servants along
+      with Harek of Thjotta and his men. Thorer Hund, with his troop, was at the
+      head of the order of battle in front of the banner; and on both sides of
+      Thorer was a chosen body of bondes, all of them the most active and best
+      armed in the forces. This part of the array was long and thick, and in it
+      were drawn up the Throndhjem people and the Halogalanders. On the right
+      wing was another array; and on the left of the main array were drawn up
+      the men from Rogaland, Hordaland, the Fjord districts, and Scgn, and they
+      had the third banner.
+      234. OF THORSTEIN KNARRARSMID.
+      There was a man called Thorstein Knarrarsmid, who was a merchant and
+      master ship-carpenter, stout and strong, very passionate, and a great
+      manslayer. He had been in enmity against King Olaf, who had taken from him
+      a new and large merchant-vessel he had built, on account of some
+      manslaughter-mulct, incurred in the course of his misdeeds, which he owed
+      to the king. Thorstein, who was with the bondes' army, went forward in
+      front of the line in which Thorer Hund stood, and said, "Here I will be,
+      Thorer, in your ranks; for I think, if I and King Olaf meet, to be the
+      first to strive a weapon at him, if I can get so near, to repay him for
+      the robbery of the ship he took from me, which was the best that ever went
+      on merchant voyage." Thorer and his men received Thorstein, and he went
+      into their ranks.
+      235. OF THE PREPARATIONS OF THE BONDES.
+      When the bondes' men and array were drawn up the lendermen addressed the
+      men, and ordered them to take notice of the place to which each man
+      belonged, under which banner each should be, who there were in front of
+      the banner, who were his side-men, and that they should be brisk and quick
+      in taking up their places in the array; for the army had still to go a
+      long way, and the array might be broken in the course of march. Then they
+      encouraged the people; and Kalf invited all the men who had any injury to
+      avenge on King Olaf to place themselves under the banner which was
+      advancing against King Olaf's own banner. They should remember the
+      distress he had brought upon them; and, he said, never was there a better
+      opportunity to avenge their grievances, and to free themselves from the
+      yoke and slavery he had imposed on them. "Let him," says he, "be held a
+      useless coward who does not fight this day boldly; and they are not
+      innocents who are opposed to you, but people who will not spare you if ye
+      spare them."
+      Kalf's speech was received with loud applause, and shouts of encouragement
+      were heard through the whole army.
+      236. OF THE KING'S AND THE BONDES' ARMIES.
+      Thereafter the bondes' army advanced to Stiklestad, where King Olaf was
+      already with his people. Kalf and Harek went in front, at the head of the
+      army under their banners. But the battle did not begin immediately on
+      their meeting; for the bondes delayed the assault, because all their men
+      were not come upon the plain, and they waited for those who came after
+      them. Thorer Hund had come up with his troop the last, for he had to take
+      care that the men did not go off behind when the battlecry was raised, or
+      the armies were closing with each other; and therefore Kalf and Harek
+      waited for Thorer. For the encouragement of their men in the battle the
+      bondes had the field-cry -"Forward, forward, bondemen!" King Olaf
+      also made no attack, for he waited for Dag and the people who followed
+      him. At last the king saw Dag and his men approaching. It is said that the
+      army of the bondes was not less on this day than a hundred times a hundred
+      men. Sigvat the skald speaks thus of the numbers: -
+     "I grieve to think the king had brought
+     Too small a force for what he sought:
+     He held his gold too fast to bring
+     The numbers that could make him king.
+     The foemen, more than two to one,
+     The victory by numbers won;
+     And this alone, as I've heard say,
+     Against King Olaf turned the day."
+      237. MEETING OF THE KING AND THE BONDES.
+      As the armies on both sides stood so near that people knew each other, the
+      king said, "Why art thou here, Kalf, for we parted good friends south in
+      More? It beseems thee ill to fight against us, or to throw a spear into
+      our army; for here are four of thy brothers."
+      Kalf replied, "Many things come to pass differently from what may appear
+      seemly. You parted from us so that it was necessary to seek peace with
+      those who were behind in the country. Now each must remain where he
+      stands; but if I might advise, we should be reconciled."
+      Then Fin, his brother, answered, "This is to be observed of Kalf, that
+      when he speaks fairly he has it in his mind to do ill."
+      The king answered, "It may be, Kalf, that thou art inclined to
+      reconciliation; but, methinks, the bondes do not appear so peaceful."
+      Then Thorgeir of Kviststad said, "You shall now have such peace as many
+      formerly have received at your hands, and which you shall now pay for."
+      The king replies, "Thou hast no occasion to hasten so much to meet us; for
+      fate has not decreed to thee to-day a victory over me, who raised thee to
+      power and dignity from a mean station."
+      238. BEGINNING OF THE BATTLE OF STIKLESTAD.
+      Now came Thorer Hund, went forward in front of the banner with his troop,
+      and called out, "Forward, forward, bondemen!" Thereupon the bondemen
+      raised the war-cry, and shot their arrows and spears. The king's men
+      raised also a war-shout; and that done, encouraged each other to advance,
+      crying out, "Forward, forward, Christ-men! cross-men! king's men!" When
+      the bondes who stood outermost on the wings heard it, they repeated the
+      same cry; but when the other bondes heard them they thought these were
+      king's men, turned their arms against them, and they fought together, and
+      many were slain before they knew each other. The weather was beautiful,
+      and the sun shone clear; but when the battle began the heaven and the sun
+      became red, and before the battle ended it became as dark as at night.
+      King Olaf had drawn up his army upon a rising ground, and it rushed down
+      from thence upon the bonde-army with such a fierce assault, that the
+      bondes' array went before it; so that the breast of the king's array came
+      to stand upon the ground on which the rear of the bondes' array had stood,
+      and many of the bondes' army were on the way to fly, but the lendermen and
+      their house-men stood fast, and the battle became very severe. So says
+      Sigvat: -
+     "Thundered the ground beneath their tread,
+     As, iron-clad, thick-tramping, sped
+     The men-at-arms, in row and rank,
+     Past Stiklestad's sweet grassy bank.
+     The clank of steel, the bowstrings' twang,
+     The sounds of battle, loudly rang;
+     And bowman hurried on advancing,
+     Their bright helms in the sunshine glancing."
+      The lendermen urged their men, and forced them to advance. Sigvat speaks
+      of this: -
+     "Midst in their line their banner flies,
+     Thither the stoutest bonde hies:
+     But many a bonde thinks of home,
+     And many wish they ne'er had come."
+      Then the bonde-army pushed on from all quarters. They who stood in front
+      hewed down with their swords; they who stood next thrust with their
+      spears; and they who stood hindmost shot arrows, cast spears, or threw
+      stones, hand-axes, or sharp stakes. Soon there was a great fall of men in
+      the battle. Many were down on both sides. In the first onset fell Arnljot
+      Gelline, Gauka-Thorer, and Afrafaste, with all their men, after each had
+      killed a man or two, and some indeed more. Now the ranks in front of the
+      king's banner began to be thinned, and the king ordered Thord to carry the
+      banner forward, and the king himself followed it with the troop he had
+      chosen to stand nearest to him in battle; and these were the best armed
+      men in the field, and the most expert in the use of their weapons. Sigvat
+      the skald tells of this: -
+     "Loud was the battle-storm there,
+     Where the king's banner flamed in air.
+     The king beneath his banner stands,
+     And there the battle he commands."
+      Olaf came forth from behind the shield-bulwark, and put himself at the
+      head of the army; and when the bondes looked him in the face they were
+      frightened, and let their hands drop. So says Sigvat: -
+     "I think I saw them shrink with fear
+     Who would not shrink from foeman's spear,
+     When Olaf's lion-eye was cast
+     On them, and called up all the past.
+     Clear as the serpent's eye -his look
+     No Throndhjem man could stand, but shook
+     Beneath its glance, and skulked away,
+     Knowing his king, and cursed the day."
+      The combat became fierce, and the king went forward in the fray. So says
+      Sigvat: -
+     "When on they came in fierce array,
+     And round the king arose the fray,
+     With shield on arm brave Olaf stood,
+     Dyeing his sword in their best blood.
+     For vengeance on his Throndhjem foes,
+     On their best men he dealt his blows;
+     He who knew well death's iron play,
+     To his deep vengeance gave full sway."
+      239. THORGEIR OF KVISTSTAD'S FALL.
+      King Olaf fought most desperately. He struck the lenderman before
+      mentioned (Thorgeir of Kviststad) across the face, cut off the nose-piece
+      of his helmet, and clove his head down below the eyes so that they almost
+      fell out. When he fell the king said, "Was it not true, Thorgeir, what I
+      told thee, that thou shouldst not be victor in our meeting?" At the same
+      instant Thord stuck the banner-pole so fast in the earth that it remained
+      standing. Thord had got his death-wound, and fell beneath the banner.
+      There also fell Thorfin Mun, and also Gissur Gullbrarskald, who was
+      attacked by two men, of whom he killed one, but only wounded the other
+      before he fell. So says Hofgardaref: -
+     "Bold in the Iron-storm was he,
+     Firm and stout as forest tree,
+     The hero who, 'gainst two at once,
+     Made Odin's fire from sword-edge glance;
+     Dealing a death-blow to the one,
+     Known as a brave and generous man,
+     Wounding the other, ere he fell, -
+     His bloody sword his deeds showed well."
+      It happened then, as before related, that the sun, although the air was
+      clear, withdrew from the sight, and it became dark. Of this Sigvat the
+      skald speaks: -
+     "No common wonder in the sky
+     Fell out that day -the sun on high,
+     And not a cloud to see around,
+     Shone not, nor warmed Norway's ground.
+     The day on which fell out this fight
+     Was marked by dismal dusky light,
+     This from the East I heard -the end
+     Of our great king it did portend."
+      At the same time Dag Hringson came up with his people, and began to put
+      his men in array, and to set up his banner; but on account of the darkness
+      the onset could not go on so briskly, for they could not see exactly whom
+      they had before them. They turned, however, to that quarter where the men
+      of Hordaland and Rogaland stood. Many of these circumstances took place at
+      the same time, and some happened a little earlier, and some a little
+      later.
+      240. KING OLAF'S FALL.
+      On the one side of Kalf Arnason stood his two relations, Olaf and Kalf,
+      with many other brave and stout men. Kalf was a son of Arnfin Arnmodson,
+      and a brother's son of Arne Arnmodson. On the other side of Kalf Arnason
+      stood Thorer Hund. King Olaf hewed at Thorer Hund, and struck him across
+      the shoulders; but the sword would not cut, and it was as if dust flew
+      from his reindeer-skin coat. So says Sigvat: -
+     "The king himself now proved the power
+     Of Fin-folk's craft in magic hour,
+     With magic song; for stroke of steel
+     Thor's reindeer coat would never feel,
+     Bewitched by them it turned the stroke
+     Of the king's sword, -a dust-like smoke
+     Rose from Thor's shoulders from the blow
+     Which the king though would end his foe."
+      Thorer struck at the king, and they exchanged some blows; but the king's
+      sword would not cut where it met the reindeer skin, although Thorer was
+      wounded in the hands. Sigvat sang thus of it: -
+     "Some say that Thorer's not right bold;
+     Why never yet have I been told
+     Of one who did a bolder thing
+     Than to change blows with his true king.
+     Against his king his sword to wield,
+     Leaping across the shield on shield
+     Which fenced the king round in the fight,
+     Shows the dog's (1) courage -brave, not bright."
+      The king said to Bjorn the marshal, "Do thou kill the dog on whom steel
+      will not bite." Bjorn turned round the axe in his hands, and gave Thorer a
+      blow with the hammer of it on the shoulder so hard that he tottered. The
+      king at the same moment turned against Kalf and his relations, and gave
+      Olaf his death-wound. Thorer Hund struck his spear right through the body
+      of Marshal Bjorn, and killed him outright; and Thorer said, "It is thus we
+      hunt the bear." (2) Thorstein Knarrarsmid struck at King Olaf with his
+      axe, and the blow hit his left leg above the knee. Fin Arnason instantly
+      killed Thorstein. The king after the wound staggered towards a stone,
+      threw down his sword, and prayed God to help him. Then Thorer Hund struck
+      at him with his spear, and the stroke went in under his mail-coat and into
+      his belly. Then Kalf struck at him on the left side of the neck. But all
+      are not agreed upon Kalf having been the man who gave him the wound in the
+      neck. These three wounds were King Olaf's death; and after the king's
+      death the greater part of the forces which had advanced with him fell with
+      the king. Bjarne Gullbrarskald sang these verses about Kalf Arnason: -
+     "Warrior!  who Olaf dared withstand,
+     Who against Olaf held the land,
+     Thou hast withstood the bravest, best,
+     Who e'er has gone to his long rest.
+     At Stiklestad thou wast the head;
+     With flying banners onwards led
+     Thy bonde troops, and still fought on,
+     Until he fell -the much-mourned one."
+      Sigvat also made these verses on Bjorn: -
+     "The marshal Bjorn, too, I find,
+     A great example leaves behind,
+     How steady courage should stand proof,
+     Though other servants stand aloof.
+     To Russia first his steps he bent,
+     To serve his master still intent;
+     And now besides his king he fell, -
+     A noble death for skalds to tell."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Thorer's name was Hund -the dog; and a play upon Thorer
+     Hund's name was intended by the skald. -L.
+    (2) Bjorn, the marshal's name, signifies a bear. -L.
+      241. BEGINNING OF DAG HRINGSON'S ATTACK.
+      Dag Hringson still kept up the battle, and made in the beginning so fierce
+      an assault that the bondes gave way, and some betook themselves to flight.
+      There a great number of the bondes fell, and these lendermen, Erlend of
+      Gerde and Aslak of Finey; and the banner also which they had stood under
+      was cut down. This onset was particularly hot, and was called Dag's storm.
+      But now Kalf Arnason, Harek of Thjotta, and Thorer Hund turned against
+      Dag, with the array which had followed them, and then Dag was overwhelmed
+      with numbers; so he betook himself to flight with the men still left him.
+      There was a valley through which the main body of the fugitives fled, and
+      men lay scattered in heaps on both sides; and many were severely wounded,
+      and many so fatigued that they were fit for nothing. The bondes pursued
+      only a short way; for their leaders soon returned back to the field of
+      battle, where they had their friends and relations to look after.
+      242. KING OLAF'S MIRACLE SHOWN TO THORER HUND.
+      Thorer Hund went to where King Olaf's body lay, took care of it, laid it
+      straight out on the ground, and spread a cloak over it. He told since that
+      when he wiped the blood from the face it was very beautiful; and there was
+      red in the cheeks, as if he only slept, and even much clearer than when he
+      was in life. The king's blood came on Thorer's hand, and ran up between
+      his fingers to where he had been wounded, and the wound grew up so
+      speedily that it did not require to be bound up. This circumstance was
+      testified by Thorer himself when King Olaf's holiness came to be generally
+      known among the people; and Thorer Hund was among the first of the king's
+      powerful opponents who endeavoured to spread abroad the king's sanctity.
+      243. OF KALF ARNASON'S BROTHERS.
+      Kalf Arnason searched for his brothers who had fallen, and found Thorberg
+      and Fin. It is related that Fin threw his dagger at him, and wanted to
+      kill him, giving him hard words, and calling him a faithless villain, and
+      a traitor to his king. Kalf did not regard it, but ordered Fin and
+      Thorberg to be carried away from the field. When their wounds were
+      examined they were found not to be deadly, and they had fallen from
+      fatigue, and under the weight of their weapons. Thereafter Kalf tried to
+      bring his brothers down to a ship, and went himself with them. As soon as
+      he was gone the whole bonde-army, having their homes in the neighbourhood,
+      went off also, excepting those who had friends or relations to look after,
+      or the bodies of the slain to take care of. The wounded were taken home to
+      the farms, so that every house was full of them; and tents were erected
+      over some. But wonderful as was the number collected in the bonde-army, no
+      less wonderful was the haste with which this vast body was dispersed when
+      it was once free; and the cause of this was, that the most of the people
+      gathered together from the country places were longing for their homes.
+      244. OF THE BONDES OF VERADAL.
+      The bondes who had their homes in Veradal went to the chiefs Harek and
+      Thorer, and complained of their distress, saying, "The fugitives who have
+      escaped from the battle have proceeded up over the valley of Veradal, and
+      are destroying our habitations, and there is no safety for us to travel
+      home so long as they are in the valley. Go after them with war-force, and
+      let no mother's son of them escape with life; for that is what they
+      intended for us if they had got the upper hand in the battle, and the same
+      they would do now if they met us hereafter, and had better luck than we.
+      It may also be that they will linger in the valley if they have nothing to
+      be frightened for, and then they would not proceed very gently in the
+      inhabited country." The bondes made many words about this, urging the
+      chiefs to advance directly, and kill those who had escaped. Now when the
+      chiefs talked over this matter among themselves, they thought there was
+      much truth in what the bondes said. They resolved, therefore, that Thorer
+      Hund should undertake this expedition through Veradal, with 600 men of his
+      own troops. Then, towards evening, he set out with his men; and Thorer
+      continued his march without halt until he came in the night to Sula, where
+      he heard the news that Dag Hringson had come there in the evening, with
+      many other flocks of the king's men, and had halted there until they took
+      supper, but were afterwards gone up to the mountains. Then Thorer said he
+      did not care to pursue them up through the mountains, and he returned down
+      the valley again, and they did not kill many of them this time. The bondes
+      then returned to their homes, and the following day Thorer, with his
+      people, went to their ships. The part of the king's men who were still on
+      their legs concealed themselves in the forests, and some got help from the
+      people.
+      245. OF THE KING'S BROTHER, HARALD SIGURDSON.
+      Harald Sigurdson was severely wounded; but Ragnvald Brusason brought him
+      to a bonde's the night after the battle, and the bonde took in Harald, and
+      healed his wound in secret, and afterwards gave him his son to attend him.
+      They went secretly over the mountains, and through the waste forests, and
+      came out in Jamtaland. Harald Sigurdson was fifteen years old when King
+      Olaf fell. In Jamtaland Harald found Ragnvald Brusason; and they went both
+      east to King Jarisleif in Russia, as is related in the Saga of Harald
+      Sigurdson.
+      246. OF THORMOD KOLBRUNARSKALD.
+      Thormod Kolbrunarskald was under King Olaf's banner in the battle; but
+      when the king had fallen, the battle was raging so that of the king's men
+      the one fell by the side of the other, and the most of those who stood on
+      their legs were wounded. Thormod was also severely wounded, and retired,
+      as all the others did, back from where there was most danger of life, and
+      some even fled. Now when the onset began which is called Dag's storm, all
+      of the king's men who were able to combat went there; but Thormod did not
+      come into that combat, being unable to fight, both from his wound and from
+      weariness, but he stood by the side of his comrade in the ranks, although
+      he could do nothing. There he was struck by an arrow in the left side; but
+      he broke off the shaft of the arrow, went out of the battle, and up
+      towards the houses, where he came to a barn which was a large building.
+      Thormod had his drawn sword in his hand; and as he went in a man met him,
+      coming out, and said, "It is very bad there with howling and screaming;
+      and a great shame it is that brisk young fellows cannot bear their wounds:
+      it may be that the king's men have done bravely to-day, but they certainly
+      bear their wounds very ill."
+      Thormod asks. "What is thy name?"
+      He called himself Kimbe.
+      Thormod: "Wast thou in the battle, too?"
+      "I was with the bondes, which was the best side," says he.
+      "And art thou wounded any way?" says Thormod.
+      "A little," said Kimbe. "And hast thou been in the battle too?"
+      Thormod replied, "I was with them who had the best."
+      "Art thou wounded?" says Kimbe.
+      "Not much to signify," replies Thormod.
+      As Kimbe saw that Thormod had a gold ring on his arm, he said, "Thou art
+      certainly a king's man. Give me thy gold ring, and I will hide thee. The
+      bondes will kill thee if thou fallest in their way."
+      Thormod says, "Take the ring if thou canst get it: I have lost that which
+      is more worth."
+      Kimbe stretched out his hand, and wanted to take the ring; but Thormod,
+      swinging his sword, cut off his hand; and it is related that Kimbe behaved
+      himself no better under his wound than those he had been blaming just
+      before. Kimbe went off, and Thormod sat down in the barn, and listened to
+      what people were saying. The conversation was mostly about what each had
+      seen in the battle, and about the valour of the combatants. Some praised
+      most King Olaf's courage, and some named others who stood nowise behind
+      him in bravery. Then Thormod sang these verses: -
+     "Olaf was brave beyond all doubt, -
+     At Stiklestad was none so stout;
+     Spattered with blood, the king, unsparing,
+     Cheered on his men with deed and daring.
+     But I have heard that some were there
+     Who in the fight themselves would spare;
+     Though, in the arrow-storm, the most
+     Had perils quite enough to boast."
+      247. THORMOD'S DEATH.
+      Thormod went out, and entered into a chamber apart, in which there were
+      many wounded men, and with them a woman binding their wounds. There was
+      fire upon the floor, at which she warmed water to wash and clean their
+      wounds. Thormod sat himself down beside the door, and one came in, and
+      another went out, of those who were busy about the wounded men. One of
+      them turned to Thormod, looked at him, and said, "Why art thou so
+      dead-pale? Art thou wounded? Why dost thou not call for the help of the
+      wound-healers?" Thormod then sang these verses: -
+     "I am not blooming, and the fair
+     And slender girl loves to care
+     For blooming youths -few care for me;
+     With Fenja's meal I cannot fee.
+     This is the reason why I feel
+     The slash and thrust of Danish steel;
+     And pale and faint, and bent with pain,
+     Return from yonder battle-plain."
+      Then Thormod stood up and went in towards the fire, and stood there
+      awhile. The young woman said to him, "Go out, man, and bring in some of
+      the split firewood which lies close beside the door." He went out and
+      brought in an armful of wood, which he threw down upon the floor. Then the
+      nurse-girl looked him in the face, and said, "Dreadfully pale is this man -why
+      art thou so?" Then Thormod sang: -
+     "Thou wonderest, sweet sprig, at me,
+     A man so hideous to see:
+     Deep wounds but rarely mend the face,
+     The crippling blow gives little grace.
+     The arrow-drift o'ertook me, girl, -
+     A fine-ground arrow in the whirl
+     Went through me, and I feel the dart
+     Sits, lovely girl, too near my heart."
+      The girl said, "Let me see thy wound, and I will bind it." Thereupon
+      Thormod sat down, cast off his clothes, and the girl saw his wounds, and
+      examined that which was in his side, and felt that a piece of iron was in
+      it, but could not find where the iron had gone in. In a stone pot she had
+      stirred together leeks and other herbs, and boiled them, and gave the
+      wounded men of it to eat, by which she discovered if the wounds had
+      penetrated into the belly; for if the wound had gone so deep, it would
+      smell of leek. She brought some of this now to Thormod, and told him to
+      eat of it. He replied, "Take it away, I have no appetite for my broth."
+      Then she took a large pair of tongs, and tried to pull out the iron; but
+      it sat too fast, and would in no way come, and as the wound was swelled,
+      little of it stood out to lay hold of. Now said Thormod, "Cut so deep in
+      that thou canst get at the iron with the tongs, and give me the tongs and
+      let me pull." She did as he said. Then Thormod took a gold ring from his
+      hand, gave it to the nurse-woman, and told her to do with it what she
+      liked. "It is a good man's gift," said he: "King Olaf gave me the ring
+      this morning." Then Thormod took the tongs, and pulled the iron out; but
+      on the iron there was a hook, at which there hung some morsels of flesh
+      from the heart, -some white, some red. When he saw that, he said,
+      "The king has fed us well. I am fat, even at the heart-roots;" and so
+      saying he leant back, and was dead. And with this ends what we have to say
+      about Thormod.
+      248. OF SOME CIRCUMSTANCES OF THE BATTLE.
+      King Olaf fell on Wednesday, the 29th of July (A.D. 1030). It was near
+      mid-day when the two armies met, and the battle began before half-past
+      one, and before three the king fell. The darkness continued from about
+      half-past one to three also. Sigvat the skald speaks thus of the result of
+      the battle: -
+     "The loss was great to England's foes,
+     When their chief fell beneath the blows
+     By his own thoughtless people given, -
+     When the king's shield in two was riven.
+     The people's sovereign took the field,
+     The people clove the sovereign's shield.
+     Of all the chiefs that bloody day,
+     Dag only came out of the fray."
+      And he composed these: -
+     "Such mighty bonde-power, I ween,
+     With chiefs or rulers ne'er was seen.
+     It was the people's mighty power
+     That struck the king that fatal hour.
+     When such a king, in such a strife,
+     By his own people lost his life,
+     Full many a gallant man must feel
+     The death-wound from the people's steel."
+      The bondes did not spoil the slain upon the field of battle, for
+      immediately after the battle there came upon many of them who had been
+      against the king a kind of dread as it were; yet they held by their evil
+      inclination, for they resolved among themselves that all who had fallen
+      with the king should not receive the interment which belongs to good men,
+      but reckoned them all robbers and outlaws. But the men who had power, and
+      had relations on the field, cared little for this, but removed their
+      remains to the churches, and took care of their burial.
+      249. A MIRACLE ON A BLIND MAN.
+      Thorgils Halmason and his son Grim went to the field of battle towards
+      evening when it was dusk, took King Olaf's corpse up, and bore it to a
+      little empty houseman's hut which stood on the other side of their farm.
+      They had light and water with them. Then they took the clothes off the
+      body, swathed it in a linen cloth, laid it down in the house, and
+      concealed it under some firewood so that nobody could see it, even if
+      people came into the hut. Thereafter they went home again to the
+      farmhouse. A great many beggars and poor people had followed both armies,
+      who begged for meat; and the evening after the battle many remained there,
+      and sought lodging round about in all the houses, great or small. It is
+      told of a blind man who was poor, that a boy attended him and led him.
+      They went out around the farm to seek a lodging, and came to the same
+      empty house, of which the door was so low that they had almost to creep
+      in. Now when the blind man had come in, he fumbled about the floor seeking
+      a place where he could lay himself down. He had a hat on his head, which
+      fell down over his face when he stooped down. He felt with his hands that
+      there was moisture on the floor, and he put up his wet hand to raise his
+      hat, and in doing so put his fingers on his eyes. There came immediately
+      such an itching in his eyelids, that he wiped the water with his fingers
+      from his eyes, and went out of the hut, saying nobody could lie there, it
+      was so wet. When he came out of the hut he could distinguish his hands,
+      and all that was near him, as far as things can be distinguished by sight
+      in the darkness of light; and he went immediately to the farm-house into
+      the room, and told all the people he had got his sight again, and could
+      see everything, although many knew he had been blind for a long time, for
+      he had been there, before, going about among the houses of the
+      neighbourhood. He said he first got his sight when he was coming out of a
+      little ruinous hut which was all wet inside. "I groped in the water," said
+      he, "and rubbed my eyes with my wet hands." He told where the hut stood.
+      The people who heard him wondered much at this event, and spoke among
+      themselves of what it could be that produced it: but Thorgils the peasant
+      and his son Grim thought they knew how this came to pass; and as they were
+      much afraid the king's enemies might go there and search the hut, they
+      went and took the body out of it, and removed it to a garden, where they
+      concealed it, and then returned to the farm, and slept there all night.
+      250. OF THORER HUND.
+      The fifth day (Thursday), Thorer Hund came down the valley of Veradal to
+      Stiklestad; and many people, both chiefs and bondes, accompanied him. The
+      field of battle was still being cleared, and people were carrying away the
+      bodies of their friends and relations, and were giving the necessary help
+      to such of the wounded as they wished to save; but many had died since the
+      battle. Thorer Hund went to where the king had fallen, and searched for
+      his body; but not finding it, he inquired if any one could tell him what
+      had become of the corpse, but nobody could tell him where it was. Then he
+      asked the bonde Thorgils, who said, "I was not in the battle, and knew
+      little of what took place there; but many reports are abroad, and among
+      others that King Olaf has been seen in the night up at Staf, and a troop
+      of people with him: but if he fell in the battle, your men must have
+      concealed him in some hole, or under some stone-heap." Now although Thorer
+      Hund knew for certain that the king had fallen, many allowed themselves to
+      believe, and to spread abroad the report, that the king had escaped from
+      the battle, and would in a short time come again upon them with an army.
+      Then Thorer went to his ships, and sailed down the fjord, and the
+      bonde-army dispersed, carrying with them all the wounded men who could
+      bear to be removed.
+      251. OF KING OLAF'S BODY.
+      Thorgils Halmason and his son Grim had King Olaf's body, and were anxious
+      about preserving it from falling into the hands of the king's enemies, and
+      being ill-treated; for they heard the bondes speaking about burning it, or
+      sinking it in the sea. The father and son had seen a clear light burning
+      at night over the spot on the battlefield where King Olaf's body lay, and
+      since, while they concealed it, they had always seen at night a light
+      burning over the corpse; therefore they were afraid the king's enemies
+      might seek the body where this signal was visible. They hastened,
+      therefore, to take the body to a place where it would be safe. Thorgils
+      and his son accordingly made a coffin, which they adorned as well as they
+      could, and laid the king's body in it; and afterwards made another coffin
+      in which they laid stones and straw, about as much as the weight of a man,
+      and carefully closed the coffins. As soon as the whole bonde-army had left
+      Stiklestad, Thorgils and his son made themselves ready, got a large
+      rowing-boat, and took with them seven or eight men, who were all Thorgil's
+      relations or friends, and privately took the coffin with the king's body
+      down to the boat, and set it under the foot-boards. They had also with
+      them the coffin containing the stones, and placed it in the boat where all
+      could see it; and then went down the fjord with a good opportunity of wind
+      and weather, and arrived in the dusk of the evening at Nidaros, where they
+      brought up at the king's pier. Then Thorgils sent some of his men up to
+      the town to Bishop Sigurd, to say that they were come with the king's
+      body. As soon as the bishop heard this news, he sent his men down to the
+      pier, and they took a small rowing-boat, came alongside of Thorgil's ship,
+      and demanded the king's body. Thorgils and his people then took the coffin
+      which stood in view, and bore it into the boat; and the bishop's men rowed
+      out into the fjord, and sank the coffin in the sea. It was now quite dark.
+      Thorgils and his people now rowed up into the river past the town, and
+      landed at a place called Saurhlid, above the town. Then they carried the
+      king's body to an empty house standing at a distance from other houses,
+      and watched over it for the night, while Thorgils went down to the town,
+      where he spoke with some of the best friends of King Olaf, and asked them
+      if they would take charge of the king's body; but none of them dared to do
+      so. Then Thorgils and his men went with the body higher up the river,
+      buried it in a sand-hill on the banks, and levelled all around it so that
+      no one could observe that people had been at work there. They were ready
+      with all this before break of day, when they returned to their vessel,
+      went immediately out of the river, and proceeded on their way home to
+      Stiklestad.
+      252. OF THE BEGINNING OF KING SVEIN ALFIFASON'S GOVERNMENT.
+      Svein, a son of King Canute, and of Alfifa, a daughter of Earl Alfrin, had
+      been appointed to govern Jomsborg in Vindland. There came a message to him
+      from his father King Canute, that he should come to Denmark; and likewise
+      that afterwards he should proceed to Norway, and take that kingdom under
+      his charge, and assume, at the same time, the title of king of Norway.
+      Svein repaired to Denmark, and took many people with him from thence, and
+      also Earl Harald and many other people of consequence attended him.
+      Thorarin Loftunga speaks of this in the song he composed about King Svein,
+      called the "Glelogn Song": -
+     "'Tis told by fame,
+     How grandly came
+     The Danes to tend
+     Their young king Svein.
+     Grandest was he,
+     That all could see;
+     Then, one by one,
+     Each following man
+     More splendour wore
+     Than him before."
+      Then Svein proceeded to Norway, and his mother Alfifa was with him; and he
+      was taken to be king at every Law-thing in the country. He had already
+      come as far as Viken at the time the battle was fought at Stiklestad, and
+      King Olaf fell. Svein continued his journey until he came north, in
+      autumn, to the Throndhjem country; and there, as elsewhere, he was
+      received as king.
+      253. OF KING SVEIN'S LAWS.
+      King Svein introduced new laws in many respects into the country, partly
+      after those which were in Denmark, and in part much more severe. No man
+      must leave the country without the king's permission; or if he did, his
+      property fell to the king. Whoever killed a man outright, should forfeit
+      all his land and movables. If any one was banished the country, and all
+      heritage fell to him, the king took his inheritance. At Yule every man
+      should pay the king a meal of malt from every harvest steading, and a leg
+      of a three-year old ox, which was called a friendly gift, together with a
+      spand of butter; and every house-wife a rock full of unspun lint, as thick
+      as one could span with the longest fingers of the hand. The bondes were
+      bound to build all the houses the king required upon his farms. Of every
+      seven males one should be taken for the service of war, and reckoning from
+      the fifth year of age; and the outfit of ships should be reckoned in the
+      same proportion. Every man who rowed upon the sea to fish should pay the
+      king five fish as a tax, for the land defence, wherever he might come
+      from. Every ship that went out of the country should have stowage reserved
+      open for the king in the middle of the ship. Every man, foreigner or
+      native, who went to Iceland, should pay a tax to the king. And to all this
+      was added, that Danes should enjoy so much consideration in Norway, that
+      one witness of them should invalidate ten of Northmen (1).
+      When these laws were promulgated the minds of the people were instantly
+      raised against them, and murmurs were heard among them. They who had not
+      taken part against King Olaf said, "Now take your reward and friendship
+      from the Canute race, ye men of the interior Throndhjem who fought against
+      King Olaf, and deprived him of his kingdom. Ye were promised peace and
+      justice, and now ye have got oppression and slavery for your great
+      treachery and crime." Nor was it very easy to contradict them, as all men
+      saw how miserable the change had been. But people had not the boldness to
+      make an insurrection against King Svein, principally because many had
+      given King Canute their sons or other near relations as hostages; and also
+      because no one appeared as leader of an insurrection. They very soon,
+      however, complained of King Svein; and his mother Alfifa got much of the
+      blame of all that was against their desire. Then the truth, with regard to
+      Olaf, became evident to many.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) This may probably have referred not to witnesses of an
+act,     but to the class of witnesses in the jurisprudence of the
+     Middle Ages called compurgators, who testified not the fact,
+     but their confidence in the statements of the accused; and
+     from which, possibly, our English bail for offenders arose.
+    -L.
+      254. OF KING OLAF'S SANCTITY.
+      This winter (A.D. 1031) many in the Throndhjem land began to declare that
+      Olaf was in reality a holy man, and his sanctity was confirmed by many
+      miracles. Many began to make promises and prayers to King Olaf in the
+      matters in which they thought they required help, and many found great
+      benefit from these invocations. Some in respect of health, others of a
+      journey, or other circumstances in which such help seemed needful.
+      255. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER.
+      Einar Tambaskelfer was come home from England to his farm, and had the
+      fiefs which King Canute had given him when they met in Throndhjem, and
+      which were almost an earldom. Einar had not been in the strife against
+      King Olaf, and congratulated himself upon it. He remembered that King
+      Canute had promised him the earldom over Norway, and at the same time
+      remembered that King Canute had not kept his promise. He was accordingly
+      the first great person who looked upon King Olaf as a saint.
+      256. OF THE SONS OF ARNE.
+      Fin Arnason remained but a short time at Eggja with his brother Kalf; for
+      he was in the highest degree ill-pleased that Kalf had been in the battle
+      against King Olaf, and always made his brother the bitterest reproaches on
+      this account. Thorberg Arnason was much more temperate in his discourse
+      than Fin; but yet he hastened away, and went home to his farm. Kalf gave
+      the two brothers a good long-ship, with full rigging and other
+      necessaries, and a good retinue. Therefore they went home to their farms,
+      and sat quietly at home. Arne Arnason lay long ill of his wounds, but got
+      well at last without injury of any limb, and in winter he proceeded south
+      to his farm. All the brothers made their peace with King Svein, and sat
+      themselves quietly down in their homes.
+      257. BISHOP SIGURD'S FLIGHT.
+      The summer after (A.D. 1031) there was much talk about King Olaf's
+      sanctity, and there was a great alteration in the expressions of all
+      people concerning him. There were many who now believed that King Olaf
+      must be a saint, even among those who had persecuted him with the greatest
+      animosity, and would never in their conversation allow truth or justice in
+      his favour. People began then to turn their reproaches against the men who
+      had principally excited opposition to the king; and on this account Bishop
+      Sigurd in particular was accused. He got so many enemies, that he found it
+      most advisable to go over to England to King Canute. Then the Throndhjem
+      people sent men with a verbal message to the Uplands, to Bishop Grimkel,
+      desiring him to come north to Throndhjem. King Olaf had sent Bishop
+      Grimkel back to Norway when he went east into Russia, and since that time
+      Grimkel had been in the Uplands. When the message came to the bishop he
+      made ready to go, and it contributed much to this journey that the bishop
+      considered it as true what was told of King Olaf's miracles and sanctity.
+      258. KING OLAF THE SAINT'S REMAINS DISINTERRED.
+      Bishop Grimkel went to Einar Tambaskelfer, who received him joyfully. They
+      talked over many things, and, among others, of the important events which
+      had taken place in the country; and concerning these they were perfectly
+      agreed. Then the bishop proceeded to the town (Nidaros), and was well
+      received by all the community. He inquired particularly concerning the
+      miracles of King Olaf that were reported, and received satisfactory
+      accounts of them. Thereupon the bishop sent a verbal message to Stiklestad
+      to Thorgils and his son Grim, inviting them to come to the town to him.
+      They did not decline the invitation, but set out on the road immediately,
+      and came to the town and to the bishop. They related to him all the signs
+      that had presented themselves to them, and also where they had deposited
+      the king's body. The bishop sent a message to Einar Tambaskelfer, who came
+      to the town. Then the bishop and Einar had an audience of the king and
+      Alfifa, in which they asked the king's leave to have King Olaf's body
+      taken up out of the earth. The king gave his permission, and told the
+      bishop to do as he pleased in the matter. At that time there were a great
+      many people in the town. The bishop, Einar, and some men with them, went
+      to the place where the king's body was buried, and had the place dug; but
+      the coffin had already raised itself almost to the surface of the earth.
+      It was then the opinion of many that the bishop should proceed to have the
+      king buried in the earth at Clement's church; and it was so done. Twelve
+      months and five days (Aug. 3, A.D. 1031), after King Olaf's death his holy
+      remains were dug up, and the coffin had raised itself almost entirely to
+      the surface of the earth; and the coffin appeared quite new, as if it had
+      but lately been made. When Bishop Grimkel came to King Olaf's opened
+      coffin, there was a delightful and fresh smell. Thereupon the bishop
+      uncovered the king's face, and his appearance was in no respect altered,
+      and his cheeks were as red as if he had but just fallen asleep. The men
+      who had seen King Olaf when he fell remarked, also, that his hair and
+      nails had grown as much as if he had lived on the earth all the time that
+      had passed since his fall. Thereupon King Svein, and all the chiefs who
+      were at the place, went out to see King Olaf's body. Then said Alfifa,
+      "People buried in sand rot very slowly, and it would not have been so if
+      he had been buried in earth." Afterwards the bishop took scissors, clipped
+      the king's hair, and arranged his beard; for he had had a long beard,
+      according to the fashion of that time. Then said the bishop to the king
+      and Alfifa, "Now the king's hair and beard are such as when he gave up the
+      ghost, and it has grown as much as ye see has been cut off." Alfifa
+      answers, "I will believe in the sanctity of his hair, if it will not burn
+      in the fire; but I have often seen men's hair whole and undamaged after
+      lying longer in the earth than this man's." Then the bishop had live coals
+      put into a pan, blessed it, cast incense upon it, and then laid King
+      Olaf's hair on the fire. When all the incense was burnt the bishop took
+      the hair out of the fire, and showed the king and the other chiefs that it
+      was not consumed. Now Alfifa asked that the hair should be laid upon
+      unconsecrated fire; but Einar Tambaskelfer told her to be silent, and gave
+      her many severe reproaches for her unbelief. After the bishop's
+      recognition, with the king's approbation and the decision of the Thing, it
+      was determined that King Olaf should be considered a man truly holy;
+      whereupon his body was transported into Clement's church, and a place was
+      prepared for it near the high altar. The coffin was covered with costly
+      cloth, and stood under a gold embroidered tent. Many kinds of miracles
+      were soon wrought by King Olaf's holy remains.
+      259. OF KING OLAF'S MIRACLES.
+      In the sand-hill where King Olaf's body had lain on the ground a beautiful
+      spring of water came up and many human ailments and infirmities were cured
+      by its waters. Things were put in order around it, and the water ever
+      since has been carefully preserved. There was first a chapel built, and an
+      altar consecrated, where the king's body had lain; but now Christ's church
+      stands upon the spot. Archbishop Eystein had a high altar raised upon the
+      spot where the king's grave had been, when he erected the great temple
+      which now stands there; and it is the same spot on which the altar of the
+      old Christ church had stood. It is said that Olaf's church stands on the
+      spot on which the empty house had stood in which King Olaf's body had been
+      laid for the night. The place over which the holy remains of King Olaf
+      were carried up from the vessel is now called Olaf's Road, and is now in
+      the middle of the town. The bishop adorned King Olaf's holy remains, and
+      cut his nails and hair; for both grew as if he had still been alive. So
+      says Sigvat the skald: -
+     "I lie not, when I say the king
+     Seemed as alive in every thing:
+     His nails, his yellow hair still growing,
+     And round his ruddy cheek still flowing,
+     As when, to please the Russian queen,
+     His yellow locks adorned were seen;
+     Or to the blind he cured he gave
+     A tress, their precious sight to save."
+      Thorarin Loftunga also composed a song upon Svein Alfifason, called the
+      "Glelogn Song", in which are these verses: -
+     "Svein, king of all,
+     In Olaf's hall
+     Now sits on high;
+     And Olaf's eye
+     Looks down from heaven,
+     Where it is given
+     To him to dwell:
+     Or here in cell,
+     As heavenly saint,
+     To heal men's plaint,
+     May our gold-giver
+     Live here for ever!
+
+     "King Olaf there
+     To hold a share
+     On earth prepared,
+     Nor labour spared
+     A seat to win
+     From heaven's great King;
+     Which he has won
+     Next God's own Son.
+
+     "His holy form,
+     Untouched by worm,
+     Lies at this day
+     Where good men pray,
+     And nails and hair
+     Grow fresh and fair;
+     His cheek is red,
+     His flesh not dead.
+
+     "Around his bier,
+     Good people hear
+     The small bells ring
+     Over the king,
+     Or great bell toll;
+     And living soul
+     Not one can tell
+     Who tolls the bell.
+
+     "Tapers up there,
+     (Which Christ holds dear,)
+     By day and night
+     The altar light:
+     Olaf did so,
+     And all men know
+     In heaven he
+     From sin sits free.
+
+     "And crowds do come,
+     The deaf and dumb,
+     Cripple and blind,
+     Sick of all kind,
+     Cured to be
+     On bended knee;
+     And off the ground
+     Rise whole and sound.
+
+     "To Olaf pray
+     To eke thy day,
+     To save thy land
+     From spoiler's hand.
+     God's man is he
+     To deal to thee
+     Good crops and peace;
+     Let not prayer cease.
+
+     "Book-prayers prevail,
+     If, nail for nail (1),
+     Thou tellest on,
+     Forgetting none."
+      Thorarin Loftunga was himself with King Svein, and heard these great
+      testimonials of King Olaf's holiness, that people, by the heavenly power,
+      could hear a sound over his holy remains as if bells were ringing, and
+      that candles were lighted of themselves upon the altar as by a heavenly
+      fire. But when Thorarin says that a multitude of lame, and blind, and
+      other sick, who came to the holy Olaf, went back cured, he means nothing
+      more than that there were a vast number of persons who at the beginning of
+      King Olaf's miraculous working regained their health. King Olaf's greatest
+      miracles are clearly written down, although they occurred somewhat later.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Before the entrance of the temples or churches were posts
+     called Ondveigis-sulor, with nails called Rigin-naglar -
+     the gods' nails -either for ornament, or, as Schoning
+     suggests, to assist the people in reckoning weeks, months,
+     festivals, and in reckoning or keeping tale of prayers
+     repeated, and to recall them to memory, in the same way as
+     beads are used still by the common people in Catholic
+     countries for the same purpose. -L.
+      260. OF KING OLAF'S AGE AND REIGN.
+      It is reckoned by those who have kept an exact account, that Olaf the
+      Saint was king of Norway for fifteen years from the time Earl Svein left
+      the country; but he had received the title of king from the people of the
+      Uplands the winter before. Sigvat the skald tells this: -
+     "For fifteen winters o'er the land
+     King Olaf held the chief command,
+     Before he fell up in the North:
+     His fall made known to us his worth.
+     No worthier prince before his day
+     In our North land e'er held the sway,
+     Too short he held it for our good;
+     All men wish now that he had stood."
+      Saint Olaf was thirty-five years old when he fell, according to what Are
+      Frode the priest says, and he had been in twenty pitched battles. So says
+      Sigvat the skald: -
+     "Some leaders trust in God -some not;
+     Even so their men; but well I wot
+     God-fearing Olaf fought and won
+     Twenty pitched battles, one by one,
+     And always placed upon his right
+     His Christian men in a hard fight.
+     May God be merciful, I pray,
+     To him -for he ne'er shunned his fray."
+      We have now related a part of King Olaf's story, namely, the events which
+      took place while he ruled over Norway; also his death, and how his
+      holiness was manifested. Now shall we not neglect to mention what it was
+      that most advanced his honour. This was his miracles; but these will come
+      to be treated of afterwards in this book.
+      261. OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE.
+      King Svein, the son of Canute the Great, ruled over Norway for some years;
+      but was a child both in age and understanding. His mother Alfifa had most
+      sway in the country; and the people of the country were her great enemies,
+      both then and ever since. Danish people had a great superiority given them
+      within the country, to the great dissatisfaction of the people; and when
+      conversation turned that way, the people of the rest of Norway accused the
+      Throndhjem people of having principally occasioned King Olaf the Holy's
+      fall, and also that the men of Norway were subject, through them, to the
+      ill government by which oppression and slavery had come upon all the
+      people, both great and small; indeed upon the whole community. They
+      insisted that it was the duty of the Throndhjem people to attempt
+      opposition and insurrection, and thus relieve the country from such
+      tyranny; and, in the opinion of the common people, Throndhjem was also the
+      chief seat of the strength of Norway at that time, both on account of the
+      chiefs and of the population of that quarter. When the Throndhjem people
+      heard these remarks of their countrymen, they could not deny that there
+      was much truth in them, and that in depriving King Olaf of life and land
+      they had committed a great crime, and at the same time the misdeed had
+      been ill paid. The chiefs began to hold consultations and conferences with
+      each other, and the leader of these was Einar Tambaskelfer. It was
+      likewise the case with Kalf Arnason, who began to find into what errors he
+      had been drawn by King Canute's persuasion. All the promises which King
+      Canute had made to Kalf had been broken; for he had promised him the
+      earldom and the highest authority in Norway: and although Kalf had been
+      the leader in the battle against King Olaf, and had deprived him of his
+      life and kingdom, Kalf had not got any higher dignity than he had before.
+      He felt that he had been deceived, and therefore messages passed between
+      the brothers Kalf, Fin, Thorberg, and Arne, and they renewed their family
+      friendship.
+      262. OF KING SVEIN'S LEVY.
+      When King Svein had been three years in Norway (A.D. 1031-33), the news
+      was received that a force was assembled in the western countries, under a
+      chief who called himself Trygve, and gave out that he was a son of Olaf
+      Trygvason and Queen Gyda of England. Now when King Svein heard that
+      foreign troops had come to the country, he ordered out the people on a
+      levy in the north, and the most of the lendermen hastened to him; but
+      Einar Tambaskelfer remained at home, and would not go out with King Svein.
+      When King Svein's order came to Kalf Arnason at Eggja, that he should go
+      out on a levy with King Svein, he took a twenty-benched ship which he
+      owned, went on board with his house-servants, and in all haste proceeded
+      out of the fjord, without waiting for King Svein, sailed southwards to
+      More, and continued his voyage south until he came to Giske to his brother
+      Thorberg. Then all the brothers, the sons of Arne, held a meeting, and
+      consulted with each other. After this Kalf returned to the north again;
+      but when he came to Frekeysund, King Svein was lying in the sound before
+      him. When Kalf came rowing from the south into the sound they hailed each
+      other, and the king's men ordered Kalf to bring up with his vessel, and
+      follow the king for the defence of the country. Kalf replies, "I have done
+      enough, if not too much, when I fought against my own countrymen to
+      increase the power of the Canute family." Thereupon Kalf rowed away to the
+      north until he came home to Eggja. None of these Arnasons appeared at this
+      levy to accompany the king. He steered with his fleet southwards along the
+      land; but as he could not hear the least news of any fleet having come
+      from the west, he steered south to Rogaland, and all the way to Agder; for
+      many guessed that Trygve would first make his attempt on Viken, because
+      his forefathers had been there, and had most of their strength from that
+      quarter, and he had himself great strength by family connection there.
+      263. KING TRYGVE OLAFSON'S FALL.
+      When Trygve came from the west he landed first on the coast of Hordaland,
+      and when he heard King Svein had gone south he went the same way to
+      Rogaland. As soon as Svein got the intelligence that Trygve had come from
+      the west he returned, and steered north with his fleet; and both fleets
+      met within Bokn in Soknarsund, not far from the place where Erling
+      Skjalgson fell. The battle, which took place on a Sunday, was great and
+      severe. People tell that Trygve threw spears with both hands at once. "So
+      my father," said he, "taught me to celebrate mass." His enemies had said
+      that he was the son of a priest; but the praise must be allowed him that
+      he showed himself more like a son of King Olaf Trygvason, for this Trygve
+      was a slaughtering man. In this battle King Trygve fell, and many of his
+      men with him; but some fled, and some received quarter and their lives. It
+      is thus related in the ballad of Trygve: -
+     "Trygve comes from the northern coast,
+     King Svein turns round with all his host;
+     To meet and fight, they both prepare,
+     And where they met grim death was there.
+     From the sharp strife I was not far, -
+     I heard the din and the clang of war;
+     And the Hordaland men at last gave way,
+     And their leader fell, and they lost the day."
+      This battle is also told of in the ballad about King Svein, thus: -
+     "My girl!  it was a Sunday morn,
+     And many a man ne'er saw its eve,
+     Though ale and leeks by old wives borne
+     The bruised and wounded did relieve.
+     'Twas Sunday morn, when Svein calls out,
+     'Stem to stem your vessels bind;'
+     The raven a mid-day feast smells out,
+     And he comes croaking up the wind."
+      After this battle King Svein ruled the country for some time, and there
+      was peace in the land. The winter after it (A.D. 1034) he passed in the
+      south parts of the country.
+      264. OF THE COUNSELS OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER AND KALF ARNASON.
+      Einar Tambaskelfer and Kalf Arnason had this winter meetings and
+      consultations between themselves in the merchant town (1). Then there came
+      a messenger from King Canute to Kalf Arnason, with a message to send him
+      three dozen axes, which must be chosen and good. Kalf replies, "I will
+      send no axes to King Canute. Tell him I will bring his son Svein so many,
+      that he shall not think he is in want of any."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Nidaros, or Throndhjem, is usually called merely the
+     merchant town. -L.
+      265. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER AND KALF ARNASON'S JOURNEY.
+      Early in spring (A.D. 1034) Einar Tambaskelfer and Kalf Arnason made
+      themselves ready for a journey, with a great retinue of the best and most
+      select men that could be found in the Throndhjem country. They went in
+      spring eastward over the ridge of the country to Jamtaland, from thence to
+      Helsingjaland, and came to Svithjod, where they procured ships, with which
+      in summer they proceeded east to Russia, and came in autumn to Ladoga.
+      They sent men up to Novgorod to King Jarisleif, with the errand that they
+      offered Magnus, the son of King Olaf the Saint, to take him with them,
+      follow him to Norway, and give him assistance to attain his father's
+      heritage and be made king over the country. When this message came to King
+      Jarisleif he held a consultation with the queen and some chiefs, and they
+      all resolved unanimously to send a message to the Northmen, and ask them
+      to come to King Jarisleif and Magnus; for which journey safe conduct was
+      given them. When they came to Novgorod it was settled among them that the
+      Northmen who had come there should become Magnus's men, and be his
+      subjects; and to this Kalf and the other men who had been against King
+      Olaf at Stiklestad were solemnly bound by oath. On the other hand, King
+      Magnus promised them, under oath, secure peace and full reconciliation;
+      and that he would be true and faithful to them all when he got the
+      dominions and kingdom of Norway. He was to become Kalf Arnason's
+      foster-son; and Kalf should be bound to do all that Magnus might think
+      necessary for extending his dominion, and making it more independent than
+      formerly.
+      SAGA OF MAGNUS THE GOOD.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      Magnus reigned from A.D. 1035 to 1047, when he died. During the last year
+      of his reign his half-brother Harald Sigurdson was his co-regent.
+      The history of Magnus is treated in "Agrip.", ch. 28-32; in "Fagrskinna",
+      ch. 119-146; in "Fornmannasogur", part vi., and in "Knytlinga Saga".
+      The skalds quoted in this saga are: Arnor the earls' skald (Arnor
+      Jarlaskald), Sigvat, Thjodulf, Bjarne Gullbrarskald, Thorgeir Flek, Od
+      Kikinaskald.
+      1. MAGNUS OLAFSON'S JOURNEY FROM THE WEST.
+      After Yule Magnus Olafson began his journey from the East from Novgorod to
+      Ladoga, where he rigged out his ships as soon as the ice was loosened in
+      spring (A.D. 1035). Arnor, the earls' skald, tells of this in the poem on
+      Magnus: -
+     "It is no loose report that he,
+     Who will command on land and sea,
+     In blood will make his foeman feel
+     Olaf's sword Hneiter's sharp blue steel.
+     This generous youth, who scatters gold,
+     Norway's brave son, but ten years old,
+     Is rigging ships in Russia's lake,
+     His crown, with friend's support, to take."
+      In spring Magnus sailed from the East to Svithjod. So says Arnor: -
+     "The young sword-stainer called a Thing,
+     Where all his men should meet their king:
+     Heroes who find the eagle food
+     Before their lord in arms stood.
+     And now the curved plank of the bow
+     Cleaves the blue sea; the ocean-plough
+     By grey winds driven across the main,
+     Reaches Sigtuna's grassy plain."
+      Here it is related that when King Magnus and his fellow-travellers sailed
+      from the East to Svithjod, they brought up at Sigtuna. Emund Olafson was
+      then king in Svithjod. Queen Astrid, who had been married to King Olaf the
+      Saint, was also there. She received very gladly and well her stepson King
+      Magnus, and summoned immediately a numerous Thing of Swedes at a place
+      called Hangtar. At the Thing Queen Astrid spoke these words: "Here is come
+      to us a son of Olaf the Saint, called Magnus, who intends to make an
+      expedition to Norway to seek his father's heritage. It is my great duty to
+      give him aid towards this expedition; for he is my stepson, as is well
+      known to all, both Swedes and Norwegians. Neither shall he want men or
+      money, in so far as I can procure them or have influence, in order that
+      his strength may be as great as possible; and all the men who will support
+      this cause of his shall have my fullest friendship; and I would have it
+      known that I intend myself to go with him on this attempt, that all may
+      see I will spare nothing that is in my power to help him." She spoke long
+      and cleverly in this strain; but when she had ended many replied thus:
+      "The Swedes made no honourable progress in Norway when they followed King
+      Olaf his father, and now no better success is to be expected, as this man
+      is but in years of boyhood; and therefore we have little inclination for
+      this expedition." Astrid replies, "All men who wish to be thought of true
+      courage must not be deterred by such considerations. If any have lost
+      connections at the side of King Olaf, or been themselves wounded, now is
+      the time to show a man's heart and courage, and go to Norway to take
+      vengeance." Astrid succeeded so far with words and encouragement that many
+      men determined to go with her, and follow King Magnus to Norway. Sigvat
+      the skald speaks of this: -
+     "Now Astrtd, Olaf's widowed Queen, -
+     She who so many a change had seen, -
+     Took all the gifts of happier days,
+     Jewels and rings, all she could raise,
+     And at a Thing at Hangrar, where
+     The Swedes were numerous, did declare
+     What Olaf's son proposed to do,
+     And brought her gifts -their pay -in view.
+
+     "And with the Swedes no wiser plan,
+     To bring out every brave bold man,
+     Could have been found, had Magnus been
+     The son himself of the good queen.
+     With help of Christ, she hoped to bring
+     Magnus to be the land's sole king,
+     As Harald was, who in his day
+     Obtained o'er all the upper sway.
+
+     "And glad are we so well she sped, -
+     The people's friend is now their head;
+     And good King Magnus always shows
+     How much be to Queen Astrid owes.
+     Such stepmothers as this good queen
+     In truth are very rarely seen;
+     And to this noble woman's praise
+     The skald with joy his song will raise."
+      Thiodolf the skald also says in his song of Magnus: -
+     "When thy brave ship left the land,
+     The bending yard could scarce withstand
+     The fury of the whistling gale,
+     That split thy many-coloured sail;
+     And many a stout ship, tempest-tost,
+     Was in that howling storm lost
+     That brought them safe to Sigtuna's shore,
+     Far from the sound of ocean's roar."
+      2. MAGNUS'S EXPEDITION FROM SVITHJOD.
+      King Magnus set out on his journey from Sigtuna with a great force, which
+      he had gathered in Svithjod. They proceeded through Svithjod on foot to
+      Helsingjaland. So says Arnor, the earl's skald: -
+     "And many a dark-red Swedish shield
+     Marched with thee from the Swedish field.
+     The country people crowded in,
+     To help Saint Olaf's son to win;
+     And chosen men by thee were led,
+     Men who have stained the wolf's tongue red.
+     Each milk-white shield and polished spear
+     Came to a splendid gathering there."
+      Magnus Olafson went from the East through Jamtaland over the keel-ridge of
+      the country and came down upon the Throndhjem district, where all men
+      welcomed the king with joy. But no sooner did the men of King Svein, the
+      son of Alfifa, hear that King Magnus Olafson was come to the country, than
+      they fled on all sides and concealed themselves, so that no opposition was
+      made to King Magnus; for King Svein was in the south part of the country.
+      So says Arnor, the earls' skald: -
+     "He who the eagle's talons stains
+     Rushed from the East on Throndhjem's plains;
+     The terror of his plumed helm
+     Drove his pale foemen from the realm.
+     The lightning of thy eye so near,
+     Great king!  thy foemen could not bear,
+     Scattered they fled -their only care
+     If thou their wretched lives wilt spare."
+      3. MAGNUS MADE KING.
+      Magnus Olafson advanced to the town (Nidaros), where he was joyfully
+      received. He then summoned the people to the Eyra-thing (1); and when the
+      bondes met at the Thing, Magnus was taken to be king over the whole land,
+      as far as his father Olaf had possessed it. Then the king selected a
+      court, and named lendermen, and placed bailiffs and officers in all
+      domains and offices. Immediately after harvest King Magnus ordered a levy
+      through all Throndhjem land, and he collected men readily; and thereafter
+      he proceeded southwards along the coast.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Eyra Thing, held on the ayr of the river Nid, that is, on
+     the spit of sand, still called an ayr in the north of
+     Scotland, dividing a lake, pond, or river-mouth from the
+     sea.  At the Thing held here the kings of Norway were chosen
+     and proclaimed.  It was held to be the proper Thing for
+     settling disputes between kings in Norway. -L.
+      4. KING SVEIN'S FLIGHT.
+      King Svein Alfifason was staying in South Hordaland when he heard this
+      news of war. He immediately sent out war-tokens to four different
+      quarters, summoned the bondes to him, and made it known to all that they
+      should join him with men and ships to defend the country. All the men who
+      were in the neighbourhood of the king presented themselves; and the king
+      formed a Thing, at which in a speech he set forth his business, and said
+      he would advance against Magnus Olafson and have a battle with him, if the
+      bondes would aid his cause. The king's speech was not very long, and was
+      not received with much approbation by the bondes. Afterwards the Danish
+      chiefs who were about the king made long and clever speeches; but the
+      bondes then took up the word, and answered them; and although many said
+      they would follow Svein, and fight on his side, some refused to do so
+      bluntly, some were altogether silent, and some declared they would join
+      King Magnus as soon as they had an opportunity. Then King Svein says,
+      "Methinks very few of the bondes to whom we sent a message have appeared
+      here; and of those who have come, and tell us to our face that they will
+      join King Magnus as soon as they can, we shall have as little benefit as
+      of those who say they will sit at home quietly. It is the same with those
+      who say nothing at all. But as to those who promise to help us, there are
+      not more than every other man; and that force will avail us little against
+      King Magnus. It is my counsel, therefore, that we do not trust to these
+      bondes; but let us rather go to the land where all the people are sure and
+      true to us, and where we will obtain forces to conquer this country
+      again." As soon as the king had made known this resolution all his men
+      followed it, turned their ship's bows, and hoisted sail. King Svein sailed
+      eastward along the land, and then set right over to Denmark without delay,
+      and Hardaknut received his brother Svein very kindly. At their first
+      meeting Hardaknut offered King Svein to divide the kingdom of Denmark with
+      him, which offer King Svein accepted.
+      5. KING MAGNUS'S JOURNEY TO NORWAY.
+      In autumn (A.D. 1035) King Magnus proceeded eastward to the end of the
+      country, and was received as king throughout the whole land, and the
+      country people were rejoiced at his arrival.
+      6. DEATH OF KING CANUTE THE GREAT AND HIS SON SVEIN.
+      King Svein, Canute's son, went to Denmark, as before related, and took
+      part in the government with his brother Hardaknut. In the same autumn King
+      Canute the Great died in England, the 13th November, forty years old, and
+      was buried at Winchester. He had been king of Denmark for twenty-seven
+      years, and over Denmark and England together twenty-four years, and also
+      over Norway for seven years. King Canute's son Harald was then made king
+      in England. The same winter (A.D. 1036) King Svein, Alfifa's son, died in
+      Denmark. Thiodolf the skald made these lines concerning King Magnus: -
+     "Through Sweden's dirty roads the throng
+     Followed the king in spearmen strong.
+     Svein doth fly, in truth afraid,
+     And partly by his men betrayed;
+     Flying to Denmark o'er the sea,
+     He leaves the land quite clear to thee."
+      Bjarne Gullbrarskald composed the following lines concerning Kalf Arnason: -
+     "By thee the kings got each his own, -
+     Magnus by thee got Norway's throne;
+     And Svein in Denmark got a seat,
+     When out of Norway he was beat.
+     Kalf!  It was you who showed the way
+     To our young king, the battle-lover, -
+     From Russia to his father's sway
+     You showed the way, and brought him over."
+      King Magnus ruled over Norway this winter (A.D. 1036), and Hardaknut over
+      Denmark.
+      7. RECONCILIATION BETWEEN HARDAKNUT AND KING MAGNUS.
+      The following spring (A.D. 1036) the kings on both sides ordered out a
+      levy, and the news was that they would have a battle at the Gaut river;
+      but when the two armies approached each other, the lendermen in the one
+      army sent messengers to their connections and friends in the other; and it
+      came to a proposal for a reconciliation between the two kings, especially
+      as, from both kings being but young and childish, some powerful men, who
+      had been chosen in each of the countries for that purpose, had the rule of
+      the country on their account. It thus was brought about that there was a
+      friendly meeting between the kings, and in this meeting a peace was
+      proposed; and the peace was to be a brotherly union under oath to keep the
+      peace towards each other to the end of their lives; and if one of them
+      should die without leaving a son, the longest liver should succeed to the
+      whole land and people. Twelve of the principal men in each kingdom swore
+      to the kings that this treaty should be observed, so long as any one of
+      them was in life. Then the kings separated, and each returned home to his
+      kingdom; and the treaty was kept as long as both lived.
+      8. OF QUEEN ASTRID.
+      Queen Astrid, who had been married to King Olaf the Saint, came to Norway
+      with King Magnus her stepson, as before related, and was held by him
+      deservedly in great honour and esteem. Then came also Alfhild, King
+      Magnus's mother, to the court, and the king received her with the greatest
+      affection, and showed her great respect. But it went with Alfhild, as it
+      does with many who come to power and honour, that pride keeps pace with
+      promotion. She was ill pleased that Queen Astrid was treated with more
+      respect, had a higher seat, and more attention. Alfhild wanted to have a
+      seat next to the king, but Astrid called Alfhild her slave-woman, as
+      indeed she had formerly been when Astrid was queen of Norway and King Olaf
+      ruled the land, and therefore would on no account let her have a seat
+      beside her, and they could not lodge in the same house.
+      9. OF SIGVAT THE SKALD.
+      Sigvat the skald had gone to Rome, where he was at the time of the battle
+      of Stiklestad.
+      He was on his way back from the South when he heard tidings of King Olaf's
+      fall, which gave him great grief. He then sang these lines: -
+     "One morning early on a hill,
+     The misty town asleep and still,
+     Wandering I thought upon the fields.
+     Strewed o'er with broken mail and shields,
+     Where our king fell, -our kind good king,
+     Where now his happy youthful spring?
+     My father too! -for Thord was then
+     One of the good king's chosen men."
+      One day Sigvat went through a village, and heard a husband lamenting
+      grievously over the loss of his wife, striking his breast, tearing his
+      clothes, weeping bitterly, and saying he wanted to die; and Sigvat sang
+      these lines: -
+     "This poor man mourns a much-loved wife,
+     Gladly would he be quit of life.
+     Must love be paid for by our grief?
+     The price seems great for joy so brief.
+     But the brave man who knows no fear
+     Drops for his king a silent tear,
+     And feels, perhaps, his loss as deep
+     As those who clamour when they weep."
+      Sigvat came home to Norway to the Throndhjem country, where he had a farm
+      and children. He came from the South along the coast in a merchant vessel,
+      and as they lay in Hillarsund they saw a great many ravens flying about.
+      Then Sigvat said: -
+     "I see here many a croaking raven
+     Flying about the well-known haven:
+     When Olaf's ship was floating here,
+     They knew that food for them was near;
+     When Olaf's ship lay here wind-bound,
+     Oft screamed the erne o'er Hillar sound,
+     Impatient for the expected prey,
+     And wont to follow to the fray."
+      When Sigvat came north to the town of Throndhjem King Svein was there
+      before him. He invited Sigvat to stay with him, as Sigvat had formerly
+      been with his father King Canute the Great; but Sigvat said he would first
+      go home to his farm. One day, as Sigvat was walking in the street, he saw
+      the king's men at play, and he sang: -
+     "One day before I passed this way,
+     When the king's guards were at their play,
+     Something there was -I need not tell -
+     That made me pale, and feel unwell.
+     Perhaps it was I thought, just then,
+     How noble Olaf with his men,
+     In former days, I oft have seen
+     In manly games upon this green."
+      Sigvat then went to his farm; and as he heard that many men upbraided him
+      with having deserted King Olaf, he made these verses: -
+     "May Christ condemn me still to burn
+     In quenchless fire, if I did turn,
+     And leave King Olaf in his need, -
+     My soul is free from such base deed.
+     I was at Rome, as men know well
+     Who saw me there, and who can tell
+     That there in danger I was then:
+     The truth I need not hide from men."
+      Sigvat was ill at ease in his home. One day he went out and sang: -
+     "While Olaf lived, how smiled the land!
+     Mountain and cliff, and pebbly strand.
+     All Norway then, so fresh, so gay,
+     On land or sea, where oft I lay.
+     But now to me all seems so dready,
+     All black and dull -of life I'm weary;
+     Cheerless to-day, cheerless to-morrow -
+     Here in the North we have great sorrow."
+      Early in winter Sigvat went westward over the ridge of the country to
+      Jamtaland, and onwards to Helsingjaland, and came to Svithjod. He went
+      immediately to Queen Astrid, and was with her a long time, and was a
+      welcome guest. He was also with her brother King Emund, and received from
+      him ten marks of proved silver, as is related in the song of Canute.
+      Sigvat always inquired of the merchants who traded to Novgorod if they
+      could tell him any news of Magnus Olafson. Sigvat composed these lines at
+      that time: -
+     "I ask the merchant oft who drives
+     His trade to Russia, 'How he thrives,
+     Our noble prince?  How lives he there?
+     And still good news -his praise -I hear.
+     To little birds, which wing their way
+     Between the lands, I fain would say,
+     How much we long our prince to see,
+     They seem to hear a wish from me."
+      10. OF KING MAGNUS'S FIRST ARRIVAL IN SVITHJOD.
+      Immediately after Magnus Olafson came to Svithjod from Russia, Sigvat met
+      him at Queen Astrid's house, and glad they all were at meeting. Sigvat
+      then sang: -
+     "Thou art come here, prince, young and bold!
+     Thou art come home! With joy behold
+     Thy land and people.  From this hour
+     I join myself to thy young power.
+     I could not o'er to Russie hie, -
+     Thy mother's guardian here was I.
+     It was my punishment for giving
+     Magnus his name, while scarcely living."
+      Afterwards Sigvat travelled with Queen Astrid, and followed Magnus to
+      Norway. Sigvat sang thus: -
+     "To the crowds streaming to the Thing,
+     To see and hear Magnus their king,
+     Loudly, young king, I'll speak my mind -
+     'God to His people has been kind.'
+     If He, to whom be all the praise,
+     Give us a son in all his ways
+     Like to his sire, no folk on earth
+     Will bless so much a royal birth."
+      Now when Magnus became king of Norway Sigvat attended him, and was his
+      dearest friend. Once it happened that Queen Astrid and Alfhild the king's
+      mother had exchanged some sharp words with each other, and Sigvat said: -
+     "Alfhild!  though it was God's will
+     To raise thee -yet remember still
+     The queen-born Astrid should not be
+     Kept out of due respect by thee."
+      11. KING OLAF'S SHRINE.
+      King Magnus had a shrine made and mounted with gold and silver, and
+      studded with jewels. This shrine was made so that in shape and size it was
+      like a coffin. Under it was an arched way, and above was a raised roof,
+      with a head and a roof-ridge. Behind were plaited hangings; and before
+      were gratings with padlocks, which could be locked with a key. In this
+      shrine King Magnus had the holy remains of King Olaf deposited, and many
+      were the miracles there wrought. Of this Sigvat speaks: -
+     "For him a golden shrine is made,
+     For him whose heart was ne'er afraid
+     Of mortal man -the holy king,
+     Whom the Lord God to heaven did bring.
+     Here many a man shall feel his way,
+     Stone-blind, unconscious of the day,
+     And at the shrine where Olaf lies
+     Give songs of praise for opened eyes."
+      It was also appointed by law that King Olaf's holy day should be held
+      sacred over all Norway, and that day has been kept ever afterwards as the
+      greatest of Church days. Sigvat speaks of it: -
+     "To Olaf, Magnus' father, raise,
+     Within my house, the song of praise!
+     With joy, yet grief, we'll keep the day
+     Olaf to heaven was called away.
+     Well may I keep within my breast
+     A day for him in holy rest, -
+     My upraised hands a golden ring
+     On every branch (1) bear from that king."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The fingers, the branches of the hand, bore golden fruits
+     from the generosity of the king. -L.
+      12. OF THORER HUND.
+      Thorer Hund left the country immediately after King Olaf's fall. He went
+      all the way to Jerusalem, and many people say he never came back. Thorer
+      Hund had a son called Sigurd, father of Ranveig who was married to Joan, a
+      son of Arne Arnason. Their children were Vidkun of Bjarkey, Sigurd Hund,
+      Erling, and Jardthrud.
+      13. OF THE MURDER OF HAREK OF THJOTTA.
+      Harek of Thjotta sat at home on his farm, till King Magnus Olafson came to
+      the country and was made king. Then Harek went south to Throndhjem to King
+      Magnus. At that time Asmund Grankelson was in the king's house. When Harek
+      came to Nidaros, and landed out of the ship, Asmund was standing with the
+      king in the gallery outside the loft, and both the king and Asmund knew
+      Harek when they saw him. "Now," says Asmund to the king, "I will pay Harek
+      for my father's murder." He had in his hand a little thin hatchet. The
+      king looked at him, and said, "Rather take this axe of mine." It was
+      thick, and made like a club. "Thou must know, Asmund," added he, "that
+      there are hard bones in the old fellow." Asmund took the axe, went down,
+      and through the house, and when he came down to the cross-road Harek and
+      his men coming up met him. Asmund struck Harek on the head, so that the
+      axe penetrated to the brains; and that was Harek's death-wound. Asmund
+      turned back directly to the king's house, and the whole edge of the axe
+      was turned with the blow. Then said the king, "What would thy axe have
+      done, for even this one, I think, is spoilt?" King Magnus afterwards gave
+      him a fief and office in Halogaland, and many are the tales about the
+      strife between Asmund and Harek's sons.
+      14. OF THORGEIR FLEK.
+      Kalf Arnason had at first, for some time, the greatest share of the
+      government of the country under King Magnus; but afterwards there were
+      people who reminded the king of the part Kalf had taken at Stiklestad, and
+      then it became difficult for Kalf to give the king satisfaction in
+      anything. Once it happened there were many men with the king bringing
+      their affairs before him; and Thorgeir Flek from Sula in Veradal, of whom
+      mention is made before in the history of King Olaf the Saint, came to him
+      about some needful business. The king paid no attention to his words, but
+      was listening to people who stood near him. Then Thorgeir said to the
+      king, so loud that all who were around him could hear: -
+     "Listen, my lord, to my plain word.
+     I too was there, and had to bear
+     A bloody head from Stiklestad:
+     For I was then with Olaf's men.
+     Listen to me: well did I see
+     The men you're trusting the dead corpse thrusting
+     Out of their way, as dead it lay;
+     And striking o'er your father's gore."
+      There was instantly a great uproar, and some told Thorgeir to go out; but
+      the king called him, and not only despatched his business to his
+      satisfaction, but promised him favour and friendship.
+      15. KALF ARNASON FLIES THE COUNTRY
+      Soon after this the king was at a feast at the farm of Haug in Veradel,
+      and at the dinner-table Kalf Arnason sat upon one side of him, and Einar
+      Tambaskelfer on the other. It was already come so far that the king took
+      little notice of Kalf, but paid most attention to Einar. The king said to
+      Einar, "Let us ride to-day to Stiklestad. I should like to see the
+      memorials of the things which took place there." Einar replies, "I can
+      tell thee nothing about it; but take thy foster-father Kalf with thee; he
+      can give thee information about all that took place." When the tables were
+      removed, the king made himself ready, and said to Kalf, "Thou must go with
+      me to Stiklestad."
+      Kalf replied, "That is really not my duty."
+      Then the king stood up in a passion, and said, "Go thou shalt, Kalf!" and
+      thereupon he went out.
+      Kalf put on his riding clothes in all haste, and said to his foot-boy,
+      "Thou must ride directly to Eggja, and order my house-servants to ship all
+      my property on board my ship before sunset."
+      King Magnus now rides to Stiklestad, and Kalf with him. They alighted from
+      horseback, and went to the place where the battle had been. Then said the
+      king to Kalf, "Where is the spot at which the king fell?"
+      Kalf stretched out his spear-shaft, and said, "There he lay when he fell."
+      The king: "And where wast thou, Kalf?"
+      Kalf: "Here where I am now standing."
+      The king turned red as blood in the face, and said, "Then thy axe could
+      well have reached him."
+      Kalf replied, "My axe did not come near him;" and immediately went to his
+      horse, sprang on horseback, and rode away with all his men; and the king
+      rode back to Haug. Kalf did not stop until he got home in the evening to
+      Eggja. There his ship lay ready at the shore side, and all his effects
+      were on board, and the vessel manned with his house-servants. They set off
+      immediately by night down the fjord, and afterwards proceeded day and
+      night, when the wind suited. He sailed out into the West sea, and was
+      there a long time plundering in Ireland, Scotland, and the Hebudes. Bjarne
+      Gullbrarskald tells of this in the song about Kalf: -
+     "Brother of Thorberg, who still stood
+     Well with the king!  in angry mood
+     He is the first to break with thee,
+     Who well deserves esteemed to be;
+     He is the first who friendship broke,
+     For envious men the falsehood spoke;
+     And he will he the first to rue
+     The breach of friendship 'twixt you two."
+      16. OF THE THREATS OF THE BONDES.
+      King Magnus added to his property Veggia, which Hrut had been owner of,
+      and Kviststad, which had belonged to Thorgeir, and also Eggja, with all
+      the goods which Kalf had left behind him; and thus he confiscated to the
+      king's estate many great farms, which had belonged to those of the
+      bonde-army who had fallen at Stiklestad. In like manner, he laid heavy
+      fined upon many of those who made the greatest opposition to King Olaf. He
+      drove some out of the country, took large sums of money from others, and
+      had the cattle of others slaughtered for his use. Then the bondes began to
+      murmur, and to say among themselves, "Will he go on in the same way as his
+      father and other chiefs, whom we made an end of when their pride and
+      lawless proceedings became insupportable?" This discontent spread widely
+      through the country. The people of Sogn gathered men, and, it was said,
+      were determined to give battle to King Magnus, if he came into the Fjord
+      district. King Magnus was then in Hordaland, where he had remained a long
+      time with a numerous retinue, and was now come to the resolution to
+      proceed north to Sogn. When the king's friends observed this, twelve men
+      had a meeting, and resolved to determine by casting lots which of them
+      should inform the king of the discontent of the people; and it so happened
+      that the lot fell upon Sigvat.
+      17. OF THE FREE-SPEAKING SONG ("BERSOGLISVISUR").
+      Sigvat accordingly composed a poem, which he called the "Free-speaking
+      Song", which begins with saying the king had delayed too long to pacify
+      the people, who were threatening to rise in tumult against him. He said: -
+     "Here in the south, from Sogn is spread
+     The news that strife draws to a head:
+     The bondes will the king oppose -
+     Kings and their folk should ne'er be foes.
+     Let us take arms, and briskly go
+     To battle, if it must be so;
+     Defend our king -but still deplore
+     His land plunged in such strife once more."
+      In this song are also these verses: -
+     "Hakon, who at Fitiar died, -
+     Hakon the Good, could not abide
+     The viking rule, or robber train,
+     And all men's love he thus did gain.
+     The people since have still in mind
+     The laws of Hakon, just and kind;
+     And men will never see the day
+     When Hakon's laws have passed away.
+
+     "The bondes ask but what is fair;
+     The Olafs and the Earls, when there
+     Where Magnus sits, confirmed to all
+     Their lands and gear -to great and small,
+     Bold Trygve's son, and Harald's heir,
+     The Olafs, while on earth they were,
+     Observed the laws themselves had made,
+     And none was for his own afraid.
+
+     "Let not thy counsellors stir thy wrath
+     Against the man who speaks the truth;
+     Thy honour lies in thy good sword,
+     But still more in thy royal word;
+     And, if the people do not lie,
+     The new laws turn out not nigh
+     So Just and mild, as the laws given
+     At Ulfasund in face of heaven.
+
+     "Dread king!  who urges thee to break
+     Thy pledged word, and back to take
+     Thy promise given?  Thou warrior bold;
+     With thy own people word to hold,
+     Thy promise fully to maintain,
+     Is to thyself the greatest gain:
+     The battle-storm raiser he
+     Must by his own men trusted be.
+
+     "Who urges thee, who seek'st renown,
+     The bondes' cattle to cut down?
+     No king before e'er took in hand
+     Such viking-work in his own land.
+     Such rapine men will not long bear,
+     And the king's counsellors will but share
+     In their ill-will: when once inflamed,
+     The king himself for all is blamed.
+
+     "Do cautious, with this news of treason
+     Flying about -give them no reason.
+     We hange the thief, but then we use
+     Consideration of the excuse.
+     I think, great king (who wilt rejoice
+     Eagle and wolf with battle voice),
+     It would be wise not to oppose
+     Thy bondes, and make them thy foes.
+
+     "A dangerous sign it is, I fear,
+     That old grey-bearded men appear
+     In corners whispering at the Thing,
+     As if they had bad news to bring.
+     The young sit still, -no laugh, or shout, -
+     More looks than words passing shout;
+     And groups of whispering heads are seen,
+     On buttoned breasts, with lowering mien.
+
+     "Among the udalmen, they say
+     The king, if he could have his way,
+     Would seize the bondes' udal land,
+     And free-born men must this withstand.
+     In truth the man whose udal field,
+     By any doom that law can yield
+     From him adjudged the king would take,
+     Could the king's throne and power shake."
+      This verse is the last: -
+     "A holy bond between us still
+     Makes me wish speedy end to ill:
+     The sluggard waits till afternoon, -
+     At once great Magnus!  grant our boon.
+     Then we will serve with heart and hand,
+     With thee we'll fight by sea or land:
+     With Olaf's sword take Olaf's mind,
+     And to thy bondes be more kind."
+      In this song the king was exhorted to observe the laws which his father
+      had established. This exhortation had a good effect on the king, for many
+      others held the same language to him. So at last the king consulted the
+      most prudent men, who ordered all affairs according to law. Thereafter
+      King Magnus had the law-book composed in writing which is still in use in
+      Throndhjem district, and is called "The Grey Goose" (1). King Magnus
+      afterwards became very popular, and was beloved by all the country people,
+      and therefore he was called Magnus the Good.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) "The Grey Goose", so called probably from the colour of
+     the parchment on which it is written, is one of the most curious
+     relics of the Middle Ages, and give us an unexpected view of
+     the social condition of the Northmen in the eleventh
+     century.  Law appears to have been so far advanced among
+     them that the forms were not merely established, but the
+     slightest breach of the legal forms of proceeding involved
+     the loss of the case.  The "Grey Goose" embraces subjects
+     not dealt with probably by any other code in Europe at that
+     period.  The provision for the poor, the  equality of
+     weights and measures, police of markets and of sea havens,
+     provision for illegitimate children of the poor, inns for
+     travellers, wages of servants and support of them in
+     sickness, protection of pregnant women and even of domestic
+     animals from injury, roads, bridges, vagrants, beggars, are
+     subjects treated of in this code. -"Schlegel." -L.
+      18. OF THE ENGLISH KINGS.
+      The king of the English, King Harald, died (A.D. 1040) five years after
+      his father King Canute, and was buried beside his father at Winchester.
+      After his death his brother Hardaknut, the second son of the old King
+      Canute, was king of England, and was thus king both of Denmark and
+      England. He ruled these kingdoms two years, and then died of sickness in
+      England, leaving no children. He was buried at Winchester beside his
+      father. After his death Edward the Good, a son of the English king
+      Ethelred (and Emma, a daughter of Richard earl of Rouen), was chosen king
+      in England. King Edward the Good was, on his mother's side, a brother of
+      Harald and Hardaknut, the sons of Canute the Great; and the daughter of
+      Canute and Queen Emma was Gunhild, who was married to the Emperor Henry of
+      Germany, who was called Henry the Mild. Gunhild had been three years in
+      Germamy when she fell sick, and she died five years after the death of her
+      father King Canute the Great.
+      19. OF KING MAGNUS OLAFSON.
+      When King Magnus Olafson heard of Hardaknut's death, he immediately sent
+      people south to Denmark, with a message to the men who had bound
+      themselves by oath to the peace and agreement which was made between King
+      Magnus and Hardaknut, and reminded them of their pledge. He added, as a
+      conclusion, that in summer (A.D. 1042.) he would come with his army to
+      Denmark to take possession of his Danish dominions, in terms of the
+      agreement, or to fall in the field with his army. So says Arnor, the
+      earls' skald: -
+     "Wise were the words, exceeding wise,
+     Of him who stills the hungriest cries
+     Of beasts of prey -the earl's lord;
+     And soon fulfilled will be his word:
+     'With his good sword he'll Denmark gain,
+     Or fall upon a bloody plain;
+     And rather than give up his cause,
+     Will leave his corpse to raven's claws.'"
+      20. KING MAGNUS'S ARMAMENT.
+      Thereafter King Magnus gathered together a great army, and summoned to him
+      all lendermen and powerful bondes, and collected war-ships. When the army
+      was assembled it was very handsome, and well fitted out. He had seventy
+      large vessels when he sailed from Norway. So says Thiodolf the skald: -
+     "Brave king!  the terror of the foe,
+     With thee will many a long-ship go.
+     Full seventy sail are gathered here,
+     Eastward with their great king to steer.
+     And southward now the bright keel glides;
+     O'er the white waves the Bison rides.
+     Sails swell, yards crack, the highest mast
+     O'er the wide sea scarce seen at last."
+      Here it related that King Magnus had the great Bison, which his father
+      King Olaf had built. It had more than thirty banks of rowers; and forward
+      on the bow was a great buffalo head, and aft on the stern-post was its
+      tail. Both the head and the tail, and both sides of the ship, were gilded
+      over. Of this speaks Arnor, the earls' skald: -
+     "The white foam lashing o'er the deck
+     Oft made the glided head to shake;
+     The helm down, the vessel's heel
+     Oft showed her stem's bright-glacing steel.
+     Around Stavanger-point careering,
+     Through the wild sea's white flames steering,
+     Tackle loud singing to the strain,
+     The storm-horse flies to Denmark's plain."
+      King Magnus set out to sea from Agder, and sailed over to Jutland. So says
+      Arnor: -
+     "I can relate how through the gale
+     The gallant Bison carried sail.
+     With her lee gunwale in the wave,
+     The king on board, Magnus the brave!
+     The iron-clad Thingmen's chief to see
+     On Jutland's coast right glad were we, -
+     Right glad our men to see a king
+     Who in the fight his sword could swing."
+      21. KING MAGNUS COMES TO DENMARK.
+      When King Magnus came to Denmark he was joyfully received. He appointed a
+      Thing without delay, to which he summoned the people of the country, and
+      desired they would take him as king, according to the agreement which had
+      been entered into. As the highest of the chiefs of the country were bound
+      by oath to King Magnus, and were desirous of keeping their word and oath,
+      they endeavoured zealously to promote the cause with the people. It
+      contributed also that King Canute the Great, and all his descendants, were
+      dead; and a third assistance was, that his father King Olaf's sanctity and
+      miracles were become celebrated in all countries.
+      22. KING MAGNUS CHOSEN KING OF DENMARK.
+      King Magnus afterwards ordered the people to be summoned to Viborg to a
+      Thing. Both in older and later times, the Danes elected their kings at the
+      Viborg Thing. At this Thing the Danes chose Magnus Olafson to be king of
+      all the Danish dorninions. King Magnus remained long in Denmark during the
+      summer (A.D. 1042); and wherever he came the people received him joyfully,
+      and obeyed him willingly. He divided the country into baronies and
+      districts, and gave fiefs to men of power in the land. Late in autumn he
+      returned with his fleet to Norway, but lay for some time at the Gaut
+      river.
+      23. OF SVEIN ULFSON.
+      There was a man, by name Svein, a son of Earl Ulf, and grandson of
+      Thorgils Sprakaleg. Svein's mother was Astrid, a daughter of King Svein
+      Forkbeard. She was a sister of Canute the Great by the father's side, and
+      of the Swedish King Olaf Eirikson by the mother's side; for her mother was
+      Queen Sigrid the Haughty, a daughter of Skoglar Toste. Svein Ulfson had
+      been a long time living with his relation the Swedish king, ever since
+      King Canute had ordered his father Ulf to be killed, as is related in the
+      saga of old King Canute, that he had his brother-in-law, Earl Ulf,
+      murdered in Roskilde; and on which account Svein had not since been in
+      Denmark. Svein Ulfson was one of the handsomest men that could be seen; he
+      was very stout and strong, and very expert in all exercises, and a
+      well-spoken man withal. Every one who knew him said he had every quality
+      which became a good chief. Svein Ulfson waited upon King Magnus while he
+      lay in the Gaut river, as before mentioned, and the king received him
+      kindly, as he was by many advised to do; for Svein was a particularly
+      popular man. He could also speak for himself to the king well and
+      cleverly; so that it came at lasf to Svein's entering into King Magnus's
+      service, and becoming his man. They often talked together afterwards in
+      private concerning many affairs.
+      24. SVEIN ULFSON CREATED AN EARL.
+      One day, as King Magnus sat in his high-seat and many people were around
+      him, Svein Ulfson sat upon a footstool before the king. The king then made
+      a speech: "Be it known to you, chiefs, and the people in general, that I
+      have taken the following resolution. Here is a distinguished man, both for
+      family and for his own merits, Svein Ulfson, who has entered into my
+      service, and given me promise of fidelity. Now, as ye know, the Danes have
+      this summer become my men, so that when I am absent from the country it is
+      without a head; and it is not unknown to you how it is ravaged by the
+      people of Vindland, Kurland, and others from the Baltic, as well as by
+      Saxons. Therefore I promised them a chief who could defend and rule their
+      land; and I know no man better fitted, in all respects, for this than
+      Svein Ulfson, who is of birth to be chief of the country. I will therefore
+      make him my earl, and give him the government of my Danish dominions while
+      I am in Norway; just as King Canute the Great set his father, Earl Ulf,
+      over Denmark while he was in England."
+      Then Einar Tambaskelfer said, "Too great an earl -too great an earl,
+      my foster-son!"
+      The king replied in a passion, "Ye have a poor opinion of my judgment, I
+      think. Some consider that ye are too great earls, and others that ye are
+      fit for nothing."
+      Then the king stood up, took a sword, and girt it on the earl's loins, and
+      took a shield and fastened it on his shoulders, put a helmet upon his
+      head, and gave him the title of earl, with the same fiefs in Denmark which
+      his father Earl Ulf had formerly held. Afterwards a shrine was brought
+      forth containing holy relics, and Svein laid his hand hereon, and swore
+      the oath of fidelity to King Magnus; upon which the king led the earl to
+      the highseat by his side. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Twas at the Gaut river's shore,
+     With hand on shrine Svein Ulfson swore.
+     King Magnus first said o'er the oath,
+     With which Svein Ulfson pledged his troth.
+     The vows by Svein solemnly given,
+     On holy bones of saints in heaven,
+     To Magnus seemed both fair and fast;
+     He found they were too fair to last."
+      Earl Svein went thereafter to Denmark, and the whole nation received him
+      well. He established a court about him, and soon became a great man. In
+      winter (A.D. 1043), he went much about the country, and made friends among
+      the powerful chiefs; and, indeed, he was beloved by all the people of the
+      land.
+      25. KING MAGNUS'S FORAY.
+      King Magnus proceeded northward to Norway with his fleet, and wintered
+      there; but when the spring set in (A.D. 1048) he gathered a large force,
+      with which he sailed south to Demnark, having heard the news from Vindland
+      that the Vindland people in Jomsborg had withdrawn from their submission
+      to him. The Danish kings had formerly had a very large earldom there, and
+      they first founded Jomsborg; and now the place was become a very strong
+      fortress. When King Magnus heard of this, he ordered a large fleet and
+      army to be levied in Denmark, and sailed in summer to Vindland with all
+      his forces, which made a very large army altogether. Arnor, the earls'
+      skald, tells of it thus: -
+     "Now in this strophe, royal youth!
+     I tell no more than the plain truth.
+     Thy armed outfit from the strand
+     Left many a keel-trace on the sand,
+     And never did a king before
+     SO many ships to any shore
+     Lead on, as thou to Vindland's isle:
+     The Vindland men in fright recoil."
+      Now when King Magnus came to Vindland he attacked Jomsborg, and soon took
+      the fortress, killing' many people, burning and destroying both in the
+      town and in the courttry all around, and making the greatest havoc. So
+      says Arnor, the earl's skald: -
+     "The robbers, hemmed 'twixt death and fire,
+     Knew not how to escape thy ire;
+     O'er Jomsborg castle's highest towers
+     Thy wrath the whirlwind-fire pours.
+     The heathen on his false gods calls,
+     And trembles even in their halls;
+     And by the light from its own flame
+     The king this viking-hold o'ercame."
+      Many people in Vindland submitted to King Magnus, but many more got out of
+      the way and fled. King Magnus returned to Denmark, and prepared to take
+      his winter abode there, and sent away the Danish, and also a great many of
+      the Norwegian people he had brought with him.
+      26. SVEIN RECEIVES THE TITLE OF KING.
+      The same winter (A.D. 1043), in which Svein Ulfson was raised to the
+      government of the whole Danish dominions, and had made friends of a great
+      number of the principal chiefs in Denmark, and obtained the affections of
+      the people, he assumed by the advice of many of the chiefs the title of
+      king. But when in the spring thereafter he heard that King Magnus had come
+      from the north with a great army, Svein went over to Scania, from thence
+      up to Gautland, and so on to Svithjod to his relation, King Emund, where
+      he remained all summer, and sent spies out to Denmark, to inquire about
+      the king's proceedings and the number of his men. Now when Svein heard
+      that King Magnus had let a great part of his army go away, and also that
+      he was south in Jutland, he rode from Svithjod with a great body of peopie
+      which the Swedish king had given him. When Svein came to Scania the people
+      of that country received him well, treated him as their king, and men
+      joined him in crowds. He then went on to Seeland, where he was also well
+      received, and the whole country joined him. He then went to Fyen, and laid
+      all the islands under his power; and as the people also joined him, he
+      collected a great army and many ships of war.
+      27. OF KING MAGNUS'S MILITARY FORCE.
+      King Magnus heard this news, and at the same time that the people of
+      Vindland had a large force on foot. He summoned people therefore to come
+      to him, and drew together a great army in Jutland. Otto, also, the Duke of
+      Brunsvik, who had married Ulfhild, King Olaf the Saint's daughter, and the
+      sister of King Magnus, came to him with a great troop. The Danish chiefs
+      pressed King Magnus to advance against the Vindland army, and not allow
+      pagans to march over and lay waste the country; so it was resolved that
+      the king with his army should proceed south to Heidaby. While King Magnus
+      lay at Skotborg river, on Hlyrskog Heath, he got intelligence concerning
+      the Vindland army, and that it was so numerous it could not be counted;
+      whereas King Magnus had so few, that there seemed no chance for him but to
+      fly. The king, however, determined on fighting, if there was any
+      possibility of gaining the victory; but the most dissuaded him from
+      venturing on an engagement, and all, as one man, said that the Vindland
+      people had undoubtedly a prodigious force. Duke Otto, however, pressed
+      much to go to battle. Then the king ordered the whole army to be gathered
+      by the war trumpets into battle array, and ordered all the men to arm, and
+      to lie down for the night under their shields; for he was told the enemy's
+      army had come to the neighbourhood. The king was very thoughtful; for he
+      was vexed that he should be obliged to fly, which fate he had never
+      experienced before. He slept but little all night, and chanted his
+      prayers.
+      28. OF KING OLAF'S MIRACLE.
+      The following day was Michaelmas eve. Towards dawn the king slumbered, and
+      dreamt that his father, King Olaf the Saint, appeared to him, and said,
+      "Art thou so melancholy and afraid, because the Vindland people come
+      against thee with a great army? Be not afraid of heathens, although they
+      be many; for I shall be with thee in the battle. Prepare, therefore, to
+      give battle to the Vindlanders, when thou hearest my trumpet." When the
+      king awoke he told his dream to his men, and the day was then dawning. At
+      that moment all the people heard a ringing of bells in the air; and those
+      among King Magnus's men who had been in Nidaros thought that it was the
+      ringing of the bell called Glod, which King Olaf had presented to the
+      church of Saint Clement in the town of Nidaros.
+      29. BATTLE OF HLYRSKOG HEATH.
+      Then King Magnus stood up, and ordered the war trumpets to sound, and at
+      that moment the Vindland army advanced from the south across the river
+      against him; on which the whole of the king's army stood up, and advanced
+      against the heathens. King Magnus threw off from him his coat of
+      ring-mail, and had a red silk shirt outside over his clothes, and had in
+      his hands the battle-axe called Hel (1), which had belonged to King Olaf.
+      King Magnus ran on before all his men to the enemy's army, and instantly
+      hewed down with both hands every man who came against him. So says Arnor,
+      the earls' skald: -
+     "His armour on the ground he flung
+     His broad axe round his head he swung;
+     And Norway's king strode on in might,
+     Through ringing swords, to the wild fight.
+     His broad axe Hel with both hands wielding,
+     Shields, helms, and skulls before it yielding,
+     He seemed with Fate the world to share,
+     And life or death to deal out there."
+      This battle was not very long; for the king's men were very fiery, and
+      where they came the Vindland men fell as thick as tangles heaped up by the
+      waves on the strand. They who stood behind betook themselves to flight,
+      and were hewed down like cattle at a slaughter. The king himself drove the
+      fugitives eastward over the heath, and people fell all over the moor. So
+      says Thiodolf: -
+     "And foremost he pursued,
+     And the flying foe down hewed;
+     An eagle's feast each stroke,
+     As the Vindland helms he broke.
+     He drove them o'er the hearth,
+     And they fly from bloody death;
+     But the moor, a mile or more,
+     With the dead was studded o'er."
+      It is a common saying, that there never was so great a slaughter of men in
+      the northern lands, since the time of Christianity, as took place among
+      the Vindland people on Hlyrskog's Heath. On the other side, not many of
+      King Magnus's people were killed, although many were wounded. After the
+      battle the king ordered the wounds of his men to be bound; but there were
+      not so many doctors in the army as were necessary, so the king himself
+      went round, and felt the hands of those he thought best suited for the
+      business; and when he had thus stroked their palms, he named twelve men,
+      who, he thought, had the softest hands, and told them to bind the wounds
+      of the people; and although none of them had ever tried it before, they
+      all became afterwards the best of doctors. There were two Iceland men
+      among them; the one was Thorkil, a son of Geire, from Lyngar; the other
+      was Atle, father of Bard Svarte of Selardal, from whom many good doctors
+      are descended. After this battle, the report of the miracle which King
+      Olaf the Saint had worked was spread widely through the country; and it
+      was the common saying of the people, that no man could venture to fight
+      against King Magnus Olafson, for his father Saint Olaf stood so near to
+      him that his enemies, on that account, never could do him harm.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Hel -Death: the goddess of Death. -L.
+      30. BATTLE AT RE.
+      King Magnus immediately turned round with his army against Svein, whom he
+      called his earl, although the Danes called him their king; and he
+      collected ships, and a great force, and on both sides a great strength was
+      assembled. In Svein's army were many chiefs from Scania, Halland, Seeland,
+      and Fyen; while King Magnus, on the other hand, had mostly Norway and
+      Jutland men, and with that war-force he hastened to meet Svein. They met
+      at Re, near Vestland; and there was a great battle, which ended in King
+      Magnus gaining the victory, and Svein taking flight. After losing many
+      people, Svein fled back to Scania, and from thence to Gautland, which was
+      a safe refuge if he needed it, and stood open to him. King Magnus returned
+      to Jutland, where he remained all winter (A.D. 1044) with many people, and
+      had a guard to watch his ships. Arnor, the earls' skald, speaks of this: -
+     "At Re our battle-loving lord
+     In bloody meeting stained his sword, -
+     At Re upon the western shore,
+     In Vestland warrior's blood once more."
+      31. BATTLE AT AROS.
+      Svein Ulfson went directly to his ships as soon as he heard that King
+      Magnus had left his fleet. He drew to him all the men he could, and went
+      round in winter among the islands, Seeland, Fyen, and others. Towards Yule
+      he sailed to Jutland, and went into Limfjord, where many people submitted
+      to him. He imposed scat upon some, but some joined King Magnus. Now when
+      King Magnus heard what Svein was doing, he betook himself to his ships
+      with all the Northmen then in Denmark, and a part of the Danish troops,
+      and steered south along the land. Svein was then in Aros with a great
+      force; and when he heard of King Magnus he laid his vessels without the
+      town, and prepared for battle. When King Magnus heard for certain where
+      Svein was, and that the distance between them was but short, he held a
+      House-thing, and addressed his people thus: "It is reported to me that the
+      earl and his fleet are lying not far from us, and that he has many people.
+      Now I would let you know that I intend to go out against the earl and
+      fight for it, although, we have fewer people. We will, as formerly, put
+      our trust in God, and Saint Olaf, my father, who has given us victory
+      sometimes when we fought, even though we had fewer men than the enemy. Now
+      I would have you get ready to seek out the enemy, and give battle the
+      moment we find him by rowing all to attack, and being all ready for
+      battle." Thereupon the men put on their weapons, each man making himself
+      and his place ready; and then they stretched themselves to their oars.
+      When they saw the earl's ships they rowed towards them, and made ready to
+      attack. When Svein's men saw the forces they armed themselves, bound their
+      ships together, and then began one of the sharpest of battles. So says
+      Thiodolf, the skald: -
+     "Shield against shield, the earl and king
+     Made shields and swords together ring.
+     The gold-decked heroes made a play
+     Which Hild's iron-shirt men say
+     They never saw before or since
+     On battle-deck; the brave might wince,
+     As spear and arrow whistling flew,
+     Point blank, death-bringing, quick and true."
+      They fought at the bows, so that the men only on the bows could strike;
+      the men on the forecastle thrust with spears: and all who were farther off
+      shot with light spears or javelins, or war-arrows. Some fought with stones
+      or short stakes; and those who were aft of the mast shot with the bow. So
+      Says Thiodolf: -
+     "Steel-pointed spear, and sharpened stake,
+     Made the broad shield on arm shake:
+     The eagle, hovering in the air,
+     Screamed o'er the prey preparing there.
+     And stones and arrows quickly flew,
+     And many a warrior bold they slew.
+     The bowman never twanged his bow
+     And drew his shaft so oft as now;
+     And Throndhjem's bowmen on that day
+     Were not the first tired of this play:
+     Arrows and darts so quickly fly,
+     You could not follow with the eye."
+      Here it appears how hot the battle was with casting weapons. King Magnus
+      stood in the beginning of the battle within a shield-rampart; but as it
+      appeared to him that matters were going on too slowly, he leaped over the
+      shields, and rushed forward in the ship, encouraging his men with a loud
+      cheer, and springing to the bows, where the battle was going on hand to
+      hand. When his men saw this they urged each other on with mutual cheering,
+      and there was one great hurrah through all the ships. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "'On with our ships!  on to the foe!'
+     Cry Magnus' men -on, on they go.
+     Spears against shields in fury rattle, -
+     Was never seen so fierce a battle."
+      And now the battle was exceedingly sharp; and in the assault Svein's ship
+      was cleared of all her forecastle men, upon and on both sides of the
+      forecastle. Then Magnus boarded Svein's ship, followed by his men; and one
+      after the other came up, and made so stout an assault that Svein's men
+      gave way, and King Magnus first cleared that ship, and then the rest, one
+      after the other. Svein fled, with a great part of his people; but many
+      fell, and many got life and peace. Thiodolf tells of this: -
+     "Brave Magnus, from the stern springing
+     On to the stem, where swords were ringing
+     From his sea-raven's beak of gold
+     Deals death around -the brave!  the bold!
+     The earl's housemen now begin
+     To shrink and fall: their ranks grow thin -
+     The king's luck thrives -their decks are cleared,
+     Of fighting men no more appeared.
+     The earl's ships are driven to flight,
+     Before the king would stop the fight:
+     The gold-distributor first then
+     Gave quarters to the vanquished men."
+      This battle was fought on the last Sunday before Yule. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "'Twas on a Sunday morning bright,
+     Fell out this great and bloody fight,
+     When men were arming, fighting, dying,
+     Or on the red decks wounded lying.
+     And many a man, foredoomed to die,
+     To save his life o'erboard did fly,
+     But sank; for swimming could not save,
+     And dead men rolled in every wave."
+      Magnus took seven ships from Svein's people. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Thick Olaf's son seven vessels cleared,
+     And with his fleet the prizes steered.
+     The Norway girls will not be sad
+     To hear such news -each from her lad."
+      He also sings: -
+     "The captured men will grieve the most
+     Svein and their comrades to have lost;
+     For it went ill with those who fled,
+     Their wounded had no easy bed.
+     A heavy storm that very night
+     O'ertook them flying from the fight;
+     And skulls and bones are tumbling round,
+     Under the sea, on sandy ground."
+      Svein fled immediately by night to Seeland, with the men who had escaped
+      and were inclined to follow him; but King Magnus brought his ships to the
+      shore, and sent his men up the country in the night-time, and early in the
+      morning they came flown to the strand with a great booty in cattle.
+      Thiodolf tells about it: -
+     "But yesterday with heavy stones
+     We crushed their skulls, and broke their bones,
+     And thinned their ranks; and now to-day
+     Up through their land we've ta'en our way,
+     And driven their cattle to the shore,
+     And filled out ships with food in store.
+     To save his land from our quick swords,
+     Svein will need something more than words."
+      32. SVEIN'S FLIGHT.
+      King Magnus sailed with his fleet from the south after Svein to Seeland;
+      but as soon as the king came there Svein fled up the country with his men,
+      and Magnus followed them, and pursued the fugitives, killing all that were
+      laid hold of. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "The Seeland girl asks with fear,
+     'Whose blood-bespattered shield and spear -
+     The earl's or king's -up from the shore
+     Moved on with many a warrior more?'
+     We scoured through all their muddy lanes,
+     Woodlands, and fields, and miry plains.
+     Their hasty footmarks in the clay
+     Showed that to Ringsted led their way.
+
+     "Spattered with mud from heel to head,
+     Our gallant lord his true men led.
+     Will Lund's earl halt his hasty flight,
+     And try on land another fight?
+     His banner yesterday was seen,
+     The sand-bills and green trees between,
+     Through moss and mire to the strand,
+     In arrow flight, leaving the land."
+      Then Svein fled over to Fyen Island, and King Magnus carried fire and
+      sword through Seeland, and burnt all round, because their men had joined
+      Svein's troop in harvest. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "As Svein in winter had destroyed
+     The royal house, the king employed
+     No little force to guard the land,
+     And the earl's forays to withstand.
+     An armed band one morn he found,
+     And so beset them round and round,
+     That Canute's nephew quickly fled,
+     Or he would have been captive led.
+
+     "Our Throndhjem king in his just ire
+     Laid waste the land with sword and fire,
+     Burst every house, and over all
+     Struck terror into great and small.
+     To the earl's friends he well repaid
+     Their deadly hate -such wild work made
+     On them and theirs, that from his fury,
+     Flying for life, away they hurry."
+      33. BURNING IN FYEN.
+      As soon as King Magnus heard that Svein with his troops had gone across to
+      Fyen, he sailed after them; and when Svein heard this news he went on
+      board ship and sailed to Scania, and from thence to Gautland, and at last
+      to the Swedish King. King Magnus landed in Fyen, and plundered and burned
+      over all; and all of Svein's men who came there fled far enough. Thiodolf
+      speaks of it thus: -
+     "Fiona isle, once green and fair,
+     Lies black and reeking through the air:
+     The red fog rises, thick and hot,
+     From burning farm and smouldering cot.
+     The gaping thralls in terror gaze
+     On the broad upward-spiring blaze,
+     From thatched roofs and oak-built walls,
+     Their murdered masters' stately halls.
+
+     "Svein's men, my girl, will not forget
+     That thrice they have the Norsemen met,
+     By sea, by land, with steel, with fire,
+     Thrice have they felt the Norse king's ire.
+     Fiona's maids are slim and fair,
+     The lovely prizes, lads, we'll share:
+     Some stand to arms in rank and row,
+     Some seize, bring off, and fend with blow."
+      After this the people of Denmark submitted to King Magnus, and during the
+      rest of the winter, there was peace. King Magnus then appointed some of
+      his men to govern Denmark; and when spring was advanced he sailed
+      northwards with his fleet to Norway, where he remained a great part of the
+      summer.
+      34. BATTLE AT HELGANES
+      Now, when Svein heard that King Magnus had gone to Norway he rode straight
+      down, and had many people out of Svithjod with him. The people of Scania
+      received him well, and he again collected an army, with which he first
+      crossed over into Seeland and seized upon it and Fyen, and all the other
+      isles. When King Magnus heard of this he gathered together men and ships,
+      and sailed to Denmark; and as soon as he knew where Svein was lying with
+      his ships King Magnus sailed to meet him. They met at a place called
+      Helganes, and the battle began about the fall of day. King Magnus had
+      fewer men, but larger and better equipt vessels. So says Arnor, the earls'
+      skald: -
+     "At Helganes -so goes the tale -
+     The brave wolf-feeder, under sail,
+     Made many an ocean-elk (1) his prey,
+     Seized many a ship ere break of day.
+     When twilight fell he urged the fight,
+     Close combat -man to man all night;
+     Through a long harvest night's dark hours,
+     Down poured the battle's iron showers."
+      The battle was very hot, and as night advanced the fall of men was great.
+      King Magnus, during the whole night, threw hand-spears. Thiodolf speaks of
+      this: -
+     "And there at Helganes sunk down,
+     Sore wounded, men of great renown;
+     And Svein's retainers lost all heart,
+     Ducking before the flying dart.
+     The Norsemen's king let fly his spears,
+     His death-wounds adding to their fears;
+     For each spear-blade was wet all o'er,
+     Up to the shaft in their life-gore."
+      To make a short tale, King Magnus won the victory in this battle, and
+      Svein fled. His ship was cleared of men from stem to stern; and it went so
+      on board many others of his ships. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Earl Svein fled from the empty deck,
+     His lonely ship an unmann'd wreck;
+     Magnus the Good, the people's friend,
+     Pressed to the death on the false Svein.
+     Hneiter (2), the sword his father bore,
+     Was edge and point, stained red with gore;
+     Swords sprinkle blood o'er armour bright,
+
+     When kings for land and power fight."
+      And Arnor says: -
+     "The cutters of Bjorn's own brother
+     Soon changed their owner for another;
+     The king took them and all their gear;
+     The crews, however, got off clear."
+      A great number of Svein's men fell, and King Magnus and his men had a vast
+      booty to divide. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Where the Norsemen the Danish slew,
+     A Gautland shield and breast-plate true
+     Fell to my share of spoil by lot;
+     And something more i' the south I got:
+     (There all the summer swords were ringing)
+     A helm, gay arms, and gear worth bringing,
+     Home to my quiet lovely one
+     I sent -with news how we had won."
+      Svein fled up to Scania with all the men who escaped with him; and King
+      Magnus and his people drove the fugitives up through the country without
+      meeting any opposition either from Svein's men or the bondes. So says
+      Thiodolf: -
+     "Olaf's brave son then gave command,
+     All his ships' crews should quickly land:
+     King Magnus, marching at their head,
+     A noble band of warriors led.
+     A foray through the land he makes;
+     Denmark in every quarter shakes.
+     Up hill and down the horses scour,
+     Carrying the Danes from Norsemen's power."
+      King Magnus drove with fire and sword through the land. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "And now the Norsemen storm along,
+     Following their banner in a throng:
+     King Magnus' banner flames on high,
+     A star to guide our roaming by.
+     To Lund, o'er Scania's peaceful field,
+     My shoulder bore my useless shield;
+     A fairer land, a better road,
+     As friend or foe, I never trod."
+      They began to burn the habitations all around, and the people fled on
+      every side. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Our ice-cold iron in great store,
+     Our arms, beside the king we bore:
+     The Scanian rogues fly at the view
+     Of men and steel all sharp and true.
+     Their timbered houses flame on high,
+     Red flashing over half the sky;
+     The blazing town flings forth its light,
+     Lighting the cowards on their flight."
+      And he also sang: -
+     "The king o'er all the Danish land
+     Roams, with his fire-bringing band:
+     The house, the hut, the farm, the town,
+     All where men dwelt is burned down.
+     O'er Denmark's plains and corn-fields,
+     Meadows and moors, are seen our shields:
+     Victorious over all, we chase
+     Svein's wounded men from place to place.
+
+     "Across Fiona's moor again,
+     The paths late trodden by our men
+     We tread once more, until quite near,
+     Through morning mist, the foes appear.
+     Then up our numerous banners flare
+     In the cold early morning air;
+     And they from Magnus' power who fly
+     Cannot this quick war-work deny."
+      Then Svein fled eastwards along Scania, and King Magnus returned to his
+      ships, and steered eastwards also along the Scanian coast, having got
+      ready with the greatest haste to sail. Thiodolf sings thus about it: -
+     "No drink but the salt sea
+     On board our ships had we,
+     When, following our king,
+     On board our ships we spring.
+     Hard work on the salt sea,
+     Off Scania's coast, had we;
+     But we laboured for the king,
+     To his foemen death to bring."
+      Svein fled to Gautland, and then sought refuge with the Swedish king, with
+      whom he remained all winter (A.D. 1046), and was treated with great
+      respect.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Ship. -L.
+     (2) This was the name of Saint Olaf's sword,
+     which Magnus had recovered. -L.
+      35. OF KING MAGNUS'S CAMPAIGN.
+      When King Magnus had subdued Scania he turned about, and first went to
+      Falster, where he landed, plundered, and killed many people who had before
+      submitted to Svein. Arnor speaks of this: -
+     "A bloody vengeance for their guile
+     King Magnus takes on Falster Isle;
+     The treacherous Danes his fury feel,
+     And fall before his purpled steel.
+     The battle-field is covered o'er,
+     With eagle's prey from shore to shore;
+     And the king's courtmen were the first
+     To quench with blood the raven's thirst."
+      Thereafter Magnus with his fleet proceeded to the isle of Fyen, went on
+      land, plundered, and made great devastation. So says Arnor, the earls'
+      skald: -
+     "To fair Fiona's grassy shore
+     His banner now again he bore:
+     He who the mail-shirt's linked chains
+     Severs, and all its lustre stains, -
+     He will be long remembered there,
+     The warrior in his twentieth year,
+     Whom their black ravens from afar
+     Saluted as he went to war."
+      36. OF KING MAGNUS'S BATTLES.
+      King Magnus remained in Denmark all that winter (A.D. 1046), and sat in
+      peace. He had held many battles, and had gained the victory in all. So
+      says Od Kikinaskald: -
+     "'Fore Michaelmas was struck the blow,
+     That laid the Vindland vikings low;
+     And people learned with joy to hear
+     The clang of arms, and leaders' cheer.
+     Short before Yule fell out the day,
+     Southward of Aros, where the fray,
+     Though not enough the foe to quell,
+     Was of the bloodiest men can tell."
+      And Arnor says: -
+     "Olaf's avenger who can sing?
+     The skald cannot o'ertake the king,
+     Who makes the war-bird daily drain
+     The corpse-blood of his foemen slain.
+     Four battles won within a year, -
+     Breaker of shields!  with swords and spear,
+     And hand to hand, exalt thy fame
+     Above the kings of greatest name."
+      King Magnus had three battles with Svein Ulfson. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "To our brave Throndhjem sovereign's praise
+     The skald may all his skaldcraft raise;
+     For fortune, and for daring deed,
+     His song will not the truth exceed.
+     After three battles to regain
+     What was his own, unjustly ta'en,
+     Unjustly kept, and dues denied,
+     He levied dues in red-blood dyed."
+      37. OF KING MAGNUS, AND THORFIN AND RAGNVALD, EARLS OF ORKNEY.
+      While King Magnus the Good, a son of King Olaf the Saint, ruled over
+      Norway, as before related, the Earl Ragnvald Brusason lived with him. Earl
+      Thorfin Sigurdson, the uncle of Ragnvald, ruled then over Orkney. King
+      Magnus sent Ragnvald west to Orkney, and ordered that Thorfin should let
+      him have his father's heritage. Thorfin let Ragnvald have a third part of
+      the land along with him; for so had Erase, the father of Ragnvald, had it
+      at his dying day. Earl Thorfin was married to Ingebjorg, the earl-mother,
+      who was a daughter of Fin Arnason. Earl Ragnvald thought he should have
+      two-thirds of the land, as Olaf the Saint had promised to his father
+      Bruse, and as Bruse had enjoyed as long as Olaf lived. This was the origin
+      of a great strife between these relations, concerning which we have a long
+      saga. They had a great battle in Pentland Firth, in which Kalf Arnason was
+      with Earl Thorfin. So says Bjarne Gullbrarskald: -
+     "Thy cutters, dashing through the tide,
+     Brought aid to Earl Thorfin's side,
+     Fin's son-in-law, and people say
+     Thy aid made Bruse's son give way.
+     Kalf, thou art fond of warlike toil,
+     Gay in the strife and bloody broil;
+     But here 'twas hate made thee contend
+     Against Earl Ragnvald, the king's friend."
+      38. OF KING MAGNUS'S LETTER TO ENGLAND.
+      King Magnus ruled then both over Denmark and Norway; and when he had got
+      possession of the Danish dominions he sent ambassadors over to England to
+      King Edward, who brought to him King Magnus's letter and seal. And in this
+      letter there stood, along with a salutation from King Magnus, these words: -"Ye
+      must have heard of the agreement which I and Hardaknut made, -that he
+      of us two who survived the other should have all the land and people which
+      the deceased had possessed. Now it has so turned out, as ye have no doubt
+      heard, that I have taken the Danish dominions as my heritage after
+      Hardaknut. But before he departed this life he had England as well as
+      Denmark; therefore I consider myself now, in consequence of my rights by
+      this agreement, to own England also. Now I will therefore that thou
+      deliver to me the kingdom; otherwise I will seek to take it by arms, both
+      from Denmark and Norway; and let him rule the land to whom fate gives the
+      victory."
+      39. KING EDWARD'S ANSWER TO KING MAGNUS'S LETTER.
+      Now when King Edward had read this letter, he replied thus: "It is known
+      to all men in this country that King Ethelred, my father, was udal-born to
+      this kingdom, both after the old and new law of inheritance. We were four
+      sons after him; and when he by death left the throne my brother Edmund
+      took the government and kingdom; for he was the oldest of us brothers, and
+      I was well satisfied that it was so. And after him my stepfather, Canute
+      the Great, took the kingdom, and as long as he lived there was no access
+      to it. After him my brother Harald was king as long as he lived; and after
+      him my brother Hardaknut took the kingdoms both of Denmark and England;
+      for he thought that a just brotherly division that he should have both
+      England and Denmark, and that I should have no kingdom at all. Now he
+      died, and then it was the resolution of all the people of the country to
+      take me for king here in England. So long as I had no kingly title I
+      served only superiors in all respects, like those who had no claims by
+      birth to land or kingdom. Now, however, I have received the kingly title,
+      and am consecrated king. I have established my royal dignity and
+      authority, as my father before me; and while I live I will not renounce my
+      title. If King Magnus come here with an army, I will gather no army
+      against him; but he shall only get the opportunity of taking England when
+      he has taken my life. Tell him these words of mine." The ambassadors went
+      back to King Magnus, and told him the answer to their message. King Magnus
+      reflected a while, and answered thus: "I think it wisest, and will succeed
+      best, to let King Edward have his kingdom in peace for me, and that I keep
+      the kingdoms God has put into my hands."
+      SAGA OF HARALD HARDRADE.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      Harald, son of Sigurd Syr, was born in the year A.D. 1015, and left Norway
+      A.D. 1030. He was called Hardrade, that is, the severe counsellor, the
+      tyrant, though the Icelanders never applied this epithet to him. Harald
+      helped the Icelanders in the famine of A.D. 1056, and sent them timber for
+      a church at Thingvol. It was the Norwegians who gave him the name tyrant
+      in contrast to the "debonairete" of Magnus. He came to Norway in A.D.
+      1046, and became sole king in A.D. 1047. He died in A.D. 1066, and his son
+      and successor Magnus died in A.D. 1069.
+      His saga is to be compared with "Agrip", "Fagrskinna", and "Morkinskinna".
+      The skalds quoted are: Thiodolf, Bolverk, Illuge Bryndalaskald, Stuf the
+      skald, Thorarin Skeggjason, Valgard o' Val, Od Kikinaskald, Grane Skald,
+      Thorleik the Fair, Stein Herdison, Ulf the Marshal, Arnor the earls'
+      skald, Thorkel Skallason, and King Harald Hardrade himself.
+      1. HARALD ESCAPES FROM THE BATTLE OF STIKLESTAD.
+      Harald, son of Sigurd Syr, brother of Olaf the Saint, by the same mother,
+      was at the battle of Stiklestad, and was fifteen years old when King Olaf
+      the Saint fell, as was before related. Harald was wounded, and escaped
+      with other fugitives. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "At Haug the fire-sparks from his shield
+     Flew round the king's head on the field,
+     As blow for blow, for Olaf's sake,
+     His sword and shield would give and take.
+     Bulgaria's conqueror, I ween,
+     Had scarcely fifteen winters seen,
+     When from his murdered brother's side
+     His unhelmed head he had to hide."
+      Ragnvald Brusason led Harald from the battle, and the night after the fray
+      took him to a bonde who dwelt in a forest far from other people. The
+      peasant received Harald, and kept him concealed; and Harald was waited
+      upon until he was quite cured of his wounds. Then the bonde's son attended
+      him on the way east over the ridge of the land, and they went by all the
+      forest paths they could, avoiding the common road. The bonde's son did not
+      know who it was he was attending; and as they were riding together between
+      two uninhabited forests, Harald made these verses:
+     "My wounds were bleeding as I rode;
+     And down below the bondes strode,
+     Killing the wounded with the sword,
+     The followers of their rightful lord.
+     From wood to wood I crept along,
+     Unnoticed by the bonde-throng;
+     'Who knows,' I thought, 'a day may come
+     My name will yet be great at home.'"
+      He went eastward over the ridge through Jamtaland and Helsingjaland, and
+      came to Svithjod, where he found Ragnvald Brusason, and many others of
+      King Olaf's men who had fled from the battle at Stiklestad, and they
+      remained there till winter was over.
+      2. HARALD'S JOURNEY TO CONSTANTINOPLE.
+      The spring after (A.D. 1031) Harald and Ragnvald got ships, and went east
+      in summer to Russia to King Jarisleif, and were with him all the following
+      winter. So says the skald Bolverk: -
+     "The king's sharp sword lies clean and bright,
+     Prepared in foreign lands to fight:
+     Our ravens croak to have their fill,
+     The wolf howls from the distant hill.
+     Our brave king is to Russia gone, -
+     Braver than he on earth there's none;
+     His sharp sword will carve many feast
+     To wolf and raven in the East."
+      King Jarisleif gave Harald and Ragnvald a kind reception, and made Harald
+      and Ellif, the son of Earl Ragnvald, chiefs over the land-defence men of
+      the king. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Where Ellif was, one heart and hand
+     The two chiefs had in their command;
+     In wedge or line their battle order
+     Was ranged by both without disorder.
+     The eastern Vindland men they drove
+     Into a corner; and they move
+     The Lesians, although ill at ease,
+     To take the laws their conquerors please."
+      Harald remained several years in Russia, and travelled far and wide in the
+      Eastern land. Then he began his expedition out to Greece, and had a great
+      suite of men with him; and on he went to Constantinople. So says Bolverk: -
+     "Before the cold sea-curling blast
+     The cutter from the land flew past,
+     Her black yards swinging to and fro,
+     Her shield-hung gunwale dipping low.
+     The king saw glancing o'er the bow
+     Constantinople's metal glow
+     From tower and roof, and painted sails
+     Gliding past towns and wooded vales."
+      3. OF HARALD.
+      At that time the Greek empire was ruled by the Empress Zoe the Great, and
+      with her Michael Catalactus. Now when Harald came to Constantinople he
+      presented himself to the empress, and went into her pay; and immediately,
+      in autumn, went on board the galleys manned with troops which went out to
+      the Greek sea. Harald had his own men along with him. Now Harald had been
+      but a short time in the army before all the Varings flocked to him, and
+      they all joined together when there was a battle. It thus came to pass
+      that Harald was made chief of the Varings. There was a chief over all the
+      troops who was called Gyrger, and who was a relation of the empress.
+      Gyrger and Harald went round among all the Greek islands, and fought much
+      against the corsairs.
+      4. OF HARALD AND GYRGER CASTING LOTS.
+      It happened once that Gyrger and the Varings were going through the
+      country, and they resolved to take their night quarters in a wood; and as
+      the Varings came first to the ground, they chose the place which was best
+      for pitching their tents upon, which was the highest ground; for it is the
+      nature of the land there to be soft when rain falls, and therefore it is
+      bad to choose a low situation for your tents. Now when Gyrger, the chief
+      of the army, came up, and saw where the Varings had set up their tents, he
+      told them to remove, and pitch their tents elsewhere, saying he would
+      himself pitch his tents on their ground. Harald replies, "If ye come first
+      to the night quarter, ye take up your ground, and we must go pitch our
+      tents at some other place where we best can. Now do ye so, in the same
+      way, and find a place where ye will. It is, I think, the privilege of us
+      Varings here in the dominions of the Greek emperor to be free, and
+      independent of all but their own commanders, and bound only to serve the
+      emperor and empress." They disputed long and hotly about this, and both
+      sides armed themselves, and were on the way to fight for it; but men of
+      understanding came between and separated them. They said it would be
+      better to come to an agreement about such questions, so that in future no
+      dispute could arise. It came thus to an arbitration between them, at which
+      the best and most sagacious men should give their judgment in the case. At
+      this arbitration it was determined, with the consent of all parties, that
+      lots should be thrown into a box, and the Greeks and Varings should draw
+      which was first to ride, or to row, or to take place in a harbour, or to
+      choose tent ground; and each side should be satisfied with what the
+      drawing of the lots gave them. Accordingly the lots were made and marked.
+      Harald said to Gyrger, "Let me see what mark thou hast put upon thy lot,
+      that we may not both mark our lots in the same way." He did so. Then
+      Harald marked his lot, and put it into the box along with the other. The
+      man who was to draw out the lots then took up one of the lots between his
+      fingers, held it up in the air, and said, "This lot shall be the first to
+      ride, and to row, and to take place in harbour and on the tent field."
+      Harald seized his band, snatched the die, and threw it into the sea, and
+      called out, "That was our lot!" Gyrger said, "Why did you not let other
+      people see it?" Harald replies, "Look at the one remaining in the box, -there
+      you see your own mark upon it." Accordingly the lot which was left behind
+      was examined, and all men saw that Gyrger's mark was upon it, and
+      accordingly the judgment was given that the Varings had gained the first
+      choice in all they had been quarrelling about. There were many things they
+      quarrelled about, but the end always was that Harald got his own way.
+      5. HARALD'S EXPEDITION IN THE LAND OF THE SARACENS (SERKLAND).
+      They went out all on a campaign in summer. When the whole army was thus
+      assembled Harald kept his men out of the battle, or wherever he saw the
+      least danger, under pretext of saving his men; but where he was alone with
+      his own men only, he fought so desperately that they must either come off
+      victorious or die. It thus happened often that when he commanded the army
+      he gained victories, while Gyrger could do nothing. The troops observed
+      this, and insisted they would be more successful if Harald alone was chief
+      of the whole army, and upbraided the general with never effecting
+      anything, neither himself, nor his people. Gyrger again said that the
+      Varings would give him no assistance, and ordered Harald to go with his
+      men somewhere else, and he, with the rest of his army, would win what they
+      could. Harald accordingly left the army with the Varings and the Latin
+      men, and Gyrger on his side went off with the Greek troops. Then it was
+      seen what each could do. Harald always gained victories and booty; but the
+      Greeks went home to Constantinople with their army, all except a few brave
+      men, who, to gain booty and money, joined themselves to Harald, and took
+      him for their leader. He then went with his troops westward to Africa,
+      which the Varings call Serkland, where he was strengthened with many men.
+      In Serkland he took eighty castles, some of which surrendered, and others
+      were stormed. He then went to Sicily. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "The serpent's bed of glowing gold
+     He hates -the generous king, the bold!
+     He who four score towers laid low,
+     Ta'en from the Saracenic foe.
+     Before upon Sicilian plains,
+     Shield joined to shield, the fight he gains,
+     The victory at Hild's war game;
+     And now the heathens dread his name."
+      So says also Illuge Bryndala-skald: -
+     "For Michael's empire Harald fought,
+     And southern lands to Michael brought;
+     So Budle's son his friendship showed
+     When he brought friends to his abode."
+      Here it is said that Michael was king of the Greeks at that time. Harald
+      remained many years in Africa, where he gathered great wealth in gold,
+      jewels, and all sorts of precious things; and all the wealth he gathered
+      there which he did not need for his expenses, he sent with trusty men of
+      his own north to Novgorod to King Jarisleif's care and keeping. He
+      gathered together there extraordinary treasure, as is reasonable to
+      suppose; for he had the plundering of the part of the world richest in
+      gold and valuable things, and he had done such great deeds as with truth
+      are related, such as taking eighty strongholds by his valour.
+      6. BATTLE IN SICILY.
+      Now when Harald came to Sicily he plundered there also, and sat down with
+      his army before a strong and populous castle. He surrounded the castle;
+      but the walls were so thick there was no possibility of breaking into it,
+      and the people of the castle had enough of provisions, and all that was
+      necessary for defence. Then Harald hit upon an expedient. He made his
+      bird-catchers catch the small birds which had their nests within the
+      castle, but flew into the woods by day to get food for their young. He had
+      small splinters of tarred wood bound upon the backs of the birds, smeared
+      these over with wax and sulphur, and set fire to them. As soon as the
+      birds were let loose they all flew at once to the castle to their young,
+      and to their nests, which they had under the house roofs that were covered
+      with reeds or straw. The fire from the birds seized upon the house roofs;
+      and although each bird could only carry a small burden of fire, yet all at
+      once there was a mighty flame, caused by so many birds carrying fire with
+      them and spreading it widely among the house roofs. Thus one house after
+      the other was set on fire, until the castle itself was in flames. Then the
+      people came out of the castle and begged for mercy; the same men who for
+      many days had set at defiance the Greek army and its leader. Harald
+      granted life and safety to all who asked quarter, and made himself master
+      of the place.
+      7. BATTLE AT ANOTHER CASTLE.
+      There was another castle before which Harald had come with his army. This
+      castle was both full of people and so strong, that there was no hope of
+      breaking into it. The castle stood upon a flat hard plain. Then Harald
+      undertook to dig a passage from a place where a stream ran in a bed so
+      deep that it could not be seen from the castle. They threw out all the
+      earth into the stream, to be carried away by the water. At this work they
+      laboured day and night, and relieved each other in gangs; while the rest
+      of the army went the whole day against the castle, where the castle people
+      shot through their loop-holes. They shot at each other all day in this
+      way, and at night they slept on both sides. Now when Harald perceived that
+      his underground passage was so long that it must be within the castle
+      walls, he ordered his people to arm themselves. It was towards daybreak
+      that they went into the passage. When they got to the end of it they dug
+      over their heads until they came upon stones laid in lime which was the
+      floor of a stone hall. They broke open the floor and rose into the hall.
+      There sat many of the castle-men eating and drinking, and not in the least
+      expecting such uninvited wolves; for the Varings instantly attacked them
+      sword in hand, and killed some, and those who could get away fled. The
+      Varings pursued them; and some seized the castle gate, and opened it, so
+      that the whole body of the army got in. The people of the castle fled; but
+      many asked quarter from the troops, which was granted to all who
+      surrendered. In this way Harald got possession of the place, and found an
+      immense booty in it.
+      8. BATTLE AT A THIRD CASTLE.
+      They came to a third castle, the greatest and strongest of them all, and
+      also the richest in property and the fullest of people. Around this castle
+      there were great ditches, so that it evidently could not be taken by the
+      same device as the former; and they lay a long time before it without
+      doing anything. When the castle-men saw this they became bolder, drew up
+      their array on the castle walls, threw open the castle gates, and shouted
+      to the Varings, urging them, and jeering at them, and telling them to come
+      into the castle, and that they were no more fit for battle than so many
+      poultry. Harald told his men to make as if they did not know what to do,
+      or did not understand what was said. "For," says he, "if we do make an
+      assault we can effect nothing, as they can throw their weapons under their
+      feet among us; and if we get in the castle with a party of our people,
+      they have it in their power to shut them in. and shut out the others; for
+      they have all the castle gates beset with men. We shall therefore show
+      them the same scorn they show us, and let them see we do not fear them.
+      Our men shall go out upon the plain nearest to the castle; taking care,
+      however, to keep out of bow-shot. All our men shall go unarmed, and be
+      playing with each other, so that the castle-men may see we do not regard
+      them or their array." Thus it went on for some days, without anything
+      being done.
+      9. OF ULF AND HALDOR.
+      Two Iceland men were then with Harald; the one was Haldor (1), a son of
+      the gode Snorre, who brought this account to Iceland; the other was Ulf
+      Uspakson, a grandson of Usvifer Spake. Both were very strong men, bold
+      under arms, and Harald's best friends; and both were in this play. Now
+      when some days were passed the castle people showed more courage, and
+      would go without weapons upon the castle wall, while the castle gates were
+      standing open. The Varings observing this, went one day to their sports
+      with the sword under their cloaks, and the helmet under their hats. After
+      playing awhile they observed that the castle people were off their guard;
+      and instantly seizing their weapons, they made at the castle gate. When
+      the men of the castle saw this they went against them armed completely,
+      and a battle began in the castle gate. The Varings had no shields, but
+      wrapped their cloaks round their left arms. Some of them were wounded,
+      some killed, and all stood in great danger. Now came Harald with the men
+      who had remained in the camp, to the assistance of his people; and the
+      castle-men had now got out upon the walls, from which they shot and threw
+      stones down upon them; so that there was a severe battle, and those who
+      were in the castle gates thought that help was brought them slower than
+      they could have wished. When Harald came to the castle gate his
+      standard-bearer fell, and Harald said to Haldor, "Do thou take up the
+      banner now." Haldor took up the banner, and said foolishly, "Who will
+      carry the banner before thee, if thou followest it so timidly as thou hast
+      done for a while?" But these were words more of anger than of truth; for
+      Harald was one of the boldest of men under arms. Then they pressed in, and
+      had a hard battle in the castle; and the end was that Harald gained the
+      victory and took the castle. Haldor was much wounded in the face, and it
+      gave him great pain as long as he lived.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) One of the descendants of this Haldor was Snorre
+        Sturlason, the author of "Heimskringla".
+      10. BATTLE AT A FOURTH CASTLE.
+      The fourth castle which Harald came to was the greatest of all we have
+      been speaking about. It was so strong that there was no possibility of
+      breaking into it. They surrounded the castle, so that no supplies could
+      get into it. When they had remained here a short time Harald fell sick,
+      and he betook himself to his bed. He had his tent put up a little from the
+      camp, for he found quietness and rest out of the clamour and clang of
+      armed men. His men went usually in companies to or from him to hear his
+      orders; and the castle people observing there was something new among the
+      Varings, sent out spies to discover what this might mean. When the spies
+      came back to the castle they had to tell of the illness of the commander
+      of the Varings, and that no assault on that account had been made on the
+      castle. A while after Harald's strength began to fail, at which his men
+      were very melancholy and cast down; all which was news to the castle-men.
+      At last Harald's sickness increased so rapidly that his death was expected
+      through all the army. Thereafter the Varings went to the castle-men; told
+      them, in a parley, of the death of their commander; and begged of the
+      priests to grant him burial in the castle. When the castle people heard
+      this news, there were many among them who ruled over cloisters or other
+      great establishments within the place, and who were very eager to get the
+      corpse for their church, knowing that upon that there would follow very
+      rich presents. A great many priests, therefore, clothed themselves in all
+      their robes, and went out of the castle with cross and shrine and relics
+      and formed a beautiful procession. The Varings also made a great burial.
+      The coffin was borne high in the air, and over it was a tent of costly
+      linen and before it were carried many banners. Now when the corpse was
+      brought within the castle gate the Varings set down the coffin right
+      across the entry, fixed a bar to keep the gates open, and sounded to
+      battle with all their trumpets, and drew their swords. The whole army of
+      the Varings, fully armed, rushed from the camp to the assault of the
+      castle with shout and cry; and the monks and other priests who had gone to
+      meet the corpse and had striven with each other who should be the first to
+      come out and take the offering at the burial, were now striving much more
+      who should first get away from the Varings; for they killed before their
+      feet every one who was nearest, whether clerk or unconsecrated. The
+      Varings rummaged so well this castle that they killed all the men,
+      pillaged everything and made an enormous booty.
+      11. OF HARALD.
+      Harald was many years in these campaigns, both in Serkland and in Sicily.
+      Then he came back to Constantinople with his troops and stayed there but a
+      little time before he began his expedition to Jerusalem. There he left the
+      pay he had received from the Greek emperor and all the Varings who
+      accompanied him did the same. It is said that on all these expeditions
+      Harald had fought eighteen regular battles. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Harald the Stern ne'er allowed
+     Peace to his foemen, false and proud;
+     In eighteen battles, fought and won,
+     The valour of the Norseman shone.
+     The king, before his home return,
+     Oft dyed the bald head of the erne
+     With bloody specks, and o'er the waste
+     The sharp-claw'd wolf his footsteps traced."
+      12. HARALD'S EXPEDITION TO PALESTINE.
+      Harald went with his men to the land of Jerusalem and then up to the city
+      of Jerusalem, and wheresoever he came in the land all the towns and
+      strongholds were given up to him. So says the skald Stuf, who had heard
+      the king himself relate these tidings: -
+     "He went, the warrior bold and brave,
+     Jerusalem, the holy grave,
+     And the interior of the land,
+     To bring under the Greeks' command;
+     And by the terror of his name
+     Under his power the country came,
+     Nor needed wasting fire and sword
+     To yield obediance to his word."
+      Here it is told that this land came without fire and sword under Harald's
+      command. He then went out to Jordan and bathed therein, according to the
+      custom of other pilgrims. Harald gave great gifts to our Lord's grave, to
+      the Holy Cross, and other holy relics in the land of Jerusalem. He also
+      cleared the whole road all the way out to Jordan, by killing the robbers
+      and other disturbers of the peace. So says the skald Stuf: -
+     "The Agder king cleared far and wide
+     Jordan's fair banks on either side;
+     The robber-bands before him fled,
+     And his great name was widely spread.
+     The wicked people of the land
+     Were punished here by his dread hand,
+     And they hereafter will not miss
+     Much worse from Jesus Christ than this."
+      13. HARALD PUT IN PRISON.
+      Thereafter he went back to Constantinople. When Harald returned to
+      Constantinople from Jerusalem he longed to return to the North to his
+      native land; and when he heard that Magnus Olafson, his brother's son, had
+      become king both of Norway and Denmark, he gave up his command in the
+      Greek service. And when the empress Zoe heard of this she became angry and
+      raised an accusation against Harald that he had misapplied the property of
+      the Greek emperor which he had received in the campaigns in which he was
+      commander of the army. There was a young and beautiful girl called Maria,
+      a brother's daughter of the empress Zoe, and Harald had paid his addresses
+      to her; but the empress had given him a refusal. The Varings, who were
+      then in pay in Constantinople, have told here in the North that there went
+      a report among well-informed people that the empress Zoe herself wanted
+      Harald for her husband, and that she chiefly blamed Harald for his
+      determination to leave Constantinople, although another reason was given
+      out to the public. Constantinus Monomachus was at that time emperor of the
+      Greeks and ruled along with Zoe. On this account the Greek emperor had
+      Harald made prisoner and carried to prison.
+      14. KING OLAF'S MIRACLE AND BLINDING THE GREEK EMPEROR.
+      When Harald drew near to the prison King Olaf the Saint stood before him
+      and said he would assist him. On that spot of the street a chapel has
+      since been built and consecrated to Saint Olaf and which chapel has stood
+      there ever since. The prison was so constructed that there was a high
+      tower open above, but a door below to go into it from the street. Through
+      it Harald was thrust in, along with Haldor and Ulf. Next night a lady of
+      distinction with two servants came, by the help of ladders, to the top of
+      the tower, let down a rope into the prison and hauled them up. Saint Olaf
+      had formerly cured this lady of a sickness and he had appeared to her in a
+      vision and told her to deliver his brother. Harald went immediately to the
+      Varings, who all rose from their seats when he came in and received him
+      with joy. The men armed themselves forthwith and went to where the emperor
+      slept. They took the emperor prisoner and put out both the eyes of him. So
+      says Thorarin Skeggjason in his poem: -
+     "Of glowing gold that decks the hand
+     The king got plenty in this land;
+     But it's great emperor in the strife
+     Was made stone-blind for all his life."
+      So says Thiodolf, the skald, also: -
+     "He who the hungry wolf's wild yell
+     Quiets with prey, the stern, the fell,
+     Midst the uproar of shriek and shout
+     Stung tho Greek emperor's eyes both out:
+     The Norse king's mark will not adorn,
+     The Norse king's mark gives cause to mourn;
+     His mark the Eastern king must bear,
+     Groping his sightless way in fear."
+      In these two songs, and many others, it is told that Harald himself
+      blinded the Greek emperor; and they would surely have named some duke,
+      count, or other great man, if they had not known this to be the true
+      account; and King Harald himself and other men who were with him spread
+      the account.
+      15. HARALD'S JOURNEY FROM CONSTANTINOPLE.
+      The same night King Harald and his men went to the house where Maria slept
+      and carried her away by force. Then they went down to where the galleys of
+      the Varings lay, took two of them and rowed out into Sjavid sound. When
+      they came to the place where the iron chain is drawn across the sound,
+      Harald told his men to stretch out at their oars in both galleys; but the
+      men who were not rowing to run all to the stern of the galley, each with
+      his luggage in his hand. The galleys thus ran up and lay on the iron
+      chain. As soon as they stood fast on it, and would advance no farther,
+      Harald ordered all the men to run forward into the bow. Then the galley,
+      in which Harald was, balanced forwards and swung down over the chain; but
+      the other, which remained fast athwart the chain, split in two, by which
+      many men were lost; but some were taken up out of the sound. Thus Harald
+      escaped out of Constantinople and sailed thence into the Black Sea; but
+      before he left the land he put the lady ashore and sent her back with a
+      good escort to Constantinople and bade her tell her relation, the Empress
+      Zoe, how little power she had over Harald, and how little the empress
+      could have hindered him from taking the lady. Harald then sailed
+      northwards in the Ellipalta and then all round the Eastern empire. On this
+      voyage Harald composed sixteen songs for amusement and all ending with the
+      same words. This is one of them: -
+     "Past Sicily's wide plains we flew,
+     A dauntless, never-wearied crew;
+     Our viking steed rushed through the sea,
+     As viking-like fast, fast sailed we.
+     Never, I think, along this shore
+     Did Norsemen ever sail before;
+     Yet to the Russian queen, I fear,
+     My gold-adorned, I am not dear."
+      With this he meant Ellisif, daughter of King Jarisleif in Novgorod.
+      16. OF KING HARALD.
+      When Harald came to Novgorod King Jarisleif received him in the most
+      friendly way and he remained there all winter (A.D. 1045). Then he took
+      into his own keeping all the gold and the many kinds of precious things
+      which he had sent there from Constantinople and which together made up so
+      vast a treasure that no man in the Northern lands ever saw the like of it
+      in one man's possession. Harald had been three times in the poluta-svarf
+      while he was in Constantinople. It is the custom, namely, there, that
+      every time one of the Greek emperors dies, the Varings are allowed
+      poluta-svarf; that is, they may go through all the emperor's palaces where
+      his treasures are and each may take and keep what he can lay hold of while
+      he is going through them.
+      17. KING HARALD'S MARRIAGE.
+      This winter King Jarisleif gave Harald his daughter Elisabeth in marriage.
+      She is called by the Northmen Ellisif. This is related by Stuf the Blind,
+      thus: -
+     "Agder's chief now got the queen
+     Who long his secret love had been.
+     Of gold, no doubt, a mighty store
+     The princess to her husband bore."
+      In spring he began his journey from Novgorod and came to Aldeigjuborg,
+      where he took shipping and sailed from the East in summer. He turned first
+      to Svithjod and came to Sigtuna. So says Valgard o' Val: -
+     "The fairest cargo ship e'er bore,
+     From Russia's distant eastern shore
+     The gallant Harald homeward brings -
+     Gold, and a fame that skald still sings.
+     The ship through dashing foam he steers,
+     Through the sea-rain to Svithjod veers,
+     And at Sigtuna's grassy shores
+     His gallant vessel safely moors."
+      18. THE LEAGUE BETWEEN KING HARALD AND SVEIN ULFSON.
+      Harald found there before him Svein Ulfson, who the autumn before (A.D.
+      1045) had fled from King Magnus at Helganes; and when they met they were
+      very friendly on both sides. The Swedish king, Olaf the Swede, was brother
+      of the mother of Ellisif, Harald's wife; and Astrid, the mother of Svein,
+      was King Olaf's sister. Harald and Svein entered into friendship with each
+      other and confirmed it by oath. All the Swedes were friendly to Svein,
+      because he belonged to the greatest family in the country; and thus all
+      the Swedes were Harald's friends and helpers also, for many great men were
+      connected with him by relationship. So says Thiodolf:
+     "Cross the East sea the vessel flew, -
+     Her oak-keel a white furrow drew
+     From Russia's coast to Swedish land.
+     Where Harald can great help command.
+     The heavy vessel's leeward side
+     Was hid beneath the rushing tide;
+     While the broad sail and gold-tipped mast
+     Swung to and fro in the hard blast."
+      19. KING HARALD'S FORAY.
+      Then Harald and Svein fitted out ships and gathered together a great
+      force; and when the troops were ready they sailed from the East towards
+      Denmark. So says Valgard: -
+     "Brave Yngve!  to the land decreed
+     To thee by fate, with tempest speed
+     The winds fly with thee o'er the sea -
+     To thy own udal land with thee.
+     As past the Scanlan plains they fly,
+     The gay ships glances 'twixt sea and sky,
+     And Scanian brides look out, and fear
+     Some ill to those they hold most dear."
+      They landed first in Seeland with their men and herried and burned in the
+      land far and wide. Then they went to Fyen, where they also landed and
+      wasted. So says Valgard: -
+     "Harald! thou hast the isle laid waste,
+     The Seeland men away hast chased,
+     And the wild wolf by daylight roams
+     Through their deserted silent homes.
+     Fiona too could not withstand
+     The fury of thy wasting hand.
+     Helms burst, shields broke, -Fiona's bounds.
+     Were filled with death's terrific sounds.
+
+     "Red flashing in the southern sky,
+     The clear flame sweeping broad and high,
+     From fair Roeskilde's lofty towers,
+     On lowly huts its fire-rain pours;
+     And shows the housemates' silent train
+     In terror scouring o'er the plain,
+     Seeking the forest's deepest glen,
+     To house with wolves, and 'scape from men.
+
+     "Few were they of escape to tell,
+     For, sorrow-worn, the people fell:
+     The only captives form the fray
+     Were lovely maidens led away.
+     And in wild terror to the strand,
+     Down to the ships, the linked band
+     Of fair-haired girls is roughly driven,
+     Their soft skins by the irons riven."
+      20. KING MAGNUS'S LEVY.
+      King Magnus Olafson sailed north to Norway in the autumn after the battle
+      at Helganes (A.D. 1045). There he hears the news that Harald Sigurdson,
+      his relation, was come to Svithjod; and moreover that Svein Ulfson and
+      Harald had entered into a friendly bond with each other and gathered
+      together a great force, intending first to subdue Denmark and then Norway.
+      King Magnus then ordered a general levy over all Norway and he soon
+      collected a great army. He hears then that Harald and Svein were come to
+      Denmark and were burning and laying waste the land and that the country
+      people were everywhere submitting to them. It was also told that King
+      Harald was stronger and stouter than other men, and so wise withal that
+      nothing was impossible to him, and he had always the victory when he
+      fought a battle; and he was also so rich in gold that no man could compare
+      with him in wealth. Thiodolf speaks thus of it:
+     "Norsemen, who stand the sword of foe
+     Like forest-stems unmoved by blow!
+     My hopes are fled, no peace is near, -
+     People fly here and there in fear.
+     On either side of Seeland's coast
+     A fleet appears -a white winged host;
+     Magnus form Norway takes his course,
+     Harald from Sweden leads his force.
+      21. TREATY BETWEEN HARALD AND MAGNUS.
+      Those of Harald's men who were in his counsel said that it would be a
+      great misfortune if relations like Harald and Magnus should fight and
+      throw a death-spear against each other; and therefore many offered to
+      attempt bringing about some agreement between them, and the kings, by
+      their persuasion, agreed to it. Thereupon some men were sent off in a
+      light boat, in which they sailed south in all haste to Denmark, and got
+      some Danish men, who were proven friends of King Magnus, to propose this
+      matter to Harald. This affair was conducted very secretly. Now when Harald
+      heard that his relation, King Magnus, would offer him a league and
+      partition, so that Harald should have half of Norway with King Magnus, and
+      that they should divide all their movable property into two equal parts,
+      he accepted the proposal, and the people went back to King Magnus with
+      this answer.
+      22. TREATY BETWEEN HARALD AND SVEIN BROKEN.
+      A little after this it happened that Harald and Svein one evening were
+      sitting at table drinking and talking together, and Svein asked Harald
+      what valuable piece of all his property he esteemed the most.
+      He answered, it was his banner Land-waster.
+      Svein asked what was there remarkable about it, that he valued it so
+      highly.
+      Harald replied, it was a common saying that he must gain the victory
+      before whom that banner is borne, and it had turned out so ever since he
+      had owned it.
+      Svein replies, "I will begin to believe there is such virtue in the banner
+      when thou hast held three battles with thy relation Magnus, and hast
+      gained them all."
+      Then answered Harald with an angry voice, "I know my relationship to King
+      Magnus, without thy reminding me of it; and although we are now going in
+      arms against him, our meeting may be of a better sort."
+      Svein changed colour, and said, "There are people, Harald, who say that
+      thou hast done as much before as only to hold that part of an agreement
+      which appears to suit thy own interest best."
+      Harald answers, "It becomes thee ill to say that I have not stood by an
+      agreement, when I know what King Magnus could tell of thy proceedings with
+      him."
+      Thereupon each went his own way. At night, when Harald went to sleep
+      within the bulwarks of his vessel, he said to his footboy, "I will not
+      sleep in my bed to-night, for I suspect there may be treachery abroad. I
+      observed this evening that my friend Svein was very angry at my free
+      discourse. Thou shalt keep watch, therefore, in case anything happen in
+      the night." Harald then went away to sleep somewhere else, and laid a
+      billet of wood in his place. At midnight a boat rowed alongside to the
+      ship's bulwark; a man went on board, lifted up the cloth of the tent of
+      the bulwarks, went up, and struck in Harald's bed with a great ax, so that
+      it stood fast in the lump of wood. The man instantly ran back to his boat
+      again, and rowed away in the dark night, for the moon was set; but the axe
+      remained sticking in the piece of wood as an evidence. Thereupon Harald
+      waked his men and let them know the treachery intended. "We can now see
+      sufficiently," said he, "that we could never match Svein if he practises
+      such deliberate treachery against us; so it will be best for us to get
+      away from this place while we can. Let us cast loose our vessel and row
+      away as quietly as possible." They did so, and rowed during the night
+      northwards along the land; and then proceeded night and day until they
+      came to King Magnus, where he lay with his army. Harald went to his
+      relation Magnus, and there was a joyful meeting betwixt them. So says
+      Thiodolf: -
+     "The far-known king the order gave,
+     In silence o'er the swelling wave,
+     With noiseless oars, his vessels gay
+     From Denmark west to row away;
+     And Olaf's son, with justice rare,
+     Offers with him the realm to share.
+     People, no doubt, rejoiced to find
+     The kings had met in peaceful mind."
+      Afterwards the two relatives conversed with each other and all was settled
+      by peaceful agreement.
+      23. KING MAGNUS GIVES HARALD HALF OF NORWAY.
+      King Magnus lay at the shore and had set up tents upon the land. There he
+      invited his relation, King Harald, to be his guest at table; and Harald
+      went to the entertainment with sixty of his men and was feasted
+      excellently. Towards the end of the day King Magnus went into the tent
+      where Harald sat and with him went men carrying parcels consisting of
+      clothes and arms. Then the king went to the man who sat lowest and gave
+      him a good sword, to the next a shield, to the next a kirtle, and so on, -clothes,
+      or weapons, or gold; to all he gave one or the other valuable gift, and
+      the more costly to the more distinguished men among them. Then he placed
+      himself before his relation Harald, holding two sticks in his hand, and
+      said, "Which of these two sticks wilt thou have, my friend?"
+      Harald replies, "The one nearest me."
+      "Then," said King Magnus, "with this stick I give thee half of the
+      Norwegian power, with all the scat and duties, and all the domains
+      thereunto belonging, with the condition that everywhere thou shalt be as
+      lawful king in Norway as I am myself; but when we are both together in one
+      place, I shall be the first man in seat, service and salutation; and if
+      there be three of us together of equal dignity, that I shall sit in the
+      middle, and shall have the royal tent-ground and the royal landing-place.
+      Thou shalt strengthen and advance our kingdom, in return for making thee
+      that man in Norway whom we never expected any man should be so long as our
+      head was above ground." Then Harald stood up, and thanked him for the high
+      title and dignity. Thereupon they both sat down, and were very merry
+      together. The same evening Harald and his men returned to their ships.
+      24. HARALD GIVES MAGNUS THE HALF OF HIS TREASURES.
+      The following morning King Magnus ordered the trumpets to sound to a
+      General Thing of the people; and when it was seated, he made known to the
+      whole army the gift he had given to his relation Harald. Thorer of Steig
+      gave Harald the title of King there at the Thing; and the same day King
+      Harald invited King Magnus to table with him, and he went with sixty men
+      to King Harald's land-tent, where he had prepared a feast. The two kings
+      sat together on a high-seat, and the feast was splendid; everything went
+      on with magnificence, and the kings' were merry and glad. Towards the
+      close of the day King Harald ordered many caskets to be brought into the
+      tent, and in like manner people bore in weapons, clothes and other sorts
+      of valuables; and all these King Harald divided among King Magnus's men
+      who were at the feast. Then he had the caskets opened and said to King
+      Magnus, "Yesterday you gave us a large kingdom, which your hand won from
+      your and our enemies, and took us in partnership with you, which was well
+      done; and this has cost you much. Now we on our side have been in foreign
+      parts, and oft in peril of life, to gather together the gold which you
+      here see. Now, King Magnus, I will divide this with you. We shall both own
+      this movable property, and each have his equal share of it, as each has
+      his equal half share of Norway. I know that our dispositions are
+      different, as thou art more liberal than I am; therefore let us divide
+      this property equally between us, so that each may have his share free to
+      do with as he will." Then Harald had a large ox-hide spread out, and
+      turned the gold out of the caskets upon it. Then scales and weights were
+      taken and the gold separated and divided by weight into equal parts; and
+      all people wondered exceedingly that so much gold should have come
+      together in one place in the northern countries. But it was understood
+      that it was the Greek emperor's property and wealth; for, as all people
+      say, there are whole houses there full of red gold. The kings were now
+      very merry. Then there appeared an ingot among the rest as big as a man's
+      hand. Harald took it in his hands and said, "Where is the gold, friend
+      Magnus, that thou canst show against this piece?"
+      King Magnus replied, "So many disturbances and levies have been in the
+      country that almost all the gold and silver I could lay up is gone. I have
+      no more gold in my possession than this ring." And he took the ring off
+      his hand and gave it to Harald.
+      Harald looked at it, and said, "That is but little gold, friend, for the
+      king who owns two kingdoms; and yet some may doubt whether thou art
+      rightful owner of even this ring."
+      Then King Magnus replied, after a little reflection, "If I be not rightful
+      owner of this ring, then I know not what I have got right to; for my
+      father, King Olaf the Saint, gave me this ring at our last parting."
+      Then said King Harald, laughing, "It is true, King Magnus, what thou
+      sayest. Thy father gave thee this ring, but he took the ring from my
+      father for some trifling cause; and in truth it was not a good time for
+      small kings in Norway when thy father was in full power."
+      King Harald gave Thorer of Steig at that feast a bowl of mountain birch,
+      that was encircled with a silver ring and had a silver handle, both which
+      parts were gilt; and the bowl was filled with money of pure silver. With
+      that came also two gold rings, which together stood for a mark. He gave
+      him also his cloak of dark purple lined with white skins within, and
+      promised him besides his friendship and great dignity. Thorgils Snorrason,
+      an intelligent man, says he has seen an altar-cloth that was made of this
+      cloak; and Gudrid, a daughter of Guthorm, the son of Thorer of Steig,
+      said, according to Thorgil's account, that she had seen this bowl in her
+      father Guthorm's possession. Bolverk also tells of these matters: -
+     "Thou, generous king, I have been told,
+     For the green land hast given gold;
+     And Magnus got a mighty treasure,
+     That thou one half might'st rule at pleasure.
+     The people gained a blessed peace,
+     Which 'twixt the kings did never cease;
+     While Svein, disturbed with war's alarms,
+     Had his folk always under arms."
+      25. OF KING MAGNUS.
+      The kings Magnus and Harald both ruled in Norway the winter after their
+      agreement (A.D. 1047), and each had his court. In winter they went around
+      the Upland country in guest-quarters; and sometimes they were both
+      together, sometimes each was for himself. They went all the way north to
+      Throndhjem, to the town of Nidaros. King Magnus had taken special care of
+      the holy remains of King Olaf after he came to the country; had the hair
+      and nails clipped every twelve month, and kept himself the keys that
+      opened the shrine. Many miracles were worked by King Olaf's holy remains.
+      It was not long before there was a breach in the good understanding
+      between the two kings, as many were so mischievous as to promote discord
+      between them.
+      26. OF SVEIN ULFSON.
+      Svein Ulfson remained behind in the harbour after Harald had gone away,
+      and inquired about his proceedings. When he heard at last of Magnus and
+      Harald having agreed and joined their forces, he steered with his forces
+      eastward along Scania, and remained there until towards winter, when he
+      heard that King Magnus and King Harald had gone northwards to Norway. Then
+      Svein, with his troops, came south to Denmark and took all the royal
+      income that winter (A.D. 1047).
+      27. OF THE LEVY OF THE TWO KINGS.
+      Towards spring (A.D. 1047) King Magnus and his relation, King Harald,
+      ordered a levy in Norway. It happened once that the kings lay all night in
+      the same harbour and next day, King Harald, being first ready, made sail.
+      Towards evening he brought up in the harbour in which Magnus and his
+      retinue had intended to pass the night. Harald laid his vessel in the
+      royal ground, and there set up his tents. King Magnus got under sail later
+      in the day and came into the harbour just as King Harald had done pitching
+      his tents. They saw then that King Harald had taken up the king's ground
+      and intended to lie there. After King Magnus had ordered the sails to be
+      taken in, he said, "The men will now get ready along both sides of the
+      vessel to lay out their oars, and some will open the hatches and bring up
+      the arms and arm themselves; for, if they will not make way for us, we
+      will fight them." Now when King Harald sees that King Magnus will give him
+      battle, he says to his men, "Cut our land-fastenings and back the ship out
+      of the ground, for friend Magnus is in a passion." They did so and laid
+      the vessel out of the ground and King Magnus laid his vessel in it. When
+      they were now ready on both sides with their business, King Harald went
+      with a few men on board of King Magnus's ship. King Magnus received him in
+      a friendly way, and bade him welcome. King Harald answered, "I thought we
+      were come among friends; but just now I was in doubt if ye would have it
+      so. But it is a truth that childhood is hasty, and I will only consider it
+      as a childish freak." Then said King Magnus, "It is no childish whim, but
+      a trait of my family, that I never forget what I have given, or what I
+      have not given. If this trifle had been settled against my will, there
+      would soon have followed' some other discord like it. In all particulars I
+      will hold the agreement between us; but in the same way we will have all
+      that belongs to us by that right." King Harald coolly replied, that it is
+      an old custom for the wisest to give way; and returned to his ship. From
+      such circumstances it was found difficult to preserve good understanding
+      between the kings. King Magnus's men said he was in the right; but others,
+      less wise, thought there was some slight put upon Harald in the business.
+      King Harald's men, besides, insisted that the agreement was only that King
+      Magnus should have the preference of the harbour-ground when they arrived
+      together, but that King Harald was not bound to draw out of his place when
+      he came first. They observed, also, that King Harald had conducted himself
+      well and wisely in the matter. Those who viewed the business in the worst
+      light insisted that King Magnus wanted to break the agreement, and that he
+      had done King Harald injustice, and put an affront on him. Such disputes
+      were talked over so long among foolish people, that the spirit of
+      disagreeing affected the kings themselves. Many other things also
+      occurred, in which the kings appeared determined to have each his own way;
+      but of these little will be set down here.
+      28. KING MAGNUS THE GOOD'S DEATH.
+      The kings, Magnus and Harald, sailed with their fleet south to Denmark;
+      and when Svein heard of their approach, he fled away east to Scania.
+      Magnus and Harald remained in Denmark late in summer, and subdued the
+      whole country. In autumn they were in Jutland. One night, as King Magnus
+      lay in his bed, it appeared to him in a dream that he was in the same
+      place as his father, Saint Olaf, and that he spoke to him thus: "Wilt thou
+      choose, my son, to follow me, or to become a mighty king, and have long
+      life; but to commit a crime which thou wilt never be able to expiate?" He
+      thought he made the answer, "Do thou, father, choose for me." Then the
+      king thought the answer was, "Thou shalt follow me." King Magnus told his
+      men this dream. Soon after he fell sick and lay at a place called
+      Sudathorp. When he was near his death he sent his brother, Thorer, with
+      tokens to Svein Ulfson, with the request to give Thorer the aid he might
+      require. In this message King Magnus also gave the Danish dominions to
+      Svein after his death; and said it was just that Harald should rule over
+      Norway and Svein over Denmark. Then King Magnus the Good died (A.D. 1047),
+      and great was the sorrow of all the people at his death. So says Od
+      Kikinaskald: -
+     "The tears o'er good King Magnus' bier,
+     The people's tears, were all sincere:
+     Even they to whom he riches gave
+     Carried him heavily to the grave.
+     All hearts were struck at the king's end;
+     His house-thralls wept as for a friend;
+     His court-men oft alone would muse,
+     As pondering o'er unthought of news."
+      29. KING MAGNUS'S FUNERAL.
+      After this event King Harald held a Thing of his men-at-arms, and told
+      them his intention to go with the army to Viborg Thing, and make himself
+      be proclaimed king over the whole Danish dominions, to which, he said, he
+      had hereditary right after his relation Magnus, as well as to Norway. He
+      therefore asked his men for their aid, and said he thought the Norway man
+      should show himself always superior to the Dane. Then Einar Tambaskelfer
+      replies that he considered it a greater duty to bring his foster-son King
+      Magnus's corpse to the grave, and lay it beside his father, King Olaf's,
+      north in Throndhjem town, than to be fighting abroad and taking another
+      king's dominions and property. He ended his speech with saying that he
+      would rather follow King Magnus dead than any other king alive. Thereupon
+      he had the body adorned in the most careful way, so that most magnificent
+      preparations were made in the king's ship. Then all the Throndhjem people
+      and all the Northmen made themselves ready to return home with the king's
+      body, and so the army was broken up. King Harald saw then that it was
+      better for him to return to Norway to secure that kingdom first, and to
+      assemble men anew; and so King Harald returned to Norway with all his
+      army. As soon as he came to Norway he held a Thing with the people of the
+      country, and had himself proclaimed king everywhere. He proceeded thus
+      from the East through Viken, and in every district in Norway he was named
+      king. Einar Tambaskelfer, and with him all the Throndhjem troops, went
+      with King Magnus's body and transported it to the town of Nidaros, where
+      it was buried in St. Clement's church, where also was the shrine of King
+      Olaf the Saint. King Magnus was of middle size, of long and
+      clear-complexioned countenance, and light hair, spoke well and hastily,
+      was brisk in his actions, and extremely generous. He was a great warrior,
+      and remarkably bold in arms. He was the most popular of kings, prized even
+      by enemies as well as friends.
+      30. OF SVEIN ULFSON.
+      Svein Ulfson remained that autumn in Scania (A.D. 1047), and was making
+      ready to travel eastward to Sweden, with the intention of renouncing the
+      title of king he had assumed in Denmark; but just as he was mounting his
+      horse some men came riding to him with the first news that King Magnus was
+      dead, and all the Northmen had left Denmark. Svein answered in haste, "I
+      call God to witness that I shall never again fly from the Danish dominions
+      as long as I live." Then he got on his horse and rode south into Scania,
+      where immediately many people crowded to him. That winter he brought under
+      his power all the Danish dominions, and all the Danes took him for their
+      king. Thorer, King Magnus's brother, came to Svein in autumn with the
+      message of King Magnus, as before related, and was well received; and
+      Thorer remained long with Svein and was well taken care of.
+      31. OF KING HARALD SIGURDSON.
+      King Harald Sigurdson took the royal power over all Norway after the death
+      of King Magnus Olafson; and when he had reigned over Norway one winter and
+      spring was come (A.D. 1048), he ordered a levy through all the land of
+      one-half of all men and ships and went south to Jutland. He herried and
+      burned all summer wide around in the land and came into Godnarfjord, where
+      King Harald made these verses: -
+     "While wives of husbands fondly dream,
+     Here let us anchor in the stream,
+     In Godnarfjord; we'll safely moor
+     Our sea-homes, and sleep quite secure."
+      Then he spoke to Thiodolf, the skald, and asked him to add to it what it
+      wanted, and he sang: -
+     "In the next summer, I foresee,
+     Our anchorage in the South will be;
+     To hold our sea-homes on the ground,
+     More cold-tongued anchors will be found."
+      To this Bolverk alludes in his song also, that Harald went to Denmark the
+      summer after King Magnus's death. Bolverk sings thus: -
+     "Next summer thou the levy raised,
+     And seawards all the people gazed,
+     Where thy sea-steeds in sunshine glancing
+     Over the waves were gaily prancing;
+     While the deep ships that plunder bore
+     Seemed black specks from the distant shore.
+     The Danes, from banks or hillocks green,
+     Looked with dismay upon the scene."
+      32. OF THORKEL GEYSA'S DAUGHTERS.
+      Then they burned the house of Thorkel Geysa, who was a great lord, and his
+      daughters they carried off bound to their ships. They had made a great
+      mockery the winter before of King Harald's coming with war-ships against
+      Denmark; and they cut their cheese into the shape of anchors, and said
+      such anchors might hold all the ships of the Norway king. Then this was
+      composed: -
+     "The Island-girls, we were told,
+     Made anchors all our fleet to hold:
+     Their Danish jest cut out in cheese
+     Did not our stern king's fancy please.
+     Now many a maiden fair, may be,
+     Sees iron anchors splash the sea,
+     Who will not wake a maid next morn
+     To laugh at Norway's ships in scorn."
+      It is said that a spy who had seen the fleet of King Harald said to
+      Thorkel Geysa's daughters, "Ye said, Geysa's daughters, that King Harald
+      dared not come to Denmark." Dotta, Thorkel's daughter, replied, "That was
+      yesterday." Thorkel had to ransom his daughters with a great sum. So says
+      Grane: -
+     "The gold-adorned girl's eye
+     Through Hornskeg wood was never dry,
+     As down towards the sandy shore
+     The men their lovely prizes bore.
+     The Norway leader kept at bay
+     The foe who would contest the way,
+     And Dotta's father had to bring
+     Treasure to satisfy the king."
+      King Harald plundered in Denmark all that summer, and made immense booty;
+      but he had not any footing in the land that summer in Denmark. He went to
+      Norway again in autumn and remained there all winter (A.D. 1049).
+      33. MARRIAGES AND CHILDREN OF HARALD HARDRADE.
+      The winter after King Magnus the Good died, King Harald took Thora,
+      daughter of Thorberg Arnason, and they had two sons; the oldest called
+      Magnus, and the other Olaf. King Harald and Queen Ellisif had two
+      daughters; the one Maria, the other Ingegerd. The spring after the foray
+      which has just been related King Harald ordered the people out and went
+      with them to Denmark (A.D. 1049), and herried there, and did so summer
+      after summer thereafter. So says Stuf, the skald: -
+     "Falster lay waste, as people tell, -
+     The raven in other isles fared well.
+     The Danes were everywhere in fear,
+     For the dread foray every year."
+      34. OF THE ARMAMENTS OF SVEIN ULFSON AND HARALD.
+      King Svein ruled over all the Danish dominions after King Magnus's death.
+      He sat quiet all the winter; but in summer he lay out in his ships with
+      all his people and it was said he would go north to Norway with the Danish
+      army and make not less havoc there than King Harald had made in Denmark.
+      King Svein proposed to King Harald in winter (A.D. 1049) to meet him the
+      following summer at the Gaut river and fight until in the battle-field
+      their differences were ended, or they were settled peacefully. They made
+      ready on both sides all winter with their ships, and called out in summer
+      one-half of all the fighting men. The same summer came Thorleik the Fair
+      out of Iceland, and composed a poem about King Svein Ulfson. He heard,
+      when he arrived in Norway, that King Harald had sailed south to the Gaut
+      river against King Svein. Then Thorleik sang this: -
+     "The wily Svein, I think, will meet
+     These inland Norsemen fleet to fleet;
+     The arrow-storm, and heaving sea,
+     His vantage-fight and field will be.
+     God only knows the end of strife,
+     Or which shall have his land and life;
+     This strife must come to such an end,
+     For terms will never bind King Svein."
+      He also sang these verses: -
+     "Harald, whose red shield oft has shone
+     O'er herried coasts, and fields hard won,
+     Rides in hot wrath, and eager speeds
+     O'er the blue waves his ocean-steeds.
+     Svein, who in blood his arrows stains,
+     Brings o'er the ocean's heaving plains
+     His gold-beaked ships, which come in view
+     Out from the Sound with many a hue."
+      King Harald came with his forces to the appointed meeting-place; but there
+      he heard that King Svein was lying with his fleet at the south side of
+      Seeland. Then King Harald divided his forces; let the greater part of the
+      bonde-troops return home; and took with him his court-men, his lendermen,
+      the best men-at-arms, and all the bonde-troops who lived nearest to the
+      Danish land. They sailed over to Jutland to the south of Vendilskage, and
+      so south to Thioda; and over all they carried fire and sword. So says
+      Stuf, the skald: -
+     "In haste the men of Thyland fly
+     From the great monarch's threat'ning eye;
+     At the stern Harald's angry look
+     The boldest hearts in Denmark shook."
+      They went forward all the way south to Heidaby, took the merchant town and
+      burnt it. Then one of Harald's men made the following verses: -
+     "All Heidaby is burned down!
+     Strangers will ask where stood the town.
+     In our wild humour up it blazed,
+     And Svein looks round him all amazed.
+     All Heidaby is burned down!
+     From a far corner of the town
+     I saw, before the peep of morning,
+     Roofs, walls, and all in flame high burning."
+      To this also Thorleik alludes in his verses, when he heard there had been
+      no battle at the Gaut river: -
+     "The stranger-warrior may inquire
+     Of Harald's men, why in his ire
+     On Heidaby his wrath he turns,
+     And the fair town to ashes burns?
+     Would that the day had never come
+     When Harald's ships returned home
+     From the East Sea, since now the town,
+     Without his gain, is burned down!"
+      35. HARALD'S ESCAPE INTO THE JUTLAND SEA.
+      Then King Harald sailed north and had sixty ships and the most of them
+      large and heavily laden with the booty taken in summer; and as they sailed
+      north past Thioda King Svein came down from the land with a great force
+      and he challenged King Harald to land and fight. King Harald had little
+      more than half the force of King Svein and therefore he challenged Svein
+      to fight at sea. So says Thorleik the Fair: -
+     "Svein, who of all men under heaven
+     Has had the luckiest birth-hour given,
+     Invites his foemen to the field,
+     There to contest with blood-stained shield.
+     The king, impatient of delay,
+     Harald, will with his sea-hawks stay;
+     On board will fight, and fate decide
+     If Svein shall by his land abide."
+      After that King Harald sailed north along Vendilskage; and the wind then
+      came against them, and they brought up under Hlesey, where they lay all
+      night. A thick fog lay upon the sea; and when the morning came and the sun
+      rose they saw upon the other side of the sea as if many lights were
+      burning. This was told to King Harald; and he looked at it, and said
+      immediately, "Strike the tilts down on the ships and take to the oars. The
+      Danish forces are coming upon us, and the fog there where they are must
+      have cleared off, and the sun shines upon the dragon-heads of their ships,
+      which are gilded, and that is what we see." It was so as he had said.
+      Svein had come there with a prodigious armed force. They rowed now on both
+      sides all they could. The Danish ships flew lighter before the oars; for
+      the Northmen's ships were both soaked with water and heavily laden, so
+      that the Danes approached nearer and nearer. Then Harald, whose own
+      dragon-ship was the last of the fleet, saw that he could not get away; so
+      he ordered his men to throw overboard some wood, and lay upon it clothes
+      and other good and valuable articles; and it was so perfectly calm that
+      these drove about with the tide. Now when the Danes saw their own goods
+      driving about on the sea, they who were in advance turned about to save
+      them; for they thought it was easier to take what was floating freely
+      about, than to go on board the Northmen to take it. They dropped rowing
+      and lost ground. Now when King Svein came up to them with his ship, he
+      urged them on, saying it would be a great shame if they, with so great a
+      force, could not overtake and master so small a number. The Danes then
+      began again to stretch out lustily at their oars. When King Harald saw
+      that the Danish ships went faster he ordered his men to lighten their
+      ships, and cast overboard malt, wheat, bacon, and to let their liquor run
+      out, which helped a little. Then Harald ordered the bulwarkscreens, the
+      empty casks and puncheons and the prisoners to be thrown overboard; and
+      when all these were driving about on the sea, Svein ordered help to be
+      given to save the men. This was done; but so much time was lost that they
+      separated from each other. The Danes turned back and the Northmen
+      proceeded on their way. So says Thorleik the Fair: -
+     "Svein drove his foes from Jutland's coast, -
+     The Norsemen's ships would have been lost,
+     But Harald all his vessels saves,
+     Throwing his booty on the waves.
+     The Jutlanders saw, as he threw,
+     Their own goods floating in their view;
+     His lighten'd ships fly o'er the main
+     While they pick up their own again."
+      King Svein returned southwards with his ships to Hlesey, where he found
+      seven ships of the Northmen, with bondes and men of the levy. When King
+      Svein came to them they begged for mercy, and offered ransom for
+      themselves. So says Thorleik the Fair: -
+     "The stern king's men good offers make,
+     If Svein will ransom for them take;
+     Too few to fight, they boldly say
+     Unequal force makes them give way.
+     The hasty bondes for a word
+     Would have betaken them to the sword,
+     And have prolonged a bloody strife -
+     Such men can give no price for life."
+      36. OF HARALD.
+      King Harald was a great man, who ruled his kingdom well in home-concerns.
+      Very prudent was he, of good understanding; and it is the universal
+      opinion that no chief ever was in northern lands of such deep judgment and
+      ready counsel as Harald. He was a great warrior; bold in arms; strong and
+      expert in the use of his weapons beyond any others, as has been before
+      related, although many of the feats of his manhood are not here written
+      down. This is owing partly to our uncertainty about them, partly to our
+      wish not to put stories into this book for which there is no testimony.
+      Although we have heard, many things talked about, and even
+      circumstantially related, yet we think it better that something may be
+      added to, than that it should be necessary to take something away from our
+      narrative. A great part of his history is put in verse by Iceland men,
+      which poems they presented to him or his sons, and for which reason he was
+      their great friend. He was, indeed, a great friend to all the people of
+      that country; and once, when a very dear time set in, he allowed four
+      ships to transport meal to Iceland, and fixed that the shippund should not
+      be dearer than 100 ells of wadmal. He permitted also all poor people, who
+      could find provisions to keep them on the voyage across the sea, to
+      emigrate from Iceland to Norway; and from that time there was better
+      subsistence in the country, and the seasons also turned out better. King
+      Harold also sent from Norway a bell for the church of which Olaf the Saint
+      had sent the timbers to Iceland, and which was erected on the Thing-plain.
+      Such remembrances of King Harald are found here in the country, besides
+      many great gifts which he presented to those who visited him.
+      37. OF HALDOR SNORRASON.
+      Haldor Snorrason and Ulf Uspakson, as before related, came to Norway with
+      King Harald. They were, in many respects, of different dispositions.
+      Haldor was very stout and strong, and remarkably handsome in appearance.
+      King Harald gave him this testimony, that he, among all his men, cared
+      least about doubtful circumstances, whether they betokened danger or
+      pleasure; for, whatever turned up, he was never in higher nor in lower
+      spirits, never slept less nor more on account of them, nor ate or drank
+      but according to his custom. Haldor was not a man of many words, but short
+      in conversation, told his opinion bluntly and was obstinate and hard; and
+      this could not please the king, who had many clever people about him
+      zealous in his service. Haldor remained a short time with the king; and
+      then came to Iceland, where he took up his abode in Hjardarholt, and dwelt
+      in that farm to a very advanced age.
+      38. OF ULF USPAKSON.
+      Ulf Uspakson stood in great esteem with King Harald; for he was a man of
+      great understanding, clever in conversation, active and brave, and withal
+      true and sincere. King Harald made Ulf his marshal, and married him to
+      Jorun, Thorberg's daughter, a sister of Harald's wife, Thora. Ulf and
+      Jorun's children were Joan the Strong of Rasvol, and Brigida, mother of
+      Sauda-Ulf, who was father of Peter Byrdar-Svein, father of Ulf Fly and
+      Sigrid. Joan the Strong's son was Erlend Himalde, father of Archbishop
+      Eystein and his brothers. King Harald gave Ulf the marshal the rights of a
+      lenderman and a fief of twelve marks income, besides a half-district in
+      the Throndhjem land. Of this Stein Herdison speaks in his song about Ulf.
+      39. OF THE BUILDING OF CHURCHES AND HOUSES.
+      King Magnus Olafson built Olaf's church in the town (Nidaros), on the spot
+      where Olaf's body was set down for the night, and which, at that time, was
+      above the town. He also had the king's house built there. The church was
+      not quite finished when the king died; but King Harald had what was
+      wanting completed. There, beside the house, he began to construct a stone
+      hall, but it was not finished when he died. King Harald had the church
+      called Mary Church built from the foundations up, at the sandhill close to
+      the spot where the king's holy remains were concealed in the earth the
+      first winter after his fall. It was a large temple, and so strongly built
+      with lime that it was difficult to break it when the Archbishop Eystein
+      had it pulled down. Olaf's holy remains were kept in Olaf's church while
+      Mary Church was building. King Harald had the king's house erected below
+      Mary Kirk, at the side of the river, where it now is; and he had the house
+      in which he had made the great hall consecrated and called Gregorius
+      Church.
+      40. BEGINNING OF HAKON IVARSON'S STORY.
+      There was a man called Ivar the White, who was a brave lenderman dwelling
+      in the Uplands, and was a daughter's son of Earl Hakon the Great. Ivar was
+      the handsomest man that could be seen. Ivar's son was called Hakon; and of
+      him it was said that he was distinguished above all men then in Norway for
+      beauty, strength and perfection of figure. In his very youth he had been
+      sent out on war expeditions, where he acquired great honour and
+      consideration, and became afterwards one of the most celebrated men.
+      41. OF EINAR TAMBASKELFER.
+      Einar Tambaskelfer was the most powerful lenderman in the Throndhjem land.
+      There was but little friendship between him and King Harald, although
+      Einar retained all the fiefs he had held while Magnus the Good lived.
+      Einar had many large estates, and was married to Bergliot, a daughter of
+      Earl Hakon, as related above. Their son Eindride was grown up, and married
+      to Sigrid, a daughter of Ketil Kalf and Gunhild, King Harald's sister's
+      daughter. Eindride had inherited the beauty of his mother's father, Earl
+      Hakon, and his sons; and in size and strength he took after his father,
+      Einar, and also in all bodily perfections by which Einar had been
+      distinguished above other men. He was, also, as well as his father, the
+      most popular of men, which the sagas, indeed, show sufficiently.
+      42. OF EARL ORM.
+      Orm was at that time earl in the Uplands. His mother was Ragnhild, a
+      daughter of Earl Hakon the Great, and Orm was a remarkably clever man.
+      Aslak Erlingson was then in Jadar at Sole, and was married to Sigrid, a
+      daughter of Earl Svein Hakonson. Gunhild, Earl Svein's other daughter, was
+      married to the Danish king, Svein Ulfson. These were the descendants of
+      Earl Hakon at that time in Norway, besides many other distinguished
+      people; and the whole race was remarkable for their very beautiful
+      appearance, and the most of them were gifted with great bodily perfection,
+      and were all distinguished and important men.
+      43. HARALD'S PRIDE.
+      King Harald was very proud, and his pride increased after he was
+      established in the country; and it came so far that at last it was not
+      good to speak against him, or to propose anything different from what he
+      desired. So says Thiodolf, the skald: -
+     "In arms 'tis right the common man
+     Should follow orders, one by one, -
+     Should stoop or rise, or run or stand,
+     As his war-leader may command;
+     But now to the king who feeds the ravens
+     The people bend like heartless cravens -
+     Nothing is left them, but consent
+     To what the king calls his intent."
+      44. OF THE QUARREL OF KING HARALD AND EINAR TAMBASKELFER.
+      Einar Tambaskelfer was the principal man among the bondes all about
+      Throndhjem, and answered for them at the Things even against the king's
+      men. Einar knew well the law, and did not want boldness to bring forward
+      his opinion at Things, even if the king was present; and all the bondes
+      stood by him. The king was very angry at this, and it came so far that
+      they disputed eagerly against each other. Einar said that the bondes would
+      not put up with any unlawful proceedings from him if he broke through the
+      law of the land; and this occurred several times between them. Einar then
+      began to keep people about him at home, and he had many more when he came
+      into the town if the king was there. It once happened that Einar came to
+      the town with a great many men and ships; he had with him eight or nine
+      great war-ships and nearly 500 men. When he came to the town he went up
+      from the strand with his attendants. King Harald was then in his house,
+      standing out in the gallery of the loft; and when he saw Einar's people
+      going on shore, it is said Harald composed these verses: -
+     "I see great Tambaskelfer go,
+     With mighty pomp, and pride, and show,
+     Across the ebb-shore up the land, -
+     Before, behind, an armed band.
+     This bonde-leader thinks to rule,
+     And fill himself the royal stool.
+     A goodly earl I have known
+     With fewer followers of his own.
+     He who strikes fire from the shield,
+     Einar, may some day make us yield,
+     Unless our axe-edge quickly ends,
+     With sudden kiss, what he intends."
+      Einar remained several days in the town.
+      45. THE FALL OF EINAR AND EINDRIDE.
+      One day there was a meeting held in the town, at which the king himself
+      was present. A thief had been taken in the town, and he was brought before
+      the Thing. The man had before been in the service of Einar, who had been
+      very well satisfied with him. This was told to Einar, and he well knew the
+      king would not let the man off, and more because he took an interest in
+      the matter. Einar, therefore, let his men get under arms, went to the
+      Thing, and took the man by force. The friends on both sides then came
+      between and endeavoured to effect a reconciliation; and they succeeded so
+      far that a meeting-place was appointed, to which both should come. There
+      was a Thing-room in the king's house at the river Nid, and the king went
+      into it with a few men, while the most of his people were out in the yard.
+      The king ordered the shutters of the loft-opening to be turned, so that
+      there was but a little space left clear. When Einar came into the yard
+      with his people, he told his son Eindride to remain outside with the men,
+      "for there is no danger here for me." Eindride remained standing outside
+      at the room-door. When Einar came into the Thing-room, he said, "It is
+      dark in the king's Thing-room." At that moment some men ran against him
+      and assaulted him, some with spears, some with swords. When Eindride heard
+      this he drew his sword and rushed into the room; but he was instantly
+      killed along with his father. The king's men then ran up and placed
+      themselves before the door, and the bondes lost courage, having no leader.
+      They urged each other on, indeed, and said it was a shame they should not
+      avenge their chief; but it came to nothing with their attack. The king
+      went out to his men, arrayed them in battle order, and set up his
+      standard: but the bondes did not venture to assault. Then the king went
+      with all his men on board of his ships, rowed down the river, and then
+      took his way out of the fjord. When Einar's wife Bergliot, who was in the
+      house which Einar had possessed in the town, heard of Einar's fall, she
+      went immediately to the king's house where the bondes army was and urged
+      them to the attack; but at the same moment the king was rowing out of the
+      river. Then said Bergliot, "Now we want here my relation, Hakon Ivarson:
+      Einar's murderer would not be rowing out of the river if Ivar stood here
+      on the riverbank." Then Bergliot adorned Einar's and Eindride's corpses
+      and buried them in Olaf's church, beside King Magnus Olafson's
+      burial-place. After Einar's murder the king was so much disliked for that
+      deed that there was nothing that prevented the lendermen and bondes from
+      attacking the king, and giving him battle, but the want of some leader to
+      raise the banner in the bonde army.
+      46. OF KING HARALD AND FIN ARNASON.
+      Fin Arnason dwelt at Austrat in Yrjar, and was King Harald's lenderman
+      there. Fin was married to Bergliot, a daughter of Halfdan, who was a son
+      of Sigurd Syr, and brother of Olaf the Saint and of King Harald. Thora,
+      King Harald's wife, was Fin Arnason's brother's daughter: and Fin and all
+      his brothers were the king's dearest friends. Fin Arnason had been for
+      some summers on a viking cruise in the West sea; and Fin, Guthorm
+      Gunhildson and Hakon Ivarson had all been together on that cruise. King
+      Harald now proceeded out of Throndhjem fjord to Austrat, where he was well
+      received. Afterwards the king and Fin conversed with each other about this
+      new event of Einar's and his son's death, and of the murmuring and
+      threatening which the bondes made against the king.
+      Fin took up the conversation briskly, and said, "Thou art managing ill in
+      two ways: first, in doing all manner of mischief; and next, in being so
+      afraid that thou knowest not what to do."
+      The king replied, laughing, "I will send thee, friend, into the town to
+      bring about a reconciliation with the bondes; and if that will not do,
+      thou must go to the Uplands and bring matters to such an understanding
+      with Hakon Ivarson that he shall not be my opponent."
+      Fin replies, "And how wilt thou reward me if I undertake this dangerous
+      errand; for both the people of Throndhjem and the people of Upland are so
+      great enemies to thee that it would not be safe for any of thy messengers
+      to come among them, unless he were one who would be spared for his own
+      sake?"
+      The king replies, "Go thou on this embassy, for I know thou wilt succeed
+      in it if any man can, and bring about a reconciliation; and then choose
+      whatever favour from us thou wilt."
+      Fin says, "Hold thou thy word, king, and I will choose my petition. I will
+      desire to have peace and safe residence in the country for my brother
+      Kalf, and all his estates restored; and also that he receive all the
+      dignity and power he had when he left the country."
+      The king assented to all that Fin laid down, and it was confirmed by
+      witnesses and shake of hand.
+      Then said Fin, "What shall I offer Hakon, who rules most among his
+      relations in the land, to induce him to agree to a treaty and
+      reconciliation with thee?"
+      The king replies, "Thou shalt first hear what Hakon on his part requires
+      for making an agreement; then promote my interest as thou art best able;
+      and deny him nothing in the end short of the kingdom."
+      Then King Harald proceeded southwards to More, and drew together men in
+      considerable numbers.
+      47. OF FIN ARNASON'S JOURNEY.
+      Fin Arnason proceeded to the town and had with him his house-servants,
+      nearly eighty men. When he came into the town he held a Thing with the
+      town's people. Fin spoke long and ably at the Thing; and told the town's
+      people, and bondes, above all things not to have a hatred against their
+      king, or to drive him away. He reminded them of how much evil they had
+      suffered by acting thus against King Olaf the Saint; and added, that the
+      king was willing to pay penalty for this murder, according to the judgment
+      of understanding and good men. The effect of Fin's speech was that the
+      bondes promised to wait quietly until the messengers came back whom
+      Bergliot had sent to the Uplands to her relative, Hakon Ivarson. Fin then
+      went out to Orkadal with the men who had accompanied him to the town. From
+      thence he went up to Dovrefield, and eastwards over the mountains. He went
+      first to his son-in-law, Earl Orm, who was married to Sigrid, Fin's
+      daughter, and told him his business.
+      48. OF FIN AND HAKON IVARSON.
+      Then Fin and Earl Orm appointed a meeting with Hakon Ivarson; and when
+      they met Fin explained his errand to Hakon, and the offer which King
+      Harald made him. It was soon seen, from Hakon's speech, that he considered
+      it to be his great duty to avenge the death of his relative, Eindride; and
+      added, that word was come to him from Throndhjem, from which he might
+      expect help in making head against the king. Then Fin represented to Hakon
+      how much better it would be for him to accept of as high a dignity from
+      the king as he himself could desire, rather than to attempt raising a
+      strife against the king to whom he was owing service and duty. He said if
+      he came out of the conflict without victory, he forfeited life and
+      property: "And even if thou hast the victory, thou wilt still be called a
+      traitor to thy sovereign." Earl Orm also supported Fin's speech. After
+      Hakon had reflected upon this he disclosed what lay on his mind, and said,
+      "I will be reconciled with King Harald if he will give me in marriage his
+      relation Ragnhild, King Magnus Olafson's daughter, with such dower as is
+      suitable to her and she will be content with." Fin said he would agree to
+      this on the king's part; and thus it was settled among them. Fin then
+      returned to Throndhjem, and the disturbance and enmity was quashed, so
+      that the king could retain his kingdom in peace at home; and the league
+      was broken which Eindride's relations had made among themselves for
+      opposing King Harald.
+      49. OF THE COURTSHIP OF HAKON IVARSON.
+      When the day arrived for the meeting at which this agreement with Harald
+      should be finally concluded, Hakon went to King Harald; and in their
+      conference the king said that he, for his part, would adhere to all that
+      was settled in their agreement. "Thou Hakon," says he, "must thyself
+      settle that which concerns Ragnhild, as to her accepting thee in marriage;
+      for it would not be advisable for thee, or for any one, to marry Ragnhild
+      without her consent." Then Hakon went to Ragnhild, and paid his addresses
+      to her. She answered him thus: "I have often to feel that my father, King
+      Magnus, is dead and gone from me, since I must marry a bonde; although I
+      acknowledge thou art a handsome man, expert in all exercises. But if King
+      Magnus had lived he would not have married me to any man less than a king;
+      so it is not to be expected that I will take a man who has no dignity or
+      title." Then Hakon went to King Harald and told him his conversation with
+      Ragnhild, and also repeated the agreement which was made between him and
+      Fin, who was with him, together with many others of the persons who had
+      been present at the conversation between him and Fin. Hakon takes them all
+      to witness that such was the agreement that the king should give Ragnhild
+      the dower she might desire. "And now since she will have no man who has
+      not a high dignity, thou must give me such a title of honour; and,
+      according to the opinion of the people, I am of birth, family and other
+      qualifications to be called earl."
+      The king replies, "When my brother, King Olaf, and his son, King Magnus,
+      ruled the kingdom, they allowed only one earl at a time to be in the
+      country, and I have done the same since I came to the kingly title; and I
+      will not take away from Orm the title of honour I had before given him."
+      Hakon saw now that his business had not advanced, and was very ill
+      pleased; and Fin was outrageously angry. They said the king had broken his
+      word; and thus they all separated.
+      50. HAKON'S JOURNEY TO DENMARK.
+      Hakon then went out of the country with a well-manned ship. When he came
+      to Denmark he went immediately to his relative, King Svein, who received
+      him honourably and gave him great fiefs. Hakon became King Svein's
+      commander of the coast defence against the vikings, -the Vindland
+      people, Kurland people, and others from the East countries, -who
+      infested the Danish dominions; and he lay out with his ships of war both
+      winter and summer.
+      51. MURDER OF ASMUND.
+      There was a man called Asmund, who is said to have been King Svein's
+      sister's son, and his foster-son. This Asmund was distinguished among all
+      by his boldness and was much disliked by the king. When Asmund came to
+      years, and to age of discretion, he became an ungovernable person given to
+      murder and manslaughter. The king was ill pleased at this, and sent him
+      away, giving him a good fief, which might keep him and his followers well.
+      As soon as Asmund had got this property from the king he drew together a
+      large troop of people; and as the estate he had got from the king was not
+      sufficient for his expenses he took as his own much more which belonged to
+      the king. When the king heard this he summoned Asmund to him, and when
+      they met the king said that Asmund should remain with the court without
+      keeping any retinue of his own; and this took place as the king desired.
+      But when Asmund had been a little time in the king's court he grew weary
+      of being there, and escaped in the night, returned to his former
+      companions and did more mischief than ever. Now when the king was riding
+      through the country he came to the neighbourhood where Asmund was, and he
+      sent out men-at-arms to seize him. The king then had him laid in irons,
+      and kept him so for some time in hope he would reform; but no sooner did
+      Asmund get rid of his chains than he absconded again, gathered together
+      people and men-at-arms and betook himself to plunder, both abroad and at
+      home. Thus he made great forays, killing and plundering all around. When
+      the people who suffered under these disturbances came to the king and
+      complained to him of their losses, he replied, "Why do ye tell me of this?
+      Why don't you go to Hakon Ivarson, who is my officer for the land-defence,
+      placed on purpose to keep the peace for you peasants, and to hold the
+      vikings in check? I was told that Hakon was a gallant and brave man, but I
+      think he is rather shy when any danger of life is in the way." These words
+      of the king were brought to Hakon, with many additions. Then Hakon went
+      with his men in search of Asmund, and when their ships met Hakon gave
+      battle immediately -and the conflict was sharp, and many men were
+      killed. Hakon boarded Asmund's ship and cut down the men before his feet.
+      At last he and Asmund met and exchanged blows until Asmund fell. Hakon cut
+      off his head, went in all haste to King Svein and found him just sitting
+      down to the dinner-table. Hakon presented himself before the table, laid
+      Asmund's head upon the table before the king, and asked if he knew it. The
+      king made no reply, but became as red as blood in the face. Soon after the
+      king sent him a message, ordering him to leave his service immediately.
+      "Tell him I will do him no harm; but I cannot keep watch over all our
+      relations." (1)
+   ENDNOTES: (1) This incident shows how strong, in those ages, was the tie
+     of relationship, and the point of honour of avenging its
+     injuries -the clanship spirit. -L.
+      52. HAKON IVARSON'S MARRIAGE.
+      Hakon then left Denmark, and came north to his estates in Norway. His
+      relation Earl Orm was dead. Hakon's relations and friends were glad to see
+      Hakon, and many gallant men gave themselves much trouble to bring about a
+      reconciliation between King Harald and Hakon. It was at last settled in
+      this way, that Hakon got Ragnhild, the king's daughter, and that King
+      Harald gave Hakon the earldom, with the same power Earl Orm had possessed.
+      Hakon swore to King Harald an oath of fidelity to all the services he was
+      liable to fulfill.
+      53. RECONCILIATION OF KING HARALD AND KALF.
+      Kalf Arnason had been on a viking cruise to the Western countries ever
+      since he had left Norway; but in winter he was often in the Orkney Islands
+      with his relative, Earl Thorfin. Fin Arnason sent a message to his brother
+      Kalf, and told him the agreement which he had made with King Harald, that
+      Kalf should enjoy safety in Norway, and his estates, and all the fiefs he
+      had held from King Magnus. When this message came to Kalf he immediately
+      got ready for his voyage, and went east to Norway to his brother Fin. Then
+      Fin obtained the king's peace for Kalf, and when Kalf and the king met
+      they went into the agreement which Fin and the king had settled upon
+      before. Kalf bound himself to the king in the same way as he had bound
+      himself to serve King Magnus, according to which Kalf should do all that
+      the king desired and considered of advantage to his realm. Thereupon Kalf
+      received all the estates and fiefs he had before.
+      54. FALL OF KALF ARNASON.
+      The summer following (A.D. 1050) King Harald ordered out a levy, and went
+      to Denmark, where he plundered during the summer; but when he came south
+      to Fyen he found a great force assembled against him. Then the king
+      prepared to land his men from the ships and to engage in a land-fight. He
+      drew up his men on board in order of battle; set Kalf Arnason at the head
+      of one division; ordered him to make the first attack, and told him where
+      they should direct their assault, promising that he would soon make a
+      landing with the others, and come to their assistance. When Kalf came to
+      the land with his men a force came down immediately to oppose them, and
+      Kalf without delay engaged in battle, which, however, did not last long;
+      for Kalf was immediately overpowered by numbers, and betook himself to
+      flight with his men. The Danes pursued them vigorously, and many of the
+      Northmen fell, and among them Kalf Arnason. Now King Harald landed with
+      his array; and they soon came on their way to the field of battle, where
+      they found Kalf's body, and bore it down to the ships. But the king
+      penetrated into the country, killing many people and destroying much. So
+      says Arnor: -
+     "His shining sword with blood he stains,
+     Upon Fyona's grassy plains;
+     And in the midst of fire and smoke,
+     The king Fyona's forces broke."
+      55. FIN ARNASON'S EXPEDITION OUT OF THE COUNTRY.
+      After this Fin Arnason thought he had cause to be an enemy of the king
+      upon account of his brother Kalf's death; and said the king had betrayed
+      Kalf to his fall, and had also deceived him by making him entice his
+      brother Kalf to come over from the West and trust to King Harald's faith.
+      When these speeches came out among people, many said that it was very
+      foolish in Fin to have ever supposed that Kalf could obtain the king's
+      sincere friendship and favour; for they thought the king was the man to
+      seek revenge for smaller offences than Kalf had committed against the
+      king. The king let every one say what he chose, and he himself neither
+      said yes or no about the affair; but people perceived that the king was
+      very well pleased with what had happened. King Harald once made these
+      verses: -
+     "I have, in all, the death-stroke given
+     To foes of mine at least eleven;
+     Two more, perhaps, if I remember,
+     May yet be added to this number,
+     I prize myself upon these deeds,
+     My people such examples needs.
+     Bright gold itself they would despise,
+     Or healing leek-herb underprize,
+     If not still brought before their eyes."
+      Fin Arnason took the business so much to heart that he left the country
+      and went to Denmark to King Svein, where he met a friendly reception. They
+      spoke together in private for a long time; and the end of the business was
+      that Fin went into King Svein's service, and became his man. King Svein
+      then gave Fin an earldom, and placed him in Halland, where he was long
+      earl and defended the country against the Northmen.
+      56. OF GUTHORM GUNHILDSON.
+      Ketil Kalf and Gunhild of Ringanes had a son called Guthorm, and he was a
+      sister's son to King Olaf and Harald Sigurdson. Guthorm was a gallant man,
+      early advanced to manhood. He was often with King Harald, who loved him
+      much, and asked his advice; for he was of good understanding, and very
+      popular. Guthorm had also been engaged early in forays, and had marauded
+      much in the Western countries with a large force. Ireland was for him a
+      land of peace; and he had his winter quarters often in Dublin, and was in
+      great friendship with King Margad.
+      57. GUTHORM'S JUNCTION WITH THE IRISH KING MARGAD.
+      The summer after King Margad, and Guthorm with him, went out on an
+      expedition against Bretland, where they made immense booty. But when the
+      king saw the quantity of silver which was gathered he wanted to have the
+      whole booty, and regarded little his friendship for Guthorm. Guthorm was
+      ill pleased that he and his men should be robbed of their share; but the
+      king said, "Thou must choose one of two things, -either to be content
+      with what we determine, or to fight; and they shall have the booty who
+      gain the victory; and likewise thou must give up thy ships, for them I
+      will have." Guthorm thought there were great difficulties on both sides;
+      for it was disgraceful to give up ships and goods without a stroke, and
+      yet it was highly dangerous to fight the king and his force, the king
+      having sixteen ships and Guthorm only five. Then Guthorm desired three
+      days' time to consider the matter with his people, thinking in that time
+      to pacify the king, and come to a better understanding with him through
+      the mediation of others; but he could not obtain from the king what he
+      desired. This was the day before St. Olaf's day. Guthorm chose the
+      condition that they would rather die or conquer like men, than suffer
+      disgrace, contempt and scorn, by submitting to so great a loss. He called
+      upon God, and his uncle Saint Olaf, and entreated their help and aid;
+      promising to give to the holy man's house the tenth of all the booty that
+      fell to their share, if they gained the victory. Then he arranged his men,
+      placed them in battle order against the great force, prepared for battle,
+      and gave the assault. By the help of God, and the holy Saint Olaf, Guthorm
+      won the battle. King Margad fell, and every man, old and young, who
+      followed him; and after that great victor, Guthorm and all his people
+      returned home joyfully with all the booty they had gained by the battle.
+      Every tenth penny of the booty they had made was taken, according to the
+      vow, to King Olaf the Saint's shrine; and there was so much silver that
+      Guthorm had an image made of it, with rays round the head, which was the
+      size of his own, or of his forecastle-man's head; and the image was seven
+      feet high. The image thus produced was given by Guthorm to King Olaf of
+      the Saint's temple, where it has since remained as a memorial of Guthorm's
+      victory and King Olaf the Saint's miracle.
+      58. MIRACLE OF KING OLAF IN DENMARK.
+      There was a wicked, evil-minded count in Denmark who had a Norwegian
+      servant-girl whose family belonged to Throndhjem district. She worshipped
+      King Olaf the Saint, and believed firmly in his sanctity. But the above
+      mentioned count doubted all that was told of the holy man's miracles,
+      insisted that it was nothing but nonsense and idle talk, and made a joke
+      and scorn of the esteem and honour which all the country people showed the
+      good king. Now when his holyday came, on which the mild monarch ended his
+      life, and which all Northmen kept sacred, this unreasonable count would
+      not observe it, but ordered his servant-girl to bake and put fire in the
+      oven that day. She knew well the count's mad passion, and that he would
+      revenge himself severely on her if she refused doing as he ordered. She
+      went, therefore, of necessity, and baked in the oven, but wept much at her
+      work; and she threatened King Olaf that she never would believe in him, if
+      he did not avenge this misdeed by some mischance or other. And now shall
+      ye come to hear a well-deserved vengeance, and a true miracle. It
+      happened, namely, in the same hour that the count became blind of both
+      eyes, and the bread which she had shoved into the oven was turned into
+      stone! Of these stones some are now in St. Olaf's temple, and in other
+      places; and since that time Olafsmas has been always held holy in Denmark.
+      59. KING OLAF'S MIRACLE ON A CRIPPLE.
+      West in Valland, a man had such bad health that he became a cripple, and
+      went on his knees and elbows. One day he was upon the road, and had fallen
+      asleep. He dreamt that a gallant man came up to him and asked him where he
+      was going. When he named the neighbouring town, the man said to him, "Go
+      to Saint Olaf's church that stands in London, and there thou shalt be
+      cured." There-upon he awoke, and went straightway to inquire the road to
+      Olaf's church in London. At last he came to London Bridge, and asked the
+      men of the castle if they could tell him where Olaf's church was; but they
+      replied, there were so many churches that they could not tell to whom each
+      of them was consecrated. Soon after a man came up and asked him where he
+      wanted to go, and he answered to Olaf's church. Then said the man, "We
+      shall both go together to Olaf's church, for I know the way to it."
+      Thereupon they went over the bridge to the shrine where Olaf's church was;
+      and when they came to the gates of the churchyard the man mounted over the
+      half-door that was in the gate, but the cripple rolled himself in, and
+      rose up immediately sound and strong: when he looked about him his
+      conductor had vanished.
+      60. KING HARALD'S FORAY IN DENMARK.
+      King Harald had built a merchant town in the East at Oslo, where he often
+      resided; for there was good supply from the extensive cultivated district
+      wide around. There also he had a convenient station to defend the country
+      against the Danes, or to make an attack upon Denmark, which he was in the
+      custom of doing often, although he kept no great force on foot. One summer
+      King Harald went from thence with a few light ships and a few men. He
+      steered southwards out from Viken, and, when the wind served, stood over
+      to Jutland, and marauded; but the country people collected and defended
+      the country. Then King Harald steered to Limfjord, and went into the
+      fjord. Limfjord is so formed that its entrance is like a narrow river; but
+      when one gets farther into the fjord it spreads out into a wide sea. King
+      Harald marauded on both sides of the land; and when the Danes gathered
+      together on every side to oppose him, he lay at a small island which was
+      uncultivated. They wanted drink on board his ships, and went up into the
+      island to seek water; but finding none, they reported it to the king. He
+      ordered them to look for some long earthworms on the island, and when they
+      found one they brought it to the king. He ordered the people to bring the
+      worm to a fire, and bake it before it, so that it should be thirsty. Then
+      he ordered a thread to be tied round the tail of the worm, and to let it
+      loose. The worm crept away immediately, while thread wound off from the
+      clew as the worm took it away; and the people followed the worm until it
+      sought downwards in the earth. There the king ordered them to dig for
+      water, which they did, and found so much water that they had no want of
+      it. King Harald now heard from his spies that King Svein was come with a
+      large armament to the mouth of the fjord; but that it was too late for him
+      to come into it, as only one ship at a time can come in. King Harald then
+      steered with his fleet in through the fjord to where it was broadest to a
+      place called Lusbreid. In the inmost bight, there is but a narrow neck of
+      land dividing the fjord from the West sea. Thither King Harald rowed with
+      his men towards evening; and at night when it was dark he unloaded his
+      ships, drew them over the neck of land into the West sea, loaded them
+      again, and was ready with all this before day. He then steered northwards
+      along the Jutland coast. People then said that Harald had escaped from the
+      hands of the Danes. Harald said that he would come to Denmark next time
+      with more people and larger vessels. King Harald then proceeded north to
+      Throndhjem.
+      61. KING HARALD HAD A SHIP BUILT.
+      King Harald remained all winter at Nidaros (A.D. 1062) and had a vessel
+      built out upon the strand, and it was a buss. The ship was built of the
+      same size as the Long Serpent, and every part of her was finished with the
+      greatest care. On the stem was a dragon-head, and on the stern a
+      dragon-tail, and the sides of the bows of the ship were gilt. The vessel
+      was of thirty-five rowers benches, and was large for that size, and was
+      remarkably handsome; for the king had everything belonging to the ship's
+      equipment of the best, both sails and rigging, anchors and cables. King
+      Harald sent a message in winter south to Denmark to King Svein, that he
+      should come northwards in spring; that they should meet at the Gaut river
+      and fight, and so settle the division of the countries that the one who
+      gained the victory should have both kingdoms.
+      62. KING HARALD'S CHALLENGE.
+      King Harald during this winter called out a general levy of all the people
+      of Norway, and assembled a great force towards spring. Then Harald had his
+      great ship drawn down and put into the river Nid, and set up the dragon's
+      head on her. Thiodolf, the skald, sang about it thus: -
+     "My lovely girl!  the sight was grand
+     When the great war-ships down the strand
+     Into the river gently slid,
+     And all below her sides was hid.
+     Come, lovely girl, and see the show! -
+     Her sides that on the water glow,
+     Her serpent-head with golden mane,
+     All shining back from the Nid again."
+      Then King Harald rigged out his ship, got ready for sea, and when he had
+      all in order went out of the river. His men rowed very skilfully and
+      beautifully. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "It was upon a Saturday,
+     Ship-tilts were struck and stowed away,
+     And past the town our dragon glides,
+     That girls might see our glancing sides.
+     Out from the Nid brave Harald steers;
+     Westward at first the dragon veers;
+     Our lads together down with oars,
+     The splash is echoed round the shores.
+
+     "Their oars our king's men handle well,
+     One stroke is all the eye can tell:
+     All level o'er the water rise;
+     The girls look on in sweet surprise.
+     Such things, they think, can ne'er give way;
+     The little know the battle day.
+     The Danish girls, who dread our shout,
+     Might wish our ship-gear not so stout.
+
+     "'Tis in the fight, not on the wave,
+     That oars may break and fail the brave.
+     At sea, beneath the ice-cold sky,
+     Safely our oars o'er ocean ply;
+     And when at Throndhjem's holy stream
+     Our seventy cars in distance gleam,
+     We seem, while rowing from the sea,
+     An erne with iron wings to be."
+      King Harald sailed south along the land, and called out the levy
+      everywhere of men and ships. When they came east to Viken they got a
+      strong wind against them and the forces lay dispersed about in the
+      harbour; some in the isles outside, and some in the fjords. So says
+      Thiodolf: -
+     "The cutters' sea-bleached bows scarce find
+     A shelter from the furious wind
+     Under the inland forests' side,
+     Where the fjord runs its farthest tide.
+     In all the isles and creeks around
+     The bondes' ships lie on the ground,
+     And ships with gunwales hung with shields
+     Seek the lee-side of the green fields."
+      In the heavy storm that raged for some time the great ship had need of
+      good ground tackle. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "With lofty bow above the seas,
+     Which curl and fly before the breeze,
+     The gallant vessel rides and reels,
+     And every plunge her cable feels.
+     The storm that tries the spar and mast
+     Tries the main-anchor at the last:
+     The storm above, below the rock,
+     Chafe the thick cable with each shock."
+      When the weather became favourable King Harald sailed eastwards to the
+      Gaut river with his fleet and arrived there in the evening. So says
+      Thiodolf: -
+     "The gallant Harald now has come
+     To Gaut, full half way from his home,
+     And on the river frontier stands,
+     To fight with Svein for life and lands.
+     The night passed o'er, the gallant king
+     Next day at Thumia calls a Thing,
+     Where Svein is challenged to appear -
+     A day which ravens wish were near."
+      63. OF KING HARALD'S FLEET.
+      When the Danes heard that the Northmen's army was come to the Gaut river
+      they all fled who had opportunity to get away. The Northmen heard that the
+      Danish king had also called out his forces and lay in the south, partly at
+      Fyen and partly about Seeland. When King Harald found that King Svein
+      would not hold a meeting with him, or a fight, according to what had been
+      agreed upon between them, he took the same course as before -letting
+      the bonde troops return home, but manning 150 ships, with which he sailed
+      southwards along Halland, where he herried all round, and then brought up
+      with his fleet in Lofufjord, and laid waste the country. A little
+      afterwards King Svein came upon them with all the Danish fleet, consisting
+      of 300 ships. When the Northmen saw them King Harald ordered a general
+      meeting of the fleet to be called by sound of trumpet; and many there said
+      it was better to fly, as it was not now advisable to fight. The king
+      replied, "Sooner shall all lie dead one upon another than fly." So says
+      Stein Herdison: -
+     "With falcon eye, and courage bright,
+     Our king saw glory in the fight;
+     To fly, he saw, would ruin bring
+     On them and him -the folk and king.
+     'Hands up the arms to one and all!'
+     Cries out the king; 'we'll win or fall!
+     Sooner than fly, heaped on each other
+     Each man shall fall across his brother!'"
+      Then King Harald drew up his ships to attack, and brought forward his
+      great dragon in the middle of his fleet. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "The brave king through his vessels' throng
+     His dragon war-ship moves along;
+     He runs her gaily to the front,
+     To meet the coming battle's brunt."
+      The ship was remarkably well equipt, and fully manned. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "The king had got a chosen crew -
+     He told his brave lads to stand true.
+     The ring of shields seemed to enclose
+     The ship's deck from the boarding foes.
+     The dragon, on the Nis-river flood,
+     Beset with men, who thickly stood,
+     Shield touching shield, was something rare,
+     That seemed all force of man to dare."
+      Ulf, the marshal, laid his ship by the side of the king's and ordered his
+      men to bring her well forward. Stein Herdison, who was himself in Ulf's
+      ship, sings of it thus: -
+     "Our oars were stowed, our lances high,
+     As the ship moved swung in the sky.
+     The marshal Ulf went through our ranks,
+     Drawn up beside the rowers' banks:
+     The brave friend of our gallant king
+     Told us our ship well on to bring,
+     And fight like Norsemen in the cause -
+     Our Norsemen answered with huzzas."
+      Hakon Ivarson lay outside on the other wing, and had many ships with him,
+      all well equipt. At the extremity of the other side lay the Throndhjem
+      chiefs, who had also a great and strong force.
+      64. OF KING SVEIN'S ARMAMENT.
+      Svein, the Danish king, also drew up his fleet, and laid his ship forward
+      in the center against King Harald's ship, and Fin Arnason laid his ship
+      next; and then the Danes laid their ships, according as they were bold or
+      well-equipt. Then, on both sides, they bound the ships together all
+      through the middle of the fleets; but as the fleets were so large, very
+      many ships remained loose, and each laid his ship forward according to his
+      courage, and that was very unequal. Although the difference among the men
+      was great, altogether there was a very great force on both sides. King
+      Svein had six earls among the people following him. So says Stein
+      Herdison: -
+     "Danger our chief would never shun,
+     With eight score ships he would not run:
+     The Danish fleet he would abide,
+     And give close battle side by side.
+     From Leire's coast the Danish king
+     Three hundred ocean steeds could bring,
+     And o'er the sea-weed plain in haste
+     Thought Harald's vessels would be chased."
+      65. BEGINNING OF THE BATTLE OF NIS-RIVER.
+      As soon as King Harald was ready with his fleet, he orders the war-blast
+      to sound, and the men to row forward to the attack. So says Stein
+      Herdison: -
+     "Harald and Svein first met as foes,
+     Where the Nis in the ocean flows;
+     For Svein would not for peace entreat,
+     But, strong in ships, would Harald meet.
+     The Norsemen prove, with sword in hand,
+     That numbers cannot skill withstand.
+     Off Halland's coast the blood of Danes
+     The blue sea's calm smooth surface stains."
+      Soon the battle began, and became very sharp; both kings urging on their
+      men. So says Stein Herdison: -
+     "Our king, his broad shield disregarding,
+     More keen for striking than for warding,
+     Now tells his lads their spears to throw, -
+     Now shows them where to strike a blow.
+     From fleet to fleet so short the way,
+     That stones and arrows have full play;
+     And from the keen sword dropped the blood
+     Of short-lived seamen in the flood."
+      It was late in the day when the battle began, and it continued the whole
+      night. King Harald shot for a long time with his bow. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "The Upland king was all the night
+     Speeding the arrows' deadly flight.
+     All in the dark his bow-string's twang
+     Was answered; for some white shield rang,
+     Or yelling shriek gave certain note
+     The shaft had pierced some ring-mail coat,
+     The foemen's shields and bulwarks bore
+     A Lapland arrow-scat(1) or more."
+      Earl Hakon, and the people who followed him, did not make fast their ships
+      in the fleet, but rowed against the Danish ships that were loose, and slew
+      the men of all the ships they came up with. When the Danes observed this
+      each drew his ship out of the way of the earl; but he set upon those who
+      were trying to escape, and they were nearly driven to flight. Then a boat
+      came rowing to the earl's ship and hailed him and said that the other wing
+      of King Harald's fleet was giving way and many of their people had fallen.
+      Then the earl rowed thither and gave so severe an assault that the Danes
+      had to retreat before him. The earl went on in this way all the night,
+      coming forward where he was most wanted, and wheresoever he came none
+      could stand against him. Hakon rowed outside around the battle. Towards
+      the end of the night the greatest part of the Danish fleet broke into
+      flight, for then King Harald with his men boarded the vessel of King
+      Svein; and it was so completely cleared that all the crew fell in the
+      ship, except those who sprang overboard. So says Arnor, the earls' skald: -
+     "Brave Svein did not his vessel leave
+     Without good cause, as I believe:
+     Oft on his casque the sword-blade rang,
+     Before into the sea he sprang.
+     Upon the wave his vessel drives;
+     All his brave crew had lost their lives.
+     O'er dead courtmen into the sea
+     The Jutland king had now to flee."
+      And when King Svein's banner was cut down, and his ship cleared of its
+      crew, all his forces took to flight, and some were killed. The ships which
+      were bound together could not be cast loose, so the people who were in
+      them sprang overboard, and some got to the other ships that were loose;
+      and all King Svein's men who could get off rowed away, but a great many of
+      them were slain. Where the king himself fought the ships were mostly bound
+      together, and there were more than seventy left behind of King Svein's
+      vessels. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Svein's ships rode proudly o'er the deep,
+     When, by a single sudden sweep,
+     Full seventy sail, as we are told,
+     Were seized by Norway's monarch bold."
+      King Harald rowed after the Danes and pursued them; but that was not easy,
+      for the ships lay so thick together that they scarcely could move. Earl
+      Fin Arnason would not flee; and being also shortsighted, was taken
+      prisoner. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "To the six Danish earls who came
+     To aid his force, and raise his name,
+     No mighty thanks King Svein is owing
+     For mighty actions of their doing.
+     Fin Arnason, in battle known,
+     With a stout Norse heart of his own,
+     Would not take flight his life to gain,
+     And in the foremost ranks was ta'en."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The Laplanders paid their seat, or yearly tax, in bows and
+     arrows; and the meaning of the skald appears to be, that as
+     many as were paid in a year were shot at the foe. -L.
+      66. KING SVEIN'S FLIGHT.
+      Earl Hakon lay behind with his ships, while the king and the rest of the
+      forces were pursuing the fugitives; for the earls' ships could not get
+      forward on account of the ships which lay in the way before him. Then a
+      man came rowing in a boat to the earl's ship and lay at the bulwarks. The
+      man was stout and had on a white hat. He hailed the ship, "Where is the
+      earl?" said he.
+      The earl was in the fore-hold, stopping a man's blood. The earl cast a
+      look at the man in the hat and asked what his name was. He answered, "Here
+      is Vandrad: speak to me, earl."
+      The earl leant over the ship's side to him. Then the man in the boat said,
+      "Earl, I will accept of my life from thee, if thou wilt give it."
+      Then the earl raised himself up, called two men who were friends dear to
+      him, and said to them, "Go into the boat; bring Vandrad to the land;
+      attend him to my friend's Karl the bonde; and tell Karl, as a token that
+      these words come from me, that he let Vandrad have the horse which I gave
+      to him yesterday, and also his saddle, and his son to attend him."
+      Thereupon they went into the boat and took the oars in hand, while Vandrad
+      steered. This took place just about daybreak, while the vessels were in
+      movement, some rowing towards the land, some towards the sea, both small
+      and great. Vandrad steered where he thought there was most room between
+      the vessels; and when they came near to Norway's ships the earl's men gave
+      their names and then they all allowed them to go where they pleased.
+      Vandrad steered along the shore, and only set in towards the land when
+      they had come past the crowd of ships. They then went up to Karl the
+      bonde's farm, and it was then beginning to be light. They went into the
+      room where Karl had just put on his clothes. The earl's men told him their
+      message and Karl said they must first take some food; and he set a table
+      before them and gave them water to wash with.
+      Then came the housewife into the room and said, "I wonder why we could get
+      no peace or rest all night with the shouting and screaming."
+      Karl replies, "Dost thou not know that the kings were fighting all night?"
+      She asked which had the better of it.
+      Karl answered, "The Northmen gained."
+      "Then," said she, "our king will have taken flight."
+      "Nobody knows," says Karl, "whether he has fled or is fallen."
+      She says, "What a useless sort of king we have! He is both slow and
+      frightened."
+      Then said Vandrad, "Frightened he is not; but he is not lucky."
+      Then Vandrad washed his hands; but he took the towel and dried them right
+      in the middle of the cloth. The housewife snatched the towel from him, and
+      said, "Thou hast been taught little good; it is wasteful to wet the whole
+      cloth at one time."
+      Vandrad replies, "I may yet come so far forward in the world as to be able
+      to dry myself with the middle of the towel."
+      Thereupon Karl set a table before them and Vandrad sat down between them.
+      They ate for a while and then went out. The horse was saddled and Karl's
+      son ready to follow him with another horse. They rode away to the forest;
+      and the earl's men returned to the boat, rowed to the earl's ship and told
+      the success of their expedition.
+      67. OF KING HARALD.
+      King Harald and his men followed the fugitives only a short way, and rowed
+      back to the place where the deserted ships lay. Then the battle-place was
+      ransacked, and in King Svein's ship was found a heap of dead men; but the
+      king's body was not found, although people believed for certain that he
+      had fallen. Then King Harald had the greatest attention paid to the dead
+      of his men, and had the wounds of the living bound up. The dead bodies of
+      Svein's men were brought to the land, and he sent a message to the
+      peasants to come and bury them. Then he let the booty be divided, and this
+      took up some time. The news came now that King Svein had come to Seeland,
+      and that all who had escaped from the battle had joined him, along with
+      many more, and that he had a great force.
+      68. FIN ARNASON GETS QUARTER.
+      Earl Fin Arnason was taken prisoner in the battle, as before related; and
+      when he was led before King Harald the king was very merry, and said,
+      "Fin, we meet here now, and we met last in Norway. The Danish court has
+      not stood very firmly by thee; and it will be a troublesome business for
+      Northmen to drag thee, a blind old man, with them, and preserve thy life."
+      The earl replies, "The Northmen find it very difficult now to conquer, and
+      it is all the worse that thou hast the command of them."
+      Then said King Harald, "Wilt thou accept of life and safety, although thou
+      hast not deserved it?"
+      The earl replies, "Not from thee, thou dog."
+      The king: "Wilt thou, then, if thy relation Magnus gives thee quarter?"
+      Magnus, King Harald's son, was then steering the ship.
+      The earl replies, "Can the whelp rule over life and quarter?"
+      The king laughed, as if he found amusement in vexing him. -"Wilt thou
+      accept thy life, then, from thy she-relation Thorer?"
+      The earl: "Is she here?"
+      "She is here," said the king.
+      Then Earl Fin broke out with the ugly expressions which since have been
+      preserved, as a proof that he was so mad with rage that he could not
+      govern his tongue: -
+      "No wonder thou hast bit so strongly, if the mare was with thee."
+      Earl Fin got life and quarter and the king kept him a while about him. But
+      Fin was rather melancholy and obstinate in conversation; and King Harald
+      said, "I see, Fin, that thou dost not live willingly in company with me
+      and thy relations; now I will give thee leave to go to thy friend King
+      Svein."
+      The earl said, "I accept of the offer willingly, and the more gratefully
+      the sooner I get away from hence."
+      The king afterwards let Earl Fin be landed and the traders going to
+      Halland received him well. King Harald sailed from thence to Norway with
+      his fleet; and went first to Oslo, where he gave all his people leave to
+      go home who wished to do so.
+      69. OF KING SVEIN.
+      King Svein, it is told, sat in Denmark all that winter, and had his
+      kingdom as formerly. In winter he sent men north to Halland for Karl the
+      bonde and his wife. When Karl came the king called him to him and asked
+      him if he knew him, or thought he had ever seen him before.
+      Karl replies, "I know thee, sire, and knew thee before, the moment I saw
+      thee; and God be praised if the small help I could give was of any use to
+      thee."
+      The king replies, "I have to reward thee for all the days I have to live.
+      And now, in the first place, I will give thee any farm in Seeland thou
+      wouldst desire to have; and, in the next place, will make thee a great
+      man, if thou knowest how to conduct thyself."
+      Karl thanked the king for his promise, and said he had now but one thing
+      to ask.
+      The king asked what that was.
+      Karl said that he would ask to take his wife with him.
+      The king said, "I will not let thee do that; but I will provide thee a far
+      better and more sensible wife. But thy wife can keep the bonde-farm ye had
+      before and she will have her living from it."
+      The king gave Karl a great and valuable farm, and provided him a good
+      marriage; and he became a considerable man. This was reported far and wide
+      and much praised; and thus it came to be told in Norway.
+      70. OF THE TALK OF THE COURT-MEN.
+      King Harald stayed in Oslo the winter after the battle at Nis-river (A.D.
+      1063). In autumn, when the men came from the south, there was much talk
+      and many stories about the battle which they had fought at Nis-river, and
+      every one who had been there thought he could tell something about it.
+      Once some of them sat in a cellar and drank, and were very merry and
+      talkative. They talked about the Nis-river battle, and who had earne'd the
+      greatest praise and renown. They all agreed that no man there had been at
+      all equal to Earl Hakon. He was the boldest in arms, the quickest, and the
+      most lucky; what he did was of the greatest help, and he won the battle.
+      King Harald, in the meantime, was out in the yard, and spoke with some
+      people. He went then to the room-door, and said, "Every one here would
+      willingly be called Hakon;" and then went his way.
+      71. OF THE ATTEMPT TO TAKE EARL HAKON.
+      Earl Hakon went in winter to the Uplands, and was all winter in his
+      domains. He was much beloved by all the Uplanders. It happened, towards
+      spring, that some men were sitting drinking in the town, and the
+      conversation turned, as usual, on the Nis-river battle; and some praised
+      Earl Hakon, and some thought others as deserving of praise as he. When
+      they had thus disputed a while, one of them said, "It is possible that
+      others fought as bravely as the earl at Nis-river; but none, I think, has
+      had such luck with him as he."
+      The others replied, that his best luck was his driving so many Danes to
+      flight along with other men.
+      The same man replied, "It was greater luck that he gave King Svein
+      quarter."
+      One of the company said to him, "Thou dost not know what thou art saying."
+      He replied, "I know it for certain, for the man told me himself who
+      brought the king to the land."
+      It went, according to the old proverb, that the king has many ears. This
+      was told the king, and he immediately ordered horses to be gathered, and
+      rode away directly with 900 men. He rode all that night and the following
+      day. Then some men met them who were riding to the town with mead and
+      malt. In the king's retinue was a man called Gamal, who rode to one of
+      these bondes who was an acquaintance of his, and spoke to him privately.
+      "I will pay thee," said he, "to ride with the greatest speed, by the
+      shortest private paths that thou knowest, to Earl Hakon, and tell him the
+      king will kill him; for the king has got to the knowledge that Earl Hakon
+      set King Svein on shore at Nis-river." They agreed on the payment. The
+      bonde rode, and came to the earl just as he was sitting drinking, and had
+      not yet gone to bed. When the bonde told his errand, the earl immediately
+      stood up with all his men, had all his loose property removed from the
+      farm to the forest, and all the people left the house in the night. When
+      the king came he halted there all night; but Hakon rode away, and came
+      east to Svithjod to King Steinkel and stayed with him all summer. King
+      Harald returned to the town, travelled northwards to Throndhjem district,
+      and remained there all summer; but in autumn he returned eastwards to
+      Viken.
+      72. OF EARL HAKON.
+      As soon as Earl Hakon heard the king had gone north he returned
+      immediately in summer to the Uplands (A.D. 1063), and remained there until
+      the king had returned from the north. Then the earl went east into
+      Vermaland, where he remained during the winter, and where the king,
+      Steinkel, gave him fiefs. For a short time in winter he went west to
+      Raumarike with a great troop of men from Gautland and Vermaland, and
+      received the scat and duties from the Upland people which belonged to him,
+      and then returned to Glutland, and remained there till spring. King Harald
+      had his seat in Oslo all winter (A.D. 1064), and sent his men to the
+      Uplands to demand the scat, together with the king's land dues, and the
+      mulcts of court; but the Uplanders said they would pay all the scat and
+      dues which they had to pay, to Earl Hakon as long as he was in life, and
+      had forfeited his life or his fief; and the king got no dues that winter.
+      73. AGREEMENT BETWEEN KING HARALD AND KING SVEIN.
+      This winter messengers and ambassadors went between Norway and Denmark,
+      whose errand was that both Northmen and Danes should make peace, and a
+      league with each other, and to ask the kings to agree to it. These
+      messages gave favourable hopes of a peace; and the matter proceeded so far
+      that a meeting for peace was appointed at the Gaut river between King
+      Harald and King Svein. When spring approached, both kings assembled many
+      ships and people for this meeting. So says a skald in a poem on this
+      expedition of the kings, which begins thus: -
+     "The king, who from the northern sound
+     His land with war-ships girds around,
+     The raven-feeder, filled the coast
+     With his proud ships, a gallant host!
+     The gold-tipped stems dash through the foam
+     That shakes the seamen's planked home;
+     The high wave breaks up to the mast,
+     As west of Halland on they passed,
+
+     "Harald whose word is fixed and sure,
+     Whose ships his land from foes secure,
+     And Svein, whose isles maintain is fleet,
+     Hasten as friends again to meet;
+     And every creek with vessels teems, -
+     All Denmark men and shipping seems;
+     And all rejoice that strife will cease,
+     And men meet now but to make peace."
+      Here it is told that the two kings held the meeting that was agreed upon
+      between them, and both came to the frontiers of their kingdoms. So says
+      the skald: -
+     "To meet (since peace the Dane now craves)
+     On to the south upon the waves
+     Sailed forth our gallant northern king,
+     Peace to the Danes with him to bring.
+     Svein northward to his frontier hies
+     To get the peace his people prize,
+     And meet King Harald, whom he finds
+     On land hard used by stormy winds."
+      When the kings found each other, people began at once to talk of their
+      being reconciled. But as soon as peace was proposed, many began to
+      complain of the damage they had sustained by harrying, robbing and killing
+      men; and for a long time it did not look very like peace. It is here
+      related: -
+     "Before this meeting of the kings
+     Each bende his own losses brings,
+     And loudly claims some recompense
+     From his king's foes, at their expense.
+     It is not easy to make peace,
+     Where noise and talking never cease:
+     The bondes' warmth may quickly spread,
+     And kings be by the people led.
+
+     "When kings are moved, no peace is sure;
+     For that peace only is secure
+     Which they who make it fairly make, -
+     To each side give, from each side take.
+     The kings will often rule but ill
+     Who listen to the people's will:
+     The people often have no view
+     But their own interests to pursue."
+      At last the best men, and those who were the wisest, came between the
+      kings, and settled the peace thus: -that Harald should have Norway,
+      and Svein Denmark, according to the boundaries of old established between
+      Denmark and Norway; neither of them should pay to the other for any damage
+      sustained; the war should cease as it now stood, each retaining what he
+      had got; and this peace should endure as long as they were kings. This
+      peace was confirmed by oath. Then the kings parted, having given each
+      other hostages, as is here related: -
+     "And I have heard that to set fast
+     The peace God brought about at last,
+     Svein and stern Harald pledges sent,
+     Who witnessed to their sworn intent;
+     And much I wish that they and all
+     In no such perjury may fall
+     That this peace ever should be broken,
+     And oaths should fail before God spoken."
+      King Harald with his people sailed northwards to Norway, and King Svein
+      southwards to Denmark.
+      74. KING HARALD'S BATTLE WITH EARL HAKON.
+      King Harald was in Viken in the summer (A.D. 1064), and he sent his men to
+      the Uplands after the scat and duty which belonged to him; but the bondes
+      paid no attention to the demand, but said they would hold all for Earl
+      Hakon until he came for it. Earl Hakon was then up in Gautland with a
+      large armed force. When summer was past King Harald went south to
+      Konungahella. Then he took all the light-sailing vessels he could get hold
+      of and steered up the river. He had the vessels drawn past all the
+      waterfalls and brought them thus into the Wener lake. Then he rowed
+      eastward across the lake to where he heard Earl Hakon was; but when the
+      earl got news of the king's expedition he retreated down the country, and
+      would not let the king plunder the land. Earl Hakon had a large armed
+      force which the Gautland people had raised for him. King Harald lay with
+      his ships up in a river, and made a foray on land, but left some of his
+      men behind to protect the ships. The king himself rode up with a part of
+      the men, but the greater part were on foot. They had to cross a forest,
+      where they found a mire or lake, and close to it a wood; and when they
+      reached the wood they saw the earl's men, but the mire was between them.
+      They drew up their people now on both sides. Then King Harald ordered his
+      men to sit down on the hillside. "We will first see if they will attack
+      us. Earl Hakon does not usually wait to talk." It was frosty weather, with
+      some snow-drift, and Harald's men sat down under their shields; but it was
+      cold for the Gautlanders, who had but little clothing with them. The earl
+      told them to wait until King Harald came nearer, so that all would stand
+      equally high on the ground. Earl Hakon had the same banner which had
+      belonged to King Magnus Olafson.
+      The lagman of the Gautland people, Thorvid, sat upon a horse, and the
+      bridle was fastened to a stake that stood in the mire. He broke out with
+      these words: "God knows we have many brave and handsome fellows here, and
+      we shall let King Steinkel hear that we stood by the good earl bravely. I
+      am sure of one thing: we shall behave gallantly against these Northmen, if
+      they attack us; but if our young people give way, and should not stand to
+      it, let us not run farther than to that stream; but if they should give
+      way farther, which I am sure they will not do, let it not be farther than
+      to that hill." At that instant the Northmen sprang up, raised the war-cry,
+      and struck on their shields; and the Gautland army began also to shout.
+      The lagman's horse got shy with the war-cry, and backed so hard that the
+      stake flew up and struck the lagman on the head. He said, "Ill luck to
+      thee, Northman, for that arrow!" and away fled the lagman. King Harald had
+      told his people, "If we do make a clash with the weapons, we shall not
+      however, go down from the hill until they come nearer to us;" and they did
+      so. When the war-cry was raised the earl let his banner advance; but when
+      they came under the hill the king's army rushed down upon them, and killed
+      some of the earl's people, and the rest fled. The Northmen did not pursue
+      the fugitives long, for it was the fall of day; but they took Earl Hakon's
+      banner and all the arms and clothes they could get hold of. King Harald
+      had both the banners carried before him as they marched away. They spoke
+      among themselves that the earl had probably fallen. As they were riding
+      through the forest they could only ride singly, one following the other.
+      Suddenly a man came full gallop across the path, struck his spear through
+      him who was carrying the earl's banner, seized the banner-staff, and rode
+      into the forest on the other side with the banner. When this was told the
+      king he said, "Bring me my armour, for the earl is alive." Then the king
+      rode to his ships in the night; and many said that the earl had now taken
+      his revenge. But Thiodolf sang thus: -
+     "Steinkel's troops, who were so bold,
+     Who the Earl Hakon would uphold,
+     Were driven by our horsemen's power
+     To Hel, death goddess, in an hour;
+     And the great earl, so men say
+     Who won't admit he ran away,
+     Because his men fled from the ground,
+     Retired, and cannot now be found."
+      75. DEATH OF HAL, THE MURDERER OF KODRAN.
+      The rest of the night Harald passed in his ships; but in the morning, when
+      it was daylight, it was found that so thick ice had gathered about the
+      vessels that one could walk around them. The king ordered his men to cut
+      the ice from the ships all the way out to the clear water; on which they
+      all went to break the ice. King Harald's son, Magnus, steered the vessel
+      that lay lowest down the river and nearest the water. When the people had
+      cleared the ice away almost entirely, a man ran out to the ice, and began
+      hewing away at it like a madman. Then said one of the men, "It is going
+      now as usual, that none can do so much as Hal who killed Kodran, when once
+      he lays himself to the work. See how he is hewing away at the ice." There
+      was a man in the crew of Magnus, the king's son, who was called Thormod
+      Eindridason; and when he heard the name of Kodran's murderer he ran up to
+      Hal, and gave him a death-wound. Kodran was a son of Gudmund Eyjolfson;
+      and Valgerd, who was a sister of Gudmund, was the mother of Jorun, and the
+      grandmother by the mother's side of this Thormod. Thormod was a year old
+      when Kodran was killed, and had never seen Hal Utrygson until now. When
+      the ice was broken all the way out to the water, Magnus drew his ship out,
+      set sail directly, and sailed westward across the lake; but the king's
+      ship, which lay farthest up the river, came out the last. Hal had been in
+      the king's retinue, and was very dear to him; so that the king was enraged
+      at his death. The king came the last into the harbour, and Magnus had let
+      the murderer escape into the forest, and offered to pay the mulct for him;
+      and the king had very nearly attacked Magnus and his crew, but their
+      friends came up and reconciled them.
+      76. OF KING HARALD.
+      That winter (A.D. 1065) King Harald went up to Raumarike, and had many
+      people with him; and he accused the bondes there of having kept from him
+      his scat and duties, and of having aided his enemies to raise disturbance
+      against him. He seized on the bondes and maimed some, killed others, and
+      robbed many of all their property. They who could do it fled from him. He
+      burned everything in the districts and laid them altogether waste. So says
+      Thiodolf: -
+     "He who the island-people drove,
+     When they against his power strove,
+     Now bridle's Raumarike's men,
+     Marching his forces through their glen.
+     To punish them the fire he lights
+     That shines afar off in dark nights
+     From house and yard, and, as he says,
+     Will warn the man who disobeys."
+      Thereafter the king went up to Hedemark, burnt the dwellings, and made no
+      less waste and havoc there than in Raumarike. From thence he went to
+      Hadeland and Ringerike, burning and ravaging all the land. So says
+      Thiodolf: -
+     "The bonde's household goods are seen
+     Before his door upon the green,
+     Smoking and singed: and sparks red hot
+     Glow in the thatched roof of his cot.
+     In Hedemark the bondes pray
+     The king his crushing hand to stay;
+     In Ringerike and Hadeland,
+     None 'gainst his fiery wrath can stand."
+      Then the bondes left all to the king's mercy. After the death of King
+      Magnus fifteen years had passed when the battle at Nis-river took place,
+      and afterwards two years elapsed before Harald and Svein made peace. So
+      says Thiodolf: -
+     "The Hordland king under the land
+     At anchor lay close to the strand,
+     At last, prepared with shield and spear
+     The peace was settled the third year."
+      After this peace the disturbances with the people of the Upland districts
+      lasted a year and a half. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "No easy task it is to say
+     How the king brought beneath his sway
+     The Upland bondes, and would give
+     Nought but their ploughs from which to live.
+     The king in eighteen months brought down
+     Their bonde power, and raised his own,
+     And the great honour he has gained
+     Will still in memory be retained."
+      77. OF THE KINGS OF ENGLAND.
+      Edward, Ethelred's son, was king of England after his brother Hardacanute.
+      He was called Edward the Good; and so he was. King Edward's mother was
+      Queen Emma, daughter of Richard, earl of Rouen. Her brother was Earl
+      Robert, whose son was William the Bastard, who at that time was earl at
+      Rouen in Normandy. King Edward's queen was Gyda, a daughter of Earl
+      Godwin, the son of Ulfnad. Gyda's brothers were, Earl Toste, the eldest;
+      Earl Morukare the next; Earl Walter the third; Earl Svein the fourth; and
+      the fifth was Harald, who was the youngest, and he was brought up at King
+      Edward's court, and was his foster-son. The king loved him very much, and
+      kept him as his own son; for he had no children.
+      78. OF HARALD GODWINSON.
+      One summer it happened that Harald, the son of Godwin, made an expedition
+      to Bretland with his ships, but when they got to sea they met a contrary
+      wind, and were driven off into the ocean. They landed west in Normandy,
+      after suffering from a dangerous storm. They brought up at Rouen, where
+      they met Earl William, who received Harald and his company gladly. Harald
+      remained there late in harvest, and was hospitably entertained; for the
+      stormy weather continued, and there was no getting to sea, and this
+      continued until winter set in; so the earl and Harald agreed that he
+      should remain there all winter. Harald sat on the high-seat on one side of
+      the earl; and on the other side sat the earl's wife, one of the most
+      beautiful women that could be seen. They often talked together for
+      amusement at the drinking-table; and the earl went generally to bed, but
+      Harald and the earl's wife sat long in the evenings talking together, and
+      so it went on for a great part of the winter. In one of their
+      conversations she said to Harald, "The earl has asked me what it is we
+      have to talk about so much, for he is angry at it." Harald replies, "We
+      shall then at once let him know all our conversation." The following day,
+      Harald asked the earl to a conference, and they went together into the
+      conference-chamber; where also the queen was, and some of the councillors.
+      Then Harald began thus: -"I have to inform you, earl, that there lies
+      more in my visit here than I have let you know. I would ask your daughter
+      in marriage, and have often spoke over this matter with her mother, and
+      she has promised to support my suit with you." As soon as Harald had made
+      known this proposal of his, it was well received by all who were present.
+      They explained the case to the earl; and at last it came so far that the
+      earl was contracted to Harald, but as she was very young, it was resolved
+      that the wedding should be deferred for some years.
+      79. KING EDWARD'S DEATH.
+      When spring came Harald rigged his ships and set off; and he and the earl
+      parted with great friendship. Harald sailed over to England to King
+      Edward, but did not return to Valland to fulfill the marriage agreement.
+      Edward was king over England for twenty-three years and died on a bed of
+      sickness in London on the 5th of January, and was buried in Paul's church.
+      Englishmen call him a saint.
+      80. HARALD GODWINSON MADE KING OF ENGLAND.
+      The sons of Earl Godwin were the most powerful men in England. Toste was
+      made chief of the English king's army, and was his land-defence man when
+      the king began to grow old; and he was also placed above all the other
+      earls. His brother Harald was always with the court itself, and nearest to
+      the king in all service, and had the charge of the king's
+      treasure-chamber. It is said that when the king was approaching his last
+      hour, Harald and a few others were with him. Harald first leans down over
+      the king, and then said, "I take you all to witness that the king has now
+      given me the kingdom, and all the realm of England:" and then the king was
+      taken dead out of the bed. The same day there was a meeting of the chiefs,
+      at which there was some talk of choosing a king; and then Harald brought
+      forward his witnesses that King Edward had given him the kingdom on his
+      dying day. The meeting ended by choosing Harald as king, and he was
+      consecrated and crowned the 13th day of Yule, in Paul's church. Then all
+      the chiefs and all the people submitted to him. Now when his brother, Earl
+      Toste, heard of this he took it very ill, as he thought himself quite as
+      well entitled to be king. "I want," said he, "that the principal men of
+      the country choose him whom they think best fitted for it." And sharp
+      words passed between the brothers. King Harald says he will not give up
+      his kingly dignity, for he is seated on the throne which kings sat upon,
+      and is anointed and consecrated a king. On his side also was the strength
+      of the people, for he had the king's whole treasure.
+      81. EARL TOSTE'S EXPEDITION TO DENMARK.
+      Now when King Harald perceived that his brother Toste wanted to have him
+      deprived of the kingdom he did not trust him; for Toste was a clever man,
+      and a great warrior, and was in friendship with the principal men of the
+      country. He therefore took the command of the army from Toste, and also
+      all the power he had beyond that of the other earls of the country. Earl
+      Toste, again, would not submit to be his own brother's serving man;
+      therefore he went with his people over the sea to Flanders, and stayed
+      there awhile, then went to Friesland, and from thence to Denmark to his
+      relation King Svein. Earl Ulf, King Svein's father, and Gyda, Earl Toste's
+      mother, were brother's and sister's children. The earl now asked King
+      Svein for support and help of men; and King Svein invited him to stay with
+      him, with the promise that he should get so large an earldom in Denmark
+      that he would be an important chief.
+      The earl replies, "My inclination is to go back to my estate in England;
+      but if I cannot get help from you for that purpose, I will agree to help
+      you with all the power I can command in England, if you will go there with
+      the Danish army, and win the country, as Canute, your mother's brother,
+      did."
+      The king replied, "So much smaller a man am I than Canute the Great, that
+      I can with difficulty defend my own Danish dominions against the Northmen.
+      King Canute, on the other hand, got the Danish kingdom in heritage, took
+      England by slash and blow, and sometimes was near losing his life in the
+      contest; and Norway he took without slash or blow. Now it suits me much
+      better to be guided by my own slender ability than to imitate my relation,
+      King Canute's, lucky hits."
+      Then Earl Toste said, "The result of my errand here is less fortunate than
+      I expected of thee who art so gallant a man, seeing that thy relative is
+      in so great need. It may be that I will seek friendly help where it could
+      less be expected; and that I may find a chief who is less afraid, king,
+      than thou art of a great enterprise."
+      Then the king and the earl parted, not just the best friends.
+      82. EARL TOSTE'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY.
+      Earl Toste turned away then and went to Norway, where he presented himself
+      to King Harald, who was at that time in Viken. When they met the earl
+      explained his errand to the king. He told him all his proceedings since he
+      left England, and asked his aid to recover his dominions in England.
+      The king replied that the Northmen had no great desire for a campaign in
+      England, and to have English chiefs over them there. "People say," added
+      he, "that the English are not to be trusted."
+      The earl replied, "Is it true what I have heard people tell in England,
+      that thy relative, King Magnus, sent men to King Edward with the message
+      that King Magnus had right to England as well as to Denmark, and had got
+      that heritage after Hardacanute, in consequence of a regular agreement?"
+      The king replied, "How came it that he did not get it, if he had a right
+      to it?"
+      "Why," replied the earl, "hast thou not Denmark, as King Magnus, thy
+      predecessor, had it?"
+      The king replies, "The Danes have nothing to brag of over us Northmen; for
+      many a place have we laid in ashes to thy relations."
+      Then said the earl, "If thou wilt not tell me, I will tell thee. Magnus
+      subdued Denmark, because all the chiefs of the country helped him; and
+      thou hast not done it, because all the people of the country were against
+      thee. Therefore, also, King Magnus did not strive for England, because all
+      the nation would have Edward for king. Wilt thou take England now? I will
+      bring the matter so far that most of the principal men in England shall be
+      thy friends, and assist thee; for nothing is wanting to place me at the
+      side of my brother Harald but the king's name. All men allow that there
+      never was such a warrior in the northern lands as thou art; and it appears
+      to me extraordinary that thou hast been fighting for fifteen years for
+      Denmark, and wilt not take England that lies open to thee."
+      King Harald weighed carefully the earl's words, and perceived at once that
+      there was truth in much of what he said; and he himself had also a great
+      desire to acquire dominions. Then King Harald and the earl talked long and
+      frequently together; and at last he took the resolution to proceed in
+      summer to England, and conquer the country. King Harald sent a
+      message-token through all Norway and ordered out a levy of one-half of all
+      the men in Norway able to carry arms. When this became generally known,
+      there were many guesses about what might be the end of this expedition.
+      Some reckoned up King Harald's great achievements, and thought he was also
+      the man who could accomplish this. Others, again, said that England was
+      difficult to attack; that it was very full of people; and the men-at-arms,
+      who were called Thingmen, were so brave, that one of them was better than
+      two of Harald's best men. Then said Ulf the marshal: -
+     "I am still ready gold to gain;
+     But truly it would be in vain,
+     And the king's marshal in the hall
+     Might leave his good post once for all,
+     If two of us in any strife
+     Must for one Thingman fly for life,
+     My lovely Norse maid, in my youth
+     We thought the opposite the truth."
+      Ulf the marshal died that spring (A.D. 1066). King Harald stood over his
+      grave, and said, as he was leaving it, "There lies now the truest of men,
+      and the most devoted to his king."
+      Earl Toste sailed in spring west to Flanders, to meet the people who had
+      left England with him, and others besides who had gathered to him both out
+      of England and Flanders.
+      83. GYRD'S DREAMS.
+      King Harald's fleet assembled at the Solunds. When King Harald was ready
+      to leave Nidaros he went to King Olaf's shrine, unlocked it, clipped his
+      hair and nails, and locked the shrine again, and threw the keys into the
+      Nid. Some say he threw them overboard outside of Agdanes; and since then
+      the shrine of Saint Olaf, the king, has never been opened. Thirty-five
+      years had passed since he was slain; and he lived thirty-five years here
+      on earth (A.D. 1080-1066). King Harald sailed with his ships he had about
+      him to the south to meet his people, and a great fleet was collected; so
+      that, according to the people's reckoning, King Harald had nearly 200
+      ships beside provision-ships and small craft.
+      While they lay at the Solunds a man called Gyrd, on board the king's ship,
+      had a dream. He thought he was standing in the king's ship and saw a great
+      witch-wife standing on the island, with a fork in one hand and a trough in
+      the other. He thought also that he saw over all the fleet, and that a fowl
+      was sitting upon every ship's stern, and that these fowls were all ravens
+      or ernes; and the witch-wife sang this song: -
+     "From the east I'll 'tice the king,
+     To the west the king I'll bring;
+     Many a noble bone will be
+     Ravens o'er Giuke's ship are fitting,
+     Eyeing the prey they think most fitting.
+     Upon the stem I'll sail with them!
+     Upon the stem I'll sail with them!"
+      84. THORD'S DREAM.
+      There was also a man called Thord, in a ship which lay not far from the
+      king's. He dreamt one night that he saw King Harald's fleet coming to
+      land, and he knew the land to be England. He saw a great battle-array on
+      the land; and he thought both sides began to fight, and had many banners
+      flapping in the air. And before the army of the people of the country was
+      riding a huge witch-wife upon a wolf; and the wolf had a man's carcass in
+      his mouth, and the blood was dropping from his jaws; and when he had eaten
+      up one body she threw another into his mouth, and so one after another,
+      and he swallowed them all. And she sang thus: -
+     "Skade's eagle eyes
+     The king's ill luck espies:
+     Though glancing shields
+     Hide the green fields,
+     The king's ill luck she spies.
+     To bode the doom of this great king,
+     The flesh of bleeding men I fling
+     To hairy jaw and hungry maw!
+     To hairy jaw and hungry maw!"
+      85. KING HARALD'S DREAM.
+      King Harald also dreamt one night that he was in Nidaros, and met his
+      brother, King Olaf, who sang to him these verses: -
+     "In many a fight
+     My name was bright;
+     Men weep, and tell
+     How Olaf fell.
+     Thy death is near;
+     Thy corpse, I fear,
+     The crow will feed,
+     The witch-wife's steed."
+      Many other dreams and forebodings were then told of, and most of them
+      gloomy. Before King Harald left Throndhjem, he let his son Magnus be
+      proclaimed king and set him as king over Norway while he was absent.
+      Thora, the daughter of Thorberg, also remained behind; but he took with
+      him Queen Ellisif and her two daughters, Maria and Ingegerd. Olaf, King
+      Harald's son, also accompanied his father abroad.
+      86. BATTLE AT SCARBOROUGH.
+      When King Harald was clear for sea, and the wind became favourable, he
+      sailed out into the ocean; and he himself landed in Shetland, but a part
+      of his fleet in the Orkney Islands. King Harald stopped but a short time
+      in Shetland before sailing to Orkney, from whence he took with him a great
+      armed force, and the earls Paul and Erlend, the sons of Earl Thorfin; but
+      he left behind him here the Queen Ellisif, and her daughters Maria and
+      Ingegerd. Then he sailed, leaving Scotland and England westward of him,
+      and landed at a place called Klifland. There he went on shore and
+      plundered, and brought the country in subjection to him without
+      opposition. Then he brought up at Skardaburg, and fought with the people
+      of the place. He went up a hill which is there, and made a great pile upon
+      it, which he set on fire; and when the pile was in clear flame, his men
+      took large forks and pitched the burning wood down into the town, so that
+      one house caught fire after the other, and the town surrendered. The
+      Northmen killed many people there and took all the booty they could lay
+      hold of. There was nothing left for the Englishmen now, if they would
+      preserve their lives, but to submit to King Harald; and thus he subdued
+      the country wherever he came. Then the king proceeded south along the
+      land, and brought up at Hellornes, where there came a force that had been
+      assembled to oppose him, with which he had a battle, and gained the
+      victory.
+      87. OF HARALD'S ORDER OF BATTLE.
+      Thereafter the king sailed to the Humber, and up along the river, and then
+      he landed. Up in Jorvik were two earls, Earl Morukare, and his brother,
+      Earl Valthiof, and they had an immense army. While the army of the earls
+      was coming down from the upper part of the country, King Harald lay in the
+      Usa. King Harald now went on the land, and drew up his men. The one arm of
+      this line stood at the outer edge of the river, the other turned up
+      towards the land along a ditch; and there was also a morass, deep, broad,
+      and full of water. The earls let their army proceed slowly down along the
+      river, with all their troops in line. The king's banner was next the
+      river, where the line was thickest. It was thinnest at the ditch, where
+      also the weakest of the men were. When the earls advanced downwards along
+      the ditch, the arm of the Northmen's line which was at the ditch gave way;
+      and the Englishmen followed, thinking the Northmen would fly. The banner
+      of Earl Morukare advanced then bravely.
+      88. THE BATTLE AT THE HUMBER.
+      When King Harald saw that the English array had come to the ditch against
+      him, he ordered the charge to be sounded, and urged on his men. He ordered
+      the banner which was called the Land-ravager to be carried before him, and
+      made so severe an assault that all had to give way before it; and there
+      was a great loss among the men of the earls, and they soon broke into
+      flight, some running up the river, some down, and the most leaping into
+      the ditch, which was so filled with dead that the Norsemen could go
+      dry-foot over the fen. There Earl Morukare fell. So says Stein Herdison: -
+     "The gallant Harald drove along,
+     Flying but fighting, the whole throng.
+     At last, confused, they could not fight,
+     And the whole body took to flight.
+     Up from the river's silent stream
+     At once rose desperate splash and scream;
+     But they who stood like men this fray
+     Round Morukare's body lay."
+      This song was composed by Stein Herdison about Olaf, son of King Harald;
+      and he speaks of Olaf being in this battle with King Harald, his father.
+      These things are also spoken of in the song called "Harald's Stave": -
+     "Earl Valthiof's men
+     Lay in the fen,
+     By sword down hewed,
+     So thickly strewed,
+     That Norsemen say
+     They paved a way
+     Across the fen
+     For the brave Norsemen."
+      Earl Valthiof, and the people who escaped, fled up to the castle of York;
+      and there the greatest loss of men had been. This battle took place upon
+      the Wednesday next Mathias' day (A.D. 1066).
+      89. OF EARL TOSTE.
+      Earl Toste had come from Flanders to King Harald as soon as he arrived in
+      England, and the earl was present at all these battles. It happened, as he
+      had foretold the king at their first meeting, that in England many people
+      would flock to them, as being friends and relations of Earl Toste, and
+      thus the king's forces were much strengthened. After the battle now told
+      of, all people in the nearest districts submitted to Harald, but some
+      fled. Then the king advanced to take the castle, and laid his army at
+      Stanforda-bryggiur (Stamford Bridge); and as King Harald had gained so
+      great a victory against so great chiefs and so great an army, the people
+      were dismayed, and doubted if they could make any opposition. The men of
+      the castle therefore determined, in a council, to send a message to King
+      Harald, and deliver up the castle into his power. All this was soon
+      settled; so that on Sunday the king proceeded with the whole army to the
+      castle, and appointed a Thing of the people without the castle, at which
+      the people of the castle were to be present. At this Thing all the people
+      accepted the condition of submitting to Harald, and gave him, as hostages,
+      the children of the most considerable persons; for Earl Toste was well
+      acquainted with all the people of that town. In the evening the king
+      returned down to his ships, after this victory achieved with his own
+      force, and was very merry. A Thing was appointed within the castle early
+      on Monday morning, and then King Harald was to name officers to rule over
+      the town, to give out laws, and bestow fiefs. The same evening, after
+      sunset, King Harald Godwinson came from the south to the castle with a
+      numerous army, and rode into the city with the good-will and consent of
+      the people of the castle. All the gates and walls were beset so that the
+      Northmen could receive no intelligence, and the army remained all night in
+      the town.
+      90. OF KING HARALD'S LANDING.
+      On Monday, when King Harald Sigurdson had taken breakfast, he ordered the
+      trumpets to sound for going on shore. The army accordingly got ready, and
+      he divided the men into the parties who should go, and who should stay
+      behind. In every division he allowed two men to land, and one to remain
+      behind. Earl Toste and his retinue prepared to land with King Harald; and,
+      for watching the ships, remained behind the king's son Olaf; the earls of
+      Orkney, Paul and Erlend; and also Eystein Orre, a son of Thorberg Arnason,
+      who was the most able and best beloved by the king of all the lendermen,
+      and to whom the king had promised his daughter Maria. The weather was
+      uncommonly fine, and it was hot sunshine. The men therefore laid aside
+      their armour, and went on the land only with their shields, helmets and
+      spears, and girt with swords; and many had also arrows and bows, and all
+      were very merry. Now as they came near the castle a great army seemed
+      coming against them, and they saw a cloud of dust as from horses' feet,
+      and under it shining shields and bright armour. The king halted his
+      people, and called to him Earl Toste, and asked him what army this could
+      be. The earl replied that he thought it most likely to be a hostle army,
+      but possibly it might be some of his relations who were seeking for mercy
+      and friendship, in order to obtain certain peace and safety from the king.
+      Then the king said, "We must all halt, to discover what kind of a force
+      this is." They did so; and the nearer this force came the greater it
+      appeared, and their shining arms were to the sight like glancing ice.
+      91. OF EARL TOSTE'S COUNSEL.
+      Then said King Harald, "Let us now fall upon some good sensible counsel;
+      for it is not to be concealed that this is an hostile army and the king
+      himself without doubt is here."
+      Then said the earl, "The first counsel is to turn about as fast as we can
+      to our ships to get our men and our weapons, and then we will make a
+      defence according to our ability; or otherwise let our ships defend us,
+      for there these horsemen have no power over us."
+      Then King Harald said, "I have another counsel. Put three of our best
+      horses under three of our briskest lads and let them ride with all speed
+      to tell our people to come quickly to our relief. The Englishmen shall
+      have a hard fray of it before we give ourselves up for lost."
+      The earl said the king must order in this, as in all things, as he thought
+      best; adding, at the same time, it was by no means his wish to fly. Then
+      King Harald ordered his banner Land-ravager to be set up; and Frirek was
+      the name of him who bore the banner.
+      92. OF KING HARALD'S ARMY.
+      Then King Harald arranged his army, and made the line of battle long, but
+      not deep. He bent both wings of it back, so that they met together; and
+      formed a wide ring equally thick all round, shield to shield, both in the
+      front and rear ranks. The king himself and his retinue were within the
+      circle; and there was the banner, and a body of chosen men. Earl Toste,
+      with his retinue, was at another place, and had a different banner. The
+      army was arranged in this way, because the king knew that horsemen were
+      accustomed to ride forwards with great vigour, but to turn back
+      immediately. Now the king ordered that his own and the earl's attendants
+      should ride forwards where it was most required. "And our bowmen," said
+      he, "shall be near to us; and they who stand in the first rank shall set
+      the spear-shaft on the ground, and the spear-point against the horseman's
+      breast, if he rides at them; and those who stand in the second rank shall
+      set the spear-point against the horse's breast."
+      93. OF KING HARALD GODWINSON.
+      King Harald Godwinson had come with an immense army, both of cavalry and
+      infantry. Now King Harald Sigurdson rode around his array, to see how
+      every part was drawn up. He was upon a black horse, and the horse stumbled
+      under him, so that the king fell off. He got up in haste and said, "A fall
+      is lucky for a traveller."
+      The English king Harald said to the Northmen who were with him, "Do ye
+      know the stout man who fell from his horse, with the blue kirtle and the
+      beautiful helmet?"
+      "That is the king himself." said they.
+      The English king said, "A great man, and of stately appearance is he; but
+      I think his luck has left him."
+      94. OF THE TROOP OF THE NOBILITY.
+      Twenty horsemen rode forward from the Thing-men's troops against the
+      Northmen's array; and all of them, and likewise their horses, were clothed
+      in armour.
+      One of the horsemen said, "Is Earl Toste in this army?"
+      The earl answered, "It is not to be denied that ye will find him here."
+      The horseman says, "Thy brother, King Harald, sends thee salutation, with
+      the message that thou shalt have the whole of Northumberland; and rather
+      than thou shouldst not submit to him, he will give thee the third part of
+      his kingdom to rule over along with himself."
+      The earl replies, "This is something different from the enmity and scorn
+      he offered last winter; and if this had been offered then it would have
+      saved many a man's life who now is dead, and it would have been better for
+      the kingdom of England. But if I accept of this offer, what will he give
+      King Harald Sigurdson for his trouble?"
+      The horseman replied, "He has also spoken of this; and will give him seven
+      feet of English ground, or as much more as he may be taller than other
+      men."
+      "Then," said the earl, "go now and tell King Harald to get ready for
+      battle; for never shall the Northmen say with truth that Earl Toste left
+      King Harald Sigurdson to join his enemy's troops, when he came to fight
+      west here in England. We shall rather all take the resolution to die with
+      honour, or to gain England by a victory."
+      Then the horseman rode back.
+      King Harald Sigurdson said to the earl, "Who was the man who spoke so
+      well?"
+      The earl replied, "That was King Harald Godwinson."
+      Then, said King Harald Sigurdson, "That was by far too long concealed from
+      me; for they had come so near to our army, that this Harald should never
+      have carried back the tidings of our men's slaughter."
+      Then said the earl, "It was certainly imprudent for such chiefs, and it
+      may be as you say; but I saw he was going to offer me peace and a great
+      dominion, and that, on the other hand, I would be his murderer if I
+      betrayed him; and I would rather he should be my murderer than I his, if
+      one of two be to die."
+      King Harald Sigurdson observed to his men, "That was but a little man, yet
+      he sat firmly in his stirrups."
+      It is said that Harald made these verses at this time: -
+     "Advance!  advance!
+     No helmets glance,
+     But blue swords play
+     In our array.
+     Advance!  advance!
+     No mail-coats glance,
+     But hearts are here
+     That ne'er knew fear."
+      His coat of mail was called Emma; and it was so long that it reached
+      almost to the middle of his leg, and so strong that no weapon ever pierced
+      it. Then said King Harald Sigurdson, "These verses are but ill composed; I
+      must try to make better;" and he composed the following: -
+     "In battle storm we seek no lee,
+     With skulking head, and bending knee,
+     Behind the hollow shield.
+     With eye and hand we fend the head;
+     Courage and skill stand in the stead
+     Of panzer, helm, and shield,
+     In hild's bloody field."
+      Thereupon Thiodolf sang: -
+     "And should our king in battle fall, -
+     A fate that God may give to all, -
+     His sons will vengeance take;
+     And never shone the sun upon
+     Two nobler eaglet; in his run,
+     And them we'll never forsake."
+      95. OF THE BEGINNING OF THE BATTLE.
+      Now the battle began. The Englishmen made a hot assault upon the Northmen,
+      who sustained it bravely. It was no easy matter for the English to ride
+      against the Northmen on account of their spears; therefore they rode in a
+      circle around them. And the fight at first was but loose and light, as
+      long as the Northmen kept their order of battle; for although the English
+      rode hard against the Northmen, they gave way again immediately, as they
+      could do nothing against them. Now when the Northmen thought they
+      perceived that the enemy were making but weak assaults, they set after
+      them, and would drive them into flight; but when they had broken their
+      shield-rampart the Englishmen rode up from all sides, and threw arrows and
+      spears on them. Now when King Harald Sigurdson saw this, he went into the
+      fray where the greatest crash of weapons was, and there was a sharp
+      conflict, in which many people fell on both sides. King Harald then was in
+      a rage, and ran out in front of the array, and hewed down with both hands;
+      so that neither helmet nor armour could withstand him, and all who were
+      nearest gave way before him. It was then very near with the English that
+      they had taken to flight. So says Arnor, the earls' skald: -
+     "Where battle-storm was ringing,
+     Where arrow-cloud was singing,
+          Harald stood there,
+          Of armour bare,
+     His deadly sword still swinging.
+     The foeman feel its bite;
+     His Norsemen rush to fight,
+          Danger to share,
+          With Harald there,
+     Where steel on steel was ringing."
+      96. FALL OF KING HARALD.
+      King Harald Sigurdson was hit by an arrow in the windpipe, and that was
+      his death-wound. He fell, and all who had advanced with him, except those
+      who retired with the banner. There was afterwards the warmest conflict,
+      and Earl Toste had taken charge of the king's banner. They began on both
+      sides to form their array again, and for a long time there was a pause in
+      fighting. Then Thiodolf sang these verses: -
+     "The army stands in hushed dismay;
+     Stilled is the clamour of the fray.
+     Harald is dead, and with him goes
+     The spirit to withstand our foes.
+     A bloody scat the folk must pay
+     For their king's folly on this day.
+     He fell; and now, without disguise,
+     We say this business was not wise."
+      But before the battle began again Harald Godwinson offered his brother,
+      Earl Toste, peace, and also quarter to the Northmen who were still alive;
+      but the Northmen called out, all of them together, that they would rather
+      fall, one across the other, than accept of quarter from the Englishmen.
+      Then each side set up a war-shout, and the battle began again. So says
+      Arnor, the earls' skald: -
+     "The king, whose name would ill-doers scare,
+     The gold-tipped arrow would not spare.
+     Unhelmed, unpanzered, without shield,
+     He fell among us in the field.
+     The gallant men who saw him fall
+     Would take no quarter; one and all
+     Resolved to die with their loved king,
+     Around his corpse in a corpse-ring."
+      97. SKIRMISH OF ORRE.
+      Eystein Orre came up at this moment from the ships with the men who
+      followed him, and all were clad in armour. Then Eystein got King Harald's
+      banner Land-ravager; and now was, for the third time, one of the sharpest
+      of conflicts, in which many Englishmen fell, and they were near to taking
+      flight. This conflict is called Orre's storm. Eystein and his men had
+      hastened so fast from the ships that they were quite exhausted, and
+      scarcely fit to fight before they came into the battle; but afterwards
+      they became so furious, that they did not guard themselves with their
+      shields as long as they could stand upright. At last they threw off their
+      coats of ringmail, and then the Englishmen could easily lay their blows at
+      them; and many fell from weariness, and died without a wound. Thus almost
+      all the chief men fell among the Norway people. This happened towards
+      evening; and then it went, as one might expect, that all had not the same
+      fate, for many fled, and were lucky enough to escape in various ways; and
+      darkness fell before the slaughter was altogether ended.
+      98. OF STYRKAR THE MARSHAL.
+      Styrkar, King Harald Sigurdson's marshal, a gallant man, escaped upon a
+      horse, on which he rode away in the evening. It was blowing a cold wind,
+      and Styrkar had not much other clothing upon him but his shirt, and had a
+      helmet on his head, and a drawn sword in his hand. As soon as his
+      weariness was over, he began to feel cold. A waggoner met him in a lined
+      skin-coat. Styrkar asks him, "Wilt thou sell thy coat, friend?"
+      "Not to thee," says the peasant: "thou art a Northman; that I can hear by
+      thy tongue."
+      Styrkar replies, "If I were a Northman, what wouldst thou do?"
+      "I would kill thee," replied the peasant; "but as ill luck would have it,
+      I have no weapon just now by me that would do it."
+      Then Styrkar says, "As you can't kill me, friend, I shall try if I can't
+      kill you." And with that he swung his sword, and struck him on the neck,
+      so that his head came off. He then took the skin-coat, sprang on his
+      horse, and rode down to the strand.
+      Olaf Haraldson had not gone on land with the others, and when he heard of
+      his father's fall he made ready to sail away with the men who remained.
+      99. OF WILLIAM THE BASTARD.
+      When the Earl of Rouen, William the Bastard, heard of his relation, King
+      Edward's, death, and also that Harald Godwinson was chosen, crowned, and
+      consecrated king of England, it appeared to him that he had a better right
+      to the kingdom of England than Harald, by reason of the relationship
+      between him and King Edward. He thought, also, that he had grounds for
+      avenging the affront that Harald had put upon him with respect to his
+      daughter. From all these grounds William gathered together a great army in
+      Normandy, and had many men, and sufficient transport-shipping. The day
+      that he rode out of the castle to his ships, and had mounted his horse,
+      his wife came to him, and wanted to speak with him; but when he saw her he
+      struck at her with his heel, and set his spurs so deep into her breast
+      that she fell down dead; and the earl rode on to his ships, and went with
+      his ships over to England. His brother, Archbishop Otto, was with him; and
+      when the earl came to England he began to plunder, and take possession of
+      the land as he came along. Earl William was stouter and stronger than
+      other men; a great horseman and warrior, but somewhat stern; and a very
+      sensible man, but not considered a man to be relied on.
+      100. FALL OF KING HARALD GODWINSON.
+      King Harald Godwinson gave King Harald Sigurdson's son Olaf leave to go
+      away, with the men who had followed him and had not fallen in battle; but
+      he himself turned round with his army to go south, for he had heard that
+      William the Bastard was overwhelming the south of England with a vast
+      army, and was subduing the country for himself. With King Harald went his
+      brothers Svein and Gyrd, and Earl Valthiof. King Harald and Earl William
+      met each other south in England at Helsingja-port (Hastings). There was a
+      great battle in which King Harald and his brother Earl Gyrd and a great
+      part of his men fell. This was the nineteenth day after the fall of King
+      Harald Sigurdson. Harald's brother, Earl Valthiof, escaped by flight, and
+      towards evening fell in with a division of William's people, consisting of
+      100 men; and when they saw Earl Valthiof's troop they fled to a wood. Earl
+      Valthiof set fire to the wood, and they were all burnt. So says Thorkel
+      Skallason in Valthiof's ballad: -
+     "Earl Valthiof the brave
+     His foes a warming gave:
+     Within the blazing grove
+     A hundred men he drove.
+     The wolf will soon return,
+     And the witch's horse will burn
+     Her sharp claws in the ash,
+     To taste the Frenchman's flesh."
+      101. EARL VALTHIOF'S DEATH.
+      William was proclaimed king of England. He sent a message to Earl Valthiof
+      that they should be reconciled, and gave him assurance of safety to come
+      to the place of meeting. The earl set out with a few men; but when he came
+      to a heath north of Kastala-bryggia, there met him two officers of King
+      William, with many followers, who took him prisoner, put him in fetters,
+      and afterwards he was beheaded; and the English call him a saint. Thorkel
+      tells of this: -
+     "William came o'er the sea,
+     With bloody sword came he:
+     Cold heart and bloody hand
+     Now rule the English land.
+     Earl Valthiof he slew, -
+     Valthiof the brave and true.
+     Cold heart and bloody hand
+     Now rule the English land."
+      William was after this king of England for twenty-one years, and his
+      descendants have been so ever since.
+      102. OF OLAF HARALDSON'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY.
+      Olaf, the son of King Harald Sigurdson, sailed with his fleet from England
+      from Hrafnseyr, and came in autumn to the Orkney Isles, where the event
+      had happened that Maria, a daughter of Harald Sigurdson, died a sudden
+      death the very day and hour her father, King Harald, fell. Olaf remained
+      there all winter; but the summer after he proceeded east to Norway, where
+      he was proclaimed king along with his brother Magnus. Queen Ellisif came
+      from the West, along with her stepson Olaf and her daughter Ingegerd.
+      There came also with Olaf over the West sea Skule, a son of Earl Toste,
+      and who since has been called the king's foster-son, and his brother Ketil
+      Krok. Both were gallant men, of high family in England, and both were very
+      intelligent; and the brothers were much beloved by King Olaf. Ketil Krok
+      went north to Halogaland, where King Olaf procured him a good marriage,
+      and from him are descended many great people. Skule, the king's
+      foster-son, was a very clever man, and the handsomest man that could be
+      seen. He was the commander of King Olaf's court-men, spoke at the Things
+      (1) and took part in all the country affairs with the king. The king
+      offered to give Skule whatever district in Norway he liked, with all the
+      income and duties that belonged to the king in it. Skule thanked him very
+      much for the offer, but said he would rather have something else from him.
+      "For if there came a shift of kings," said he, "the gift might come to
+      nothing. I would rather take some properties lying near to the merchant
+      towns, where you, sire, usually take up your abode, and then I would enjoy
+      your Yule-feasts." The king agreed to this, and conferred on him lands
+      eastward at Konungahella, Oslo, Tunsberg, Sarpsborg, Bergen, and north at
+      Nidaros. These were nearly the best properties at each place, and have
+      since descended to the family branches which came from Skule. King Olaf
+      gave Skule his female relative, Gudrun, the daughter of Nefstein, in
+      marriage. Her mother was Ingerid, a daughter of Sigurd Syr and Asta, King
+      Olaf the Saint's mother. Ingerid was a sister of King Olaf the Saint and
+      of King Harald. Skule and Gudrun's son was Asolf of Reine, who married
+      Thora, a daughter of Skopte Ogmundson; Asolf's and Thora's son was Guthorm
+      of Reine, father of Bard, and grandfather of King Inge and of Duke Skule.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Another instance of the old Norse or Icelandic tongue
+     having been generally known in a part of England.
+      103. OF KING HARALD SIGURDSON.
+      One year after King Harald's fall his body was transported from England
+      north to Nidaros, and was buried in Mary church, which he had built. It
+      was a common observation that King Harald distinguished himself above all
+      other men by wisdom and resources of mind; whether he had to take a
+      resolution suddenly for himself and others, or after long deliberation. He
+      was, also, above all other men, bold, brave, and lucky, until his dying
+      day, as above related; and bravery is half victory. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Harald, who till his dying day
+     Came off the best in many a fray,
+     Had one good rule in battle-plain,
+     In Seeland and elsewhere, to gain -
+     That, be his foes' strength more or less,
+     Courage is always half success."
+      King Herald was a handsome man, of noble appearance; his hair and beard
+      yellow. He had a short beard, and long mustaches. The one eyebrow was
+      somewhat higher than the other. He had large hands (1) and feet; but these
+      were well made. His height was five ells. He was stern and severe to his
+      enemies, and avenged cruelly all opposition or misdeed. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "Severe alike to friends or foes,
+     Who dared his royal will oppose;
+     Severe in discipline to hold
+     His men-at-arms wild and bold;
+     Severe the bondes to repress;
+     Severe to punish all excess;
+     Severe was Harald -but we call
+     That just which was alike to all."
+      King Harald was most greedy of power, and of all distinction and honour.
+      He was bountiful to the friends who suited him. So says Thiodolf: -
+     "I got from him, in sea-fight strong,
+     A mark of gold for my ship-song.
+     Merit in any way
+     He generously would pay."
+      King Harald was fifty years old when he fell. We have no particular
+      account of his youth before he was fifteen years old, when he was with his
+      brother, King Olaf, at the battle of Stiklestad. He lived thirty-five
+      years after that, and in all that time was never free from care and war.
+      King Harald never fled from battle, but often tried cunning ways to escape
+      when he had to do with great superiority of forces. All the men who
+      followed King Harald in battle or skirmish said that when he stood in
+      great danger, or anything came suddenly upon him, he always took that
+      course which all afterwards saw gave the best hope of a fortunate issue.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) It is a singular physical circumstance, that in almost all
+     the swords of those ages to be found in the collection of
+     weapons in the Antiquarian Museum at Copenhagen, the handles
+     indicate a size of hand very much smaller than the hands of
+     modern people of any class or rank.  No modern dandy, with
+     the most delicate hands, would find room for his hand to
+     grasp or wield with case some of the swords of these
+     Northmen. -L.
+      104. KING HARALD AND KING OLAF COMPARED.
+      When Haldor, a son of Brynjolf Ulfalde the Old, who was a sensible man and
+      a great chief, heard people talk of how unlike the brothers Saint Olaf and
+      King Harald were in disposition, he used to say, "I was in great
+      friendship with both the brothers, and I knew intimately the dispositions
+      of both, and never did I know two men more like in disposition. Both were
+      of the highest understanding, and bold in arms, and greedy of power and
+      property; of great courage, but not acquainted with the way of winning the
+      favour of the people; zealous in governing, and severe in their revenge.
+      King Olaf forced the people into Christianity and good customs, and
+      punished cruelly those who disobeyed. This just and rightful severity the
+      chiefs of the country could not bear, but raised an army against him, and
+      killed him in his own kingdom; and therefore he is held to be a saint.
+      King Harald, again, marauded to obtain glory and power, forced all the
+      people he could under his power, and died in another king's dominions.
+      Both brothers, in daily life, were of a worthy and considerate manner of
+      living; they were of great experience, and very laborious, and were known
+      and celebrated far and wide for these qualities."
+      105. KING MAGNUS'S DEATH.
+      King Magnus Haraldson ruled over Norway the first winter after King
+      Harald's death (A.D. 1067), and afterwards two years (A.D. 1068-1069)
+      along with his brother, King Olaf. Thus there were two kings of Norway at
+      that time; and Magnus had the northern and Olaf the eastern part of the
+      country. King Magnus had a son called Hakon, who was fostered by Thorer of
+      Steig in Gudbrandsdal, who was a brother of King Magnus by the mother's
+      side; and Hakon was a most agreeable man.
+      After King Harald Sigurdson's death the Danish king Svein let it be known
+      that the peace between the Northmen and the Danes was at an end, and
+      insisted that the league between Harald and Svein was not for longer time
+      than their lives. There was a levy in both kingdoms. Harald's sons called
+      out the whole people in Norway for procuring men and ships, and Svein set
+      out from the south with the Danish army. Messengers then went between with
+      proposals for a peace; and the Northmen said they would either have the
+      same league as was concluded between King Harald and Svein, or otherwise
+      give battle instantly on the spot. Verses were made on this occasion,
+      viz.: -
+     "Ready for war or peace,
+     King Olaf will not cease
+     From foeman's hand
+     To guard his land."
+      So says also Stein Herdison in his song of Olaf: -
+     "From Throndhjem town, where in repose
+     The holy king defies his foes,
+     Another Olaf will defend
+     His kingdom from the greedy Svein.
+     King Olaf had both power and right,
+     And the Saint's favour in the fight.
+     The Saint will ne'er his kin forsake,
+     And let Svein Ulfson Norway take."
+      In this manner friendship was concluded between the kings and peace
+      between the countries. King Magnus fell ill and died of the ringworm
+      disease, after being ill for some time. He died and was buried at Nidaros.
+      He was an amiable king and bewailed by the people.
+      SAGA OF OLAF KYRRE.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      Snorri's account of Olaf Kyrre corresponds with the statements found in
+      "Agrip", "Fagrskinna", and "Morkinskinna".
+      There are but few events in Olaf's long reign, and hence he is very
+      appropriately called the Quiet (Kyrre). As Hildebrand says, this saga
+      seems to be written simply to fill out the empty space between Harald
+      Hardrade and Magnus Barefoot.
+      Skalds quoted in this saga are: Stein Herdison and Stuf.
+      1. OLAF'S PERSONAL APPEARANCE.
+      Olaf remained sole king of Norway after the death (A.D. 1069) of his
+      brother King Magnus. Olaf was a stout man, well grown in limbs; and every
+      one said a handsomer man could not be seen, nor of a nobler appearance.
+      His hair was yellow as silk, and became him well; his skin was white and
+      fine over all his body; his eyes beautiful, and his limbs well
+      proportioned. He was rather silent in general, and did not speak much even
+      at Things; but he was merry in drinking parties. He loved drinking much,
+      and was talkative enough then; but quite peaceful. He was cheerful in
+      conversation, peacefully inclined during all his reign, and loving
+      gentleness and moderation in all things. Stein Herdison speaks thus of
+      him: -
+     "Our Throndhjem king is brave and wise,
+     His love of peace our bondes prize;
+     By friendly word and ready hand
+     He holds good peace through every land.
+     He is for all a lucky star;
+     England he frightens from a war;
+     The stiff-necked Danes he drives to peace;
+     Troubles by his good influence cease."
+      2. OF KING OLAF'S MANNER OF LIVING.
+      It was the fashion in Norway in old times for the king's high-seat to be
+      on the middle of a long bench, and the ale was handed across the fire (1);
+      but King Olaf had his high-seat made on a high bench across the room; he
+      also first had chimney-places in the rooms, and the floors strewed both
+      summer and winter. In King Olaf's time many merchant towns arose in
+      Norway, and many new ones were founded. Thus King Olaf founded a merchant
+      town at Bergen, where very soon many wealthy people settled themselves,
+      and it was regularly frequented by merchants from foreign lands. He had
+      the foundations laid for the large Christ church, which was to be a stone
+      church; but in his time there was little done to it. Besides, he completed
+      the old Christ church, which was of wood. King Olaf also had a great
+      feasting-house built in Nidaros, and in many other merchant towns, where
+      before there were only private feasts; and in his time no one could drink
+      in Norway but in these houses, adorned for the purpose with branches and
+      leaves, and which stood under the king's protection. The great guild-bell
+      in Throndhjem, which was called the pride of the town, tolled to call
+      together to these guilds. The guild-brethren built Margaret's church in
+      Nidaros of stone. In King Olaf's time there were general entertainments
+      and hand-in-hand feasts. At this time also much unusual splendour and
+      foreign customs and fashions in the cut of clothes were introduced; as,
+      for instance, costly hose plaited about the legs. Some had gold rings
+      about the legs, and also used coats which had lists down the sides, and
+      arms five ells long, and so narrow that they must be drawn up with ties,
+      and lay in folds all the way up to the shoulders. The shoes were high, and
+      all edged with silk, or even with gold. Many other kinds of wonderful
+      ornaments were used at that time.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) We may understand the arrangement by supposing the fire in
+     the middle of the room, the smoke escaping by a hole in the
+     roof, and a long bench on each side of the fire; one bench
+     occupied by the high-seat of the king and great guests, the
+     other by the rest of the guests; and the cup handed across
+     the fire, which appears to have had a religious meaning
+     previous to the introduction of Christianity. -L.
+      3. FASHION OF KING OLAF'S COURT.
+      King Olaf used the fashion, which was introduced from the courts of
+      foreign kings, of letting his grand-butler stand at the end of the table,
+      and fill the table-cups for himself and the other distinguished guests who
+      sat at the table. He had also torch-bearers, who held as many candles at
+      the table as there were guests of distinction present. There was also a
+      marshal's bench outside of the table-circle, where the marshal and other
+      persons of distinction sat with their faces towards the high-seat. King
+      Harald, and the kings before him, used to drink out of deer-horn; and the
+      ale was handed from the high-seat to the otherside over the fire, and he
+      drank to the memory of any one he thought of. So says Stuf the skald: -
+     "He who in battle is the first,
+     And now in peace is best to trust,
+     A welcome, hearty and sincere,
+     Gave to me on my coming here.
+     He whom the ravens watch with care,
+     He who the gold rings does not spare,
+     A golden horn full to the brink
+     Gave me himself at Haug to drink."
+      4. ARRANGEMENT OF KING OLAF'S COURT.
+      King Olaf had 120 courtmen-at-arms, and 60 pursuivants, besides 60
+      house-servants, who provided what was wanted for the king's house wherever
+      it might be, or did other work required for the king. When the bondes
+      asked why he kept a greater retinue than the law allowed, or former kings
+      kept when they went in guest-quarters or feasts which the bondes had to
+      provide for them, the king answered, "It does not happen that I rule the
+      kingdom better, or produce greater respect for me than ye had for my
+      father, although I have one-half more people than he had. I do not by any
+      means do it merely to plague you, or to make your condition harder than
+      formerly."
+      5. KING SVEIN ULFSON'S DEATH.
+      King Svein Ulfson died ten years after the fall of both the Haralds (A.D.
+      1076). After him his son, Harald Hein, was king for three years (A.D.
+      1077-1080); then Canute the Holy for seven years (A.D. 1081-1087);
+      afterwards Olaf, King Svein's third son, for eight years (A.D. 1088-1095).
+      Then Eirik the Good, Svein's fourth son, for eight winters (A.D.
+      1096-1103). Olaf, the king of Norway, was married to Ingerid, a daughter
+      of Svein, the Danish king; and Olaf, the Danish King Svein's son, married
+      Ingegerd, a daughter of King Harald, and sister of King Olaf of Norway.
+      King Olaf Haraldson, who was called by some Olaf Kyrre, but by many Olaf
+      the Bonde, had a son by Thora, Joan's daughter, who was called Magnus, and
+      was one of the handsomest lads that could be seen, and was promising in
+      every respect. He was brought up in the king's court.
+      6. MIRACLES OF KING OLAF THE SAINT.
+      King Olaf had a church of stone built in Nidaros, on the spot where King
+      Olaf's body had first been buried, and the altar was placed directly over
+      the spot where the king's grave had been. This church was consecrated and
+      called Christ Church; and King Olaf's shrine was removed to it, and was
+      placed before the altar, and many miracles took place there. The following
+      summer, on the same day of the year as the church was consecrated, which
+      was the day before Olafsmas, there was a great assemblage of people, and
+      then a blind man was restored to sight. And on the mass-day itself, when
+      the shrine and the holy relics were taken out and carried, and the shrine
+      itself, according to custom, was taken and set down in the churchyard, a
+      man who had long been dumb recovered his speech again, and sang with
+      flowing tongue praise-hymns to God, and to the honour of King Olaf the
+      Saint. The third miracle was of a woman who had come from Svithjod, and
+      had suffered much distress on this pilgrimage from her blindness; but
+      trusting in God's mercy, had come travelling to this solemnity. She was
+      led blind into the church to hear mass this day; but before the service
+      was ended she saw with both eyes, and got her sight fully and clearly,
+      although she had been blind fourteen years. She returned with great joy,
+      praising God and King Olaf the Saint.
+      7. OF THE SHRINE OF KING OLAF THE SAINT.
+      There happened a circumstance in Nidaros, when King Olaf's coffin was
+      being carried about through the streets, that it became so heavy that
+      people could not lift it from the spot. Now when the coffin was set down,
+      the street was broken up to see what was under it at that spot, and the
+      body of a child was found which had been murdered and concealed there. The
+      body was carried away, the street put in order again as it had been
+      before, and the shrine carried on according to custom.
+      8. KING OLAF WAS BLESSED WITH PEACE.
+      In the days of King Olaf there were bountiful harvests in Norway and many
+      good things. In no man's life had times been so good in Norway since the
+      days of Harald Harfager. King Olaf modified for the better many a matter
+      that his father had inaugurated and maintained with severity. He was
+      generous, but a strict ruler, for he was a wise man, and well understood
+      what was of advantage to the kingdom. There are many stories of his good
+      works. How much he loved and how kind he was to the people may be seen
+      from the following words, which he once spoke at a large banquet. He was
+      happy and in the best of spirits, when one of his men said, "It pleases
+      us, sire, to see you so happy." He answered: "I have reason to be glad
+      when I see my subjects sitting happy and free in a guild consecrated to my
+      uncle, the sainted King Olaf. In the days of my father these people were
+      subjected to much terror and fear; the most of them concealed their gold
+      and their precious things, but now I see glittering on his person what
+      each one owns, and your freedom is my gladness." In his reign there was no
+      strife, and he protected himself and his realm against enemies abroad; and
+      his nearest neighbours stood in great awe of him, although he was a most
+      gentle man, as is confirmed by the skald.
+      9. MEETING OF OLAF KYRRE AND CANUTE THE SAINT.
+      King Olaf Kyrre was a great friend of his brother-in-law, the Danish king,
+      Canute the holy. They appointed a meeting and met at the Gaut river at
+      Konungahella, where the kings used to have their meetings. There King
+      Canute made the proposal that they should send an army westward to England
+      on account of the revenge they had to take there; first and foremost King
+      Olaf himself, and also the Danish king. "Do one of two things," said King
+      Canute, -"either take sixty ships, which I will furnish thee with,
+      and be thou the leader; or give me sixty ships, and I shall be the
+      leader." Then said King Olaf, "This speech of thine, King Canute, is
+      altogether according to my mind; but there is this great difference
+      between us; your family has had more luck in conquering England with great
+      glory, and, among others, King Canute the Great; and it is likely that
+      this good fortune follows your race. On the other hand, when King Harald,
+      my father, went westward to England, he got his death there; and at that
+      time the best men in Norway followed him. But Norway was so emptied then
+      of chosen men, that such men have not since been to find in the country;
+      for that expedition there was the most excellent outfit, and you know what
+      was the end of it. Now I know my own capacity, and how little I am suited
+      to be the leader; so I would rather you should go, with my help and
+      assistance."
+      So King Olaf gave Canute sixty large ships, with excellent equipment and
+      faithful men, and set his lendermen as chiefs over them; and all must
+      allow that this armament was admirably equipt. It is also told in the saga
+      about Canute, that the Northmen alone did not break the levy when the army
+      was assembled, but the Danes would not obey their king's orders. This king
+      Canute acknowledged, and gave them leave to trade in merchandise where
+      they pleased through his country, and at the same time sent the king of
+      Norway costly presents for his assistance. On the other hand he was
+      enraged against the Danes, and laid heavy fines upon them.
+      10. A BONDE WHO UNDERSTOOD THE LANGUAGE OF BIRDS.
+      One summer, when King Olaf's men had gone round the country collecting his
+      income and land dues, it happened that the king, on their return home
+      asked them where on their expedition they had been best entertained. They
+      said it was in the house of a bonde in one of the king's districts. "There
+      is an old bonde there who knows many things before they happen. We asked
+      him about many things, which he explained to us; nay, we even believe that
+      he understands perfectly the language of birds." The king replies, "How
+      can ye believe such nonsense?" and insisted that it was wrong to put
+      confidence in such things. It happened soon after that the king was
+      sailing along the coast; and as they sailed through a Sound the king said,
+      "What is that township up in the country?"
+      They replied, "That is the district, sire, where we told you we were best
+      entertained."
+      Then said the king, "What house is that which stands up there, not far
+      from the Sound?"
+      They replied, "That house belongs to the wise old bonde we told you of,
+      sire."
+      They saw now a horse standing close to the house. Then said the king, "Go
+      there, and take that horse, and kill him."
+      They replied, "We would not like to do him such harm."
+      The king: "I will command. Cut off the horse's head; but take care of
+      yourselves that ye let no blood come to the ground, and bear the horse out
+      to my ship. Go then and bring to me the old man; but tell him nothing of
+      what has happened, as ye shall answer for it with your lives."
+      They did as they were ordered, and then came to the old man, and told him
+      the king's message. When he came before the king, the king asked him, "Who
+      owns the house thou art dwelling in?"
+      He replies, "Sire, you own it, and take rent for it."
+      The king: "Show us the way round the ness, for here thou must be a good
+      pilot."
+      The old man went into his boat and rowed before the king's ship; and when
+      he had rowed a little way a crow came flying over the ship, and croaking
+      hideously. The peasant listens to the crow. The king said, "Do you think,
+      bonde, that betokens anything?"
+      "Sire, that is certain," said he.
+      Then another crow flies over the ship, and screeches dreadfully. The bonde
+      was so ill hearing this that he could not row, and the oars hung loose in
+      his hands.
+      Then said the king, "Thy mind is turned much to these crows, bonde, and to
+      what they say."
+      The bonde replies, "Now I suspect it is true what they say."
+      The third time the crow came flying screeching at its very worst, and
+      almost settling on the ship. Now the bonde threw down his oars, regarded
+      them no more, and stood up before the king.
+      Then the king said, "Thou art taking this much to heart, bonde; what is it
+      they say?"
+      The peasant -"It is likely that either they or I have misunderstood -"
+      "Say on," replied the king.
+      The bonde replied in a song: -
+     "The 'one-year old'
+     Mere nonsense told;
+     The 'two-years' chatter
+     Seemed senseless matter;
+     The three-years' croak
+     Of wonders spoke.
+     The foul bird said
+     My old mare's head
+     I row along;
+     And, in her song,
+     She said the thief
+     Was the land's chief."
+      The king said, "What is this, bonde! Wilt thou call me a thief?"
+      Then the king gave him good presents, and remitted all the land-rent of
+      the place he lived on. So says Stein: -
+     "The pillar of our royal race
+     Stands forth adorned with every grace.
+     What king before e'er took such pride
+     To scatter bounty far and wide?
+     Hung round with shields that gleam afar;
+     The merchant ship on one bestows,
+     With painted streaks in glowing rows.
+
+     "The man-at-arms a golden ring
+     Boasts as the present of his king;
+     At the king's table sits the guest,
+     By the king's bounty richly drest.
+     King Olaf, Norway's royal son,
+     Who from the English glory won,
+     Pours out with ready-giving hand
+     His wealth on children of the land.
+
+     "Brave clothes to servants he awards,
+     Helms and ring-mail coats grace his guards;
+     Or axe and sword Har's warriors gain,
+     And heavy armour for the plain.
+     Gold, too, for service duly paid,
+     Red gold all pure, and duly weighed,
+     King Olaf gives -he loves to pay
+     All service in a royal way."
+      11. OF KING OLAF KYRRE'S DEATH.
+      King Olaf lived principally in his domains on his large farms. Once when
+      he was east in Ranrike, on his estate of Haukby, he took the disease which
+      ended in his death. He had then been king of Norway for twenty-six years
+      (A.D. 1068-1093); for he was made king of Norway the year after King
+      Harald's death. King Olaf's body was taken north to Nidaros, and buried in
+      Christ church, which he himself had built there. He was the most amiable
+      king of his time, and Norway was much improved in riches and cultivation
+      during his reign.
+      MAGNUS BAREFOOT'S SAGA.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      The greater part of the contents of this saga is also found in "Agrip",
+      "Fagrskinna", and "Morkinskinna".
+      Magnus and his cousin Hakon became kings in 1093, but Hakon ruled only two
+      years and died in 1095. King Magnus fell in the year 1103.
+      Skalds quoted are: Bjorn Krephende, Thorkel Hamarskald, and Eldjarn.
+      1. BEGINNING OF THE REIGN OF KING MAGNUS AND HIS COUSIN HAKON.
+      Magnus, King Olaf's son, was, immediately after King Olaf's death,
+      proclaimed at Viken king of all Norway; but the Upland people, on hearing
+      of King Olaf's death, chose Hakon, Thorer's foster-son, a cousin of King
+      Magnus, as king. Thereupon Hakon and Thorer went north to the Throndhjem
+      country, and when they came to Nidaros they summoned the Eyrathing; and at
+      that Thing Hakon desired the bondes to give him the kingly title, which
+      was agreed to, and the Throndhjem people proclaimed him king of half of
+      Norway, as his father, King Magnus, had been before. Hakon relieved the
+      Throndhjem people of all harbour duties, and gave them many other
+      privileges. He did away with Yule-gifts, and gained by this the good-will
+      of all the Throndhjem people. Thereafter Hakon formed a court, and then
+      proceeded to the Uplands, where he gave the Upland people the same
+      privileges as the Throndhjem people; so that they also were perfectly well
+      affected to him, and were his friends. The people in Throndhjem sang this
+      ballad about him: -
+     "Young Hakon was the Norseman's pride,
+     And Steig-Thorer was on his side.
+     Young Hakon from the Upland came,
+     With royal birth, and blood, and name.
+     Young Hakon from the king demands
+     His royal birthright, half the lands;
+     Magnus will not the kingdom break, -
+     The whole or nothing he will take."
+      2. HAKON'S DEATH.
+      King Magnus proceeded north to the merchant town (Nidaros), and on his
+      arrival went straight to the king's house, and there took up his abode. He
+      remained here the first part of the winter (A.D. 1094), and kept seven
+      longships in the open water of the river Nid, abreast of the king's house.
+      Now when King Hakon heard that King Magnus was come to Throndhjem, he came
+      from the East over the Dovrefield, and thence down from Throndhjem to the
+      merchant town, where he took up his abode in the house of Skule, opposite
+      to Clement's church, which had formerly been the king's house. King Magnus
+      was ill pleased with the great gifts which Hakon had given to the bondes
+      to gain their favour, and thought it was so much given out of his own
+      property. This irritated his mind; and he thought he had suffered
+      injustice from his relative in this respect, that he must now put up with
+      less income than his father and his predecessors before him had enjoyed;
+      and he gave Thorer the blame. When King Hakon and Thorer observed this,
+      they were alarmed for what Magnus might do; and they thought it suspicious
+      that Magnus kept long-ships afloat rigged out, and with tents. The
+      following spring, after Candlemas, King Magnus left the town in the night
+      with his ships; the tents up, and lights burning in the tents. They
+      brought up at Hefring, remained there all night, and kindled a fire on the
+      land. Then Hakon and the men in the town thought some treachery was on
+      foot, and he let the trumpets call all the men together out on the Eyrar,
+      where the whole people of the town came to him, and the people were
+      gathering together the whole night. When it was light in the morning, King
+      Magnus saw the people from all districts gathered together on the Eyrar;
+      and he sailed out of the fjord, and proceeded south to where the Gulathing
+      is held. Hakon thanked the people for their support which they had given
+      him, and got ready to travel east to Viken. But he first held a meeting in
+      the town, where, in a speech, he asked the people for their friendship,
+      promising them his; and added, that he had some suspicions of his
+      relation, King Magnus's intentions. Then King Hakon mounted his horse, and
+      was ready to travel. All men promised him their good-will and support
+      whenever he required them, and the people followed him out to the foot of
+      Steinbjorg. From thence King Hakon proceeded up the Dovrefield; but as he
+      was going over the mountains he rode all day after a ptarmigan, which flew
+      up beside him, and in this chase a sickness overfell him, which ended in
+      his death; and he died on the mountains. His body was carried north, and
+      came to the merchant town just half a month after he left it. The whole
+      townspeople went to meet the body, sorrowing, and the most of them
+      weeping; for all people loved him with sincere affection. King Hakon's
+      body was interred in Christ church, and Hakon and Magnus had ruled the
+      country for two years. Hakon was a man full twenty-five years old, and was
+      one of the chiefs the most beloved by all the people. He had made a
+      journey to Bjarmaland, where he had given battle and gained a victory.
+      3. OF A FORAY IN HALLAND.
+      King Magnus sailed in winter (A.D. 1095) eastward to Viken; but when
+      spring approached he went southwards to Halland, and plundered far and
+      wide. He laid waste Viskardal and many other districts, and returned with
+      a great booty back to his own kingdom. So says Bjorn Krephende in his song
+      on Magnus: -
+     "Through Halland wide around
+     The clang and shriek resound;
+          The houses burn,
+          The people mourn,
+     Through Halland wide around.
+     The Norse king strides in flame,
+     Through Viskardal he came;
+          The fire sweeps,
+          The widow weeps,
+     The Norse king strides in flame."
+      Here it is told that King Magnus made the greatest devastation through
+      Halland.
+      4. OF THORER OF STEIG.
+      "There was a man called Svein, a son of Harald Fietter. He was a Danish
+      man by family, a great viking and champion, and a very clever man, and of
+      high birth in his own country. He had been some time with King Hakon
+      Magnuson, and was very dear to him; but after King Hakon's decease Thorer
+      of Steig, his foster-father, had no great confidence in any treaty or
+      friendship with King Magnus, if the whole country came into his power, on
+      account of the position in which Thorer had stood to King Magnus, and the
+      opposition he had made to him. Thereupon Thorer and Svein took counsel
+      with each other, which they afterwards carried into effect, -to
+      raise, with Thorer's assistance, and his men, a troop against Magnus. But
+      as Thorer was old and heavy, Svein took the command, and name of leader of
+      the troop. In this design several chiefs took part, among whom the
+      principal was Egil Aslakson of Aurland. Egil was a lenderman, and married
+      to Ingebjorg, a daughter of Ogmund Thorbergson, a sister of Skopte of
+      Giske. The rich and powerful man, Skjalg Erlingson, also joined their
+      party. Thorkel Hamarskald speaks of this in his ballad of Magnus:
+     "Thorer and Egil were not wise,
+     They aimed too high to win a prize:
+     There was no reason in their plan,
+     And it hurt many a udalman.
+     The stone, too great for them to throw,
+     Fell back, and hurt them with the blow,
+     And now the udalmen must rue
+     That to their friends they were so true."
+      Thorer and Svein collected a troop in the Uplands, and went down through
+      Raumsdal into Sunmore, and there collected vessels, with which they
+      afterwards sailed north to Throndhjem.
+      5. OF THORER'S ADVENTURES.
+      The lenderman Sigurd Ulstreng, a son of Lodin Viggiarskalle, collected men
+      by sending round the war-token, as soon as he heard of Thorer and the
+      troop which followed him, and had a rendezvous with all the men he could
+      raise at Viggia. Svein and Thorer also met there with their people, fought
+      with Sigurd, and gained the victory after giving him a great defeat; and
+      Sigurd fled, and joined King Magnus. Thorer and his followers proceeded to
+      the town (Nidaros), and remained there some time in the fjord, where many
+      people joined them. King Magnus hearing this news immediately collected an
+      army, and proceeded north to Throndhjem. And when he came into the fjord
+      Thorer and his party heard of it while they lay at Herring, and they were
+      ready to leave the fjord; and they rowed their ships to the strand at
+      Vagnvik, and left them, and came into Theksdal in Seliuhverfe, and Thorer
+      was carried in a litter over the mountains. Then they got hold of ships
+      and sailed north to Halogaland. As soon as King Magnus was ready for sea,
+      he sailed from Throndhjem in pursuit of them. Thorer and his party went
+      north all the way to Bjarkey; and Jon, with his son Vidkun, fled from
+      thence. Thorer and his men robbed all the movable goods, and burnt the
+      house, and a good long-ship that belonged to Vidkun. While the hull was
+      burning the vessel keeled to one side, and Thorer called out, "Hard to
+      starboard, Vidkun!" Some verses were made about this burning in Bjarkey: -
+     "The sweetest farm that I have seen
+     Stood on Bjarkey's island green;
+     And now, where once this farmhouse stood,
+     Fire crackles through a pile of wood;
+     And the clear red flame, burning high,
+     Flashes across the dark-night sky.
+     Jon and Vidkun, this dark night,
+     Will not be wandering without light."
+      6. DEATH OF THORER AND EGIL.
+      Jon and Vidkun travelled day and night till they met King Magnus. Svein
+      and Thorer proceeded northwards with their men, and plundered far and wide
+      in Halogaland. But while they lay in a fjord called Harm, Thorer and his
+      party saw King Magnus coming under sail towards them; and thinking they
+      had not men enough to fight him, they rowed away and fled. Thorer and Egil
+      brought up at Hesjutun; but Svein rowed out to sea, and some of their
+      people rowed into the fjords. King Magnus pursued Thorer, and the vessels
+      struck together while they were landing. Thorer stood in the forecastle of
+      his ship, and Sigurd Ulstreng called out to him, and asked, "Art thou
+      well, Thorer?" Thorer replied, "I am well in hands, but ill on my feet."
+      Then all Thorer's men fled up the country, and Thorer was taken prisoner.
+      Egil was also taken prisoner, for he would not leave his wife. King Magnus
+      then ordered both of them to be taken out to Vambarholm; and when they
+      were leading Thorer from the ship he tottered on his legs. Then Vidkun
+      called out, "More to the larboard, Thorer!" When he was being led to the
+      gallows he sang: -
+     "We were four comrades gay, -
+     Let one by the helm stay."
+      When he came to the gallows he said, "Bad counsel comes to a bad end."
+      Then Thorer was hanged; but when he was hoisted up the gallows tree he was
+      so heavy that his neck gave way, and the body fell down to the ground; for
+      Thorer was a man exceedingly stout, both high of stature and thick. Egil
+      was also led to the gallows, and when the king's thralls were about
+      hanging him he said, "Ye should not hang me, for in truth each of you
+      deserves much more to be hanged." People sang these verses about it: -
+     "I hear, my girl, that Egil said,
+     When to the gallows he was led,
+     That the king's thralls far more than he
+     Deserved to hang on gallows-tree.
+     It might be so; but, death in view,
+     A man should to himself be true, -
+     End a stout life by death as stout,
+     Showing no fear; or care, or doubt."
+      King Magnus sat near while they were being hanged, and was in such a rage
+      that none of his men was so bold as to ask mercy for them. The king said,
+      when Egil was spinning at the gallows, "Thy great friends help thee but
+      poorly in time of need." From this people supposed that the king only
+      wanted to have been entreated to have spared Egil's life. Bjorn Krephende
+      speaks of these things: -
+     "King Magnus in the robbers' gore
+     Dyed red his sword; and round the shore
+     The wolves howled out their wild delight,
+     At corpses swinging in their sight.
+     Have ye not heard how the king's sword
+     Punished the traitors to their lord?
+     How the king's thralls hung on the gallows
+     Old Thorer and his traitor-fellows?"
+      7. OF THE PUNISHMENT OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE.
+      After this King Magnus sailed south to Throndhjem, and brought up in the
+      fjord, and punished severely all who had been guilty of treason towards
+      him; killing some, and burning the houses of others. So says Bjorn
+      Krephende: -
+     "He who despises fence of shields
+     Drove terror through the Throndhjem fields,
+     When all the land through which he came
+     Was swimming in a flood of flame.
+     The raven-feeder, will I know,
+     Cut off two chieftans at a blow;
+     The wolf could scarcely ravenous be,
+     The ernes flew round the gallows-tree."
+      Svein Harald Fletter's son, fled out to sea first, and sailed then to
+      Denmark, and remained there; and at last came into great favour with King
+      Eystein, the son of King Magnus, who took so great a liking to Svein that
+      he made him his dish-bearer, and held him in great respect. King Magnus
+      had now alone the whole kingdom, and he kept good peace in the land, and
+      rooted out all vikings and lawless men. He was a man quick, warlike, and
+      able, and more like in all things to his grandfather, King Harald, in
+      disposition and talents than to his father.
+      8. OF THE BONDE SVEINKE, AND SIGURD ULSTRENG.
+      There was a man called Sveinke Steinarson, who was very wealthy, and dwelt
+      in Viken at the Gaut river. He had brought up Hakon Magnuson before Thorer
+      of Steig took him. Sveinke had not yet submitted to King Magnus. King
+      Magnus ordered Sigurd Ulstreng to be called, and told him he would send
+      him to Sveinke with the command that he should quit the king's land and
+      domain. "He has not yet submitted to us, or shown us due honour." He
+      added, that there were some lendermen east in Viken, namely Svein
+      Bryggjufot, Dag Eilifson, and Kolbjorn Klakke, who could bring this matter
+      into right bearing. Then Sigurd said, "I did not know there was the man in
+      Norway against whom three lendermen besides myself were needful." The king
+      replied, "Thou needst not take this help, unless it be necessary." Now
+      Sigurd made himself ready for the journey with a ship, sailed east to
+      Viken, and there summoned the lendermen to him. Then a Thing was appointed
+      to Viken, to which the people were called who dwelt on the Gaut river,
+      besides others; so that it was a numerous assembly. When the Thing was
+      formed they had to wait for Sveinke. They soon after saw a troop of men
+      coming along, so well furnished with weapons that they looked like pieces
+      of shining ice; and now came Sveinke and his people to the Thing, and set
+      themselves down in a circle. All were clad in iron, with glowing arms, and
+      500 in number. Then Sigurd stood up, and spoke. "My master, King Magnus,
+      sends God's salutation and his own to all friends, lendermen and others,
+      his subjects in the kingdom; also to the powerful bondes, and the people
+      in general, with kind words and offers of friendship; and to all who will
+      obey him he offers his friendship and good will. Now the king will, with
+      all cheerfulness and peace, show himself a gracious master to all who will
+      submit to him, and to all in his dominions. He will be the leader and
+      defender of all the men of Norway; and it will be good for you to accept
+      his gracious speech, and this offer."
+      Then stood up a man in the troop of the Elfgrims, who was of great stature
+      and grim countenance, clad in a leather cloak, with a halberd on his
+      shoulder, and a great steel hat upon his head. He looked sternly, and
+      said, "Here is no need of wheels, says the fox, when he draws the trap
+      over the ice." He said nothing more, but sat down again.
+      Soon after Sigurd Ulstreng stood up again, and spoke thus: "But little
+      concern or help have we for the king's affairs from you, Elfgrims, and but
+      little friendship; yet by such means every man shows how much he respects
+      himself. But now I shall produce more clearly the king's errand."
+      Thereupon he demanded land-dues and levy-dues, together with all other
+      rights of the king, from the great bondes. He bade each of them to
+      consider with himself how they had conducted themselves in these matters;
+      and that they should now promote their own honour, and do the king
+      justice, if they had come short hitherto in doing so. And then he sat
+      down.
+      Then the same man got up in the troop of Elfgrims who had spoken before,
+      lifted his hat a little up, and said, "The lads run well, say the
+      Laplanders, who have skates for nothing." Then he sat himself down again.
+      Soon after Sigurd arose, after speaking with the lendermen, and said that
+      so weighty a message as the king's ought not to be treated lightly as a
+      jest. He was now somewhat angry; and added, that they ought not to receive
+      the king's message and errand so scornfully, for it was not decent. He was
+      dressed in a red or scarlet coat, and had a blue coat over it. He cast off
+      his upper coat and said, "Now it is come so far that every one must look
+      to himself, and not loiter and jest with others; for by so doing every man
+      will show what he is. We do not require now to be taught by others; for
+      now we can see ourselves how much we are regarded. But this may be borne
+      with; but not that ye treat so scornfully the king's message. Thereby
+      every one shows how highly he considers himself. There is one man called
+      Sveinke Steinarson, who lives east at the Gaut river; and from him the
+      king will have his just land-dues, together with his own land, or will
+      banish him from the country. It is of no use here to seek excuses, or to
+      answer with sharp words; for people are to be found who are his equals in
+      power, although he now receives our speech so unworthily; and it is better
+      now than afterwards to return to the right way, and do himself honour,
+      rather than await disgrace for his obstinancy." He then sat down.
+      Sveinke then got up, threw back his steel-hat, and gave Sigurd many
+      scornful words, and said, "Tut! tut! 'tis a shame for the dogs, says the
+      proverb, when the fox is allowed to cast their excrements in the peasant's
+      well. Here will be a miracle! Thou useless fellow! with a coat without
+      arms, and a kirtle with skirts, wilt thou drive me out of the country? Thy
+      relation, Sigurd Woolsack, was sent before on this errand, and one called
+      Gille the Backthief, and one who had still a worse name. They were a night
+      in every house, and stole wherever they came. Wilt thou drive me out of
+      the country? Formerly thou wast not so mighty, and thy pride was less when
+      King Hakon, my foster-son, was in life. Then thou wert as frightened for
+      him when he met thee on the road as a mouse in a mouse-trap, and hid
+      thyself under a heap of clothes, like a dog on board a ship. Thou wast
+      thrust into a leather-bag like corn in a sack, and driven from house and
+      farm like a year-old colt from the mares; and dost thou dare to drive me
+      from the land? Thou shouldst rather think thyself lucky to escape from
+      hence with life. Let us stand up and attack him."
+      Then all his men stood up, and made a great clash with their weapons. Then
+      Svein Bryggjufot and the other lendermen saw there was no other chance for
+      Sigurd but to get him on horseback, which was done, and he rode off into
+      the forest. The end was that Sveinke returned home to his farm, and Sigurd
+      Ulstreng came, with great difficulty, by land north to Throndhjem to King
+      Magnus, and told the result of his errand. "Did I not say," said the king,
+      "that the help of my lendermen would be needed?" Sigurd was ill pleased
+      with his journey; insisted that he would be revenged, cost what it will;
+      and urged the king much. The king ordered five ships to be fitted out; and
+      as soon as they were ready for sea he sailed south along the land, and
+      then east to Viken, where he was entertained in excellent guest-quarters
+      by his lendermen. The king told them he would seek out Sveinke. "For I
+      will not conceal my suspicion that he thinks to make himself king of
+      Norway." They said that Sveinke was both a powerful and an ungovernable
+      man. Now the king went from Viken until he came to Sveinke's farm. Then
+      the lendermen desired that they might be put on shore to see how matters
+      stood; and when they came to the land they saw that Sveinke had already
+      come down from the farm, and was on the road with a number of well-armed
+      men. The lendermen held up a white shield in the air, as a peace-token;
+      and when Sveinke saw it he halted his men, and they approached each other.
+      Then said Kolbjorn Klakke, "King Magnus sends thee God's salutation and
+      his own, and bids thee consider what becomes thee, and do him obedience,
+      and not prepare thyself to give him battle." Kolbjorn offered to mediate
+      peace between them, if he could, and told him to halt his troops.
+      Sveinke said he would wait for them where he was. "We came out to meet
+      you," he said, "that ye might not tread down our corn-fields."
+      The lendermen returned to the king, and told him all was now at his
+      pleasure.
+      The king said, "My doom is soon delivered. He shall fly the country, and
+      never come back to Norway as long as the kingdom is mine; and he shall
+      leave all his goods behind."
+      "But will it not be more for thy honour," said Kolbjorn, "and give thee a
+      higher reputation among other kings, if, in banishing him from the
+      country, thou shouldst allow him to keep his property, and show himself
+      among other people? And we shall take care that he never comes back while
+      we live. Consider of this, sire, by yourself, and have respect for our
+      assurance."
+      The king replied, "Let him then go forth immediately."
+      They went back, therefore, to Sveinke, and told him the king's words; and
+      also that the king had ordered him out of the country, and he should show
+      his obedience, since he had forgotten himself towards the king. "It is for
+      the honour of both that thou shouldst show obedience to the king."
+      Then Sveinke said, "There must be some great change if the king speaks
+      agreeably to me; but why should I fly the country and my properties?
+      Listen now to what I say. It appears to me better to die upon my property
+      than to fly from my udal estates. Tell the king that I will not stir from
+      them even an arrow-flight."
+      Kolbjorn replied, "This is scarcely prudent, or right; for it is better
+      for one's own honour to give way to the best chief, than to make
+      opposition to one's own loss. A gallant man succeeds wheresoever he goes;
+      and thou wilt be the more respected wheresoever thou art, with men of
+      power, just because thou hast made head so boldly against so powerful a
+      chief. Hear our promises, and pay some attention to our errand. We offer
+      thee to manage thy estates, and take them faithfully under our protection;
+      and also never, against thy will, to pay scat for thy land until thou
+      comest back. We will pledge our lives and properties upon this. Do not
+      throw away good counsel from thee, and avoid thus the ill fortune of other
+      good men."
+      Then Sveinke was silent for a short time, and said at last, "Your
+      endeavours are wise; but I have my suspicions that ye are changing a
+      little the king's message. In consideration, however, of the great
+      good-will that ye show me, I will hold your advice in such respect that I
+      will go out of the country for the whole winter, if, according to your
+      promises, I can then retain my estates in peace. Tell the king, also,
+      these my words, that I do this on your account, not on his."
+      Thereupon they returned to the king, and said, that Sveinke left all in
+      the king's hands. "But entreats you to have respect to his honour. He will
+      be away for three years, and then come back, if it be the king's pleasure.
+      Do this; let all things be done according to what is suitable for the
+      royal dignity and according to our entreaty, now that the matter is
+      entirely in thy power, and we shall do all we can to prevent his returning
+      against thy will."
+      The king replied, "Ye treat this matter like men, and, for your sakes,
+      shall all things be as ye desire. Tell him so."
+      They thanked the king, and then went to Sveinke, and told him the king's
+      gracious intentions. "We will be glad," said they, "if ye can be
+      reconciled. The king requires, indeed that thy absence shall be for three
+      years; but, if we know the truth rightly, we expect that before that time
+      he will find he cannot do without thee in this part of the country. It
+      will be to thy own future honour, therefore, to agree to this."
+      Sveinke replies, "What condition is better than this? Tell the king that I
+      shall not vex him longer with my presence here, and accept of my goods and
+      estates on this condition."
+      Thereupon he went home with his men, and set off directly; for he had
+      prepared everything beforehand. Kolbjorn remains behind, and makes ready a
+      feast for King Magnus, which also was thought of and prepared. Sveinke, on
+      the other hand, rides up to Gautland with all the men he thought proper to
+      take with him. The king let himself be entertained in guest-quarters at
+      his house, returned to Viken, and Sveinke's estates were nominally the
+      king's, but Kolbjorn had them under his charge. The king received
+      guest-quarters in Viken, proceeded from thence northwards, and there was
+      peace for a while; but now that the Elfgrims were without a chief,
+      marauding gangs infested them, and the king saw this eastern part of the
+      kingdom would be laid waste. It appeared to him, therefore, most suitable
+      and advisable to make Sveinke himself oppose the stream, and twice he sent
+      messages to him. But he did not stir until King Magnus himself was south
+      in Denmark, when Sveinke and the king met, and made a full reconciliation;
+      on which Sveinke returned home to his house and estates, and was
+      afterwards King Magnus's best and trustiest friend, who strengthened his
+      kingdom on the eastern border; and their friendship continued as long as
+      they lived.
+      9. KING MAGNUS MAKES WAR ON THE SOUTHERN HEBUDES.
+      King Magnus undertook an expedition out of the country, with many fine men
+      and a good assortment of shipping. With this armament he sailed out into
+      the West sea, and first came to the Orkney Islands. There he took the two
+      earls, Paul and Erlend, prisoners, and sent them east to Norway, and
+      placed his son Sigurd as chief over the islands, leaving some counsellors
+      to assist him. From thence King Magnus, with his followers, proceeded to
+      the Southern Hebudes, and when he came there began to burn and lay waste
+      the inhabited places, killing the people and plundering wherever he came
+      with his men; and the country people fled in all directions, some into
+      Scotland-fjord, others south to Cantire, or out to Ireland; some obtained
+      life and safety by entering into his service. So says Bjorn Krephende: -
+     "In Lewis Isle with fearful blaze
+     The house-destroying fire plays;
+     To hills and rocks the people fly,
+     Fearing all shelter but the sky.
+     In Uist the king deep crimson made
+     The lightning of his glancing blade;
+     The peasant lost his land and life
+     Who dared to bide the Norseman's strife.
+     The hunger battle-birds were filled
+     In Skye with blood of foemen killed,
+     And wolves on Tyree's lonely shore
+     Dyed red their hairy jaws in gore.
+     The men of Mull were tired of flight;
+     The Scottish foemen would not fight,
+     And many an island-girl's wail
+     Was heard as through the isles we strife sail."
+      10. OF LAGMAN, KING GUDROD'S SON.
+      King Magnus came with his forces to the Holy Island (Iona), and gave peace
+      and safety to all men there. It is told that the king opened the door of
+      the little Columb's Kirk there, but did not go in, but instantly locked
+      the door again, and said that no man should be so bold as to go into that
+      church hereafter; which has been the case ever since. From thence King
+      Magnus sailed to Islay, where he plundered and burnt; and when he had
+      taken that country he proceeded south around Cantire, marauding on both
+      sides in Scotland and Ireland, and advanced with his foray to Man, where
+      he plundered. So says Bjorn Krephende: -
+     "On Sandey's plain our shield they spy:
+     From Isla smoke rose heaven-high,
+     Whirling up from the flashing blaze
+     The king's men o'er the island raise.
+     South of Cantire the people fled,
+     Scared by our swords in blood dyed red,
+     And our brave champion onward goes
+     To meet in Man the Norseman's foes."
+      Lagman (Lawman) was the name of the son of Gudrod, king of the Hebudes.
+      Lawman was sent to defend the most northerly islands; but when King Magnus
+      and his army came to the Hebudes, Lawman fled here and there about the
+      isles, and at last King Magnus's men took him and his ship's crew as he
+      was flying over to Ireland. The king put him in irons to secure him. So
+      says Bjorn Krephende: -
+     "To Gudrod's son no rock or cave,
+     Shore-side or hill, a refuge gave;
+     Hunted around from isle to isle,
+     This Lawman found no safe asyle.
+     From isle to isle, o'er firth and sound,
+     Close on his track his foe he found.
+     At Ness the Agder chief at length
+     Seized him, and iron-chained his strength."
+      11. OF THE FALL OF EARL HUGE THE BRAVE.
+      Afterwards King Magnus sailed to Wales; and when he came to the sound of
+      Anglesey there came against him an army from Wales, which was led by two
+      earls -Hugo the brave, and Hugo the Stout. They began immediately to
+      give battle, and there was a severe conflict. King Magnus shot with the
+      bow; but Huge the Brave was all over in armour, so that nothing was bare
+      about him excepting one eye. King Magnus let fly an arrow at him, as also
+      did a Halogaland man who was beside the king. They both shot at once. The
+      one shaft hit the nose-screen of the helmet, which was bent by it to one
+      side, and the other arrow hit the earl's eye, and went through his head;
+      and that was found to be the king's. Earl Huge fell, and the Britons fled
+      with the loss of many people. So says Bjorn Krephende: -
+     "The swinger of the sword
+     Stood by Anglesey's ford;
+     His quick shaft flew,
+     And Huge slew.
+     His sword gleamed a while
+     O'er Anglesey Isle,
+     And his Norsemen's band
+     Scoured the Anglesey land."
+      There was also sung the following verse about it: -
+     "On the panzers arrows rattle,
+     Where our Norse king stands in battle;
+     From the helmets blood-streams flow,
+     Where our Norse king draws his bow:
+     His bowstring twangs, -its biting hail
+     Rattles against the ring-linked mail.
+     Up in the land in deadly strife
+     Our Norse king took Earl Huge's life."
+      King Magnus gained the victory in this battle, and then took Anglesey
+      Isle, which was the farthest south the Norway kings of former days had
+      ever extended their rule. Anglesey is a third part of Wales. After this
+      battle King Magnus turned back with his fleet, and came first to Scotland.
+      Then men went between the Scottish king, Melkolm and King Magnus, and a
+      peace was made between them; so that all the islands lying west of
+      Scotland, between which and the mainland he could pass in a vessel with
+      her rudder shipped, should be held to belong to the king of Norway. Now
+      when King Magnus came north to Cantire, he had a skiff drawn over the
+      strand at Cantire, and shipped the rudder of it. The king himself sat in
+      the stern-sheets, and held the tiller; and thus he appropriated to himself
+      the land that lay on the farboard side. Cantire is a great district,
+      better than the best of the southern isles of the Hebudes, excepting Man;
+      and there is a small neck of land between it and the mainland of Scotland,
+      over which longships are often drawn.
+      12. DEATH OF THE EARLS OF ORKNEY.
+      King Magnus was all the winter in the southern isles, and his men went
+      over all the fjords of Scotland, rowing within all the inhabited and
+      uninhabited isles, and took possession for the king of Norway of all the
+      islands west of Scotland. King Magnus contracted in marriage his son
+      Sigurd to Biadmynia, King Myrkjartan's daughter. Myrkjartan was a son of
+      the Irish king Thialfe, and ruled over Connaught. The summer after, King
+      Magnus, with his fleet, returned east to Norway. Earl Erland died of
+      sickness at Nidaros, and is buried there; and Earl Paul died in Bergen.
+      Skopte Ogmundson, a grandson of Thorberg, was a gallant lenderman, who
+      dwelt at Giske in Sunmore, and was married to Gudrun, a daughter of Thord
+      Folason. Their children were Ogmund, Fin, Thord, and Thora, who was
+      married to Asolf Skulason. Skopte's and Gudrun's sons were the most
+      promising and popular men in their youth.
+      13. QUARRELS OF KING MAGNUS AND KING INGE.
+      Steinkel, the Swedish king, died about the same time (A.D. 1066) as the
+      two Haralds fell, and the king who came after him in Svithjod was called
+      Hakon. Afterwards Inge, a son of Steinkel, was king, and was a good and
+      powerful king, strong and stout beyond most men; and he was king of
+      Svithjod when King Magnus was king of Norway. King Magnus insisted that
+      the boundaries of the countries in old times had been so, that the Gaut
+      river divided the kingdoms of the Swedish and Norwegian kings, but
+      afterwards the Vener lake up to Vermaland. Thus King Magnus insisted that
+      he was owner of all the places lying west of the Vener lake up to
+      Vermaland, which are the districts of Sundal, Nordal, Vear, and Vardyniar,
+      with all the woods belonging thereto. But these had for a long time been
+      under the Swedish dominion, and with respect to scat were joined to West
+      Gautland; and, besides, the forest-settlers preferred being under the
+      Swedish king. King Magnus rode from Viken up to Gautland with a great and
+      fine army, and when he came to the forest-settlements he plundered and
+      burnt all round; on which the people submitted, and took the oath of
+      fidelity to him. When he came to the Vener lake, autumn was advanced and
+      he went out to the island Kvaldinsey, and made a stronghold of turf and
+      wood, and dug a ditch around it. When the work was finished, provisions
+      and other necessaries that might be required were brought to it. The king
+      left in it 300 men, who were the chosen of his forces, and Fin Skoptason
+      and Sigurd Ulstreng as their commanders. The king himself returned to
+      Viken.
+      14. OF THE NORTHMEN.
+      When the Swedish king heard this he drew together people, and the report
+      came that he would ride against these Northmen; but there was delay about
+      his riding, and the Northmen made these lines: -
+     "The fat-hipped king, with heavy sides,
+     Finds he must mount before he rides."
+      But when the ice set in upon the Vener lake King Inge rode down, and had
+      near 300 men with him. He sent a message to the Northmen who sat in the
+      burgh that they might retire with all the booty they had taken, and go to
+      Norway. When the messengers brought this message, Sigurd Ulstreng replied
+      to it; saying that King Inge must take the trouble to come, if he wished
+      to drive them away like cattle out of a grass field, and said he must come
+      nearer if he wished them to remove. The messengers returned with this
+      answer to the king, who then rode out with all his army to the island, and
+      again sent a message to the Northmen that they might go away, taking with
+      them their weapons, clothes, and horses; but must leave behind all their
+      booty. This they refused. The king made an assault upon them, and they
+      shot at each other. Then the king ordered timber and stones to be
+      collected, and he filled up the ditch; and then he fastened anchors to
+      long spars which were brought up to the timber-walls, and, by the strength
+      of many hands, the walls were broken down. Thereafter a large pile of wood
+      was set on fire, and the lighted brands were flung in among them. Then the
+      Northmen asked for quarter. The king ordered them to go out without
+      weapons or cloaks. As they went out each of them received a stroke with a
+      whip, and then they set off for Norway, and all the forest-men submitted
+      again to King Inge. Sigurd and his people went to King Magnus, and told
+      him their misfortune.
+      15. KING MAGNUS AND GIPARDE.
+      When King Magnus was east in Viken, there came to him a foreigner called
+      Giparde. He gave himself out for a good knight, and offered his services
+      to King Magnus; for he understood that in the king's dominions there was
+      something to be done. The king received him well. At that time the king
+      was preparing to go to Gautland, on which country the king had
+      pretensions; and besides he would repay the Gautland people the disgrace
+      they had occasioned him in spring, when he was obliged to fly from them.
+      He had then a great force in arms, and the West Gautlanders in the
+      northern districts submitted to him. He set up his camp on the borders,
+      intending to make a foray from thence. When King Inge heard of this he
+      collected troops, and hastened to oppose King Magnus; and when King Magnus
+      heard of this expedition, many of the chiefs of the people urged him to
+      turn back; but this the king would not listen to, but in the night time
+      went unsuspectedly against the Swedish king. They met at Foxerne; and when
+      he was drawing up his men in battle order he asked, "Where is Giparde?"
+      but he was not to be found. Then the king made these verses: -
+     "Cannot the foreign knight abide
+     Our rough array? -where does he hide?"
+      Then a skald who followed the king replied: -
+     "The king asks where the foreign knight
+     In our array rides to the fight:
+     Giparde the knight rode quite away
+     When our men joined in bloody fray.
+     When swords were wet the knight was slow
+     With his bay horse in front to go;
+     The foreign knight could not abide
+     Our rough array, and went to hide."
+      There was a great slaughter, and after the battle the field was covered
+      with the Swedes slain, and King Inge escaped by flight. King Magnus gained
+      a great victory. Then came Giparde riding down from the country, and
+      people did not speak well of him for not being in the fight. He went away,
+      and proceeded westward to England; and the voyage was stormy, and Giparde
+      lay in bed. There was an Iceland man called Eldjarn, who went to bale out
+      the water in the ship's hold, and when he saw where Giparde was lying he
+      made this verse: -
+     "Does it beseem a courtman bold
+     Here to be dozing in the hold?
+     The bearded knight should danger face:
+     The leak gains on our ship apace.
+     Here, ply this bucket!  bale who can;
+     We need the work of every man.
+     Our sea-horse stands full to the breast, -
+     Sluggards and cowards must not rest."
+      When they came west to England, Giparde said the Northmen had slandered
+      him. A meeting was appointed, and a count came to it, and the case was
+      brought before him for trial. He said he was not much acquainted with law
+      cases, as he was but young, and had only been a short time in office; and
+      also, of all things, he said what he least understood to judge about was
+      poetry. "But let us hear what it was." Then Eldjarn sang: -
+     "I heard that in the bloody fight
+     Giparde drove all our foes to flight:
+     Brave Giparde would the foe abide,
+     While all our men ran off to hide.
+     At Foxerne the fight was won
+     By Giparde's valour all alone;
+     Where Giparde fought, alone was he;
+     Not one survived to fight or flee."
+      Then said the count, "Although I know but little about skald-craft, I can
+      hear that this is no slander, but rather the highest praise and honour."
+      Giparde could say nothing against it, yet he felt it was a mockery.
+      16. BATTLE OF FOXERNE.
+      The spring after, as soon as the ice broke up, King Magnus, with a great
+      army, sailed eastwards to the Gaut river, and went up the eastern arm of
+      it, laying waste all that belonged to the Swedish dominions. When they
+      came to Foxerne they landed from their vessels; but as they came over a
+      river on their way an army of Gautland people came against them, and there
+      was immediately a great battle, in which the Northmen were overwhelmed by
+      numbers, driven to flight, and many of them killed near to a waterfall.
+      King Magnus fled, and the Gautlanders pursued, and killed those they could
+      get near. King Magnus was easily known. He was a very stout man, and had a
+      red short cloak over him, and bright yellow hair like silk that fell over
+      his shoulders. Ogmund Skoptason, who was a tall and handsome man, rode on
+      one side of the king. He said, "Sire, give me that cloak."
+      The king said, "What would you do with it?"
+      "I would like to have it," said Ogmund; "and you have given me greater
+      gifts, sire."
+      The road was such that there were great and wide plains, so that the
+      Gautlanders and Northmen were always in sight of each other, unless where
+      clumps of wood and bushes concealed them from each other now and then. The
+      king gave Ogmund the cloak and he put it on. When they came out again upon
+      the plain ground, Ogmund and his people rode off right across the road.
+      The Gautlanders, supposing this must be the king, rode all after him, and
+      the king proceeded to the ships. Ogmund escaped with great difficulty;
+      however, he reached the ships at last in safety. King Magnus then sailed
+      down the river, and proceeded north to Viken.
+      17. MEETING OF THE KINGS AT THE GAUT RIVER.
+      The following summer a meeting of the kings was agreed upon at Konghelle
+      on the Gaut river; and King Magnus, the Swedish king, Inge, and the Danish
+      king, Eirik Sveinson, all met there, after giving each other safe conduct
+      to the meeting. Now when the Thing had sat down the kings went forward
+      upon the plain, apart from the rest of the people, and they talked with
+      each other a little while. Then they returned to their people, and a
+      treaty was brought about, by which each should possess the dominions his
+      forefathers had held before him; but each should make good to his own men
+      the waste and manslaughter suffered by them, and then they should agree
+      between themselves about settling this with each other. King Magnus should
+      marry King Inge's daughter Margaret, who afterwards was called
+      Peace-offering. This was proclaimed to the people; and thus, within a
+      little hour, the greatest enemies were made the best of friends.
+      It was observed by the people that none had ever seen men with more of the
+      air of chiefs than these had. King Inge was the largest and stoutest, and,
+      from his age, of the most dignified appearance. King Magnus appeared the
+      most gallant and brisk, and King Eirik the most handsome. But they were
+      all handsome men; stout, gallant, and ready in speech. After this was
+      settled they parted.
+      18. KING MAGNUS'S MARRIAGE.
+      King Magnus got Margaret, King Inge's daughter, as above related; and she
+      was sent from Svithjod to Norway with an honourable retinue. King Magnus
+      had some children before, whose names shall here be given. The one of his
+      sons who was of a mean mother was called Eystein; the other, who was a
+      year younger, was called Sigurd, and his mother's name was Thora. Olaf was
+      the name of a third son, who was much younger than the two first
+      mentioned, and whose mother was Sigrid, a daughter of Saxe of Vik, who was
+      a respectable man in the Throndhjem country; she was the king's concubine.
+      People say that when King Magnus came home from his viking cruise to the
+      Western countries, he and many of his people brought with them a great
+      deal of the habits and fashion of clothing of those western parts. They
+      went about on the streets with bare legs, and had short kirtles and
+      over-cloaks; and therefore his men called him Magnus Barefoot or Bareleg.
+      Some called him Magnus the Tall, others Magnus the Strife-lover. He was
+      distinguished among other men by his tall stature. The mark of his height
+      is put down in Mary church, in the merchant town of Nidaros, which King
+      Harald built. In the northern door there were cut into the wall three
+      crosses, one for Harald's stature, one for Olaf's, and one for Magnus's;
+      and which crosses each of them could with the greatest ease kiss. The
+      upper was Harald's cross; the lowest was Magnus's; and Olaf's was in the
+      middle, about equally distant from both.
+      It is said that Magnus composed the following verses about the emperor's
+      daughter: -
+     "The ring of arms where blue swords gleam,
+     The battle-shout, the eagle's scream,
+     The Joy of war, no more can please:
+     Matilda is far o'er the seas.
+     My sword may break, my shield be cleft,
+     Of land or life I may be reft;
+     Yet I could sleep, but for one care, -
+     One, o'er the seas, with light-brown hair."
+      He also composed the following: -
+     "The time that breeds delay feels long,
+     The skald feels weary of his song;
+     What sweetens, brightens, eases life?
+     'Tis a sweet-smiling lovely wife.
+     My time feels long in Thing affairs,
+     In Things my loved one ne'er appears.
+     The folk full-dressed, while I am sad,
+     Talk and oppose -can I be glad?"
+      When King Magnus heard the friendly words the emperor's daughter had
+      spoken about him -that she had said such a man as King Magnus was
+      appeared to her an excellent man, he composed the following: -
+     "The lover hears, -across the sea,
+     A favouring word was breathed to me.
+     The lovely one with light-brown hair
+     May trust her thoughts to senseless air;
+     Her thoughts will find like thoughts in me;
+     And though my love I cannot see,
+     Affection's thoughts fly in the wind,
+     And meet each other, true and kind."
+      19. OF THE QUARREL OF KING MAGNUS AND SKOPTE.
+      Skopte Ogmundson came into variance with King Magnus, and they quarrelled
+      about the inheritance of a deceased person which Skopte retained; but the
+      king demanded it with so much earnestness, that it had a dangerous
+      appearance. Many meetings were held about the affair, and Skopte took the
+      resolution that he and his son should never put themselves into the king's
+      power at the same time; and besides there was no necessity to do so. When
+      Skopte was with the king he represented to him that there was relationship
+      between the king and him; and also that he, Skopte, had always been the
+      king's friend, and his father's likewise, and that their friendship had
+      never been shaken. He added, "People might know that I have sense enough
+      not to hold a strife, sire, with you, if I was wrong in what I asked; but
+      it is inherited from my ancestors to defend my rights against any man,
+      without distinction of persons." The king was just the same on this point,
+      and his resolution was by no means softened by such a speech. Then Skopte
+      went home.
+      20. FIN SKOPTASON'S PROCEEDINGS.
+      Then Fin Skoptason went to the king, spoke with him, and entreated him to
+      render justice to the father and son in this business. The king answers
+      angrily and sharply. Then said Fin, "I expected something else, sire, from
+      you, than that you would use the law's vexations against me when I took my
+      seat in Kvaldinsey Island, which few of your other friends would do; as
+      they said, what was true, that those who were left there were deserted and
+      doomed to death, if King Inge had not shown greater generosity to us than
+      you did; although many consider that we brought shame and disgrace only
+      from thence." The king was not to be moved by this speech, and Fin
+      returned home.
+      21. OGMUND SKOPTASON'S PROCEEDINGS.
+      Then came Ogmund Skoptason to the king; and when he came before him he
+      produced his errand, and begged the king to do what was right and proper
+      towards him and his father. The king insisted that the right was on his
+      side, and said they were "particularly impudent."
+      Then said Ogmund, "It is a very easy thing for thee, having the power, to
+      do me and my father injustice; and I must say the old proverb is true,
+      that one whose life you save gives none, or a very bad return. This I
+      shall add, that never again shall I come into thy service; nor my father,
+      if I can help it." Then Ogmund went home, and they never saw each other
+      again.
+      22. SKOPTE OGMUNDSON'S VOYAGE ABROAD.
+      The spring after, Skopte Ogmundson made ready to travel out of the
+      country. They had five long-ships all well equipped. His sons, Ogmund,
+      Fin, and Thord, accompanied him on this journey. It was very late before
+      they were ready, and in autumn they went over to Flanders, and wintered
+      there. Early in spring they sailed westward to Valland, and stayed there
+      all summer. Then they sailed further, and through Norvasund; and came in
+      autumn to Rome, where Skopte died. All, both father and sons, died on this
+      journey. Thord, who died in Sicily, lived the longest. It is a common
+      saying among the people that Skopte was the first Northman who sailed
+      through Norvasund; and this voyage was much celebrated.
+      23. MIRACLE OF KING OLAF THE SAINT AT A FIRE.
+      It happened once in the merchant town (Nidaros) where King Olaf reposes,
+      that there broke out a fire in the town which spread around. Then Olaf's
+      shrine was taken out of the church, and set up opposite the fire.
+      Thereupon came a crazy foolish man, struck the shrine, threatened the holy
+      saint, and said all must be consumed by the flames, both churches and
+      other houses, if he did not save them by his prayers. Now the burning of
+      the church did cease, by the help of Almighty God; but the insane man got
+      sore eyes on the following night, and he lay there until King Olaf
+      entreated God Almighty to be merciful to him; after which he recovered in
+      the same church.
+      24. MIRACLE OF KING OLAF ON A LAME WOMAN.
+      It happened once in the merchant town that a woman was brought to the
+      place where the holy King Olaf reposes. She was so miserably shaped, that
+      she was altogether crumpled up; so that both her feet lay in a circle
+      against her loins. But as she was diligent in her prayers, often weeping
+      and making vows to King Olaf, he cured her great infirmities; so that
+      feet, legs, and other limbs straightened, and every limb and part came to
+      the right use for which they were made. Before she could not creep there,
+      and now she went away active and brisk to her family and home.
+      25. WAR IN IRELAND.
+      When King Magnus had been nine years king of Norway (A.D. 1094-1102), he
+      equipped himself to go out of the country with a great force. He sailed
+      out into the West sea with the finest men who could be got in Norway. All
+      the powerful men of the country followed him; such as Sigurd Hranason,
+      Vidkun Jonson, Dag Eilifson, Serk of Sogn, Eyvind Olboge, the king's
+      marshal Ulf Hranason, brother of Sigurd, and many other great men. With
+      all this armament the king sailed west to the Orkney Islands, from whence
+      he took with him Earl Erlend's sons, Magnus and Erling, and then sailed to
+      the southern Hebudes. But as he lay under the Scotch land, Magnus
+      Erlendson ran away in the night from the king's ship, swam to the shore,
+      escaped into the woods, and came at last to the Scotch king's court. King
+      Magnus sailed to Ireland with his fleet, and plundered there. King
+      Myrkjartan came to his assistance, and they conquered a great part of the
+      country, both Dublin and Dyflinnarskire (Dublin shire). King Magnus was in
+      winter (A.D. 1102) up in Connaught with King Myrkjartan, but set men to
+      defend the country he had taken. Towards spring both kings went westward
+      with their army all the way to Ulster, where they had many battles,
+      subdued the country, and had conquered the greatest part of Ulster when
+      Myrkjartan returned home to Connaught.
+      26. KING MAGNUS'S FORAY ON THE LAND.
+      King Magnus rigged his ships, and intended returning to Norway, but set
+      his men to defend the country of Dublin. He lay at Ulster ready for sea
+      with his whole fleet. As they thought they needed cattle for
+      ship-provision, King Magnus sent a message to King Myrkjartan, telling him
+      to send some cattle for slaughter; and appointed the day before
+      Bartholomew's day as the day they should arrive, if the messengers reached
+      him in safety; but the cattle had not made their appearance the evening
+      before Bartholomew's mass. On the mass-day itself, when the sun rose in
+      the sky, King Magnus went on shore himself with the greater part of his
+      men, to look after his people, and to carry off cattle from the coast. The
+      weather was calm, the sun shone, and the road lay through mires and
+      mosses, and there were paths cut through; but there was brushwood on each
+      side of the road. When they came somewhat farther, they reached a height
+      from which they had a wide view. They saw from it a great dust rising up
+      the country, as of horsemen, and they said to each other, "That must be
+      the Irish army;" but others said, "It was their own men returning with the
+      cattle." They halted there; and Eyvind Olboge said, "How, sire, do you
+      intend to direct the march? The men think we are advancing imprudently.
+      You know the Irish are treacherous; think, therefore, of a good counsel
+      for your men." Then the king said, "Let us draw up our men, and be ready,
+      if there be treachery." This was done, and the king and Eyvind went before
+      the line. King Magnus had a helmet on his head; a red shield, in which was
+      inlaid a gilded lion; and was girt with the sword of Legbit, of which the
+      hilt was of tooth (ivory), and handgrip wound about with gold thread; and
+      the sword was extremely sharp. In his hand he had a short spear, and a red
+      silk short cloak, over his coat, on which, both before and behind, was
+      embroidered a lion in yellow silk; and all men acknowledged that they
+      never had seen a brisker, statelier man. Eyvind had also a red silk cloak
+      like the king's; and he also was a stout, handsome, warlike man.
+      27. FALL OF KING MAGNUS.
+      When the dust-cloud approached nearer they knew their own men, who were
+      driving the cattle. The Irish king had been faithful to the promises he
+      had given the king, and had sent them. Thereupon they all turned towards
+      the ships, and it was mid-day. When they came to the mires they went but
+      slowly over the boggy places; and then the Irish started up on every side
+      against them from every bushy point of land, and the battle began
+      instantly. The Northmen were going divided in various heaps, so that many
+      of them fell.
+      Then said Eyvind to the king, "Unfortunate is this march to our people,
+      and we must instantly hit upon some good plan."
+      The king answered, "Call all the men together with the war-horns under the
+      banner, and the men who are here shall make a rampart with their shields,
+      and thus we will retreat backwards out of the mires; and we will clear
+      ourselves fast enough when we get upon firm ground."
+      The Irish shot boldly; and although they fell in crowds, there came always
+      two in the place of one. Now when the king had come to the nearest ditch
+      there was a very difficult crossing, and few places were passable; so that
+      many Northmen fell there. Then the king called to his lenderman Thorgrim
+      Skinhufa, who was an Upland man, and ordered him to go over the ditch with
+      his division. "We shall defend you," said he, "in the meantime, so that no
+      harm shall come to you. Go out then to those holms, and shoot at them from
+      thence; for ye are good bowmen."
+      When Thorgrim and his men came over the ditch they cast their shields
+      behind their backs, and set off to the ships.
+      When the king saw this, he said, "Thou art deserting thy king in an
+      unmanly way. I was foolish in making thee a lenderman, and driving Sigurd
+      Hund out of the country; for never would he have behaved so."
+      King Magnus received a wound, being pierced by a spear through both thighs
+      above the knees. The king laid hold of the shaft between his legs, broke
+      the spear in two, and said, "Thus we break spear-shafts, my lads; let us
+      go briskly on. Nothing hurts me." A little after King Magnus was struck in
+      the neck with an Irish axe, and this was his death-wound. Then those who
+      were behind fled. Vidkun Jonson instantly killed the man who had given the
+      king his death-wound, and fled, after having received three wounds; but
+      brought the king's banner and the sword Legbit to the ships. Vidkun was
+      the last man who fled; the other next to him was Sigurd Hranason, and the
+      third before him, Dag Eilifson. There fell with King Magnus, Eyvind
+      Olboge, Ulf Hranason, and many other great people. Many of the Northmen
+      fell, but many more of the Irish. The Northmen who escaped sailed away
+      immediately in autumn. Erling, Earl Erlend's'son, fell with King Magnus in
+      Ireland; but the men who fled from Ireland came to the Orkney Islands. Now
+      when King Sigurd heard that his father had fallen, he set off immediately,
+      leaving the Irish king's daughter behind, and proceeded in autumn with the
+      whole fleet directly to Norway. COG{17507e07-2f39-4b36-8843-bf304ee3ad1d}
+      28. OF KING MAGNUS AND VIDKUN JONSON. 
+      King Magnus was ten years king of Norway (A.D. 1094-1105), and in his days
+      there was good peace kept within the country; but the people were sorely
+      oppressed with levies. King Magnus was beloved by his men, but the bondes
+      thought him harsh. The words have been transmitted from him that he said
+      when his friends observed that he proceeded incautiously when he was on
+      his expeditions abroad, -"The kings are made for honour, not for long
+      life." King Magnus was nearly thirty years of age when he fell. Vidkun did
+      not fly until he had killed the man who gave the king his mortal wound,
+      and for this cause King Magnus's sons had him in the most affectionate
+      regard.
+      SAGA OF SIGURD THE CRUSADER AND HIS BROTHERS EYSTEIN AND OLAF.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      "Agrip", "Fagrskinna", and "Morkinskinna" more or less complete the story
+      of the sons of Magnus. They contain some things omitted by Snorre, while,
+      on the other hand, some facts related by Snorre are not found in the above
+      sources.
+      Thjodrek the Monk tells of Sigurd that he made a Journey to Jerusalem,
+      conquered many heathen cities, and among them Sidon; that he captured a
+      cave defended by robbers, received presents from Baldwin, returned to
+      Norway in Eystein's lifetime, and became insane, as a result, as some say,
+      of a poisonous drink.
+      The three brothers became kings in the year A.D. 1103. Olaf died 1115,
+      Eystein 1122 or 1123, Sigurd 1130.
+      Skalds quoted in this saga are: Thorarin Stutfeld, Einar Skulason, Haldor
+      Skvaldre, and Arne Fjoruskeif.
+      1. BEGINNING OF THE REIGN OF KING MAGNUS'S SONS.
+      After King Magnus Barefoot's fall, his sons, Eystein, Sigurd, and Olaf,
+      took the kingdom of Norway. Eystein got the northern, and Sigurd the
+      southern part of the country. King Olaf was then four or five years old,
+      and the third part of the country which he had was under the management of
+      his two brothers. King Sigurd was chosen king when he was thirteen or
+      fourteen years old, and Eystein was a year older. King Sigurd left west of
+      the sea the Irish king's daughter. When King Magnus's sons were chosen
+      kings, the men who had followed Skopte Ogmundson returned home. Some had
+      been to Jerusalem, some to Constantinople; and there they had made
+      themselves renowned, and they had many kinds of novelties to talk about.
+      By these extraordinary tidings many men in Norway were incited to the same
+      expedition; and it was also told that the Northmen who liked to go into
+      the military service at Constantinople found many opportunities of getting
+      property. Then these Northmen desired much that one of the two kings,
+      either Eystein or Sigurd, should go as commander of the troop which was
+      preparing for this expedition. The kings agreed to this, and carried on
+      the equipment at their common expense. Many great men, both of the
+      lendermen and bondes, took part in this enterprise; and when all was ready
+      for the journey it was determined that Sigurd should go, and Eystein in
+      the meantime, should rule the kingdom upon their joint account.
+      2. OF THE EARLS OF ORKNEY.
+      A year or two after King Magnus Barefoot's fall, Hakon, a son of Earl
+      Paul, came from Orkney. The kings gave him the earldom and government of
+      the Orkney Islands, as the earls before him, his father Paul or his Uncle
+      Erland, had possessed it; and Earl Hakon then sailed back immediately to
+      Orkney.
+      3. KING SIGURD'S JOURNEY OUT OF THE COUNTRY.
+      Four years after the fall of King Magnus (A.D. 1107), King Sigurd sailed
+      with his people from Norway. He had then sixty ships. So says Thorarin
+      Stutfeld: -
+     "A young king just and kind,
+     People of loyal mind:
+     Such brave men soon agree, -
+     To distant lands they sail with glee.
+     To the distant Holy Land
+     A brave and pious band,
+     Magnificent and gay,
+     In sixty long-ships glide away."
+      King Sigurd sailed in autumn to England, where Henry, son of William the
+      Bastard, was then king, and Sigurd remained with him all winter. So says
+      Einar Skulason: -
+     "The king is on the waves!
+     The storm he boldly braves.
+          His ocean-steed,
+          With winged speed,
+     O'er the white-flashing surges,
+     To England's coast he urges;
+     And there he stays the winter o'er:
+     More gallant king ne'er trod that shore."
+      4. OF KING SIGURD'S JOURNEY.
+      In spring King Sigurd and his fleet sailed westward to Valland (A.D.
+      1108), and in autumn came to Galicia, where he stayed the second winter
+      (A.D. 1109). So says Einar Skulason: -
+     "Our king, whose land so wide
+     No kingdom stands beside,
+     In Jacob's land next winter spent,
+     On holy things intent;
+     And I have heard the royal youth
+     Cut off an earl who swerved from truth.
+     Our brave king will endure no ill, -
+     The hawks with him will get their fill."
+      It went thus: -The earl who ruled over the land made an agreement
+      with King Sigurd, that he should provide King Sigurd and his men a market
+      at which they could purchase victuals all the winter; but this he did not
+      fulfil longer than to about Yule. It began then to be difficult to get
+      food and necessaries, for it is a poor barren land. Then King Sigurd with
+      a great body of men went against a castle which belonged to the earl; and
+      the earl fled from it, having but few people. King Sigurd took there a
+      great deal of victuals and of other booty, which he put on board of his
+      ships, and then made ready and proceeded westward to Spain. It so fell
+      out, as the king was sailing past Spain, that some vikings who were
+      cruising for plunder met him with a fleet of galleys, and King Sigurd
+      attacked them. This was his first battle with heathen men; and he won it,
+      and took eight galleys from them. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -
+     "Bold vikings, not slow
+     To the death-fray to go,
+     Meet our Norse king by chance,
+     And their galleys advance.
+     The bold vikings lost
+     Many a man of their host,
+     And eight galleys too,
+     With cargo and crew."
+      Thereafter King Sigurd sailed against a castle called Sintre and fought
+      another battle. This castle is in Spain, and was occupied by many
+      heathens, who from thence plundered Christian people. King Sigurd took the
+      castle, and killed every man in it, because they refused to be baptized;
+      and he got there an immense booty. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -
+     "From Spain I have much news to tell
+     Of what our generous king befell.
+     And first he routs the viking crew,
+     At Cintra next the heathens slew;
+     The men he treated as God's foes,
+     Who dared the true faith to oppose.
+     No man he spared who would not take
+     The Christian faith for Jesus' sake."
+      5. LISBON TAKEN.
+      After this King Sigurd sailed with his fleet to Lisbon, which is a great
+      city in Spain, half Christian and half heathen; for there lies the
+      division between Christian Spain and heathen Spain, and all the districts
+      which lie west of the city are occupied by heathens. There King Sigurd had
+      his third battle with the heathens, and gained the victory, and with it a
+      great booty. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -
+     "The son of kings on Lisbon's plains
+     A third and bloody battle gains.
+     He and his Norsemen boldly land,
+     Running their stout ships on the strand."
+      Then King Sigurd sailed westwards along heathen Spain, and brought up at a
+      town called Alkasse; and here he had his fourth battle with the heathens,
+      and took the town, and killed so many people that the town was left empty.
+      They got there also immense booty. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -
+     "A fourth great battle, I am told,
+     Our Norse king and his people hold
+     At Alkasse; and here again
+     The victory fell to our Norsemen."
+      And also this verse: -
+     "I heard that through the town he went,
+     And heathen widows' wild lament
+     Resounded in the empty halls;
+     For every townsman flies or falls."
+      6. BATTLE IN THE ISLAND FORMINTERRA.
+      King Sigurd then proceeded on his voyage, and came to Norfasund; and in
+      the sound he was met by a large viking force, and the king gave them
+      battle; and this was his fifth engagement with heathens since the time he
+      left Norway. He gained the victory here also. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -
+     "Ye moistened your dry swords with blood,
+     As through Norfasund ye stood;
+     The screaming raven got a feast,
+     As ye sailed onward to the East."
+      King Sigurd then sailed eastward along the coast of Serkland, and came to
+      an island there called Forminterra. There a great many heathen Moors had
+      taken up their dwelling in a cave, and had built a strong stone wall
+      before its mouth. They harried the country all round, and carried all
+      their booty to their cave. King Sigurd landed on this island, and went to
+      the cave; but it lay in a precipice, and there was a high winding path to
+      the stone wall, and the precipice above projected over it. The heathens
+      defended the stone wall, and were not afraid of the Northmen's arms; for
+      they could throw stones, or shoot down upon the Northmen under their feet;
+      neither did the Northmen, under such circumstances, dare to mount up. The
+      heathens took their clothes and other valuable things, carried them out
+      upon the wall, spread them out before the Northmen, shouted, and defied
+      them, and upbraided them as cowards. Then Sigurd fell upon this plan. He
+      had two ship's boats, such as we call barks, drawn up the precipice right
+      above the mouth of the cave; and had thick ropes fastened around the stem,
+      stern, and hull of each. In these boats as many men went as could find
+      room, and then the boats were lowered by the ropes down in front of the
+      mouth of the cave; and the men in the boats shot with stones and missiles
+      into the cave, and the heathens were thus driven from the stone wall. Then
+      Sigurd with his troops climbed up the precipice to the foot of the stone
+      wall, which they succeeded in breaking down, so that they came into the
+      cave. Now the heathens fled within the stone wall that was built across
+      the cave; on which the king ordered large trees to be brought to the cave,
+      made a great pile in the mouth of it, and set fire to the wood. When the
+      fire and smoke got the upper hand, some of the heathens lost their lives
+      in it; some fled; some fell by the hands of the Northmen; and part were
+      killed, part burned; and the Northmen made the greatest booty they had got
+      on all their expeditions. So says Halder Skvaldre: -
+     "Forminterra lay
+     In the victor's way;
+     His ships' stems fly
+     To victory.
+     The bluemen there
+     Must fire bear,
+     And Norsemen's steel
+     At their hearts feel."
+      And also thus: -
+     "'Twas a feat of renown, -
+     The boat lowered down,
+     With a boat's crew brave,
+     In front of the cave;
+     While up the rock scaling,
+     And comrades up trailing,
+     The Norsemen gain,
+     And the bluemen are slain."
+      And also Thorarin Stutfeld says: -
+     "The king's men up the mountain's side
+     Drag two boats from the ocean's tide;
+          The two boats lay,
+          Like hill-wolves grey.
+     Now o'er the rock in ropes they're swinging
+     Well manned, and death to bluemen bringing;
+          They hang before
+          The robber's door."
+      7. OF THE BATTLES OF IVIZA AND MINORCA.
+      Thereafter King Sigurd proceeded on his expedition, and came to an island
+      called Iviza (Ivica), and had there his seventh battle, and gained a
+      victory. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -
+     "His ships at Ivica now ride,
+     The king's, whose fame spreads far and wide;
+     And hear the bearers of the shield
+     Their arms again in battle wield."
+      Thereafter King Sigurd came to an island called Manork (Minorca), and held
+      there his eighth battle with heathen men, and gained the victory. So says
+      Haldor Skvaldre: -
+     "On green Minorca's plains
+     The eighth battle now he gains:
+     Again the heathen foe
+     Falls at the Norse king's blow."
+      8. DUKE ROGER MADE A KING.
+      In spring King Sigurd came to Sicily (A.D. 1109), and remained a long time
+      there. There was then a Duke Roger in Sicily, who received the king
+      kindly, and invited him to a feast. King Sigurd came to it with a great
+      retinue, and was splendidly entertained. Every day Duke Roger stood at the
+      company's table, doing service to the king; but the seventh day of the
+      feast, when the people had come to table, and had wiped their hands, King
+      Sigurd took the duke by the hand, led him up to the high-seat, and saluted
+      him with the title of king; and gave the right that there should be always
+      a king over the dominion of Sicily, although before there had only been
+      earls or dukes over that country.
+      9. OF KING ROGER.
+      King Roger of Sicily was a very great king. He won and subdued all Apulia,
+      and many large islands besides in the Greek sea; and therefore he was
+      called Roger the Great. His son was William, king of Sicily, who for a
+      long time had great hostility with the emperor of Constantinople. King
+      William had three daughters, but no son. One of his daughters he married
+      to the Emperor Henry, a son of the Emperor Frederik; and their son was
+      Frederik, who for a short time after was emperor of Rome. His second
+      daughter was married to the Duke of Kipr. The third daughter, Margaret,
+      was married to the chief of the corsairs; but the Emperor Henry killed
+      both these brothers-in-law. The daughter of Roger the Great, king of
+      Sicily, was married to the Emperor Manuel of Constantinople; and their son
+      was the Emperor Kirjalax.
+      10. KING SIGURD'S EXPEDITION TO PALESTINE.
+      In the summer (A.D. 1110) King Sigurd sailed across the Greek sea to
+      Palestine, and thereupon went up to Jerusalem, where he met Baldwin, king
+      of Palestine. King Baldwin received him particularly well, and rode with
+      him all the way to the river Jordan, and then back to the city of
+      Jerusalem. Einar Skulason speaks thus of it: -
+     "Good reason has the skald to sing
+     The generous temper of the king,
+     Whose sea-cold keel from northern waves
+     Ploughs the blue sea that green isles laves.
+     At Acre scarce were we made fast,
+     In holy ground our anchors cast,
+     When the king made a joyful morn
+     To all who toil with him had borne."
+      And again he made these lines: -
+     "To Jerusalem he came,
+     He who loves war's noble game,
+     (The skald no greater monarch finds
+     Beneath the heaven's wide hall of winds)
+     All sin and evil from him flings
+     In Jordan's wave: for all his sins
+     (Which all must praise) he pardon wins."
+      King Sigurd stayed a long time in the land of Jerusalem (Jorsalaland) in
+      autumn, and in the beginning of winter.
+      11. SIDON TAKEN.
+      King Baldwin made a magnificent feast for King Sigurd and many of his
+      people, and gave him many holy relics. By the orders of King Baldwin and
+      the patriarch, there was taken a splinter off the holy cross; and on this
+      holy relic both made oath, that this wood was of the holy cross upon which
+      God Himself had been tortured. Then this holy relic was given to King
+      Sigurd; with the condition that he, and twelve other men with him, should
+      swear to promote Christianity with all his power, and erect an
+      archbishop's seat in Norway if he could; and also that the cross should be
+      kept where the holy King Olaf reposed, and that he should introduce
+      tithes, and also pay them himself. After this King Sigurd returned to his
+      ships at Acre; and then King Baldwin prepared to go to Syria, to a heathen
+      town called Saet. On this expedition King Sigurd accompanied him, and
+      after the kings had besieged the town some time it surrendered, and they
+      took possession of it, and of a great treasure of money; and their men
+      found other booty. King Sigurd made a present of his share to King
+      Baldwin. So say Haldor Skvaldre: -
+     "He who for wolves provides the feast
+     Seized on the city in the East,
+     The heathen nest; and honour drew,
+     And gold to give, from those he slew."
+      Einar Skulason also tells of it: -
+     "The Norsemen's king, the skalds relate,
+     Has ta'en the heathen town of Saet:
+     The slinging engine with dread noise
+     Gables and roofs with stones destroys.
+     The town wall totters too, -it falls;
+     The Norsemen mount the blackened walls.
+     He who stains red the raven's bill
+     Has won, -the town lies at his will."
+      Thereafter King Sigurd went to his ships and made ready to leave
+      Palestine. They sailed north to the island Cyprus; and King Sigurd stayed
+      there a while, and then went to the Greek country, and came to the land
+      with all his fleet at Engilsnes. Here he lay still for a fortnight,
+      although every day it blew a breeze for going before the wind to the
+      north; but Sigurd would wait a side wind, so that the sails might stretch
+      fore and aft in the ship; for in all his sails there was silk joined in,
+      before and behind in the sail, and neither those before nor those behind
+      the ships could see the slightest appearance of this, if the vessel was
+      before the wind; so they would rather wait a side wind.
+      12. SIGURD'S EXPEDITION TO CONSTANTINOPLE.
+      When King Sigurd sailed into Constantinople, he steered near the land.
+      Over all the land there are burghs, castles, country towns, the one upon
+      the other without interval. There from the land one could see into the
+      bights of the sails; and the sails stood so close beside each other, that
+      they seemed to form one enclosure. All the people turned out to see King
+      Sigurd sailing past. The Emperor Kirjalax had also heard of King Sigurd's
+      expedition, and ordered the city port of Constantinople to be opened,
+      which is called the Gold Tower, through which the emperor rides when he
+      has been long absent from Constantinople, or has made a campaign in which
+      he has been victorious. The emperor had precious cloths spread out from
+      the Gold Tower to Laktjarna, which is the name of the emperor's most
+      splendid hall. King Sigurd ordered his men to ride in great state into the
+      city, and not to regard all the new things they might see; and this they
+      did. King Sigurd and his followers rode with this great splendour into
+      Constantinople, and then came to the magnificent hall, where everything
+      was in the grandest style.
+      King Sigurd remained here some time. The Emperor Kirjalax sent his men to
+      him to ask if he would rather accept from the emperor six lispund of gold,
+      or would have the emperor give the games in his honour which the emperor
+      was used to have played at the Padreim. King Sigurd preferred the games,
+      and the messengers said the spectacle would not cost the emperor less than
+      the money offered. Then the emperor prepared for the games, which were
+      held in the usual way; but this day everything went on better for the king
+      than for the queen; for the queen has always the half part in the games,
+      and their men, therefore, always strive against each other in all games.
+      The Greeks accordingly think that when the king's men win more games at
+      the Padreim than the queen's, the king will gain the victory when he goes
+      into battle. People who have been in Constantinople tell that the Padreim
+      is thus constructed: -A high wall surrounds a flat plain, which may
+      be compared to a round bare Thing-place, with earthen banks all around at
+      the stone wall, on which banks the spectators sit; but the games
+      themselves are in the flat plain. There are many sorts of old events
+      represented concerning the Asas, Volsungs, and Giukungs, in these games;
+      and all the figures are cast in copper, or metal, with so great art that
+      they appear to be living things; and to the people it appears as if they
+      were really present in the games. The games themselves are so artfully and
+      cleverly managed, that people appear to be riding in the air; and at them
+      also are used shot-fire (1), and all kinds of harp-playing, singing, and
+      music instruments.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Fireworks, or the Greek fire, probably were used. -L.
+      13. SIGURD AND THE EMPEROR OF CONSTANTINOPLE.
+      It is related that King Sigurd one day was to give the emperor a feast,
+      and he ordered his men to provide sumptuously all that was necessary for
+      the entertainment; and when all things were provided which are suitable
+      for an entertainment given by a great personage to persons of high
+      dignity, King Sigurd ordered his men to go to the street in the city where
+      firewood was sold, as they would require a great quantity to prepare the
+      feast. They said the king need not be afraid of wanting firewood, for
+      every day many loads were brought into the town. When it was necessary,
+      however, to have firewood, it was found that it was all sold, which they
+      told the king. He replied, "Go and try if you can get walnuts. They will
+      answer as well as wood for fuel." They went and got as many as they
+      needed. Now came the emperor, and his grandees and court, and sat down to
+      table. All was very splendid; and King Sigurd received the emperor with
+      great state, and entertained him magnificently. When the queen and the
+      emperor found that nothing was wanting, she sent some persons to inquire
+      what they had used for firewood; and they came to a house filled with
+      walnuts, and they came back and told the queen. "Truly," said she, "this
+      is a magnificent king, who spares no expense where his honour is
+      concerned." She had contrived this to try what they would do when they
+      could get no firewood to dress their feast with.
+      14. KING SIGURD THE CRUSADER'S RETURN HOME.
+      King Sigurd soon after prepared for his return home. He gave the emperor
+      all his ships; and the valuable figureheads which were on the king's ships
+      were set up in Peter's church, where they have since been to be seen. The
+      emperor gave the king many horses and guides to conduct him through all
+      his dominions. Then King Sigurd left Constantinople; but a great many
+      Northmen remained, and went into the emperor's pay. Then King Sigurd
+      traveled from Bulgaria, and through Hungary, Pannonia. Suabia, and
+      Bavaria, where he met the Roman emperor, Lotharius, who received him in
+      the most friendly way, gave him guides through his dominions, and had
+      markets established for him at which he could purchase all he required.
+      When King Sigurd came to Slesvik in Denmark, Earl Eilif made a sumptuous
+      feast for him; and it was then midsummer. In Heidaby he met the Danish
+      king, Nikolas, who received him in the most friendly way, made a great
+      entertainment for him, accompanied him north to Jutland, and gave him a
+      ship provided with everything needful. From thence the king returned to
+      Norway, and was joyfully welcomed on his return to his kingdom (A.D.
+      1110). It was the common talk among the people, that none had ever made so
+      honourable a journey from Norway as this of King Sigurd. He was twenty
+      years of age, and had been three years on these travels. His brother Olaf
+      was then twelve years old.
+      15. EYSTEIN'S DOINGS IN THE MEANTIME.
+      King Eystein had also effected much in the country that was useful while
+      King Sigurd was on his journey. He established a monastery at Nordnes in
+      Bergen, and endowed it with much property. He also built Michael's church,
+      which is a very splendid stone temple. In the king's house there he also
+      built the Church of the Apostles, and the great hall, which is the most
+      magnificent wooden structure that was ever built in Norway. He also built
+      a church at Agdanes with a parapet; and a harbour, where formerly there
+      had been a barren spot only. In Nidaros he built in the king's street the
+      church of Saint Nikolas, which was particularly ornamented with carved
+      work, and all in wood. He also built a church north in Vagar in
+      Halogaland, and endowed it with property and revenues.
+      16. OF KING EYSTEIN.
+      King Eystein sent a verbal message to the most intelligent and powerful of
+      the men of Jamtaland, and invited them to him; received them all as they
+      came with great kindness; accompanied them part of the way home, and gave
+      them presents, and thus enticed them into a friendship with him. Now as
+      many of them became accustomed to visit him and receive gifts from him,
+      and he also sent gifts to some who did not come themselves, he soon gained
+      the favour of all the people who had most influence in the country. Then
+      he spoke to the Jamtaland people, and told them they had done ill in
+      turning away from the kings of Norway, and withdrawing from them their
+      taxes and allegiance. He began by saying how the Jamtaland people had
+      submitted to the reign of Hakon, the foster-son of Athelstane, and had
+      long afterwards been subjected to the kings of Norway, and he represented
+      to them how many useful things they could get from Norway, and how
+      inconvenient it was for them to apply to the Swedish king for what they
+      needed. By these speeches he brought matters so far that the Jamtaland
+      people of their own accord offered to be subject to him, which they said
+      was useful and necessary for them; and thus, on both sides, it was agreed
+      that the Jamtalanders should put their whole country under King Eystein.
+      The first beginning was with the men of consequence, who persuaded the
+      people to take an oath of fidelity to King Eystein; and then they went to
+      King Eystein and confirmed the country to him by oath; and this
+      arrangement has since continued for a long time. King Eystein thus
+      conquered Jamtaland by his wisdom, and not by hostile inroads, as some of
+      his forefathers had done.
+      17. OF KING EYSTEIN'S PERFECTIONS.
+      King Eystein was the handsomest man that could be seen. He had blue open
+      eyes; his hair yellow and curling; his stature not tall, but of the middle
+      size. He was wise, intelligent, and acquainted with the laws and history.
+      He had much knowledge of mankind, was quick in counsel, prudent in words,
+      and very eloquent and very generous. He was very merry, yet modest; and
+      was liked and beloved, indeed, by all the people. He was married to
+      Ingebjorg, a daughter of Guthorm, son of Thorer of Steig; and their
+      daughter was Maria, who afterwards married Gudbrand Skafhogson.
+      18. OF IVAR INGIMUNDSON.
+      King Eystein had in many ways improved the laws and priveleges of the
+      country people, and kept strictly to the laws; and he made himself
+      acquainted with all the laws of Norway, and showed in everything great
+      prudence and understanding. What a valuable man King Eystein was, how full
+      of friendship, and how much he turned his mind to examining and avoiding
+      everything that could be of disadvantage to his friends, may be seen from
+      his friendship to an Iceland man called Ivar Ingimundson. The man was
+      witty, of great family, and also a poet. The king saw that Ivar was out of
+      spirits, and asked him why he was so melancholy. "Before, when thou wast
+      with us, we had much amusement with thy conversation. I know thou art a
+      man of too good an understanding to believe that I would do anything
+      against thee. Tell me then what it is."
+      He replied, "I cannot tell thee what it is."
+      Then said the king, "I will try to guess what it is. Are there any men who
+      displease thee?"
+      To this he replied, "No."
+      "Dost thou think thou art held in less esteem by me than thou wouldst like
+      to be?"
+      To this he also replied, "No."
+      "Hast thou observed anything whatever that has made an impression on thee
+      at which thou art ill pleased?"
+      He replied, it was not this either.
+      The king: "Would you like to go to other chiefs or to other men?"
+      To this he answered, "No."
+      The king: "It is difficult now to guess. Is there any girl here, or in any
+      other country, to whom thy affections are engaged?"
+      He said it was so.
+      The king said, "Do not be melancholy on that account. Go to Iceland when
+      spring sets in, and I shall give thee money, and presents, and with these
+      my letters and seal to the men who have the principal sway there; and I
+      know no man there who will not obey my persuasions or threats."
+      Ivar replied, "My fate is heavier, sire; for my own brother has the girl."
+      Then said the king, "Throw it out of thy mind; and I know a counsel
+      against this. After Yule I will travel in guest-quarters. Thou shalt come
+      along with me, and thou will have an opportunity of seeing many beautiful
+      girls; and, provided they are not of the royal stock, I will get thee one
+      of them in marriage."
+      Ivar replies, "Sire, my fate is still the heavier; for as oft as I see
+      beautiful and excellent girls I only remember the more that girl, and they
+      increase my misery."
+      The king: "Then I will give thee property to manage, and estates for thy
+      amusement."
+      He replied, "For that I have no desire."
+      The king: "Then I will give thee money, that thou mayest travel in other
+      countries."
+      He said he did not wish this.
+      Then said the king, "It is difficult for me to seek farther, for I have
+      proposed everything that occurs to me. There is but one thing else; and
+      that is but little compared to what I have offered thee. Come to me every
+      day after the tables are removed, and, if I am not sitting upon important
+      business, I shall talk with thee about the girl in every way that I can
+      think of; and I shall do so at leisure. It sometimes happens that sorrow
+      is lightened by being brought out openly; and thou shalt never go away
+      without some gift."
+      He replied, "This I will do, sire, and return thanks for this inquiry."
+      And now they did so constantly; and when the king was not occupied with
+      weightier affairs he talked with him, and his sorrow by degrees wore away,
+      and he was again in good spirits.
+      19. OF KING SIGURD.
+      King Sigurd was a stout and strong man, with brown hair; of a manly
+      appearance, but not handsome; well grown; of little speech, and often not
+      friendly, but good to his friends, and faithful; not very eloquent, but
+      moral and polite. King Sigurd was self-willed, and severe in his revenge;
+      strict in observing the law; was generous; and withal an able, powerful
+      king. His brother Olaf was a tall, thin man; handsome in countenance;
+      lively, modest, and popular. When all these brothers, Eystein, Sigurd and
+      Olaf were kings of Norway, they did away with many burthens which the
+      Danes had laid upon the people in the time that Svein Alfifason ruled
+      Norway; and on this account they were much beloved, both by the people and
+      the great men of the country.
+      20. OF KING SIGURD'S DREAM.
+      Once King Sigurd fell into low spirits, so that few could get him to
+      converse, and he sat but a short time at the drinking table. This was
+      heavy on his counsellors, friends, and court; and they begged King Eystein
+      to consider how they could discover the cause why the people who came to
+      the king could get no reply to what they laid before him. King Eystein
+      answered them, that it was difficult to speak with the king about this;
+      but at last, on the entreaty of many, he promised to do it. Once, when
+      they were both together, King Eystein brought the matter before his
+      brother, and asked the cause of his melancholy. "It is a great grief,
+      sire, to many to see thee so melancholy; and we would like to know what
+      has occasioned it, or if perchance thou hast heard any news of great
+      weight?"
+      King Sigurd replies, that it was not so.
+      "Is it then, brother," says King Eystein, "that you would like to travel
+      out of the country, and augment your dominions as our father did?"
+      He answered, that it was not that either.
+      "Is it, then, that any man here in the country has offended?"
+      To this also the king said "No."
+      "Then I would like to know if you have dreamt anything that has occasioned
+      this depression of mind?"
+      The king answered that it was so.
+      "Tell me, then, brother, thy dream."
+      King Sigurd said, "I will not tell it, unless thou interpret it as it may
+      turn out; and I shall be quick at perceiving if thy interpretation be
+      right or not."
+      King Eystein replies, "This is a very difficult matter, sire, on both
+      sides; as I am exposed to thy anger if I cannot interpret it, and to the
+      blame of the public if I can do nothing in the matter; but I will rather
+      fall under your displeasure, even if my interpretation should not be
+      agreeable."
+      King Sigurd replies, "It appeared to me, in a dream, as if we brothers
+      were all sitting on a bench in front of Christ church in Throndhjem; and
+      it appeared to me as if our relative, King Olaf the Saint, came out of the
+      church adorned with the royal raiment glancing and splendid, and with the
+      most delightful and joyful countenance. He went to our brother King Olaf,
+      took him by the hand, and said cheerfully, to him, 'Come with me, friend.'
+      On which he appeared to stand up and go into the church. Soon after King
+      Olaf the Saint came out of the church, but not so gay and brilliant as
+      before. Now he went to thee, brother, and said to thee that thou shouldst
+      go with him; on which he led thee with him, and ye went into the church.
+      Then I thought, and waited for it, that he would come to me, and meet me;
+      but it was not so. Then I was seized with great sorrow, and great dread
+      and anxiety fell upon me, so that I was altogether without strength; and
+      then I awoke."
+      King Eystein replies, "Thus I interpret your dream, sire, -That the
+      bench betokens the kingdom we brothers have; and as you thought King Olaf
+      came with so glad a countenance to our brother, King Olaf, he will likely
+      live the shortest time of us brothers, and have all good to expect
+      hereafter; for he is amiable, young in years, and has gone but little into
+      excess, and King Olaf the Saint must help him. But as you thought he came
+      towards me, but not with so much joy, I may possibly live a few years
+      longer, but not become old, and I trust his providence will stand over me;
+      but that he did not come to me with the same splendour and glory as to our
+      brother Olaf, that will be because, in many ways, I have sinned and
+      transgressed his command. If he delayed coming to thee, I think that in no
+      way betokens thy death, but rather a long life; but it may be that some
+      heavy accident may occur to thee, as there was an unaccountable dread
+      overpowering thee; but I foretell that thou will be the oldest of us, and
+      wilt rule the kingdom longest."
+      Then said Sigurd, "This is well and intelligently interpreted, and it is
+      likely it will be so." And now the king began to be cheerful again.
+      21. OF KING SIGURD'S MARRIAGE.
+      King Sigurd married Malmfrid, a daughter of King Harald Valdemarson,
+      eastward in Novgorod. King Harald Valdemarson's mother was Queen Gyda the
+      Old, a daughter of the Swedish king, Inge Steinkelson. Harald
+      Valdemarson's other daughter, sister to Malmfrid, was Ingebjorg, who was
+      married to Canute Lavard, a son of the Danish king, Eirik the Good, and
+      grandson of King Svein Ulfson. Canute's and Ingebjorg's children were, the
+      Danish king, Valdemar, who came to the Danish kingdom after Svein
+      Eirikson; and daughters Margaret, Christina, and Catherine. Margaret was
+      married to Stig Hvitaled; and their daughter was Christina, married to the
+      Swedish king, Karl Sorkvison, and their son was King Sorkver.
+      22. OF THE CASES BEFORE THE THING.
+      The king's relative, Sigurd Hranason, came into strife with King Sigurd.
+      He had had the Lapland collectorship on the king's account, because of
+      their relationship and long friendship, and also of the many services
+      Sigurd Hranason had done to the kings; for he was a very distinguished,
+      popular man. But it happened to him, as it often does to others, that
+      persons more wicked and jealous than upright slandered him to King Sigurd,
+      and whispered in the king's ear that he took more of the Laplander's
+      tribute to himself than was proper. They spoke so long about this, that
+      King Sigurd conceived a dislike and anger to him, and sent a message to
+      him. When he appeared before the king, the king carried these feelings
+      with him, and said, "I did not expect that thou shouldst have repaid me
+      for thy great fiefs and other dignities by taking the king's property, and
+      abstracting a greater portion of it than is allowable."
+      Sigurd Hranason replies, "It is not true that has been told you; for I
+      have only taken such portion as I had your permission to take."
+      King Sigurd replies, "Thou shalt not slip away with this; but the matter
+      shall be seriously treated before it comes to an end." With that they
+      parted.
+      Soon after, by the advice of his friends, the king laid an action against
+      Sigurd Hranason at the Thing-meeting in Bergen, and would have him made an
+      outlaw. Now when the business took this turn, and appeared so dangerous,
+      Sigurd Hranason went to King Eystein, and told him what mischief King
+      Sigurd intended to do him, and entreated his assistance. King Eystein
+      replied, "This is a difficult matter that you propose to me, to speak
+      against my brother; and there is a great difference between defending a
+      cause and pursuing it in law;" and added, that this was a matter which
+      concerned him and Sigurd equally. "But for thy distress, and our
+      relationship, I shall bring in a word for thee."
+      Soon after Eystein visited King Sigurd, and entreated him to spare the
+      man, reminding him of the relationship between them and Sigurd Hranason,
+      who was married to their aunt, Skialdvor; and said he would pay the
+      penalty for the crime committed against the king, although he could not
+      with truth impute any blame to him in the matter. Besides, he reminded the
+      king of the long friendship with Sigurd Hranason. King Sigurd replied,
+      that it was better government to punish such acts. Then King Eystein
+      replied, "If thou, brother, wilt follow the law, and punish such acts
+      according to the country's privileges, then it would be most correct that
+      Sigurd Hranason produce his witnesses, and that the case be judged at the
+      Thing, but not at a meeting; for the case comes under the law of the land,
+      not under Bjarkey law." Then said Sigurd, "It may possibly be so that the
+      case belongs to it, as thou sayest, King Eystein; and if it be against law
+      what has hitherto been done in this case, then we shall bring it before
+      the Thing." Then the kings parted, and each seemed determined to take his
+      own way. King Sigurd summoned the parties in the case before the Arnarnes
+      Thing, and intended to pursue it there. King Eystein came also to the
+      Thing-place; and when the case was brought forward for judgment, King
+      Eystein went to the Thing before judgment was given upon Sigurd Hranason.
+      Now King Sigurd told the lagmen to pronounce the judgment; but King
+      Eystein replied thus: "I trust there are here men acquainted sufficiently
+      with the laws of Norway, to know that they cannot condemn a lendermen to
+      be outlawed at this Thing." And he then explained how the law was, so that
+      every man clearly understood it. Then said King Sigurd, "Thou art taking
+      up this matter very warmly, King Eystein, and it is likely the case will
+      cost more trouble before it comes to an end than we intended; but
+      nevertheless we shall follow it out. I will have him condemned to be
+      outlawed in his native place." Then said King Eystein, "There are
+      certainly not many things which do not succeed with thee, and especially
+      when there are but few and small folks to oppose one who has carried
+      through such great things." And thus they parted, without anything being
+      concluded in the case. Thereafter King Sigurd called together a Gula
+      Thing, went himself there, and summoned to him many high chiefs. King
+      Eystein came there also with his suite; and many meetings and conferences
+      were held among people of understanding concerning this case, and it was
+      tried and examined before the lagmen. Now King Eystein objected that all
+      the parties summoned in any cases tried here belonged to the
+      Thing-district; but in this case the deed and the parties belonged to
+      Halogaland. The Thing accordingly ended in doing nothing, as King Eystein
+      had thus made it incompetent. The kings parted in great wrath; and King
+      Eystein went north to Throndhjem. King Sigurd, on the other hand, summoned
+      to him all lendermen, and also the house-servants of the lendermen, and
+      named out of every district a number of the bondes from the south parts of
+      the country, so that he had collected a large army about him; and
+      proceeded with all this crowd northwards along the coast to Halogaland,
+      and intended to use all his power to make Sigurd Hranason an outlaw among
+      his own relations. For this purpose he summoned to him the Halogaland and
+      Naumudal people, and appointed a Thing at Hrafnista. King Eystein prepared
+      himself also, and proceeded with many people from the town of Nidaros to
+      the Thing, where he made Sigurd Hranason, by hand-shake before witnesses,
+      deliver over to him the following and defending this case. At this Thing
+      both the kings spoke, each for his own side. Then King Eystein asks the
+      lagmen where that law was made in Norway which gave the bondes the right
+      to judge between the kings of the country, when they had pleas with each
+      other. "I shall bring witnesses to prove that Sigurd has given the case
+      into my hands; and it is with me, not with Sigurd Hranason, that King
+      Sigurd has to do in this case." The lagmen said that disputes between
+      kings must be judged only at the Eyra Thing in Nidaros.
+      King Eystein said, "So I thought that it should be there, and the cases
+      must be removed there."
+      Then King Sigurd said, "The more difficulties and inconvenience thou
+      bringest upon me in this matter, the more I will persevere in it." And
+      with that they parted.
+      Both kings then went south to Nidaros town, where they summoned a Thing
+      from eight districts. King Eystein was in the town with a great many
+      people, but Sigurd was on board his ships. When the Thing was opened,
+      peace and safe conduct was given to all; and when the people were all
+      collected, and the case should be gone into, Bergthor, a son of Svein
+      Bryggjufot, stood up, and gave his evidence that Sigurd Hranason had
+      concealed a part of the Laplanders' taxes.
+      Then King Eystein stood up and said, "If thy accusation were true,
+      although we do not know what truth there may be in thy testimony, yet this
+      case has already been dismissed from three Things, and a fourth time from
+      a town meeting; and therefore I require that the lagmen acquit Sigurd in
+      this case according to law." And they did so.
+      Then said King Sigurd, "I see sufficiently, King Eystein, that thou hast
+      carried this case by law-quirks (1), which I do not understand. But now
+      there remains, King Eystein, a way of determining the case which I am more
+      used to, and which I shall now apply."
+      He then retired to his ships, had the tents taken down, laid his whole
+      fleet out at the holm, and held a Thing of his people; and told them that
+      early in the morning they should land at Iluvellir, and give battle to
+      King Eystein. But in the evening, as King Sigurd sat at his table in his
+      ship taking his repast, before he was aware of it a man cast himself on
+      the floor of the forehold, and at the king's feet. This was Sigurd
+      Hranason, who begged the king to take what course with regard to him the
+      king himself thought proper. Then came Bishop Magne and Queen Malmfrid,
+      and many other great personages, and entreated forgiveness for Sigurd
+      Hranason; and at their entreaty the king raised him up, took him by the
+      hand, and placed him among his men, and took him along with himself to the
+      south part of the country. In autumn the king gave Sigurd Hranason leave
+      to go north to his farm, gave him an employment, and was always afterward
+      his friend. After this day, however, the brothers were never much
+      together, and there was no cordiality or cheerfulness among them.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) These law-quirks show a singularly advanced state of law.
+     and deference to the Law Things, amidst such social disorder
+     and misdeeds. -L.
+      23. OF KING OLAF'S DEATH.
+      King Olaf Magnuson fell into a sickness which ended in his death. He was
+      buried in Christ church in Nidaros, and many were in great grief at his
+      death. After Olaf's death, Eystein and Sigurd ruled the country, the three
+      brothers together having been kings of Norway for twelve years (A.D.
+      1104-1115); namely, five years after King Sigurd returned home, and seven
+      years before. King Olaf was seventeen years old when he died, and it
+      happened on the 24th of December.
+      24. MAGNUS THE BLIND; HIS BIRTH.
+      King Eystein had been about a year in the east part of the country at that
+      time, and King Sigurd was then in the north. King Eystein remained a long
+      time that winter in Sarpsborg. There was once a powerful and rich bonde
+      called Olaf of Dal, who dwelt in Great Dal in Aumord, and had two
+      children, -a son called Hakon Fauk, and a daughter called Borghild,
+      who was a very beautiful girl, and prudent, and well skilled in many
+      things. Olaf and his children were a long time in winter in Sarpsborg, and
+      Borghild conversed very often with King Eystein; so that many reports were
+      spread about their friendship. The following summer King Eystein went
+      north, and King Sigurd came eastward, where he remained all winter, and
+      was long in Konungahella, which town he greatly enlarged and improved. He
+      built there a great castle of turf and stone, dug a great ditch around it,
+      and built a church and several houses within the castle. The holy cross he
+      allowed to remain at Konungahella, and therein did not fulfill the oath he
+      had taken in Palestine; but, on the other hand, he established tithe, and
+      most of the other things to which he had bound himself by oath. The reason
+      of his keeping the cross east at the frontier of the country was, that he
+      thought it would be a protection to all the land; but it proved the
+      greatest misfortune to place this relic within the power of the heathens,
+      as it afterwards turned out.
+      When Borghild, Olaf's daughter, heard it whispered that people talked ill
+      of her conversations and intimacy with King Eystein, she went to
+      Sarpsborg; and after suitable fasts she carried the iron as proof of her
+      innocence, and cleared herself thereby fully from all offence. When King
+      Sigurd heard this, he rode one day as far as usually was two days'
+      travelling, and came to Dal to Olaf, where he remained all night, made
+      Borghild his concubine, and took her away with him. They had a son, who
+      was called Magnus, and he was sent immediately to Halogaland, to be
+      fostered at Bjarkey by Vidkun Jonson; and he was brought up there. Magnus
+      grew up to be the handsomest man that could be seen, and was very soon
+      stout and strong.
+      25. COMPARISON BETWEEN THE TWO KINGS.
+      King Eystein and King Sigurd went both in spring to guest-quarters in the
+      Uplands; and each was entertained in a separate house, and the houses were
+      not very distant from each other. The bondes, however, thought it more
+      convenient that both should be entertained together by turns in each
+      house; and thus they were both at first in the house of King Eystein. But
+      in the evening, when the people began to drink, the ale was not good; so
+      that the guests were very quiet and still. Then said King Eystein, "Why
+      are the people so silent? It is more usual in drinking parties that people
+      are merry, so let us fall upon some jest over our ale that will amuse
+      people; for surely, brother Sigurd, all people are well pleased when we
+      talk cheerfully."
+      Sigurd replies, bluntly, "Do you talk as much as you please, but give me
+      leave to be silent."
+      Eystein says, "It is a common custom over the ale-table to compare one
+      person with another, and now let us do so." Then Sigurd was silent.
+      "I see," says King Eystein, "that I must begin this amusement. Now I will
+      take thee, brother, to compare myself with, and will make it appear so as
+      if we had both equal reputation and property, and that there is no
+      difference in our birth and education."
+      Then King Sigurd replies, "Do you remember that I was always able to throw
+      you when we wrestled, although you are a year older?"
+      Then King Eystein replied, "But I remember that you was not so good at the
+      games which require agility."
+      Sigurd: "Do you remember that I could drag you under water, when we swam
+      together, as often as I pleased?"
+      Eystein: "But I could swim as far as you, and could dive as well as you;
+      and I could run upon snow-skates so well that nobody could beat me, and
+      you could no more do it than an ox."
+      Sigurd: "Methinks it is a more useful and suitable accomplishment for a
+      chief to be expert at his bow; and I think you could scarcely draw my bow,
+      even if you took your foot to help."
+      Eystein: "I am not strong at the bow as you are, but there is less
+      difference between our shooting near; and I can use the skees much better
+      than you, and in former times that was held a great accomplishment."
+      Sigurd: "It appears to me much better for a chief who is to be the
+      superior of other men, that he is conspicuous in a crowd, and strong and
+      powerful in weapons above other men; easily seen, and easily known, where
+      there are many together."
+      Eystein: "It is not less a distinction and an ornament that a man is of a
+      handsome appearance, so as to be easily known from others on that account;
+      and this appears to me to suit a chief best, because the best ornament is
+      allied to beauty. I am moreover more knowing in the law than you, and on
+      every subject my words flow more easily than yours."
+      Sigurd: "It may be that you know more law-quirks, for I have had something
+      else to do; neither will any deny you a smooth tongue. But there are many
+      who say that your words are not to be trusted; that what you promise is
+      little to be regarded; and that you talk just according to what those who
+      are about you say, which is not kingly."
+      Eystein: "This is because, when people bring their cases before me, I wish
+      first to give every man that satisfaction in his affairs which he desires;
+      but afterwards comes the opposite party, and then there is something to be
+      given or taken away very often, in order to mediate between them, so that
+      both may be satisfied. It often happens, too, that I promise whatever is
+      desired of me, that all may be joyful about me. It would be an easy matter
+      for me to do as you do, -to promise evil to all; and I never hear any
+      complain of your not keeping this promise to them."
+      Sigurd: "It is the conversation of all that the expedition that I made out
+      of the country was a princely expedition, while you in the meantime sat at
+      home like your father's daughter."
+      Eystein: "Now you touched the tender spot. I would not have brought up
+      this conversation if I had not known what to reply on this point. I can
+      truly say that I equipt you from home like a sister, before you went upon
+      this expedition."
+      Sigurd: "You must have heard that on this expedition I was in many a
+      battle in the Saracen's land, and gained the victory in all; and you must
+      have heard of the many valuable articles I acquired, the like of which
+      were never seen before in this country, and I was the most respected
+      wherever the most gallant men were; and, on the other hand, you cannot
+      conceal that you have only a home-bred reputation."
+      Eystein: "I have heard that you had several battles abroad, but it was
+      more useful for the country what I was doing in the meantime here at home.
+      I built five churches from the foundations, and a harbour out at Agdanes,
+      where it before was impossible to land, and where vessels ply north and
+      south along the coast. I set a warping post and iron ring in the sound of
+      Sinholm, and in Bergen I built a royal hall, while you were killing
+      bluemen for the devil in Serkland. This, I think, was of but little
+      advantage to our kingdom."
+      King Sigurd said: "On this expedition I went all the way to Jordan and
+      swam across the river. On the edge of the river there is a bush of
+      willows, and there I twisted a knot of willows, and said this knot thou
+      shouldst untie, brother, or take the curse thereto attached."
+      King Eystein said: "I shall not go and untie the knot which you tied for
+      me; but if I had been inclined to tie a knot for thee, thou wouldst not
+      have been king of Norway at thy return to this country, when with a single
+      ship you came sailing into my fleet."
+      Thereupon both were silent, and there was anger on both sides. More things
+      passed between the brothers, from which it appeared that each of them
+      would be greater than the other; however, peace was preserved between them
+      as long as they lived.
+      26. OF KING SIGURD'S SICKNESS.
+      King Sigurd was at a feast in the Upland, and a bath was made ready for
+      him. When the king came to the bath and the tent was raised over the
+      bathing-tub, the king thought there was a fish in the tub beside him; and
+      a great laughter came upon him, so that he was beside himself, and was out
+      of his mind, and often afterwards these fits returned.
+      Magnus Barefoot's daughter, Ragnhild, was married by her brothers to
+      Harald Kesia, a son of the Danish king, Eirik the Good; and their sons
+      were Magnus, Olaf, Knut and Harald.
+      27. OF KING EYSTEIN'S DEATH.
+      King Eystein built a large ship at Nidaros, which, in size and shape, was
+      like the Long Serpent which King Olaf Trygvason had built. At the stem
+      there was a dragon's head, and at the stern a crooked tail, and both were
+      gilded over. The ship was high-sided; but the fore and aft parts appeared
+      less than they should be. He also made in Nidaros many and large dry-docks
+      of the best material, and well timbered.
+      Six years after King Olaf's death, it happened that King Eystein, at a
+      feast at Hustadir in Stim, was seized with an illness which soon carried
+      him off. He died the 29th of August, 1123, and his body was carried north
+      to Nidaros, and buried in Christ church; and it is generally said that so
+      many mourners never stood over any man's grave in Norway as over King
+      Eystein's, at least since the time Magnus the Good, Saint Olaf's son,
+      died. Eystein had been twenty years (A.D. 1104-1123) king of Norway; and
+      after his decease his brother, King Sigurd, was the sole king of Norway as
+      long as he lived.
+      28. BAPTIZING THE PEOPLE OF SMALAND.
+      The Danish king, Nikolas, a son of Svein Ulfson, married afterwards the
+      Queen Margaret, a daughter of King Inge, who had before been married to
+      King Magnus Barefoot; and their sons were Nikolas and Magnus the Strong.
+      King Nikolas sent a message to King Sigurd the Crusader, and asked him if
+      he would go with him with all his might and help him to the east of the
+      Swedish dominion, Smaland, to baptize the inhabitants; for the people who
+      dwelt there had no regard for Christianity, although some of them had
+      allowed themselves to be baptized. At that time there were many people all
+      around in the Swedish dominions who were heathens, and many were bad
+      Christians; for there were some of the kings who renounced Christianity,
+      and continued heathen sacrifices, as Blotsvein, and afterwards Eirik
+      Arsale, had done. King Sigurd promised to undertake this journey, and the
+      kings appointed their meeting at Eyrarsund. King Sigurd then summoned all
+      people in Norway to a levy, both of men and ships; and when the fleet was
+      assembled he had about 300 ships. King Nikolas came very early to the
+      meeting-place, and stayed there a long time; and the bondes murmured much,
+      and said the Northmen did not intend to come. Thereupon the Danish army
+      dispersed, and the king went away with all his fleet. King Sigurd came
+      there soon afterwards, and was ill pleased; but sailed east to Svimraros,
+      and held a House-thing, at which Sigurd spoke about King Nikolas's breach
+      of faith, and the Northmen, on this account, determined to go marauding in
+      his country. They first plundered a village called Tumathorp, which is not
+      far from Lund; and then sailed east to the merchant-town of Calmar, where
+      they plundered, as well as in Smaland, and imposed on the country a
+      tribute of 1500 cattle for ship provision; and the people of Smaland
+      received Christianity. After this King Sigurd turned about with his fleet,
+      and came back to his kingdom with many valuable articles and great booty,
+      which he had gathered on this expedition; and this levy was called the
+      Calmar levy. This was the summer before the eclipse. This was the only
+      levy King Sigurd carried out as long as he was king.
+      29. OF THORARIN STUTFELD.
+      It happened once when King Sigurd was going from the drinking-table to
+      vespers, that his men were very drunk and merry; and many of them sat
+      outside the church singing the evening song, but their singing was very
+      irregular. Then the king said, "Who is that fellow I see standing at the
+      church with a skin jacket on?" They answered, that they did not know. Then
+      the king said: -
+     "This skin-clad man, in sorry plight,
+     Puts all our wisdom here to flight."
+      Then the fellow came forward and said: -
+     "I thought that here I might be known,
+     Although my dress is scanty grown.
+     'Tis poor, but I must be content:
+     Unless, great king, it's thy intent
+     To give me better; for I have seen
+     When I and rags had strangers been."
+      The king answered, "Come to me to-morrow when I am at the drink-table."
+      The night passed away; and the morning after the Icelander, who was
+      afterwards called Thorarin Stutfetd, went into the drinking-room. A man
+      stood outside of the door of the room with a horn in his hand, and said,
+      "Icelander! the king says that if thou wilt deserve any gift from him thou
+      shalt compose a song before going in, and make it about a man whose name
+      is Hakon Serkson, and who is called Morstrut (1); and speak about that
+      surname in thy song." The man who spoke to him was called Arne Fioruskeif.
+      Then they went into the room; and when Thorarin came before the king's
+      seat he recited these verses: -
+     "Throndhjem's warrior-king has said
+     The skald should be by gifts repaid,
+     If he before this meeting gave
+     The king's friend Serk a passing stave.
+     The generous king has let me know
+     My stave, to please, must be framed so
+     That my poor verse extol the fame
+     Of one called Hakon Lump by name."
+      Then said the king, "I never said so, and somebody has been making a mock
+      of thee. Hakon himself shall determine what punishment thou shalt have. Go
+      into his suite." Hakon said, "He shall be welcome among us, for I can see
+      where the joke came from;" and he placed the Icelander at his side next to
+      himself, and they were very merry. The day was drawing to a close, and the
+      liquor began to get into their heads, when Hakon said, "Dost thou not
+      think, Icelander, that thou owest me some penalty? and dost thou not see
+      that some trick has been played upon thee?"
+      Thorarin replies, "It is true, indeed, that I owe thee some compensation."
+      Hakon says, "Then we shall be quits, if thou wilt make me another stave
+      about Arne."
+      He said he was ready to do so; and they crossed over to the side of the
+      room where Arne was sitting, and Thorarin gave these verses: -
+     "Fioruskeif has often spread,
+     With evil heart and idle head,
+     The eagle's voidings round the land,
+     Lampoons and lies, with ready hand.
+     Yet this landlouper we all know,
+     In Africa scarce fed a crow,
+     Of all his arms used in the field,
+     Those in most use were helm and shield."
+      Arne sprang up instantly, drew his sword, and was going to fall upon him;
+      but Hakon told him to let it alone and be quiet, and bade him remember
+      that if it came to a quarrel he would come off the worst himself. Thorarin
+      afterwards went up to the king, and said he had composed a poem which he
+      wished the king to hear. The king consented, and the song is known by the
+      name of the Stutfeld poem. The king asked Thorarin what he intended to do.
+      He replied, it was his intention to go to Rome. Then the king gave him
+      much money for his pilgrimage, and told him to visit him on his return,
+      and promised to provide for him.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Morstrut is a short, fat, punchy fellow. -L.
+      30. OF SIGURD AND OTTAR BIRTING.
+      It is told that King Sigurd, one Whitsunday, sat at table with many
+      people, among whom were many of his friends; and when he came to his
+      high-seat, people saw that his countenance was very wild, and as if he had
+      been weeping, so that people were afraid of what might follow. The king
+      rolled his eyes, and looked at those who were seated on the benches. Then
+      he seized the holy book which he had brought with him from abroad, and
+      which was written all over with gilded letters; so that never had such a
+      costly book come to Norway. His queen sat by his side. Then said King
+      Sigurd, "Many are the changes which may take place during a man's
+      lifetime. I had two things which were dear to me above all when I came
+      from abroad, and these were this book and the queen; and now I think the
+      one is only worse and more loathsome than the other, and nothing I have
+      belonging to me that I more detest. The queen does not know herself how
+      hideous she is; for a goat's horn is standing out on her head, and the
+      better I liked her before the worse I like her now." Thereupon he cast the
+      book on the fire which was burning on the hall-floor, and gave the queen a
+      blow with his fist between the eyes. The queen wept; but more at the
+      king's' illness than at the blow, or the affront she had suffered.
+      Then a man stood up before the king; his name was Ottar Birting; and he
+      was one of the torch-bearers, although a bonde's son, and was on service
+      that day. He was of small stature, but of agreeable appearance; lively,
+      bold, and full of fun; black haired, and of a dark skin. He ran and
+      snatched the book which the king had cast into the fire, held it out, and
+      said, "Different were the days, sire, when you came with great state and
+      splendour to Norway, and with great fame and honour; for then all your
+      friends came to meet you with joy, and were glad at your coming. All as
+      one man would have you for king, and have you in the highest regard and
+      honour. But now days of sorrow are come over us; for on this holy festival
+      many of your friends have come to you, and cannot be cheerful on account
+      of your melancholy and ill health. It is much to be desired that you would
+      be merry with them; and do, good king, take this saving advice, make peace
+      first with the queen, and make her joyful whom you have so highly
+      affronted, with a friendly word; and then all your chiefs, friends, and
+      servants; that is my advice."
+      Then said King Sigurd, "Dost thou dare to give me advice, thou great lump
+      of a houseman's lad!" And he sprang up, drew his sword, and swung it with
+      both hands as if going to cut him down.
+      But Ottar stood quiet and upright; did not stir from the spot, nor show
+      the slightest sign of fear; and the king turned round the sword-blade
+      which he had waved over Ottar's head, and gently touched him on the
+      shoulder with it. Then he sat down in silence on his high-seat.
+      All were silent who were in the hall, for nobody dared to say a word. Now
+      the king looked around him, milder than before, and said, "It is difficult
+      to know what there is in people. Here sat my friends, and lendermen,
+      marshals and shield-bearers, and all the best men in the land; but none
+      did so well against me as this man, who appears to you of little worth
+      compared to any of you, although now he loves me most. I came here like a
+      madman, and would have destroyed my precious property; but he turned aside
+      my deed, and was not afraid of death for it. Then he made an able speech,
+      ordering his words so that they were honourable to me, and not saying a
+      single word about things which could increase my vexation; but even
+      avoiding what might, with truth, have been said. So excellent was his
+      speech, that no man here, however great his understanding, could have
+      spoken better. Then I sprang up in a pretended rage, and made as if I
+      would have cut him down; but he was courageous as if he had nothing to
+      fear; and seeing that, I let go my purpose; for he was altogether
+      innocent. Now ye shall know, my friends, how I intend to reward him; he
+      was before my torchbearer, and shall now be my lenderman; and there shall
+      follow what is still more, that he shall be the most distinguished of my
+      lendermen. Go thou and sit among the lendermen, and be a servant no
+      longer."
+      Ottar became one of the most celebrated men in Norway for various good and
+      praiseworthy deeds.
+      31. OF KING SIGURD'S DREAM.
+      In King Sigurd's latter days he was once at an entertainment at one of his
+      farms; and in the morning when he was dressed he was silent and still, so
+      that his friends were afraid he was not able to govern himself. Now the
+      farm bailiff, who was a man of good sense and courage, brought him into
+      conversation, and asked if he had heard any news of such importance that
+      it disturbed his mirth; or if the entertainment had not satisfied him; or
+      if there was anything else that people could remedy.
+      King Sigurd said, that none of the things he had mentioned was the cause.
+      "But it is that I think upon the dream I had in the night."
+      "Sire," replied he, "may it prove a lucky dream! I would gladly hear it."
+      The king: "I thought that I was in Jadar, and looked out towards the sea;
+      and that I saw something very black moving itself; and when it came near
+      it appeared to be a large tree, of which the branches stretched far above
+      the water, and the roots were down in the sea. Now when the tree came to
+      the shore it broke into pieces, and drove all about the land, both the
+      mainland and the out-islands, rocks and strands; and it appeared to me as
+      if I saw over all Norway along the sea-coast, and saw pieces of that tree,
+      some small and some large, driven into every bight."
+      Then said the bailiff, "It is likely that you an best interpret this dream
+      yourself; and I would willingly hear your interpretation of it."
+      Then said the king, "This dream appears to me to denote the arrival in
+      this country of some man who will fix his seat here, and whose posterity
+      will spread itself over the land; but with unequal power, as the dream
+      shows."
+      32. OF ASLAK HANE.
+      It so happened once, that King Sigurd sat in a gloomy mood among many
+      worthy men. It was Friday evening, and the kitchen-master asked what meat
+      should be made ready.
+      The king replies, "What else but flesh-meat?" And so harsh were his words
+      that nobody dared to contradict him, and all were ill at ease. Now when
+      people prepared to go to table, dishes of warm flesh-meat were carried in;
+      but all were silent, and grieved at the king's illness. Before the
+      blessing was pronounced over the meat, a man called Aslak Hane spoke. He
+      had been a long time with King Sigurd on his journey abroad, and was not a
+      man of any great family; and was small of stature, but fiery. When he
+      perceived how it was, and that none dared to accost the king, he asked,
+      "What is it, sire, that is smoking on the dish before you?"
+      The king replies, "What do you mean, Aslak? what do you think it is?"
+      Aslak: "I think it is flesh-meat; and I would it were not so."
+      The king: "But if it be so, Aslak?"
+      He replied, "It would be vexatious to know that a gallant king, who has
+      gained so much honour in the world, should so forget himself. When you
+      rose up out of Jordan, after bathing in the same waters as God himself,
+      with palm-leaves in your hands, and the cross upon your breast, it was
+      something else you promised, sire, than to eat flesh-meat on a Friday. If
+      a meaner man were to do so, he would merit a heavy punishment. This royal
+      hall is not so beset as it should be, when it falls upon me, a mean man,
+      to challenge such an act."
+      The king sat silent, and did not partake of the meat; and when the time
+      for eating was drawing to an end, the king ordered the flesh dishes to be
+      removed and other food was brought in, such as it is permitted to use.
+      When the meal-time was almost past, the king began to be cheerful, and to
+      drink. People advised Aslak to fly, but he said he would not do so. "I do
+      not see how it could help me; and to tell the truth, it is as good to die
+      now that I have got my will, and have prevented the king from committing a
+      sin. It is for him to kill me if he likes."
+      Towards evening the king called him, and said, "Who set thee on, Aslak
+      Hane, to speak such free words to me in the hearing of so many people?"
+      "No one, sire, but myself."
+      The king: "Thou wouldst like, no doubt, to know what thou art to have for
+      such boldness; what thinkest thou it deserves."
+      He replies, "If it be well rewarded, sire, I shall be glad; but should it
+      be otherwise, then it is your concern."
+      Then the king said, "Smaller is thy reward than thou hast deserved. I give
+      thee three farms. It has turned out, what could not have been expected,
+      that thou hast prevented me from a great crime, -thou, and not the
+      lendermen, who are indebted to me for so much good." And so it ended.
+      33. OF A WOMAN BROUGHT TO THE KING.
+      One Yule eve the king sat in the hall, and the tables were laid out, and
+      the king said, "Get me flesh-meat."
+      They answered, "Sire, it is not the custom to eat flesh-meat on Yule eve."
+      The king said, "If it be not the custom I will make it the custom."
+      They went out, and brought him a dolphin. The king stuck his knife into
+      it, but did not eat of it. Then the king said, "Bring me a girl here into
+      the hall." They brought him a woman whose head-dress went far down her
+      brows. The king took her hand in his hands, looked at her, and said, "An
+      ill looking girl!"
+      ((LACUNA -The rest of this story is missing))
+      34. HARALD GILLE COMES TO NORWAY.
+      Halkel Huk, a son of Jon Smiorbalte, who was lenderman in More, made a
+      voyage in the West sea, all the way to the South Hebudes. A man came to
+      him out of Ireland called Gillikrist, and gave himself out for a son of
+      King Magnus Barefoot. His mother came with him, and said his other name
+      was Harald. Halkel received the man, brought him to Norway with him, and
+      went immediately to King Sigurd with Harald and his mother. When they had
+      told their story to the king, he talked over the matter with his principal
+      men, and bade them give their opinions upon it. They were of different
+      opinions, and all left it to the king himself, although there were several
+      who opposed this; and the king followed his own counsel. King Sigurd
+      ordered Harald to be called before him, and told him that he would not
+      deny him the proof, by ordeal, of who his father was; but on condition
+      that if he should prove his descent according to his claim, he should not
+      desire the kingdom in the lifetime of King Sigurd, or of King Magnus: and
+      to this he bound himself by oath. King Sigurd said he must tread over hot
+      iron to prove his birth; but this ordeal was thought by many too severe,
+      as he was to undergo it merely to prove his father, and without getting
+      the kingdom; but Harald agreed to it, and fixed on the trial by iron: and
+      this ordeal was the greatest ever made in Norway; for nine glowing
+      plowshares were laid down, and Harald went over them with bare feet,
+      attended by two bishops.
+      Three days after the iron trial the ordeal was taken to proof, and the
+      feet were found unburnt. Thereafter King Sigurd acknowledged Harald's
+      relationship; but his son Magnus conceived a great hatred of him, and in
+      this many chiefs followed Magnus. King Sigurd trusted so much to his
+      favour with the whole people of the country, that he desired all men,
+      under oath, to promise to accept Magnus after him as their king; and all
+      the people took this oath.
+      35. RACE BETWEEN MAGNUS AND HARALD GILLE.
+      Harald Gille was a tall, slender-grown man, of a long neck and face, black
+      eyes, and dark hair, brisk and quick, and wore generally the Irish dress
+      of short light clothes. The Norse language was difficult for Harald, and
+      he brought out words which many laughed at. Harald sat late drinking one
+      evening. He spoke with another man about different things in the west in
+      Ireland; and among other things, said that there were men in Ireland so
+      swift of foot that no horse could overtake them in running. Magnus, the
+      king's son, heard this, and said, "Now he is lying, as he usually does."
+      Harald replies, "It is true that there are men in Ireland whom no horse in
+      Norway could overtake." They exchanged some words about this, and both
+      were drunk. Then said Magnus, "Thou shalt make a wager with me, and stake
+      thy head if thou canst not run so fast as I ride upon my horse, and I
+      shall stake my gold ring."
+      Harald replies, "I did not say that I could run so swiftly; but I said
+      that men are to be found in Ireland who will run as fast; and on that I
+      would wager."
+      The king's son Magnus replies, "I will not go to Ireland about it; we are
+      wagering here, and not there."
+      Harald on this went to bed, and would not speak to him more about it. This
+      was in Oslo. The following morning, when the early mass was over, Magnus
+      rode up the street, and sent a message to Harald to come to him. When
+      Harald came he was dressed thus. He had on a shirt and trousers which were
+      bound with ribands under his foot-soles, a short cloak, an Irish hat on
+      his head, and a spear-shaft in his hand. Magnus set up a mark for the
+      race. Harald said, "Thou hast made the course too long;" but Magnus made
+      it at once even much longer, and said it was still too short. There were
+      many spectators. They began the race, and Harald followed always the
+      horse's pace; and when they came to the end of the race course, Magnus
+      said, "Thou hadst hold of the saddle-girth, and the horse dragged thee
+      along." Magnus had his swift runner, the Gautland horse. They began the
+      race again, and Harald ran the whole race-course before the horse. When
+      came to the end Harald asked, "Had I hold of the saddle-girths now?"
+      Magnus replied, "Thou hadst the start at first."
+      Then Magnus let his horse breathe a while, and when he was ready he put
+      the spurs to him, and set off in full gallop. Harald stood still, and
+      Magnus looked back, and called, "Set off now."
+      Then Harald ran quickly past the horse, and came to the end of the course
+      so long before him that he lay down, and got up and saluted Magnus as he
+      came in.
+      Then they went home to the town. In the meantime King Sigurd had been at
+      high mass, and knew nothing of this until after he had dined that day.
+      Then he said to Magnus angrily, "Thou callest Harald useless; but I think
+      thou art a great fool, and knowest nothing of the customs of foreign
+      people. Dost thou not know that men in other countries exercise themselves
+      in other feats than in filling themselves with ale, and making themselves
+      mad, and so unfit for everything that they scarcely know each other? Give
+      Harald his ring, and do not try to make a fool of him again, as long as I
+      am above ground."
+      36. OF SIGURD'S SWIMMING.
+      It happened once that Sigurd was out in his ship, which lay in the
+      harbour; and there lay a merchant ship, which was an Iceland trader, at
+      the side of it. Harald Gille was in the forecastle of the king's ship, and
+      Svein Rimhildson, a son of Knut Sveinson of Jadar, had his berth the next
+      before him. There was also Sigurd Sigurdson, a gallant lenderman, who
+      himself commanded a ship. It was a day of beautiful weather and warm
+      sunshine, and many went out to swim, both from the long-ship and the
+      merchant vessel. An Iceland man, who was among the swimmers, amused
+      himself by drawing those under water who could not swim so well as
+      himself; and at that the spectators laughed. When King Sigurd saw and
+      heard this, he cast off his clothes, sprang into the water, and swam to
+      the Icelander, seized him, and pressed him under the water, and held him
+      there; and as soon as the Icelander came up the king pressed him down
+      again, and thus the one time after the other.
+      Then said Sigurd Sigurdson, "Shall we let the king kill this man?"
+      Somebody said, "No one has any wish to interfere."
+      Sigurd replies, that "If Dag Eilifson were here, we should not be without
+      one who dared."
+      Then Sigurd sprang overboard, swam to the king, took hold of him, and
+      said, "Sire, do not kill the man. Everybody sees that you are a much
+      better swimmer."
+      The king replies, "Let me loose, Sigurd: I shall be his death, for he will
+      destroy our people under water."
+      Sigurd says, "Let us first amuse ourselves; and, Icelander, do thou set
+      off to the land," which he did. The king now got loose from Sigurd, and
+      swam to his ship, and Sigurd went his way: but the king ordered that
+      Sigurd should not presume to come into his presence; this was reported to
+      Sigurd, and so he went up into the country.
+      37. OF HARALD AND SVEIN RIMHILDSON.
+      In the evening, when people were going to bed, some of the ship's men were
+      still at their games up in the country. Harald was with those who played
+      on the land, and told his footboy to go out to the ship, make his bed, and
+      wait for him there. The lad did as he was ordered. The king had gone to
+      sleep; and as the boy thought Harald late, he laid himself in Harald's
+      berth. Svein Rimhildson said, "It is a shame for brave men to be brought
+      from their farms at home, and to have here serving boys to sleep beside
+      them." The lad said that Harald had ordered him to come there. Svein
+      Rimhildson said, "We do not so much care for Harald himself lying here, if
+      he do not bring here his slaves and beggars;" and seized a riding-whip,
+      and struck the boy on the head until the blood flowed from him. The boy
+      ran immediately up the country, and told Harald what had happened, who
+      went immediately out to the ship, to the aft part of the forecastle, and
+      with a pole-axe struck Svein so that he received a severe wound on his
+      hands; and then Harald went on shore. Svein ran to the land after him,
+      and, gathering his friends, took Harald prisoner, and they were about
+      hanging him. But while they were busy about this, Sigurd Sigurdson went
+      out to the king's ship and awoke him. When the king opened his eyes and
+      recognised Sigurd, he said. "For this reason thou shalt die, that thou
+      hast intruded into my presence; for thou knowest that I forbade thee:" and
+      with these words the king sprang up.
+      Sigurd replied, "That is in your power as soon as you please; but other
+      business is more urgent. Go to the land as quickly as possible to help thy
+      brother; for the Rogaland people are going to hang him."
+      Then said the king, "God give us luck, Sigurd! Call my trumpeter, and let
+      him call the people all to land, and to meet me."
+      The king sprang on the land, and all who knew him followed him to where
+      the gallows was being erected. The king instantly took Harald to him; and
+      all the people gathered to the king in full armour, as they heard the
+      trumpet. Then the king ordered that Svein and all his comrades should
+      depart from the country as outlaws; but by the intercession of good men
+      the king was prevailed on to let them remain and hold their properties,
+      but no mulct should be paid for Svein's wound.
+      Then Sigurd Sigurdson asked if the king wished that he should go forth out
+      of the country.
+      "That will I not," said the king; "for I can never be without thee."
+      38. OF KING OLAF'S MIRACLE.
+      There was a young and poor man called Kolbein; and Thora, King Sigurd the
+      Crusader's mother, had ordered his tongue to be cut out of his mouth, and
+      for no other cause than that this young man had taken a piece of meat out
+      of the king-mother's tub which he said the cook had given him, and which
+      the cook had not ventured to serve up to her. The man had long gone about
+      speechless. So says Einar Skulason in Olaf's ballad: -
+     "The proud rich dame, for little cause,
+     Had the lad's tongue cut from his jaws:
+     The helpless man, of speech deprived,
+     His dreadful sore wound scarce survived.
+     A few weeks since at Hild was seen,
+     As well as ever he had been,
+     The same poor lad -to speech restored
+     By Olaf's power, whom he adored."
+      Afterwards the young man came to Nidaros, and watched in the Christ
+      church; but at the second mass for Olaf before matins he fell asleep, and
+      thought he saw King Olaf the Saint coming to him; and that Olaf talked to
+      him, and took hold with his hands of the stump of his tongue and pulled
+      it. Now when he awoke he found himself restored, and joyfully did he thank
+      our Lord and the holy Saint Olaf, who had pitied and helped him; for he
+      had come there speechless, and had gone to the holy shrine, and went away
+      cured, and with his speech clear and distinct.
+      39. KING OLAF'S MIRACLE WITH A PRISONER.
+      The heathens took prisoner a young man of Danish family and carried him to
+      Vindland, where he was in fetters along with other prisoners. In the
+      day-time he was alone in irons, without a guard; but at night a peasant's
+      son was beside him in the chain, that he might not escape from them. This
+      poor man never got sleep or rest from vexation and sorrow, and considered
+      in many ways what could help him; for he had a great dread of slavery, and
+      was pining with hunger and torture. He could not again expect to be
+      ransomed by his friends, as they had already restored him twice from
+      heathen lands with their own money; and he well knew that it would be
+      difficult and expensive for them to submit a third time to this burden. It
+      is well with the man who does not undergo so much in the world as this man
+      knew he had suffered. He saw but one way; and that was to get off and
+      escape if he could. He resolved upon this in the night-time, killed the
+      peasant, and cut his foot off after killing him, and set off to the forest
+      with the chain upon his leg. Now when the people knew this, soon after
+      daylight in the morning, they pursued him with two dogs accustomed to
+      trace any one who escaped, and to find him in the forest however carefully
+      he might be concealed. They got him into their hands and beat him, and did
+      him all kinds of mischief; and dragging him home, left barely alive, and
+      showed him no mercy. They tortured him severely; put him in a dark room,
+      in which there lay already sixteen Christian men; and bound him both with
+      iron and other tyings, as fast as they could. Then he began to think that
+      the misery and pain he had endured before were but shadows to his present
+      sufferings. He saw no man before his eyes in this prison who would beg for
+      mercy for him; no one had compassion on his wretchedness, except the
+      Christian men who lay bound with him, who sorrowed with him, and bemoaned
+      his fate together with their own misfortunes and helplessness. One day
+      they advised him to make a vow to the holy King Olaf, to devote himself to
+      some office in his sacred house, if he, by God's compassion and Saint
+      Olaf's prayers could get away from this prison. He gladly agreed to this,
+      and made a vow and prepared himself for the situation they mentioned to
+      him. The night after he thought in his sleep that he saw a man, not tall,
+      standing at his side, who spoke to him thus, "Here, thou wretched man, why
+      dost thou not get up?"
+      He replied, "Sir, who are you?"
+      "I am King Olaf, on whom thou hast called."
+      "Oh, my good lord! gladly would I raise myself; but I lie bound with iron
+      and with chains on my legs, and also the other men who lie here."
+      Thereupon the king accosts him with the words, "Stand up at once and be
+      not afraid; for thou art loose."
+      He awoke immediately, and told his comrades what, had appeared to him in
+      his dream. They told him to stand up, and try if it was true. He stood up,
+      and observed that he was loose. Now said his fellow-prisoners, this would
+      help him but little, for the door was locked both on the inside and on the
+      outside. Then an old man who sat there in a deplorable condition put in
+      his word, and told him not to doubt the mercy of the man who had loosened
+      his chains; "For he has wrought this miracle on thee that thou shouldst
+      enjoy his mercy, and hereafter be free, without suffering more misery and
+      torture. Make haste, then, and seek the door; and if thou are able to slip
+      out, thou art saved."
+      He did so, found the door open, slipped out, and away to the forest. As
+      soon as the Vindland people were aware of this they set loose the dogs,
+      and pursued him in great haste; and the poor man lay hid, and saw well
+      where they were following him. But now the hounds lost the trace when they
+      came nearer, and all the eyes that sought him were struck with a
+      blindness, so that nobody could find him, although he lay before their
+      feet; and they all returned home, vexed that they could not find him. King
+      Olaf did not permit this man's destruction after he had reached the
+      forest, and restored him also to his health and hearing; for they had so
+      long tortured and beaten him that he had become deaf. At last he came on
+      board of a ship, with two other Christian men who had been long afflicted
+      in that country. All of them worked zealously in this vessel, and so had a
+      successful flight. Then he repaired to the holy man's house, strong and
+      fit to bear arms. Now he was vexed at his vow, went from his promise to
+      the holy king, ran away one day, and came in the evening to a bonde who
+      gave him lodging for God's sake. Then in the night he saw three girls
+      coming to him; and handsome and nobly dressed were they. They spoke to him
+      directly, and sharply reprimanded him for having been so bold as to run
+      from the good king who had shown so much compassion to him, first in
+      freeing him from his irons, and then from the prison; and yet he had
+      deserted the mild master into whose service he had entered. Then he awoke
+      full of terror, got up early, and told the house-father his dream. The
+      good man had nothing so earnest in life as to send him-back to the holy
+      place. This miracle was first written down by a man who himself saw the
+      man, and the marks of the chains upon his body.
+      40. KING SIGURD MARRIES CECILIA.
+      In the last period of King Sigurd's life, his new and extraordinary
+      resolution was whispered about, that he would be divorced from his queen,
+      and would take Cecilia, who was a great man's daughter, to wife. He
+      ordered accordingly a great feast to be prepared, and intended to hold his
+      wedding with her in Bergen. Now when Bishop Magne heard this, he was very
+      sorry; and one day the bishop goes to the king's hall, and with him a
+      priest called Sigurd, who was afterwards bishop of Bergen. When they came
+      to the king's hall, the bishop sent the king a message that he would like
+      to meet him; and asked the king to come out to him. He did so, and came
+      out with a drawn sword in his hand. He received the bishop kindly and
+      asked him to go in and sit down to table with him.
+      The bishop replies, "I have other business now. Is it true, sire, what is
+      told me, that thou hast the intention of marrying, and of driving away thy
+      queen, and taking another wife?"
+      The king said it was true.
+      Then the bishop changed countenance, and angrily replied, "How can it come
+      into your mind, sire, to do such an act in our bishopric as to betray
+      God's word and law, and the holy church? It surprises me that you treat
+      with such contempt our episcopal office, and your own royal office. I will
+      now do what is my duty; and in the name of God, of the holy King Olaf, of
+      Peter the apostle, and of the other saints, forbid thee this wickedness."
+      While he thus spoke he stood straight up, as if stretching out his neck to
+      the blow, as if ready if the king chose to let the sword fall; and the
+      priest Sigurd, who afterwards was bishop, has declared that the sky
+      appeared to him no bigger than a calf's skin, so frightful did the
+      appearance of the king present itself to him. The king returned to the
+      hall, however, without saying a word; and the bishop went to his house and
+      home so cheerful and gay that he laughed, and saluted every child on his
+      way, and was playing with his fingers. Then the priest Sigurd asked him
+      the reason, saying, "Why are you so cheerful, sir? Do you not consider
+      that the king may be exasperated against you? and would it not be better
+      to get out of the way?"
+      Then said the bishop, "It appears to me more likely that he will not act
+      so; and besides, what death could be better, or more desirable, than to
+      leave life for the honour of God? or to die for the holy cause of
+      Christianity and our own office, by preventing that which is not right? I
+      am so cheerful because I have done what I ought to do."
+      There was much noise in the town about this. The king got ready for a
+      journey, and took with him corn, malt and honey. He went south to
+      Stavanger, and prepared a feast there for his marriage with Cecilia. When
+      a bishop who ruled there heard of this he went to the king, and asked if
+      it were true that he intended to marry in the lifetime of the queen.
+      The king said it was so.
+      The bishop answers, "If it be so, sire, you must know how much such a
+      thing is forbidden to inferior persons. Now it appears as if you thought
+      it was allowable for you, because you have great power, and that it is
+      proper for you, although it is against right and propriety; but I do not
+      know how you will do it in our bishopric, dishonouring thereby God's
+      command, the holy Church, and our episcopal authority. But you must bestow
+      a great amount of gifts and estates on this foundation, and thereby pay
+      the mulct due to God and to us for such transgression."
+      Then said the king, "Take what thou wilt of our possessions. Thou art far
+      more reasonable than Bishop Magne."
+      Then the king went away, as well pleased with this bishop as ill pleased
+      with him who had laid a prohibition on him. Thereafter the king married
+      the girl, and loved her tenderly.
+      41. IMPROVEMENT OF KONUNGAHELLA.
+      King Sigurd improved the town of Konungahella so much, that there was not
+      a greater town in Norway at the time, and he remained there long for the
+      defence of the frontiers. He built a king's house in the castle, and
+      imposed a duty on all the districts in the neighbourhood of the town, as
+      well as on the townspeople, that every person of nine years of age and
+      upwards should bring to the castle five missile stones for weapons, or as
+      many large stakes sharp at one end and five ells long. In the castle the
+      king built a cross-church of timber, and carefully put together, as far as
+      regards the wood and other materials. The cross-church was consecrated in
+      the 24th year of King Sigurd's reign (A.D. 1127). Here the king deposited
+      the piece of the holy cross, and many other holy relics. It was called the
+      castle church; and before the high altar he placed the tables he had got
+      made in the Greek country, which were of copper and silver, all gilt, and
+      beautifully adorned with jewels. Here was also the shrine which the Danish
+      king Eirik Eimune had sent to King Sigurd; and the altar book, written
+      with gold letters, which the patriarch had presented to King Sigurd.
+      42. KING SIGURD'S DEATH.
+      Three years after the consecration of the cross-church, when King Sigurd
+      was stopping at Viken, he fell sick (A.D. 1130). He died the night before
+      Mary's-mass (August 15), and was buried in Halvard's church, where he was
+      laid in the stone wall without the choir on the south side. His son Magnus
+      was in the town at the time and took possession of the whole of the king's
+      treasury when King Sigurd died. Sigurd had been king of Norway
+      twenty-seven years (A.D. 1104-1130), and was forty years of age when he
+      died. The time of his reign was good for the country; for there was peace,
+      and crops were good.
+      SAGA OF MAGNUS THE BLIND AND OF HARALD GILLE.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS
+      An age of conflict now begins in Norway. On his death, in 1130, Sigurd
+      left his son Magnus and his brother Harald. They soon divided the
+      government, and then entered upon a five-years' conflict, until Magnus, in
+      1135, with eyes picked out, went into a convent.
+      The next year, 1136, a new pretender appeared in the person of Sigurd
+      Slembe, who took King Harald's life in 1137. Magnus died in 1139.
+      Other literature in regard to this epoch is "Fagrskinna" and
+      "Morkinskinna". The corresponding part of "Agrip" is lost.
+      Skalds quoted are: Haldor Skvaldre, Einar Skulason, and Ivar Ingemundson.
+      1. MAGNUS AND HARALD PROCLAIMED KINGS.
+      King Sigurd's son Magnus was proclaimed in Oslo king of all the country
+      immediately after his father's death, according to the oath which the
+      whole nation had sworn to King Sigurd; and many went into his service, and
+      many became his lendermen. Magnus was the handsomest man then in Norway;
+      of a passionate temper, and cruel, but distinguished in bodily exercises.
+      The favour of the people he owed most to the respect for his father. He
+      was a great drinker, greedy of money, hard, and obstinate.
+      Harald Gille, on the other hand, was very pleasing in intercourse, gay,
+      and full of mirth; and so generous that he spared in nothing for the sake
+      of his friends. He willingly listened to good advice, so that he allowed
+      others to consult with him and give counsel. With all this he obtained
+      favour and a good repute, and many men attached themselves as much to him
+      as to King Magnus. Harald was in Tunsberg when he heard of his brother
+      King Sigurd's death. He called together his friends to a meeting, and it
+      was resolved to hold the Hauga Thing (1) there in the town. At this Thing,
+      Harald was chosen king of half the country, and it was called a forced
+      oath which had been taken from him to renounce his paternal heritage. Then
+      Harald formed a court, and appointed lendermen; and very soon he had as
+      many people about him as King Magnus. Then men went between them, and
+      matters stood in this way for seven days; but King Magnus, finding he had
+      fewer people, was obliged to give way, and to divide the kingdom with
+      Harald into two parts. The kingdom accordingly was so divided (October 3,
+      1130) that each of them should have the half part of the kingdom which
+      King Sigurd had possessed; but that King Magnus alone should inherit the
+      fleet of ships, the table service, the valuable articles and the movable
+      effects which had belonged to his father, King Sigurd. He was
+      notwithstanding the least satisfied with his share. Although they were of
+      such different dispositions, they ruled the country for some time in
+      peace. King Harald had a son called Sigurd, by Thora, a daughter of
+      Guthorm Grabarde. King Harald afterwards married Ingerid, a daughter of
+      Ragnvald, who was a son of the Swedish King Inge Steinkelson. King Magnus
+      was married to a daughter of Knut Lavard, and she was a sister of the
+      Danish King Valdernar; but King Magnus having no affection for her, sent
+      her back to Denmark; and from that day everything went ill with him, and
+      he brought upon himself the enmity of her family.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Hauga-thing means a Thing held at the tumuli or burial
+     mounds. -L.
+      2. OF THE FORCES OF HARALD AND MAGNUS.
+      When the two relations, Harald and Magnus, had been about three years
+      kings of Norway (A.D. 1131-1133), they both passed the fourth winter (A.D.
+      1134) in the town of Nidaros, and invited each other as guests; but their
+      people were always ready for a fight. In spring King Magnus sailed
+      southwards along the land with his fleet, and drew all the men he could
+      obtain out of each district, and sounded his friends if they would
+      strengthen him with their power to take the kingly dignity from Harald,
+      and give him such a portion of the kingdom, as might be suitable;
+      representing to them that King Harald had already renounced the kingdom by
+      oath. King Magnus obtained the consent of many powerful men. The same
+      spring Harald went to the Uplands, and by the upper roads eastwards to
+      Viken; and when he heard what King Magnus was doing, he also drew together
+      men on his side. Wheresoever the two parties went they killed the cattle,
+      or even the people, upon the farms of the adverse party. King Magnus had
+      by far the most people, for the main strength of the country lay open to
+      him for collecting men from it. King Harald was in Viken on the east side
+      of the fjord, and collected men, while they were doing each other damage
+      in property and life. King Harald had with him Kristrod, his brother by
+      his mother's side, and many other lendermen; but King Magnus had many
+      more. King Harald was with his forces at a place called Fors in Ranrike,
+      and went from thence towards the sea. The evening before Saint Lawrence
+      day (August 10), they had their supper at a place called Fyrileif, while
+      the guard kept a watch on horseback all around the house. The watchmen
+      observed King Magnus's army hastening towards the house, and consisting of
+      full 6000 men, while King Harald had but 1500. Now come the watchmen who
+      had to bring the news to King Harald of what was going on and say that
+      King Magnus's army was now very near the town.
+      The king says, "What will my relation King Magnus Sigurdson have? He wants
+      not surely to fight us."
+      Thjostolf Alason replies, "You must certainly, sire, make preparation for
+      that, both for yourself and your men. King Magnus has been drawing
+      together an army all the summer for the purpose of giving you battle when
+      he meets you."
+      Then King Harald stood up, and ordered his men to take their arms. "We
+      shall fight, if our relative King Magnus wants to fight us."
+      Then the war-horns sounded, and all Harald's men went out from the house
+      to an enclosed field, and set up their banners. King Harald had on two
+      shirts of ring-mail, but his brother Kristrod had no armour on; and a
+      gallant man he was. When King Magnus and his men saw King Harald's troop
+      they drew up and made their array, and made their line so long that they
+      could surround the whole of King Harald's troop. So says Haldor Skvaldre: -
+     "King Magnus on the battle-plain
+     From his long troop-line had great gain;
+     The plain was drenched with warm blood,
+     Which lay a red and reeking flood."
+      3. BATTLE AT FYRILEIF.
+      King Magnus had the holy cross carried before him in this battle, and the
+      battle was great and severe. The king's brother, Kristrod, had penetrated
+      with his troop into the middle of King Magnus's array, and cut down on
+      each side of him, so that people gave way before him everywhere. But a
+      powerful bonde who was in King Harald's array raised his spear with both
+      hands, and drove it through between Kristrod's shoulders, so that it came
+      out at his breast; and thus fell Kristrod. Many who were near asked the
+      bonde why he had done so foul a deed.
+      The bonde replies, "He knows the consequences now of slaughtering my
+      cattle in summer, and taking all that was in my house, and forcing me to
+      follow him here. I determined to give him some return when the opportunity
+      came."
+      After this King Harald's army took to flight, and he fled himself, with
+      all his men. Many fell; and Ingemar Sveinson of Ask, a great chief and
+      lenderman, got there his death-wound, and nearly sixty of King Harald's
+      court-men also fell. Harald himself fled eastward to Viken to his ships,
+      and went out of the country to King Eirik Eimune in Denmark, and found him
+      in Seeland and sought aid from him. King Eirik received him well, and
+      principally because they had sworn to each other to be as brothers (1);
+      and gave him Halland as a fief to rule over, and gave him seven
+      long-ships, but without equipment. Thereafter King Harald went northwards
+      through Halland, and many Northmen came to meet him. After this battle
+      King Magnus subdued the whole country, giving life and safety to all who
+      were wounded, and had them taken care of equally with his own men. He then
+      called the whole country his own, and had a choice of the best men who
+      were in the country. When they held a council among themselves afterwards,
+      Sigurd Sigurdson, Thorer Ingeridson, and all the men of most
+      understanding, advised that they should keep their forces together in
+      Viken, and remain there, in case Harald should return from the south; but
+      King Magnus would take his own way, and went north to Bergen. There he sat
+      all winter (A.D. 1135), and allowed his men to leave him; on which the
+      lendermen returned home to their own houses.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) These brotherhoods, by which one man was bound by oath to
+     aid or avenge another, were common in the Middle Ages among
+     all ranks.  "Sworn brothers" is still a common expression
+     with us. -L.
+      4. DEATH OF ASBJORN AND OF NEREID.
+      King Harald came to Konungahella with the men who had followed him from
+      Denmark. The lendermen and town's burgesses collected a force against him,
+      which they drew up in a thick array above the town. King Harald landed
+      from his ships, and sent a message to the bondes, desiring that they would
+      not deny him his land, as he wanted no more than what of right belonged to
+      him. Then mediators went between them; and it came to this, that the
+      bondes dismissed their troops, and submitted to him. Thereupon he bestowed
+      fiefs and property on the lendermen, that they might stand by him, and
+      paid the bondes who joined him the lawful mulcts for what they had lost. A
+      great body of men attached themselves, therefore, to King Harald; and he
+      proceeded westwards to Viken, where he gave peace to all men, except to
+      King Magnus's people, whom he plundered and killed wherever he found them.
+      And when he came west to Sarpsborg he took prisoners two of King Magnus s
+      lendermen, Asbjorn and his brother Nereid; and gave them the choice that
+      one should be hanged, and the other thrown into the Sarpsborg waterfall,
+      and they might choose as they pleased. Asbjorn chose to be thrown into the
+      cataract, for he was the elder of the two, and this death appeared the
+      most dreadful; and so it was done. Halder Skvaldre tells of this: -
+     "Asbjorn, who opposed the king,
+     O'er the wild cataract they fling:
+     Nereid, who opposed the king,
+     Must on Hagbard's high tree swing.
+     The king given food in many a way
+     To foul-mouthed beasts and birds of prey:
+     The generous men who dare oppose
+     Are treated as the worst of foes."
+      Thereafter King Harald proceeded north to Tunsberg, where he was well
+      received, and a large force gathered to him.
+      5. OF THE COUNSELS PROPOSED.
+      When King Magnus, who was in Bergen, heard these tidings, he called
+      together all the chiefs who were in the town, and asked them their
+      counsel, and what they should now do. Then Sigurd Sigurdson said, "Here I
+      can give a good advice. Let a ship be manned with good men, and put me, or
+      any other lenderman, to command it; send it to thy relation, King Harald,
+      and offer him peace according to the conditions upright men may determine
+      upon, and offer him the half of the kingdom. It appears to me probable
+      that King Harald, by the words and counsel of good men, may accept this
+      offer, and thus there may be a peace established between you."
+      Then King Magnus replied, "This proposal I will not accept of; for of what
+      advantage would it be, after we have gained the whole kingdom in summer to
+      give away the half of it now? Give us some other counsel."
+      Then Sigurd Sigurdson answered, "It appears to me, sire, that your
+      lendermen who in autumn asked your leave to return home will now sit at
+      home and will not come to you. At that time it was much against my advice
+      that you dispersed so entirely the people we had collected; for I could
+      well suppose that Harald would come back to Viken as soon as he heard that
+      it was without a chief. Now there is still another counsel, and it is but
+      a poor one; but it may turn out useful to us. Send out your pursuivants,
+      and send other people with them, and let them go against the lendermen who
+      will not join you in your necessity, and kill them; and bestow their
+      property on others who will give you help although they may have been of
+      small importance before. Let them drive together the people, the bad as
+      well as the good; and go with the men you can thus assemble against King
+      Harald, and give him battle."
+      The king replies, "It would be unpopular to put to death people of
+      distinction, and raise up inferior people who often break faith and law,
+      and the country would be still worse off. I would like to hear some other
+      counsel still."
+      Sigurd replies, "It is difficult for me now to give advice, as you will
+      neither make peace nor give battle. Let us go north to Throndhjem, where
+      the main strength of the country is most inclined to our side; and on the
+      way let us gather all the men we can. It may be that these Elfgrims will
+      be tired of such a long stride after us."
+      The king replies, "We must not fly from those whom we beat in summer. Give
+      some better counsel still."
+      Then Sigurd stood up and said, while he was preparing to go out, "I will
+      now give you the counsel which I see you will take, and which must have
+      its course. Sit here in Bergen until Harald comes with his troops, and
+      then you will either suffer death or disgrace."
+      And Sigurd remained no longer at that meeting.
+      6. OF HARALD'S FORCE.
+      King Harald came from the East along the coast with a great army, and this
+      winter (A.D. 1135) is called on that account the Crowd-winter. King Harald
+      came to Bergen on Christmas eve, and landed with his fleet at Floruvagar;
+      but would not fight on account of the sacred time. But King Magnus
+      prepared for defence in the town. He erected a stone-slinging machine out
+      on the holm, and had iron chains and wooden booms laid across over the
+      passage from the king's house to Nordnes, and to the Monks bridge. He had
+      foot-traps made, and thrown into Saint John's field, and did not suspend
+      these works except during the three sacred days of Christmas. The last
+      holyday of Yule, King Harald ordered his war-horns to sound the gathering
+      of his men for going to the town; and, during the Yule holydays, his army
+      had been increased by about 900 men.
+      7. KING MAGNUS TAKEN PRISONER.
+      King Harald made a promise to King Olaf the Saint for victory, that he
+      would build an Olaf's church in the town at his own expense. King Magnus
+      drew up his men in the Christ church yard; but King Harald laid his
+      vessels first at Nordnes. Now when King Magnus and his people saw that,
+      they turned round towards the town, and to the end of the shore; but as
+      they passed through the streets many of the burgesses ran into their
+      houses and homes, and those who went across the fields fell into the
+      foot-traps. Then King Magnus and his men perceived that King Harald had
+      rowed with all his men across to Hegravik, and landed there, and had gone
+      from thence the upper road up the hill opposite the town. Now Magnus
+      returned back again through the streets, and then his men fled from him in
+      all directions; some up to the mountains, some up to the neighbourhood of
+      the convent of nuns, some to churches, or hid themselves as they best
+      could. King Magnus fled to his ship; but there was no possibility of
+      getting away, for the iron chains outside prevented the passage of
+      vessels. He had also but few men with him, and therefore could do nothing.
+      Einar Skulason tells of this in the song of Harald: -
+     "For a whole week an iron chain
+     Cut off all sailing to the main:
+     Bergen's blue stable was locked fast, -
+     Her floating wains could not get past."
+      Soon after Harald's people came out to the ships, and then King Magnus was
+      made prisoner. He was sitting behind in the forecastle upon the chests of
+      the high-seat, and at his side Hakon Fauk, his mother's brother, who was
+      very popular but was not considered very wise, and Ivar Assurson. They,
+      and many others of King Magnus's friends, were taken, and some of them
+      killed on the spot.
+      8. KING MAGNUS MUTILATED.
+      Thereafter King Harald had a meeting of his counsellors, and desired their
+      counsel; and in this meeting the judgment was given that Magnus should be
+      deposed from his dominions, and should no longer be called king. Then he
+      was delivered to the king's slaves, who mutilated him, picked out both his
+      eyes, cut off one foot, and at last castrated him. Ivar Assurson was
+      blinded, and Hakon Fauk killed. The whole country then was reduced to
+      obedience under King Harald. Afterwards it was diligently examined who
+      were King Magnus's best friends, or who knew most of his concealments of
+      treasure or valuables. The holy cross King Magnus had kept beside him
+      since the battle of Fyrileif, but would not tell where it was deposited
+      for preservation. Bishop Reinald of Stavanger, who was an Englishman, was
+      considered very greedy of money. He was a great friend of King Magnus, and
+      it was thought likely that great treasure and valuables had been given
+      into his keeping. Men were sent for him accordingly, and he came to
+      Bergen, where it was insisted against him that he had some knowledge of
+      such treasure; but he denied it altogether, would not admit it, and
+      offered to clear himself by ordeal. King Harald would not have this, but
+      laid on the bishop a money fine of fifteen marks of gold, which he should
+      pay to the king. The bishop declared he would not thus impoverish his
+      bishop's see, but would rather offer his life. On this they hanged the
+      bishop out on the holm, beside the sling machine. As he was going to the
+      gallows he threw the sock from his foot, and said with an oath, "I know no
+      more about King Magnus's treasure than what is in this sock;" and in it
+      there was a gold ring. Bishop Reinald was buried at Nordnes in Michael's
+      church, and this deed was much blamed. After this Harald Gille was sole
+      king of Norway as long as he lived.
+      9. WONDERFUL OMENS IN KONUNGAHELLA.
+      Five years after King Sigurd's death remarkable occurrences took place in
+      Konungahella (A.D. 1135). Guthorm, a son of Harald Fletter, and Saemund
+      Husfreyja, were at that time the king's officers there. Saemund was
+      married to Ingebjorg, a daughter of the priest Andres Brunson. Their sons
+      were Paul Flip and Gunne Fis. Saemund's natural son was called Asmund.
+      Andres Brunson was a very remarkable man, who carried on divine service in
+      the Cross church. His wife (1) was called Solveig. Jon Loptson, who was
+      then eleven years old, was in their house to be fostered and educated. The
+      priest Lopt Saemundson, Jon's father, was also in the town at that time.
+      The priest Andres and Solveig had a daughter by name Helga, who was
+      Einar's wife. It happened now in Konungahella, the next Sunday night after
+      Easter week, that there was a great noise in the streets through the whole
+      town as if the king was going through with all his court-men. The dogs
+      were so affected that nobody could hold them, but they slipped loose; and
+      when they came out they ran mad, biting all that came in their way, people
+      and cattle. All who were bitten by them till the blood came turned raging
+      mad; and pregnant women were taken in labour prematurely, and became mad.
+      From Easter to Ascension-day, these portentous circumstances took place
+      almost every night. People were dreadfully alarmed at these wonders; and
+      many made themselves ready to remove, sold their houses, and went out to
+      the country districts, or to other towns. The most intelligent men looked
+      upon it as something extremely remarkable; were in dread of it; and said,
+      as it proved to be, that it was an omen of important events which had not
+      yet taken place. And the priest Andres, on Whit Sunday, made a long and
+      excellent speech, and turned the conclusion of it to the distressing
+      situation of the townspeople; telling them to muster courage, and not lay
+      waste their excellent town by deserting it, but rather to take the utmost
+      care in all things, and use the greatest foresight against all dangers, as
+      of fire or the enemy, and to pray to God to have mercy on them.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The Catholic priests appear to have had wives at that time
+     in Norway, and celibacy to have been confined to the monks.
+    -L.
+      10. THE RISE OF WAR IN KONUNGAHELLA.
+      Thirteen loaded merchant ships made ready to leave the town, intending to
+      proceed to Bergen; but eleven of them were lost, men and goods, and all
+      that was in them; the twelfth was lost also, but the people were saved,
+      although the cargo went to the bottom. At that time the priest Lopt went
+      north to Bergen, with all that belonged to him, and arrived safely. The
+      merchant vessels were lost on Saint Lawrence eve (August 10). The Danish
+      king Eirik and the Archbishop Assur, both sent notice to Konungahella to
+      keep watch on their town; and said the Vindland people had a great force
+      on foot with which they made war far around on Christian people, and
+      usually gained the victory. But the townspeople attended very little to
+      this warning, were indifferent, and forgot more and more the dreadful
+      omens the longer it was since they happened. On the holy Saint Lawrence
+      day, while the words of high mass were spoken, came to the Vindland king
+      Rettibur to Konungahella with 550 Vindland cutters, and in each cutter
+      were forty-four men and two horses. The king's sister's son Dunimiz, and
+      Unibur, a chief who ruled over many people, were with him. These two
+      chiefs rowed at once, with a part of their troops, up the east arm of the
+      Gaut river past Hising Isle, and thus came down to the town; but a part of
+      the fleet lay in the western arm, and came so to the town. They made fast
+      their ships at the piles, and landed their horses, and rode over the
+      height of Bratsas, and from thence up around the town. Einar, a relation
+      of priest Andres, brought these tidings up to the Castle church; for there
+      the whole inhabitants of the town were gathered to hear high mass. Einar
+      came just as the priest Andres was holding his discourse; and he told the
+      people that an army was sailing up against the town with a great number of
+      ships of war, and that some people were riding over Bratsas. Many said it
+      must be the Danish king Eirik, and from him they might expect peace. The
+      people ran down into the town to their properties, armed themselves, and
+      went down upon the piers, whence they immediately saw there was an enemy
+      and an immense army. Nine East-country trading vessels belonging to the
+      merchants were afloat in the river at the piers. The Vindland people first
+      directed their course toward these and fought with the merchants, who
+      armed themselves, and defended themselves long, well, and manfully. There
+      was a hard battle, and resistance, before the merchant vessels were
+      cleared of their men; and in this conflict the Vindland people lost 150 of
+      their ships, with all the men on board. When the battle was sharpest the
+      townsmen stood upon the piers, and shot at the heathens. But when the
+      fight slackened the burgesses fled up to the town, and from thence into
+      the castle; and the men took with them all their valuable articles, and
+      such goods as they could carry. Solveig and her daughters, with two other
+      women, went on shore when the Vindlanders took possession of the merchant
+      vessels. Now the Vindlanders landed, and mustered their men, and
+      discovered their loss. Some of them went up into the town, some on board
+      the merchant ships, and took all the goods they pleased; and then they set
+      fire to the town, and burnt it and the ships. They hastened then with all
+      their army to assault the castle.
+      11. THE SECOND BATTLE.
+      King Rettibur made an offer to those who were in the castle that they
+      should go out, and he would give them their lives, weapons, clothes,
+      silver, and gold; but all exclaimed against it, and went out on the
+      fortification; some shot, some threw stones, some sharp stakes. It was a
+      great battle, in which many fell on both sides, but by far the most of the
+      Vindlanders. Solveig came up to a large farm called Solbjorg, and brought
+      the news. A message war-token was there split, and sent out to Skurbagar,
+      where there happened to be a joint ale-drinking feast, and many men were
+      assembled. A bonde called Olver Miklimun (Mickle Mouth) was there, who
+      immediately sprang up, took helmet and shield, and a great axe in his
+      hand, and said, "Stand up, brave lads, and take your weapons. Let us go
+      help the townspeople; for it would appear shameful to every man who heard
+      of it, if we sit here sipping our ale, while good men in the town are
+      losing their lives by our neglect."
+      Many made an objection, and said they would only be losing their own
+      lives, without being of any assistance to the townspeople.
+      Then said Olver, "Although all of you should hold back, I will go alone;
+      and one or two heathens, at any rate, shall fall before I fall."
+      He ran down to the town, and a few men after him to see what he would do,
+      and also whether they could assist him in any way. When he came near the
+      castle, and the heathens saw him, they sent out eight men fully armed
+      against him; and when they met, the heathen men ran and surrounded him on
+      all sides. Olver lifted his axe, and struck behind him with the extreme
+      point of it, hitting the neck of the man who was coming up behind him, so
+      that his throat and jawbone were cut through, and he fell dead backwards.
+      Then he heaved his axe forwards, and struck the next man in the head, and
+      clove him down to the shoulders. He then fought with the others, and
+      killed two of them; but was much wounded himself. The four who remained
+      took to flight, but Olver ran after them. There was a ditch before them,
+      and two of the heathens jumped into it, and Olver killed them both; but he
+      stuck fast himself in the ditch, so that two of the eight heathens
+      escaped. The men who had followed Olver took him up, and brought him back
+      to Skurbagar, where his wounds were bound and healed; and it was the talk
+      of the people, that no single man had ever made such a bloody onset. Two
+      lendermen, Sigurd Gyrdson, a brother of Philip, and Sigard, came with 600
+      men to Skurbagar; on which Sigurd turned back with 400 men. He was but
+      little respected afterwards, and soon died. Sigard, on the other hand,
+      proceeded with 200 men towards the town; and they gave battle to the
+      heathens, and were all slain. While the Vindlanders were storming the
+      castle, their king and his chiefs were out of the battle. At one place
+      there was a man among the Vindlanders shooting with a bow, and killing a
+      man for every arrow; and two men stood before him, and covered him with
+      their shields. Then Saemund Husfreyja said to his son Asmund, that they
+      should both shoot together at this bowman. "But I will shoot at the man
+      who holds the shield before him." He did so, and he knocked the shield
+      down a little before the man; and in the same instant Asmund shot between
+      the shields, and the arrow hit the bowman in the forehead, so that it came
+      out at his neck, and he fell down dead. When the Vindlanders saw it they
+      howled like dogs, or like wolves. Then King Rettibur called to them that
+      he would give them safety and life, but they refused terms. The heathens
+      again made a hard assault. One of the heathens in particular fought so
+      bravely, and ventured so near, that he came quite up to the castle-gate,
+      and pierced the man who stood outside the gate with his sword; and
+      although they used both arrows and stones against him, and he had neither
+      shield nor helmet, nothing could touch him, for he was so skilled in
+      witchcraft that weapon could not wound him. Then priest Andres took
+      consecrated fire; blew upon it; cut tinder in pieces, and laid it on the
+      fire; and then laid the tinder on the arrow-point, and gave it to Asmund.
+      He shot this arrow at the warlock; and the shaft hit so well that it did
+      its business, and the man of witchcraft fell dead. Then the heathens
+      crowded together as before, howling and whining dreadfully; and all
+      gathered about their king, on which the Christians believed that they were
+      holding a council about retreating. The interpreters, who understood the
+      Vindland tongue, heard the chief Unibur make the following speech: "These
+      people are brave, and it is difficult to make anything of them; and even
+      if we took all the goods in their town, we might willingly give as much
+      more that we had never come here, so great has been our loss of men and
+      chiefs. Early in the day, when we began to assault the castle, they
+      defended themselves first with arrows and spears; then they fought against
+      us with stones; and now with sticks and staves, as against dogs. I see
+      from this that they are in want of weapons and means of defense; so we
+      shall make one more hard assault, and try their strength." It was as he
+      said, that they now fought with stakes; because, in the first assault,
+      they had imprudently used up all their missile weapons and stones; and now
+      when the Christians saw the number of their stakes diminishing, they clave
+      each stake in two. The heathens now made a very hot attack, and rested
+      themselves between whiles, and on both sides they were exhausted. During a
+      rest the Vindland king Rettibur again offered terms, and that they should
+      retain the weapons, clothes, and silver they could carry out of the
+      castle. Saemund Husfreyja had fallen, and the men who remained gave the
+      counsel to deliver up the castle and themselves into the power of the
+      heathens; but it was a foolish counsel; for the heathens did not keep
+      their promises, but took all people, men, women, and children, and killed
+      all of them who were wounded or young, or could not easily be carried with
+      them. They took all the goods that were in the castle; went into the Cross
+      church, and plundered it of all its ornaments. The priest Andres gave King
+      Rettibur a silver-mounted gilt sceptre, and to his sister's son Dunimiz he
+      gave a gold ring. They supposed from this that he was a man of great
+      importance in the town, and held him in higher respect than the others.
+      They took away with them the holy cross, and also the tables which stood
+      before the altar, which Sigurd had got made in the Greek country, and had
+      brought home himself. These they took, and laid flat down on the steps
+      before the altar. Then the heathens went out of the church. Rettibur said,
+      "This house has been adorned with great zeal for the God to whom it is
+      dedicated; but, methinks, He has shown little regard for the town or
+      house: so I see their God has been angry at those who defended them." King
+      Rettibur gave the priest Andres the church, the shrine, the holy cross,
+      the Bible, the altar-book, and four clerks (prisoners); but the heathens
+      burnt the Castle church, and all the houses that were in the castle. As
+      the fire they had set to the church went out twice, they hewed the church
+      down, and then it burnt like other houses. Then the heathens went to their
+      ships with the booty; but when they mustered their people and saw their
+      loss, they made prisoners of all the people, and divided them among the
+      vessels. Now priest Andres went on board the king's ship with the holy
+      cross, and there came a great terror over the heathens on account of the
+      portentous circumstance which took place in the king's ship; namely, it
+      became so hot that all thought they were to be burnt up. The king ordered
+      the interpreter to ask the priest why this happened. He replied, that the
+      Almighty God on whom the Christians believed, sent them a proof of His
+      anger, that they who would not believe in their Creator presumed to lay
+      hands on the emblem of His suffering; and that there lay so much power in
+      the cross, that such, and even clearer miracles, happened to heathen men
+      who had taken the cross in their hands. The king had the priest put into
+      the ship's boat, and the priest Andres carried the holy cross in his
+      grasp. They led the boat along past the ship's bow, and then along the
+      side of the next ship, and then shoved it with a boat-hook in beside the
+      pier. Then Andres went with the cross by night to Solbjorg, in rain and
+      dreadful weather; but brought it in good preservation. King Rettibur, and
+      the men he had remaining, went home to Vindland, and many of the people
+      who were taken at Konungahella were long afterwards in slavery in
+      Vindland; and those who were ransomed and came back to Norway to their
+      udal lands and properties, throve worse than before their capture. The
+      merchant town of Konungahella has never since risen to the importance it
+      was of before this event.
+      12. OF MAGNUS THE BLIND.
+      King Magnus, after he was deprived of sight, went north to Nidaros, where
+      he went into the cloister on the holm, and assumed the monk's dress. The
+      cloister received the farm of Great Hernes in Frosta for his support. King
+      Harald alone ruled the country the following winter, gave all men peace
+      and pardon who desired it, and took many of the men into his court-service
+      who had been with King Magnus. Einar Skulason says that King Harald had
+      two battles in Denmark; the one at Hvedn Isle, and the other at Hlesey
+      Isle: -
+     "Unwearied champion! who wast bred
+     To stain thy blue-edged weapons red!
+     Beneath high Hvedn's rocky shore,
+     The faithless felt thy steel once more."
+      And again, thus: -
+     "On Hlesey's plain the foe must quail
+     'Fore him who dyes their shirts of mail.
+     His storm-stretched banner o'er his head
+     Flies straight, and fills the foe with dread."
+      13. OF KING HARALD GILLE AND BISHOP MAGNUS.
+      King Harald Gille was a very generous man. It is told that in his time
+      Magnus Einarson came from Iceland to be consecrated a bishop, and the king
+      received him well, and showed him much respect. When the bishop was ready
+      to sail for Iceland again, and the ship was rigged out for sea, he went to
+      the hall where the king was drinking, saluted him politely and warmly, and
+      the king received him joyfully. The queen was sitting beside the king.
+      Then said the king, "Are you ready, bishop, for your voyage?"
+      He replied that he was.
+      The king said, "You come to us just now at a bad time; for the tables are
+      just removed, and there is nothing at hand suitable to present to you.
+      What is there to give the bishop?"
+      The treasurer replies, "Sire, as far as I know, all articles of any value
+      are given away."
+      The king: "Here is a drinking goblet remaining; take this, bishop; it is
+      not without value."
+      The bishop expressed his thanks for the honour shown him.
+      Then said the queen, "Farewell, bishop! and a happy voyage."
+      The king said to her, "When did you ever hear a noble lady say so to a
+      bishop without giving him something?"
+      She replies, "Sire, what have I to give him?"
+      The king: "Thou hast the cushion under thee."
+      Thereupon this, which was covered with costly cloth, and was a valuable
+      article, was given to the bishop. When the bishop was going away the king
+      took the cushion from under himself and gave it him, saying, "They have
+      long been together." When the bishop arrived in Iceland to his bishop's
+      see, it was talked over what should be done with the goblet that would be
+      serviceable for the king; and when the bishop asked the opinion of other
+      people, many thought it should be sold, and the value-bestowed on the
+      poor. Then said the bishop, "I will take another plan. I will have a
+      chalice made of it for this church, and consecrate it, so that all the
+      saints of whom there are relics in this church shall let the king have
+      some good for his gift every time a mass is sung over it." This chalice
+      has since belonged to the bishopric of Skalholt; and of the costly cloth
+      with which the cushions given him by the king were covered, were made the
+      choristers' cloaks which are now in Skalholt. From this the generous
+      spirit of King Harald may be seen, as well as from many other things, of
+      which but a few are set down here.
+      14. BEGINNING OF SIGURD SLEMBIDJAKN.
+      There was a man, by name Sigurd, who was brought up in Norway, and was
+      called priest Adalbrikt's son. Sigurd's mother was Thora, a daughter of
+      Saxe of Vik, a sister of Sigrid, who was mother of King Olaf Magnuson, and
+      of Kare, the king's brother who married Borghild, a daughter of Dag
+      Eilifson. Their sons were Sigurd of Austrat and Dag. Sigurd of Austrat's
+      sons were Jon of Austrat, Thorstein, and Andres the Deaf. Jon was married
+      to Sigrid, a sister of King Inge and of Duke Skule. This Sigurd, in his
+      childhood, was kept at his book, became a clerk, and was consecrated a
+      deacon; but as he ripened in years and strength he became a very clever
+      man, stout, strong, distinguished for all perfections and exercises beyond
+      any of his years, -indeed, beyond any man in Norway. Sigurd showed
+      early traces of a haughty ungovernable spirit, and was therefore called
+      Slembidjakn. He was as handsome a man as could be seen, with rather thin
+      but beautiful hair. When it came to Sigurd's ears that his mother said
+      King Magnus was his father, he laid aside all clerkship; and as soon as he
+      was old enough to be his own master, he left the country. He was a long
+      time on his travels, went to Palestine; was at the Jordan river; and
+      visited many holy places, as pilgrims usually do. When he came back, he
+      applied himself to trading expeditions. One winter he was in Orkney with
+      Earl Harald, and was with him when Thorkel Fostre Summarlidason was
+      killed. Sigurd was also in Scotland with the Scottish king David, and was
+      held in great esteem by him. Thereafter Sigurd went to Denmark; and
+      according to the account of himself and his men, he there submitted to the
+      iron ordeal to confirm his paternal descent, and proved by it, in the
+      presence of five bishops, that he was a son of King Magnus Barefoot. So
+      says Ivar Ingemundson, in Sigurd's song: -
+     "The holiest five
+     Of men alive, -
+     Bishops were they, -
+     Solemnly say,
+     The iron glowing
+     Red hot, yet showing
+     No scaith on skin,
+     Proves cause and kin."
+      King Harald Gille's friends, however, said this was only a lie, and deceit
+      of the Danes.
+      15. SIGURD IN ICELAND.
+      It is told before of Sigurd that he passed some years in merchant voyages,
+      and he came thus to Iceland one winter, and took up his lodging with
+      Thorgils Odson in Saurby; but very few knew where he was. In autumn, when
+      the sheep were being driven into a fold to be slaughtered, a sheep that
+      was to be caught ran to Sigurd; and as Sigurd thought the sheep ran to him
+      for protection, he stretched out his hands to it and lifted it over the
+      fold dyke, and let it run to the hills, saying, "There are not many who
+      seek help from me, so I may well help this one." It happened the same
+      winter that a woman had committed a theft, and Thorgils, who was angry at
+      her for it, was going to punish her; but she ran to Sigurd to ask his
+      help, and he set her upon the bench by his side. Thorgils told him to give
+      her up, and told him what she had committed; but Sigurd begged forgiveness
+      for her since she had come to him for protection, and that Thorgils would
+      dismiss the complaint against her, but Thorgils insisted that she should
+      receive her punishment. When Sigurd saw that Thorgils would not listen to
+      his entreaty, he started up, drew his sword, and bade him take her if he
+      dared; and Thorgils seeing that Sigurd would defend the woman by force of
+      arms, and observing his commanding mien, guessed who he must be, desisted
+      from pursuing the woman, and pardoned her. There were many foreign men
+      there, and Sigurd made the least appearance among them. One day Sigurd
+      came into the sitting-room, and a Northman who was splendidly clothed was
+      playing chess with one of Thorads house-servants. The Northman called
+      Sigurd, and asked him his advice how to play; but when Sigurd looked at
+      the board, he saw the game was lost. The man who was playing against the
+      Northman had a sore foot, so that one toe was bruised, and matter was
+      coming out of it. Sigurd, who was sitting on the bench, takes a straw, and
+      draws it along the floor, so that some young kittens ran after it. He drew
+      the straw always before them, until they came near the house-servant's
+      foot, who jumping up with a scream, threw the chessmen in disorder on the
+      board; and thus it was a dispute how the game had stood. This is given as
+      a proof of Sigurd's cunning. People did not know that he was a learned
+      clerk until the Saturday before Easter, when he consecrated the holy water
+      with chant; and the longer he stayed there the more he was esteemed. The
+      summer after, Sigurd told Thorgils before they parted, that he might with
+      all confidence address his friends to Sigurd Slembidjakn. Thorgils asked
+      how nearly he was related to him, on which he replies, "I am Sigurd
+      Slembidjakn, a son of King Magnus Barefoot." He then left Iceland.
+      16. OF SIGURD SLEMBE.
+      When Harald Gille had been six years (A.D. 1136), king of Norway, Sigurd
+      came to the country and went to his brother King Harald, and found him in
+      Bergen. He placed himself entirely in the king's hands, disclosed who his
+      father was, and asked him to acknowledge their relationship. The king gave
+      him no hasty or distinct reply; but laid the matter before his friends in
+      a conference at a specially appointed meeting. After this conference it
+      became known that the king laid an accusation against Sigurd, because he
+      had been at the killing of Thorkel Fostre in the West. Thorkel had
+      accompanied Harald to Norway when he first came to the country, and had
+      been one of Harald's best friends. This case was followed up so severely,
+      that a capital accusation against Sigurd was made, and, by the advice of
+      the lendermen, was carried so far, that some of the king's pursuivants
+      went one evening late to Sigurd, and called him to them. They then took a
+      boat and rowed away with Sigurd from the town south to Nordnes. Sigurd sat
+      on a chest in the stern of the boat, and had his suspicions that foul play
+      was intended. He was clothed in blue trousers, and over his shirt he had a
+      hood tied with ribands, which served him for a cloak. He sat looking down,
+      and holding his hood-strings; and sometimes moved them over his head,
+      sometimes let them fall again before him. Now when they had passed the
+      ness, they were drunk, and merry, were rowing so eagerly that they were
+      not taking notice of anything. Sigurd stood up, and went on the boat's
+      deck; but the two men who were placed to guard him stood up also, and
+      followed him to the side of the vessel, holding by his cloak, as is the
+      custom in guarding people of distinction. As he was afraid that they would
+      catch hold of more of his clothes, he seized them both, and leaped
+      overboard with them. The boat, in the meantime, had gone on a long way,
+      and it was a long time before those on board could turn the vessel, and
+      long before they could get their own men taken on board again; and Sigurd
+      dived under water, and swam so far away that he reached the land before
+      they could get the boat turned to pursue him. Sigurd, who was very swift
+      of foot, hied up to the mountains, and the king's men travelled about the
+      whole night seeking him without finding him. He lay down in a cleft of the
+      rocks; and as he was very cold he took off his trousers, cut a hole in the
+      seat of them, and stuck his head through it, and put his arms in the legs
+      of them. He escaped with life this time; and the king's men returned, and
+      could not conceal their unsuccessful adventure.
+      17. TREACHERY TOWARDS KING HARALD.
+      Sigurd thought now that it would be of no use to seek any help from King
+      Harald again; and he kept himself concealed all the autumn and the
+      beginning of the winter. He lay hid in Bergen, in the house of a priest.
+      King Harald was also in the town, and many great people with him. Now
+      Sigurd considered how, with his friends' help, he might take the king by
+      surprise, and make an end of him. Many men took part in this design; and
+      among them some who were King Harald's court-men and chamberlains, but who
+      had formerly been King Magnus's court-men. They stood in great favour with
+      the king, and some of them sat constantly at the king's table. On Saint
+      Lucia's day (December 13), in the evening when they proposed to execute
+      this treason, two men sat at the king's table talking together; and one of
+      them said to the king, "Sire, we two table-companions submit our dispute
+      to your judgment, having made a wager of a basket of honey to him who
+      guesses right. I say that you will sleep this night with your Queen
+      Ingerid; and he says that you will sleep with Thora, Guthorm's daughter."
+      The king answered laughing, and without suspecting in the least that there
+      lay treachery under the question, that he who had asked had lost his bet.
+      They knew thus where he was to be found that night; but the main guard was
+      without the house in which most people thought the king would sleep, viz.,
+      that which the queen was in.
+      18. MURDER OF KING HARALD.
+      Sigurd Slembe, and some men who were in his design, came in the night to
+      the lodging in which King Harald was sleeping; killed the watchman first;
+      then broke open the door, and went in with drawn swords. Ivar Kolbeinson
+      made the first attack on King Harald; and as the king had been drunk when
+      he went to bed he slept sound, and awoke only when the men were striking
+      at him. Then he said in his sleep, "Thou art treating me hardly, Thora."
+      She sprang up, saying, "They are treating thee hardly who love thee less
+      than I do." Harald was deprived of life. Then Sigurd went out with his
+      helpers, and ordered the men to be called to him who had promised him
+      their support if he should get King Harald taken out of the way. Sigurd
+      and his men then went on, and took a boat, set themselves to the oars, and
+      rowed out in front of the king's house; and then it was just beginning to
+      be daylight. Then Sigurd stood up, spoke to those who were standing on the
+      king's pier, made known to them the murder of King Harald by his hand, and
+      desired that they would take him, and choose him as chief according to his
+      birth. Now came many swarming down to the pier from the king's house; and
+      all with one voice replied, that they would never give obedience or
+      service to a man who had murdered his own brother. "And if thou are not
+      his brother, thou hast no claim from descent to be king." They clashed
+      their weapons together, and adjudged all murderers to be banished and
+      outlawed men. Now the king's horn sounded, and all lendermen and courtmen
+      were called together. Sigurd and his companions saw it was best for them
+      to get way; and he went northward to North Hordaland, where he held a
+      Thing with the bondes, who submitted to him, and gave him the title of
+      king. From thence he went to Sogn, and held a Thing there with the bondes
+      and was proclaimed king. Then he went north across the fjords, and most
+      people supported his cause. So says Ivar Ingemundson: -
+     "On Harald's fall
+     The bondes all,
+     In Hord and Sogn,
+     Took Magnus' son.
+     The Things swore too
+     They would be true
+     To this new head
+     In Harald's stead."
+      King Harald was buried in the old Christ church.
+      SAGA OF SIGURD, INGE, AND EYSTEIN, THE SONS OF HARALD
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      Sigurd died A.D. 1155, Eystein 1157, and Inge 1161.
+      Other literature is "Morkinskinna" and "Fagrskinna."
+      Sigurd Slembe is the subject of a drama by Bjornstjerne Bjornson,
+      translated into English by William Morton Payne, and published by
+      Houghton, Mifflin & Co., Boston, 1888.
+      Skalds quoted are: Kolle, Einar Skulason, and Thorbjorn Skakkaskald.
+      1. HISTORY OF KINGS SIGURD AND INGE.
+      Queen Ingerid, and with her the lendermen and the court which had been
+      with King Harald, resolved to send a fast-sailing vessel to Throndhjem to
+      make known King Harald's death, and also to desire the Throndhjem people
+      to take King Harald's son Sigurd for king. He was then in the north, and
+      was fostered by Sadagyrd Bardson. Queen Ingerid herself proceeded eastward
+      immediately to Viken. Inge was the name of her son by King Harald, and he
+      was then fostered by Amunde Gyrdson, a grandson of Logberse. When they
+      came to Viken a Borgar-thing was immediately called together, at which
+      Inge, who was in the second year of his age, was chosen king. This
+      resolution was supported by Amunde and Thjostolf Alason, together with
+      many other great chiefs. Now when the tidings came north to Throndhjem
+      that King Harald was murdered, the Throndhjem people took Sigurd, King
+      Harald's son, to be the king; and this resolution was supported by Ottar
+      Birting, Peter Saudaulfson, the brothers Guthorm of Reine, and Ottar
+      Balle, sons of Asolf and many other great chiefs. Afterwards the whole
+      nation almost submitted to the brothers, and principally because their
+      father was considered holy; and the country took the oath to them, that
+      the kingly power should not go to any other man as long as any of King
+      Harald's sons were alive.
+      2. OF SIGURD SLEMBIDJAKN.
+      Sigurd Slembe sailed north around Stad; and when he came to North More, he
+      found that letters and full powers had arrived before him from the leaders
+      who had given in their allegiance to Harald's sons; so that there he got
+      no welcome or help. As Sigurd himself had but few people with him, he
+      resolved to go with them to Throndhjem, and seek out Magnus the Blind; for
+      he had already sent a message before him to Magnus's friends. Now when
+      they came to the town, they rowed up the river Nid to meet King Magnus,
+      and fastened their land-ropes on the shore at the king's house; but were
+      obliged to set off immediately, for all the people rose against them. They
+      then landed at Monkholm, and took Magnus the Blind out of the cloister
+      against the will of the monks; for he had been consecrated a monk. It is
+      said by some that Magnus willingly went with them; although it was
+      differently reported, in order to make his cause appear better. Sigurd,
+      immediately after Yule (January, A.D. 1137), went forth with his suite,
+      expecting aid from his relations and Magnus's friends, and which they also
+      got. Sigurd sailed with his men out of the fjord, and was joined
+      afterwards by Bjorn Egilson, Gunnar of Gimsar, Haldor Sigurdson, Aslak
+      Hakonson, the brothers Bendikt and Eirik, and also the court which had
+      before been with King Magnus, and many others. With this troop they went
+      south to More, and down to the mouth of Raumsdal fjord. Here Sigurd and
+      Magnus divided their forces, and Sigurd went immediately westwards across
+      the sea. King Magnus again proceeded to the Uplands, where he expected
+      much help and strength, and which he obtained. He remained there the
+      winter and all the summer (A.D. 1137), and had many people with him; but
+      King Inge proceeded against him with all his forces, and they met at a
+      place called Mynne. There was a great battle, at which King Magnus had the
+      most people. It is related that Thjostolf Alason carried King Inge in his
+      belt as long as the battle lasted, and stood under the banner; but
+      Thjostolf was hard pressed by fatigue and fighting; and it is commonly
+      said that King Inge got his ill health there, and which he retained as
+      long as he lived, so that his back was knotted into a hump, and the one
+      foot was shorter than the other; and he was besides so infirm that he
+      could scarcely walk as long as he lived. The defeat began to turn upon
+      Magnus and his men; and in the front rank of his array fell Haldor
+      Sigurdson, Bjorn Egilson, Gunnar of Gimsar, and a great number of his men,
+      before he himself would take to his horse and fly. So says Kolle: -
+     "Thy arrow-storm on Mynne's banks
+     Fast thinn'd the foemen's strongest ranks;
+     Thy good sword hewed the raven's feast
+     On Mynne's banks up in the East.
+     Shield clashed on shield, and bucklers broke
+     Under thy battle-axe's stroke;
+     While thou, uncovered, urged the fray,
+     Thy shield and mail-coat thrown away."
+      And also this: -
+     "The king to heaven belonging fled,
+     When thou, in war's quick death-game bred,
+     Unpanzered, shieldless on the plain
+     His heavy steel-clad guards hadst slain.
+     The painted shield, and steel-plate mail,
+     Before thy fierce attack soon fail,
+     To Magnus who belongs to heaven,
+
+     Was no such fame in battle given."
+      Magnus fled eastward to Gautland, and then to Denmark. At that time there
+      was in Gautland an earl, Karl Sonason, who was a great and ambitious man.
+      Magnus the Blind and his men said, wherever they happened to meet with
+      chiefs, that Norway lay quite open to any great chieftain who would attack
+      it; for it might well be said there was no king in the country, and the
+      kingdom was only ruled by lendermen, and, among those who had most sway,
+      there was, from mutual jealousy, most discord. Now Karl, being ambitious
+      of power, listens willingly to such speeches; collects men, and rides west
+      to Viken, where many people, out of fear, submit to him. When Thjostolf
+      Alason and Amunde heard of this, they went with the men they could get
+      together, and took King Inge with them. They met Earl Karl and the
+      Gautland army eastward in Krokaskog, where there was a great battle and a
+      great defeat, King Inge gaining the victory. Munan Ogmundson, Earl Karl's
+      mother's brother, fell there. Ogmund, the father of Munan, was a son of
+      Earl Orm Eilifson, and Sigrid, a daughter of Earl Fin Arnason. Astrid,
+      Ogrnund's daughter, was the mother of Earl Karl. Many others of the
+      Gautland people fell at Krokaskog; and the earl fled eastward through the
+      forest. King Inge pursued them all the way out of the kingdom; and this
+      expedition turned out a great disgrace to them. So says Kolle: -
+     "I must proclaim how our great lord
+     Coloured deep red his ice-cold sword;
+     And ravens played with Gautland bones,
+     And wolves heard Gautlanders' last groans.
+     Their silly jests were well repaid, -
+     In Krokaskog their laugh was laid:
+     Thy battle power was then well tried,
+     And they who won may now deride."
+      3. KING EIRIK'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY.
+      Magnus the Blind then went to Denmark to King Eirik Eimune, where he was
+      well received. He offered the king to follow him if he would invade Norway
+      with a Danish army, and subdue the country; saying, that if he came to
+      Norway with his army, no man in Norway would venture to throw a spear
+      against him. The king allowed himself to be moved by Magnus's persuasions,
+      ordered a levy, and went north to Norway with 200 ships; and Magnus and
+      his men were with him on this expedition. When they came to Viken, they
+      proceeded peacefully and gently on the east side of the fjord; but when
+      the fleet came westward to Tunsberg, a great number of King Inge's
+      lendermen came against them. Their leader was Vatnorm Dagson, a brother of
+      Gregorius. The Danes could not land to get water without many of them
+      being killed; and therefore they went in through the fjord to Oslo, where
+      Thjostolf Alason opposed them. It is told that some people wanted to carry
+      the holy Halvard's coffin out of the town in the evening when the fleet
+      was first observed, and as many as could took hold of it; but the coffin
+      became so heavy that they could not carry it over the church floor. The
+      morning after, however, when they saw the fleet sailing in past the Hofud
+      Isle, four men carried the coffin out of the town, and Thjostolf and all
+      the townspeople followed it.
+      4. THE TOWN OF OSLO BURNT.
+      King Eirik and his army advanced against the town; and some of his men
+      hastened after Thjostolf and his troop. Thjostolf threw a spear at a man
+      named Askel, which hit him under the throat, so that the spear point went
+      through his neck; and Thjostolf thought he had never made a better
+      spear-cast, for, except the place he hit, there was nothing bare to be
+      seen. The shrine of St. Halvard, was taken up to Raumarike, where it
+      remained for three months. Thjostolf went up to Raumarike, and collected
+      men during the night, with whom he returned towards the town in the
+      morning. In the meantime King Eirik set fire to Halvard's church, and to
+      the town, which was entirely burnt. Thjostolf came soon after to the town
+      with the men he had assembled, and Eirik sailed off with his fleet; but
+      could not land anywhere on that side of the fjord, on account of the
+      troops of the lendermen who came down against them; and wherever they
+      attempted a landing, they left five or six men or more upon the strand.
+      King Inge lay with a great number of people into Hornborusund, but when he
+      learned this, he turned about southwards to Denmark again. King Inge
+      pursued him, and took from him all the ships he could get hold of; and it
+      was a common observation among people, that never was so poor an
+      expedition made with so great an armament in another king's dominions.
+      King Eirik was ill pleased at it, and thought King Magnus and his men had
+      been making a fool of him by encouraging him to undertake this expedition,
+      and he declared he would never again besuch friends with them as before.
+      5. OF SIGURD SLEMBIDJAKN.
+      Sigurd Slembidjakn came that summer from the West sea to Norway, where he
+      heard of his relation King Magnus's unlucky expedition; so he expected no
+      welcome in Norway, but sailed south, outside the rocks, past the land, and
+      set over to Denmark, and went into the Sound. He fell in with some
+      Vindland cutters south of the islands, gave them battle, and gained the
+      victory. He cleared eight ships, killing many of the men, and he hanged
+      the others.
+      He also had a battle off the Island Mon with the Vindland men, and gained
+      a victory. He then sailed from the south and came to the eastern arm of
+      the Gaut river, and took three ships of the fleet of Thorer Hvinantorde,
+      and Olaf, the son of Harald Kesia, who was Sigurd's own sister's son; for
+      Ragnhild, the mother of Olaf, was a daughter of King Magnus Barefoot. He
+      drove Olaf up the country.
+      Thjostolf was at this time in Konungahella, and had collected people to
+      defend the country, and Sigurd steered thither with his fleet. They shot
+      at each other, but he could not effect a landing; and, on both sides, many
+      were killed and many wounded. Ulfhedin Saxolfson, Sigurd's forecastle man,
+      fell there. He was an Icelander, from the north quarter. Sigurd continued
+      his course northwards to Viken and plundered far and wide around. Now when
+      Sigurd lay in a harbour called Portyrja on Limgard's coast, and watched
+      the ships going to or coming from Viken to plunder them, the Tunsberg men
+      collected an armed force against him, and came unexpectedly upon them
+      while Sigurd and his men were on shore dividing their booty. Some of the
+      men came down from the land, but some of the other party laid themselves
+      with their ships right across the harbour outside of them. Sigurd ran up
+      into his ship, and rowed out against them. Vatnorm's ship was the nearest,
+      and he let his ship fall behind the line, and Sigurd rowed clear past, and
+      thus escaped with one ship and the loss of many men. This verse was made
+      upon Vatnorm (1): -
+     "The water serpent, people say,
+     From Portyrja slipped away."
+   ENDNOTES: (1) Vatnorm, the name of this man, means the water-serpent,
+     and appears to have been a favourite name for war-ships also;
+     hence the pun in the lines upon Vatnorm. -L.
+      6. THE MURDER OF BEINTEIN.
+      Sigurd Slembidjakn sailed from thence to Denmark; and at that time a man
+      was lost in his ship, whose name was Kolbein Thorliotson of Batald. He was
+      sitting in a boat which was made fast to the vessel, and upset because she
+      was sailing quickly. When they came south to Denmark, Sigurd's ship itself
+      was cast away; but he got to Alaborg, and was there in winter. The summer
+      after (A.D. 1138) Magnus and Sigurd sailed together from the south with
+      seven ships, and came unexpectedly in the night to Lister, where they laid
+      their ships on the land. Beintein Kolbeinson, a court-man of King Inge,
+      and a very brave man, was there. Sigurd and his men jumped on shore at
+      daylight, came unexpectedly on the people, surrounded the house, and were
+      setting fire to the buildings; but Beintein came out of a store-house with
+      his weapons, well armed, and stood within the door with drawn sword, his
+      shield before him, helmet on, and ready to defend himself. The door was
+      somewhat low. Sigurd asked which of his lads had most desire to go in
+      against Beintein, which he called brave man's work; but none was very
+      hurried to make ready for it. While they were discussing this matter
+      Sigurd rushed into the house, past Beintein. Beintein struck at him, but
+      missed him. Sigurd turned instantly on Beintein; and after exchanging
+      blows, Sigurd gave him his death-stroke, and came out presently bearing
+      his head in his hands.
+      They took all the goods that were in the farm-house, carried the booty to
+      their ships, and sailed away. When King Inge and his friends, and also
+      Kolbein's sons, Sigurd and Gyrd, the brothers of Beintein, heard of
+      Beintein's murder, the king sent a great force against Sigurd Slembe and
+      his followers; and also travelled himself, and took a ship from Hakon
+      Paulson Pungelta, who was a daughter's son of Aslak, a son of Erling
+      Skjalgson of Sole, and cousin of Hakon Mage. King Inge drove Hakon and his
+      followers up the country, and took all their gear. Sigurd Stork, a son of
+      Eindride of Gautdal, and his brother, Eirik Hael, and Andres Kelduskit,
+      son of Grim of Vist, all fled away into the fjords. But Sigurd Slembe,
+      Magnus the Blind and Thorieif Skiappa sailed outside the isles with three
+      ships north to Halogaland; and Magnus was in winter (A.D. 1139) north in
+      Bjarkey Isle with Vidkun Jonson. But Sigurd had the stem and stern-post of
+      his ship cut out, made a hole in her, and sank her in the inner part of
+      Egisfjord, and thereafter he passed the winter at Tialdasund by
+      Gljufrafjord in Hin. Far up the fjord there is a cave in the rock; in that
+      place Sigurd sat with his followers, who were above twenty men, secretly,
+      and hung a grey cloth before the mouth of the hole, so that no person
+      could see them from the strand. Thorleif Skiappa, and Einar, son of Ogmund
+      of Sand, and of Gudrun, daughter of Einar Arason of Reikiaholar, procured
+      food for Sigurd during the winter. It is said that Sigurd made the
+      Laplanders construct two boats for him during the winter up in the fjord;
+      and they were fastened together with deer sinews, without nails, and with
+      twigs of willow instead of knees, and each boat could carry twelve men.
+      Sigurd was with the Laplanders while they were making the boats; and the
+      Laplanders had good ale, with which they entertained Sigurd. Sigurd made
+      these lines on it: -
+          "In the Lapland tent
+          Brave days we spent.
+     Under the grey birch tree;
+          In bed or on bank
+          We knew no rank,
+     And a merry crew were we.
+
+          "Good ale went round
+          As we sat on the ground,
+     Under the grey birch tree;
+          And up with the smoke
+          Flew laugh and joke,
+     And a merry crew were we."
+      These boats were so light that no ship could overtake them in the water,
+      according to what was sung at the time: -
+     "Our skin-sewed Fin-boats lightly swim,
+     Over the sea like wind they skim.
+     Our ships are built without a nail;
+     Few ships like ours can row or sail."
+      In spring Sigurd and Magnus went south along the coast with the two boats
+      which the Laplanders had made; and when they came to Vagar they killed
+      Svein the priest and his two sons.
+      7. OF SIGURD'S SLEMBE'S CAMPAIGN.
+      Thereafter Sigurd came south to Vikar, and seized King Sigurd's lendermen,
+      William Skinnare and Thorald Kept, and killed them both. Then Sigurd
+      turned south-wards along the coast, and met Styrkar Glaesirofa south of
+      Byrda, as he was coming from the south from the town of Nidaros, and
+      killed him. Now when Sigurd came south to Valsnes, he met Svinagrim
+      outside of the ness, and cut off his right hand. From thence he went south
+      to More, past the mouth of the Throndhjem fjord, where they took Hedin
+      Hirdmage and Kalf Kringluauge. They let Hedin escape, but killed Kalf.
+      When King Sigurd, and his foster-father, Sadagyrd, heard of Sigurd
+      Slembidjakn's proceedings, and what he was doing, they sent people to
+      search for him; and their leader was Jon Kauda, a son of Kalf Range.
+      Bishop Ivar's brother, and besides the priest Jon Smyril. They went on
+      board the ship the Reindeer, which had twenty-two rowing benches, and was
+      one of the swiftest sailing vessels, to seek Sigurd; but as they could not
+      find him, they returned north-wards with little glory; for people said
+      that they had got sight of Sigurd and his people, and durst not attack
+      them. Afterwards Sigurd proceeded southwards to Hordaland, and came to
+      Herdla, where Einar, a son of Laxapaul, had a farm; and went into Hamar's
+      fjord, to the Gangdaga-thing. They took all the goods that were at the
+      farm, and a long-ship of twenty-two benches which belonged to Einar; and
+      also his son, four years old, who was living with one of his labouring
+      people. Some wanted to kill the boy, but others took him and carried him
+      with them. The labouring man said, "It will not be lucky for you to kill
+      the child; and it will be of no use to you to carry him away, for it is my
+      son, and not Einar's." And on his word they let the boy remain, and went
+      away. When Einar came home he gave the labourer money to the value of two
+      ore of gold, and thanked him for his clever invention, and promised him
+      his constant friendship. So says Eirik Odson, who first wrote down this
+      relation; and he heard himself Einar Paulson telling these circumstances
+      in Bergen. Sigurd then went southward along the coast all the way east to
+      Viken, and met Fin Saudaulfson east at Kvildar, as he was engaged in
+      drawing in King Inge's rents and duties, and hanged him. Then they sailed
+      south to Denmark.
+      8. OF KING INGE'S LETTER TO KING SIGURD.
+      The people of Viken and of Bergen complained that it was wrong for King
+      Sigurd and his friends to be sitting quietly north in the town of Nidaros,
+      while his father's murderer was cruising about in the ordinary passage at
+      the mouth of the Throndhjem fjord; and King Inge and his people, on the
+      other hand, were in Viken in the midst of the danger, defending the
+      country and holding many battles. Then King Inge sent a letter north to
+      the merchant-town Nidaros, in which were these words: "King Inge Haraldson
+      sends his brother King Sigurd, as also Sadagyrd, Ogmund Svipte, Ottar
+      Birting, and all lendermen, court-men, house-people, and all the public,
+      rich and poor, young and old, his own and God's salutation. The misfortune
+      is known to all men that on account of our childhoods -thou being
+      five, and I but three years of age -we can undertake nothing without
+      the counsel of our friends and other good men. Now I and my men think that
+      we stand nearer to the danger and necessity common to us both, than thou
+      and thy friends; therefore make it so that thou, as soon as possible, come
+      to me, and as strong in troops as possible, that we may be assembled to
+      meet whatever may come. He will be our best friend who does all he can
+      that we may be united, and may take an equal part in all things. But if
+      thou refuse, and wilt not come after this message which I send thee in
+      need, as thou hast done before, then thou must expect that I will come
+      against thee with an armament; and let God decide between us; for we are
+      not in a condition to sit here at so great an expense, and with so
+      numerous a body of troops as are necessary here on account of the enemy,
+      and besides many other pressing charges, whilst thou hast half of all the
+      land-tax and other revenues of Norway. Live in the peace of God!"
+      9. OTTAR BIRTING'S SPEECH.
+      Then Ottar Birting stood up in the Thing, and first of all answered thus:
+      "This is King Sigurd's reply to his brother King Inge -that God will
+      reward him for his good salutation, and likewise for the trouble and
+      burden which he and his friends have in this kingdom, and in matters of
+      necessity which effect them both. Although now some think there is
+      something sharp in King Inge's message to his brother Sigurd, yet he has
+      in many respects sufficient cause for it. Now I will make known to you my
+      opinion, and we will hear if King Sigurd and the other people of power
+      will agree to it; and it is, that thou, King Sigurd, make thyself ready,
+      with all the people who will follow thee, to defend thy country; and go as
+      strong in men as possible to thy brother King Inge as soon as thou art
+      prepared, in order to assist each other in all things that are for the
+      common good; and may God Almighty strengthen and assist you both! Now,
+      king, we will have thy words."
+      Peter, a son of Saudaulf, who was afterwards called Peter Byrdarsvein,
+      bore King Sigurd to the Thing. Then the king said, "Ye must know that, if
+      I am to advise, I will go as soon as possible to my brother King Inge."
+      Then others spoke, one after the other; but although each began his speech
+      in his own way, he ended with agreeing to what Ottar Birting had proposed;
+      and it was determined to call together the war-forces, and go to the east
+      part of the country. King Sigurd accordingly went with great armament east
+      to Viken, and there he met his brother King Inge.
+      10. FALL OF MAGNUS THE BLIND.
+      The same autumn (A.D. 1139) Sigurd Slembe and Magnus the Blind came from
+      Denmark with thirty ships, manned both with Danes and Northmen. It was
+      near to winter. When the kings heard of this, they set out with their
+      people eastwards to meet them. They met at Hvalar, near Holm the Grey, the
+      day after Martinmas, which was a Sunday. King Inge and King Sigurd had
+      twenty ships, which were all large. There was a great battle; but, after
+      the first assault, the Danes fled home to Denmark with eighteen ships. On
+      this Sigurd's and Magnus's ships were cleared; and as the last was almost
+      entirely bare of men, and Magnus was lying in his bed, Hreidar
+      Griotgardson, who had long followed him, and been his courtman, took King
+      Magnus in his arms, and tried to run with him on board some other ship.
+      But Hreidar was struck by a spear, which went between his shoulders; and
+      people say King Magnus was killed by the same spear. Hreidar fell
+      backwards upon the deck, and Magnus upon him; and every man spoke of how
+      honourably he had followed his master and rightful sovereign. Happy are
+      they who have such praise! There fell, on King Magnus's ship, Lodin
+      Saupprud of Linustadar, Bruse Thormodson; and the forecastle-men to Sigurd
+      Slembidjakn, Ivar Kolbeinson and Halyard Faeger, who had been in Sigurd
+      Slembe's fore-hold. This Ivar had been the first who had gone in, in the
+      night, to King Harald, and had laid hands on him. There fell a great
+      number of the men of King Magnus and Sigurd Slembe, for Inge's men let not
+      a single one escape if they got hold of him; but only a few are named
+      here. They killed upon a holm more than forty men, among whom were two
+      Icelanders -the priest Sigurd Bergthorson, a grandson of Mas; the
+      other Clemet, a son of Are Einarson. But three Icelanders obtained their
+      lives: namely, Ivar Skrauthanke, a son of Kalf Range, and who afterwards
+      was bishop of Throndhjem, and was father of the archbishop Eirik. Ivar had
+      always followed King Magnus, and he escaped into his brother Jon Kauda's
+      ship. Jon was married to Cecilia, a daughter of Gyrd Bardson, and was then
+      in King Inge's and Sigurd's armament. There were three in all who escaped
+      on board of Jon's ship. The second was Arnbjorn Ambe, who afterwards
+      married Thorstein's daughter in Audsholt; the third was Ivar Dynta, a son
+      of Stare, but on the mother's side of a Throndhjem family, -a very
+      agreeable man. When the troops came to know that these three were on board
+      his ship, they took their weapons and assaulted the vessel, and some blows
+      were exchanged, and the whole fleet had nearly come to a fight among
+      themselves; but it came to an agreement, so that Jon ransomed his brothers
+      Ivar and Arnbjorn for a fixed sum in ransom, which, however, was
+      afterwards remitted. But Ivar Dynta was taken to the shore, and beheaded;
+      for Sigurd and Gyrd, the sons of Kolbein, would not take any mulct for
+      him, as they knew he had been at their brother Beintein's murder. Ivar the
+      bishop said, that never was there anything that touched him so nearly, as
+      Ivar's going to the shore under the axe, and turning to the others with
+      the wish that they might meet in joy here-after. Gudrid Birger's daughter,
+      a sister of Archbishop Jon, told Eirik Odson that she heard Bishop Ivar
+      say this.
+      11. SIGURD SLEMBE TAKEN PRISONER.
+      A man called Thrand Gialdkere was the steersman of King Inge's ship. It
+      was come so far, that Inge's men were rowing in small boats between the
+      ships after those who were swimming in the water, and killed those they
+      could get hold of. Sigurd Slembe threw himself overboard after his ship
+      had lost her crew, stripped off his armour under the water, and then swam
+      with his shield over him. Some men from Thrand's vessel took prisoner a
+      man who was swimming, and were about to kill him; but he begged his life,
+      and offered to tell them where Sigurd Slembe was, and they agreed to it.
+      Shields and spears, dead men, weapons, and clothes, were floating all
+      around on the sea about the ships, "Ye can see," said he, "a red shield
+      floating on the water; he is under it." They rowed to it immediately, took
+      him, and brought him on board of Thrand's ship. Thrand then sent a message
+      to Thjostolf, Ottar, and Amunde. Sigurd Slembe had a tinder box on him;
+      and the tinder was in a walnut-shell, around which there was wax. This is
+      related, because it seems an ingenious way of preserving it from ever
+      getting wet. He swam with a shield over him, because nobody could know one
+      shield from another where so many were floating about; and they would
+      never have hit upon him, if they had not been told where he was. When
+      Thrand came to the land with Sigurd, and it was told to the troops that he
+      was taken, the army set up a shout of joy. When Sigurd heard it he said,
+      "Many a bad man will rejoice over my head this day." Then Thjostolf Alason
+      went to where Sigurd was sitting, struck from his head a silk hat with
+      silver fringes, and said. "Why wert thou so impudent, thou son of a slave!
+      to dare to call thyself King Magnus Barefoot's son?"
+      Sigurd replied, "Presume not to compare my father to a slave; for thy
+      father was of little worth compared to mine."
+      Hal, a son of the doctor Thorgeir Steinson, King Inge's court-man, was
+      present at this circumstance, and told it to Eirik Odson, who afterwards
+      wrote these relations in a book, which he called "Hryggjarstykke". In this
+      book is told all concerning Harald Gille and his sons, and Magnus the
+      Blind, and Sigurd Slembidjakn, until their deaths. Eirik was a sensible
+      man, who was long in Norway about that time. Some of his narratives he
+      wrote down from Hakon Mage's account; some were from lendermen of Harald's
+      sons, who along with his sons were in all this feud, and in all the
+      councils. Eirik names, moreover, several men of understanding and
+      veracity, who told him these accounts, and were so near that they saw or
+      heard all that happened. Something he wrote from what he himself had heard
+      or seen.
+      12. TORTURE OF SIGURD SLEMBE.
+      Hal says that the chiefs wished to have Sigurd killed instantly; but the
+      men who were the most cruel, and thought they had injuries to avenge,
+      advised torturing him; and for this they named Beintein's brothers, Sigurd
+      and Gyrd, the sons of Kolbein. Peter Byrdarsvein would also avenge his
+      brother Fin. But the chiefs and the greater part of the people went away.
+      They broke his shin-bones and arms with an axe-hammer. Then they stripped
+      him, and would flay him alive; but when they tried to take off the skin,
+      they could not do it for the gush of blood. They took leather whips and
+      flogged him so long, that the skin was as much taken off as if he had been
+      flayed. Then they stuck a piece of wood in his back until it broke,
+      dragged him to a tree and hanged him; and then cut off his head, and
+      brought the body and head to a heap of stones and buried them there. All
+      acknowledge, both enemies and friends, that no man in Norway, within
+      memory of the living, was more gifted with all perfections, or more
+      experienced, than Sigurd, but in some respects he was an unlucky man. Hal
+      says that he spoke little, and answered only a few, and in single words,
+      under his tortures, although they spoke to him. Hal says further, that he
+      never moved when they tortured him, more than if they were striking a
+      stock or a stone. This Hal alleged as proof that he was a brave hero, who
+      had courage to endure tortures; for he still held his tongue, and never
+      moved from the spot. And farther he says, that he never altered his voice
+      in the least, but spoke with as much ease as if he was sitting at the
+      ale-table; neither speaking higher nor lower, nor in a more tremulous
+      voice than he was used to do. He spoke until he gave up the ghost, and
+      sang between whiles parts of the Psalm-book, and which Hal considered
+      beyond the powers and strength of ordinary men. And the priest who had the
+      church in the neighbourhood let Sigurd's body be transported thither to
+      the church. This priest was a friend of Harald's sons: but when they heard
+      it they were angry at him, had the body carried back to where it had been,
+      and made the priest pay a fine. Sigurd's friends afterwards came from
+      Denmark with a ship for his body, carried it to Alaborg, and interred it
+      in Mary church in that town. So said Dean Ketil, who officiated as priest
+      at Mary church, to Eirik; and that Sigurd was buried there. Thjostolf
+      Alason transported Magnus the Blind's body to Oslo, and buried it in
+      Halvard's church, beside King Sigurd his father. Lodin Saupprud was
+      transported to Tunsberg; but the others of the slain were buried on the
+      spot.
+      13. EYSTEIN HARALDSON COMES TO NORWAY.
+      When the kings Sigurd and Inge had ruled over Norway about six years,
+      Eystein, who was a son of Harald Gille, came in spring from Scotland (A.D.
+      1142). Arne Sturla, Thorleif Brynjolfson, and Kolbein Hruga had sailed
+      westward over the sea after Eystein, accompanied him to Norway, and sailed
+      immediately with him to Throndhjem. The Throndhjem people received him
+      well; and at the Eyra-thing of Ascension-day he was chosen king, so that
+      he should have the third part of Norway with his brothers Sigurd and Inge.
+      They were at this time in the east part of the country; and men went
+      between the kings who brought about a peace, and that Eystein should have
+      a third part of the kingdom. People believed what he said of his paternal
+      descent, because King Harald himself had testified to it, and he did not
+      resort to the ordeal of iron. King Eystein's mother was called Bjadok, and
+      she followed him to Norway. Magnus was the name of King Harald Gille's
+      fourth son, who was fostered by Kyrpingaorm. He also was chosen king, and
+      got a fourth part of the country; but Magnus was deformed in his feet,
+      lived but a short time, and died in his bed. Einar Skulason speaks of
+      them: -
+     "The generous Eystein money gave;
+     Sigurd in fight was quick and brave;
+     Inge loved well the war-alarm;
+     Magnus to save his land from harm.
+     No country boasts a nobler race
+     The battle-field, or Thing, to grace.
+     Four brothers of such high pretence
+     The sun ne'er shone upon at once."
+      14. MURDER OF OTTAR BIRTING.
+      After King Harald Gille's death Queen Ingerid married Ottar Birting, who
+      was a lendermen and a great chief, and of a Throndhjem family, who
+      strengthened King Inge's government much while he was in his childhood.
+      King Sigurd was not very friendly to Ottar; because, as he thought, Ottar
+      always took King Inge's side. Ottar Birting was killed north in the
+      merchant town (Nidaros), in an assault upon him in the twilight as he was
+      going to the evening song. When he heard the whistling of the blow he held
+      up his cloak with his hands against it; thinking, no doubt, it was a
+      snowball thrown at him, as young boys do in the streets. Ottar fell by the
+      stroke; but his son, Alf Hrode, who just at the same moment was coming
+      into the churchyard, saw his father's fall, and saw that the man who had
+      killed him ran east about the church. Alf ran after him, and killed him at
+      the corner of the choir; and people said that he had good luck in avenging
+      his father, and afterwards was much more respected than he had been
+      before.
+      15. BEGINNING OF KING EYSTEIN.
+      King Eystein Haraldson was in the interior of the Throndhjem district when
+      he heard of Ottar's murder, and summoned to him the bonde-army, with which
+      he proceeded to the town; and he had many men. Ottar's relations and other
+      friends accused King Sigurd, who was in the town, of having instigated
+      this deed; and the bondes were much enraged against him. But the king
+      offered to clear himself by the ordeal of iron, and thereby to establish
+      the truth of his denial; and accordingly a peace was made. King Sigurd
+      went to the south end of the country, and the ordeal was never afterwards
+      heard of.
+      16. BEGINNING OF ORM THE KING-BROTHER.
+      Queen Ingerid had a son to Ivar Sneis, and he was called Orm, and got the
+      surname of King-brother. He was a handsome man in appearance, and became a
+      great chief, as shall be told hereafter. Ingerid afterwards married Arne
+      of Stodreim, who was from this called King's-mate; and their children were
+      Inge, Nikolas, Philip of Herdla, and Margaret, who was first married to
+      Bjorn Buk, and afterwards to Simon Karason.
+      17. JOURNEY OF ERLING SKAKKE AND EARL RAGNVALD.
+      Kyrpingaorm and Ragnhild, a daughter of Sveinke Steinarson, had a son
+      called Erling. Kyrpingaorm was a son of Svein Sveinson, who was a son of
+      Erling of Gerd. Otto's mother was Ragna, a daughter of Earl Orm Eilifson
+      and Sigrid, a daughter of Earl Fin Arnason. The mother of Earl Orm was
+      Ragnhild, a daughter of Earl Hakon the Great. Erling was a man of
+      understanding, and a great friend of King Inge, by whose assistance and
+      counsel Erling obtained in marriage Christina, a daughter of King Sigurd
+      the Crusader and Queen Malmfrid. Erling possessed a farm at Studla in
+      South Hordaland. Erling left the country; and with him went Eindride Unge
+      and several lendermen, who had chosen men with them. They intended to make
+      a pilgrimage to Jerusalem, and went across the West sea to Orkney. There
+      Earl Ragnvald and Bishop William joined them; and they had in all fifteen
+      ships from Orkney, with which they first sailed to the South Hebrides,
+      from thence west to Valland, and then the same way King Sigurd the
+      Crusader had sailed to Norvasund; and they plundered all around in the
+      heathen part of Spain. Soon after they had sailed through the Norvasund,
+      Eindride Unge and his followers, with six ships, separated from them; and
+      then each was for himself. Earl Ragnvald and Erling Skakke fell in with a
+      large ship of burden at sea called a dromund, and gave battle to it with
+      nine ships. At last they laid their cutters close under the dromund; but
+      the heathens threw both weapons and stones, and pots full of pitch and
+      boiling oil. Erling laid his ship so close under the dromund, that the
+      missiles of the heathens fell without his ship. Then Erling and his men
+      cut a hole in the dromund, some working below and some above the
+      water-mark; and so they boarded the vessel through it. So says Thorbjorn
+      Skakkaskald, in his poem on Erling: -
+     "The axes of the Northmen bold
+     A door into the huge ships' hold
+     Hewed through her high and curved side,
+     As snug beneath her bulge they ride.
+     Their spears bring down the astonished foe,
+     Who cannot see from whence the blow.
+     The eagle's prey, they, man by man,
+     Fall by the Northmen's daring plan."
+      Audunraude, Erling's forecastle-man, was the first man who got into the
+      dromund. Then they carried her, killing an immense number of people;
+      making an extraordinarily valuable booty, and gaining a famous victory.
+      Earl Ragnvald and Erling Skakke came to Palestine in the course of their
+      expedition, and all the way to the river Jordan. From thence they went
+      first to Constantinople, where they left their ships, travelled northwards
+      by land, and arrived in safety in Norway, where their journey was highly
+      praised. Erling Skakke appeared now a much greater man than before, both
+      on account of his journey and of his marriage; besides he was a prudent
+      sensible man, rich, of great family, eloquent, and devoted to King Inge by
+      the strictest friendship more than to the other royal brothers.
+      18. BIRTH OF HAKON HERDEBREID.
+      King Sigurd went to a feast east in Viken along with his court, and rode
+      past a house belonging to a great bonde called Simon. While the king was
+      riding past the house, he heard within such beautiful singing that he was
+      quite enchanted with it, and rode up to the house, and saw a lovely girl
+      standing at the handmill and grinding. The king got off his horse, and
+      went to the girl and courted her. When the king went away, the bonde Simon
+      came to know what the object of the king's visit had been. The girl was
+      called Thora, and she was Simon the bonde's servant-girl. Simon took good
+      care of her afterwards, and the girl brought forth a male child (A.D.
+      1047), who was called Hakon, and was considered King Sigurd's son. Hakon
+      was brought up by Simon Thorbergson and his wife Gunhild. Their own sons
+      also, Onund and Andreas, were brought up with Hakon, and were so dear to
+      him that death only could have parted them.
+      19. EYSTEIN AND THE PEASANTS OF HISING ISLE.
+      While King Eystein Haraldson was in Viken, he fell into disputes with the
+      bondes of Reine and the inhabitants of Hising Isle, who assembled to
+      oppose him; but he gave them battle at a place called Leikberg, and
+      afterwards burnt and destroyed all around in Hising; so that the bondes
+      submitted to his will, paid great fines to the king, and he took hostages
+      from them. So says Einar Skulason: -
+     "The Viken men
+     Won't strive again,
+     With words or blows,
+     The king to oppose.
+     None safety found
+     On Viken's ground,
+     Till all, afraid,
+     Pledge and scat paid."
+      And further: -
+     "The king came near;
+     He who is dear
+     To all good men
+     Came down the glen,
+     By Leikberg hill.
+     They who do ill,
+     The Reine folk, fly
+     Or quarter cry."
+      20. WAR EXPEDITION OF KING HARALDSON.
+      Soon after King Eystein began his journey out of the country over sea to
+      the West (A.D. 1153), and sailed first to Caithness. Here he heard that
+      Earl Harald Maddad's son was in Thursa, to which he sailed directly in
+      three small boats. The earl had a ship of thirty banks of oars, and nearly
+      eighty men in her. But they were not prepared to make resistance, so that
+      King Eystein was able to board the ship with his men; and he took the earl
+      prisoner, and carried him to his own ship, but the earl ransomed himself
+      with three marks of gold: and thus they parted. Einar Skulason tells of it
+      thus: -
+     "Earl Harald in his stout ship lay
+     On the bright sand in Thursa bay;
+     With fourscore men he had no fear,
+     Nor thought the Norse king was so near,
+     He who provides the eagle's meals
+     In three small boats along-shore steals;
+     And Maddad's son must ransom pay
+     For his bad outlook that fair day."
+      From thence King Eystein sailed south along the east side of Scotland, and
+      brought up at a merchant-town in Scotland called Aberdeen, where he killed
+      many people, and plundered the town. So says Einar Skulason: -
+     "At Aberdeen, too, I am told,
+     Fell many by our Norsemen bold;
+     Peace was disturbed, and blue swords broke
+     With many a hard and bloody stroke."
+      The next battle was at Hartlepool in the south, with a party of horsemen.
+      The king put them to flight, and seized some ships there. So says Einar: -
+     "At Hartlepool, in rank and row,
+     The king's court-men attack the foe.
+     The king's sharp sword in blood was red,
+     Blood dropped from every Norse spear-head.
+     Ravens rejoice o'er the warm food
+     Of English slain, each where he stood;
+     And in the ships their thirst was quenched:
+     The decks were in the foe's blood drenched."
+      Then he went southwards to England, and had his third battle at Whitby,
+      and gained the victory, and burnt the town. So says Einar: -
+     "The ring of swords, the clash of shields,
+     Were loud in Whitby's peaceful fields;
+     For here the king stirred up the strife. -
+     Man against man, for death or life.
+     O'er roof and tower, rose on high
+     The red wrath-fire in the sky;
+     House after house the red fiend burns;
+     By blackened walls the poor man mourns."
+      Thereafter he plundered wide around in England, where Stephen was then the
+      king. After this King Eystein fought with some cavalry at Skarpasker. So
+      says Einar: -
+     "At Skarpasker the English horse
+     Retire before the Norse king's force:
+     The arrow-shower like snow-drift flew,
+     And the shield-covered foemen slew."
+      He fought next at Pilavik, and gained the victory. So says Einar: -
+     "At Pilavik the wild wolf feeds,
+     Well furnished by the king's brave deeds
+     He poured upon the grass-green plain
+     A red shower from the Perthmen slain.
+     On westwards in the sea he urges,
+     With fire and sword the country purges:
+     Langtown he burns; the country rang,
+     For sword on shield incessant clang."
+      Here they burnt Langatun, a large village; and people say that the town
+      has never since risen to its former condition. After this King Eystein
+      left England in autumn, and returned to Norway. People spoke in various
+      ways about this expedition.
+      21. OF HARALD'S SONS.
+      There was good peace maintained in Norway in the first years of the
+      government of Harald's sons; and as long as their old counsellors were
+      alive, there was some kind of unanimity among them. While Inge and Sigurd
+      were in their childhood, they had a court together; but Eystein, who was
+      come to age of discretion, had a court for himself. But when Inge's and
+      Sigurd's counsellors were dead, -namely, Sadagyrd Bardson, Ottar
+      Birting, Amunde Gyrdson, Thjostolf Alason, Ogmund Svipter, and Ogmund
+      Denger, a brother of Erling Skakke (Erling was not much looked up to while
+      Ogmund lived), -the two kings, Inge and Sigurd divided their courts.
+      King Inge then got great assistance from Gregorius Dagson, a son of Dag
+      Eilifson by Ragnhild a daughter of Skapte Ogmundson. Gregorius had much
+      property, and was himself a thriving, sagacious man. He presided in the
+      governing the country under King Inge, and the king allowed him to manage
+      his property for him according to his own judgment.
+      22. HABITS AND MANNERS OF HARALD'S SONS.
+      When King Sigurd grew up he was a very ungovernable, restless man in every
+      way; and so was King Eystein, but Eystein was the more reasonable of the
+      two. King Sigurd was a stout and strong man, of a brisk appearance; he had
+      light brown hair, an ugly mouth; but otherwise a well-shaped countenance.
+      He was polite in his conversation beyond any man, and was expert in all
+      exercises. Einar Skulason speaks of this: -
+     "Sigurd, expert in every way
+     To wield the sword in bloody fray,
+     Showed well that to the bold and brave
+     God always luck and victory gave.
+     In speech, as well as bloody deeds,
+     The king all other men exceeds;
+     And when he speaks we think that none
+     Has said a word but he alone."
+      King Eystein was dark and dingy in complexion, of middle height, and a
+      prudent able man; but what deprived him of consideration and popularity
+      with those under him were his avarice and narrowness. He was married to
+      Ragna, a daughter of Nicolas Mase. King Inge was the handsomest among them
+      in countenance. He had yellow but rather thin hair, which was much curled.
+      His stature was small; and he had difficulty in walking alone, because he
+      had one foot withered, and he had a hump both on his back and his breast.
+      He was of cheerful conversation, and friendly towards his friends; was
+      generous, and allowed other chiefs to give him counsel in governing the
+      country. He was popular, therefore, with the public; and all this brought
+      the kingdom and the mass of the people on his side. King Harald Gille's
+      daughter Brigida was first married to the Swedish king Inge Halsteinson,
+      and afterwards to Earl Karl Sonason, and then to the Swedish king Magnus.
+      She and King Inge Haraldson were cousins by the mother's side. At last
+      Brigida married Earl Birger Brose, and they had four sons, namely, Earl
+      Philip, Earl Knut, Folke, and Magnus. Their daughters were Ingegerd, who
+      was married to the Swedish king Sorkver, and their son was King Jon; a
+      second daughter was called Kristin, and a third Margaret. Harald Gille's
+      second daughter was called Maria, who was married to Simon Skalp, a son of
+      Halkel Huk; and their son was called Nikolas. King Harald Gille's third
+      daughter was called Margaret, who was married to Jon Halkelson, a brother
+      of Simon. Now many things occurred between the brothers which occasioned
+      differences and disputes; but I will only relate what appears to me to
+      have produced the more important events.
+      23. CARDINAL NIKOLAS COMES TO THE COUNTRY.
+      In the days of Harald's sons Cardinal Nikolas came from Rome to Norway,
+      being sent there by the pope. The cardinal had taken offence at the
+      brothers Sigurd and Eystein, and they were obliged to come to a
+      reconciliation with him; but, on the other hand, he stood on the most
+      affectionate terms with King Inge, whom he called his son. Now when they
+      were all reconciled with him, he moved them to let Jon Birgerson be
+      consecrated archbishop of Throndhjem and gave him a vestment which is
+      called a pallium; and settled moreover that the archbishop's seat should
+      be in Nidaros, in Christ church, where King Olaf the Saint reposes. Before
+      that time there had only been common bishops in Norway. The cardinal
+      introduced also the law, that no man should go unpunished who appeared
+      with arms in the merchant-town, excepting the twelve men who were in
+      attendancce on the king. He improved many of the customs of the Northmen
+      while he was in the country. There never came a foreigner to Norway whom
+      all men respected so highly, or who could govern the people so well as he
+      did. After some time he returned to the South with many friendly presents,
+      and declared ever afterwards that he was the greatest friend of the people
+      of Norway. When he came south to Rome the former pope died suddenly, and
+      all the people of Rome would have Cardinal Nikolas for pope, and he was
+      consecrated under the name of Adrian; and according to the report of men
+      who went to Rome in his days, he had never any business, however
+      important, to settle with other people, but he would break it off to speak
+      with the Northmen who desired to see him. He was not long pope, and is now
+      considered a saint.
+      24. MIRACLE OF KING OLAF.
+      In the time of Harald Gille's sons, it happened that a man called Haldor
+      fell into the hands of the Vindland people, who took him and mutilated
+      him, cut open his neck, took out the tongue through the opening, and cut
+      out his tongue root. He afterwards sought out the holy King Olaf, fixed
+      his mind entirely on the holy man, and weeping besought King Olaf to
+      restore his speech and health. Thereupon he immediately recovered his
+      speech by the good king's compassion, went immediately into his service
+      for all his life, and became an excellent trustworthy man. This miracle
+      took place a fortnight before the last Olafsmas, upon the day that
+      Cardinal Nikolas set foot on the land of Norway.
+      25. MIRACLES OF KING OLAF ON RICHARD.
+      In the Uplands were two brothers, men of great family, and men of fortune,
+      Einar and Andres, sons of Guthorm Grabard, and brothers of King Sigurd
+      Haraldson's mother; and they had great properties and udal estates in that
+      quarter. They had a sister who was very handsome, but did not pay
+      sufficient regard to the scandal of evil persons, as it afterwards
+      appeared. She was on a friendly footing with an English priest called
+      Richard, who had a welcome to the house of her brothers, and on account of
+      their friendship for him she did many things to please him, and often to
+      his advantage; but the end of all this was, that an ugly report flew about
+      concerning this girl. When this came into the mouth of the public all men
+      threw the blame on the priest. Her brothers did the same, and expressed
+      publicly, as soon as they observed it, that they laid the blame most on
+      him. The great friendship that was between the earl and the priest proved
+      a great misfortune to both, which might have been expected, as the
+      brothers were silent about their secret determination, and let nothing be
+      observed. But one day they called the priest to them, who went, expecting
+      nothing but good from them; enticed him from home with them, saying that
+      they intended to go to another district, where they had some needful
+      business, and inviting him to go with them. They had with them a
+      farm-servant who knew their purpose. They went in a boat along the shore
+      of a lake which is called Rands lake, and landed at a ness called
+      Skiptisand, where they went on shore and amused themselves awhile. Then
+      they went to a retired place, and commanded their servant-man to strike
+      the priest with an axe-hammer. He struck the priest so hard that he
+      swooned; but when he recovered he said, "Why are ye playing so roughly
+      with me?" They replied, "Although nobody has told thee of it before, thou
+      shalt now find the consequence of what thou hast done." They then
+      upbraided him; but he denied their accusations, and besought God and the
+      holy King Olaf to judge between them. Then they broke his leg-bones, and
+      dragged him bound to the forest with them; and then they put a string
+      around his head, and put a board under his head and shoulders, and made a
+      knot on the string, and bound his head fast to the board. Then the elder
+      brother, Einar, took a wedge, and put it on the priest's eye, and the
+      servant who stood beside him struck upon it with an axe, so that the eye
+      flew out, and fell upon the board. Then he set the pin upon the other eye,
+      and said to the servant, "Strike now more softly." He did so, and the
+      wedge sprang from the eye-stone, and tore the eyelid loose. Then Einar
+      took up the eyelid in his hand, and saw that the eye-stone was still in
+      its place; and he set the wedge on the cheek, and when the servant struck
+      it the eye-stone sprang out upon the cheek-bone. Thereafter they opened
+      his mouth, took his tongue and cut it off, and then untied his hands and
+      his head. As soon as he came to himself, he thought of laying the
+      eye-stones in their place under the eyelids, and pressing then with both
+      hands as much as he could. Then they carried him on board, and went to a
+      farm called Saeheimrud, where they landed. They sent up to the farm to say
+      that a priest was lying in the boat at the shore. While the message was
+      going to the farm, they asked the priest if he could talk; and he made a
+      noise and attempted to speak. Then said Einar to his brother, "If he
+      recover and the stump of his tongue grow, I am afraid he will get his
+      speech again." Thereupon they seized the stump with a pair of tongs, drew
+      it out, cut it twice, and the third time to the very roots, and left him
+      lying half dead. The housewife in the farm was poor; but she hastened to
+      the place with her daughter, and they carried the priest home to their
+      farm in their cloaks. They then brought a priest, and when he arrived he
+      bound all his wounds; and they attended to his comfort as much as they
+      were able. And thus lay the wounded priest grievously handled, but
+      trusting always to God's grace, and never doubting; and although he was
+      speechless, he prayed to God in thought with a sorrowful mind, but with
+      the more confidence the worse he was. He turned his thoughts also to the
+      mild King Olaf the Saint, God's dear favourite, of whose excellent deeds
+      he had heard so much told, and trusted so much more zealously on him with
+      all his heart for help in his necessity. As he lay there lame, and
+      deprived of all strength, he wept bitterly, moaned, and prayed with a sore
+      heart that the dear King Olaf would help him. Now when this wounded priest
+      was sleeping after midnight, he thought he saw a gallant man coming to
+      him, who spoke these words, "Thou art ill off, friend Richard, and thy
+      strength is little." He thought he replied to this assentingly. Then the
+      man accosted him again, "Thou requirest compassion?" The priest replies,
+      "I need the compassion of Almighty God and the holy King Olaf." He
+      answered, "Thou shalt get it." Thereupon he pulled the tongue-stump so
+      hard that it gave the priest pain; then he stroked with his hands his
+      eyes, and legs, and other wounded members. Then the priest asked who he
+      was. He looked at him, and said, "Olaf, come here from Throndhjem;" and
+      then disappeared. But the priest awoke altogether sound, and thus he
+      spoke: "Happy am I, and thanks be to the Almighty God and the holy King
+      Olaf, who have restored me!" Dreadfully mishandled as he had been, yet so
+      quickly was he restored from his misfortune that he scarcely thought he
+      had been wounded or sick. His tongue was entire; both his eyes were in
+      their places, and were clear-sighted; his broken legs and every other
+      wound were healed, or were free from pain; and, in short, he had got
+      perfect health. But as a proof that his eyes had been punched out, there
+      remained a white scar on each eyelid, in order that this dear king's
+      excellence might be manifest on the man who had been so dreadfully
+      misused.
+      26. KING INGE AND SIGURD HOLD A THING.
+      King Eystein and King Sigurd had quarrelled, because King Sigurd had
+      killed King Eystein's court-man Harald, the Viken man, who owned a house
+      in Bergen, and also the priest Jon Tapard, a son of Bjarne Sigurdson. On
+      account of this affair, a conference to settle it was appointed in winter
+      in the Uplands. The two sat together in the conference for a long time,
+      and so much was known of their conference that all three brothers were to
+      meet the following summer in Bergen. It was added, that their conference
+      was to the effect that King Inge should have two or three farms, and as
+      much income as would keep thirty men beside him, as he had not health to
+      be a king. When King Inge and Gregorius heard this report, they came to
+      Bergen with many followers. King Sigurd arrived there a little later, and
+      was not nearly so strong in men. Sigurd and Inge had then been nineteen
+      years kings of Norway (A.D. 1155). King Eystein came later still from the
+      south than the other two from the north. Then King Inge ordered the Thing
+      to be called together on the holm by the sound of trumpet; and Sigurd and
+      Inge came to it with a great many people. Gregorius had two long-ships,
+      and at the least ninety men, whom he kept in provisions. He kept his
+      house-men better than other lendermen; for he never took part in any
+      entertainment where each guest brings his liquor, without having all his
+      house-men to drink with him. He went now to the Thing in a gold-mounted
+      helmet, and all his men had helmets on. Then King Inge stood up, and told
+      the assembly what he had heard; how his brothers were going to use him,
+      and depose him from his kingdom; and asked for their assistance. The
+      assembled people made a good return to his speech, and declared they would
+      follow him.
+      27. OF GREGORIUS DAGSON.
+      Then King Sigurd stood up and said it was a false accusation that King
+      Inge had made against him and his brother, and insisted that Gregorius had
+      invented it; and insinuated that it would not be long, if he had his will,
+      before they should meet so that the golden helmet should be doffed; and
+      ended his speech by hinting that they could not both live. Gregorius
+      replied, that Sigurd need not long so much for this, as he was ready now,
+      if it must be so. A few days after, one of Gregorius's house-men was
+      killed out upon the street, and it was Sigurd's house-men who killed him.
+      Gregorius would then have fallen upon King Sigurd and his people; but King
+      Inge, and many others, kept him back. But one evening, just as Queen
+      Ingerid, King Inge's mother, was coming from vespers, she came past where
+      Sigurd Skrudhyrna, a courtman of King Inge, lay murdered. He was then an
+      old man, and had served many kings. King Sigurd's courtmen, Halyard
+      Gunnarson, and Sigurd, a son of Eystein Trafale, had killed him; and
+      people suspected it was done by order of King Sigurd. She went immediately
+      to King Inge, and told him he would be a little king if he took no
+      concern, but allowed his court-men to be killed, the one after the other,
+      like swine. The king was angry at her speech; and while they were scolding
+      about it, came Gregorius in helmet and armour, and told the king not to be
+      angry, for she was only saying the truth. "And I am now," says he, "come
+      to thy assistance, if thou wilt attack King Sigurd; and here we are, above
+      100 men in helmets and armour, and with them we will attack where others
+      think the attack may be worst." But the most dissuaded from this course,
+      thinking that Sigurd would pay the mulct for the slaughter done. Now when
+      Gregorius saw that there would be no assault, he accosted King Inge thus:
+      "Thou wilt frighten thy men from thee in this way; for first they lately
+      killed my house-man, and now thy court-man, and afterwards they will chase
+      me, or some other of thy lendermen whom thou wouldst feel the loss of,
+      when they see that thou art indifferent about such things; and at last,
+      after thy friends are killed, they will take the royal dignity from thee.
+      Whatever thy other lendermen may do, I will not stay here longer to be
+      slaughtered like an ox; but Sigurd the king and I have a business to
+      settle with each other to-night, in whatever way it may turn out. It is
+      true that there is but little help in thee on account of thy ill health,
+      but I should think thy will should not be less to hold thy hand over thy
+      friends, and I am now quite ready to go from hence to meet Sigurd, and my
+      banner is flying in the yard."
+      Then King Inge stood up, and called for his arms, and ordered every man
+      who wished to follow him to get ready, declaring it was of no use to try
+      to dissuade him; for he had long enough avoided this, but now steel must
+      determine between them.
+      28. OF KING SIGURD'S FALL.
+      King Sigurd sat and drank in Sigrid Saeta's house ready for battle,
+      although people thought it would not come to an assault at all. Then came
+      King Inge with his men down the road from the smithy shops, against the
+      house. Arne, the king's brother-in-law, came out from the Sand-bridge,
+      Aslak Erlendson from his own house, and Gregorius from the street where
+      all thought the assault would be worst. King Sigurd and his men made many
+      shots from the holes in the loft, broke down the fireplaces, and threw
+      stones on them. Gregorius and his men cut down the gates of the yard; and
+      there in the port fell Einar, a son of Laxapaul, who was of Sigurd's
+      people, together with Halvard Gunnarson, who was shot in a loft, and
+      nobody lamented his death. They hewed down the houses, and many of King
+      Sigurd's men left him, and surrendered for quarter. Then King Sigurd went
+      up into a loft, and desired to be heard. He had a gilt shield, by which
+      they knew him, but they would not listen to him, and shot arrows at him as
+      thick as snow in a snow-shower, so that he could not stay there. As his
+      men had now left him, and the houses were being hewn down, he went out
+      from thence, and with him his court-man Thord Husfreyja from Viken. They
+      wanted to come where King Inge was to be found, and Sigurd called to his
+      brother King Inge, and begged him to grant him life and safety; but both
+      Thord and Sigurd were instantly killed, and Thord fell with great glory.
+      King Sigurd was interred in the old Christ church out on the holm. King
+      Inge gave Gregorius the ship King Sigurd had owned. There fell many of
+      King Sigurd's and King Inge's men, although I only name a few; but of
+      Gregorius's men there fell four; and also some who belonged to no party,
+      but were shot on the piers, or out in the ships. It was fought on a
+      Friday, and fourteen days before Saint John the Baptist's day (June 10,
+      1155). Two or three days after King Eystein came from the eastward with
+      thirty ships, and had along with him his brother's son Hakon, a son of
+      King Sigurd. Eystein did not come up to the town, but lay in Floruvagar,
+      and good men went between to get a reconciliation made. But Gregorius
+      wanted that they should go out against him, thinking there never would be
+      a better opportunity; and offered to be himself the leader. "For thou,
+      king, shalt not go, for we have no want of men." But many dissuaded from
+      this course, and it came to nothing. King Eystein returned back to Viken,
+      and King Inge to Throndhjem, and they were in a sort reconciled; but they
+      did not meet each other.
+      29. OF GREGORIUS DAGSON.
+      Somewhat later than King Eystein, Gregorius Dagson also set out to the
+      eastward and came to his farm Bratsberg in Hofund; but King Eystein was up
+      in the fjord at Oslo, and had his ships drawn above two miles over the
+      frozen sea, for there was much ice at that time in Viken. King Eystein
+      went up to Hofund to take Gregorius; but he got news of what was on foot,
+      and escaped to Thelemark with ninety men, from thence over the mountains,
+      and came down in Hardanger; and at last to Studla in Etne, to Erling
+      Skakke's farm. Erling himself had gone north to Bergen; but his wife
+      Kristin, a daughter of King Sigurd, was at home, and offered Gregorius all
+      the assistance he wanted; and he was hospitably received. He got a
+      long-ship there which belonged to Erling, and everything else he required.
+      Gregorius thanked her kindly, and allowed that she had behaved nobly, and
+      as might have been expected of her. Gregorius then proceeded to Bergen,
+      where he met Erling, who thought also that his wife had done well.
+      30. RECONCILIATION OF EYSTEIN AND INGE.
+      Then Gregorius went north to Throndhjem, and came there before Yule. King
+      Inge was rejoiced at his safety, and told him to use his property as
+      freely as his own, King Eystein having burnt Gregorius's house, and
+      slaughtered his stock of cattle. The ship-docks which King Eystein the
+      Elder had constructed in the merchant town of Nidaros, and which had been
+      exceedingly expensive, were also burnt this winter, together with some
+      good vessels belonging to King Inge. This deed was ascribed to King
+      Eystein and Philip Gyrdson, King Sigurd's foster-brother, and occasioned
+      much displeasure and hatred. The following summer King Inge went south
+      with a very numerous body of men; and King Eystein came northwards,
+      gathering men also. They met in the east (A.D. 1156) at the Seleys, near
+      to the Naze; but King Inge was by far the strongest in men. It was nearly
+      coming to a battle; but at last they were reconciled on these conditions,
+      that King Eystein should be bound to pay forty-five marks of gold, of
+      which King Inge should have thirty marks, because King Eystein had
+      occasioned the burning of the docks and ships; and, besides, that Philip,
+      and all who had been accomplices in the deed, should be outlawed. Also
+      that the men should be banished the country, against whom it could be
+      proved that they gave blow or wound to King Sigurd; for King Eystein
+      accused King Inge of protecting these men; and that Gregorius should have
+      fifteen marks of gold for the value of his property burnt by King Eystein.
+      King Eystein was ill pleased with these terms, and looked upon the treaty
+      as one forced upon him. From that meeting King Inge went eastward to
+      Viken, and King Eystein north to Throndhjem; and they had no intercourse
+      with each other, nor were the messages which passed between them very
+      friendly, and on both sides they killed each other's friends. King
+      Eystein, besides, did not pay the money; and the one accused the other of
+      not fulfilling what was promised. King Inge and Gregorius enticed many
+      people from King Eystein; among others, Bard Standale Brynjolfson, Simon
+      Skalp, a son of Halkel Huk, Halder Brynjolfson, Jon Halkelson, and many
+      other lendermen.
+      31. OF EYSTEIN AND INGE.
+      Two years after King Sigurd's fall (A.D. 1157) both kings assembled
+      armaments; namely, King Inge in the east of the country, where he
+      collected eighty ships; and King Eystein in the north, where he had
+      forty-five, and among these the Great Dragon, which King Eystein Magnuson
+      had built after the Long Serpent; and they had on both sides many and
+      excellent troops. King Inge lay with his ships south at Moster Isle, and
+      King Eystein a little to the north in Graeningasund. King Eystein sent the
+      young Aslak Jonson, and Arne Sturla, a son of Snaebjorn, with one ship to
+      meet King Inge; but when the king's men knew them, they assaulted them,
+      killed many of their people, and took all that was in the ship belonging
+      to them. Aslak and Arne and a few more escaped to the land, went to King
+      Eystein, and told him how King Inge had received them. Thereupon King
+      Eystein held a House-thing, and told his followers how ill King Inge had
+      treated his men, and desired the troops to follow him. "I have," said he,
+      "so many, and such excellent men, that I have no intention to fly, if ye
+      will follow me." But this speech was not received with much favour. Halkel
+      Huk was there; but both his sons, Simon and Jon, were with King Inge.
+      Halkel replied, so loud that many heard him, "Let thy chests of gold
+      follow thee, and let them defend thy land."
+      32. KING EYSTEIN'S DEATH.
+      In the night many of King Eystein's ships rowed secretly away, some of
+      them joining King Inge, some going to Bergen, or up into the fjords; so
+      that when it was daylight in the morning the king was lying behind with
+      only ten ships. Then he left the Great Dragon, which was heavy to row, and
+      several other vessels behind; and cut and destroyed the Dragon, started
+      out the ale, and destroyed all that they could not take with them. King
+      Eystein went on board of the ship of Eindride, a son of Jon Morner, sailed
+      north into Sogn, and then took the land-road eastwards to Viken. King Inge
+      took the vessels, and sailed with them outside of the isles to Viken. King
+      Eystein had then got east as far as Fold, and had with him 1200 men; but
+      when they saw King Inge's force, they did not think themselves
+      sufficiently strong to oppose him, and they retired to the forest. Every
+      one fled his own way, so that the king was left with but one man. King
+      Inge and his men observed King Eystein's flight, and also that he had but
+      few people with him, and they went immediately to search for him. Simon
+      Skalp met the king just as he was coming out of a willow bush. Simon
+      saluted him. "God save you, sire," said he.
+      The king replied, "I do not know if thou are not sire here."
+      Simon replied, "That is as it may happen."
+      The king begged him to conceal him, and said it was proper to do so. "For
+      there was long friendship between us, although it has now gone
+      differently."
+      Simon replied, it could not be.
+      Then the king begged that he might hear mass before he died, which
+      accordingly took place. Then Eystein laid himself down on his face on the
+      grass, stretched out his hands on each side, and told them to cut the sign
+      of the cross between his shoulders, and see whether he could not bear
+      steel as King Inge's followers had asserted of him. Simon told the man who
+      had to put the king to death to do so immediately, for the king had been
+      creeping about upon the grass long enough. He was accordingly slain, and
+      he appears to have suffered manfully. His body was carried to Fors, and
+      lay all night under the hill at the south side of the church. King Eystein
+      was buried in Fors church, and his grave is in the middle of the
+      church-floor, where a fringed canopy is spread over it, and he is
+      considered a saint. Where he was executed, and his blood ran upon the
+      ground, sprang up a fountain, and another under the hill where his body
+      lay all night. From both these waters many think they have received a cure
+      of sickness and pain. It is reported by the Viken people that many
+      miracles were wrought at King Eystein's grave, until his enemies poured
+      upon it soup made of boiled dog's flesh. Simon Skalp was much hated for
+      this deed, which was generally ascribed to him; but some said that when
+      King Eystein was taken Simon sent a message to King Inge, and the king
+      commanded that King Eystein should not come before his face. So King
+      Sverre has caused it to be written; but Einar Skulason tells of it thus: -
+     "Simon Skalp, the traitor bold,
+     For deeds of murder known of old,
+     His king betrayed; and ne'er will he
+     God's blessed face hereafter see."
+      SAGA OF HAKON HERDEBREID (HAKON THE BROAD-SHOULDERED) (1)
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      This saga describes the feud between Hakon Sigurdson and his uncle Inge.
+      The only skald quoted is Einar Skulason.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The period is from A.D. 1157 to 1161. -L.
+      1. BEGINNING OF HAKON HERDEBREID.
+      Hakon, King Sigurd's son, was chosen chief of the troop which had followed
+      King Eystein, and his adherents gave him the title of king. He was ten
+      years old. At that time he had with him Sigurd, a son of Halvard Hauld of
+      Reyr, and Andreas and Onund, the sons of Simon, his foster-brothers, and
+      many chiefs, friends of King Sigurd and King Eystein; and they went first
+      up to Gautland. King Inge took possession of all the estates they had left
+      behind, and declared them banished. Thereafter King Inge went to Viken,
+      and was sometimes also in the north of the country. Gregorius Dagson was
+      in Konungahella, where the danger was greatest, and had beside him a
+      strong and handsome body of men, with which he defended the country.
+      2. OF GREGORIUS DAGSON.
+      The summer after (A.D. 1158) Hakon came with his men, and proceeded to
+      Konungahella with a numerous and handsome troop. Gregorius was then in the
+      town, and summoned the bondes and townspeople to a great Thing, at which
+      he desired their aid; but he thought the people did not hear him with much
+      favour, so he did not much trust them. Gregorius set off with two ships to
+      Viken, and was very much cast down. He expected to meet King Inge there,
+      having heard he was coming with a great army to Viken. Now when Gregorius
+      had come but a short way north he met Simon Skalp, Haldor Brynjolfson, and
+      Gyrd Amundason, King Inge's foster-brothers. Gregorius was much delighted
+      at this meeting, and turned back with them, being all in one body, with
+      eleven ships. As they were rowing up to Konungahella, Hakon, with his
+      followers, was holding a Thing without the town, and saw their approach;
+      and Sigurd of Reyr said, "Gregorius must be fey to be throwing himself
+      with so few men into our hands." Gregorius landed opposite the town to
+      wait for King Inge, for he was expected, but he did not come. King Hakon
+      put himself in order in the town, and appointed Thorliot Skaufaskalle, who
+      was a viking and a robber, to be captain of the men in the merchant ships
+      that were afloat in the river; and King Hakon and Sigurd were within the
+      town, and drew up the men on the piers, for all the townspeople had
+      submitted to King Hakon.
+      3. KING HAKON'S FLIGHT.
+      Gregorius rowed up the river, and let the ship drive down with the stream
+      against Thorliot. They shot at each other a while, until Thorliot and his
+      comrades jumped overboard; and some of them were killed, some escaped to
+      the land. Then Gregorius rowed to the piers, and let a gangway be cast on
+      shore at the very feet of Hakon's men. There the man who carried his
+      banner was slain, just as he was going to step on shore. Gregorius ordered
+      Hal, a son of Audun Halson, to take up the banner, which he did, and bore
+      the banner up to the pier. Gregorius followed close after him, held his
+      shield over his head, and protected him as well as himself. As soon as
+      Gregorius came upon the pier, and Hakon's men knew him, they gave way, and
+      made room for him on every side. Afterwards more people landed from the
+      ships, and then Gregorius made a severe assault with his men; and Hakon's
+      men first moved back, and then ran up into the town. Gregorius pursued
+      them eagerly, drove them twice from the town, and killed many of them. By
+      the report of all men, never was there so glorious an affair as this of
+      Gregorius; for Hakon had more than 4000 men, and Gregorius not full 400.
+      After the battle, Gregorius said to Hal Audunson, "Many men, in my
+      opinion, are more agile in battle than ye Icelanders are, for ye are not
+      so exercised as we Norwegians; but none, I think, are so bold under arms
+      as ye are." King Inge came up soon after, and killed many of the men who
+      had taken part with Hakon; made some pay heavy fines, burnt the houses of
+      some, and some he drove out of the country, or treated otherwise very ill.
+      Hakon fled at first up to Gautland with all his men; but the winter after
+      (A.D. 1159), he proceeded by the upper road to Throndhjem, and came there
+      before Easter. The Throndhjem people received him well, for they had
+      always served under that shield. It is said that the Throndhjem people
+      took Hakon as king, on the terms that he should have from Inge the third
+      part of Norway as his paternal heritage. King Inge and Gregorius were in
+      Viken, and Gregorius wanted to make an expedition against the party in the
+      north; but it came to nothing that winter, as many dissuaded from it.
+      4. FALL OF GYRD AND HAVARD.
+      King Hakon left Throndhjem in spring with thirty ships nearly; and some of
+      his men sailed before the rest with seven ships, and plundered in North
+      and South More. No man could remember that there ever before had been
+      plundering between the two towns (Bergen and Nidaros). Jon the son of
+      Halkel Huk collected the bondes in arms, and proceeded against them; took
+      Kolbein Ode prisoner, killed every woman's son of them in his ship. Then
+      they searched for the others, found them all assembled in seven ships, and
+      fought with them; but his father Halkel not coming to his assistance as he
+      had promised, many good bondes were killed, and Jon himself was wounded.
+      Hakon proceeded south to Bergen with his forces; but when he came to
+      Stiornvelta, he heard that King Inge and Gregorius had arrived a few
+      nights before from the east at Bergen, and therefore he did not venture to
+      steer thither. They sailed the outer course southwards past Bergen, and
+      met three ships of King Inge's fleet, which had been outsailed on the
+      voyage from the east. On board of them were Gyrd Amundason, King Inge's
+      foster-brother, who was married to Gyrid a sister of Gregorius, and also
+      lagman Gyrd Gunhildson, and Havard Klining. King Hakon had Gyrd Amundason
+      and Havard Klining put to death; but took lagman Gyrd southwards, and then
+      proceeded east to Viken.
+      5. OF THE CONSULTATIONS OF KING INGE.
+      When King Inge heard of this he sailed east after them, and they met east
+      in the Gaut river. King Inge went up the north arm of the river, and sent
+      out spies to get news of Hakon and his fleet; but he himself landed at
+      Hising, and waited for his spies. Now when the spies came back they went
+      to the king, and said that they had seen King Hakon's forces, and all his
+      ships which lay at the stakes in the river, and Hakon's men had bound the
+      stems of their vessels to them. They had two great East-country trading
+      vessels, which they had laid outside of the fleet, and on both these were
+      built high wooded stages (castles). When King Inge heard the preparations
+      they had made, he ordered a trumpet to call a House-thing of all the men;
+      and when the Thing was seated he asked his men for counsel, and applied
+      particularly to Gregorius Dagson, his brother-in-law Erling Skakke, and
+      other lendermen and ship-commanders, to whom he related the preparations
+      of Hakon and his men.
+      Then Gregorius Dagson replied first, and made known his mind in the
+      following words: -"Sometimes we and Hakon have met, and generally
+      they had the most people; but, notwithstanding, they fell short in battle
+      against us. Now, on the other hand, we have by far the greatest force; and
+      it will appear probable to the men who a short time ago lost gallant
+      relations by them, that this will be a good occasion to get vengeance, for
+      they have fled before us the greater part of the summer; and we have often
+      said that if they waited for us, as appears now to be the case, we would
+      have a brush with them. Now I will tell my opinion, which is, that I will
+      engage them, if it be agreeable to the king's pleasure; for I think it
+      will go now as formerly, that they must give way before us if we attack
+      them bravely; and I shall always attack where others may think it most
+      difficult."
+      The speech was received with much applause, and all declared they were
+      ready to engage in battle against Hakon. Then they rowed with all the
+      ships up the river, until they came in sight of each other, and then King
+      Inge turned off from the river current under the island. Now the king
+      addressed the lendermen again, and told them to get ready for battle. He
+      turned himself especially to Erling Skakke, and said, what was true, that
+      no man in the army had more understanding and knowledge in fighting
+      battles, although some were more hot. The king then addressed himself to
+      several of the lendermen, speaking to them by name; and ended by desiring
+      that each man should make his attack where he thought it would be of
+      advantage, and thereafter all would act together.
+      6. ERLING'S SPEECH.
+      Erling Skakke replied thus to the king's speech: "It is my duty, sire, not
+      to be silent; and I shall give my advice, since it is desired. The
+      resolution now adopted is contrary to my judgment; for I call it foolhardy
+      to fight under these circumstances, although we have so many and such fine
+      men. Supposing we make an attack on them, and row up against this
+      river-current; then one of the three men who are in each half room must be
+      employed in rowing only, and another must be covering with the shield the
+      man who rows; and what have we then to fight with but one third of our
+      men? It appears to me that they can be of little use in the battle who are
+      sitting at their oars with their backs turned to the enemy. Give me now
+      some time for consideration, and I promise you that before three days are
+      over I shall fall upon some plan by which we can come into battle with
+      advantage."
+      It was evident from Erling's speech that he dissuaded from an attack; but,
+      notwithstanding, it was urged by many who thought that Hakon would now, as
+      before, take to the land. "And then," said they, "we cannot get hold of
+      him; but now they have but few men, and we have their fate in our own
+      hands."
+      Gregorius said but little; but thought that Erling rather dissuaded from
+      an attack that Gregorius's advice should have no effect, than that he had
+      any better advice to give.
+      7. OF HAKON'S FLEET.
+      Then said King Inge to Erling, "Now we will follow thy advice, brother,
+      with regard to the manner of attacking; but seeing how eager our
+      counsellors are for it, we shall make the attack this day."
+      Erling replied, "All the boats and light vessels we have should row
+      outside the island, and up the east arm of the river, and then down with
+      the stream upon them, and try if they cannot cut them loose from the
+      piles. Then we, with the large ships, shall row from below here against
+      them; and I cannot tell until it be tried, if those who are now so
+      furiously warm will be much brisker at the attack than I am."
+      This counsel was approved by all. There was a ness stretched out between
+      their fleet and Hakon's, so that they could not see each other. Now when
+      Hakon and his men, who had taken counsel with each other in a meeting, saw
+      the boat-squadron rowing down the river, some thought King Inge intended
+      to give them battle; but many believed they did not dare, for it looked as
+      if the attack was given up; and they, besides, were very confident, both
+      in their preparations and men. There were many great people with Hakon:
+      there were Sigurd of Reyr, and Simon's sons; Nikolas Skialdvarson;
+      Eindride, a son of Jon Mornef, who was the most gallant and popular man in
+      the Throndhjem country; and many other lendermen and warriors. Now when
+      they saw that King Inge's men with many ships were rowing out of the
+      river, Hakon and his men believed they were going to fly; and therefore
+      they cut their land-ropes with which they lay fast at the piles, seized
+      their oars, and rowed after them in pursuit. The ships ran fast down with
+      the stream; but when they came further down the river, abreast of the
+      ness, they saw King Inge's main strength lying quiet at the island Hising.
+      King Inge's people saw Hakon's ships under way, and believed they were
+      coming to attack them; and now there was great bustle and clash of arms,
+      and they encouraged each other by a great war-shout. Hakon with his fleet
+      turned northwards a little to the land, where there was a turn in the
+      bight of the river, and where there was no current. They made ready for
+      battle, carried land-ropes to the shore, turned the stems of their ships
+      outwards, and bound them all together. They laid the large East-country
+      traders without the other vessels, the one above, the other below, and
+      bound them to the long-ships. In the middle of the fleet lay the king's
+      ship, and next to it Sigurd's; and on the other side of the king's ship
+      lay Nikolas, and next to him Endride Jonson. All the smaller ships lay
+      farther off, and they were all nearly loaded with weapons and stones.
+      8. SIGURD OF REYR'S SPEECH.
+      Then Sigurd of Reyr made the following speech: "Now there is hope that the
+      time is come which has been promised us all the summer, that we shall meet
+      King Inge in battle. We have long prepared ourselves for this; and many of
+      our comrades have boasted that they would never fly from or submit to King
+      Inge and Gregorius, and now let them remember their words. But we who have
+      sometimes got the toothache in our conflicts with them, speak less
+      confidently; for it has happened, as all have heard, that we very often
+      have come off without glory. But, nevertheless, it is now necessary to
+      fight manfully, and stand to it with steadiness; for the only escape for
+      us is in victory. Although we have somewhat fewer men than they, yet luck
+      determines which side shall have the advantage, and God knows that the
+      right is on our side. Inge has killed two of his brothers; and it is
+      obvious to all men that the mulct he intends to pay King Hakon for his
+      father's murder is to murder him also, as well as his other relations,
+      which will be seen this day to be his intent. King Hakon desired from the
+      beginning no more of Norway than the third part, which his father had
+      possessed, and which was denied him; and yet, in my opinion, King Hakon
+      has a better right to inherit after his father's brother, King Eystein,
+      than Inge or Simon Skalp, or the other men who killed King Eystein. Many
+      of them who would save their souls, and yet have defiled their hands with
+      such bloody deeds as Inge has done, must think it a presumption before God
+      that he takes the name of king; and I wonder God suffers such monstrous
+      wickedness as his; but it may be God's will that we shall now put him
+      down. Let us fight then manfully, and God will give us victory; and, if we
+      fall, will repay us with joys unspeakable for now allowing the might of
+      the wicked to prevail over us. Go forth then in confidence, and be not
+      afraid when the battle begins. Let each watch over his own and his
+      comrade's safety, and God protect us all." There went a good report abroad
+      of this speech of Sigurd, and all promised fairly, and to do their duty.
+      King Hakon went on board of the great East-country ship, and a
+      shield-bulwark was made around him; but his standard remained on the
+      long-ship in which it had been before.
+      9. OF KING INGE'S MEN.
+      Now must we tell about King Inge and his men. When they saw that King
+      Hakon and his people were ready for battle, and the river only was between
+      them, they sent a light vessel to recall the rest of the fleet which had
+      rowed away; and in the meantime the king waited for them, and arranged the
+      troops for the attack. Then the chiefs consulted in presence of the army,
+      and told their opinions; first, which ships should lie nearest to the
+      enemy; and then where each should attack.
+      Gregorius spoke thus: "We have many and fine men; and it is my advice,
+      King Inge, that you do not go to the assault with us, for everything is
+      preserved if you are safe. And no man knows where an arrow may hit, even
+      from the hands of a bad bowman; and they have prepared themselves so, that
+      missiles and stones can be thrown from the high stages upon the merchant
+      ships, so that there is less danger for those who are farthest from them.
+      They have not more men than we lendermen can very well engage with. I
+      shall lay my ship alongside their largest ship, and I expect the conflict
+      between us will be but short; for it has often been so in our former
+      meetings, although there has been a much greater want of men with us than
+      now." All thought well of the advice that the king himself should not take
+      part in the battle.
+      Then Erling Skakke said, "I agree also to the counsel that you, sire,
+      should not go into the battle. It appears to me that their preparations
+      are such, that we require all our precaution not to suffer a great defeat
+      from them; and whole limbs are the easiest cured. In the council we held
+      before to-day many opposed what I said, and ye said then that I did not
+      want to fight; but now I think the business has altered its appearance,
+      and greatly to our advantage, since they have hauled off from the piles,
+      and now it stands so that I do not dissuade from giving battle; for I see,
+      what all are sensible of, how necessary it is to put an end to this robber
+      band who have gone over the whole country with pillage and destruction, in
+      order that people may cultivate the land in peace, and serve a king so
+      good and just as King Inge who has long had trouble and anxiety from the
+      haughty unquiet spirit of his relations, although he has been a shield of
+      defence for the whole people, and has been exposed to manifold perils for
+      the peace of the country." Erling spoke well and long, and many other
+      chiefs also; and all to the same purpose -all urging to battle. In
+      the meantime they waited until all the fleet should be assembled. King
+      Inge had the ship Baekisudin; and, at the entreaty of his friends, he did
+      not join the battle, but lay still at the island.
+      10. BEGINNING OF THE BATTLE.
+      When the army was ready they rowed briskly against the enemy, and both
+      sides raised a war-shout. Inge's men did not bind their ships together,
+      but let them be loose; for they rowed right across the current, by which
+      the large ships were much swayed. Erling Skakke laid his ship beside King
+      Hakon's ship, and ran the stem between his and Sigurd's ship, by which the
+      battle began. But Gregorius's ship swung upon the ground, and heeled very
+      much over, so that at first she could not come into the battle; and when
+      Hakon's men saw this they laid themselves against her, and attacked
+      Gregorius's ship on all sides. Ivar, Hakon Mage's son, laid his ship so
+      that the stems struck together; and he got a boat-hook fastened on
+      Gregorius, on that part of his body where the waist is smallest, and
+      dragged him to him, by which Gregorius stumbled against the ship's rails;
+      but the hook slipped to one side, or Gregorius would have been dragged
+      over-board. Gregorius, however, was but little wounded, for he had on a
+      plate coat of armour. Ivar called out to him, that he had a "thick bark."
+      Gregorius replied, that if Ivar went on so he would "require it all, and
+      not have too much." It was very near then that Gregorius and his men had
+      sprung overboard; but Aslak Unge threw an anchor into their ship, and
+      dragged them off the ground. Then Gregorius laid himself against Ivar's
+      ship, and they fought a long while; but Gregorius's ship being both higher
+      sided and more strongly manned, many people fell in Ivar's ship, and some
+      jumped overboard. Ivar was so severely wounded that he could not take part
+      in the fight. When his ship was cleared of the men, Gregorius let Ivar be
+      carried to the shore, so that he might escape; and from that time they
+      were constant friends.
+      11. KING HAKON'S FLIGHT.
+      When King Inge and his men saw that Gregorius was aground, he encouraged
+      his crew to row to his assistance. "It was," he said, "the most imprudent
+      advice that we should remain lying here, while our friends are in battle;
+      for we have the largest and best ship in all the fleet. But now I see that
+      Gregorius, the man to whom I owe the most, is in need of help; so we must
+      hasten to the fight where it is sharpest. It is also most proper that I
+      should be in the battle; for the victory, if we win it, will belong to me.
+      And if I even knew beforehand that our men were not to gain the battle,
+      yet our place is where our friends are; for I can do nothing if I lose the
+      men who are justly called the defence of the country, who are the bravest,
+      and have long ruled for me and my kingdom." Thereupon he ordered his
+      banner to be set up, which was done; and they rowed across the river. Then
+      the battle raged, and the king could not get room to attack, so close lay
+      the ships before him. First he lay under the East-country trading ship,
+      and from it they threw down upon his vessel spears, iron-shod stakes, and
+      such large stones that it was impossible to hold out longer there, and he
+      had to haul off. Now when the king's people saw that he was come they made
+      place for him, and then he laid alongside of Eindride Jonson's ship. Now
+      King Hakon's men abandoned the small ships, and went on board the large
+      merchant vessels; but some of them sprang on shore. Erling Skakke and his
+      men had a severe conflict. Erling himself was on the forecastle, and
+      called his forecastlemen, and ordered them to board the king's ship; but
+      they answered, this was no easy matter, for there were beams above with an
+      iron comb on them. Then Erling himself went to the bow, and stayed there a
+      while, until they succeeded in getting on board the king's ship: and then
+      the ship was cleared of men on the bows, and the whole army gave way. Many
+      sprang into the water, many fell, but the greater number got to the land.
+      So says Einar Skulason: -
+     "Men fall upon the slippery deck -
+     Men roll off from the blood-drenched wreck;
+     Dead bodies float down with the stream,
+     And from the shores witch-ravens scream.
+     The cold blue river now runs red
+     With the warm blood of warriors dead,
+     And stains the waves in Karmt Sound
+     With the last drops of the death-wound.
+
+     "All down the stream, with unmann'd prow,
+     Floats many an empty long-ship now,
+     Ship after ship, shout after shout,
+     Tell that Kign Hakon can't hold out.
+     The bowmen ply their bows of elm,
+     The red swords flash o'er broken helm:
+     King Hakon's men rush to the strand,
+     Out of their ships, up through the land."
+      Einar composed a song about Gregorius Dagson, which is called the
+      River-song. King Inge granted life and peace to Nikolas Skialdvarson when
+      his ship was deserted, and thereupon he went into King Inge's service, and
+      remained in it as long as the king lived. Eindride Jonson leaped on board
+      of King Inge's ship when his own was cleared of men, and begged for his
+      life. King Inge wished to grant it; but Havard Klining's son ran up, and
+      gave him a mortal wound, which was much blamed; but he said Eindride had
+      been the cause of his father's death. There was much lamentation at
+      Eindride's death, but principally in the Throndhjem district. Many of
+      Hakon's people fell here, but not many chiefs. Few of King Inge's people
+      fell, but many were wounded. King Hakon fled up the country, and King Inge
+      went north to Viken with his troops; and he, as well as Gregorius,
+      remained in Viken all winter (A.D. 1160). When King Inge's men, Bergliot
+      and his brothers, sons of Ivar of Elda, came from the battle to Bergen,
+      they slew Nickolas Skeg, who had been Hakon's treasurer, and then went
+      north to Throndhjem.
+      King Hakon came north before Yule, and Sigurd was sometimes home at Reyr;
+      for Gregorius, who was nearly related to Sigurd, had obtained for him life
+      and safety from King Inge, so that he retained all his estates. King Hakon
+      was in the merchant-town of Nidaros in Yule; and one evening in the
+      beginning of Yule his men fought in the room of the court, and in this
+      affray eight men were killed, and many were wounded. The eighth day of
+      Yule, King Hakon's man Alf Rode, son of Ottar Birting, with about eighty
+      men, went to Elda, and came in the night unexpectedly on the people, who
+      were very drunk, and set fire to the room; but they went out, and defended
+      themselves bravely. There fell Bergliot, Ivar's son, and Ogmund, his
+      brother, and many more. They had been nearly thirty altogether in number.
+      In winter died, north in the merchant-town, Andres Simonson, King Hakon's
+      foster-brother; and his death was much deplored. Erling Skakke and Inge's
+      men, who were in Bergen, threatened that in winter they would proceed
+      against Hakon and his men; but it came to nothing. Gregorius sent word
+      from the east, from Konungahella, that if he were so near as Erling and
+      his men, he would not sit quietly in Bergen while Hakon was killing King
+      Inge's friends and their comrades in war north in the Throndhjem country.
+      12. THE CONFLICT UPON THE PIERS.
+      King Inge and Gregorius left the east in spring, and came to Bergen; but
+      as soon as Hakon and Sigurd heard that Inge had left Viken, they went
+      there by land. When King Inge and his people came to Bergen, a quarrel
+      arose between Haldor Brynjolfson and Bjorn Nikolason. Bjorn's house-man
+      asked Haldor's when they met at the pier, why he looked so pale.
+      He replied, because he had been bled.
+      "I could not look so pale if I tried, at merely being bled."
+      "I again think," retorted the other, "that thou wouldst have borne it
+      worse, and less manfully." And no other beginning was there for their
+      quarrel than this. Afterwards one word followed another, till from
+      brawling they came to fighting. It was told to Haldor Brynjolfson, who was
+      in the house drinking, that his house-man was wounded down on the pier and
+      he went there immediately. But Bjorn's house-men had come there before,
+      and as Haldor thought his house-man had been badly treated, he went up to
+      them and beat them; and it was told to Bjorn Buk that the people of Viken
+      were beating his house-men on the pier. Then Bjorn and his house-men took
+      their weapons, hurried down to the pier, and would avenge their men; and a
+      bloody strife began. It was told Gregorius that his relation Haldor
+      required assistance, and that his house-men were being cut down in the
+      street; on which Gregorius and his men ran to the place in their armour.
+      Now it was told Erling Skakke that his sister's son Bjorn was fighting
+      with Gregorius and Haldor down on the piers, and that he needed help. Then
+      he proceeded thither with a great force, and exhorted the people to stand
+      by him; saying it would be a great disgrace never to be wiped out, if the
+      Viken people should trample upon them in their own native place. There
+      fell thirteen men, of whom nine were killed on the spot, and four died of
+      their wounds, and many were wounded. When the word came to King Inge that
+      Gregorius and Erling were fighting down on the piers, he hastened there,
+      and tried to separate them; but could do nothing, so mad were they on both
+      sides. Then Gregorius called to Inge, and told him to go away; for it was
+      in vain to attempt coming between them, as matters now stood. He said it
+      would be the greatest misfortune if the king mixed himself up with it; for
+      he could not be certain that there were not people in the fray who would
+      commit some great misdeed if they had opportunity. Then King Inge retired;
+      and when the greatest tumult was over, Gregorius and his men went to
+      Nikolas church, and Erling behind them, calling to each other. Then King
+      Inge came a second time, and pacified them; and both agreed that he should
+      mediate between them.
+      When King Inge and Gregorius heard that King Hakon was in Viken, they went
+      east with many ships; but when they came King Hakon fled from them, and
+      there was no battle. Then King Inge went to Oslo, and Gregorius was in
+      Konungahella.
+      13. MUNAN'S DEATH.
+      Soon after Gregorius heard that Hakon and his men were at a farm called
+      Saurby, which lies up beside the forest. Gregorius hastened there; came in
+      the night; and supposing that King Hakon and Sigurd would be in the
+      largest of the houses, set fire to the buildings there. But Hakon and his
+      men were in the smaller house, and came forth, seeing the fire, to help
+      their people. There Munan fell, a son of Ale Uskeynd, a brother of King
+      Sigurd Hakon's father. Gregorius and his men killed him, because he was
+      helping those whom they were burning within the house. Some escaped, but
+      many were killed. Asbjorn Jalda, who had been a very great viking, escaped
+      from the house, but was grievously wounded. A bonde met him, and he
+      offered the man money to let him get away; but the bonde replied, he would
+      do what he liked best; and, adding that he had often been in fear of his
+      life for him, he slew him. King Hakon and Sigurd escaped, but many of
+      their people were killed. Thereafter Gregorius returned home to
+      Konungahella. Soon after King Hakon and Sigurd went to Haldor
+      Brynjolfson's farm of Vettaland, set fire to the house, and burnt it.
+      Haldor went out, and was cut down instantly with his house-men; and in all
+      there were about twenty men killed. Sigrid, Haldor's wife, was a sister of
+      Gregorius, and they allowed her to escape into the forest in her
+      night-shift only; but they took with them Amunde, who was a son of Gyrd
+      Amundason and of Gyrid Dag's daughter, and a sister's son of Gregorius,
+      and who was then a boy about five years old.
+      14. OF THE FALL OF GREGORIUS DAGSON.
+      When Gregorius heard the news he took it much to heart, and inquired
+      carefully where they were. Gregorius set out from Konungahella late in
+      Yule, and came to Fors the thirteenth day of Yule, where he remained a
+      night, and heard vespers the last day of Yule, which was a Saturday, and
+      the holy Evangel was read before him. When Gregorius and his followers saw
+      the men of King Hakon and Sigurd, the king's force appeared to them
+      smaller than their own. There was a river called Befia between them, where
+      they met; and there was unsound ice on the river, for there went a stream
+      under the ice from it. King Hakon and his men had cut a rent in the ice,
+      and laid snow over it, so that nobody could see it. When Gregorius came to
+      the ice on the river the ice appeared to him unsound, he said; and he
+      advised the people to go to the bridge, which was close by, to cross the
+      river. The bonde-troops replied, that they did not know why he should be
+      afraid to go across the ice to attack so few people as Hakon had, and the
+      ice was good enough. Gregorius said it was seldom necessary to encourage
+      him to show bravery, and it should not be so now. Then he ordered them to
+      follow him, and not to be standing on the land while he was on the ice,
+      and he said it was their council to go out upon the dangerous ice, but he
+      had no wish to do so, or to be led by them. Then he ordered the banner to
+      be advanced, and immediately went out on the ice with the men. As soon as
+      the bondes found that the ice was unsound they turned back. Gregorius fell
+      through the ice, but not very deep, and he told his men to take care.
+      There were not more than twenty men with him, the others having turned
+      back. A man of King Hakon's troop shot an arrow at Gregorius, which hit
+      him under the throat, and thus ended his life. Gregorius fell, and ten men
+      with him. It is the talk of all men that he had been the most gallant
+      lenderman in Norway that any man then living could remember; and also he
+      behaved the best towards us Icelanders of any chief since King Eystein the
+      Elder's death. Gregorius's body was carried to Hofund, and interred at
+      Gimsey Isle, in a nunnery which is there, of which Gregorius's sister,
+      Baugeid, was then the abbess.
+      15. KING INGE HEARS OF GREGORIUS'S FALL.
+      Two bailiffs went to Oslo to bring the tidings to King Inge. When they
+      arrived they desired to speak to the king: and he asked, what news they
+      brought.
+      "Gregorius Dagson's death," said they.
+      "How came that misfortune?" asked the king.
+      When they had told him how it happened, he said, "They gave advice who
+      understood the least."
+      It is said he took it so much to heart that he cried like a child. When he
+      recovered himself he said, "I wanted to go to Gregorius as soon as I heard
+      of Haldor's murder; for I thought that Gregorius would not sit long before
+      thinking of revenge. But the people here would think nothing so important
+      as their Yule feasts, and nothing could move them away; and I am confident
+      that if I had been there, he would either have proceeded more cautiously,
+      or I and Gregorius would now have shared one lodging. Now he is gone, the
+      man who has been my best friend, and more than any other has kept the
+      kingdom in my hands; and I think it will be but a short space between us.
+      Now I make an oath to go forth against Hakon, and one of two things shall
+      happen: I shall either come to my death, or shall walk over Hakon and his
+      people; and such a man as Gregorius is not avenged, even if all were to
+      pay the penalty of their lives for him."
+      There was a man present who replied, "Ye need not seek after them, for
+      they intend to seek you."
+      Kristin, King Sigurd's daughter and King Inge's cousin, was then in Oslo.
+      The king heard that she intended going away. He sent a message to her to
+      inquire why she wished to leave the town.
+      She thought it was dangerous and unsafe for a female to be there. The king
+      would not let her go. "For if it go well with me, as I hope, you will be
+      well here; and if I fall, my friends may not get leave to dress my body;
+      but you can ask permission, and it will not be denied you, and you will
+      thereby best requite what I have done for you."
+      16. OF KING INGE.
+      On Saint Blasius' day (February 3, 1161), in the evening, King Inge's
+      spies brought him the news that King Hakon was coming towards the town.
+      Then King Inge ordered the war-horns to call together all the troops up
+      from the town; and when he drew them up he could reckon them to be nearly
+      4000 men. The king let the array be long, but not more than five men deep.
+      Then some said that the king should not be himself in the battle, as they
+      thought the risk too great; but that his brother Orm should be the leader
+      of the army. The king replied, "I think if Gregorius were alive and here
+      now, and I had fallen and was to be avenged, he would not lie concealed,
+      but would be in the battle. Now, although I, on account of my ill health,
+      am not fit for the combat as he was, yet will I show as good will as he
+      would have had; and it is not to be thought of that I should not be in the
+      battle."
+      People say that Gunhild, who was married to Simon, King Hakon's
+      foster-brother, had a witch employed to sit out all night and procure the
+      victory for Hakon; and that the answer was obtained, that they should
+      fight King Inge by night, and never by day, and then the result would be
+      favourable. The witch who, as people say, sat out was called Thordis
+      Skeggia; but what truth there may be in the report I know not.
+      Simon Skalp had gone to the town, and was gone to sleep, when the
+      war-shouts awoke him. When the night was well advanced, King Inge's spies
+      came to him, and told him that King Hakon and his army were coming over
+      the ice; for the ice lay the whole way from the town to Hofud Isle.
+      17. KING INGE'S SPEECH.
+      Thereupon King Inge went with his army out on the ice, and he drew it up
+      in order of battle in front of the town. Simon Skalp was in that wing of
+      the array which was towards Thraelaberg; and on the other wing, which was
+      towards the Nunnery, was Gudrod, the king of the South Hebudes, a son of
+      Olaf Klining, and Jon, a son of Svein Bergthor Buk. When King Hakon and
+      his army came near to King Inge's array, both sides raised a war-shout.
+      Gudrod and Jon gave King Hakon and his men a sign, and let them know where
+      they were in the line; and as soon as Hakon's men in consequence turned
+      thither, Gudrod immediately fled with 1500 men; and Jon, and a great body
+      of men with him, ran over to King Hakon's army, and assisted them in the
+      fight. When this news was told to King Inge, he said, "Such is the
+      difference between my friends. Never would Gregorius have done so in his
+      life!" There were some who advised King Inge to get on horseback, and ride
+      from the battle up to Raumarike; "where," said they, "you would get help
+      enough, even this very day." The king replied, he had no inclination to do
+      so. "I have heard you often say, and I think truly, that it was of little
+      use to my brother, King Eystein, that he took to flight; and yet he was a
+      man distinguished for many qualities which adorn a king. Now I, who labour
+      under so great decrepitude, can see how bad my fate would be, if I betook
+      myself to what proved so unfortunate for him; with so great a difference
+      as there is between our activity, health, and strength. I was in the
+      second year of my age when I was chosen king of Norway, and I am now
+      twenty-five; and I think I have had misfortune and sorrow under my kingly
+      dignity, rather than pleasure and peaceful days. I have had many battles,
+      sometimes with more, sometimes with fewer people; and it is my greatest
+      luck that I have never fled. God will dispose of my life, and of how long
+      it shall be; but I shall never betake myself to flight."
+      18. KING INGE'S FALL.
+      Now as Jon and his troop had broken the one wing of King Inge's array,
+      many of those who were nearest to him fled, by which the whole array was
+      dispersed, and fell into disorder. But Hakon and his men went briskly
+      forwards; and now it was near daybreak. An assault was made against King
+      Inge's banner, and in this conflict King Inge fell; but his brother Orm
+      continued the battle, while many of the army fled up into the town. Twice
+      Orm went to the town after the king's fall to encourage the people, and
+      both times returned, and went out again upon the ice to continue the
+      battle. Hakon's men attacked the wing of the array which Simon Skalp led;
+      and in that assault fell of King Inge's men his brother-in-law, Gudbrand
+      Skafhogson. Simon Skalp and Halvard Hikre went against each other with
+      their troops, and fought while they drew aside past Thraelaberg; and in
+      this conflict both Simon and Halvard fell. Orm, the king's brother, gained
+      great reputation in this battle; but he at last fled. Orm the winter
+      before had been contracted with Ragna, a daughter of Nikolas Mase, who had
+      been married before to King Eystein Haraldson; and the wedding was fixed
+      for the Sunday after Saint Blasius's mass, which was on a Friday. Orm fled
+      east to Svithjod, where his brother Magnus was then king; and their
+      brother Ragnvald was an earl there at that time. They were the sons of
+      Queen Ingerid and Henrik Halte, who was a son of the Danish king Svein
+      Sveinson. The princess Kristin took care of King Inge's body, which was
+      laid on the stone wall of Halvard's church, on the south side without the
+      choir. He had then been king for twenty-three years (A.D. 1137-1161). In
+      this battle many fell on both sides, but principally of King Inge's men.
+      Of King Hakon's people fell Arne Frirekson. Hakon's men took all the feast
+      and victuals prepared for the wedding, and a great booty besides.
+      19. OF KING HAKON AND QUEEN KRISTIN.
+      Then King Hakon took possession of the whole country, and distributed all
+      the offices among his own friends, both in the towns and in the country.
+      King Hakon and his men had a meeting in Halvard's church, where they had a
+      private conference concerning the management of the country. Kristin the
+      princess gave the priest who kept the church keys a large sum of money to
+      conceal one of her men in the church, so that she might know what Hakon
+      and his counsellors intended. When she learnt what they had said, she sent
+      a man to Bergen to her husband Erling Skakke, with the message that he
+      should never trust Hakon or his men.
+      20. OF OLAF'S MIRACLE.
+      It happened at the battle of Stiklestad, as before related, that King Olaf
+      threw from him the sword called Hneiter when he received his wound. A
+      Swedish man, who had broken his own sword, took it up, and fought with it.
+      When this man escaped with the other fugitives he came to Svithjod, and
+      went home to his house. From that time he kept the sword all his days, and
+      afterwards his son, and so relation after relation; and when the sword
+      shifted its owner, the one told to the other the name of the sword and
+      where it came from. A long time after, in the days of Kirjalax the emperor
+      of Constantinople, when there was a great body of Varings in the town, it
+      happened in the summer that the emperor was on a campaign, and lay in the
+      camp with his army. The Varings who had the guard, and watched over the
+      emperor, lay on the open plain without the camp. They changed the watch
+      with each other in the night, and those who had been before on watch lay
+      down and slept; but all completely armed. It was their custom, when they
+      went to sleep, that each should have his helmet on his head, his shield
+      over him, sword under the head, and the right hand on the sword-handle.
+      One of these comrades, whose lot it was to watch the latter part of the
+      night, found, on awakening towards morning, that his sword was gone. He
+      looked after it, and saw it lying on the flat plain at a distance from
+      him. He got up and took the sword, thinking that his comrades who had been
+      on watch had taken the sword from him in a joke; but they all denied it.
+      The same thing happened three nights. Then he wondered at it, as well as
+      they who saw or heard of it; and people began to ask him how it could have
+      happened. He said that his sword was called Hneiter, and had belonged to
+      King Olaf the Saint, who had himself carried it in the battle of
+      Stiklestad; and he also related how the sword since that time had gone
+      from one to another. This was told to the emperor, who called the man
+      before him to whom the sword belonged, and gave him three times as much
+      gold as the sword was worth; and the sword itself he had laid in Saint
+      Olaf's church, which the Varings supported, where it has been ever since
+      over the altar. There was a lenderman of Norway while Harald Gille's sons,
+      Eystein, Inge, and Sigurd lived, who was called Eindride Unge; and he was
+      in Constantinople when these events took place. He told these
+      circumstances in Norway, according to what Einar Skulason says in his song
+      about King Olaf the Saint, in which these events are sung.
+      21. OLAF'S MIRACLE IN FAVOUR OF THE VARINGS.
+      It happened once in the Greek country, when Kirjalax was emperor there,
+      that he made an expedition against Blokumannaland. When he came to the
+      Pezina plains, a heathen king came against him with an innumerable host.
+      He brought with him many horsemen, and many large waggons, in which were
+      large loop-holes for shooting through. When they prepared for their night
+      quarters they drew up their waggons, one by the side of the other, without
+      their tents, and dug a great ditch without; and all which made a defence
+      as strong as a castle. The heathen king was blind. Now when the Greek king
+      came, the heathens drew up their array on the plains before their
+      waggon-fortification. The Greeks drew up their array opposite, and they
+      rode on both sides to fight with each other; but it went on so ill and so
+      unfortunately, that the Greeks were compelled to fly after suffering a
+      great defeat, and the heathens gained a victory. Then the king drew up an
+      array of Franks and Flemings, who rode against the heathens, and fought
+      with them; but it went with them as with the others, that many were
+      killed, and all who escaped took to flight. Then the Greek king was
+      greatly incensed at his men-at-arms; and they replied, that he should now
+      take his wine-bags, the Varings. The king says that he would not throw
+      away his jewels, and allow so few men, however bold they might be, to
+      attack so vast an army. Then Thorer Helsifig, who at that time was leader
+      of the Varings replied to the king's words, "If there was burning fire in
+      the way, I and my people would run into it, if I knew the king's advantage
+      required it." Then the king replied, "Call upon your holy King Olaf for
+      help and strength." The Varings, who were 450 men, made a vow with hand
+      and word to build a church in Constantinople, at their own expense and
+      with the aid of other good men, and have the church consecrated to the
+      honour and glory of the holy King Olaf; and thereupon the Varings rushed
+      into the plain. When the heathens saw them, they told their king that
+      there was another troop of the Greek king's army come out upon the plain;
+      but they were only a handful of people. The king says, "Who is that
+      venerable man riding on a white horse at the head of the troop?" They
+      replied, "We do not see him." There was so great a difference of numbers,
+      that there were sixty heathens for every Christian man; but
+      notwithstanding the Varings went boldly to the attack. As soon as they met
+      terror and alarm seized the army of the heathens, and they instantly began
+      to fly; but the Varings pursued, and soon killed a great number of them.
+      When the Greeks and Franks who before had fled from the heathens saw this,
+      they hastened to take part, and pursue the enemy with the others. Then the
+      Varings had reached the waggon-fortification, where the greatest defeat
+      was given to the enemy. The heathen king was taken in the flight of his
+      people, and the Varings brought him along with them; after which the
+      Christians took the camp of the heathens, and their waggon-fortification.
+      MAGNUS ERLINGSON'S SAGA.
+      PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+      With this saga, which describes a series of conflicts, Snorre's
+      "Heimskringla" ends. King Eystein died in 1177, but Magnus Erlingson
+      continued to reign until his death in 1184. The conflicts continued until
+      the opposition party was led to victory by King Sverre.
+      The only skald quoted is Thorbjorn Skakkaskald.
+      1. OF MAGNUS ERLINGSON'S BEGINNING.
+      When Erling got certain intelligence of the determinations of Hakon and
+      his counsellors, he sent a message to all the chiefs who he knew had been
+      steady friends of King Inge, and also to his court-men and his retinue,
+      who had saved themselves by flight, and also to all Gregorius's house-men,
+      and called them together to a meeting. When they met, and conversed with
+      each other, they resolved to keep their men together; and which resolution
+      they confirmed by oath and hand-shake to each other. Then they considered
+      whom they should take to be king. Erling Skakke first spoke, and inquired
+      if it was the opinion of the chiefs and other men of power that Simon
+      Skalp's son, the son of the daughter of King Harald Gille, should be
+      chosen king, and Jon Halkelson be taken to lead the army; but Jon refused
+      it. Then it was inquired if Nikolas Skialdvarson, a sister's son of King
+      Magnus Barefoot, would place himself at the head of the army; but he
+      answered thus: -It was his opinion that some one should be chosen
+      king who was of the royal race; and, for leader of the troops, some one
+      from whom help and understanding were to be looked for; and then it would
+      be easier to gather an army. It was now tried whether Arne would let any
+      of his sons, King Inge's brothers, be proclaimed king. Arne replies, that
+      Kristin's son, she was the daughter of King Sigurd the Crusader, was
+      nearest by propinquity of descent to the crown of Norway. "And here is
+      also a man to be his adviser, and whose duty it is to take care of him and
+      of the kingdom; and that man is his father Erling, who is both prudent,
+      brave, experienced in war, and an able man in governing the kingdom; he
+      wants no capability of bringing this counsel into effect, if luck be with
+      him." Many thought well of this advice.
+      Erling replied to it, "As far as I can see or hear in this meeting, the
+      most will rather be excused from taking upon themselves such a difficult
+      business. Now it appears to me altogether uncertain, provided we begin
+      this work, whether he who puts himself at the head of it will gain any
+      honour; or whether matters will go as they have done before when any one
+      undertakes such great things, that he loses all his property and possibly
+      his life. But if this counsel be adopted, there may be men who will
+      undertake to carry it through; but he who comes under such an obligation
+      must seek, in every way, to prevent any opposition or enmity from those
+      who are now in this council."
+      All gave assurance that they would enter into this confederacy with
+      perfect fidelity. Then said Erling, "I can say for myself that it would
+      almost be my death to serve King Hakon; and however dangerous it may be, I
+      will rather venture to adopt your advice, and take upon me to lead this
+      force, if that be the will, counsel, and desire of you all, and if you
+      will all bind yourselves to this agreement by oath."
+      To this they all agreed; and in this meeting it was determined to take
+      Erling's son Magnus to be king. They afterwards held a Thing in the town;
+      and at this Thing Magnus Erlingson, then five years old, was elected king
+      of the whole country. All who had been servants of King Inge went into his
+      service, and each of them retained the office and dignity he had held
+      under King Inge (A.D. 1161).
+      2. KING MAGNUS GOES TO DENMARK.
+      Erling Skakke made himself ready to travel, fitted out ships, and had with
+      him King Magnus, together with the household-men who were on the spot. In
+      this expedition were the king's relatives, -Arne; Ingerid, King
+      Inge's mother, with her two sons; besides Jon Kutiza, a son of Sigurd
+      Stork, and Erling's house-men, as well as those who had been Gregorius's
+      house-men; and they had in all ten ships. They went south to Denmark to
+      King Valdemar and Buriz Heinrekson, King Inge's brother. King Valdemar was
+      King Magnus's blood-relation; for Ingebjorg, mother of King Valdemar, and
+      Malmfrid, mother of Kristin, King Magnus's mother, were cousins. The
+      Danish king received them hospitably, and he and Erling had private
+      meetings and consultations: and so much was known of their counsels, that
+      King Valdemar was to aid King Magnus with such help as might be required
+      from his kingdom to win and retain Norway. On the other hand, King
+      Valdemar should get that domain in Norway which his ancestors Harald
+      Gormson and Svein Forked-beard had possessed; namely, the whole of Viken
+      as far north as Rygiarbit. This agreement was confirmed by oath and a
+      fixed treaty. Then Erling and King Magnus made themselves ready to leave
+      Denmark, and they sailed out of Vendilskage.
+      3. BATTLE OF TUNSBERG.
+      King Hakon went in spring, after the Easter week, north to Throndhjem, and
+      had with him the whole fleet that had belonged to King Inge. He held a
+      Thing there in the merchant-town, and was chosen king of the whole
+      country. Then he made Sigurd of Reyr an earl, and gave him an earldom, and
+      afterwards proceeded southwards with his followers all the way to Viken.
+      The king went to Tunsberg; but sent Earl Sigurd east to Konungahella, to
+      defend the country with a part of the forces in case Erling should come
+      from the south. Erling and his fleet came to Agder, and went straight
+      north to Bergen, where they killed Arne Brigdarskalle, King Hakon's
+      officer, and came back immediately against King Hakon. Earl Sigurd, who
+      had not observed the journey of Erling and his followers from the south,
+      was at that time east in the Gaut river, and King Hakon was in Tunsberg.
+      Erling brought up at Hrossanes, and lay there some nights. In the meantime
+      King Hakon made preparations in the town. When Erling and his fleet were
+      coming up to the town, they took a merchant vessel, filled it with wood
+      and straw, and set fire to it; and the wind blowing right towards the
+      town, drove the vessel against the piers. Erling had two cables brought on
+      board the vessel, and made fast to two boats, and made them row along as
+      the vessel drove. Now when the fire was come almost abreast of the town,
+      those who were in the boats held back the vessel by the ropes, so that the
+      town could not be set on fire; but so thick a smoke spread from it over
+      the town, that one could not see from the piers where the king's array
+      was. Then Erling drew the whole fleet in where the wind carried the fire,
+      and shot at the enemy. When the townspeople saw that the fire was
+      approaching their houses, and many were wounded by the bowmen, they
+      resolved to send the priest Hroald, the long-winded speaker, to Erling, to
+      beg him to spare them and the town; and they dissolved the array in favour
+      of Hakon, as soon as Hroald told them their prayer was granted. Now when
+      the array of towns-people had dispersed, the men on the piers were much
+      thinned: however, some urged Hakon's men to make resistance: but Onund
+      Simonson, who had most influence over the army, said, "I will not fight
+      for Earl Sigurd's earldom, since he is not here himself." Then Onund fled,
+      and was followed by all the people, and by the king himself; and they
+      hastened up the country. King Hakon lost many men here; and these verses
+      were made about it: -
+     "Onund declares he will not go
+     In battle 'gainst Earl Sigurd's foe,
+     If Earl Sigurd does not come,
+     But with his house-men sits at home.
+     King Magnus' men rush up the street,
+     Eager with Hakon's troop to meet;
+     But Hakon's war-hawks, somewhat shy,
+     Turn quick about, and off they fly."
+      Thorbjorn Skakkaskald also said: -
+     "The Tunsberg men would not be slow
+     In thy good cause to risk a blow;
+     And well they knew the chief could stain
+     The wolves' mouths on a battle-plain.
+     But the town champion rather fears
+     The sharp bright glance of levelled spears;
+     Their steel-clad warrior loves no fight
+     Where bowstring twangs, or fire flies bright."
+      King Hakon then took the land-road northwards to Throndhjem. When Earl
+      Sigurd heard of this, he proceeded with all the ships he could get the
+      seaway north-wards, to meet King Hakon there.
+      4. OF ERLING AND HAKON.
+      Erling Skakke took all the ships in Tunsberg belonging to King Hakon, and
+      there he also took the Baekisudin which had belonged to King Inge. Then
+      Erling proceeded, and reduced the whole of Viken in obedience to King
+      Magnus, and also the whole country north wheresoever he appeared up to
+      Bergen, where he remained all winter. There Erling killed Ingebjorn Sipil,
+      King Hakon's lenderman of the north part of the Fjord district. In winter
+      (A.D. 1162) King Hakon was in Throndhjem; but in the following spring he
+      ordered a levy, and prepared to go against Erling. He had with him Earl
+      Sigurd, Jon Sveinson, Eindride Unge, Onund Simonson, Philip Peterson,
+      Philip Gyrdson, Ragnvald Kunta, Sigurd Kapa, Sigurd Hiupa, Frirek Keina,
+      Asbjorn of Forland, Thorbjorn, a son of Gunnar the treasurer, and
+      Stradbjarne.
+      5. OF ERLING'S PEOPLE.
+      Erling was in Bergen with a great armament, and resolved to lay a sailing
+      prohibition on all the merchant vessels which were going north to Nidaros;
+      for he knew that King Hakon would soon get tidings of him, if ships were
+      sailing between the towns. Besides, he gave out that it was better for
+      Bergen to get the goods, even if the owners were obliged to sell them
+      cheaper than they wished than that they should fall into the hands of
+      enemies and thereby strengthen them. And now a great many vessels were
+      assembled at Bergen, for many arrived every day, and none were allowed to
+      go away. Then Erling let some of the lightest of his vessels be laid
+      ashore, and spread the report that he would wait for Hakon, and, with the
+      help of his friends and relations, oppose the enemy there. He then one day
+      called a meeting of the ship-masters, and gave them and all the merchant
+      ships and their steersmen leave to go where they pleased. When the men who
+      had charge of the cargoes, and were all ready to sail away with their
+      goods, some for trade, others on various business, had got leave from
+      Erling Skakke to depart, there was a soft and favourable wind for sailing
+      north along the coast. Before the evening all who were ready had set sail,
+      and hastened on as fast as they could, according to the speed of their
+      vessels, the one vying with the other. When this fleet came north to More,
+      Hakon's fleet had arrived there before them: and he himself was there
+      fully engaged in collecting people, and summoning to him the lendermen,
+      and all liable to serve in the levy, without having for a long time heard
+      any news from Bergen. Now, however, they heard, as the latest news, that
+      Erling Skakke had laid his ships up in Bergen, and there they would find
+      him; and also that he had a large force with him. King Hakon sailed from
+      thence to Veey, and sent away Earl Sigurd and Onund Simonson to gather
+      people, and sent men also to both the More districts. After King Hakon had
+      remained a few days at the town he sailed farther, and proceeded to the
+      South, thinking that it would both promote his journey and enable new
+      levies to join him sooner.
+      Erling Skakke had given leave on Sunday to all the merchant vessels to
+      leave Bergen; and on Tuesday, as soon as the early mass was over, he
+      ordered the warhorns to sound, summoned to him the men-at-arms and the
+      townsmen, and let the ships which were laid up on shore be drawn down into
+      the water. Then Erling held a House-Thing with his men and the people of
+      the levy; told them his intentions; named ship commanders; and had the
+      names called over of the men who were to be on board of the king's ship.
+      This Thing ended with Erling's order to every man to make himself ready in
+      his berth wherever a place was appointed him; and declared that he who
+      remained in the town after the Baekisudin was hauled out, should be
+      punished by loss of life or limb. Orm, the king's brother, laid his ships
+      out in the harbour immediately that evening, and many others, and the
+      greater number were afloat before.
+      6. OF ERLING SKAKKE.
+      On Wednesday, before mass was sung in the town, Erling sailed from Bergen
+      with all his fleet, consisting of twenty-one ships; and there was a fresh
+      breeze for sailing northwards along the coast. Erling had his son King
+      Magnus with him, and there were many lendermen accompanied by the finest
+      men. When Erling came north, abreast of the Fjord district, he sent a boat
+      on shore to Jon Halkelson's farm, and took Nikolas, a son of Simon Skalp
+      and of Maria, Harald Gille's daughter, and brought him out to the fleet,
+      and put him on board the king's ship. On Friday, immediately after matins,
+      they sailed to Steinavag, and King Hakon, with thirteen ships, was lying
+      in the harbour in the neighbourhood. He himself and his men were up at
+      play upon the island, and the lendermen were sitting on the hill, when
+      they saw a boat rowing from the south with two men in it, who were bending
+      back deep towards the keel, and taking hasty strokes with their oars. When
+      they came to the shore they did not belay the boat, but both ran from it.
+      The great men seeing this, said to each other, "These men must have some
+      news to tell;" and got up to meet them. When they met, Onund Simonson
+      asked, "Have ye any news of Erling Skakke, that ye are running so fast?"
+      They answered, as soon as they could get out the words, for they had lost
+      their breath, "Here comes Erling against you, sailing from the south, with
+      twenty-one ships, or thereabouts, of which many are great enough; and now
+      ye will soon see their sails."
+      Then said Eindride Unge, "Too near to the nose, said the peasant, when his
+      eye was knocked out."
+      They went in haste now to where the games were playing, and immediately
+      the war-horns resounded, and with the battle-call all the people were
+      gathered down to the ships in the greatest haste. It was just the time of
+      day when their meat was nearly cooked. All the men rushed to the ships,
+      and each ran on board the vessel that was nearest to him, so that the
+      ships were unequally manned. Some took to the oars; some raised the masts,
+      turned the heads of the vessels to the north, and steered for Veey, where
+      they expected much assistance from the towns.
+      7. FALL OF KING HAKON.
+      Soon after they saw the sails of Erling's fleet, and both fleets came in
+      sight of each other. Eindride Unge had a ship called Draglaun, which was a
+      large buss-like long-ship, but which had but a small crew; for those who
+      belonged to her had run on board of other ships, and she was therefore the
+      hindmost of Hakon's fleet. When Eindride came abreast of the island Sek,
+      the Baekisudin, which Erling Skakke himself commanded, came up with her;
+      and these two ships were bound fast together. King Hakon and his followers
+      had arrived close to Veey; but when they heard the war-horn they turned
+      again to assist Eindride. Now they began the battle on both sides, as the
+      vessels came up. Many of the sails lay midships across the vessels; and
+      the ships were not made fast to each other, but they lay side by side. The
+      conflict was not long before there came disorder in Hakon's ship; and some
+      fell, and others sprang overboard. Hakon threw over him a grey cloak, and
+      jumped on board another ship; but when he had been there a short time he
+      thought he had got among his enemies; and when he looked about him he saw
+      none of his men nor of his ships near him. Then he went into the
+      Baekisudin to the forecastle-men, and begged his life. They took him in
+      their keeping, and gave him quarter. In this conflict there was a great
+      loss of people, but principally of Hakon's men. In the Baekisudin fell
+      Nikolas, Simon Skalp's son; and Erling's men are accused of having killed
+      him themselves. Then there was a pause in the battle, and the vessels
+      separated. It was now told to Erling that Hakon was on board of his ship;
+      that the forecastle-men had taken him, and threatened that they would
+      defend him with arms. Erling sent men forwards in the ship to bring the
+      forecastle-men his orders to guard Hakon well, so that he should not get
+      away. He at the same time let it be understood that he had no objection to
+      giving the king life and safety, if the other chiefs were willing, and a
+      peace could be established. All the forecastle-men gave their chief great
+      credit and honour for these words. Then Erling ordered anew a blast of the
+      war-horns, and that the ships should be attacked which had not lost their
+      men; saying that they would never have such another opportunity of
+      avenging King Inge. Thereupon they all raised a war-shout, encouraged each
+      other, and rushed to the assault. In this tumult King Hakon received his
+      death-wound. When his men knew he had fallen they rowed with all their
+      might against the enemy, threw away their shields, slashed with both
+      hands, and cared not for life. This heat and recklessness, however, proved
+      soon a great loss to them; for Erling's men saw the unprotected parts of
+      their bodies, and where their blows would have effect. The greater part of
+      Hakon's men who remained fell here; and it was principally owing to the
+      want of numbers, as they were not enough to defend themselves. They could
+      not get quarter, also excepting those whom the chiefs took under their
+      protection and bound themselves to pay ransom for. The following of
+      Hakon's people fell: Sigurd Kapa, Sigurd Hiupa, and Ragnvald Kunta; but
+      some ships crews got away, rowed into the fjords, and thus saved their
+      lives. Hakon's body was carried to Raumsdal, and buried there; but
+      afterwards his brother, King Sverre, had the body transported north to the
+      merchant town Nidaros, and laid in the stone wall of Christ church south
+      of the choir.
+      8. FLIGHT OF THE CHIEFS OF HAKON'S MEN.
+      Earl Sigurd, Eindride Unge, Onund Simonson, Frirek Keina, and other chiefs
+      kept the troop together, left the ships in Raumsdal, and went up to the
+      Uplands. King Magnus and his father Erling sailed with their troops north
+      to Nidaros in Throndhjem, and subdued the country as they went along.
+      Erling called together an Eyra-thing, at which King Magnus was proclaimed
+      king of all Norway. Erling, however, remained there but a short time; for
+      he thought the Throndhjem people were not well affected towards him and
+      his son. King Magnus was then called king of the whole country.
+      King Hakon had been a handsome man in appearance, well grown, tall and
+      thin; but rather broad-shouldered, on which account his men called him
+      Herdebreid. As he was young in years, his lendermen ruled for him. He was
+      cheerful and friendly in conversation, playful and youthful in his ways,
+      and was much liked by the people.
+      9. OF KING SIGURD'S BEGINNING.
+      There was an Upland man called Markus of Skog, who was a relation of Earl
+      Sigurd. Markus brought up a son of King Sigurd Mun, who was also called
+      Sigurd. This Sigurd was chosen king (A.D. 1162) by the Upland people, by
+      the advice of Earl Sigurd and the other chiefs who had followed King
+      Hakon. They had now a great army, and the troops were divided in two
+      bodies; so that Markus and the king were less exposed where there was
+      anything to do, and Earl Sigurd and his troop, along with the lendermen,
+      were most in the way of danger. They went with their troops mostly through
+      the Uplands, and sometimes eastwards to Viken. Erling Skakke had his son
+      King Magnus always with him, and he had also the whole fleet and the land
+      defence under him. He was a while in Bergen in autumn; but went from
+      thence eastward to Viken, where he settled in Tunsberg for his winter
+      quarters (A.D. 1163), and collected in Viken all the taxes and revenues
+      that belonged to Magnus as king; and he had many and very fine troops. As
+      Earl Sigurd had but a small part of the country, and kept many men on
+      foot, he soon was in want of money; and where there was no chief in the
+      neighbourhood he had to seek money by unlawful ways, -sometimes by
+      unfounded accusations and fines, sometimes by open robbery.
+      10. EARL SIGURD'S CONDEMNATION.
+      At that time the realm of Norway was in great prosperity. The bondes were
+      rich and powerful, unaccustomed to hostilities or violence, and the
+      oppression of roving troops; so that there was soon a great noise and
+      scandal when they were despoiled and robbed. The people of Viken were very
+      friendly to Erling and King Magnus, principally from the popularity of the
+      late King Inge Haraldson; for the Viken people had always served under his
+      banner. Erling kept a guard in the town, and twelve men were on watch
+      every night. Erling had Things regularly with the bondes, at which the
+      misdeeds of Sigurd's people were often talked over; and by the
+      representations of Erling and his adherents, the bondes were brought
+      unanimously to consider that it would be a great good fortune if these
+      bands should be rooted out. Arne, the king's relation, spoke well and long
+      on this subject, and at last severely; and required that all who were at
+      the Thing, -men-at-arms, bondes, towns-men, and merchants, -should
+      come to the resolution to sentence according to law Earl Sigurd and all
+      his troop, and deliver them to Satan, both living and dead. From the
+      animosity and hatred of the people, this was agreed to by all; and thus
+      the unheard-of deed was adopted and confirmed by oath, as if a judgment in
+      the case was delivered there by the Thing according to law. The priest
+      Hroald the Long-winded, who was a very eloquent man, spoke in the case;
+      but his speech was to the same purpose as that of others who had spoken
+      before. Erling gave a feast at Yule in Tunsberg, and paid the wages of the
+      men-at-arms at Candlemas.
+      11. OF ERLING.
+      Earl Sigurd went with his best troops down to Viken, where many people
+      were obliged to submit to his superior force, and many had to pay money.
+      He drove about thus widely higher up the country, penetrating into
+      different districts. But there were some in his troop who desired
+      privately to make peace with Erling; but they got back the answer, that
+      all who asked for their lives should obtain quarter, but they only should
+      get leave to remain in the country who had not been guilty of any great
+      offenses against Erling. And when Sigurd's adherents heard that they would
+      not get leave to remain in the country, they held together in one body;
+      for there were many among them who knew for certain that Erling would look
+      upon them as guilty of offences against him. Philip Gyrdson made terms
+      with Erling, got his property back, and went home to his farm; but soon
+      after Sigurd's men came there, and killed him. They committed many crimes
+      against each other, and many men were slain in their mutual persecution;
+      but here what was committed by the chiefs only is written down.
+      12. ERLING GETS NEWS OF EARL SIGURD.
+      It was in the beginning of Lent that news came to Erling that Earl Sigurd
+      intended to come upon him; and news of him came here and there, sometimes
+      nearer, sometimes farther off. Erling sent out spies in all quarters
+      around to discover where they were. Every evening he assembled all the
+      men-at-arms by the war-horn out of the town; and for a long time in the
+      winter they lay under arms all night, ready to be drawn up in array. At
+      last Erling got intelligence that Sigurd and his followers were not far
+      distant, up at the farm Re. Erling then began his expedition out of the
+      town, and took with him all the towns-people who were able to carry arms
+      and had arms, and likewise all the merchants; and left only twelve men
+      behind to keep watch in the town. Erling went out of the town on Thursday
+      afternoon, in the second week of Lent (February 19); and every man had two
+      days' provisions with him. They marched by night, and it was late before
+      they got out of the town with the men. Two men were with each shield and
+      each horse; and the people, when mustered, were about 1200 men. When they
+      met their spies, they were informed that Sigurd was at Re, in a house
+      called Rafnnes, and had 500 men. Then Erling called together his people;
+      told them the news he had received, and all were eager to hasten their
+      march, fall on them in the houses, or engage them by night.
+      Erling replied to them thus: -"It is probable that we and Earl Sigurd
+      shall soon meet. There are also many men in this band whose handy-work
+      remains in our memories; such as cutting down King Inge, and so many more
+      of our friends, that it would take long to reckon them up. These deeds
+      they did by the power of Satan, by witchcraft, and by villainy; for it
+      stands in our laws and country rights, that however highly a man may have
+      been guilty, it shall be called villainy and cowardly murder to kill him
+      in the night. This band has had its luck hitherto by following the counsel
+      of men acquainted with witchcraft and fighting by night, and not in the
+      light of day; and by this proceeding have they been victorious hitherto
+      over the chiefs whose heads they have laid low on the earth. Now we have
+      often seen, and proved, how unsuitable and improper it is to go into
+      battle in the nighttime; therefore let us rather have before our eyes the
+      example of chiefs better known to us, and who deserve better to be
+      imitated, and fight by open day in regular battle array, and not steal
+      upon sleeping men in the night. We have people enough against them, so few
+      as they are. Let us, therefore, wait for day and daylight, and keep
+      together in our array in case they attack us."
+      Thereafter the whole army sat down. Some opened up bundles of hay, and
+      made a bed of it for themselves; some sat upon their shields, and thus
+      waited the daydawn. The weather was raw, and there was a wet snowdrift.
+      13. OF EARL SIGURD'S BATTLE ARRAY.
+      Earl Sigurd got the first intelligence of Erling's army, when it was
+      already near to the house. His men got up, and armed themselves; but not
+      knowing how many men Erling had with him, some were inclined to fly, but
+      the most determined to stand. Earl Sigurd was a man of understanding, and
+      could talk well, but certainly was not considered brave enough to take a
+      strong resolution; and indeed the earl showed a great inclination to fly,
+      for which he got many stinging words from his men-at-arms. As day dawned,
+      they began on both sides to draw up their battle array. Earl Sigurd placed
+      his men on the edge of a ridge between the river and the house, at a place
+      at which a little stream runs into the river. Erling and his people placed
+      their array on the other side of the river; but at the back of his array
+      were men on horseback well armed, who had the king with them. When Earl
+      Sigurd's men saw that there was so great a want of men on their side, they
+      held a council, and were for taking to the forest. But Earl Sigurd said,
+      "Ye alleged that I had no courage, but it will now be proved; and let each
+      of you take care not to fail, or fly, before I do so. We have a good
+      battle-field. Let them cross the bridge; but as soon as the banner comes
+      over it let us then rush down the hill upon them, and none desert his
+      neighbour."
+      Earl Sigurd had on a red-brown kirtle, and a red cloak, of which the
+      corners were tied and turned back; shoes on his feet; and a shield and
+      sword called Bastard. The earl said, "God knows that I would rather get at
+      Erling Skakke with a stroke of Bastard, than receive much gold."
+      14. EARL SIGURD'S FALL.
+      Erling Skakke's army wished to go on to the bridge; but Erling told them
+      to go up along the river, which was small, and not difficult to cross, as
+      its banks were flat; and they did so. Earl Sigurd's array proceeded up
+      along the ridge right opposite to them; but as the ridge ended, and the
+      ground was good and level over the river, Erling told his men to sing a
+      Paternoster, and beg God to give them the victory who best deserved it.
+      Then they all sang aloud "Kyrie Eleison", and struck with their weapons on
+      their shields. But with this singing 300 men of Erling's people slipped
+      away and fled. Then Erling and his people went across the river, and the
+      earl's men raised the war-shout; but there was no assault from the ridge
+      down upon Erling's array, but the battle began upon the hill itself. They
+      first used spears then edge weapons; and the earl's banner soon retired so
+      far back, that Erling and his men scaled the ridge. The battle lasted but
+      a short time before the earl's men fled to the forest, which they had
+      close behind them. This was told Earl Sigurd, and his men bade him fly;
+      but he replied, "Let us on while we can." And his men went bravely on, and
+      cut down on all sides. In this tumult fell Earl Sigurd and Jon Sveinson,
+      and nearly sixty men. Erling lost few men, and pursued the fugitives to
+      the forest. There Erling halted his troops, and turned back. He came just
+      as the king's slaves were about stripping the clothes off Earl Sigurd, who
+      was not quite lifeless. He had put his sword in the sheath, and it lay by
+      his side. Erling took it, struck the slaves with it, and drove them away.
+      Then Erling, with his troops, returned, and sat down in Tunsberg. Seven
+      days after Earl Sigurd's fall Erling's men took Eindride Unge prisoner,
+      and killed him, with all his ship's crew.
+      15. MARKUS OF SKOG, AND SIGURD SIGURDSON.
+      Markus of Skog, and King Sigurd, his foster-son, rode down to Viken
+      towards spring, and there got a ship; but when Erling heard it he went
+      eastwards against them, and they met at Konungahella. Markus fled with his
+      followers to the island Hising; and there the country people of Hising
+      came down in swarms, and placed themselves in Markus's and Sigurd's array.
+      Erling and his men rowed to the shore; but Markus's men shot at them. Then
+      Erling said to his people, "Let us take their ships, but not go up to
+      fight with a land force. The Hisingers are a bad set to quarrel with, -hard,
+      and without understanding. They will keep this troop but a little while
+      among them, for Hising is but a small spot." This was done: they took the
+      ships, and brought them over to Konungahella. Markus and his men went up
+      to the forest district, from which they intended to make assaults, and
+      they had spies out on both sides. Erling had many men-at-arms with him,
+      whom he brought from other districts, and they made attacks on each other
+      in turn.
+      16. BEGINNING OF ARCHBISHOP EYSTEIN.
+      Eystein, a son of Erlend Himaide, was selected to be archbishop, after
+      Archbishop Jon's death; and he was consecrated the same year King Inge was
+      killed. Now when Archbishop Eystein came to his see, he made himself
+      beloved by all the country, as an excellent active man of high birth. The
+      Throndhjem people, in particular, received him with pleasure; for most of
+      the great people in the Throndhjem district were connected with the
+      archbishop by relationship or other connection, and all were his friends.
+      The archbishop brought forward a request to the bondes in a speech, in
+      which he set forth the great want of money for the see, and also how much
+      greater improvement of the revenues would be necessary to maintain it
+      suitably, as it was now of much more importance than formerly when the
+      bishop's see was first established. He requested of the bondes that they
+      should give him, for determining law-suits, an ore of silver value,
+      instead of what they had before paid, which was an ore of judgment money,
+      of that kind which was paid to the king in judging cases; and the
+      difference between the two kinds of ore was, that the ore he desired was a
+      half greater than the other. By help of the archbishop's relations and
+      friends, and his own activity, this was carried; and it was fixed by law
+      in all the Throndhjem district, and in all the districts belonging to his
+      archbishopric.
+      17. OF MARKUS AND KING SIGURD.
+      When Sigurd and Markus lost their ships in the Gaut river, and saw they
+      could get no hold on Erling, they went to the Uplands, and proceeded by
+      land north to Throndhjem. Sigurd was received there joyfully, and chosen
+      king at an Eyra-thing; and many gallant men, with their sons, attached
+      themselves to his party. They fitted out ships, rigged them for a voyage,
+      and proceeded when summer came southwards to More, and took up all the
+      royal revenues wheresoever they came. At this time the following lendermen
+      were appointed in Bergen for the defence of the country: -Nikolas
+      Sigurdson, Nokve Palson, and several military leaders; as Thorolf Dryl,
+      Thorbjorn Gjaldkere, and many others. As Markus and Sigurd sailed south,
+      they heard that Erling's men were numerous in Bergen; and therefore they
+      sailed outside the coast-rocks, and southwards past Bergen. It was
+      generally remarked, that Markus's men always got a fair wind, wherever
+      they wished to sail to.
+      18. MARKUS AND KING SIGURD KILLED.
+      As soon as Erling Skakke heard that Sigurd and Markus had sailed
+      southwards, he hastened to Viken, and drew together an armed force; and he
+      soon had a great many men, and many stout ships. But when he came farther
+      in Viken, he met with a strong contrary wind, which kept him there in port
+      the whole summer. Now when Sigurd and Markus came east to Lister, they
+      heard that Erling had a great force in Viken; so they turned to the north
+      again. But when they reached Hordaland, with the intention of sailing to
+      Bergen, and came opposite the town, Nikolas and his men rowed out against
+      them, with more men and larger ships than they had. Sigurd and Markus saw
+      no other way of escaping but to row away southwards. Some of them went out
+      to sea, others got south to the sound, and some got into the Fjords.
+      Markus, and some people with him, sprang upon an isle called Skarpa.
+      Nikolas and his men took their ships, gave Jon Halkelson and a few others
+      quarter, but killed the most of them they could get hold of. Some days
+      after Eindride Heidafylja found Sigurd and Markus, and they were brought
+      to Bergen. Sigurd was beheaded outside of Grafdal, and Markus and another
+      man were hanged at Hvarfsnes. This took place on Michaelmas day (September
+      29, 1163), and the band which had followed them was dispersed.
+      19. ERLING AND THE PEOPLE OF HISING ISLE.
+      Frirek Keina and Bjarne the Bad, Onund Simonson and Ornolf Skorpa had
+      rowed out to sea with some ships, and sailed outside along the land to the
+      east. Wheresoever they came to the land they plundered, and killed
+      Erling's friends. Now when Erling heard that Sigurd and Markus were
+      killed, he gave leave to the lendermen and people of the levy to return
+      home; but he himself, with his men, set his course eastward across the
+      Folden fjord, for he heard of Markus's men there. Erling sailed to
+      Konungahella, where he remained the autumn; and in the first week of
+      winter Erling went out to the island Hising with his men, and called the
+      bondes to a Thing. When the Hising people came to the Thing, Erling laid
+      his law-suit against them for having joined the bands of Sigurd and
+      Markus, and having raised men against him. Assur was the name of one of
+      the greatest of the bondes on the island, and he answered Erling on
+      account of the others. The Thing was long assembled; but at the close the
+      bondes gave the case into Erling's own power, and he appointed a meeting
+      in the town within one week, and named fifteen bondes who should appear
+      there. When they came, he condemned them to pay a penalty of 300 head of
+      cattle; and the bondes returned home ill pleased at this sentence. Soon
+      after the Gaut river was frozen, and Erling's ships were fast in the ice;
+      and the bondes kept back the mulct, and lay assembled for some time.
+      Erling made a Yule feast in the town; but the Hising people had
+      joint-feasts with each other, and kept under arms during Yule. The night
+      after the fifth day of Yule Erling went up to Hising, surrounded Assur's
+      house, and burnt him in it. He killed one hundred men in all, burnt three
+      houses, and then returned to Konungahella. The bondes came then, according
+      to agreement, to pay the mulct.
+      20. DEATH OF FRIREK KEINA AND BJARNE.
+      Erling Skakke made ready to sail in spring as soon as he could get his
+      ships afloat for ice, and sailed from Konungahella; for he heard that
+      those who had formerly been Markus's friends were marauding in the north
+      of Viken. Erling sent out spies to learn their doings, searched for them,
+      and found them lying in a harbour. Onund Simonson and Ornolf Skorpa
+      escaped, but Frirek Keina and Bjarne the Bad were taken, and many of their
+      followers were killed. Erling had Frirek bound to an anchor and thrown
+      overboard; and for that deed Erling was much detested in the Throndhjem
+      country, for the most powerful men there were relatives of Frirek. Erling
+      ordered Bjarne the Bad to be hanged; and he uttered, according to his
+      custom, many dreadful imprecations during his execution. Thorbjorn
+      Skakkaskald tells of this business: -
+     "East of the Fjord beyond the land,
+     Unnoticed by the pirate band,
+     Erling stole on them ere they knew,
+     And seized and killed all Keina's crew.
+     Keina, fast to an anchor bound,
+     Was thrown into the deep-blue Sound;
+     And Bjarne swung high on gallows-tree,
+     A sight all good men loved to see."
+      Onund and Ornolf, with the band that had escaped, fled to Denmark; but
+      were sometimes in Gautland, or in Viken.
+      21. CONFERENCE BETWEEN ERLING AND EYSTEIN.
+      Erling Skakke sailed after this to Tunsberg, and remained there very long
+      in spring (A.D. 1164); but when summer came he proceeded north to Bergen,
+      where at that time a great many people were assembled. There was the
+      legate from Rome, Stephanus; the Archbishop Eystein, and other bishops of
+      the country. There was also Bishop Brand, who was consecrated bishop of
+      Iceland, and Jon Loptson, a daughter's son of King Magnus Barefoot; and on
+      this occasion King Magnus and Jon's other relations acknowledged the
+      relationship with him.
+      Archbishop Eystein and Erling Skakke often conversed together in private;
+      and, among other things, Erling asked one day, "Is it true, sir, what
+      people tell me, that you have raised the value of the ore upon the people
+      north in Throndhjem, in the law cases in which money-fees are paid you?"
+      "It is so," said the archbishop, "that the bondes have allowed me an
+      advance on the ore of law casualties; but they did it willingly, and
+      without any kind of compulsion, and have thereby added to their honour for
+      God and the income of the bishopric."
+      Erling replies, "Is this according to the law of the holy Olaf? or have
+      you gone to work more arbitrarily in this than is written down in the
+      lawbook?"
+      The archbishop replies, "King Olaf the Holy fixed the laws, to which he
+      received the consent and affirmative of the people; but it will not be
+      found in his laws that it is forbidden to increase God's right."
+      Erling: "If you augment your right, you must assist us to augment as much
+      the king's right."
+      The archbishop: "Thou hast already augmented enough thy son's power and
+      dominion; and if I have exceeded the law in taking an increase of the ore
+      from the Throndhjem people, it is, I think, a much greater breach of the
+      law that one is king over the country who is not a king's son, and which
+      has neither any support in the law, nor in any precedent here in the
+      country."
+      Erling: "When Magnus was chosen king, it was done with your knowledge and
+      consent, and also of all the other bishops here in the country."
+      Archbishop: "You promised then, Erling, that provided we gave our consent
+      to electing Magnus king, you would, on all occasions, and with all your
+      power, strengthen God's rights."
+      Erling: "I may well admit that I have promised to preserve and strengthen
+      God's commands and the laws of the land with all my power, and with the
+      king's strength; and now I consider it to be much more advisable, instead
+      of accusing each other of a breach of our promises, to hold firmly by the
+      agreement entered into between us. Do you strengthen Magnus in his
+      dominion, according to what you have promised; and I will, on my part,
+      strengthen your power in all that can be of advantage or honour."
+      The conversation now took a more friendly turn; and Erling said, "Although
+      Magnus was not chosen king according to what has been the old custom of
+      this country, yet can you with your power give him consecration as king,
+      as God's law prescribes, by anointing the king to sovereignty; and
+      although I be neither a king, nor of kingly race, yet most of the kings,
+      within my recollection, have not known the laws or the constitution of the
+      country so well as I do. Besides, the mother of King Magnus is the
+      daughter of a king and queen born in lawful wedlock, and Magnus is son of
+      a queen and a lawfully married wife. Now if you will give him royal
+      consecration, no man can take royalty from him. William Bastard was not a
+      king's son; but he was consecrated and crowned king of England, and the
+      royalty in England has ever since remained with his race, and all have
+      been crowned. Svein Ulfson was not a king's son in Denmark, and still he
+      was a crowned king, and his sons likewise, and all his descendants have
+      been crowned kings. Now we have here in Norway an archiepiscopal seat, to
+      the glory and honour of the country; let us also have a crowned king, as
+      well as the Danes and Englishmen."
+      Erling and the archbishop afterwards talked often of this matter, and they
+      were quite agreed. Then the archbishop brought the business before the
+      legate, and got him easily persuaded to give his consent. Thereafter the
+      archbishop called together the bishops, and other learned men, and
+      explained the subject to them. They all replied in the same terms, that
+      they would follow the counsels of the archbishop, and all were eager to
+      promote the consecration as soon as the archbishop pleased.
+      22. KING MAGNUS'S CONSECRATION.
+      Erling Skakke then had a great feast prepared in the king's house. The
+      large hall was covered with costly cloth and tapestry, and adorned with
+      great expense. The court-men and all the attendants were there
+      entertained, and there were numerous guests, and many chiefs. Then King
+      Magnus received the royal consecration from the Archbishop Eystein; and at
+      the consecration there were five other bishops and the legate, besides a
+      number of other clergy. Erling Skakke, and with him twelve other
+      lendermen, administered to the king the oath of the law; and the day of
+      the consecration the king and Erling had the legate, the archbishop, and
+      all the other bishops as guests; and the feast was exceedingly
+      magnificent, and the father and son distributed many great presents. King
+      Magnus was then eight years of age, and had been king for three years.
+      23. KING VALDEMAR'S EMBASSY.
+      When the Danish king Valdemar heard the news from Norway that Magnus was
+      become king of the whole country, and all the other parties in the country
+      were rooted out, he sent his men with a letter to King Magnus and Erling,
+      and reminded them of the agreement which Erling had entered into, under
+      oath, with King Valdemar, of which we have spoken before; namely, that
+      Viken from the east to Rygiarbit should be ceded to King Valdemar, if
+      Magnus became the sole king of Norway. When the ambassadors came forward
+      and showed Erling the letter of the Danish king, and he heard the Danish
+      king's demand upon Norway, he laid it before the other chiefs by whose
+      counsels he usually covered his acts. All, as one man, replied that the
+      Danes should never hold the slightest portion of Norway; for never had
+      things been worse in the land than when the Danes had power in it. The
+      ambassadors of the Danish king were urgent with Erling for an answer, and
+      desired to have it decided; but Erling begged them to proceed with him
+      east to Viken, and said he would give his final answer when he had met
+      with the men of most understanding and influence in Viken. The past world
+      is craters. Get it? past...world. Okay, not very funny.
+      24. ERLING AND THE PEOPLE OF VIKEN.
+      Erling Skakke proceeded in autumn to Viken, and stayed in Tunsberg, from
+      whence he sent people to Sarpsborg to summon a Thing (1) of four
+      districts; and then Erling went there with his people.
+      When the Thing was seated Erling made a speech in which he explained the
+      resolutions which had been settled upon between him and the Danish king,
+      the first time he collected troops against his enemies. "I will," said
+      Erling, "keep faithfully the agreement which we then entered into with the
+      king, if it be your will and consent, bondes, rather to serve the Danish
+      king than the king who is now consecrated and crowned king of this
+      country."
+      The bondes replied thus to Erling's speech: "Never will we become the
+      Danish king's men, as long as one of us Viken men is in life." And the
+      whole assembly, with shouts and cries, called on Erling to keep the oath
+      he had taken to defend his son's dominions, "should we even all follow
+      thee to battle." And so the Thing was dissolved.
+      The ambassadors of the Danish king then returned home, and told the issue
+      of their errand. The Danes abused Erling, and all Northmen, and declared
+      that evil only proceeded from them; and the report was spread, that in
+      Spring the Danish king would send out an army and lay waste Norway. Erling
+      returned in autumn north to Bergen, stayed there all winter, and gave
+      their pay to his people.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) This reference to a Thing of the people in the affairs of
+     the country is a striking example of the right of the Things
+     being recognised, in theory at least, as fully as the right
+     of our parliaments in later times. -L.
+      25. LETTERS OF THE THRONDHJEM PEOPLE.
+      The same winter (A.D. 1165) some Danish people came by land through the
+      Uplands, saying they were to go, as was then the general practice, to the
+      holy King Olaf's festival. But when they came to the Throndhjem country,
+      they went to many men of influence, and told their business; which was,
+      that the Danish king had sent them to desire their friendship, and
+      consent, if he came to the country, promising them both power and money.
+      With this verbal message came also the Danish king's letter and seal, and
+      a message to the Throndhjem people that they should send back their
+      letters and seals to him. They did so, and the most of them received well
+      the Danish king's message; whereupon the messengers returned back towards
+      Lent. Erling was in Bergen; and towards spring Erling's friends told him
+      the loose reports they had heard by some merchant vessels that had arrived
+      from Throndhjem, that the Throndhjem people were in hostility openly
+      against him; and had declared that if Erling came to Throndhjem, he should
+      never pass Agdanes in life. Erling said this was mere folly and idle talk.
+      Erling now made it known that he would go to Unarheim to the
+      Gangdag-thing; and ordered a cutter of twenty rowing benches to be fitted
+      out, a boat of fifteen benches, and a provision-ship. When the vessels
+      were ready, there came a strong southerly gale. On the Thursday of the
+      Ascension week, Erling called his people by sound of trumpet to their
+      departure; but the men were loath to leave the town, and were ill inclined
+      to row against the wind. Erling brought his vessels to Biskupshafn.
+      "Well," said Erling, "since ye are so unwilling to row against the wind,
+      raise the mast, hoist the sails, and let the ship go north." They did so,
+      and sailed northwards both day and night. On Wednesday, in the evening,
+      they sailed in past Agdanes, where they found a fleet assembled of many
+      merchant vessels, rowing craft, and boats, all going towards the town to
+      the celebration of the festival, -some before them, some behind them -so
+      that the townspeople paid no attention to the long-ships coming.
+      26. ERLING AND THE PEOPLE OF THRONDHJEM.
+      Erling came to the town just as vespers was being sung in Christ church.
+      He and his men ran into the town, to where it was told them that the
+      lenderman, Alf Rode, a son of Ottar Birting, was still sitting at table,
+      and drinking with his men. Erling fell upon them; and Alf was killed, with
+      almost all his men. Few other men were killed; for they had almost all
+      gone to church, as this was the night before Christ's Ascension-day. In
+      the morning early, Erling called all the people by sound of trumpet to a
+      Thing out upon Evrar. At the Thing Erling laid a charge against the
+      Throndhjem people, accusing them of intending to betray the country, and
+      take it from the king; and named Bard Standale, Pal Andreason, and
+      Razabard, who then presided over the town's affairs, and many others.
+      They, in their defence, denied the accusation; but Erling's writer stood
+      up, produced many letters with seals, and asked if they acknowledged their
+      seals which they had sent to the Danish king; and thereupon the letters
+      were read. There was also a Danish man with Erling who had gone with the
+      letters in winter, and whom Erling for that purpose had taken into his
+      service. He told to these men the very words which each of them had used.
+      "And you, Razabard, spoke, striking your breast; and the very words you
+      used were, 'Out of this breast are all these counsels produced.'" Bard
+      replied, "I was wrong in the head, sirs, when I spoke so." There was now
+      nothing to be done but to submit the case entirely to the sentence Erling
+      might give upon it. He took great sums of money from many as fines, and
+      condemned all those who had been killed as lawless, and their deeds as
+      lawless; making their deaths thereby not subject to mulct. Then Erling
+      returned south to Bergen.
+      27. KING VALDEMAR'S EXPEDITION TO NORWAY.
+      The Danish king Valdemar assembled in spring (A.D. 1165) a great army, and
+      proceeded with it north to Viken. As soon as he reached the dominions of
+      the king of Norway, the bondes assembled in a great multitude. The king
+      advanced peacefully; but when they came to the mainland, the people shot
+      at them even when there were only two or three together, from which the
+      ill-will of the country people towards them was evident. When they came to
+      Tunsberg, King Valdemar summoned a Hauga-thing; but nobody attended it
+      from the country parts. Then Valdemar spoke thus to his troops: "It is
+      evident that all the country-people are against us; and now we have two
+      things to choose: the one to go through the country, sword in hand,
+      sparing neither man nor beast; the other is to go back without effecting
+      our object. And it is more my inclination to go with the army to the East
+      against the heathens, of whom we have enough before us in the East
+      country, than to kill Christian people here, although they have well
+      deserved it." All the others had a greater desire for a foray; but the
+      king ruled, and they all returned back to Denmark without effecting their
+      purpose. They pillaged, however, all around in the distant islands, or
+      where the king was not in the neighbourhood. They then returned south to
+      Denmark without doing anything.
+      28. ERLING'S EXPEDITION TO JUTLAND.
+      As soon as Erling heard that a Danish force had come to Viken, he ordered
+      a levy through all the land, both of men and ships, so that there was a
+      great assemblage of men in arms; and with this force he proceeded eastward
+      along the coast. But when he came to Lidandisnes, he heard that the Danish
+      army had returned south to Denmark, after plundering all around them in
+      Viken. Then Erling gave all the people of the levy permission to return
+      home; but he himself and some lendermen, with many vessels, sailed to
+      Jutland after the Danes. When they came to a place called Dyrsa, the Danes
+      who had returned from the expedition lay there with many ships. Erling
+      gave them battle, and there was a fight, in which the Danes soon fled with
+      the loss of many people; and Erling and his men plundered the ships and
+      the town, and made a great booty, with which they returned to Norway.
+      Thereafter, for a time, there was hostility between Norway and Denmark.
+      29. ERLING'S EXPEDITION TO DENMARK.
+      The princess Krisfin went south in autumn (A.D. 1165) to Denmark, to visit
+      her relation King Valdemar, who was her cousin. The king received her
+      kindly, and gave her fiefs in his kingdom, so that she could support her
+      household well. She often conversed with the king, who was remarkably kind
+      towards her. In the spring following (A.D. 1166) Kristin sent to Erling,
+      and begged him to pay a visit to the Danish king, and enter into a peace
+      with him. In summer Erling was in Viken, where he fitted out a long-ship,
+      manned it with his finest lads, and sailed (a single ship) over to
+      Jutland. When he heard that the Danish king Valdemar was in Randaros,
+      Erling sailed thither, and came to the town just as the king sat at the
+      dinner-table, and most of the people were taking their meal. When his
+      people had made themselves ready according to Erling's orders, set up the
+      ship-tents, and made fast the ship, Erling landed with twelve men, all in
+      armour, with hats over their helmets, and swords under their cloaks. They
+      went to the king's lodging, where the doors stood open, and the dishes
+      were being carried in. Erling and his people went in immediately, and drew
+      up in front of the high-seat. Erling said, "Peace and safe conduct we
+      desire, king, both here and to return home."
+      The king looked at him, and said, "Art thou here, Erling?"
+      He replies, "Here is Erling; and tell us, at once, if we shall have peace
+      and safe conduct."
+      There were eighty of the king's men in the room, but all unarmed. The king
+      replies, "Peace ye shall have, Erling, according to thy desire; for I will
+      not use force or villainy against a man who comes to visit me."
+      Erling then kissed the king's hand, went out, and down to his ship. Erling
+      stayed at Randaros some time with the king, and they talked about terms of
+      peace between them and between the countries. They agreed that Erling
+      should remain as hostage with the Danish king; and that Asbjorn Snara,
+      Bishop Absalon's brother, should go to Norway as hostage on the other
+      part.
+      30. KING VALDEMAR AND ERLING.
+      In a conference which King Valdemar and Erling once had together. Erling
+      said, "Sire, it appears to me likely that it might lead to a peace between
+      the countries if you got that part of Norway which was promised you in our
+      agreement; but if it should be so, what chief would you place over it?
+      Would he be a Dane?"
+      "No," replied the king; "no Danish chief would go to Norway, where he
+      would have to manage an obstinate hard people, when he has it so easy here
+      with me."
+      Erling: "It was on that very consideration that I came here; for I would
+      not on any account in the world deprive myself of the advantage of your
+      friendship. In days of old other men, Hakon Ivarson and Fin Arnason, came
+      also from Norway to Denmark, and your predecessor, King Svein, made them
+      both earls. Now I am not a man of less power in Norway than they were
+      then, and my influence is not less than theirs; and the king gave them the
+      province of Halland to rule over, which he himself had and owned before.
+      Now it appears to me, sire, that you, if I become your man and vassal, can
+      allow me to hold of you the fief which my son Magnus will not deny me, by
+      which I will be bound in duty, and ready, to undertake all the service
+      belonging to that title."
+      Erling spoke such things, and much more in the same strain, until it came
+      at last to this, that Erling became Valdemar's man and vassal; and the
+      king led Erling to the earl's seat one day, and gave him the title of
+      earl, and Viken as a fief under his rule. Earl Erling went thereafter to
+      Norway, and was earl afterwards as long as he lived; and also the peace
+      with the Danish king was afterwards always preserved. Earl Erling had four
+      sons by his concubines. The one was called Hreidar, the next Ogmund; and
+      these by two different mothers: the third was called Fin; the fourth
+      Sigurd: these were younger, and their mother was Asa the Fair. The
+      princess Kristin and Earl Erling had a daughter called Ragnhild, who was
+      married to Jon Thorbergson of Randaberg. Kristin went away from the
+      country with a man called Grim Rusle; and they went to Constantinople,
+      where they were for a time, and had some children.
+      31. BEGINNING OF OLAF.
+      Olaf, a son of Gudbrand Skafhaug, and Maria, a daughter of King Eystein
+      Magnuson, were brought up in the house of Sigurd Agnhot in the Uplands.
+      While Earl Erling was in Denmark (A.D. 1166), Olaf and his foster-father
+      gathered a troop together, and many Upland people joined them; and Olaf
+      was chosen king by them. They went with their bands through the Uplands,
+      and sometimes down to Viken, and sometimes east to the forest settlements;
+      but never came on board of ships. Now when, Earl Erling got news of this
+      troop, he hastened to Viken with his forces; and was there in summer in
+      his ships, and in Oslo in autumn (A.D. 1167) and kept Yule there. He had
+      spies up the country after this troop, and went himself, along with Orm,
+      the King-brother, up the country to follow them. Now when they came to a
+      lake called.... .... (1) they took all the vessels that were upon the
+      lake.
+   ENDNOTES: (1) The name of the lake not given.
+      32. OF ERLING.
+      The priest who performed divine service at a place called Rydiokul, close
+      by the lake, invited the earl to a feast at Candlemas. The earl promised
+      to come; and thinking it would be good to hear mass there, he rowed with
+      his attendants over the lake the night before Candlemas day. But the
+      priest had another plan on hand. He sent men to bring Olaf news of Earl
+      Erling's arrival. The priest gave Erling strong drink in the evening, and
+      let him have an excessive quantity of it. When the earl wished to lie down
+      and sleep, the beds were made ready in the drinking-room; but when they
+      had slept a short time the earl awoke, and asked if it was not the hour
+      for matins. The priest replied, that only a small part of the night was
+      gone, and told him to sleep in peace. The earl replied, "I dream of many
+      things to-night, and I sleep ill." He slumbered again, but awoke soon, and
+      told the priest to get up and sing mass. The priest told the earl to
+      sleep, and said it was but midnight. Then the earl again lay down, slept a
+      little while, and, springing out of bed, ordered his men to put on their
+      clothes. They did so; took their weapons, went to the church, and laid
+      their arms outside while the priest was singing matins. 
+      33. BATTLE AT RYDIOKUL.
+      As Olaf got the message in the evening, they travelled in the night six
+      miles, which people considered an extraordinarily long march. They arrived
+      at Rydiokul while the priest was still singing mass, and it was
+      pitch-dark. Olaf and his men went into the room, raised a war-shout, and
+      killed some of the earl's men who had not gone to the early mass. Now when
+      Erling and his men heard the war-shout, they ran to their weapons, and
+      hastened down to their ships. Olaf and his men met them at a fence, at
+      which there was a sharp conflict. Erling and his men retreated along the
+      fence, which protected them. Erling had far fewer men, and many of them
+      had fallen, and still more were wounded. What helped Earl Erling and his
+      men the most was, that Olaf's men could not distinguish them, it was so
+      dark; and the earl's men were always drawing down to their ships. Are
+      Thorgeirson, father of Bishop Gudmund fell there, and many other of
+      Erling's court-men. Erling himself was wounded in the left side; but some
+      say he did it himself in drawing his sword. Orm the King-brother was also
+      severely wounded; and with great difficulty they escaped to their ships,
+      and instantly pushed off from land. It was generally considered as a most
+      unlucky meeting for Olaf's people, as Earl Erling was in a manner sold
+      into their hands, if they had proceeded with common prudence. He was
+      afterwards called Olaf the Unlucky; but others called his people Hat-lads.
+      They went with their bands through the Uplands as before. Erling again
+      went down to Viken to his ships, and remained there all summer. Olaf was
+      in the Uplands, and sometimes east in the forest districts, where he and
+      his troop remained all the next winter (A.D. 1168).
+      34. BATTLE AT STANGAR.
+      The following spring the Hat-lads went down to Viken, and raised the
+      king's taxes all around, and remained there long in summer. When Earl
+      Erling heard this, he hastened with his troops to meet them in Viken, and
+      fell in with them east of the Fjord, at a place called Stangar; where they
+      had a great battle, in which Erling was victorious. Sigurd Agnhot, and
+      many others of Olaf's men, fell there; but Olaf escaped by flight, went
+      south to Denmark, and was all winter (A.D. 1169) in Alaborg in Jutland.
+      The following spring Olaf fell into an illness which ended in death, and
+      he was buried in the Maria church; and the Danes call him a saint.
+      35. HARALD'S DEATH.
+      King Magnus had a lenderman called Nikolas Kufung, who was a son of Pal
+      Skaptason. He took Harald prisoner, who called himself a son of King
+      Sigurd Haraldson and the princess Kristin, and a brother of King Magnus by
+      the mother's side. Nikolas brought Harald to Bergen, and delivered him
+      into Earl Erling's hands. It was Erling's custom when his enemies came
+      before him, that he either said nothing to them, or very little, and that
+      in all gentleness, when he had determined to put them to death; or rose
+      with furious words against them, when he intended to spare their lives.
+      Erling spoke but little to Harald, and many, therefore, suspected his
+      intentions; and some begged King Magnus to put in a good word for Harald
+      with the earl; and the king did so. The earl replies, "Thy friends advise
+      thee badly. Thou wouldst govern this kingdom but a short time in peace and
+      safety, if thou wert to follow the counsels of the heart only." Earl
+      Erling ordered Harald to be taken to Nordnes, where he was beheaded.
+      36. EYSTEIN EYSTEINSON AND THE BIRKEBEINS.
+      There was a man called Eystein, who gave himself out for a son of King
+      Eystein Haraldson. He was at this time young, and not full grown. It is
+      told of him that he one summer appeared in Svithjod, and went to Earl
+      Birger Brosa, who was then married to Brigida, Eystein's aunt, a daughter
+      of King Harald Gille. Eystein explained his business to him, and asked
+      their assistance. Both Earl Birger and his wife listened to him in a
+      friendly way, and promised him their confidence, and he stayed with them a
+      while. Earl Birger gave him some assistance of men, and a good sum for
+      travelling expenses; and both promised him their friendship on his taking
+      leave. Thereafter Eystein proceeded north into Norway (A.D. 1174), and
+      when he came down to Viken people flocked to him in crowds; and Eystein
+      was there proclaimed king, and he remained in Viken in winter. As they
+      were very poor in money, they robbed all around, wherefore the lendermen
+      and bondes raised men against them; and being thus overpowered by numbers,
+      they fled away to the forests and deserted hill grounds, where they lived
+      for a long time. Their clothes being worn out, they wound the bark of the
+      birch-tree about their legs, and thus were called by the bondes
+      Birkebeins. They often rushed down upon the settled districts, pushed on
+      here or there, and made an assault where they did not find many people to
+      oppose them. They had several battles with the bondes with various
+      success; and the Birkebeins held three battles in regular array, and
+      gained the victory in them all. At Krokaskog they had nearly made an
+      unlucky expedition, for a great number of bondes and men-at-arms were
+      assembled there against them; but the Birkebeins felled brushwood across
+      the roads, and retired into the forest. They were two years (A.D.
+      1175-1176) in Viken before they showed themselves in the northern parts of
+      the country.
+      37. BIRKEBEINS, KING EYSTEIN, AND SKAKKE.
+      Magnus had been king for thirteen years when the Birkebeins first made
+      their appearance. They got themselves ships in the third summer (A.D.
+      1176), with which they sailed along the coast gathering goods and men.
+      They were first in Viken; but when summer advanced they proceeded
+      northwards, and so rapidly that no news preceded them until they came to
+      Throndhjem. The Birkebeins' troop consisted principally of hill-men and
+      Elfgrims, and many were from Thelemark; and all were well armed. Their
+      king, Eystein, was a handsome man, and with a little but good countenance;
+      and he was not of great stature, for his men called him Eystein Meyla.
+      King Magnus and Earl Erling were in Bergen when the Birkebeins sailed past
+      it to the north; but they did not hear of them.
+      Earl Erling was a man of great understanding and power, an excellent
+      leader in war, and an able and prudent ruler of the country; but he had
+      the character of being cruel and severe. The cause of this was principally
+      that he never allowed his enemies to remain in the country, even when they
+      prayed to him for mercy; and therefore many joined the bands which were
+      collected against him. Erling was a tall strong-made man, somewhat
+      short-necked and high-shouldered; had a long and sharp countenance of a
+      light complexion, and his hair became very grey. He bore his head a little
+      on one side; was free and agreeable in his manners. He wore the old
+      fashion of clothes, -long body-pieces and long arms to his coats,
+      foreign cloak, and high shoes. He made the king wear the same kind of
+      dress in his youth; but when he grew up, and acted for himself, he dressed
+      very sumptuously.
+      King Magnus was of a light turn of mind, full of jokes; a great lover of
+      mirth, and not less of women.
+      38. OF NIKOLAS.
+      Nikolas was a son of Sigurd Hranason and of Skialdvor, a daughter of
+      Brynjolf Ulfalde, and a sister of Haldor Brynjolfson by the father's side,
+      and of King Magnus Barefoot by the mother's side. Nikolas was a
+      distinguished chief, who had a farm at Ongul in Halogaland, which was
+      called Steig. Nikolas had also a house in Nidaros, below Saint Jon's
+      church, where Thorgeir the scribe lately dwelt. Nikolas was often in the
+      town, and was president of the townspeople. Skialdvor, Nikolas's daughter,
+      was married to Eirik Arnason, who was also a lenderman.
+      39. OF EIRIK AND NIKOLAS.
+      As the people of the town were coming from matins the last day of Marymas
+      (September 8th), Eirik came up to Nikolas, and said, "Here are some
+      fishermen come from the sea, who report that some long-ships are sailing
+      into the fjord; and people conjecture that these may be the Birkebeins. It
+      would be advisable to call the townspeople together with the war-horns, to
+      meet under arms out on Eyrar."
+      Nikolas replies, "I don't go after fishermen's reports; but I shall send
+      out spies to the fjord, and in the meantime hold a Thing to-day."
+      Eirik went home; but when they were ringing to high mass, and Nikolas was
+      going to church, Eirik came to hint again, and said, "I believe the news
+      to be true; for here are men who say they saw them under sail; and I think
+      it would be most advisable to ride out of town, and gather men with arms;
+      for it appears to me the townspeople will be too few."
+      Nikolas replies, "Thou art mixing everything together; let us first hear
+      mass, and then take our resolution."
+      Nikolas then went into the church. When the mass was over Eirik went to
+      Nikolas, and said, "My horses are saddled; I will ride away."
+      Nikolas replies, "Farewell, then: we will hold a Thing to-day on the
+      Eyrar, and examine what force of men there may be in the town."
+      Eirik rode away, and Nikolas went to his house, and then to dinner.
+      40. THE FALL OF NIKOLAS.
+      The meat was scarcely put on the table, when a man came into the house to
+      tell Nikolas that the Birkebeins were roving up the river. Then Nikolas
+      called to his men to take their weapons. When they were armed Nikolas
+      ordered them to go up into the loft. But that was a most imprudent step;
+      for if they had remained in the yard, the townspeople might have come to
+      their assistance; but now the Birkebeins filled the whole yard, and from
+      thence scrambled from all sides up to the loft. They called to Nikolas,
+      and offered him quarter, but he refused it. Then they attacked the loft.
+      Nikolas and his men defended themselves with bow-shot, hand-shot, and
+      stones of the chimney; but the Birkebeins hewed down the houses, broke up
+      the loft, and returned shot for shot from bow or hand. Nikolas had a red
+      shield in which were gilt nails, and about it was a border of stars. The
+      Birkebeins shot so that the arrows went in up to the arrow feather. Then
+      said Nikolas, "My shield deceives me." Nikolas and a number of his people
+      fell, and his death was greatly lamented. The Birkebeins gave all the
+      towns-people their lives.
+      41. EYSTEIN PROCLAIMED KING.
+      Eystein was then proclaimed king, and all the people submitted to him. He
+      stayed a while in the town, and then went into the interior of the
+      Throndhjem land, where many joined him, and among them Thorfin Svarte of
+      Snos with a troop of people. When the Birkebeins, in the beginning of
+      winter (A.D. 1177), came again into the town, the sons of Gudrun from
+      Saltnes, Jon Ketling, Sigurd, and William, joined them; and when they
+      proceeded afterwards from Nidaros up Orkadal, they could number nearly
+      2000 men. They afterwards went to the Uplands, and on to Thoten and
+      Hadaland, and from thence to Ringerike, and subdued the country wheresover
+      they came.
+      42. THE FALL OF KING EYSTEIN.
+      King Magnus went eastward to Viken in autumn with a part of his men and
+      with him Orm, the king's brother; but Earl Erling remained behind in
+      Bergen to meet the Berkebeins in case they took the sea route. King Magnus
+      went to Tunsberg, where he and Orm held their Yule (A.D. 1177). When King
+      Magnus heard that the Birkebeins were up in Re, the king and Orm proceeded
+      thither with their men. There was much snow, and it was dreadfully cold.
+      When they came to the farm they left the beaten track on the road, and
+      drew up their array outside of the fence, and trod a path through the snow
+      with their men, who were not quite 1500 in number. The Birkebeins were
+      dispersed here and there in other farms, a few men in each house. When
+      they perceived King Magnus's army they assembled, and drew up in regular
+      order; and as they thought their force was larger than his, which it
+      actually was, they resolved to fight; but when they hurried forward to the
+      road only a few could advance at a time, which broke their array, and the
+      men fell who first advanced upon the beaten way. Then the Birkebeins'
+      banner was cut down; those who were nearest gave way and some took to
+      flight. King Magnus's men pursued them, and killed one after the other as
+      they came up with them. Thus the Birkebeins could never form themselves in
+      array; and being exposed to the weapons of the enemy singly, many of them
+      fell, and many fled. It happened here, as it often does, that although men
+      be brave and gallant, if they have once been defeated and driven to
+      flight, they will not easily be brought to turn round. Now the main body
+      of the Birkebeins began to fly, and many fell; because Magnus's men killed
+      all they could lay hold of, and not one of them got quarter. The whole
+      body became scattered far and wide. Eystein in his flight ran into a
+      house, and begged for his life, and that the bonde would conceal him; but
+      the bonde killed him, and then went to King Magnus, whom he found at
+      Rafnnes, where the king was in a room warming himself by the fire along
+      with many people. Some went for the corpse, and bore it into the room,
+      where the king told the people to come and inspect the body. A man was
+      sitting on a bench in the corner, and he was a Birkebein, but nobody had
+      observed him; and when he saw and recognised his chief's body he sprang up
+      suddenly and actively, rushed out upon the floor, and with an axe he had
+      in his hands made a blow at King Magnus's neck between the shoulders. A
+      man saw the axe swinging, and pulled the king to a side, by which the axe
+      struck lower in the shoulder, and made a large wound. He then raised the
+      axe again, and made a blow at Orm, the King-brother, who was lying on a
+      bench, and the blow was directed at both legs; but Orm seeing the man
+      about to kill him, drew in his feet instantly, threw them over his head,
+      and the blow fell on the bench, in which the axe stuck fast; and then the
+      blows at the Birkebein came so thick that he could scarcely fall to the
+      ground. It was discovered that he had dragged his entrails after him over
+      the floor; and this man's bravery was highly praised. King Magnus's men
+      followed the fugitives, and killed so many that they were tired of it.
+      Thorfin of Snos, and a very great number of Throndhjem people, fell there.
+      43. OF THE BIRKEBEINS.
+      The faction which called itself the Birkebeins had gathered together in
+      great numbers. They were a hardy people, and the boldest of men under
+      arms; but wild, and going forward madly when they had a strong force. They
+      had few men in their faction who were good counsellors, or accustomed to
+      rule a country by law, or to head an army; and if there were such men
+      among them who had more knowledge, yet the many would only allow of those
+      measures which they liked, trusting always to their numbers and courage.
+      Of the men who escaped many were wounded, and had lost both their clothes
+      and their arms, and were altogether destitute of money. Some went east to
+      the borders, some went all the way east to Svithjod; but the most of them
+      went to Thelemark, where they had their families. All took flight, as they
+      had no hope of getting their lives from King Magnus or Earl Erling.
+      44. OF KING MAGNUS ERLINGSON.
+      King Magnus then returned to Tunsberg, and got great renown by this
+      victory; for it had been an expression in the mouths of all, that Earl
+      Erling was the shield and support of his son and himself. But after
+      gaining a victory over so strong and numerous a force with fewer troops,
+      King Magnus was considered by all as surpassing other leaders, and that he
+      would become a warrior as much greater than his father, Earl Erling, as he
+      was younger.